VOL. XLVII, NO, 553 JANUARY, 1913
THE
AMERICAN
NATURALIST
A MONTHLY JOURNAL
Devoted to the Advancement of the Biological Sciences with
Special Reference to the Factors of Evolution
CONTENTS
Page
Factors and Unit Characters in Mendelian Heredity. Professor T. H. MORGAN 6&
m
Vertical Distribution of the Chætognatha of the San Diego Region in Relation
to the Question of Isolation vs. Coincidence. ELLIS L, MICHAEL ~ -1
H
Ill. A Family of Spotted Negroes. Q.I. Simpson and Professor W. E. CASTLE ~ 50
The Effect of Fertilizers on Variation in Corn and Beans, Professor J. K. SHaw 57
d
THE SCIENCE PRESS A
LANCASTER, PA. GARRISON, N. ¥.
NEW YORE: SUB-STATION 84
The American
Naturalist
intended for publication and books, etc., intended for review should be
MSS.
sent to the sated of THE AMERICAN NATURALIST,
Garrison-on-Hudson, New York.
containing research work bearing on the problems Borba, organic evolu-
tion are eepecially welcome, and will
e given preference in publica
ndrea ha sige of contributions are supplied to authors free of charge.
One hu
Further reprints will be s
THE SCIENCE PRESS
NEW YORK: Sub-Station 84
Entered as second-class matter, April 2, 1908, at the Post Office at Lancaster, Pa., under the Act ot
ongress of March 3, 1879.
Lancaster, Pa.
Garrison, N. Y.
FOR SALE
ARCTIC, ae and GREENLAND
D8’ SKIN
Well Prepared pa Prices
articulars of
G. DIN NESEN. Bird Collecto
Husavik, North idaland: Via Leidle, England
TENTH EDITION.
THE MICROSCO PE,
1 to Microscopic Methods and to Histology,
by SIMON poprad GAGE, of Cornell University. Over
la and above fig in this new
and fully ion. Price $2.00, postpaid.
COMSTOCK PUBLISHING CO., Ithaca, N. Y.
Reptiles, Amphibians
and Fishes
W. F. H. ROSENBERG,
57, Haverstock Hill, London, N. W.,
England
begs to announce the publication of a new Price List
(No. 15) of Reptiles, Batrachians and Fishes contain-
ing over 400 species from all parts of the World. This
Catalogue is conveniently arranged for reference,
with authors’ names and indications of localities, It
will be sent post free on application as will the
following lists :
No. 11, Birds’ Skins, (5,000 species); No. 12, Le-
ppidotera, (5,000 species) ; No. 13, Coleoptera ; No.
14, Mammals; No. 15, Birds’ Eggs. Also list of Cabi-
nets, Collecting Apparatus, etc.
stock in the world of specimens in all
branches of Zoology.
Please state which lists are required.
University of Colorado
Mountain Laboratory
Courses in Field Biology (animal and
plant), Ecology, Systematic Botany, Bi-
ology of Ponds and Streams. Suitable
work for undergraduates and graduates.
Daily Field excursions.
The laboratory is at Tolland, Colo., in
the Rocky Mountains at an altitude of
8,889 feet. Climate cool and healthful.
Fees and expenses moderate.
For pamphlet address the professor in
charge.
Dr. Francis Ramaley
University of Colorado
BOULDER COLORADO
THE AMERICAN NATURALIST
THE i
AMERICAN NATURALIST
A MONTHLY JOURNAL
DEVOTED TO THE ADVANCEMENT OF THE BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES
WITH SPECIAL REFERENCE TO THE FACTORS OF EVOLUTION
VOLUME XLVII
NEW YORK
THE SCIENCE PRESS
19t3
THE
AMERICAN NATURALIST
VoL. XLVII January, 1913 No. 553
FACTORS AND UNIT CHARACTERS IN MEN-
DELIAN HEREDITY
PROFESSOR T. H. MORGAN
COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY
Tae factorial hypothesis has played an important rôle
in Mendelian heredity, and while students of Mendel’s
principles have had on the whole a pretty clear idea of
the sense or senses in which they have made use of factors
or symbols, yet those not engaged in the immediate work
itself have, I believe, often been misled in regard to the
meaning attached to the term factor, and by the assumed
relation between a factor and a unit character. The con-
fusion is due to a tendency, sometimes unintentional, to
speak of a unit character as the product of a particular
unit factor acting alone, but this identification has no real
basis. It has, in fact, more than once been repudiated,
yet the confusion has been so persistent that I venture to
try to make clear my own position at least—it is one I
think with which in the main many students of heredity
will agree—in regard to the relation between unit-factors
and unit-characters. I shall do this by means of several
examples taken from my breeding experiments with the
fly, Drosophila ampelophila.
The eye of tbis fly is red. A mutant arose with a ver-
milion eye. Crossed to the wild or red-eyed fly, the new
color proved to be a Mendelian recessive.
5
cc
THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
According to the scheme that Mendel followed, red, R,
and vermilion, V, are symbolized as complete and con-
trasting characters carried by the germ-plasm of the
hybrid. They are assumed to separate in the germ-cells,
and as a consequence two kinds of these cells are pro-
duced.
According to a more modern interpretation, known as
the presence and absence theory, vermilion is supposed
to arise through the loss of something from the germ-
plasm of the wild fly. This something is not supposed to
be the factor for vermilion, but another factor. On this
scheme the red eye would be represented by the letters
RV, and the vermilion eye by rV ; as though the vermilion
color arose through the loss of a red factor.
The relative advantages of these two modes of repre-
sentation become apparent when two pairs of factors are
involved. For instance, a new eye color—pink—ap-
peared as a mutant. It, also, was recessive to red.
Mendel’s scheme would make the pink character the mate
of the red character, just as vermilion had been before.
But if pink and vermilion were mated to each other, it is
not clear whether vermilion and pink should be treated
as contrasted characters, or whether each should still be
treated as allelomorphic to red. If either of these alter-
natives is adopted, the scheme fails to account for what
actually happens. Mendel did not meet with such a situa-
tion, for none of his paired characters involved two
changes in kind in the same organ, and consequently the
problem did not exist for him.
Bateson did meet with just this situation in the case of
the comb of fowls and the coat color of mice. His’scheme,
if applied to the present case of the eye colors in Droso-
phila, would be to represent red by RV, vermilion by rV,
and pink by Rv. This scheme illustrates first why when
vermilion is bred to pink a red-eyed fly, rVRv, should
result; second, why in the second generation the propor-
tion 9:3:3:1 should appear;! and third why in the eye
* Except in so far as modified by sex-linkage.
No. 553] MENDELIAN HEREDITY $
color series a new color is expected in the F, generation,
represented here by rv. This new color I called orange,
and since rv only meant two absences, I followed the con-
ventional method and added the symbol O to stand for
orange. The completed formulæ were :
RVO red
rVO vermilion
RvO pink
rvO orange
This is identical with the scheme that Bateson adopted
for the mouse color series, viz:
GBCh gray
gBCh black
GbCh cinnamon
gbCh chocolate
In a later paper (1912) I used the symbol P instead of
R, so that the series stood:
PVO red
pVO vermilion
PvO pink
pvO orange
Let us now examine some of the possible interpreta-
tions of these symbols to see in what sense the letters
were used for factors.
It is undoubtedly implied, on the presence and absence
scheme, that something is lost from the original germ-
plasm PVO when the vermilion pVO arises. The ver-
milion color is supposed to be the product of what is left
when this something (called P) is lost. It is not sup-
posed on this hypothesis that the vermilion factor alone
is responsible for the vermilion color, for it is hypothet-
ically only a part of what is left when something (P) is
lost. Yet it is the identification of the vermilion factor
with the vermilion eye-color that the opponents of Men-
delism seem anxious to impute to the Mendelians.
8 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST. [Vou. XLVII
Again, when the pink eye mutant appeared, it would
have been assumed, on the presence and absence theory,
that something was lost, so that the formula is Pv0O.
Here again the pink color is the result of all that is left
when something (V) is lost. Pink is not assumed to be
produced by a factor P, but by what is left when a factor
V is lost. An egg is supposed to have lost something and
vermilion developed, another egg is assumed to have lost
something else and pink developed. It was the loss of the
vermilion factor that allowed pink color to develop, and
the loss of the pink factor that allowed vermilion color to
develop. When pink and vermilion are mated together,
the original color—red—is restored, because on this
_ scheme what each has lost is made good by what is found
in the other.
To my series of eye color factors the letter O was
added to indicate the nature of the color produced when
two factors, P and V, were assumed to be absent. The
symbol O at that time did not seem to stand in the formu-
læ on the same footing as P and V, because it stood for a
color, and not for a factor that had been lost from the
germ-cells of the wild fly. But since on the presence and
absence scheme O stood for the residuum after P and V
were lost it stood for the same sort of thing as did P and
V, for P and V also stood for residua, when they were not
used as symbols for factors. This will be made clearer
later.
When the experiments had progressed to this stage, a
new eye color appeared that was called eosin. Mated to
orange it gave red; therefore, it seemed that this mutant
must have contained P and V, and I inferred that it owed
its color to the loss of an imaginary O factor. Eosin was
represented, therefore, by PVo. But a moment’s thought
will show that on this scheme, as long as P and V are
present, any loss from the germ-plasm (giving a new eye
color) added to orange should give red, because orange
would contain what the new mutant had lost.
The history of this case will show how, with the best of
No. 553] MENDELIAN HEREDITY 9
intentions, one may be led into a paradoxical position in
regard to the use of factors. Even admiting that the rep-
resentation is purely symbolic, the letters used may unin-
tentionally come to stand for different things. Thus in
` the case first cited, the letter P in the formula vP stood
for a residuum that gave pink, but in the formula Vp, the
letter p stood for the loss of a P-factor, yet p is the allelo-
morph of P, which latter, as stated, meant the residuum
when V was lost. In other words, a double meaning was
attached to P, for it stood both for the P-factor, which was
only a part of the residuum, and also for the residuum as
a whole. It is this doubleness of meaning that gives the
opponents of Mendelian inheritance an occasion to im-
pose upon the factorial hypothesis a meaning that is
really foreign to it. Admitting that the Mendelians them-
selves have not always taken the pains to state explicitly
that the symbols represent both a factor and a residuum,
there is still little or no justification in imputing to the
presence and absence theory the view that a given char-
acter, pink color, for instance, is the product of a pink
factor alone. The attempt to impute to the factorial
hypothesis the same interpretation that Weismann made
use of in his theory of determinants rests largely upon an
erroneous understanding of the symbolism employed.
Weismann identifies each character of the organism as
the product of a special determinant. The factorial
hypothesis assumes only that the cell in one case is differ-
ent from the cell in the other, the difference relating, it is
true, to some part, but the character produced may be the
result of the whole or of much of the cell, and not of one
part alone.
There is a further difference between these two points
of view. A change in a factor may have far-reaching
consequences. Every part of the organization capable of
reacting to the new change is affected. Though we seize
upon the most conspicuous difference between the old
type and its mutant, and make use of this alone, every
student of heredity is familiar with cases where more
10 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
than the part taken as the index is affected. Weismann’s
theory, on the other hand, seems as a rule to identify each
character with a special determinant for that character,
and his meaning is clear when it is remembered that the
process of development on Weismann’s view is a process ;
of sorting out of the determiners of the germ-plasm into
different regions of the body. The factorial hypothesis
makes no such assumption, but refers differentiation to
the interaction of the parts on each other—every cell
retaining the full complex of the original germ-plasm.
Hence the possibility of the far-reaching effects of any
change in the germ-plasm!
II
The presence and absence system of nomenclature
(aside from its implications as to what is meant by pres-
ence and absence) has till the present time justified itself,
when properly interpreted, by its usefulness. It seems
to me that as a system of nomenclature it may be used, if
one so desires, quite apart from the idea, that a loss in
a character involves necessarily a loss in the germ-plasm.
I can bring forward one clear case at least that seems to
me difficult to explain if absence is taken literally to mean
the loss of a factor from the germ complex. I refer to a
mutation ‘‘backwards,’’ which in the older terminology
meant reversion, or atavism.? In my pure cultures (at
rare intervals) individuals have appeared like the orig-
inal progenitors of the stock. I have not serupled to put
aside this evidence, because contamination, even with
extreme care, will occasionally occur; and even if a rever-
sion had occurred there would be no way of proving that
it was such and not contamination. In fact, eosin first
appeared in white-eyed stock and seemed to arise through
reversion, but at the same time it seemed so improbable
that this could happen that I tried to account for its ap-
pearance in a roundabout way. Now I should say that
the factor w reverted to W.
It is needless to add, perhaps, that atavism by recombination is not
here for a moment brought into question.
No. 553] MENDELIAN HEREDITY 11
But the clear case referred to above is the following:
Quite recently there appeared in a culture bottle that had
been producing for more than four months (probably for
twelve generations) only wingless flies, an individual with
one ‘‘wingless’’ wing and one normal wing on the other
side. Here the evidence is conclusive that reversion had
occurred. The wingless stock in which the asymmetrical
form arose had purple eyes and the same eye color was
present in the new type. As the eye color was relatively
new at the time the chance that contamination had oc-
curred was rendered very unlikely. Had contamination
by a red-eyed fly occurred, making the new type a hetero-
zygote, the eye color would have been the dominant red.
When the asymmetrical fly (g) was bred to wingless
females only wingless flies appeared, for three or more
generations. The reversion, therefore, was somatic and
did not involve the germ-plasm, yet this fact does not
invalidate the question here raised.
In the light of this evidence, as well as the evidence
from ever-sporting varieties (that may also be consid-
ered, I think, as mutatingand reverting as regular proc-
esses), I believe it unwise to commit ourselves any longer
to a view that a recessive character is necessarily the
result of a loss from the germ-cell. We need only assume
that some readjustment occurs, and as the result a new
factor is produced. A simile may make this clearer, if
not taken too literally. If we suppose that a factor is a
labile aggregate, and that a rearrangement in it occurs,
then the new aggregate in connection with the other parts
of the cell produces a character that differs from the old
one. Here there need be no loss, but only a change in
configuration with a corresponding change in the end
product in which the changed part plays a role, along
with the other parts of the cell. A factor, in this sense,
may exist in two or more forms according to the state
of equilibrium; one of its states is dominant-producing,
and the other is recessive-producing. Such a view may
make it easier for us to appreciate that a mutation need
12 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
not be a loss, and that a recessive may revert in the sense
that it may mutate. In chemical terms, the process is
reversible.
III
As I have pointed out, the presence and absence nomen-
clature, if properly understood, offers no practical diffi-
culties so long as only two changes in the same organ are
involved, but in experiments with Drosophila we have
passed beyond this stage and must have at command a
system by means of which more than two factors may be
easily and conveniently represented. How impossible it
becomes to use the presence and absence nomenclature
when new characters are appearing may be shown by the
following illustrations.
As already stated, Mendel’s method of representing
the allelomorphic pairs sufficed so long as one new char-
acter is contrasted with the original one. In this sense
the relation of a vermilion-eyed mutant to the red-eyed
fly could be fully represented by treating red (R) and
vermilion (V) as allelomorphs. But when another muta-
tion in eye color appeared the scheme was no longer fea-
sible. Now, in the same sense in which it became neces-
sary to supplant Mendel’s scheme by another one, it be-
comes necessary to change the presence and absence
scheme when a third mutation appears in the same organ;
for, the presence and absence scheme is not sufficiently
elastic to allow the introduction of a new term in the
series, unless a complete revision of the method is made
each time that a new mutation in kind occurs.
For example, when it becomes desirable to.compare the
eosin eye with the vermilion-pink (or orange eye already
known) it becomes puzzling to know what symbols to
adopt. If, as I assumed, the symbol O in VPO is changed
to small o, then the formula for eosin becomes VPo. But
this is inconsistent with the scheme already adopted be-
cause the small letter o stands for a character called
eosin. If to avoid this ambiguity a letter E (or e) is in-
troduced for eosin the situation is even more puzzling.
No. 553] MENDELIAN HEREDITY 13
The only logical method that could be followed, if an
attempt is made to apply consistently the current scheme
of presence and absence? would be the following:
When it becomes necessary to construct a series, let us
say one involving three characters (PVE), the three
double recessives (Pve, pVe, pvE) must be made up and
suitable names given to them, the initial letters of these
names then become the factors sought. Such a procedure
not only involves holding in suspense the naming of the
factors until all the double recessives have been obtained,
but involves renaming all the factors, each time a new
series is made up.t This method is not likely to recom-
mend itself if a simpler one can be employed. The plan
here advocated avoids such difficulties.
The first letter (or the first and second or some other
significant letter) of thename of the new character stands,
as heretofore, as its symbol; thus P stands for the pink
factor and small p stands for the correlative factor of the
pink-eyed fly. Whether small p represents the loss of the
P factor, or a change in that factor when the pink eye
appears, is immaterial. The large letter represents the
dominant character in conformity with the current
scheme.” The eye color series will then be:
Red PVE
Vermilion PvE
Pink pVE
Vermilion-pink pvE
Eosin PVe
Eosin-vermilion Pve
EKosin-pink pVe
Kosin-pink-vermilion pve
3It is the nomenclature that is here brought into question and not, for
the moment, the underlying conception of presence and absence, for even in
my scheme this conception might still be held if it seemed desirable to do so.
‘When, as in the case of the mouse colors, all the members of the series
are known, there is no difficulty in finding suitable symbols, for the current
names of the characters give the letters for the symbols.
5 When a new dominant character appears it is represented by the capital
letter and its allelomorph in the original form by a small letter.
14 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
The same scheme might be followed by using the small
letters for the factors in the original red eye: thus red =
pve; and the capital letter for the corresponding factor
in the mutant ; thus, vermilion — pVe,ete. A disadvantage
of this scheme is that the large letter now stands for a
recessive condition and the small letter (its allelomorph)
for a dominant condition. Usage has, however, made us
accustomed to interpreting a large letter as a dominant,
its corresponding recessive (its allelomorph) by a small
letter and therefore the plan first suggested seems more
desirable. It is with much reluctance that I suggest this
change in our present nomenclature. It has become nec-
essary, however, in the case of the Drosophila to find
some way to represent consistently those cases in which
three or more factors are involved in the same organ.
The change is not one of any theoretical importance, but
a practical necessity for all cases of this kind. When one
new character is contrasted with the original one, Men-
del’s way may still be the simplest and easiest way of
formulating the results, and will, no doubt, be followed.
When two new characters are involved the formula of
presence and absence is a sufficient way of representing
the symbols. But when new mutations are appearing
some other plan must be adopted. The one here sug-
gested has at least two merits: it is as easy to use as
either of the foregoing for one and for two characters,
and can also be utilized when any number of further
mutations appear in the same organ.
The scheme applied to body colors is as follows: Two
mutants arose, yellow and black, and by recombination, a
‘*hrown’’ or yellow-black fly was obtained. The symbols
would be wild fly—=YYBB, yellow—yyBB, blackYYbb,
and yellow-black yybb. Two other mutations in body
color have appeared, both dark, one is called ebony, eb
and the other sable, s. When brought in connection with
the preceding mutation the gametie symbols would be:
Wild fly YBE.S
Yellow yBES
No. 553] MENDELIAN HEREDITY 15
Black YbEW
Yellow-black ybE.S
“Ebony YBe.S
Sable YBE.LWS
Ete.
Another combination is represented by certain wing mu-
tations. A mutant called miniature appeared and may be
represented by m; another mutant appeared, called rudi-
mentary, and may be represented by r; and a third form,
produced by recombination, was called miniature-rudi- —
mentary, mr. The symbols for this series would be:
Wild fly MR
Miniature mR
Rudimentary Mr
Rud.-min. mr
Later several other mutations in wings also appeared.
Six of these may be selected for illustration, viz: Vestigial,®
va; Bifid, bi; Are, ar; Curved, cv; Jaunty, 7; Balloon, ba.
If these are brought into connection with the foregoing
the symbols for the wild fly in terms of these factors
would be:
Wild Ny ==, R, Vo, Bi, Ár, O, J. Be:
In order to study the relation of these characters to
each other it has become necessary to combine many of
them and in order to represent the results some system
of symbols must be adopted. Obviously, it would be
highly undesirable to be obliged to revise the system each
time that any of these new mutations are brought into
relation with those that have already been compared.
It may be asked, why may not the current scheme be
retained, since in most cases only two characters are
likely to be involved and characters can always be con-
trasted in pairs on this scheme? The answer is that more
€ This is the wingless fly of former papers.
$
16 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou XLVII
characters in the same organ have already been obtained,
and it is at least as important to have a scheme by which
they can be represented as it is to have a scheme where
two characters only are studied. Moreover, the more
characters that are obtained that show association in
inheritance the further we may hope to go in our analysis
of the consitution of the germ-plasm, which is admittedly
the fundamental problem in the study of heredity. We
must have some convenient way of representing the
symbols in order to carry out this analysis, and on the
grounds of convenience alone some scheme other than the
current one must be found, at least for such a case as this
of Drosophila. Another scheme has, in fact, been adopted
by Baur and Hagedoorn. The letters that stand for the
factors bear no relation to the name of the characters in-
volved. This scheme allows the addition of any number
of new factors to a series under consideration. In prac-
tise, however, this plan makes it extremely difficult to
~~ understand what any formula means without continual
reference to the key of symbols used. We have found in
practise that the scheme is so puzzling when several
factors are under consideration that we have been led to
follow the current method of representing each factor by
the initial letter (or other suggestive letters) of the char-
acter that it stands for. Except in this regard the method
of formulation here suggested is similar in principle to
the A.B.C. scheme of Baur.
VERTICAL DISTRIBUTION OF THE CHATOG-
NATHA OF THE SAN DIEGO REGION IN
RELATION TO THE QUESTION OF
ISOLATION VS. COINCIDENCE
ELLIS L. MICHAEL
Scripps INSTITUTION FOR BIOLOGICAL RESEARCH OF THE UNIVERSITY
oF CALIFORNIA, LA JOLLA, CAL.
INTRODUCTION
Ever since Jordan (’05) called attention to the almost
universal neglect of Moritz Wagner’s contention that
geographical isolation is an important factor in the for-
mation of species, ‘‘Jordan’s Law’’ (’05, p. 547) that
‘‘oiven any species in any region, the nearest related
species is not likely to be found in the same region nor
in a remote region, but in a neighboring district sepa-
rated from the first by a barrier of some sort,’’ has been
subject to much controversy and diversity of opinion.
The conclusions of those biologists dealing with land
fauna have, as a rule, emphasized the fact of isolation,
whereas those of the marine biologist have tended to
emphasize the fact of coincidence, or at least to doubt
the truth of isolation. It is therefore part of the busi-
ness of the marine biologist, through whose investiga-
tions new and important data have been accumulated, to
throw as much light as possible upon the problems of
isolation and coincidence. This is particularly true with
regard to data concerning the Chetognatha because, as
pointed out by Kofoid (’07), the group is exclusively
marine and pelagic, and so completely circumscribed as
to make it probable that their entire evolution has taken
place within the confines of the open sea.
At the outset, the fundamental differences in the prob-
lem with reference to land and marine fauna must be
emphasized. Kofoid (’07, p. 241) has pointed out that
17
18 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
‘barriers are far less in evidence in the environment of
the pelagic fauna than in that of the shore or of the
land,” and that, while there do exist ‘‘limited regions
along the margins of great ocean currents’’ which might
afford means of hydrographic isolation, changes in
hydrographic conditions such as temperature, density,
substances in solution, illumination, etc., are so grad-
ual that stratified areas do not exist to any large extent.
Furthermore, land faunas are segregated into neigh-
boring or remote areas almost entirely with reference to
latitude and longitude. With pelagic faunas this is not
necessarily, perhaps not usually, the case, for a third
dimension—depth—is involved. It therefore follows
that closely related pelagic organisms may be coinci-
dently distributed as regards latitude and longitude, and
still be completely isolated in their vertical distribution.
This fact signifies that data respecting the isolation of
a pelagic fauna will be wholly inadequate unless the ver-
tical distribution of the particular species or group
under consideration be capable of determination and
analysis. In his discussion of ‘‘the coincident distribu-
tion of related species of pelagic organisms as illustrated
by the Chetognatha’’ Kofoid (’07), while recognizing
the force of this point, has utilized data pertaining al-
most exclusively to latitude and longitude. This was
consequent upon no lack of appreciation on his part of
the real problem involved, but solely to the fact that the
necessary data were missing. Moreover, what little has
been previously discovered relative to the vertical dis-
tribution of this group was based upon observations
scattered over such large areas as to make any approach
to critical analysis of the problem of isolation almost
impossible. However, through the efforts of the San
Diego Marine Biological Station, a mass of data has been
collected which enables an entirely new light to be
thrown upon this problem.
Since 1904 this station has centered its collecting upon
an irregular area of about 30 square miles lying be-
No. 553] DISTRIBUTION OF THE CHASTOGNATHA 19
tween 32° 20’ and 33° 30’ N., and between the coast and
119° W. From this small area 68,962 specimens com-
prising ten species of Ohetognatha have been collected,
and, as all depths between the surface and 350 fathoms
have been examined with horizontal closing nets, the
depth from which each specimen was obtained is known
with the nearest approach to certainty permitted by any
known method of collecting. As a critical analysis of
this data has been published elsewhere [see Michael
(711)] reference must be made to that paper for the
methods, problems and details involved in determining
the vertical distribution of each species, so that, in the
following pages, only the fruits of that research bear-
ing directly upon the present subject-matter will be dis-
cussed. It will be shown (1) that of the most closely
related ‘‘couplets’’ of species only one has been taken
from the San Diego region, (2) that, of those species oc-
curring in this region, each has its own definite and
specific manner of vertical distribution, (3) that the most
diverse species (morphologically) have the most coinci-
dent vertical distribution, and (4) that, while several
species have sometimes been taken in the same haul,
rarely more than one was represented by sexually ma-
ture individuals.
RELATIONSHIPS BETWEEN THE SPECIES OF CH#TOGNATHA
Adopting Ritter-Zahony’s (’11b) careful revision of
the Chetognatha as our starting point, the group be-
comes separable into six genera, Sagitta, Pterosagitta,
Spadella, Eukrohnia, Heterokrohnia and Krohnitta.
Sagitta is represented by eighteen valid and four rather
doubtful species, Pterosagitta is represented by one,
Spadella by one, Eukrohnia by two, Heterokrohnia by
one and Krohnitta by two.
Now the eighteen valid species of Sagitta fall into two
sharply contrasted groups by virtue of the presence or
absence of a collarette which is a conspicuous thickening
of the epidermis posterior to the head. Ten species are
20 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
provided with this structure, while in eight it is entirely
missing. The species comprising each group are listed
below: 7
Species with Collarette Species without Collarette
S. bipunctata S. enflata
S. decipiens S. hexaptera
S. neglecta S. lyra
S. regularis S. gazelle
S. ferox S. serratodentata
S. planktonis ; S. bedoti
S. hispida (robusta Doncaster) S. elegans
S. tenuis S. macrocephala
S. pulchra
S. siboge
Those species having the collarette may be further
separated into diverse groups by means of the following
main characteristics: (1) Those in which the body is
transparent as contrasted with those in which it is
opaque, (2) those in which the collarette extends to the
ventral ganglion as contrasted with those in which it never
extends more than half way to the ganglion, (3) those
in which the anterior fin extends to the ventral gang-
lion as contrasted to those in which it does not, (4) those
having more than 50 per cent. of the posterior fin in
front of the tail-septum as contrasted with those having
more than 50 per cent. of the fin behind the tail-septum,
and (5) those in which the anterior fin is shorter than
the posterior fin as contrasted with those in which the pos-
terior fin is the shorter. Let it not be thought that these
are the only characteristics used to differentiate the
various species of Sagitta provided with the collarette.
Far from it! Many others of great specific importance
are made use of, but, if classified according to those just
enumerated, the most closely related ‘‘couplets’’ remain
inseparable while those species not so closely related are
readily separated from each other. This may be graph-
ically represented by arranging these five pairs of con-
trasted characteristics into a series of ‘‘rows’’ and
No. 553]
DISTRIBUTION OF THE CHÆTOGNATHA
21
‘‘columns’’ and then writing the names of the species,
having those in question in each square made by the
Such an arrangement is given
intersecting ‘‘arrays.’’
below:
TABLE I.
More than 50 Per | Less than 50 Per | Anterior Fin | Anterior Fin
Cent. of Posterior | Cent. of Posterior | Shorter than Longer than
Fin in Front of Fin in Front 0 Posterior Posterior
Tail-septu m Tail-septum | Fin Fin
|
| |
Body trans- S. bipunctata | S. tenuis | S. bipunctata | S. pulchra
parent. S. decipiens | S. decipiens
S. pulchra | | S. tenuis
Body opaque. S. planktonis | S. neglecta | 8. neglecta | S. planktonis
S. siboge S. regularis | S. regularis |S. ferox
| S. ferox | S. hispida | S. siboge
| S. hispida | |
Collarette ex- S. planktonis | S. neglecta | s. neglecta |S. ferox
tending to ven- S. regularis | S. regularis | S. planktonis
tral ganglion S. ferox | |
| l
oo eet ex-| S. bipunctata | S. hispida | S. bipunctata | S. pulchra
tendin S. decipiens S. tenuis | S. decipiens | S. siboge
alf tind ton ven-| 8S. hra | S. hispida |
tral ganglion. _tral ganglion. | S. siboge | S. tenuis |
| L
T fin ex- = S. planktonis | S. neglecta | S. neglecta |8. ferox
ding to ven-; 5S. pulchra S. regularis | S. regularis | S. i
ser ganglion S. siboge S. ferox 8. tenuis | S. 8
S. tenuis |S. od 5c
Anterior fin not) „S. bipunctata | S. hispida S. bipunctata |
extending to S. decipiens | S. decipiens |
ganglion, | S. hispida |
An examination of this table shows that in every
square where S. bipunctata occurs there also S, decipiens
is found, and the same relation holds between S. ne-
glecta and S. regularis. These four species, then, are to
be regarded as constituting two very closely related
‘‘couplets.’?? A third ‘‘couplet,’? whose constituent
Species are somewhat less closely related, is that of S.
ferox and 8. planktonis, which only differ in the propor-
tional extent of the posterior fin in front of the tail-
septum. The remaining species are clearly distinct.
Turning attention to those Sagitta devoid of the col-
larette, S. enflata, S. hexaptera, S. lyra, S. gazelle and
S. bedoti are exceedingly transparent, while S. serrato-
22 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou XLVII
dentata, S. elegans and S. macrocephala are opaque.
While the three opaque species are unmistakably dis-
tinct, we find that, in the transparent group, S. enflata
and S. hexaptera form one closely related ‘‘couplet’’
while S. lyra and S. gazelle make another. This is shown
more clearly below:
TABLE II.
Anterior and
Posterior Fin Ex- Posterior Fin Anterior Fin | Posterior Fins
tends Caudally to | Never Extends to | Confluent with pahi y Sepa
Seminal Vesicles | Seminal Vesicles Posterior Fin rated by an
Interval
More than 50 per! S. lyra S. enflata S. lyra S. enflata
cent. of pos- S. gazelle S. hexaptera S. gazelle S. hexaptera
terior fin in
front of tail-
septum.
S. bedoti S. bedoti
Less than 50 per
os-
teri n
front of tail-
septum.
All told, then, we have in the genus Sagitta five closely
related ‘‘couplets’’ of species. It is not to be presumed
that every ‘‘couplet’’ expresses the same degree of close-
ness between its two members, for such is not the ease.
Unquestionably the two species most closely related are
S. neglecta and S. regularis, and the two least so—S.
ferox and S. planktonis. Now if we list these ‘‘couplets’’
in one column and the species so far taken from the San
Diego region in another, the interesting fact is evident
that, except in one case, the San Diego Sagitta contain
only one species of each ‘‘couplet.’’ Such lists are given
below.
San Diego Sagitta “Couplets”
S. neglecta S. neglecta-S. regularis
S. bipunctata S. bipunctata-S. decipiens
S. lyra S. gazelle-S. lyra
S. enflata S. enflata-S. hexaptera
S. hexaptera
S. planktonis S. planktonis-S. ferox
S. serratodentata
No. 553] DISTRIBUTION OF THE CHÆTOGNATHA 23
Looking to the other genera we find Eukrohnia com-
posed of two species (E. hamata and E. fowleri), Kroh-
nitta of two (K. subtilis and K. pacifica), and Hetero-
krohnia, Pterosagitta and Spadella of one each. Now
E. hamata and E. fowleri form an exceedingly closely
related ‘‘couplet,’’ but only the former is known to occur
in the San Diego region. Again, K. subtilis and K.
pacifica are so nearly alike that it is very difficult to de-
scribe their differences although they are probably valid
species. Yet, only the first has been found in California
waters. Of the three remaining genera Heterokrohnia
and Spadella are not represented in our collections, and
Pterosagitta by only one individual of its single species
P. draco.
In so far, therefore, as the relationships among the
Chetognatha have been correctly interpreted, it is evi-
dent that, except for the occurrence of both S. enflata
and S. hexaptera, there is no instance of two of the most
closely related species having been taken from the San
Diego region.
GENERAL DISTRIBUTION OF THE ‘‘COUPLETS’’
Having pointed out that only one of a ‘‘couplet’’ of
the most closely related species occurs in the San Diego
region, it will be interesting to ascertain to what extent
the same relation holds in other parts of the world.
Furthermore, wherever both members of a ‘‘couplet’’
are recorded from the same vicinity it will be to the
point to determine, if possible, to what extent their dis-
tribution within the area is coincident or isolated.
S. NEGLECTA AND S. REGULARIS
The members of this ‘‘couplet’’ may be designated as
warm water, epiplanktonic species whose northern and
southern limits of distribution are 35° N. and 9° S. The
highest surface temperature recorded in connection with
their capture is 29° C. and the lowest 15°.5 C. They were
both originally described by Aida (’97) from Misaki
24 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
Harbor, where, so far as known, they are coincidently
distributed.
In the Siboga area Fowler (’06) records 45 surface
hauls containing either one or the other species. Of
these, 35 contained S. neglecta but not S. regularis, and
6 contained S. regularis but not S. neglecta. In only 4
hauls were both species obtained. When we remember
the large area covered by this expedition these results
point toward contiguous and slightly overlapping, rather
than coincident distribution.
The two expeditions of the Pola to the Red Sea ob-
tained both S. neglecta and S. regularis. The collections
of the first expedition (1895/96) were made in an area
limited by 21° 27’ and 29° 45’ N., and 32° 30’ and 38° 30’
E., while those of the second (1897/98) were made some-
what further south and east within the limits of 15° 1’
and 28° 42’ N., and 32° 56’ and 42° 31’ E. Ritter-Zahony
(709) records 32 surface hauls made during the first ex-
pedition that contained one or other of the two species.
Of these, 25 contained only S. regularis, 6 only S.
neglecta, while in but one haul were both species taken.
During the second expedition 27 surface hauls were made
of which 12 contained S. neglecta only, 10 S. regularis
only, and 5 contained both. These data strongly suggest
that the two species are distributed in contiguous re-
gions which overlap considerably along the edges.
Of the other expeditions, the Biscayan, Plankton and
National failed to catch either species. The Gauss ob-
tained both in the region of Port Natal, but never in the
same hauls. Doncaster (’02) records both under the
names of S. septata and S. bedfordii from the Maldive
and Laccadive Archipelagoes, but nothing is stated as to
whether they were obtained in the same hauls or not.
Ritter-Zahony (’10a) records S. regularis from Sharks
Bay, Australia, but failed to find S. neglecta.
No. 553] DISTRIBUTION OF THE CHASTOGNATHA 25
S. BIPUNCTATA AND N. DECIPIENS
S. bipunctata is a eurythermal, euryhyaline and cos-
mopolitan species recorded from the epiplankton of the
arctic, sub-arctic, north temperate, tropical and south
temperate Atlantic Ocean, the south temperate and trop-
ical Indo-Australian Ocean, and the north temperate
Pacific Ocean, as well as from the mesoplankton of the
north temperate and tropical Atlantic. Its northern
limit is 74° N. and its southern 28° S. The highest tem-
perature recorded in connection with its capture is
33°.6 C., while the lowest is 0°.2 C. S. decipiens, on the
other hand, is mesoplanktoniec. Both were taken from
the Bay of Biscay, S. decipiens from between 100 and
200 fathoms, and S. bipunctata only in open vertical
hauls made between 50 and 200 fathoms to the surface,
the total yield being only 7 specimens. Ritter-Zahony
(710 b, p. 4) records both from the Irish Sea, but, in re-
gard to S. decipiens, says: ‘‘S. decipiens is purely meso-
planktonic and in the Irish area was only found at depths
varying from 164 to 1,150 fathoms.’’ Concerning S.
bipunctata he says that it is ‘‘confined to the epiplankton.
... The quantity of S. bipunctata in the upper epiplank-
ton is larger than in the lower.’’ Finally, both species
have been taken in the Atlantic Ocean between 60° N.
and 8° S. but, while S. decipiens occurred only in open
nets from below 100 fathoms and in closing nets from
between 100 and 600 fathoms, S. bipunctata occurred
only in the epiplankton. From this evidence it seems
that wherever the two species occur in the same region
they are isolated by their manner of vertical distribution.
S. LYRA AND S. GAZELLE
S. lyra is a cold water, nearly eurythermal species
ranging from 73° N. to 7° 33’ S., the highest temperature
recorded in connection with its capture being 18°.6 C.
and the lowest 1°.1 ©. It has been found in the epiplank-
ton of the arctic, sub-arctic and north temperate Atlantic,
and sub-antarctic Pacific Oceans, as well as in the meso-
26 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVI
plankton of the sub-arctic, north temperate and tropical
Atlantic, the tropical Indo-Australian and the north
temperate Pacific oceans. S. gazelle, on the other hand,
isarare form. <A few specimens were first taken during
the Gazelle expedition from the Indian Ocean (43° S.)
from a depth of 75 and 1,300 fathoms. It is also recorded
from the Atlantic Ocean (35°.5 S.), where it was taken in
a single haul from about 1,400 fathoms, and from the
Antarctic Ocean between 60° and 66° S., where it was
taken from 10, 25 and 50 fathoms. These data indicate
that S. gazelle is confined to the southern hemisphere
and tends to be distributed circumpolarly. Records of
the Gauss expedition show that out of 88 hauls contain-
ing either S. lyra or S. gazelle, 39 contained only the
former, 42 only the latter, and 7 both species.
S. ENFLATA AND S. HEXAPTERA
S. enflata is a warm water purely epiplanktonic
species whose northern and southern limits of distribu-
tion are 40° 24’ N. and 34° 52’ S. The highest tempera-
ture recorded in connection with its capture is 32° C. and
the lowest 15°.5 C. It has been taken from the north
temperate, tropical and south temperate Atlantic, the
south temperate and tropical Indo-Australian and the
north temperate Pacific oceans. S. hexaptera, on the
other hand, is a eurythermal, nearly cosmopolitan species
found in the lower epiplankton or mesoplankton of the
arctic, sub-arctic, north temperate, tropical and south
temperate Atlantic, the south temperate and tropical
Indo-Australian and the north temperate and sub-ant-
arctic Pacific oceans. Its northern and southern limits
of distribution are 74° N. and 28° S., while the extremes
of temperature recorded in connection with its capture
are 29° C. and 6° C
Both species have been taken together from the same
areas during a number of expeditions. In the Siboga
area Fowler (’06) records 58 surface hauls containing
one or other of the species, of which 31 contained both,
No. 553] DISTRIBUTION OF THE CHAITOGNATHA 27
while 26 contained S. enflata but not S. hexaptera, and
only one contained S. hexaptera alone. During the first
expedition of the Pola to the Red Sea 32 surface hauls
were made which contained both species, 21 which con-
tained S. enflata but not S. hexaptera, and only one
which contained S. hexaptera alone. During the second
expedition not a single S. hexaptera was taken in surface
hauls that was not accompanied by S. enflata, there being
13 hauls containing both and 29 containing S. enflata
alone. Finally, during several expeditions covering
parts of the Adriatic, Ionian and Ægean seas, Ritter-
Zahony (’08) records 45 surface hauls containing S. en-
flata, of which 6 also contained S. hexaptera, and only 4
hauls in which the latter species was taken without the
former.
These data certainly indicate a high degree of coinci-
dence. However, the fact that S. enflata is rarely re-
ported other than from the upper epiplankton and that
S. hexaptera is more typical of the lower epiplankton and
mesoplankton, suggests isolation with respect to sex-
ual maturity. Concerning this Ritter-Zahony (’10)),
who has been very careful to distinguish immature from
mature specimens, says: ‘‘Like S. serratodentata, S.
hexaptera is a species which can not endure low tempera-
tures until it has reached the adult stage. ... We do
not, as a rule, find large specimens until we come to the
lower epiplankton.’’ Until more is known regarding the
stages of growth of these specimens taken on the surface
together with S. enflata we can not regard the cases of
coincidence revealed above as anything more than nega-
tive evidence of isolation.
S. PLANKTONIS AND S. FEROX
S. planktonis is a eurythermal species recorded from
both epi- and meso-plankton of the north temperate At-
lantic and Pacific oceans. It has not been reported north
of 32° 45’ N., nor south of 8° 30’ S., except for a few
small specimens from the Antarctic between 65° and
28 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
66° S. Its temperature range is from 27° C. to 4°.7 C.
S. ferox, on the other hand, is a warm-water species con-
fined, so far as known, to the epiplankton of the tropical
Indo-Australian region. Both species were taken during
the Siboga expedition, but, while S. ferox was taken in
abundance from the surface, S. planktonis was taken only
from the mesoplankton. There is no record of both hav-
ing been taken in the same hauls except in those made
with open vertical nets.
E. HAMATA AND E. FOWLERI
It is still an open question in my mind whether Æ.
fowleri is a valid species or merely a synonym for £E.
hamata. Ritter-Zahony (’11 b) describes certain differ-
ences, but the characters used appear indicative of varia-
tion within the species rather than of constant specific
} ters. If they should prove synonymous, then
Eukrohnia would be represented by only one species.
However, assuming their validity, then E. hamata would
be distributed in the mesoplankton of the Indian, Altantic
and Antarctic oceans, while E. fowleri is rarer and per-
haps more cosmopolitan, occurring in the Irish sea
between 200 and 1,100 fathoms, in the Bay of Biscay be-
low 325 fathoms, in the Malay Archipelago below 460
fathoms, and rarely in the open Atlantic below 500
fathoms. It might be added that E. hamata also occurs
in the epiplankton of ‘the Arctic and Antarctic regions,
while E. fowleri always remains confined to the meso-
plankton. During the Plankton expedition the species
were taken together in only one closing-net haul made
between 500 and 600 fathoms, and only twice out of 18
open vertical hauls from a variety of depths.
K. SUBTILIS AND K. PACIFICA
K. subtilis is regarded as a eurythermal cosmopolitan
species ranging from 60° 12’ N. to 29°30’ S. The tem-
perature corresponding to its capture varies from 30°.8
No. 553] DISTRIBUTION OF THE CHAITOGNATHA 29
C. to 5°.3 C. It is reported from both epi- and meso-
plankton of the north temperate and tropical Atlantic and
tropical Indo-Australian oceans, as well as from the epi-
plankton of the south temperate Atlantic and south tem-
perate Indo-Australian oceans and from the mesoplank-
ton of the north temperate Pacific. K. pacifica, on the
other hand, is a warm-water epiplanktonic species from
the tropical Atlantic and Indo-Australian, and the north
temperate Pacific oceans. Its northern limit is 35° N.
and its southern 7° 30’ S. During the Siboga expedition
both species were taken together in but one haul, and that
one made by an open vertical net from 1,000 fathoms.
This is the only instance, so far as I can ascertain, where
both species have been obtained from the same area.
In summing up we find that the members of each ‘‘coup-
let’’ tend to be isolated in one way or another. S. neglecta,
for instance, maintains a distribution which, while over-
lapping more or less, is contiguous rather than coin-
cident with that of S. regularis. In the case of S. bipunc-
tata and S. decipiens the data show that wherever both
are taken within the same area the former is confined to
the epiplankton, while the latter occurs only in the meso-
plankton. With S. lyra and S. gazelle the distribution is
never coincident, but, in some instances, contiguous and
overlapping. S. enflata and S. hexaptera present the
most striking evidence in favor of coincidence but, even
here, the chances are that only the immature of S.
hexaptera occur in the upper epiplankton, so that an
effective physiological isolation is probably maintained.
S. planktonis and S. ferox, while they do occur together
in the Siboga area, are isolated by their manner of ver-
tical distribution, S. ferox being epiplanktonie and S.
planktonis mesoplanktonic. The members of the doubtful
“couplet” comprising E. hamata and E. fowleri are only
rarely taken in the same net hauls, which indicates con-
tiguous rather than coincident distribution, although this
appearance may be due entirely to the fact that E. fowleri
is not abundant anywhere. Finally, K. subtilis and K.
30 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
pacifica have never been taken from the same region,
excepting in the case of the Siboga expedition when they
were obtained together in only one haul from 1,000
fathoms to the surface.
VERTICAL DISTRIBUTION OF THE CHH®TOGNATHA OF THE
San Dreco Recron
The 68,962 specimens of Chætognatha obtained from
the San Diego region were distributed among the various
species as follows:
8. Pee A T Ok ea E r N eile 51,670
Di PERO E RE EE P T E A OIE TEs ORES 10,127
8. Cana. aS care CON See Path ake ace Ae pee 6,575
Be ee hoe ee ale ce ee eee a ee
PSs MO COCD OE Se pas eae ie 8 aos aes is SRC eA EVE EROS 127
R? honat Oe OOS SS Oi ee oe ae 72
Ke MOr st oie a Cee ee ew ree 50
st MONGOO ce Se a ee es ae ata en 41
Bs BOLUDVONE ore Sew oy vas Vee Corus Oey wae coe y 28
Page a Babies g E er REMY Footy ier eta arre hes ee pee remit a 1
Turning attention first to those species that must be
regarded as visitants rather than residents of this region
we find that S. enflata, S. neglecta, and the single
specimen of P. draco were all obtained from the upper
epiplankton mainly during February, 1905, when the sur-
face temperature was 15°.5 C. One surface haul made on
the morning of February 25. obtained 3,500 S. enflata,
many of which were sexually mature, 9 immature S.
neglecta, and the single very immature specimen of P.
draco. A second surface haul, made the same morning,
contained 3,100 S. enflata (most of them sexually mature)
and 75 immature S. neglecta. Six more S. enflata and 38
immature S. neglecta were obtained in a surface haul
made on April 29, 1905, and a seventh S. enflata in a sur-
face haul made on June 11, 1908. Of the remaining 5S.
enflata, 3,507 were obtained in open vertical hauls (from
ten fathoms or less) during the fall of 1904, 3,500 having
been taken in one haul. The five remaining S. neglecta
were also obtained in the same haul, and the 13 S. enflata,
No. 553] DISTRIBUTION OF THE CHASTOGNATHA 31
still unaccounted for, were all obtained in open vertical
hauls from 45, 75, 110 and 290 fathoms.
These data indicate that these three species can not be
regarded as typical of the San Diego region, and since
they occur abundantly in the surface waters of more
tropical seas where the temperature reaches 34° C., it
seems likely that they have been carried here by currents
from the warmer regions, although no such currents are
known with certainty. The probability of this supposi-
tion is somewhat increased because of their reoccurrence
here during the past winter after an absence of over two
years.
Of the remaining species, S. bipunctata, S. serrato-
dentata, and S. lyra are the most typical of the San Diego
region. The number of each species obtained from the
various depths with horizontal nets is shown in the fol-
lowing table:
TABLE III
TOTAL NUMBER OF SPECIMENS OBTAINED WITH THE HORIZONTAL NETS
Number
Depth in Fathoms S. bipunctata S. serratodentata S. lyra of Hours of
Hauling
0-25 30,733 93 5 108.1
25-75 275 106 20 11.0
75-150 10 106 20 6.5
150-250 0 174 | 17 3.1
250-350 0 43 54 5.4 ¢
This table reveals the fact that S. bipunctata was ob-
tained in by far the greatest numbers between the surface
and 25 fathoms, and that it was not taken at all below 150
fathoms. S. serratodentata, on the other hand, appeared
in greatest abundance between 150 and 250 fathoms, and
S. lyra between 250 and 350 fathoms. However, the mere
tabulation of the number of specimens taken from the
various depths does not reveal the true significance of the
data, for it is obvious, from the last column, that the
amount of hauling, and consequently the amount of water
filtered, has varied with the depth so that the relative
density or abundance in the various depths is not repre-
32. THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
sented by the total number of specimens obtained. A
more accurate and justifiable presentation is to express
the total number of specimens obtained from each of the
above depths in terms of the average number per unit of
time consumed in hauling. The following table reveals
this relative abundance of the three species as thus deter-
mined:
TABLE IV
RELATIVE ABUNDANCE OR AVERAGE NUMBER OF SPECIMENS OBTAINED PER 20
Hours oF HAULING
Depth in Fathoms S. bipunctata S. serratodentata S. lyra
0-25 5,685 17 i a i
25-75 420 193 36
75-150 31 326 61
150-250 0 1,123 110
250-350 0 159 200
It is evident that this table brings into still more strik-
ing relief the fact that S. bipunctata is most abundant
between the surface and 25 fathoms, from where it de-
creases in abundance as the depth increases, while S.
serratodentata increases from a minimum between the
surface and 25 fathoms to a maximum between 150 and |
250 fathoms, and S. lyra increases from a minimum near
the surface to a maximum in the deepest water (250 to
350 fathoms). While it is very improbable, owing to
variations in many environmental conditions affecting the
abundance of the three species in the various depths, that
subsequent collecting would ever result in exactly the
same averages as given above—it is just as improbable
that, if the hauls were distributed in approximately the
same manner, with regard to such environmental condi-
tions, as those from which the above data were derived,
we should find the relative abundance much altered. Con-
sequently it is no exaggeration to say that each of these
three species has its own definite and specific manner of
vertical distribution just as truly as each has its own
1 As relative abundance is independent of the particular unit of time
selected for standardizing the data, a unit of 20 hours has been used instead
of the more obvious 1 hour in order to eliminate fractions in the case of
8. lyra.
No. 553] DISTRIBUTION OF THE CHA'TOGNATHA 33
specific morphological characteristics, and it would be
quite as easy to identify the species from an analysis of
data regarding its vertical distribution within an area
analogous to the San Diego region as it would from the
usual taxonomic descriptions.
Detection of specific differences in the vertical distribu-
tion of the remaining species is rendered more uncertain
because so few specimens have been obtained. However,
by taking the species one at a time, it will be seen that
tendencies, at least, toward specification are revealed.
SAGITTA PLANKTONIS
Eliminating those catches made with open vertical nets
as of little or no value in determining the depths from
which specimens were obtained, we find that seven S.
planktonis were taken between the surface and 150
fathoms, two between 150 and 200 fathoms, six between
200 and 250 fathoms, and eleven between 250 and 300
fathoms. If we separate those obtained with horizontal
from those obtained with vertical closing nets the relative
abundance of the species in these various depths may be
expressed as in the following table:
TABLE V
RELATIVE ABUNDANCE OF Sagitta planktonis
Horizontal Closing-Net Vertical Closing-Net
Catches Showing Number Catches Showing Number
of PT per 20 Hours of Specimens per 500 Fath-
ng
Depth in Fathoms auling oms of Hauli
0-150 1 none
150-200 5 1
200-250 8 8
250-350 19 -I8
This table shows that this species increases in abun-
dance as the depth increases and reaches its maximum in
the neighborhood of 300 fathoms. When we realize that
approximately the same relative abundance is obtained
from independent considerations of data supplied by
horizontal and vertical closing nets, this conclusion is
placed upon solid ground, in spite of the few specimens
dealt with.
34 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
SAGITTA HEXAPTERA
Some indication of the relative abundance of this
remaining species of Sagitta may be gleaned from the
following table:
TABLE VI
RELATIVE ABUNDANCE OF Sagitta hexaptera
Horizontal Closing-Net Vertical Closing-Net
Catches Showing Number Catches Showing Number
of Specimens per 100 Hours of Specimens per 1,000 Fath-
Depth in Fathoms of Hauling oms of Hauling
0-50 9 none
50-100 88 4
100-150 none 2
150-350 none none
When to the evidence contained in this table we add
that the species was not obtained in hauls made with open
vertical nets from above 45 fathoms, the facts suggest
that S. hexaptera maintains its maximum abundance
between 50 and 100 fathoms. The number of specimens,
however, is too small to afford basis for any more positive
conclusion.
KROHNITTA SUBTILIS
Regarding this species, we find that the horizontal clos-
ing nets obtained four specimens from 200 fathoms, but
none from above or below this depth. The vertical clos-
ing nets, on the other hand, obtained twelve from between
50 and 200 fathoms, 25 from between 200 and 250 fathoms,
and five from between 250 and 300 fathoms. Only three
were obtained by the open vertical nets and those in one
haul made from 250 fathoms to the surface. The follow-
ing table gives a more accurate idea of the relative abun-
dance of this species:
TABLE VII
RELATIVE ABUNDANCE OF Krohnitta subtilis BASED ON VERTICAL CLOSING
Net CATCHES
Average Number ef Specimens
Depth in Fathoms per 1,000 Fathom Haul
0-50 none
50-200 18
200-250 63
250-300 20
No. 553] DISTRIBUTION OF THE CHASTOGNATHA 35
The table indicates that K. subtilis maintains its maxi-
mum abundance between 200 and 250 fathoms, and all
the data agree that it does not occur above 50 fathoms.
EUKROHNIA HAMATA
Two specimens of this species were taken with hori-
zontal closing nets from 110 fathoms, two from 300
fathoms, and two from 350 fathoms. The vertical closing
net obtained nine from between 25 and 50 fathoms, one
from between 150 and 200 fathoms, six from between 200
and 250 fathoms, and one from between 250 and 300
fathoms. None were obtained in open vertical hauls
made from above 250 fathoms. These data show that E.
hamata is typical of the mesoplankton, and suggest that
the region of maximum abundance i is in the neighborhood
of 250 fathoms.
The essential facts presented in this brief discussion of
vertical distribution may best be summed up by classi-
fying so far as possible the various species within the San
Diego region on the basis of similarities and differences
in their manner of distribution. When this attempt is
made we find that a key somewhat as follows may be
built up:
KEY TO THE SPECIES OF CHÆTOGNATHA OF THE SAN DiEGO REGION BASED
ENTIRELY UPON Facts OF DISTRIBUTION
A. Species conspicuously epiplanktonic, very rarely extending to
$ 150 TACBOINS sa so ee es Ca ek ees opt eee es ee B.
AA. Species conspicuously mesoplanktonic, very rarely occurring
DOTO TOU TOLNOMB 2. a pn 0 ee ace cen ee eee E
B. Species confined to the upper 10 fathoms ...................... D
BB. Species veg depth of maximum abundance is below 10
FRENO aare veins o A a e ly
C. Species sain in large numbers and distributed from the
surface to 75 fathoms, but occurring in much the greatest
abundance between the surface and 25 fathoms. ..S. bipunctata.
CC. Species not occurring in large numbers, the region of greatest
dance being at least below 40 fathoms....... S. hexaptera.
D. Species occurring rarely, but in large numbers (1,000 or more
per haul not being unusual) «2. 6.66. beet ee es . enflata.
DD
)
: sana ee ae rarely and in very small numbers (more than
O per haul being wnweeil) 2056 iis. ee eel S. neglecta.
36 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
E. pa increasing in relative p as the depth increases,
aching a maximum at a depth of 250 fathoms or more..... fs
EE. ae RTR in relative PEATA as the depth increases,
ut reaching a maximum between 150 and 250 fathoms...... G.
F. Species ot alae common occurrence above 150 fathoms. .8S. lyra.
FF. Species whose occurrence above 150 fathoms is exceedingly
PONG © ev pe ee hats wee Sewer oe ey OC ee Ce ers 8. planktonis.
G. Species never occurring above 50 fathoms.............. ili
GG. Species never occurring above 25 fathoms .............. E. hamata.
GGG. Species occurring at irregular times above 25 fathoms, and s
times even on the surface ........--++-+s:: 8. ES
It is unnecessary to state that this key is not published
for the purpose of furnishing a ready means of identi-
fying the various species of Chetognatha. Perhaps,
when all the species from the four quarters of the globe
have been studied as critically in regard to their behavior
and ecological relations as they have in regard to their
morphology, it will be possible to construct a ready means
of identification on such a basis, but at present we can do
no more than point out that the key does work for the San
Diego region and ascertain what this fact signifies.
Its primary significance is that species are quite as dis-
tinguishable from their manner of distribution as from
their morphological characteristics. In other words, each
species has its own definite and distinctive mode of
behavior and each adapts itself to the hydrographic and
other elements of its environment in quite as definite a
way as any of the other species.
This being true, the question at once arises: To ink
extent are morphological differences between the species
proportional to, or correlatable with, their distributional
differences. Ritter (’09) has pointed out that, if
‘‘change of environment and of environed organism are
wholly and inseparably linked together,’’ one ought to be
able to measure and correlate the differentials between
organisms with the differentials between their environ-
ments. However, in attempting to find such a ‘‘necessary
correlation’’ in the case of Halocynthia johnsoni, native
to the San Diego region, and H. hauster, native to the
Washington coast, the results were negative. It is un-
No. 553] DISTRIBUTION OF THE CHÆTOGNATHA 37
necessary to point out that this is an exceedingly impor-
tant line of investigation, for, if change of environment
and of environed organism are not inseparably linked
together, the hypothesis of ‘‘natural selection,’’ with its
attendant hypotheses of ‘‘survival of the fittest,’’
‘‘struggle for existence,’’ etc., are at stake. Ask yourself
if it is not a priori impossible for any of these hypothet-
ical factors to operate in the formation of species except
on the basis of variations in structure which are more or
less adapted to the conditions of existence in which an
organism finds itself? Again, does not logic demand that,
if isolation be a necessary cause of species formation, two
similar species must occupy similar but not identical or
vastly different environmental complexes, because both
could not be equally adapted to the same conditions by
virtue of their organic difference nor to radically differ-
ent conditions by virtue of their organic similarity?
Such questions sufficiently indicate the importance of
our inquiry regarding the relation between the morpho-
logical and distributional characteristics of species and
in this connection the key reveals the fact that those
species having the most coincident vertical distribution
are those having the greatest morphological difference.
In other words, when the Chetognatha of this region are
classified in the usual taxonomic fashion, five groups can
be distinguished, of which each group contains species _
having the same fundamental morphological character-
istics; but, when classified according to similarities and
differences in vertical distribution, the species consti-
tuting any one of the five groups are those differing from
each other in fundamental distributional characteristics.
We have, then, two methods of classification, one of which
results in groups of similar morphological but dissimilar
distributional species, while the other results in groups of
Similar distributional but dissimilar morphological
species. To illustrate concretely, the groups resulting
from each method of classification are tabulated below:
38 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
Groups of Similar Distributional Species Groups of Similar Morphological Species
S. enflata S. enflata
1
ee S. neglecta Group 1 JS. hexaptera
S. bipunctata S. lyra
2
arn p hexaptera S. bipunctata
8. lyra Group 2 45. neglecta
G 3 :
E F, planktonis S. planktonis
S. serratodentata Group 3 {8. serratodentata
Group 42K. subtilis Group 4 {K. subtilis
E. hamata Group 5 {E. hamata
By referring to the key (p. 35) it will be seen that
S. enflata is separable from S. neglecta only by the fact
that the former occurs in large numbers while the latter
occurs in small numbers. These two species then consti-
tute Group 1 of similar distributional species, but, while
S. enflata falls in Group 1 of similar morphological
species, S. neglecta is found in Group 2. It will therefore
be worth while to see just how extensively the one species
is morphologically differentiated from the other. To this
end I have arranged, in the following table, some of the
most striking differences between the two species.
TABLE VIII
STRUCTURAL DIFFERENCES BETWEEN Sagitta enflata AND Sagitta neglecta
Structures Sagitta enflata Sagitta neglecta
Collarette. Entirely wanting. Extending nearly to the
ventral ganglion.
Anterior fin. Separated from ventral Extends to the ventral
lion.
ganglion by an interval ganglion
f
total length of animal.
Length of anterior fin. 7.4-15.9 per cent of total 18-23 per cent. of total
length of animal. length of animal.
Length of posterior 12-18 per cent. of total 21-26 per cent. of total
fin. length of animal. length of animal.
Extent of posterior Not more than half way To seminal vesicles,
fin.
Per cent. of posterior More than 50. Less than 50.
fin in front of tail-
septum.
Appearance of body. Very transparent. aqu
Width of body. 7-12 per cent. of total 4.2-6.4 per cent. of total
length of animal. length of animal.
No. 553] DISTRIBUTION OF THE CHASTOGNATHA 39
Muscles. Weak and thin. ve ~ thick.
Lateral fields. Very large
Length of tail, 16-24 per cent. ot total 280 per ae of total
length of ani ength of animal.
External process of At least 10 ea ‘aes a over 4 times longer
vestibular ridge. than broad. than broad.
Doubtless the number of differences could be increased
were we to search details, but the twelve set forth in the
above table sufficiently emphasize the fact that the two
species are fundamentally distinct from a morphological
point of view. It would, in fact, be difficult to find any
species within the genus more differentiated from S.
enflata than is S. neglecta.
Looking to Group 2 of similar distributional species
and referring to the key (p. 35) we find that S. bipunctata
is separable from S. hexaptera only by virtue of occurring
in large numbers and maintaining its maximum abun-
dance above 25 fathoms, whereas S. hexaptera occurs in
small numbers and maintains its maximum abundance
below 40 fathoms. In contrast to this we find that,
while S. hexaptera occurs in Group 1 of similar morpho-
logical species, S. bipunctata occurs in Group 2. The fol-
lowing table, therefore, reveals their most fundamental
structural differences.
TABLE IX
STRUCTURAL DIFFERENCES BETWEEN Sagitta bipunctata AND Sagitta
hexaptera
Structures Sagitta bipunctata Sagitta hexaptera
Collarette. Conspicuous but not ex- Entirely wanting.
tensive.
24-55 mm. when ma
7.3-11 per cent. of ak
Length of body. 12-17 mm. when mature.
Width of body.
Length of anterior fin.
Interval between an-
n and ven-
tral ganglio
Extent of postarloe
fin.
Vestibular ridge.
Anterior teeth.
5-7 per cent. of length.
15.9-23.7 per cent. of 8.6-11.8 per cent. of total
total length of animal. length of animal.
5-9 rarely 10 per cent. of 11.5-18.5 per cent. of to-
total length of animal. tal length of animal.
To seminal vesicles. Never to seminal vesicles,
Provided with the usual Without the usual skele-
skeletal parts. tal parts,
P
5-7 in number. 2-3 in number.
40 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou XLVII
2—4 in number
Provided with short mas-
sive crest.
12-14 in number.
Without crest.
Posterior ten
Seizing jaw
This table shows similar and just as fundamental
morphological distinctions as those found between S.
enflata and S. neglecta.
Group 3 of similar distributional species is composed
of S. lyra and S. planktonis, and on referring to the key
(p. 36) we see that the two species are distinguishable
only by the fact that S. lyra is of relatively common
occurrence above 150 fathoms. However, we find that
S. lyra is placed in Group 1 of similar morphological
species, while S. planktonis is placed in Group 2. The
following table reveals the main morphological differ-
ences between the two species.
TABLE X
STRUCTURAL DIFFERENCES BETWEEN Sagitta lyra AND Sagitta planktonis
Struct
Collarette.
Body.
Muscles.
Length of anterior fin.
Relation of anterior
fin to posterior fin.
Extent of posterior
n.
Length of tail.
Lateral fields.
Vestibular ridge.
Posterior teeth.
gitta lyre
Entirely wanting.
Translucent, nearly trans-
arent.
Tumid, but not retaining
its form we
Weak and thin.
31.4-44.5 per cent. of
total length of animal.
Confluent.
To seminal vesicles.
15.6-24.8 per cent. of to-
tal length of animal.
Large.
Skeletal parts missing.
3-9, rarely 10 in number.
Sagitta planktonis
Massive, extending to
race ‘on and
exceptionally opaque.
Firm and rigid, retain-
ing fe almost
perfectly.
Strong and thick.
18.8—27 per cent. of total
length of animal.
Separated by an interval
of 8-11 per cent. of
total length of animal.
Never to seminal vesicles.
24-38 per cent. of total
length of animal.
Very small.
Skeletal parts well de-
veloped.
11-15 in number.
Here again we find that there is no question concerning
the great morphological difference between these two
similar distributional species.
No. 553] DISTRIBUTION OF THE CHATOGNATHA 41
Finally we find that Group 4 of similar distributional
species consists of S. serratodentata, K. subtilis, and E.
hamata, and by referring to the key (p. 36) we see that
they are separable only by the fact that S. serratodentata
occurs to some extent above 25 fathoms, while E. hamata
never occurs above this depth, and K. subtilis never
occurs above 50 fathoms. Yet, we have as members of
this group three species belonging to three genera, so
that there can be no question regarding their funda-
mental morphological difference.
In what way then do these facts answer our question :
‘To what extent are morphological differences between
species proportional to, or correlatable with, their distri-
butional differences?’’ It is obvious that the only reply
permitted by our data is that there is a very definite cor-
relation, but one that is the exact reverse of what would
a priort be expected on the basis of the Darwinian theory
of ‘‘natural selection’’; namely, that the morphological
difference between two species is inversely proportional
‘to their distributional difference, or, to state it otherwise,
the coefficient of correlation between morphological and
distributional differences among species approximates
closely to —1.
RELATION BETWEEN SPECIES OBTAINED IN THE SAME HAULS
WITH Respect TO SEXUAL MATURITY
Under this head it is proposed to briefly consider the
evidence of physiological isolation or coincidence between
species relative to their maturity in those cases where
two or more were obtained in a single haul. It is obvious
that open vertical and vertical closing net hauls do not
yield data relevant to this question, for the reason that the
vertical distance covered is so great (25 fathoms or more)
that it is impossible to tell whether the specimens of two
or more species were taken from the same depth or not.
Concerning the horizontal hauls, however, this objection
can not be made, and when they are examined we find that
only 14 out of 148 surface hauls and 23 out of 108 closing-
net hauls obtained more than one species.
42 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
TABLE XI
SURFACE HAULS THAT OBTAINED MORE THAN ONE SPECIES
No. of
Haul Species Obtained Specimens Stage of Maturity
N tained
216 |S. bipunctata....... 200 Over 50 fully mature
S. hexaptera....... 2 Both small and very immature.
411.8. entaetea 2 ks 3,500 (Over half fully mature
SB. ROQUHE oe owe « One nearing, but none fully —
S. bipunctata....... 75 All small and very imm
ei te genta 1 (Very immature, ovary suns visible.
TORRES fan 1 Very immature, ovary not visible.
419 S. ata ioan 3,100 (Many fully mature
ls hexaptera....... 4 vee as and very i im
S. serratodentata 1 mature, phen "barely visible.
bipunctata....... 64 All's slap and imm
De noaea. OE 75 (None even E maturity.
ATS S: eniaint oe. 6 |One Pape kes rest nearly so.
B naate t io 38 |All imma
S. bipunctata....... 6 (One ein ake the others clearly im-
mature.
1,416 |S.:enflata. 2.0... .. Nearly but not quite mature.
S. bipunctata....... 1,620 |All stages, many fully mature.
1,422 |S. bipunctata....... 9 Several stages, one fully mature.
S. planktonis....... 1 |Very immature, ovaries invisible.
1,426 S. serratodentata 1 All small and immatur
S. bipunctata....... 1,250 (|All prs many fully wk
1,582 i AE 7 |All small and immature.
EEN a 600 (All stages, 25 mature or nearly so.
1,591 5S. a 5 |All small and immature.
Bear 200 (All stages, but mostly immature.
1,605 S. oka ress Small and very immature.
ire oes 35 (Mostly immature
1,686 pi hexaptera........ 1 (Small and very imma
. bipunctata....... 1,600 (All stages, over 200 fal. mature.
1,716 A esi oie ore re 1 mall and very immature
ma bipunctata....... 50 Mostly immature, one fully mature.
1,738 = ne stoasvot gga sarge 14 (All small and immature
S. bipunctata....... 105 All prs some fully mature.
1,772 S. pec 1 Small and immatur
bipunctata....... 9 |All small, none fully. mature.
Concerning the 14 surface hauls, the following table
reveals the fact that in only one haul (1,416) were
representatives of two species taken which were nearly
mature, and in this case the one specimen of S. enflata
No. 553] DISTRIBUTION OF THE CHASTOGNATHA 43
did not appear to be fully mature. In-every other haul
only one species was represented by sexually mature
individuals.
The following table, which contains data relative to
hauls made with horizontal closing nets, shows no in-
stance of two species having been taken in the same haul
both of which were represented by sexually mature indi-
viduals.
The facts revealed in Tables XI and XII, when taken
together with the foregoing discussion of vertical distri-
bution, suggest that the various species reach maturity
for the most part during different seasons, and that fer-
tilization probably takes place in different strata of
water according to the species. In the case of S. enjflata,
for instance, fertilization unquestionably takes place be-
tween the surface and ten fathoms and then only during
the winter, if at all, in the San Diego region. With S.
bipunctata, on the other hand, evidence is at hand [see
Michael (’11)], which space forbids presenting here,
showing that the species maintains a ‘‘center of migra-
tion’’ between 15 and 20 fathoms, from which center the
Species moves up and down in response to variations in
light, temperature, salinity and other factors of its en-
vironment, which facts indicate that fertilization is
mainly, if not exclusively, confined to this depth of 15 to
20 fathoms. In the case of S. hexaptera only the imma-
ture have been taken above 50 fathoms, which shows that
fertilization must take place below this depth. Again,
only the very immature of S. serratodentata have been
taken above 100 fathoms, except at night when the larger
specimens ascend to 50 fathoms. Similarly with S. lyra,
the larger more nearly mature specimens do not occur
above 200 fathoms to any extent, and so on with the other
species,
It is quite true that much more knowledge is needed
concerning the vertical distribution of most of the species
before positive conclusions relative to the depth at which
fertilization occurs can be advanced. Were the deeper
water (below 350 fathoms) thoroughly investigated, dif-
44
HORIZONTAL CLOSING NeT HAULS THAT OBTAINED MORE THAN ONE SPECIES
THE AMERICAN NATURALIST
TABLE XII
[Vou. XLVII
No.
Depth Bpel:
Haul linFath-| Species Obtained mens Stage of Maturity
No. oms Ob-
tained
1,873 BSG. cee Fes 1 (Small and very immature.
5. e ik PE A AE 5 |3 fully mature, 2 immature.
1,877 15 18. sorore: es 4 |All small and immature.
S: bipunctata....... 6 |All small and immature.
1,748 S5 Sae 2 One ee. 5 |All very small and immature
S. serratodentata.... 6 One any mature, the rest very im-
matur
S. bipunctata. ...... 4 Small a remote from maturity.
1,761 25 S a cae ea fea a 1 |Very small and imm
S. Saan PA ae 1 la but not fully nant
1,851 25 |S. rite Eg ee 7 |All small and imma
S. bipunctata....... 2 micas but not ‘ally cB
1,858 35 S. serratodentata... 2 |Small and immature
S. bipunctata....... 1 [Nearly but not fully mature.
1,476 | 50 apma aa 1 |Remote from maturity.
S. bipunctata....... 300 |All stages, several mature.
nktonie.....<> 1 [Remote nea maturity.
1,575 75 |S. serratodentata 76 |Mostly large and nearly mature.
S. bipunctata....... 65 ? Fog ? ?
1,688.) 100 (Solara ee er ee 4 |Very small and im ure,
S. serratodentata 4 |One nearly cues ye rest remote '
from maturity.
ETIS 200 S ia.. 1 (Small and immature
S. serra 9 [One sopini mature the rest small and
immat
1,767) 100 S tre. 22 eee 1 [Large and nearly mature.
S. ieai EE, 2 ? ? ? T ?
1,813 100 iS. tyra. 6c. fo a 2 |Large but not m
S. rA 12 |All large but ene tel mature.
1,979 | 100 iS. tree evince 1 (Large but not mature.
S. serratodentata 30 |All stages, none fully mature.
RST (425. i5. Bee. eS 11 (All stages, ve nearly ee ay
S. serratodentata 21 |All eer ne fully m
S. BONIS. cs 1 Small see vies ‘a de eer
Torso i 100 IS BG. 6 oi 1 (Small and ve mature
S. serratodentata 16 |All large and danrin mature.
1,926; 200. iS. yra: S 13 |All stages, none fully mature.
S. serratodentata 46 |All , Some nearly mature. į
S. planktonis....... 1 (Large bat very immature.
ee SURG ok 3 ‘Very immature.
No. 553] DISTRIBUTION OF THE CHA'TOGNATHA 45
No. of
Haul Depth Speci-
No. inFath-| Species Obtained mens Stage of Maturity
o. oms
tained
TaS 200 IS. Brans as 2 (Large but not matu
S. serratodentata....| 13 (Large, some nearly ig
ESI 20018; Ge. e n 1 (Large but not mature.
S. seih R A ...| 29 Large and nearly mature.
PART T T POA E A 1 (Very immature.
23732) | 220" iS. UN Cees: 1 (Large but imma
S. serratodentata....| 13 (Large and HO Aa ctr.
ODT- BOO Wy APO: os ale ee 50 |All stages, several nearly if not fully
mature.
S. serratodentata....| 24 |Large but immature.
E720 250 SR: es 2 |Small and immature.
S. serratodentata 17 (Large, some nearly mature.
1,550 + 350 S.. Um.: osii 2 |Large but not mature.
S. Siati bea 3 |Large and nearly mature.
1,567 | 350 |S. serratodentata 2 mall and immature.
B: amen eo iG 2 [Large and nearly mature.
ferentials would undoubtedly be established between S.
lyra and S. planktonis with reference to their depths of
maximum abundance. Again, more extensive data rela-
tive to all depths, by increasing the number of specimens
and hauls with which to deal, would enable us to split the
region of 250 to 350 fathoms, for instance, and thus dis-
tinguish strata and establish specific differences within
much smaller limits. However, on the basis of data al-
ready accumulated, all the evidence points toward the
probability that the fertilization of each species nor-
mally takes place within the limits of its depth of maxi-
mum abundance.
SUMMARY AND GENERAL SIGNIFICANCE OF THE’ DATA-
In the foregoing pages the following facts relative to
the question of isolation and coincidence have been re-
vealed:
1. Of the most closely related ‘‘couplets’’ of species
only one occurs in the San Diego region, except in the
case of S. enflata and S. hexaptera, the former of which
can not be regarded as resident in this vicinity.
46 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
2. The general distribution of each member of a
‘‘eouplet’’ is never entirely coincident with that of the
other, but varies from a contiguous and overlapping
to a radically isolated distribution, according to the
‘“eouplet.”’
3. Each species occurring in the San Diego region has
its own definite and specific manner of vertical distribu-
tion just as truly as it has its own specific morphological
characteristics.
4. Those San Diego species having the most similar
vertical distribution are those possessing the most dis-
tinctive morphological characteristics or, to state it
otherwise, the morphological difference between species
is inversely proportional to their distributional dif-
ference.
5. Whenever two or more species have been obtained
in the same haul, never more than one was representd by
sexually mature individuals.
6. With one or two possible exceptions, the mature
specimens of each species occur in different strata of
water.
On the basis of these facts we are forced to conclude
(a) that the more closely related species of Chetognatha
are isolated from each other either horizontally, ver-
tically or by virtue of physiological differences causing
fertilization to take place in different strata of water,
and (b) that ‘‘Jordan’s Law”’ is only partly true, when
tested by vertical distribution, for, while the more closely
related species do not inhabit the same environment,
they do inhabit the most remote environments.
Aside from these obvious conclusions the primary
significance of this paper is that of emphasizing the need
of more exhaustive and quantitative data relative to or-
ganisms, on the one hand, and their environments, on
the other, before any solid basis can be had upon which
to build theories regarding the operation of isolation,
adaptation, natural selection, mutation and other factors
supposedly concerned in the evolution of species. The
No. 553] DISTRIBUTION OF THE CHÆTOGNATHA 47
existence of this need relative to pelagic organisms and
their conditions of vertical distribution is readily recog-
nized and our first impression may be that the extent of
this particular need is exceptional, but an acquaintance
with the literature on evolution shows plainly that the
need is very general. Indeed, this literature is fairly
bulging with evidences of mimicry, protective coloration,
natural selection, etc., based upon an abundance of data
concerning many organisms as well as their environ-
ments, which data, while supporting the hypotheses,
rarely include any facts relative to the essentially quan-
titative nature of either the organisms or the environ-
ments investigated. The mere fact that this sort of data
supports a hypothesis and that the logic is sound is not
adequate scientific proof that the hypothesis is true, for,
as Pearl (’11) and others have demonstrated, logic may
carry conviction, be supported by numerous data, and
still prove erroneous when the quantitative relations of
the facts included in such data are considered. Therein
lies the mischief of much of our a priori reasoning rela-
tive to evolution, namely, that it causes us to depend so
largely upon logic that we overlook or neglect as insig-
nificant the quantitative nature of organisms and par-
ticularly of environments. Our most urgent present
need, therefore, is not so much the accumulation of addi-
tional qualitative data as it is an exhaustive and quanti-.
tative treatment of those facts now at hand.
While the biometrician and, to some extent, other stu-
dents of evolution are treating their data quantitatively,
the ease with which large numbers of individuals of
pelagic species may be obtained without apparently di-
minishing the supply, gives an unusual opportunity to
the marine biologist for applying quantitative methods
on an extensive scale to many of the important problems
of evolution. If all the planktological expeditions would
join hands by publishing all the data relative to every
haul (those that did not as well as those that did contain
the species or group under consideration) and by record-
ing the approximate, if not the exact, number of speci-
48 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou XLV11
mens of each species obtained, instead of publishing only
data relative to successful hauls and recording the
species as abundant or rare, many problems now so
largely discussed from hypothetical points of view could
be analyzed entirely on a factual basis without involving
committal to any hypothesis whatsoever. For pa anay
by such means it would be possible:
1. To measure the degree of variation in the habite of
distribution of species.
2. To measure the extent of correlation between varia-
tion in the vertical distribution of species and variation
in their horizontal distribution.
3. To measure the degree of correlation between
morphological and ecological characteristics of species,
and so arrive at an accurate analysis of the causes of
adaptation.
4. To measure the range of adaptation accompanying
the same structures.
5. To measure the range of variation in structure
adapted to the same environmental conditions.
6. To analyze the natural behavior of a species with-
out involving the necessity of first placing collected indi-
viduals under the artificial conditions of the laboratory
and then reading the results, arrived at by experiment,
back into their natural environment. I do not wish to
minimize in the least the immense value of laboratory
experiments on behavior, but, no matter how great the
achievement, such experiments can not afford a reliable
basis for interpreting the natural behavior of a species
until it becomes possible to re-create nature in miniature.
While these are but a few of the problems that are
urgently calling for solution, I can not help but feel that,
in the foregoing pages, we have touched the fringe of a
line of quantitative investigation destined to yield much
of importance to the student of evolution.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Aida, T.
’97. The Chætognatha of Misaki Harbor. Annot. Zool. Japon., Vol. 1,
pp. 79-81, pl. 4.
No. 553] DISTRIBUTION OF THE CHATOGNATHA 49
Doncaster, L.
702. nenas hens a Note on the Variation and Distribution of the
oup. Fauna and Geogr. Maldive-Laccadive Archip., Vol. 1, pp.
sie: —218, pl. Pi figs. 39-40 in text.
Fowler, G. H.
705. peda a Collected During a Cruise of H.M.S. Research,
9 . The Chetognatha. Trans. Linn. Soc. London,
Ser. 2, va 10, pp. 55-87, pls. 4-7.
706. The Chetognatha of the Siboga Expedition, with a Discussion of
the Synonymy and Distribution of the Group. Siboga Exped.
onogr. No. 21, 86 pp., 3 pls., 6 maps.
Jordan, D. 8.
705. The Origin of Species through Isolation. Sci., N. S., Vol. 22, pp.
545-562.
Kofoid, C. A.
707. The Coincident Distribution of Related Species of Pelagic Organ-
isms as Illustrated ed the Chetognatha. AMER. Nat., Vol. 41,
pp. 241-251
Michael, E. L.
’11. Classification and Vertical Distribution of the Chætognatha of the
San Diego Region, Including Redescriptions of Some Doubtful
Species of the Group. Univ. Calif. Publ. Zool., Vol. 8, pp. 21-178,
pls. 1-8, 1 fig. in text.
R.
’11. Data on the Relative Conspicuousness of Barred and Self-colored
Fowls. AmER. Nat., Vol. 45, pp. 107-117, figs. 1-4 in te
Ritter, W. E;
’09. Halocynthia johnsoni n. sp. A Comprehensive Inquiry as to the
Extent of Law and Order that Prevails in a Single Animal
Species. Univ. Calif. Publ. Zool., Vol. 6, pp. 65-114, pls. 7-14.
Von Ritter-Záhony, R
%08. Chätognathen. Ber. Comm. Erforsch. östl. Mittelmeer, Zool.
Ergebn. z 18 pp, 1 pl.
09. Expeditionen S.M. Schiff Pola in das Rote Meer nördliche und
siidliche Sap 1895-96, 1897-98. Ber. Comm. ozeanogr. Forsch.,
Zool. Er 2 pp., 4 fig.
10a. Die Fauna Südwest- PEE DE Lief. 3—Chetognatha. Ergebn.
Hamburg siidw-austral. Forsch., Bd. 3, pp. 125-126.
106. Chetognatha from the Coasts of Ireland. Fisheries Ireland.
Sci. Invest., 1910, No. 4. 7 pp.
"lla. Die Chiitognathen der Plankton-Expedition. Ergebn. d. Plank-
ton-Exped. d. Humboldstiftung, Bd. 2, 33 pp., 11 figg. im text.
*11b. Revision der Chiitognathen. Deutsche Siidpolar-Exped., Bd. 13.
Zool. 5, 71 pp., 50 figg. im tex
Wagner, M.
68. Ueber die Darwinische Theorie in Bezug auf die — Al
breitung der Organismen. Sitzber. d. bayer. Akad.
München, Bd. 1, pp. 359-395.
—
A FAMILY OF SPOTTED NEGROES
Q. I. SIMPSON AND W. E. CASTLE’
Ir is the purpose of this note to put on record an inter-
esting variation in human skin color which made its ap-
pearance as a mutation or sport in a negro family of the
southern United States some sixty years ago and has
shown itself fully hereditary through two generations of
offspring. The nature of the variation is shown in Figs.
1-4. It consists of a ‘‘piebald’’ condition of the skin.
which is spotted with white in a fairly definite pattern,
not? unlike that of certain domesticated animals. A more-
or-less continuous white area begins on the top of the
head, which has a crest of white hair, extends down over
the face (where, however, it may be interrupted) and
broadens out on the chest, which is either entirely white
or finely mottled. Im the whitest individuals the chest
area extends around the sides of the body on to the back
(see Fig. 4), but fails to reach the mid-dorsal line. It
also extends on to the arms in like proportion to its ex-
tension elsewhere on the body, but the lower forearm and
hands, like the feet, are in all observed cases dark. The
ventral white area continues downward from the waist
line, and in at least one case (Fig. 4) covers the legs,
which are nearly free from black spots down to the knees.
There larger and more numerous specks of black begin,
which become continuous above the ankles.
If we should describe the pattern in terms of its black
1 The material on which this paper is based was collected by the senior
author; the junior author has merely assisted in preparing the material
for publication
2 A photograph in our possession of the same four individuals shown in
Fig. 1 together with the father of the three children, taken when the children
were small, but now too faded for successful _Teproduetion, makes it clear
vening period. As in other piebald mammals the pigmented areas have
definite boundaries fixed at birth and not subsequently changeable.
No. 553] A FAMILY OF SPOTTED NEGROES 51
Fic. 1. Mrs. Eliza D., her sons Jim and Robert (the taller one) and
daughter, Lillie. Photographed 1910.
areas, we should mention as its most prominent feature
the back-stripe (Fig. 4) which begins on the head and
extends the entire length of the trunk, narrowing below
and ending on the buttocks. In the taller son, Robert,
52 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST
Fic. 2. Back view of Mrs. Eliza D.,
seen in front view in)Fig. 1
and states positively that
there were no spotted
negroes previously in that
region. The colored skin
of Mrs. S. A. is ‘‘medium
dark’’ as is that of her
husband, who is entirely
normal in appearance,
being free from spots.
The pair were married
in 1868 and have had fif-
teen children, all of whom
are living, a fact which
indicates a healthy vigor-
ous stock. Of the cebi-
dren eight are spotted like
the mother, the remaining
seven being normal, with-
out spots, but varying in
[Vou. XLVII
Fig. 1, the back-stripe is
so wide that it covers the
sides of the body also.
The original mutant,
founder of this line of
spotted negroes, Mrs. S.
A., is still living. She
was born in 1853 in Loui-
siana, both her parents
being normally colored
negroes, the father
‘‘dark,’’ according to
the statement of her
husband who grew up in
the same neighborhood
1
Fic. 3. Lillie, daughter of Mrs. Eliza D.
Compare Fig 1
No. 553] A FAMILY OF SPOTTED NEGROES 53
depth of pigmentation, as is usual in mulatto families.
The pigmentation of spotted children and grandchildren
Fig. 4. Back view of Jim, seen in front
view, at the left of Fig. 1.
likewise varies in intensity from light mulatto to coal
black. The white spots are however in all cases entirely
devoid of pigment.
54 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou XLVII
Six of the fifteen children of Mr. and Mrs. S. A., three
normal and three spotted, married normal negro mates
and have had from two to four children each. The nor-
mals have had only normal children, in all seven. The
spotted ones have had nine spotted and two normal
children.
The normal children of Mr. and Mrs. S. A. who mar-
ried consisted of two daughters and one son; the spotted
ones consisted of two sons and one daughter. There is
evidently no sex-limitation in the transmission of the
spotted pattern, which behaves consistently as a simple
Mendelian dominant character, the only peculiarity of
the case being the excess of spotted grandchildren over
the expected one half. But this quite probably isa chance -
deviation due to the small numbers under consideration,
or to failure to secure as complete a report of the un-
spotted as of the spotted grandchildren.
The descendants of Mr. and Mrs. S. A. are now widely
seattered through the United States and Europe, certain
of the spotted ones being connected with ‘‘museums.”’
Their peculiarity is therefore an economic asset and not
likely to interfere with their racial increase. The indi-
viduals thus far produced are clearly from their parent-
age all heterozygous for the spotted character, which
they transmit in half only of their germ-cells. If in the
course of time two spotted individuals of this race, not
closely related, should marry each other, we might on
Mendelian principles expect the production of a new type
of individual, one homozygous in spotting, which would
transmit the character in all its germ-cells. What the
somatic character of such an individual would be we can
at present only conjecture. Our experience with the
domesticated animals leads us to think that it certainly
would not be an albino with pink eyes and unpigmented
or faintly pigmented skin, since true albinism is genet-
ically entirely distinct from spotting with white and is
recessive in heredity whereas this character is dominant.
More likely it would resemble ‘‘black-eyed whites’’ such
No. 553] A FAMILY OF SPOTTED NEGROES 55
as occur among mice, rabbits, guinea-pigs, cats, dogs,
eattle and horses. Our experience with these animals
would lead us to expect that the homozygote in this strain
of spotted negroes would be either wholly white, that is,
with snow-white skin and hair but with colored eyes, or
spotted but with pigmented areas still further reduced in
extent than in the heterozygote. Some student of genetics
generations hence may be able to answer the question.
To this end we shall deposit with the Eugenics Record
Office at Cold Spring Harbor, N. Y., our original data
including the correct names and present whereabouts of
these people.
Three of the spotted children of this family, of whom
we have been unable to secure pictures, are undoubtedly
identical with ‘‘The Three Striped Graces” figured
(Plate VV) and described (p. 248) by Pearson, Nettle-
ship and Usher in ‘‘A Monograph of Albinism in Man,”
London, 1911, after Hutchinson, British Medical Journal,
June, 1910, p. 1480. The names given by Pearson, et al.,
for the three individuals are ‘‘Mary, Rose and Fanny,”
which agree sufficiently well with individuals VII, VIII
and X, of our table. Our own information obtained from
members of the family indicates that at present VII is in.
America, while VIII, X and XIV together with the
grandchild, Beatrice, are in Europe.
TABLE
DESCENDANTS OF Mr. AND Mrs. S. A., THE FORMER A NORMAL,
THE LATTER A SPOTTED NEGRO
Children Grandchildren
I. Mrs. Eliza D., spotted, 1. Spotted son (dead) ;
Figs. 1 and 2; 2. Spotted, Jim (pigment dark),
Mate, mulatto. Figs. 1 and 4;
3. Spotted, Robert (pigment
light), taller son, Fig. 1;
4. Spotted, Lillie (pigment me-
dium dark), Figs. 1, right,
- and 3.
II. Mrs. Eugenia —, normal; Two normal.
Mate, colored.
THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
Mr. Horace A., spotted; 1. Normal, light brown;
First. mate, light. mulatto; 2. Spotted, brown;
Second mate, black. 1. Spotted, black
Mr. Jake A., normal; Three normal.
Mate, colored.
r. John A., spotted; 1, Spotted, Beatrice;
Mate, dark. 2. Normal;
3. Spotted.
Mrs. Jane —, normal; Two normal.
Hattie, normal.
THE EFFECT OF FERTILIZERS ON VARIATION IN
CORN AND BEANS
J. K. SHAW
MASSACHUSETTS EXPERIMENT STATION
THE data here reported were secured in the summer of 1909
from a field of sweet corn and beans which were fertilized with
nitrogen phosphorus and potash separately and in combination
after the manner described later. The original purpose of the
investigation was to determine if the differences caused by fer-
tilization were in any degree transmitted to succeeding genera-
tions. Owing to development of other work it has been impos-
sible to carry this on as planned. It is thought that the data se-
cured may have sufficient interest and value to warrant their Ere
sentation.
The plot of land used appeared much exhausted of both plant
food and humus. It had previously been used as a raspberry
patch. It lay on a gentle southeastern slope sheltered on the
opposite side by a belt of woods which, however, was far enough
distant to prevent injury from shade or root trespass.
The field was rectangular in shape, 300 feet long and 60 feet
wide. It was divided crosswise into twelve plots, each 25 x 60
feet. The fertilizers and their amounts were as follows:
Plot Lbs. Plot Lbs,
1... Nitrate of Soda ......... 12 10. Check
2. Check -of Soda 12
3. P itrato of Soda ......... i IL [asa r Phosphate ......... 30
Acid Phosphate ......... 30 SR of Potash ...... 8
£ Acid Phosphate ....:.... 30 E .. 500
jeu FP HOSUBRGE 4 ea ea os 30 12 bias of Potash ...... 10
` ĮSulphate of Potash ...... 8 1 t Acid Phosphate ......... 40
6. Check Nitrate of Soda ......... 16
7. Sulphate of Potash ...... 8
8 Nitrate of Soda ......... 12
*)Sulphate of Potash ...... 8
Nitrate of Soda ......... 8
9.4 Acid Phosphate ......... 20
Sulphate of Potash ...... 6
THE AMERICAN NATURALIST
Corn
of Soda -
2 |lbs
30’
Cheich
v
Nitrate £
Acid Phos
Soda 12 lbs
phate 301lbs.
Acid Phosphate 30 ibs
Q
Acid Phos
Sulphate
phate 30 Ibs.
Potash 8 lbs
Gheqh
Sulphate
Dat asch Bibs
œ
Nitrate of
Sulphate
Soda 12 lbs
Potash 81bs.
Nitrate of
Sulphate
Soda 8&lbs
ate 20/lbs.
Potash 6ibs
Gheich
—
a
Nitrate of
Acid Phosphate 30
Sul phate
Soda 121lbs
l bz.
Potash 3lbs.
Manure
[Vou. XLVII
It is seen that plots 1, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8
and 11 received the several fertilizing
materials singly and in combination
in what may be called normal
amounts of 12 pounds nitrate of
soda, 30 pounds acid phosphate and
8 pounds sulphate of potash; plot 9
received all these in considerably
smaller amounts; while in plot 12
an excess of the chemicals was applied
together with a liberal quantity of
ordinary barnyard manure, the idea
being to supply here a maximum of
the stimulus that ordinary fertiliz-
ing materials may be expected to af-
ford. The lower half of the entire
plot was planted to corn and the
upper half to beans. These facts
are graphically shown in Fig. 1.
One half of the nitrate and the entire
amounts of the other materials were
applied broadeast on June 8 and har-
rowed in. The corn was of the Red
Cory variety and was planted June
14, and the Davis white wax beans
the next day in drills running
lengthwise of the area. Both were
thinned where necessary to give the
corn space of four inches and the
beans three inches. The remainder
of the nitrate was applied about three
weeks after planting, but the exact
date can not be given. The plants
were cared for in the usual way and
the measurements taken from Sep-
tember 14 to 16, or possibly a few
days later. With the corn a record
was made of the following: distance
from ground to uppermost ear, dis-
tance from ground to lowest branch
of tassel, and the number of ears
formed. Where ear-bearing suckers
No. 553] VARIATION IN CORN AND BEANS 59
occurred, the same records were made in such a manner as to
indicate their parent stalks. The plants on space of two feet on
each end of the plots were omitted in the measurements.
TABLE I
EFFECT OF. FERTILIZER ON YIELD OF CORN
Barren 2-Eared Per Cent,
Plot Total Stalks, Stalks, | Ear-bearin
Stalks Per Cent. | PerCent. | Suckers
i: ee OU S00R ee 241 2.90 | 1.66 3.32
Si Cheek i oe ae tg 248 43.15 40 40
Nit of soda
3. E Aa E pE TA oy 281 5.34 4.27 7.47
4. Acid TRT rarer a aagenee © 244 44.26 -60 Al
Acid phosp
{ oe of Sotak } EE aes a S5 | a Br
6. DOC TEA E PAE E e EE 251 29.87 .00 40
fe arse Se Of potash. 223) 3 314 28.03 -00 .64
Nitrate of soda
See a ee ee 269 4.83 3.35 7.06
itrate of soda
9.5 Acid phosphate F.. oa. 255 9.80 1.57 5.88
Sulphate of potash
($ norm
OO or eee ae ee re 225 28.44 44 .88
Nitrate of soda
11.4 Acid phosphate |+........... 241 7.05 3.73 10.37
lphate of potash
(no amounts)
Nitrate of a
Acid pope
12. ap te of potash } ........... 248 4.43 | 10.09 | 39.92
(in kolas
an
Aves Checking o n hee es 33.82 28 56
Table I gives figures bearing on the productiveness of the
corn, and indicates that the deficient element was nitrogen.*
There is no indication that the addition of potash or phosphorus
decreased the number of barren stalks at all, nor did either
alone increase the number of two-eared stalks of ear-bearing
suckers, though there appears to be considerable benefit from
each when applied with nitrogen, and still more when all three
are supplied. The addition of manure results beneficially in all
ways, possibly on account of its physical action as well as by the
direct addition of plant food.
* While the discussion following is in terms of the elements of fertility,
it is of course possible that other carriers of the same elements might have
given different results. has seemed simpler to express the matter in
terms of the elements and with a full reading of the text no misunderstand-
ing on this point is possible.
[Vor. XLVII
THE AMERICAN NATURALIST
00
96'FI $99 98 FF 126% 67'e Ce Tt eo le ee ee ee ee ee e S00 © 6 +612 ao yoy 4 ‘AV
ainuvyy
(s890xe UT)
88+ OSZI GG * GS L Te" = 99°99 OV T+ 98°SE CT’ L6'P E EENE A See as 2 eg ee ysvjod jo oyeydyng } “zy
ayeydsoyd poy
BPOSs JO IJBIMN
(syunoure ewou)
; ; ; 4 5 5 ; i ; : ‘ ihe ds Gis eek as Tii ysvjod jo ayeydyng | 'II
PP = 6S'ST 6G F 869 Of SEIS SO'T = 62°08 el + SOF Sie £6 Ct ayeydsoyd poy
Bpos JO Oo] BIJIN,
OS" = TEST 1° F SP'9 62° = TZP TI SL'TE GI 82'S OU ESO ee E ey ee eee 8
a ean p
. . , . . é . y ; á . A E r Se 8 ysvyzod jo oyeydng
EF FOP IF GOL O&' = 6F 67 ELT POZE el’ =OP 61° ZOST ayeydsoyd poy [6
BpOs JO 94BIJIN
. . 3 ` : A : ý ; ` A e Ls eee s auo uss yseyjod jo eyeydng ) ,
OF + 99°EI correo | 8Z'=9F09 | 96 #9708 | GI+STh | SI ESET wpos jo ovemtny | 8
82°ST 61° O12 L6°* ZO LV 66° = Z067 Gl’ = L9°E LV 19'GT ee ee a ysvyod jo oyeyding '4
Sv FLP 02° + FL'9 66° = IL’SP LO°'T* 99°23 GIF GSE Mt tt ee neg eels oe es bata ‘9
. ‘ ` ‘ ‘ : : ‘ : ‘ ` ER E A R a Ses os & yseyod jo oyeyding ) ,
€S° = €€°9T GS EOL TS" = LO’EP IGT L'8S El FOEL 61° + 69°IT ayeydsoyd poy G
SF == 99ST og: = LOL 62° = OL FF FL = CZ'SZ FL = 6£'E 0z = 00°ZT Wee) ot ks ee a ae ee ee Oe E R » T poy ‘$
° $ J i ; ; : ‘ ; ‘ ; ee E E U ck tobe as see eyeydsoyd poy
oe" + SUSI ST'=PT9 | Seesros | LOTFZeee | Freeh | LV *Slel gee jo oveayty f È
OF = PS'FL 02° = ZL‘9 62° = 92°SF EAT = Z987 PT + 98° 6° ES 8Z'II sr 4 0 86 O58 64 08) FERS 6 6 6 Det tod 0 to 4 eS yoo z
OF = GST ST’ + 08'S GSF 89°9F 94° T+ 8ST'9E El’ + 02°F Gre 4t Ue ce eae ee ante Bpos JO IBIN ‘I
AQypiquise uone q AYT[IQBIIBA nonerag
jo anio go prepuvS uH Jo UATE) prepunys TOR ii
1439H AVIS 1439H 184
SINVIG NYOD JO AAALVIQ NI NOLLVIUV A
It Wiavi
VARIATION IN CORN AND BEANS 61
No. 553]
‘HIOD PUL suvəg UT UOMBVELA ‘Z ‘DI
H = suvaqd
745174
4) $|
216
YIPIS - Y409
G| Og] a
spod 7219
eer
24 | oir 6 Ç
oye
|
N
N
291?
SHSHSH SHG
RPessaa ss”
oS
“Ss
=
N =
We)
SN
SH oH SF
< 46 a Typ 3
fe BE
te
“«
62 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
Table II shows the variation in stature of the corn plants.
With respect to ear height it is seen that the addition of the
mineral elements, especially if nitrogen was also supplied, ap-
parently raised the mean. It will be remembered that ear height
is taken to the uppermost ear in two-eared stalks, and a com-
parison with Table I indicates that the ear height is significantly
greater only where there is a considerable percentage of two-
eared stalks, making it very probable that none of the fertilizers
influenced in any marked degree the height of the ear on single-
eared stalks, or of the lower ear where two were present.
The differences in variability of ear height so far as they are
significant are probably to be referred to the same cause, an in-
creased number of two-eared stalks resulting in greater varia-
bility, as would be expected.
TABLE III
VARIATION IN YIELD OF BEANS
Pods per Vine
Plot Coefficient of
Mewes Damia Variability
1 Witsate of sodas. <4. 0 8.63+.14 | 3.49+.10 | 40.441+1.36
E ak o a 4.81=.14 | 3.18+.10 | 66.11 +3.21
3. { PEE E \ Se ges 9.62+.23 | 5.25+.16 | 54.42 +2.43
4. Acid phosphate................ 7.61+.18 | 3.94+.13 | 51.77 +1.60
gir
5. ra eov sono. 10.71+.25 | 5.05.17 | 47.15 +1.93
6 Chok oe ee ao 9.13.22 | 4.34.15 | 47.53 +2.02
t. Sulphate of potash... 2. 65... 52. 10.09 +.18 3.76+.13 | 37.26 +1.41
Nitra
Slasti a 9.82+.16 | 3.59+.11 | 36.56 +1.30
Nitrate of so
a
9. a or ot ki erete 12.26+.21 | 4.39+.15 | 35.79 +1.36
{ ( s mal |
10, Cheek a a 6.75+.16 | 2.96+.11 | 43.85 +1.93
| Mie of ie |
id p j
11. Sulphat Bee oa h Ba. 13.20+.21 | 5.01+.15 | 37.95 =1.30
no amounts) |
Nitrate of soda
Acid phosphate |
12. { Sulphate of potash } ........... 15.34 +.30 6.09+.22 38.38 +1.54
(in exe |
Manure
POTE OE oe 6.89 3.49 52.49
Fj
There is little evidence that either of the mineral elements
alone or both together increased the stature of the whole plant,
No. 553] VARIATION IN CORN AND BEANS 63
though nitrogen did have this effect. Nitrogen together with
either phosphorus or potash had a more pronounced effect, and
when all three were applied together in plot 11 the stature was
still greater. Increasing the amounts of the commercial fertil-
izers and adding manure in plot 12 gave still taller corn.
The standard deviation is apparently increased by the mineral
elements either alone or together, while nitrogen operates to
lessen this measure of variability. When all are used together
both influences seem to operate and the standard deviation is
increased, but not so much as with the mineral elements alone.
The increase of the standard deviation where considerable
amounts of complete fertilizer is added is not in proportion to
the increased mean, and the coefficient of variability is lessened.
It was not found possible to make any measurements bearing
on the vegetative vigor of the bean plants; the only figures avail-
able are those of yield as measured by the total number of pods
on each plant. Table III indicates that potash was most effec-
tive in increasing the mean number of pods per vine, though it
will be remembered that this element was of the least avail with
corn. Nitrogen seems next, and there is a possible beneficial
effect from phosphorus. When all are applied the average is
higher even on the plot receiving only two thirds the normal
amount. Increasing the quantity of chemicals and adding ma-
nure increase still further the yield. The results are not as
consistent as in the ease of stalk height of corn. This variability
in yield finds further expression in the larger variation within
each plot as expressed by the coefficients of variability which
are nearly three times as great as those for stalk height of corn.
The effect of the single elements on the standard deviation is
not very clear, but it seems that two or more together increase
it, but if nitrogen is present this increase is not in proportion to
the increased mean and the coefficient of variability is lessened.
There is some indication that potash has a similar effect. Owing
to the uncertainty of pod setting a great many data are neces-
sary in order to give definite information on these points.
In Fig. 2 is shown graphically the difference in the effect of
the fertilizer on yield of beans and stalk height of corn. This
shows that fertilizers greatly extended the range of variation of
total pods per vine; the minimum is only slightly raised, but
there are many more plants with a considerable number of pods
and the maximum number of pods per vine too is markedly in-
64 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVI1
creased. There is a greater ‘‘scatter’’ to the distribution. With
the stalk height of corn the ‘‘seatter’’ is not much increased, but
the whole polygon is moved bodily to a higher position. The fer-
tilizer had a direct effect on every stalk of corn, increasing its
stature, but it had little effect on the productiveness of a few of
the bean plants, though increasing that of most of them.
J. K. SHaw
MASSACHUSETTS EXPERIMENT STATION
THE SNAKES OF SOUTH AFRICA
Their Venom,
and The Treatment of Snake Bite
By F. W. FITZSIMONS, F.Z.S., F.R.MS.
Director, Port Elizabeth Museum, Author
of ‘‘ The Monkeyfolk of South
Africa.”
New Edition. Enlarged and Thoroughly Revised.
With 193 Illustrations. 8vo. $4.50 net. (Postage 23 cents. )
4th Avenue
& 30th Street LONGMANS, GREEN, & CO, NEW
YORK
The American Journal of Science
Established by Benjamin Silliman in 1818
The Leading Scientific Journal in the United States
Devoted to the Physical and Natural Sciences, with special reference to
Physics, and Chemistry on the one hand, and to Geology and Mineralogy
on the other.
Aa tide Editor: EDWARD S. DANA.
tors: Professor GEORGE L. GOODALE, JOHN TROWBRIDGE, W. G. FARLOW and WM. M. DAVIS
of Cambridge; Professors A. E. VERRILL, HENRY S. WILLIAMS and L. V. PIRSSON, of New
Haven; Professor JOSEPH s. AIMES, of Baltimore ; MR. J. S. DILLER, of Washington.
Two volumes annually, in monthly numbers of about 80 pages each.
Shiny x pee ended its first series of 50 volumes as a quarterly in 1845; its second
wake volumes as a two-monthly in 1870; its third series as a monthly ended Dec-
T, 1895. A Fourth Series commenced in 1896.
s on Pete Price, $6 per year or 50 cents a number, postage prepaid in the United States
nada ; $6,40 to Countries in the Postal Union. Back numbers at p
se-Ten-Volume Indexes, Vols. I-X XI-XX, fourth series, price one dollar. Address
The American Journal of Science
New Haven, Conn.
The American Naturalist
A Monthly Journal, established in 1867, e to the Advancement of the Biological Sciences
with Special Reference to the
tors of Organic Evolution and Heredity
CONTENTS OF JULY NUMBER
Genetical peg on Oenothera, IIL Dr. Bradley
E Š
Evidence of A Int the F Genera-
tion from son prise Bos indicus on Bos taurus.
Shorter Articles ae Diseu a On the Inheritance
the Tricolor Coat in Guinea-pigs, and Its Rela-
tion to Galton’s Law of Ancestral Heredity. Pro-
fessor W. E. Castle.
CONTENTS oF AUGUST NUMB
mage pore: in Successive Alfalfa Generations. L. R.
Some Tentiro of gen een in Fresh-water
Fishes. Henry W. Fow
The Formation of pe Pali Correlation Tables
Lae: the Number of Combinations is large. Dr.
ussion: The Production
nisms from Het-
x a
c
Analogies of B jologieal 3 A Dr. C F.Cook.
a Fairness ksd Accuracy in Scientific Review-
ng, Dr. J Arthur Harris.
Notes and Literature: Distribution and Origin of
ein America, T. Barbo
CONTENTS OF SEPTEMBER NUMBER
On Diferential tesa a Respect p Seed
Weight gouna a s Field a of Phaseolus
A Case of Polymorphism in Asplanchna simulating
Mutation, Prcfessor J. H. Powe
Shorter Articles and Discussion ee al Symbio-
tic Relation between a Waterbug aad a Crayfish.
Professor James F. Abbott. Double Eggs. Pro-
fessor Charles W. Hargitt.
Notes and re American Permian Verte-
brates, Dr. O. P. Hay. Federley’s Breeding Ex-
pomen ts with the Mot oth Pygaera, A. H. Stur-
vant
CONTENTS OF OCTOBER NUMBER
I. Gametic riae as a Cause of Correlations.
G. N. Collins
IL Mice; Their Breeding and Rearing for Scientific
Pur Dr, J. Frank Daniel
III. The agag of — arenicolor Cope, with
Notes on vd ec ts and Variation. C. H,
on
IV, Aleurone Colors in F, if a Cross between Non-
colored Varieties of Maize. Professor R. A.
W: eee en of Zea mays L. Dr. Walter
VI. Notes and pene re : Patten on the Origin of
Vertebrates and t the General Value of Specu-
lations on the TAPEET of Organic Beings.
Professor Wm. E. Ritt
CONTENTS OF NOVEMBER NUMBER
e Mendelian Notation as a Description of
h ysiological Facts. Professor E. M. East.
Pang gnc = ane ecarri of the Starvation :
O cendants u Characteristics o;
the Descendants oo Dr. J. Arthur Harris.
oy
:
H
Sara Relations in Xenoparasitism, Dr.
Shorter rensa a Discussion: On Tricolor
ars t in Dogs and uinea-pigs. Arend. L.
.
4
VY. Notes and Literature: The Classification o:
Liverworts: Professor Douglas Hou a
Campbell. Invertebrates, Professor opt ton
wood Kefoid.
CONTENTS OF DECEMBER NUMBER
I. The Mendelian ace of Sete prvi od in the
Domestic Fowl. Dr. Raym
IL Reflections on the Autonomy ‘ot iai Sci-
ence. Professo
II. The Spawning Habitsof the Sea Lamprey, Petro-
myzon marinus. Dr. L. Hussakot.
IV. gge Articles and Daik, A Simple a
the Goodness of Fit of Mendelian Ratios.
Dr. J. ur
V. Notes — Literature: Notes on Ichthyology.
d Starr Jordan.
<
H
mäe a Volume XLVI
Single Number 35 Cents
peun a
Yearly Subscription, $4.00
The NATURALIST will be sent to new subscribers for four months for One Dollar
THE SCIENCE PRESS
Garrison, N. Y.
Sub-Station 84: NEW YORK
Lancaster, Pa.
VOL. XLVII, NO. 554
|
.
A
FEBRUARY, 1913
THE
AMERICAN
NATURALIST
A MONTHLY JOURNAL
Devoted to the Advancement of the Biological Sciences with
Special Reference to the Factors of Evolution
CONTENTS
Page
Spee othe Natural Selection and TE Professor MAY-
RD M. MET
ESE: in ae ‘avin and Non-iving Professor Bunrox EDWARD
LIVINGSTON
Adaptation in Animal Reactions. Professor G. H. PARKER
eee
Adaptation from the Point of View of the ier Ben Professor ALBERT P.
MATHEWS
The Fitness of the Environment, an Inquiry into the Biological wees
of the Properties of Matter. Professor LAWRENCE J. HENDERSON - -
Shorter Articles and Discussion: Mutations in Oenothera een L?: Professor
BRADLEY M. Davıs. A Convenient Microscope LBERT
Case essor À M.
REESE. A Literary Note on the Law of Goriaitai Continuity: Dr. W. W.
STOCKBERG
- 116
THE SCIENCE PRESS
LANOASTER, PA. GARRISON, N. Y.
NEW YORK: SUB-STATION 84
The American
Naturalist
intended for AAST and books, etc., intended for review should be
MSS.
sent to the Editor of THE AMER
A
tion are especially w
ICAN a Garrison- -on-Hudson,
rticles rab research work bearin
elcome, and will be given froter in publica
New Yor
n the problems A Se evolu:
hundrea reprints of a amg are supplied to authors tres of charge.
One
Further reprints will be supplied a
iptions and Spn EAA should be sent to the publishers.
subesriptien. pao is four dollars a
Canadian postage twenty-five cents additional.
The
Foreign postage is fifty cents and
The charge for single copies is
ge.
forty cents. The advertising rates are Four Dollars for a pa
THE SCIENCE PRESS
NEW YORK: Sub-Station 84
Entered as second-class matter, April 2, 1908, at the Post Office at Lancaster, Pa., under the Act ot
Congress of March 8, 1879.
Lancaster, Pa.
Garrison, N. Y.
FOR SALE
ARCTIC, ICELAND and GREENLAND
BIRDS? SKIN
Well Sees ig Prices
articulars of
G. DINESEN. Bird Collect
Husavik, North Iceland, Via Leidiė i Sribiand
TENTH EDITION.
THE MICROSCOPE,
an introduction to Microscopic Methods and to Histology,
By SIMON Hener GAGE, of Cornell University. Over
350 la A a tf gen res in this new
and fully revi ition. Price $2.00, postpaid.
COMSTOCK PUBLISHING cO., Ithaca, N. Y.
To Ornithologists
and Museums
W. F. H. ROSENBERG
Importer of Exotic Zeological Specimens
57, HAVERSTOCK HILL
London N. W., ENGLAND
Begs to announce the publication of a new Price List
(No. 17) of BIRD SKINS. This catalogue con-
tains nearly 6,000 species, and is the largest and
most complete price list of birds ever published. It
is arranged in systematic order with authors’ names,
indications of localities, and an index to Families.
It will be sent gratis and post free on application, as
will the following lists:
No. 14, Mammals; No. 15, Bird’s Eggs; No. 16
Reptiles, Amphibia and Fishes ; No. 12, Lepidoptera ;
No. 13, Coleoptera,
Largest stock in the world of specimens in all
branches of Zoology. Specimens sent on approval,
Please state which lists are required.
University of Colorado
Mountain Laboratory
Courses in Field Biology (animal and
plant), Ecology, Systematic Botany, Bi-
ology of Ponds and Streams. Suitable
work for undergraduates and graduates.
Daily Field excursions.
The laboratory is at Tolland, Colo., in
the Rocky Mountains at an altitude of
8,889 feet. Climate cool and healthful.
Fees and expenses moderate.
For pamphlet address the professor in
charge.
Dr. Francis Ramaley
University of Colorado
BOULDER COLORADO —
THE
AMERICAN NATURALIST
VoL. XLVII February, 1913 No. 554
ADAPTATION THROUGH NATURAL SELECTION
AND ORTHOGENESIS!
PROFESSOR MAYNARD M. METCALF
OBERLIN COLLEGE
Mr. President, Members of the Society, and Friends:
When the president of our society, Professor Conklin,
asked me to open this discussion, he suggested that I
speak in advocacy of natural selection as the dominant
factor in adaptation, saying that several speakers would
follow who would attack this conception. As I under-
stand it, a paper in advocacy of natural selection is
desired not so much that it may be a target at which fol-
lowing speakers may direct their shafts, as that this
conception may not stand without defenders.
It involves some temerity to speak to an audience of
American naturalists upon natural selection, for the con-
ception is more than a decade old. It dates even from
the dark ages of the middle of the last century, and we
naturalists, like the Athenians to whom Paul spoke, are
continually seeking some new thing. I can not even, as
DeVries and Bateson in the case of Mendel’s principles,
claim the honor of a re-discoverer, for through all the
years since its first promulgation the conception of nat-
ural selection has been constantly to the fore and has been
discussed and re-discussed until many, I fear, have
wearied of it, and for this very reason may be ready to
give too undiscriminating welcome to other conceptions
that seek to supplant the old idea.
* Read at the Symposium on Adaptation at the meeting of the American
Society of Naturalists, Cleveland, January 2, 1913.
65
66 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
There are two sets of factors in producing and deter-
mining the direction of evolution, those within the organ-
ism, and those external to it. In earlier studies of evo-
lution the external factors received by far the most atten-
tion, and only recently have the internal factors begun to
receive the thought they deserve. Of the external factors,
natural selection is the one for which the largest claims
have been made and the one whose claims have been most
cordially allowed. I think, however, there are few, if any,
of us who do not feel that some of the advocates of nat-
ural selection have gone too far. Wallace, for example,
would not allow that there are any characters of animals
or plants which are not useful to their possessors and have
not been perpetuated and emphasized because of this use-
fulness. Admitting, as we must, that we know but little
of the intimate life of organisms, and that the use of
many really most useful characters. may fail to impress
us only because of our ignorance of real conditions, still
I think most of us feel not only that the claim that all
structures and qualities of organisms are useful is an
exaggerated claim, but that very many characteristics
are either of indifferent quality, or are so slightly useful
as not to be of selection value, or even are slightly dis-
advantageous. The more closely one studies any organ-
ism the more will he become impressed with the number
of these non-useful or doubtfully useful qualities, and
close and careful students are likely to find their vision
of natural selection grow dim, like the pilgrim who, in the
midst of the woods, could not see the forest for the trees.
But as we view organic nature in its wider aspects is
there any other feature so prominent as the adaptation
of organisms to their environment and to the lives they
must live in the midst of this environment? However
many details of structure or behavior may fail to show
their utility, still it remains true that there is no phenom-
enon of organic nature more impressive than adaptation.
In our study of evolution we have, then, this thing to
explain—namely, the universal prevalence of a high
degree of adaptation of organisms in habit, function and
structure, to their environment, and yet the presence of
No. 554] ADAPTATION THROUGH SELECTION 67
many qualities, for the most part minor qualities, which
so far as we can judge, are non-adaptive. I would sug-
gest for your consideration the propositions that the
broader adaptive features are due to natural selection,
and that the non-adaptive minor characters are the result
partly of factors within the organism, and partly of ex-
ternal factors other than natural selection. This paper
will not refer further to these other external factors, but
will discuss one of the factors within the organism. +s
Evidence accumulated during the last decade seems to
indicate that fluctuating variations are not significant,
and that only mutations are stable and can serve as a
foundation for evolution. Perhaps we have accepted this
statement a little too hastily. The actual evidence in its
favor is not all that could be desired, but it seems to
be the general opinion to-day. If this opinion is well
founded, it is through the study of the origin and nature
of mutation that we may hope to gain most light upon
the problem of the origin of adaptation.
When one comes to think of it, we really know very
little of mutation. Few instances have been carefully
observed and recorded. But in the midst of this scant
knowledge of mutation one fact stands out clearly, that
mutation apparently is not indeterminate, occurring in
all directions equally, and changing from generation to
generation, as would be the case were it purely fortuitous.
Our best studied instances of mutation are still seen in
(Enothera lamarckiana, and in all the observations upon
the mutation of this species nothing is more patent than
that there are certain definite tendencies for particular
mutants of very complex and very clearly recognizable
types to appear generation after generation, in numbers
that are very much greater than could be accounted for
by any chance aggregation of unit characters to make
these few well-marked types.
In 1905 I wrote as follows: :
In the Amsterdam Garden the mutant albida appeared in four differ-
ent generations from lamarckiana parents, previous to 1902, 15 albida
appearing in one generation, 25 in another, 11 in another and 5 in
another. Nanella appeared 5 times in one generation, and in other
68 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST (Vou. XLVII
generations, respectively, 3, 60, 49, 9, 11 and 21 times. Lata, oblonga,
rubrinervis and scintillans appeared frequently.
In the fourth generation, along with 14,000 lamarckiana plants, there
appeared 41 gigas, 15 albida, 176 oblonga, 8 rubrinervis, 60 nanella, 63
lata and 1 scintillans, all bred from lamarckiana seed. In the fift
generation, similarly bred from pure lamarckiana seed, among 8,000
lamarckiana plants were found 25 albida, 135 oblonga, 20 rubrinervis,
49 nanella, 142 lata and 6 scintillans. In the fourth generation one
plant in 80 was oblonga. In the fifth generation one plant in 60 was
oblonga. DeVries himself says: “ A species therefore, is not born only
a single time, but repeatedly, in a large number of individuals and dur-
ing a series of consecutive years.
Oblonga differs from the parent species lamarckiana not in a single
feature, but in an elaborate complex of characters. The other mutants
likewise are distinguished from lamarckiana z) a complex of characters
rather than by a single feature.
The mutation can hardly be entirely fortuitous if, for several genera-
tions, out of every thousand offspring of pure lamarckiana parents,
there appear more than ten plants marked by the particular complex
group of characters which designate oblonga. Were oblonga demar-
«cated from lamarckiana by but a single character, it would be remark-
‘able to find it appearing repeatedly and in such numbers. When we
remember that it is defined by an extensive series of characters differ-
entiating it from lamarckiana and from all other mutants observed, are
we not led to the conclusion that mutation in Ginothera lamarckiana
is not wholly fortuitous, but is to a degree predetermined; and that there
is some tendency to the production of the oblonga and other types in
numbers much greater than would be secured by purely fortuitous and
indeterminate mutation?
Mutation in our most carefully observed instance,
therefore, is clearly determinate. There is in Ginothera
lamarckiana a tendency to mutate in certain definite
directions generation after generation. This trend to
mutation in certain particular directions is an example
of a condition within the organism which might decidedly
affect the course of the future evolution of this Gno-
thera and its descendants.
But we can safely go further. Not only have we evi-
dence that there exist tendencies to produce certain mu-
tants repeatedly, paleontological records show, I believe,
that there have existed trends toward an increasing
emphasis upon certain characters and that these trends,
in some instances at least, lay along lines that produced
no more perfect adaptation of their possessors to their
environment.
No. 554] ADAPTATION THROUGH SELECTION 69
Neumayr’s well-remembered figures of fossil Palud-
inas from Slavonian lake deposits show an increasing
rugosity of shell and irregularity of aperture, but the
separate steps of this change could hardly have been
of selection value and have occurred under the con-
trol of natural selection. One is irresistibly drawn to
believe that there was in these Paludinas an internal
tendency to mutate from generation to generation toward
increasing rugosity of the shell and increasing irregu-
larity of its aperture.
Similar trends in the development of limb and tooth
structure of the horse were long ago emphasized by
American paleontologists. There is no conceivable utility
in the modified shell form.of the Paludina, and, in the
case of the horse, the wonder is that the race has not long
ago been exterminated. Among the Cephalopods are
some forms which show most complex patterns of the
partitions. There are complete intergrading stages
shown in the known species between simple suture lines
and the most fantastically fimbriated. There seems here,
again, to be evidence of a trend toward increasing convo-
lution of the sutures, rather than evidence of the appear-
ance of a useful character and its increase by successive
steps each of selection value. In a somewhat similar way,
over-ornamentation and bizarre character developed in
the Trilobites by steps which can hardly be imagined
useful. Many such examples might be cited.?
It may seem that I am arguing against the importance
of natural selection, but I think I am not, and for this
reason: the very trends, of whose existence I think we
have good evidence, are themselves subject to natural
selection, and if they are in hurtful directions, they will
ultimately cause the extermination of the species exhibit-
ing them. I very much doubt if such a monstrosity as
the horse could long persist, except for man’s aid, for it
* On the afternoon of the day when this paper was read Professor B. M.
Davis reported that among the offspring of his @nothera hybrids were some
mutants with flowers larger than either parent species, and that for two
generations (as far as his experiments went) the flowers increased in size.
is is soepi an example of just such a trend in mutation as I have
indicated above
70 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST (Vou. XLVII
is about the least adaptable beast we know. The Cepha-
lopods with complex partitions have all perished. The
bizarre Trilobites similarly persisted each for but a brief
period.
I would not claim that the over-ornamentation in these
cases was the cause of extermination. It seems more
probable that it is merely one noticeable indication of a
general unbalanced condition of the organism, a condition
affecting probably function as well as structure. I sus-
pect that more species have perished because of physio-
logical maladjustment than from any disadvantageous
structural qualities.
In quatenary times in numerous species, great empha-
sis seems to have been laid upon bulk and the very huge-
ness of some of these species probably aided in their ex-
termination.
Non-adaptive qualities, when first appearing, may
often be comparatively harmless, at least may not be
sufficiently hurtful to lead to the extermination of the
species in which they appear. But qualities compara-
tively innocent in their beginnings, when over-empha-
sized by such trends as we are discussing, may go beyond
the limit that even long suffering nature will allow and
extermination follow. The goblin of natural selection
will get him in the end if he doesn’t watch out. It is a
case of giving the species rope enough and letting it hang
itself. Instead, therefore, of supplanting natural selec-
tion, such orthogenesis as this really acts in the end to
aid in eliminating many species whose characters in their
beginnings were indifferent, natural selection finally dom-
inating and compelling adaptation.
Since mutation-trends in helpful directions will be
aided by selection, through the destruction of the rivals
of their possessors, while hurtful trends will cause ex-
termination, we see that natural selection has a determi-
native influence upon the direction of evolution, steering
the species along safe paths of progress.
Further advance in the study of the method of evolu-
tion may be expected from the study of trends in muta-
tion. Such study should be continued for many years,
No. 554] ADAPTATION THROUGH SELECTION 71
breeding in great numbers for many generations from
some highly mutating stock. Such work can not well be
undertaken by a single individual, for it should continue
through several human generations. It should be under-
taken by some institution which will ensure the endur-
ance of the investigation beyond the present generation.
Possibly the best object for such study would be the Syra-
cuse Trilliums—Trillium grandiflorum—whose remark-
able variation Britcher* has so well described. Variation
in these Syracuse Trilliums is more universal and more
extensive than in any other plants or animals I know. It
is so great that it can hardly be of the fluctuating type.
It is, in all probability, true mutation, and if so it offers
the best opportunity I know for the study of the phenom-
ena of mutation.
SUMMARY
Organisms show adaptation in their more important
characters, while many of their minor characters fail to
show their utility.
There are definite tendencies to mutation in particular
directions, and there is abundant paleontological evidence
of trends toward increasing modification in particular
directions.
Qualities so appearing may be indifferent in their be-
ginnings, but may through this orthogenesis become suffi-
ciently useful or hurtful to affect selection. Such trends,
when they affect physiological qualities, are likely to
bring about an unbalanced, distorted physiological con-
dition and be peculiarly hurtful. Probably this has been
one of the chief causes of the disappearance of species.
Orthogenesis as thus interpreted is but the handmaiden
of natural selection which, acting upon all qualities thus
developed to major proportions, will cause them to disap-
pear if ill-adapted. At the same time advantageous
trends will be encouraged in the struggle for existence
and the direction of evolution be turned toward further
adaptation.
Adaptation is the most salient result of evolution and
natural selection its great cause.
* H. W. Britcher.
ADAPTATION IN THE LIVING AND NON-LIVIN Gt
PROFESSOR BURTON EDWARD LIVINGSTON
Tur Jouns HOPKINS UNIVERSITY
Tue fundamental differences in concept and mode of
thought, which may be remarked between the sciences of
the living and those of the non-living, are perhaps no-
where better exemplified than in the interpretations and
in the degree of prominence which they respectively give
to the idea of adaptation. A general survey of the nat-
ural sciences results in the somewhat startling discovery
that biology is the only one of these which deals conspic-
uously with this idea. I have, therefore, been led to take,
for my present paper, the somewhat bizarre title wh ch
has been announced, and I shall here attempt partially
to set forth some characteristics and implications of the
biological concept of adaptation, and, in certain respects,
to compare these characteristics and implications with
those of similar concepts which have the place of adapta-
tion in the sciences of the non-living. The term adapta-
tion is used in a passive and in an active sense. I shall
consider the two sorts of adaptations in order.
Passive Adaptations.—Adaptations are ch teristics,
properties or qualities attributable to natural objects.
They imply, however, not only mere qualities, but also
the presence or absence, in the object considered, of po-
tentialities or capabilities to be or to do certain things
under certain conditions. The term always lays stress
on potentialities but it does not imply at all that these
are, or have been, realized. If they were actually real-
ized, it would amount to a redundancy to note the exist-
ence of the adaptations at all; an adaptation ‘‘caught in
the act,” an already realized potentiality, is so self-evi-
dent that we do not need to mention it as such. In such a
* Read at the Symposium on Adaptation at the meeting of the American
Society of Naturalists, Cleveland, January 2, 1913.
72
No. 554] ADAPTATION IN LIVING AND NON-LIVING 73
case, the statement of the realization implies the poten-
tiality, for an object is obviously adapted to doing and
being what it does and is.
However, doing and being are only relative, for any
object may change its state more or less effectively and
may possess attributes in different degrees, and our in-
terest in realized potentialities lies not in the fact, but in
the degree of adaptation. Furthermore, the degree of
adaptation depends clearly upon the extent to which the
object considered possesses those properties or qualities
about which our idea of adaptation centers, and so atten-
tion is at once turned to the properties or qualities as
such.
I may draw an illustration of actually observed adap-
tations from the science of geology, which perhaps in-
terests itself as much in the survival and distribution of
rock masses as does biology in the survival and distribu-
tion of living things. My example has to do with the nat-
ural selection and distribution of certain boulders and
pebbles in a deep Californian valley.
At the time of the filling of the Salton sink by the un-
ruly Colorado River, the only loose stones of the inun-
dated area that were able to keep themselves in contact
with the air were fragments of pumice. These’ were
adapted to float upon water, and they largely refused to
be submerged. With the rising waters they also rose, and
thus were able to take advantage of air movements to re-
distribute themselves. Had it not been for the floating
adaptation, these pumice pebbles would have suffered
temporary extinction in the form of submergence, and
they would not have been able to survive and to gain
dominance in the pebble population of certain Salton
beaches which they forthwith proceeded to invade. We
have reason to believe that this sort of spontaneous mi-
gration of pumice pebbles has taken place many times
before in the Salton valley, at periods and seasons when
edaphic and climatie conditions happened to favor such
readjustments of the tension lines, and that the present
`
74 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
distribution of these curiously endowed stones has been
largely brought about through their possession of the
floating adaptation.
= Probably a geologist would not mention adaptation in
this connection; he might succinctly state the apparent
specific gravity of pumice, and might then proceed to pre-
sent the case in terms of this internal character and in
terms of more or less quantitatively known features of
the surroundings; for the idea of adaptation here takes
account of the low specific density of the rock and the
ability to float upon water implied thereby, and to state
that pumice is adapted to float is redundant, after we
know its specific density. For aught I know also, there
may be different species of pumice, some of which might
be observed to float higher or a longer time upon water,
and in such ease, what we might term the varying de-
grees of adaptation in the different species should be
quantitatively brought out—and then dismissed—by an
adequate study of the internal qualities of the rocks.
But not nearly all of the potentialities discoverable in
natural objects are of this realized, and consequently di-
rectly observable sort. The future is no doubt pregnant
with hitherto untested adaptations and our imagination
frequently suggests these as problems. Of course mod-
ern natural science responds to the proposal of this sort
- of adaptation, try it and see if it is true, and many of us
are busy just now in doing this very thing.
If we find observational proof of the suggested prop-
erty, interest in its adaptational aspect fades, for the
case then passes over into my first category, of actually
observed adaptations. Also, the experimental test of a
proposed potentiality—as to whether it is attributable or
not to the object considered—is but a case of observation,
properly prepared for. Not readily finding the necessary
conditions and the object together in nature, we find
them separately (at different places or times) and pro-
ceed to bring them together. Thus my first experience of
the Salton valley was had at a time when it contained
No. 554] ADAPTATION IN LIVING AND NON-LIVING 75
little or no visible water. Let us suppose that interest
was at that time aroused in the distribution of pumice
pebbles upon certain areas of the dry valley floor, and let
us suppose that a previous migration of these, similar to
the one just described, was suggested as a possibility.
At that time the direct test by observation was not pos-
sible, but the whole question—as far as the floating adap-
tation is concerned—could have been settled readily
enough either by bringing water to the pebbles or by
taking some of the pebbles to water. But of course we
should have been dealing, in this instance again, with the
determination of the presence or absence of a certain
property in the pebbles, as related to a certain property
of water.
In the vast majority of the cases of this sort that at-
tract our attention at the present time, however, natural
science is unable to obtain direct observational tests, even .
of the experimental sort, and some indirect method of
comparison must be resorted to. Now, indirect methods
for determining the degree of a proposed adaptational
property consists in nothing more than the determina-
tion, by whatever means may be convenient, of the de-
gree to which this property exists in the object consid-
ered. Thus, without ever bringing water and pumice to-
gether, it is perfectly possible to establish the ability of
the latter to float, as by determining the comparative
weights of equal volumes of the two substances.
From what has preceded it is suggested that every
passive adaptation that we may consider resolves itself,
upon adequate analysis, into a problem of the measure-
ment and quantitative comparison of qualities or proper-
ties of objects. If neither the direct experimental test
nor the requisite measurements can be carried out, then
the suggestion of an adaptation is no different from the
Statement of any other problem for which no method of
attack has yet been devised. But it must be recognized
im this connection that the usual biological adaptation is
not always appreciated as a problem in comparative
76 ' THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLVII
measurement, and that its proposal, especially if made
by one in an authoritative position, is far too apt to be
received as a declaration rather than as a question.
Thus, for example, our elementary texts may tell the
innocent beginner that brightly colored flowers are better
adapted to fertilization by insects than are their less
gaudy neighbors, and without critical analysis, a very
complex and exceedingly difficult problem is at once re-
garded as solved. As a matter of fact, this problem in-
volves comparative measurements for which methods
have not yet been devised, so that the cautious biologist
must regard the question of this proposed adaptation as
utterly beyond us for the present.
Apparently possible potentialities which have not been
actually observed in nature, or which have not a basis in
quantitative comparisons so as to be possible of definite
. establishment or refutation, have not played an impor-
tant rôle in the modern development of the sciences of
the non-living, and consequently the adaptational aspect
of the qualities of natural objects is seldom mentioned
in these sciences. The relative ease with which the quali-
ties of the non-living may now be analyzed into funda-
mental concepts renders the use of any other terms than
those of matter and energy quite out of place in their
serious discussions. On the other hand, biological in-
quiry has still much to do with theoretical attributes
which can not be put to any satisfactory test, and this
condition may be in part responsible for the prevalence
of the adaptational point of view in our science. It seems
to be partly because biological problems are too complex
for ready analysis at present, that the adaptational prop-
erties of living things are so often stated in terms other
than those of the fundamental concepts of matter and
energy.
_ In this connection it is, however, to be remembered that
ease of analysis depends as much upon the state of the
analyzing mind as upon the complexity of the analyzed
object. A mind is conceivable, I think, that would con-
No. 554] ADAPTATION IN LIVING AND NON-LIVING 77
sider the phenomenon of cell division as just as capable
of analysis as is that of a chemical reaction like flame;
and we are sure that there have been in the past (and are
indeed at present) minds to which flame would appear
quite as hopeless of analysis as does cell division to us.
I have said that the qualities of living things are too
complex for analysis at present, I might as well have
said that we are at present too ignorant and too feeble to
analyze such qualities. Our science is young yet, not in
years, perhaps, nor yet in absolute achievement, but in
the relation of its present phase of development to the
task which is set before it. It appears to be this youth-
ful quality in biology which may partially explain, as I
have said, the somewhat starting generalization with
which we began.
Active Adaptations.—Biological writing employs the
term adaptation in an active sense as well as in the pas-
sive one heretofore considered in this paper, and it re-
mains to give some attention to this usage, and to an ap-
parent confusion of cause and effect which is connected
therewith. To obtain a clearly legitimate case of active
adaptation we shall have to turn to human affairs, for
reasons which will soon be evident, and the familiar
adaptation of the watch will serve our need as well as
any other. The little machine is complex, too complex
for most of us to understand, and it seems to be much
better adapted than any living thing to long-continued,
uniform motion of a certain specified kind. If I make in-
quiry regarding the causes, or antecedent conditions, to
which this adaptation is due, I find that the various parts
have been made and assembled with reference to the very
adaptation which I am investigating. In my search after
causal relations I have been entrapped in a mesh of un-
investigated psychological phenomena and have discov-
ered the puzzling truth that the watch is what it is,
simply because it was to be what it is! In other words,
the cause of the effect which we are considering is re-
garded as some sort of disembodied spirit of the effect
78 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST (Von. XLVII
itself, and this effect, in order to be the cause of itself
must have existed before it came into being.
Of course we realize that we have thus come into con-
tact with the darkest problem with which biological sci-
ence has to deal, namely, the problem of human purpose-
ful action and of the human will. While I see no reason
for doubting that this problem may eventually yield to
analysis and comparative measurements, yet it must be
admitted that progress in this direction has only just
begun, so that anything but the most superficial consid-
erations in this connection is at present but waste of time
and trouble. We have here, for the present, to acknowl-
edge our fundamental ignorance, and to hold our minds
in that state of suspended judgment to which, in less
complex affairs, students of all the natural sciences have
become used.
Although we are as yet unable to analyze into simple
terms of matter and energy the antecedents which con-
ditioned the adaptation that is before us in the watch,
yet it seems that our analysis of the universe about us
has progressed far enough so that we may be justified in
frankly maintaining that the problem of purposeful cau-
sation has no place in any of our considerations, except-
ing solely those wherein human consciousness has been
involved among the causal conditions. To employ other
terms, I think we are bound to regard the nature of the
future outcome of all processes as totally non-existent,
and consequently absolutely without influence in the pres-
ent, excepting alone (and temporarily) those processes
for which the human will is accounted a necessary ante-
cedent.
We may now inquire as to the causes which have been
in operation to bring about the peculiarly low specific
gravity of the pumice pebbles in my case of the floating
adaptation of these bodies. We are assuredly unable to
state these causal conditions in anything approaching
completeness, but we are nevertheless sure that human
purposefulness has played absolutely no part in the
No. 554] ADAPTATION IN LIVING AND NON-LIVING 79
matter, so that we put the floating adaptation of these
pebbles entirely out of mind as soon as we begin our
search for the causes thereof.
Geology, it seems, does not find purposeful action nec-
essary in its explanations. Neither does any progress
come from a consideration of purposeful changes in the
readjustments of atoms with which chemistry deals, nor
in the phenomena of heat migration which constitute a por-
tion of the field of physics. Modern astronomy sees no-
purposeful activity in the motions of sidereal space, nor
does meteorology seek in the effects of a storm any sugges-
tion of the causes which brought it into being. Many
branches of biological science, however, although confess-
edly not dealing with human purposeful activity, seem
_ frequently to seek in the future the causes of the present.
Thus our science teems with purposeful reactions, and
this feature of the idea of adaptation adds its influence to-
the ones already mentioned, playing an important rôle in
keeping the sciences of the non-living essentially and fun-
damentally separate from those of the living.
The history of the idea of causation in the natural sci-
ences suggests much that may have a bearing on our
judgment as to whether this present distinction between
the two groups of sciences is necessary and permanent or
merely temporary and passing. To primitive man all
problems were too complex for adequate analysis, and
purposeful activities of many kinds were devised to ex-
plain not only the doings of his fellow men but also the
doings of all nature. The whole world was then a world
of teleological causation. The heavenly bodies moved
_and the chemical elements combined or separated accord-
ing to the capricious wills of innumerable deities and
demons. Men then heard in the howling of the storm
and in the rumble of the earthquake the terrible voices of
the spirits of the air and earth. All living things were en-
dowed with a man-like consciousness and power of will-
ing to do, and everything struggled with everything else:
in a never-ending conflict of capricious wills.
80 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
In the development of our race, however, an increasing
experience of deterministic causal relations has been ac-
companied by a progressive effort to expunge the idea of
purposefulness from our thinking. The numerous myth-
ological personages just called to mind have gradually
suffered a curtailing of their powers for good and evil, ’
and have, in general, by natural science at least, been
totally disearded. Many relics of the past of course re-
main in all our mental life; many of our words and not a
few of our instinctive modes of thought are survivals
from the teleological period of our development. Jupiter
and Venus still play their part in modern astronomy, and
Vulean’s name is still heard among geologists. But ob-
vious teleological expressions have been generally out-
grown and discarded by all of the sciences that deal with
the non-living. In biology alone they persist, mainly as
personifications of plants and animals, making our mod-
- ern writings a curious jumble of exactly stated observa-
tions and conclusions, together with many statements
that might have been taken bodily from primitive fairy-
tales. Foreseeing of the future and conscious purpose
are apparently attributed to living things in which we
have no evidence for the existence of consciousness. The
eye develops in the animal in order that it may see, the
leaves of the plant are for the purpose of obtaining car-
bon dioxid from the atmosphere. The list of such state-
ments might be made very long, but you are quite fa-
miliar with their nature.
Not only are the organisms with which we deal fre-
quently personified to the extent of attributing to them
the foresight and will needed to carry out complicated
plans, but they are also frequently supposed to be ca-
pable of making a mistaken judgment. I find in Gibson’s
translation of Jost’s ‘‘ Plant Physiology,” 1907 (page
389), an excellent example of this assumption, where it
appears that one lower organism may be clever enough
to outwit another. The statement in question reads,
‘‘The gall, for example, is of service only to the insect,
No. 554] -> ADAPTATION IN LIVING AND NON-LIVING 81
but is highly disadvantageous to the plant; we must as-
sume, indeed, by way of explanation, that the insect suc-
ceeded in deluding the plant, so that instead of treating
the insect as an enemy and an intruder it behaved towsres
it as if it were a bit of itself.”
I think it is perfectly clear that the non-biological sci-
ences have all passed through a much earlier stage in
which purposeful adaptations were seriously considered,
-and it seems quite as clear that such concepts are not any
longer accepted in the serious studies of these sciences.
There seems also to be no doubt that the biological sci-
ences, notably in their physiological aspects, are tending
at the present time more and more to adopt a non-teleo-
logical point of view. From these points I again draw
the conclusion that ours is a developmentally young sci-
ence, that it still retains features of its early youth, and
that the concept of purposeful adaptation is one of these
features, sooner or later to be totally abandoned, even as
the same concept has already been abandoned by the
other natural sciences.
If my conclusion should be wrong, then one of two
propositions must follow: either the sciences of the non-
living have fallen into error, ought to have retained the
concept of purpose in natural phenomena, and will sooner
or later return to this concept; or else there is a great
and fundamental difference between the living and the
non-living, and teleology has a logical place in considera-
tions of the former objects but not in those of the latter.
Although it is to be realized that the possibility of one or
the other of these propositions can not be rigidly denied
at the present time, yet the probability of either one is
definitely decreased by every analytical conquest of sci-
ence. The controversy here suggested—which seems in
our time as wastefully to absorb our energies as did the
discussion of special creation in the time of Charles Dar-
win—is characterized by this peculiar feature, that, while
all evidence presented for teleological causes is conspicu-
ously based upon our ignorance and present inability to
82 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
analyze our problems, the evidence offered in the opposite
direction is just as conspicuously positive and consists
of cases which have already been subjected to relatively
complete analysis. As Cowles! has pointed out, there has
never been any retrogression in these matters; all phe-
nomena now explained non-teléolgically were once ex-
plained teleologically, but no non-teleological explanation
once attained, has ever been replaced by one involving
purpose. Under these circumstances, a pragmatic judg-
ment must be rendered, at least tentatively, in favor of
the position here taken, that teleological thinking should
have, and will at length have, no place in our science at all.
Conclusion.—I think it is to be concluded from the con-
siderations here set forth that there is nothing known of
the nature of living things which should lead the bio-
logical sciences to base their inquiries on any other
methods or modes of thought than those employed in the
sciences of the non-living. In both its aspects, passive
and active, the dominance of the concept of adaptation,
which now distinguishes our science from the non-bio-
logical ones, is related to the comparatively youthful
stage of development so far attained by biology, and not
to any observed character of the living objects with which
we deal. It seems obvious that biology is advancing
slowly but steadily along the path already traversed by
the other natural sciences, and I think our present opera-
tions may best be guided by the hypothesis that all these
sciences will eventually come to deal with the same funda-
mental concepts and modes of thought. Should this con-
dition of affairs ever come to actual attainment, then the
discussions which now center about the idea of adapta-
tion might be expected to give place to other discussions
of causal relations between measured qualities and prop-
erties of the objects dealt with, such as are already begin-
ning to be common in many lines of biological study.
* Cowles, H. C., in Coulter, Barnes and Cowles, ‘‘Text-book of Botany,’’
2: 948. 1911.
cd
ADAPTATION IN ANIMAL REACTIONS!
PROFESSOR G. H. PARKER
Harvarp UNIVERSITY
In recent times no feature of animal or plant life has
been accorded greater emphasis than adaptation, and
this property has been repeatedly declared to be one of
the fundamental characteristics, if not the most funda-
mental, of living bodies. Nevertheless, the field of or- —
ganic adaptation has been scarcely more than superfi-
cially surveyed. With the naive instinct of the collector,
the biologist has been content to roam over this vast
territory and gather here and there what seemed to him
to be striking examples of adaptation till our texts are
rich storehouses of instances of nature’s apparent in-
genuity. How well founded even the more striking of
these examples are, no one really knows, though the ef-
fect of the whole collection on the naturalist is to en-
gender in him a feeling akin to awe for the adaptive
capacity of living beings. May it not be, however, that
we overestimate this aspect of organic nature and em-
phasize beyond reason its real value as a factor in the
organic world? It is my opinion, at least, that many ani-
mal reactions which we have been accustomed to call
adaptations should not be thus designated, and that the
difficulties that we often meet in attempting to account
for such reactions are due to our consideration of them
from the standpoint of adaptations when in reality they
are far from being such.
Adaptations are indissolubly connected with the ac-
tivities of animals and plants. We are only just begin-
ning to learn that an organism in its essentials is an ac-
tive, working system, that the moment we think of it as
*Read at the Symposium on Adaptation at the meeting of the American
Society of. Naturalists, Cleveland, January 2, 1913.
83
+
84 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLVII
a machine standing still, we divest it of precisely that
element which is most distinctive of it. The anatomical
conception of an organism as a mechanism at rest, useful
and important as it has been and is still, is thus funda-
mentally defective. The essential feature of every liv-
ing thing is incessant activity, and adaptations are part
and parcel of this activity. Even such apparently pas-
sive examples as the adaptation of a moth to the bark of
the tree on which it rests depends for success as much
on the position of the moth’s body, the pose of its wings,
etc., all features of muscular action, as upon the color
` pattern of the exposed parts. Thus adaptation, like
other truly organic phenomena, exhibits a fundamental
dependence on organic activity, a condition that favors
the conception of the organism as put forward long ago
by Lamarck.
But adaptation is not only essentially associated with
the activities of organisms; it is also conditioned by the
continuity of this activity. Every organic line of descent
has had its past history and can look forward to a pos-
sible future. The continuity thus indicated is an es-
sential part of organic nature. The inorganic may at
any moment be completely resolved into its elements and
recombined at the next moment into a new order without
violating the law of its existence. But an organism can
not undergo such a revolution without annihilation; an
animal or plant subjected to such a process would cease
to exist. Hence life is not only activity; it is activity so
directed as to be continuous, to be self-perpetuating.
Continuity of action is, therefore, an inherent part of
the make-up of living things, and adaptation is condi-
tioned by this continuity in that those reactions are
adaptive which make for a continuance of life.
Strictly speaking, adaptations exist no more in nature
than does a species; it is a word in the dictionary, a fig-
ment of the human brain. Just as the systematist finds
the individual animal or plant the real object of his in-
vestigation, so the student of adaptation finds individ-
w
No. 554] ADAPTATION IN ANIMAL REACTIONS 85
ual animal movements the material for his study.
Broadly speaking, these movements range from the hid-
den internal processes in the animal economy to the more
obvious external forms of behavior.
The very fact that adaptations have been classed
under one head to the exclusion of other forms of ani-
mal reactions has given them a certain undue promi-
nence, but this is not the only reason for their usurping
more than a fair share of attention. Many animal reac-
tions that are in no proper sense adaptations have been
brought under this head, and in certain quarters this
process of appropriation has gone to such an extent that
every animal reaction has been supposed to have some
adaptive significance. How far this is from the truth
can be made clear by a homely example. When a person
faints, his best position for recovery is a horizontal one,
and into approximately this position he is very likely to |
fall. Furthermore, he falls with limp muscles, a method
which under the circumstances is much safer than that
of falling with a tense body such as usually occurs in con-
sciousness. Thus the position into which a fainting per-
son falls and the method of arriving at it, have all the
appearances of adaptations. Yet, in my opinion, any
one who would interpret these movements as adapta-
tions would lay himself open to a charge of unreality.
. The new position, favorable as it is for recovery, is in
fact the mere consequence of the faint, and as such it
completely loses any claim as an adaptation. That it is
advantageous is purély incidental; it might equally well
have been disadvantageous. Thus responses, even when
of a favorable nature, are not necessarily adaptations,
though they may resemble them to a striking degree.
An adaptation is not only a favorable response, it is a
favorable response especially developed to meet a par-
ticular emergency.
If it is so easy to point out pseudo-adaptations among
our own activities, it is highly probable that they also
occur among the responses of the lower animals, And
86 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST (Vou. XLVII
such seems to be the case. That an isolated blastomere
representing a half or a quarter of the egg of Amphioxus
should be able under favorable conditions to develop
into a complete larva is at first sight a surprising fact
and seems to give evidence of a remarkable power of
adaptation. But such an interpretation is far from justi-
fiable. The growth of the isolated blastomere seems to
me much more like the falling of a fainting person than
like a process devised to meet a special emergency, and,
important and illuminating as this growth is from the
standpoint of our understanding of the mechanism of
the egg, it is, I believe, a good case of pseudo-adaptation
rather than of true adaptiveness. All eggs certainly do
not show this trait and to single out the egg of Amphi-
oxus and extol this reaction as an adaptation is to give
to it weight beyond its deserts. To call this an adapta-
tion is to read adaptation into it as only an overzealous
advocate could do. Dame Nature under the circum-
‘stances might well be likened to a certain English poet,
who, on visiting incognito an exposition of his own
verses, was amazed at the wonders they were said to
contain.
The majority of animal reactions are, in all probabil-
ity, neither conspicuously advantageous nor disadvanta-
geous to the life of the individual. They are dependent
chiefly on the material composition of the given organism,
and, so long as they are relatively indifferent to the con-
tinuance of life, they pass without special consequence.
Relatively speaking only now and then do we have condi-
tions where a vitally important form of response, an adap-
tive response, appears. On the whole the flow of action in
the daily life of many organisms requires little of such
special activity and proceeds at the level of mild indiffer-
ence. In other words, adaptive reactions as the controll-
ing factors in animal life are, I believe, by no means so
universal as some of their advocates would have us think.
The world at large affords an environment in which
each animal has a wide range for possible reactions and
No.554] ADAPTATION IN ANIMAL REACTIONS 87
of a number of responses that might be made to a given
set of conditions, one may be quite as appropriate for
the continuance of life as another. In other words ver-
satility seems to be a more truthful description of the
actual conditions in animal life than the rather rigid
state implied in the application of the idea of adaptive
responses. Animal reactions in most cases seem to be
more of the nature of fluctuations than of mutations, to
borrow a related phraseology; they are individual idio-
syneracies that are insignificant so far as the race is con-
cerned and are usually not interfered with because of the
generous latitude permitted by the environment. From
this standpoint animal reactions have a variety whose
explanation is to be sought for, as adaptations, but as an
expression of the momentary physical and chemical
make-up of the individual, a condition which does not
easily repeat itself and which therefore agrees with the
diversity of reactions exhibited by the organism.
Yet it is not for a moment to be assumed that adapta-
tions are not evident among animal reactions. When it
is remembered what enormous numbers of young are
lost in the process of producing one adult and that much
of this loss is due to misdirected animal reactions, it is
impossible to believe that adaptations, as roughed out by
a crude selective process, should not have become in-
grained in most animals. In fact any adequate survey of
the general field of animal reactions shows at once that
the main topographic features are adaptational and when
one reflects that this has probably been brought about in
large part by the elimination of myriads of individuals
mainly on the basis of some false step in their reactions,
one is compelled to admit that in our zeal for the study
of animal behavior, we may have missed the importance
of the lesson to be drawn from animal misbehavior. But
however this may be, I am convinced that, though the
main reaction systems of animals are essentially adap-
tive, the details of their ordinary flow of responses is
mostly free from adaptive influence and proceeds on
88 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST (Vou. XLVII
lines determined chiefly by the momentary state of the
individual concerned.
That animal reactions of an adaptive kind may possess
qualities that apparently exceed the possibility of origin
through selective operations has often been pointed out.
In fact it is from this standpoint that adaptation as a
sort of transcendental property of the organism. has
gained its most ardent votaries. And it must be admitted
that the illustrations given in support of this view are
most baffling and perplexing to the opponents. That a
dog which has had its diet changed from bread to meat,
should quickly exhibit a change in its pancreatic juice
from a type well adapted to bread and poorly adapted to
meat to another in which the reverse is true, is a fact of
adaptation the explanation of which seems beyond reach.
Here we are face to face with what appears to be a quick
adaptation of a thoroughly successful kind and without
the intervention of nervous activity. No wonder that in
face of facts, such as these, the more speculative members
of the biological camp seize their entelechies as the only
weapons with which they may hope to do battle. But
after all is the entelechy a reliable weapon. In all reac-
tions of the kind just mentioned, we are prone to say that
though there is not the least reason to suppose that intel-
ligence has really intervened, the whole affair passes off
as though directed by some such agent; hence we assume
some intelligence-like factor, some entelechy, to be active
for the time. But when we look at the matter deliber-
ately, we must admit that intelligence is only our own ex-
pression for that aggregate of nervous states and actions
which is our chief means of adaptation. To say then that
one category of adaptive acts, the adjustment of secre-
tions to particular kinds of food, has a fundamental re-
semblance to another category of adaptive acts, our in-
telligent performances, is not to offer an explanation but
to leave the matter where it was. When we know more
of the real nature of intelligence, we shall be in a better
position to attack the problem of adaptive reactions, and,
No.554] ADAPTATION IN ANIMAL REACTIONS 69
conversely, when we know more about adaptive reactions,
we shall be in a better position to attack the problem of
intelligence. Meanwhile, do not let us deceive ourselves
by confusing an argument in a circle with real progress.
In attempting a solution of the problem of adaptive reac-
tions, it is well to remember that entelechies and other
like notions do not really bring us forward, for they are
at most soporifics to the mind that would naturally be
excited to research by precisely those questions that they
tend to obscure. 7
In conclusion then I would maintain that the details
of animal reactions are in the main free from adaptive
restraint and that their diversity is dependent chiefly
upon the fluctuating momentary condition of the animal
body; further, that the main outlines of animal reactions
are adaptive, but that when we attempt to explain this
condition by assuming that it is dependent upon some-
thing like intelligence, we are arguing in a circle, for in-
telligence is merely our name for our own ch‘ef means of
adaptation.
ADAPTATION FROM THE POINT OF VIEW OF
THE PHYSIOLOGIST"
PROFESSOR ALBERT P. MATHEWS
THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO
I FEEL much ashamed in having to expose my intellec-
tual nakedness before the members of this society. When
I came to this meeting I supposed that adaptation, or the
fitness of organisms to their environments, was a physio-
logical truism; that fishes were fitted by their structures
and functions to a life in the water; that frogs were so
constituted that they could live either on land or in water ;
and I was even so ignorant as to believe that many struc-
tures of a bird’s body adapted it to flight. But it appears
from the paper of one of my colleagues that in all of these
things I was most woefully mistaken.
I feel some hesitation, also, in appearing before a
society composed largely of American students of genet-
ics, for I have no new and confusing terminology to pro-
pose; and owing to my ignorance of the language they
speak and of the short-hand symbols sometimes employed,
I am, perforce, compelled to speak in ordinary English
which may be understood by any one; all of which, I fear,
must invest all I have to say with an air of superficiality,
or even of simplicity. I am besides a confirmed con-
servative in the matter of evolution, holding fast to the
explanation of adaptation given by Darwin of natural
selection of small variations; having little or no con-
fidence that genes, unit characters, mutations, saltations,
allelomorphs, determiners, inhibitors, dominants and re-
cessives, genotyes and phenotyes, are anything more than
ghosts, without substance; and looking always for simple
explanations of a physical and chemical kind, capable of
* Read at the Symposium on Adaptation at the meeting of the American
Society of Naturalists, Cleveland, January 2, 1913.
90
No.554] ADAPTATION AND THE PHYSIOLOGIST 91
expression in ordinary language, of the apparent com-
plexities of evolution. I avow myself as a physiologist to
be a follower of Darwin, admiring his methods of careful
experiment and observation, his long cogitations, and
with confidence in the soundness of his judgment. There
has been a tendency of recent years in certain quarters
to belittle his work, to make fun of his conclusions, to
deny that evolution has been a slow and steady continu-
ous process, as the rocks show, and to assert that it has
taken place by a hop, skip and a jump, and that it would
have taken place anyway without natural selection.
Physics and chemistry have attempted to express the
physical world in terms of matter and energy, and many
biologists are attempting to extend this method to the
living world. While this is a necessary and admirable
thing to do, it must not be forgotten that in doing so
they are neglecting the main fact of life, consciousness,
and that the phenomena of life can not be accounted for
if this is neglected. It is obvious, too, that the physicist,
with his present conception of matter and energy, is mak-
ing as great a mistake in neglecting the psychical side of
matter as the biologist would make if he neglected the
physical side. For the psychical, like the physical, must
be due to the properties of the atoms, or at least is asso-
ciated always with them. For'the atoms are the same in
living and lifeless, their properties are inherent in them
and can not be taken away and added to them as if they
were wagons, which changed horses, as Du Bois Ray-
mond has put it.
It is my opinion that physiology comes powerfully to
the support of Darwin’s conclusions; that it shows clearly
that there are no such things as independently variable,
unit characters; that a jump is a physiological impossi-
bility; and that most so-called mutations are in reality
reversions, as Darwin thought; and inthis position physi-
ology is, I believe, supported by paleontology.
But while accepting many of Darwin’s conclusions, we
must all admit that many phenomena are very hard
92 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLVIL
to understand on the basis of Darwin’s explanations.
Among these difficulties, most of which were recognized
by Darwin, there are the phenomena of parallel evolu-
tion among different species and genera, which, though
diverse, appear all to be moving forward in the same
direction; the phenomena of steady, limited progress in
one direction which point toward orthogenetic variation ;
the phenomena of the appearance of rudiments and their
development until useful. It is exactly these difficulties
upon which physiology throws some light; and it is of
them that I particularly wish to speak.
In the evolution of animals two movements may be
perceived: a spreading out and a progress; a diversifica-
tion and a movement forward. The first movement is
illustrated by the formation of many different species
in one genus; or of many genera of the same type of
animal; the second by the movement forward in the line
of nla oR of all these species. These two movements
were not sharply distinguished by Darwin, but they have
been more or less clearly recognized by several philoso-
phers. It is this double movement which has given the
animal kingdom the form of a branching tree instead of .
a single trunk. Darwin dealt mainly with the first of
these movements, which gives rise to genera, species and
varieties; which is shown by the diversification of ani-
mals sad plants in domestication by human selection ;
and he explained it by the progressively better adaptation
of forms to particular environments. He believed the
second movement, the movement upward, was due to the
same cause.
It is the second movement which has been so hard to
explain and which has particularly puzzled the paleon-
tologist; the successive series of dominating types on
the earth’s surface culminating in man; the progress
steadily toward the goal of consciousness and intelligence.
The question which I wish to raise is whether these two
movements, which are at right angles to each other, may
not be due to the natural selection of two different kinds
~-
No. 554] ADAPTATION AND THE PHYSIOLOGIST 93
of adaptations: first, adaptations of form and function to
different kinds of environments; and second, the natural
selection of the function of irritability, or, in other words,
to the selection of adaptability, or the adaptation to
changeableness of environment. Selection of the first
kind of adaptations may have given rise to varieties,
species, genera of the same type of animal, and have pro-
duced the spreading, or diversification; while selection of
the second kind of adaptation may have produced the
movement onward and upward of all animal forms.
These two kinds of adaptations do not always go
together and selection of the one may outweigh the other.
It is because selection to a specific environment some-
times is more important than selection of adaptations to
changeableness, that not all organisms have progressed
in the scale of evolution equally rapidly: but some have
persisted in special environments with slight changes of
structure for very long periods, or may even have retro-
gressed; while other forms, in which the second adapta-
tion has been rigorously selected, have moved rapidly on-
ward and upward, and show little adaptation to any
Special environment.
The question whether evolutionary progress is due to
the selection of this second adaptation, that of adapt-
ability, occurs very naturally to a physiologist, because,
in the first place, the evolutionary development of con-
sciousness and intelligence appears to him to be one of
the most important, if not the most characteristic move-
ment in evolution; and in the second place, his point of
View in considering evolution and adaptation is some-
what different from that of the zoologist or the paleontolo-
gist. To him the organism does not appear constituted
of bones, skin, horns, or other structures, but to be consti-
tuted essentially of a number of mechanisms in activity,
each mechanism having a definite function to perform.
Evolution, for the physiologist, is not evolution of struc-
ture primarily, but evolution of function; and he natu-
94 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLVII
rally expects to find that the adaptations of function have
been of great importance in determining survival.
Of all the physiological properties of the original proto-
plasm upon which natural selection might be supposed to
act, irritability, the most fundamental property of living
matter, would seem the most probable point of attack;
for irritability is that property of protoplasm in virtue
of which it adjusts itself to its environment. It is the
property of response; and since it is the environment
which is acting as the judge of the excellence of the
response and doing the selecting, it would seem that it
must be upon this property that all organisms must be
tested. It is, moreover, this property that Spencer has
very acutely selected as the most fundamental charac-
teristic of living organisms, namely, the power of continu-
ous adjustment of internal to external conditions. It
would seem probable that however well animals might be
adapted to special environments by the action of natural
selection, this particular property, or function, which has
to do with the continuous adjustment of internal to ex-
ternal relations must have been throughout the whole
course of evolution of predominant importance. And if
there has been any unity in the progress; if the course of
evolution has been at all in any single direction; and if
the natural selection theory is true; it must be in the
direction of the perfecting of this function.
I think this short statement will make it clear why the
physiologist turns naturally to this fundamental quality,
or property of living things, when he considers evolution
and adaptation; for however organisms may vary in
structure or other particulars, they all have irritability
in common. Moreover, I think most physiologists will
agree with me that this particular property has been too
often neglected by most students of evolution, among
whom physiologists have been unfortunately very rare.
Irritability shows itself in all cells by the power of
internal change in response to an external change. In
most cells of the body there is nothing especially adaptive
No.554] ADAPTATION AND THE PHYSIOLOGIST 95
in the nature of many of these responses; but it is quite
otherwise, if we consider the organisms as wholes. It
is clear that all organisms have not only the power of
reacting to an external change, but many of their reac-
tions are adaptive to a surprising degree. This is indeed
the very crux of the difference between living organisms
and lifeless things. A lifeless thing can not adjust its
internal to its external relations so that it can continue
to exist in a changed environment. A crystal in a solu-
tion of its kind must dissolve, if the concentration is kept
ever so little below saturation; a whole universe must
pass away, if anywhere within it there is a persistent
uncompensated difference of potential. With living things
it is quite otherwise. They have the power of interposing `
resistances to the potential difference. All living things
without exception have adaptive responses so that they
are able to continue in existence even though their sur-
roundings change in many different ways. They possess
adaptability. Their responses due to their irritability
are adaptive responses. The irritability of the organism
as a whole is, then, above everything else characterized
by power of adaptive response.
It is not difficult to imagine how this specialization of
the general property of irritability arose. Some of the
indefinite responses of the original organisms to environ-
mental change protected the organism against the change.
Organisms with such responses survived and their de-
scendants had the property of a limited adaptive response
to this particular change. From this crude beginning
further progress was easy. The changes in the environ-
ment, though many, are not indefinite in number, and
adaptations in the nature of direct responses easily arose
and were perfected.
Adaptability, then, appears to the physiologist as the
master word of evolution. And many facts also may be
urged as confirming this conclusion. For example, one
and all of the great physiological mechanisms of the body
have a single purpose: to secure adaptability. Not to
96 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
adapt an organism to one environment, but to all environ-
ments, and thus to make it superior to all environments.
Furthermore, the higher organisms are specially remark-
able for the development of that master tissue of the body
which is preeminently irritable and of which the main
function is the adjustment of internal to external rela-
tions, the nervous system; and finally that the inference
is sound may be concluded from the fact that it is by
adaptability and by no other quality whatever that organ-
isms may be arranged in the order of their evolutionary
progress.
It is not at all surprising that adaptability should be
the most important adaptation in nature, overpowering,
except in special cases, and dominating all others. For
there is but one certain thing in nature: namely: uncer-
tainty. The most constant feature of all environments,
but particularly of land environments, has been their in-
constancy. Changeableness is the chief characteristic of
all environments, whatever their special characters may
be. There are changes of light, temperature, climate,
oxygen and carbon dioxide, moisture; changes due to
the introduction of new species by migration upsetting
nature’s balance; changes in the food supply. Climates,
flora and fauna change; change alone persists. Change
is the essential thing. We may expect, therefore, if
Darwin be correct in his conclusion that variation and
natural selection account for evolution, that adaptation
to changeableness must be the chief adaptation in nature,
and more than all others, it must have determined the
general course of evolution. This is found to be the case
and the great physiological mechanisms of the body are
designed, as already stated, to subserve this fundamental
adaptation. Adaptability is that power which fits organ-
isms to withstand the unexpected: the vicissitudes of life;
special adaptations of form and color may contribute to
` the survival of animals; but the essential, or root, adapta-
tion is to changeableness. By adaptation to all environ-
ments they become finally superior to all environments.
No.554] ADAPTATION AND THE PHYSIOLOGIST 97
Superiority to environment, and not adaptation to it, is
secured through the irritability of the organism con-
sidered as a whole.
The great mechanisms of the body which have this
function are several. First, the heat-regulating mechan-
ism, for by means of this organisms are rendered inde-
pendent of the temperature of their environments. They
can exist in the tropics or in the arctics and withstand the
extremes of our own climate, while maintaining their
activities. This is a complex mechanism consisting of
insulating material in the skin; trophic nerves to the
internal organs; a closed vascular system; a power of
rapid oxidation; supra-renal capsules; pancreas; nervous
coordination; sweat glands; evaporation of water in the
lungs; temperature nerves. More than any other this
mechanism enabled the mammals to conquer the reptiles
and supplant them. The mammals became independent
of the temperature of their environments. A mechanism
not coming by jumps, but the rudiments found far down
in the fishes and slowly evolved.
A second fundamental mechanism of great importance
for the mammals in supplanting the reptiles and other
animals probably was that concerned in immunity. Most
of the toxins of poisonous reptiles are of a protein nature.
The mammals have developed a mechanism, the details
of which are still obscure, but which apparently consists
in the conversion of these protein toxins into bodies which
neutralize the toxins from which they are formed, that is,
into antitoxins, We find, as a matter of fact, that at least
many of the mammals are able apparently to make an
anti-toxin out of any kind of a foreign protein. Besides
this mechanism of defense, useful against bacteria, as
Well as against snakes, there is the primitive mode of
Phagocytosis and the chemical method of defense, which
consists either in the prevention of absorption, or in the
chemical neutralization of the poison by union with other
Substances. Thus the toxicity of phenols, benzoic acid
and many alkaloids are neutralized. By this mechanism
98 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST (Vou. XLVII
mammals are rendered superior to the attacks of many of
their enemies and to this extent rendered superior to their
environments.
Third, there is the mechanism for rendering mammals
tolerably independent of the moisture content of their
environment, a mechanism most highly developed in the
reptiles. A mechanism formed by the replacing of the
wet skin of the amphibian by a dry or scaly skin; the
perfecting of the kidneys to maintain osmotic pressure
of the blood; the control of the sweat glands and loss of
water by the intestines; the development of membranes
non-permeable to salts, so that animals may sit in fresh
water and not lose their salts. One of the most interest-
ing parts of this mechanism is shown in the reptiles and
birds, in the substitution of uric acid for urea in their
excretions. By this improvement reptiles have secured
almost complete independence of the water content of
their environments. They make enough water in their
own bodies to supply their small losses. This again is
a mechanism of which we can trace the steady growth
without a break from the invertebrates to man.
A fourth great mechanism makes mammals independent
of barometric fluctuations and less dependent on a fixed
atmosphere. By means of their blood loaded with hemo-
globin carried in corpuscles lacking all oxygen-consuming
power, they are able to live on lofty plateaus, or in deep
valleys; and in the presence of much or little carbon
dioxide.
The mechanisms having to do with reproduction and
the caring for the young afterward have this same
advantage of rendering the mammals independent of
environment.
A sixth mechanism is the alimentary mechanism, most
highly perfected in man. This has rendered him inde-
pendent of any particular kind of food. He can make
‘his body of any kind of plant or animal. He can make
carbohydrate out of protein and many other things. He
ean live in any climate largely because of this mechanism.
No. 554] ADAPTATION AND THE PHYSIOLOGIST 99
Again a complex mechanism, consisting of teeth, of diges-
tive glands tearing proteins and carbohydrates to pieces,
so that he can build up his own proteins from any other
kind, useless amino acids being converted into sugar and
urea.
The last and by far the most important of these great
mechanisms of adaptability is that which provides for
every contingency; for the unexpected. It seems that
nature, after elaborating these other mechanisms to meet
particular vicissitudes, has lumped all other vicissitudes
into one and made a means of meeting them all. One
can not but be pleased by the apparent ingenuity of this
solution. I refer to the nervous mechanism. It is obvious
how this mechanism, by substituting choice for blind in-
stinct, consciousness for unconsciousness, developing
memory, so that one can profit by experience, and intelli-
gent adaptation of means to ends, has provided finally for
all possible contingencies of the future. She has spoken
her last word. Adaptability, or superiority to environ-
ment, was the end so blindly sought ; memory, conscious-
ness, choice were the means, shall I say the means as
blindly adopted?
To the physiologist, then, adaptability appears to be
the touchstone with which nature has tested each kind of
organism evolved; it has been the yard stick, with which
She has measured each animal type; it has been the
counterweight against which she has balanced each of her
productions. However well adapted to a specific environ-
ment a type might be, did it lack ever so little of its possi-
bilities in this direction, it was sooner or later relegated
to the scrap heap. Some forms, to be sure, persisted in
Special environments, where they were protected from.
competition, as in Australia; or where the environment
was fairly constant, as in the sea; or in special environ-
ments for which they were highly suited; but the whole
trend of evolution, with these exceptions, may be summed
up by the statement: the general course of evolution has
been always from the beginning to the end, in the direc-
100 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
tion of increasing adaptability or increasing perfection
of irritability. This law may be put by the side of the
law for the evolution of universes: all spontaneous change
is in the direction of increasing entropy.
It is not by form, by color, by increasing complexity or
simplicity, that animals may be classified in the order of
their evolutionary appearance. It is by this property of
adaptability and this alone. At the summit is man; now
consciously attempting to carry on what nature has been
unconsciously attempting these millions of years, and to
secure mastery of his environment. Below him are the
other placental mammals of lower intelligence; beneath
them the marsupials, less adaptable than the mammals,
because of lower brain power; then the reptiles independ-
ent of water, but not of temperature; the amphibia, only
partially independent of water, but not of temperature;
the teleosts able to live in salt and fresh water; the
selachians, most without osmotic control and limited to
the sea; the arthropods living on land and sea, but depend-
ent on temperature, food and climate, cramped by an
external skeleton, and with the fatal defect of running
the alimentary canal through the nervous system, so that
for higher brain power, either a new nervous system or a
new alimentary canal would be needed; lower still the
molluses and annelids, closely limited to their environ-
ments; and last the echinoderms and protozoa. No adap-
tation or power of the body has been so consistently
attacked by natural selection as this; and it is this prop-
erty which seems to have been the determining factor in
the general course of evolution and to have determined
the steady development of the psychic powers.
I come now to the second part of my subject, namely,
correlation. By the first part I have attempted to show
that the selection of variations in adaptability is respon-
sible for at least a part of the steady progress in one
direction of many kinds of animals; and explains that
unity of progress which has been one of the main causes
for assuming orthogenesis. In this second part of the
No. 554] ADAPTATION AND THE PHYSIOLOGIST 101
paper, I hope to show that the development of our knowl-
edge of correlation removes some other difficulties which
Darwin had to meet, and probably explains some other
facts which have been urged as supporting orthogenesis.
Among the puzzles of evolution has been the steady
growth of rudimentary structures which have apparently
no function until they are considerably developed. I say
apparently no function, for the physiologist has learned
to be very cautious in saying that any part of the body
is without function or use. A few years ago it was quite
otherwise and it was supposed that various rudiments,
like the appendix, the hypophysis, the pineal gland, the
thymus and some other organs were without function;
the surgeons were busy explaining how much better we
were off without them; and the anti-Darwinian was fond
of presenting these things as not consonant with the view
of adaptation. At the present time the uselessness of
these rudimentary structures is no longer affirmed. We
must therefore be very cautious in supposing that any
structure we see, no matter how insignificant it may
appear, is without importance. Darwin himself felt the
great fact of correlation, and his pangene theory was
invented, in part, to account for these facts. He would
be both astonished and delighted could he know how com-
pletely physiology has vindicated his appeal to correla-
tion as the explanation of some difficulties.
Modern physiology has shown that the whole animal
organism is correlated by means of internal secretions;
that there is but one unit in the body, and that is the
whole organism. By the work of Knowlton and Starling
we now have the final proof of the correlation of the pan-
creas and muscles. The correlations between the hard
and soft parts of the body are of still greater importance
to the paleontologist, for it has been shown that the hard
parts are not independently variable, but that they are
dependent at every point upon the function of the soft,
internal organs. Who would have dreamed that the char-
acter of the skin, the hair, the shape of the skull, the in-
102 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST (Vou. XLVII
telligence itself, the length of the limbs, or the speed of
transformation of a tadpole into a frog would be depend-
ent on the thyroid or thymus gland? That the minute
parathyroids should be absolutely necessary to the life of
an organism thousands of times their weight? Or that
the development of the testes, the change of milk teeth
to the permanent dentition, the growth of the bones of
the extremities, should be dependent on the anterior lobe
of that apparently useless rudiment, the hypophysis? Or
that the secretion of milk and urine should depend on the
posterior lobe of the same organ? Who had the temerity
to suggest that the corpus luteum should be influencing
the development of the mammary glands? Do we not see,
indeed, that most of the characters of the body which
have steadily developed from the fishes to man are
secondary characters dependent on the anterior develop-
ment of these ductless glands? Is this fact without sig-
nificance to the paleontologist in helping him to under-
stand the apparent steady progress in one direction, the
appearance of orthogenesis? It will be asked, perhaps,
what has caused the steady development of these glands.
But the answer is not difficult. They are, in their turn,
parts of the mechanism of adaptability which has been
consistently selected in evolution. They are concerned
not only in the growth of bone, but in the growth of the
nervous system, the heat control of the body, the im-
munity mechanisms, the efficiency of muscles, and are in
the chain of reproduction itself. These facts largely
remove, in my opinion, the difficulties in understanding
how rudimentary organs could be useful.
But not only do these facts remove these difficulties in
the way of the selection theory, but they have a no less
important bearing on the problem of heredity. They
show that there can be no independently variable quali-
ties in the animal body. The body is a unit, and I, at
least, can imagine no part of it which can vary without
influencing other parts. Correlations are everywhere.
Pigment is often cited as a unit character, but how can it
No.554] ADAPTATION AND THE PHYSIOLOGIST 103
be so? Pigment is itself the result of a long and complex
series of changes. Ifa given cell produces no pigment it
is perfectly certain that its other chemical processes
are to some degree modified also, so that these other
things vary also. If this cell is changed so that it pro-
duces no pigment, then since it is the logical result of a
long series of changes in the developing organism, those
changes must have been different in animals producing
pigment and no pigment. But this means, since each
process in the early stage of development influences a
multitude of processes in the final change, that there must
be a host of differences correlated with the pigment
change. As a matter of fact, Darwin long ago pointed out
that pigment production was apparently correlated with
other factors; particularly with vital resistance, a fact
repeatedly mentioned to the writer, also by Whitman as
a result of his experiments in pigeon breeding. Darwin
cites the case of the Virginia pigs of which only the black
ones could eat a poisonous root without losing their hoofs;
and Whitman told me that always birds deficient in pig-
ment were also somewhat deficient in other characters
and were weaker. :
The essential unity of the organism is not only fatal to
the whole theory of unit characters, but it is an insuper-
able objection to the theory that evolution has been by
jumps. The organism is a finely adjusted mechanism of
a very complex kind; it seems impossible to a physiolo-
gist that one can cause a sudden large change in any part
of it and have it continue to function; it is as incredible
as if one should remove one of the wheels of a watch,
replace it by a larger one, and expect the watch to con-
tinue to run. Such a simple matter as the replacement
of urea by uric acid as an excretion, a change which the
reptiles introduced in their differentiation from the am-
phibia, a change which might conceivably be brought
about by the dropping out of a uricolytic enzyme, could
not take place suddenly. The kidneys and all other organs
of the body would need to be adjusted to this change.
104 , THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Von, XLVII
Finally correlation has greatly enhanced the value of
the old idea of checks in development and shows most
clearly that no organ of the body ever reaches its full
potentialities. What comes out of an egg is but one of
the infinite potentialities contained in it. Velocity of de-
velopment, like every other chemical reaction, is equal to
the affinity divided by the resistance. If resistances are
increased, or if vitality, in other words chemical affinity,
be reduced, the development must stop sooner than
normal; and we have the phenomena of reversion. If,
on the other hand, the reverse takes place, if vitality is
increased or resistance reduced, we have variation in the
direction of evolution. The development of nonviable
monsters is at one extreme of this process. Ontogeny is
like a runner, taking the first hurdles easily, but always
with increasing difficulty, sometimes trippling at one,
sometimes at another, but never reaching the end of his
race. :
In conclusion then: to the physiologist it appears that
the best explanation of adaptation is that given by Dar-
win of natural selection of small variations; that the
essential unity of the progress in evolution toward con-
sciousness and intelligence has been due to the natural
selection of the fundamental property of irritability, for
it is in virtue of this property that adaptability of organ-
isms has been increased. The recognition of this fact re-
moves one of the difficulties in the way of Darwin’s the-
ory. And,second, physiology by the establishment of the
` physiological correlation of all parts of the body, hard
and soft, interposes a final objection, in my opinion, to
the whole theory of unit characters, of independent vari-
ability of characters, and to the theory of evolution in
any other way than by a slow and gradual process, which
shall give time to the readjustments of every part of the
body necessitated by a change, however slight, in any
part of it.
THE FITNESS OF THE ENVIRONMENT, AN IN-
QUIRY INTO THE BIOLOGICAL SIGNIFI-
CANCE OF THE PROPERTIES
OF MATTER!
PROFESSOR LAWRENCE J. HENDERSON
HARVARD UNIVERSITY
Darwinian fitness is compounded of a mutual relation-
ship between the organism and the environment. Of this,
fitness of environment is quite as essential a component
as the fitness which arises in the process of organic evo-
lution; and in fundamental characteristics the actual
environment is the fittest possible abode of life. Such
is the thesis which I seek to establish. This is not a novel
hypothesis. In rudimentary form it has already a long
history behind it, and it was familiar doctrine in the early
nineteenth century. It presents itself anew as a result
of the recent growth of the science of physical chemistry.
In the study of fitness it has been the habit of biolo-
gists since Darwin to consider only the adaptations of the
living organism to the environment. For them in fact
the environment, in its past, present, and future, has been
an independent variable, and it has not entered into any
of the modern speculations to consider if by chance the
material universe also may be subjected to laws which are
in the largest sense important in organic evolution. Yet
fitness there must be, in environment as well as in the
organism. How, for example, could man adapt his civi-
lization to water power if no water power existed within
his reach?
At first sight it may well seem that inquiry into such
* Read at the Symposium on Adaptation at the meeting of the American
Society of Naturalists, Cleveland, January 2, 1913.
` This paper consists chiefly of excerpts from a book of the same title soon
to be published by the Macmillan Company.
105
106 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
a problem must end unsuccessfully in vague and unprofit-
able guesses. But the physico-chemical basis of life it at
length firmly established. On the whole, the composition
of living matter, its physical structure, the changes of
matter and energy which constitute the metabolic process,
together with the totality of such changes, which make up
the fundamental economic process of that largest com-
munity which consists of all living beings, are all clearly
defined.
THE CHARACTERISTICS OF LIFE
Under these circumstances it is certainly no rash enter-
prise to seek a definition of some of the essential char-
acteristics of life.. Although it is probably far beyond
our present power to make a complete study of the prob-
lem, I feel sure that a brief analysis will justify certain
very definite conclusions. Life as we know it is a physico-
chemical mechanism, and it is probably inconceivable
that it should be otherwise. As such it possesses, and,
we may well conclude, must ever possess, a high degree
of complexity—physically, chemically and physiologi-
cally, that is to say, structurally and functionally. We
can not imagine life which is no more complex than a
sphere, or salt, or the fall of rain, and, as we know it, it is
in fact a very great deal more complex than such simple
things. Next, living things, still more the community of
living things, are durable. But complexity and dur-
ability of mechanism are only possible if internal and
external conditions are stable. Hence automatic regula-
tions of the environment and the possibility of regulation
of conditions within the organism are essential to life.
It is not possible to specify a large number of conditions
which must be regulated, but certain it is from our present
experience that at least rough regulation of temperature,
pressure, and chemical constitution of environment and
organism are really essential to life, and that there is
great advantage in many other regulations and in finer
regulations. Finally a living being must be active, hence
its metabolism must be fed with matter and energy, and
No. 554] FITNESS OF ENVIRONMENT 107
accordingly there must always be exchange of matter and
energy with the environment.
Obviously these few conclusions can make no claim to
completeness. Fully to describe life, the discovery of
many other fundamental characteristics is necessary, in-
cluding such as are related to inheritance, variation, evo-
lution, consciousness and a host of other things. But in
the formation and logical development of such ideas
there is danger of fallacy at every step, and, since the
present list will suffice for the present purpose, further
considerations of this sort are best dispensed with. This
subject should not be put aside, however, without clear
emphasis that the postulates which have been adopted
above are extremely meager. The only motives for aban-
doning further search are the economy and the security
which are thereby insured and the very great difficulty of
extending the list.
THe ENVIRONMENT
Even at the earliest period in the evolution of a typical
Star there appears to be a progressive variation in the
chemical composition from center to periphery. Theo-
retically it seems inevitable that the heaviest elements
Should be concentrated in the interior and that those of
lowest atomic weight should be present in the greatest
amount near the surface. Actually, spectroscopic investi-
gation fully confirms this view. Thus the spectra of
typical hot stars show that hydrogen is an inevitable con-
Stituent of their superficial parts. Indeed the universal
Presence of hydrogen under such circumstances 18 un-
doubtedly one of the most clearly established facts of
stellar astronomy. As stars cool and become red the
Spectral changes quite as unmistakably point to the pres-
ence of carbon. Accordingly we possess the best of evi-
dence and the best of reasons for the belief that large
quantities of hydrogen and carbon must exist at or near
_ the surface when a crust forms upon a cooling star.
The nature of the chemical combinations into which
these elements at first enter is perhaps open to some
108 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST (Vou. XLVII
question. But as the temperature falls in the cooling of
a sun or planet the affinities of carbon and hydrogen for
oxygen increase so that carbonic acid and water must
normally result. For oxygen is almost certainly present
in the sun, it is found in meteorites, and the vast store of
it in the earth’s atmosphere and crust (roughly one half
of their total mass) justify the belief that it is every-
where one of the commonest of elements. Hence an
atmosphere containing water and carbonic acid appears
to be a normal envelope of a new crust upon a cooling
body. Even were not these substances at first present in
such an atmosphere, volcanos must soon belch them forth
in enormous quantities, to relieve the pressure which in-
evitable chemical processes set up.
In short just as living things permit themselves to be
simplified into mechanisms which are complex, regulated,
and provided with a metabolism the environment may be
reduced to water and carbonic acid. These are simplifica-
tions counselled solely by expediency. Neither logical
process is necessary, each involves a disregard for many
circumstances which might be of weight in the present
inquiry. But inthe end there stands outa perfectly simple
problem which is undoubtedly soluble. That problem ~
may be stated as follows: In what degree are the physical,
chemical, and general meteorological cl teristics of
water and carbon dioxide, the primary constituents of
the environment and of the compounds of carbon, hydro-
gen and oxygen favorable to a mechanism which must be
physically, chemically, and physiologically complex, which
must be itself well regulated in a stable environment,
. and which must carry on an active exchange of matter
and energy with that environment.
The first step in seeking a solution must be to review
the data of physics and chemistry which describe the
properties of water and carbonic acid, having due regard
to their meteorological significance. Such data of the
highest accuracy exist in great profusion, for almost
every conceivable property of these substances has been
No. 554] FITNESS OF ENVIRONMENT 109
studied with patient care. Next, the properties of the
compounds of carbon, hydrogen, and oxygen must be con-
sidered, and some of the characteristics of the chemical
reactions into which they enter must be discussed. For
this examination the unparalleled development of the
science of organic chemistry provides ample material.
All of these things must be scrutinized quantitatively as
well as qualitatively, and again there is no lack of neces-
sary formation.
Immediately one advantage of the method here pro-
posed becomes evident. We can deal with the familiar
abstractions of physical science—specific heat, coeff-
cient of expansion, solubility, heat of reaction, ete—and
thereby we shall gain all the advantages of the most exact
sciences. No qualifications, no doubtful or contentious
matter, no imperfect descriptions need enter.
In this manner it will be easy to estimate the absolute
biological fitness in certain respects of water and carbonic
acid, and at once a host of automatic results of their
properties will become evident. Many of these results,
such as the nearly constant temperature of the ocean, the
ample rainfall, the freezing of water upon the surface,
the great variety of carbon compounds, are familiar sub-
jects of speculation, though since Darwin little interest
has been manifested in them; others, only recently
brought to light by the growth of physical science, are.
nearly or quite unknown in this connection. All deserve
to receive more serious attention from biologists than is
at present vouchsafed them, for they constitute a part of
the very foundation of general biology, and they cause
many of the phenomena with which man is concerned in
his struggle for mastery of the environment. :
Yet the mere exposition of such facts and relationships.
can not suffice in a discussion of the fitness of the environ-
ment. In the first place these are in the main familiar
ideas, and if they were altogether conclusive to prove the
existence of really significant fitness, if they could be
regarded as alone adequate to establish the necessity of
fe
110 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
putting fitness by the side of adaptation as a coordinate
factor in causing the marvels of life, it is hard to believe
that they would have been so long neglected. In the sec-
ond place there is nothing comparative about such in-
formation. Water is indeed a wonderful substance which
fills its place in nature most satisfactorily, but would not
another substance do as well? Is not ammonia, for
example, a possible substitute? And are there not many
other chemical bodies which might, in a very different
world, serve equally useful purposes? Perhaps, too, the
great variety of carbon compunds which are known to
the chemist are known only because the vital processes
furnish an abundance of material with which to experi-
ment. Is it not possible, therefore, that another element,
perhaps for instance silicon, may enter into even greater
varieties of compounds? It is such questions, ever pres-
ent in the minds of men of science yet never yet care-
fully scrutinized to see if an answer be possible, which, I
suspect, have long deflected attention from this subject.
Clearly, therefore, it will be necessary to compare the
properties of water and carbonic acid and of the carbon
compounds with those of other substances. It will be
necessary to find out whether these substances are not
only fit but fittest—and this no doubt is a task of a very
different sort. It may even seem, at first sight, an im-
possible one, but I hope to show that this is not the case,
and that in spite of the incompleteness of our physical
and chemical knowledge, it may be pressed to a satis-
factory issue.
The very constant temperature of the ocean is a most
important factor in the economy of nature. It consti-
tutes, for example, a vital regulation of the environment
of a large proportion of all the living organisms of the
world, and it has many other important ‘‘functions.”’
This constancy of temperature is in large part due to the
magnitude of the specific heat of water. Other things
being equal the greater the specific heat of water the more
constant must be the temperature of the ocean. If then
No. 554] FITNESS OF ENVIRONMENT 111
the specific heat of water, as is actually the case, be nearly
or quite a maximum among all specific heats, it follows
that the fitness of water in this respect is nearly maximal.
Again the ocean contains an astonishing variety of
substances in solution, and they are present often in large
quantities. In this manner a very great supply of food
in very great variety is offered marine organisms. Of
course such richness of the environment is an exceedingly
favorable circumstance for the organism, and it is due
principally to the ability of water to dissolve a multitude
of things in large quantities. It is not to be supposed that
the substances present in sea water are all of use to every
organism. This need not be the case at all, but a variety
of supplies which may be adapted to special requirements
as they arise, here iodine, there copper, for instance, is
a very genuine advantage. Further the vast utility of
the solvent action of water in blood, lymph, and all the
body fluids is too patent to call for comment. If, now, it
can be shown that the solvent power of water is nearly or
quite a maximum, as it really is, among all known sol-
vents, then it must be evident that in another respect the
fitness of water is nearly or quite maximal.
Again the amount of energy that is required to tear
apart molecules of water and liberate hydrogen and oxy-
gen is very great indeed, and when hydrogen and oxygen
recombine to form water this energy must reappear,—
under ordinary circumstances as heat. This fact too is
very favorable for the organism, because almost all com-
pounds which contain hydrogen yield a great deal of
energy which can be tapped in the process of metabolism.
If therefore the heat of combustion of hydrogen be nearly
or quite a maximum, as it is, among all substances, it
is clear that water is again, in another respect, most
wonderfully fitted for life. Finally, if it be true, and
such is the case, that very few of the substances which
Share the fitness of water in one of these characteristics,
also share or approach its fitness in either of the others,
and that none possesses all these qualifications in a de-
gree that merits consideration, it must, I conceive, be ad-
112 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
mitted that so far as the investigation has proceeded,
water is the only possible fit substance.
A criticism may here be made, are there not other
substances which possess other groups of qualifications
which water lacks? And that is a difficulty which is
even harder to meet. But in the. first place it is evident
that there are not an infinity of important physical prop-
erties; in fact there are very few. And in the second
place it is evident, both from centuries of experience in
physical science and from the postulates above mentioned
regarding life, which undoubtedly do in the main describe
its physico-chemical characteristics, that very few prop-
erties indeed are of importance in the least comparable
with those which I have mentioned. Finally it is in the
highest degree probable that we are acquainted with most
of the truly essential physical properties, and know them
as biologically important, when they are so; and I believe
it has been possible to consider them all, and thus make
the argument complete.
Such is the nature of the argument; the facts, though
no less important than those above indicated, are far too
numerous to mention. They include the unique surface
tension of water and its very great ionizing power, the ab-
sorption coefficient and ionization constant of carbonic
acid, the extreme chemical activity of oxygen and hydro-
gen, the unique chemical combining power of carbon, the
number, complexity, variety and chemical activity of the
compounds and processes of organic chemistry, and the
vast complexity of the chemical system which inevitably
results from the reduction of a mixture of carbonic acid
and water. These properties result directly in a be-
wildering variety of conditions which in the most varied
ways promote complexity, durability and metabolism.
Analysis of all the facts justifies the following con-
clusions.
The physical and chemical properties which have been
taken into consideration include nearly all those which
are known to be of biological importance or which ap-
No. 554] FITNESS OF ENVIRONMENT 113
pear to be related to complexity, regulation and meta-
bolism. |
There are no other compounds which share more than
a small part of the qualities of fitness of water and car-
bonic acid, no other elements which share those of car
bon, hydrogen and oxygen.
None of the characteristics of these substances are
known to be unfit, or seriously inferior to the same char-
acteristics in any other substance.
Therefore the fitness of the environment is both real
and unique.
In drawing this final conclusion I mean to assert the
following propositions:
I. The fitness of the environment is one part of a re-
ciprocal relationship of which the fitness of the organ-
ism is the other. This relationship is completely and
perfectly reciprocal; the one fitness is not less important
than the other, nor less invariably a constituent of a
particular case of biological fitness; it is not less fre-
quently evident in the characteristics of water, carbonic
acid and the compounds of carbon, hydrogen and oxy-
gen than is fitness from adaptation in the characteristics
of the organism.
II. The fitness of the environment results from char-
acteristics which constitute a series of maxima—unique
or nearly unique properties of water, carbonic acid, the
compounds of carbon, hydrogen and oxygen and the
ocean—so numerous, so varied, so nearly complete
among all things which are concerned in the problem that
together they form certainly the greatest possible fit-
ness. No other environment consisting of primary Da
stituents made up of other known elements, or lacking
water and carbonic acid, could possess a like number of
fit characteristics or such highly fit characteristics, or in
any manner such great fitness to promote complexity,
durability and active metabolism in the organic mechan-
ism which we call life.
It must not be forgotten that the possibility of such
conclusions depends upon the universal character of
114 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLVII
physics and chemistry. Out of the properties of univer-
sal matter and the characteristics of universal energy
has arisen mechanism as the expression of physico-
chemical activity and the instrument of physico-chem-
ical performance. Given matter, energy and the result-
ing necessity that life shall be a mechanism, then the
conclusion follows that the atmosphere of solid astro-
nomical bodies does actually provide the best of all pos-
sible environments for life.
VITALISM
Modern vitalism consists in asserting the existence of
a directive tendency which manifests itself in or through
the organism alone and is peculiar to life.
In such speculations the properties of matter and the
processes of cosmic evolution have no place. Bergson
indeed very definitely, and it would seem gratuitously,
puts aside cosmic evolution, and also with slight reser-
vations the properties of matter, as of no essential con-
sequence in organic evolution.
Yet whoever is disposed to speculate about biological
fitness, and not even the incomparable finesse of M. Berg-
son’s dialectic can make fitness other than the most gen-
eral result of the process of organic evolution, must now
weigh well the cosmic processes. For, if allowance be
made for the results of natural selection, fitness of en-
vironment has the greater claim to be considered.
The two fitnesses are complementary; are they then
single or dual in origin? The simpler view would be to
imagine one common impetus operating upon all matter,
inorganic and organic, through all stages of its evolu-
tion, in all its states and forms and leading to worlds
like our own through paths apparently purposeful. Such
it seems to me is the natural hypothesis for the vitalist
to adopt. But then vitalism vanishes, only teleology re-
mains. Yet putting aside mechanistic differences is it
not now lost in any case? Has not modern vitalism in
accepting the limitation to entelechies or impetus de-
stroyed itself?
The situation, briefly, seems to be as follows: Two evo-
No. 554] FITNESS OF ENVIRONMENT 115
lutionary processes independently result in two comple-
mentary fitnesses, hence they are related. In the one
process the origin of fitness is in part explained by a
mechanistic hypothesis. Nevertheless many philos-
ophers, as is their right, declare that in this process a
further extra-physical influence is to be assumed. But
any one who makes such an assumption for the one proc-
ess must certainly make it for the other, thus he will be
led to see impetus or entelechies everywhere. Under
these circumstances it may be doubted if his acquaintance
with the nature of his impetus or entelechies is so inti-
mate that he will be able to distinguish the inorganic
from the organic, for he has surrendered all positive
physico-chemical differences between organic and inor-
ganic bodies and processes to the mechanist. Hence,
unless he is to make an arbitrary and unintelligible dis-
tinction, or to indulge in the spinning of cobwebs, his
vitalism has ceased to be exclusively organic, in short,
has ceased to be vitalism at all, and has become mere
universal teleology.
The whole process of cosmic evolution from its earli-
est. conceivable state to the present is, however, pure
mechanism, as the most perfect induction of physical
Science, based upon each and all of its manifold suc-
cesses in accounting for the phenomena of nature con-
clusively proves.
But if cosmic evolution be purely mechanistic and yet
issue in fitness why not organic evolution as well? Thus
once more we arrive, this time more completely, at the
negation of vitalism. Mechanism is enough in physical
Science, which no less than biological science appears to
manifest teleology; it must, therefore, suffice in biology.
We possess two arguments; the argument that, except
mechanistically, organic and inorganic phenomena are,
in such aspects as concern physical science, alike, and,
therefore, a specifically vital teleology is unnecessary,
and the argument that inorganic science unquestionably
has no need of non-mechanistic teleology. Hence we
are obliged to conclude that metaphysical teleology 1s to
be banished from the whole domain of natural science.
SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION
MUTATIONS IN CNOTHERA BIENNIS L. ?
Ir is evident that the adherents of the mutation theory are
sensitive to the doubts freely expressed concerning the status
of G@nothera Lamarckiana, the behavior of which in throwing
off marked variants is cited as the most important evidence for
the origin of species by mutations. These doubts are in fact
criticisms of the assumption that Lamarckiana is representative
of a wild species and express the view that this plant is of
hybrid origin and that its behavior is of the sort to be expected
of a hybrid. Consequently, mutationists are likely to bring for-
ward as rapidly as possible any evidence that may seem to indi- —
cate the appearance of clear inheritable variations of a marked
character in forms of pure germinal constitution, i. e., in homozy-
gous material.
There are types of Ginothera that we have reason to believe
are now very pure and have been so for a great many years.
Such a form is the biennis of the sand dunes of Holland. This
species has apparently been established in its habitats in Holland
since pre-Linnean times. There has been little opportunity
for chance hybridization and its habits of close or self pollina-
tion in the bud are greatly in favor of the continuation of its
germ plasm in pure lines. Moreover, the type in experimental
cultures of De Vries and others has proved to be constant. I
then it could be shown that tested strains of this biennis are
able to produce new forms of specific rank or even marked varie-
ties the mutationists would have much stronger evidence in sup-
port of the mutation theory than that based on the behavior of
O. Lamarckiana, a form unknown as the component of any
native flora.
The title of a recent paper, ‘‘Mutation bei @nothera biennis
L.,’’ by T.. J. Stomps,' a former student of Professor De Vries,
naturally then arouses interest especially since he is working
with this same biennis of the sand dunes of Holland, a type well
known to a number of botanists who are conducting experimental
studies on cenotheras. A brief discussion of the claims indicated
T. J., ‘‘Mutation bei Oenothera biennis L.,’’ Biologischen
Centralblatt, XXXII, p. 521, 1912.
116
No. 554] SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION 117
by the title of this paper, an analysis of the evidence presented
and its possible interpretation supplies the chief incentive for
this review.
The greater part of this paper consists of a discussion of cer-
tain criticisms directed against the mutation theory by those
who believe that O. Lamarckiana is of hybrid origin. Certain
objections of Stomps appear to the writer well founded,
but we shall not take the space to consider this portion of the
paper since the greater interest attaches to the value of the direct
evidence offered by him in support of the mutation theory.
en we come to the short account of the experimental work
of Stomps we find that the so-called ‘‘mutants’’ were not de-
rived from the pure Dutch biennis of the sand dunes but from
a cross between this race and a type designated O. biennis cruci-
ata. This fact seems to the writer of fundamental importance
in judging the conclusions of Stomps. It should be made clear
that the form ‘‘O. biennis cruciata’’ is recognized in the more
recent taxonomic treatments as a true species sharply distin-
guished from types of biennis by its floral characters. What-
ever may have been the origin of O. cruciata or its possible
relationship to O. biennis, a cross between these types must cer-
tainly be regarded as a cross between two very distinct evolu-
tionary lines and its product a hybrid in which marked modifica-
tions of germinal constitution are to be expected.
(nothera cruciata differs from O. biennis most conspicuously
in having very narrow linear petals, from 1-3 mm. wide, in sharp
contrast to the broad heart-shaped petals characteristic of
biennis. O. cruciata is found wild in certain regions of New
England and New York and is consequently a native American
Species. Stomps assumes that the cruciata in Holland is a mu-
tant from the Dutch biennis, but his belief rests upon no direct
evidence. Cruciata has never appeared in the extensive cultures
of the Dutch biennis grown by De Vries and Stomps. Neither
have we any direct evidence that the American cruciata has
come from any form of biennis. It is true that the species
cruciata and biennis appear to be closely related, but it is
equally clear that they constitute very distinct lines each with a
long period of evolutionary independence. I can not see the
Justification for Stomps’s attitude when he treats a cross between
the biennis and cruciata of the sand dunes of Holland as though
t were the combination of forms within the same species which
have similar germinal constitutions. ?
118 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
Stomps lays emphasis on the purity of his material of biennis
and cruciata which had been carried along for several years in
pure lines from original wild plants of the sand dunes. He
states that the crossing of these two forms is concerned alone
with the floral peculiarities of cruciata, since in all other char-
acters the two types are the same. It seems to the writer hardly
possible that lines so well established as biennis and cruciata
can be absolutely the same in all respects except that of flower
form, although this is obviously the most important point of dif-
ference. The American forms of cruciata are exhibiting among
themselves remarkable differences of germinal constitution.
The observations of Stomps are of interest. He obtained in
the second generations from crosses between biennis and cruci-
ata two marked variants. These are called biennis nanella and
biennis semi-gigas because of the similarity to somewhat cor-
responding variants from Lamarckiana. We are not informed
as to the proportions in which these new forms arose, a point of
importance since we should like to know whether they are very
rare, as say 1: 10,000, or more common.
The first variant, biennis nanella, appeared in the second gen-
eration of the cross biennis X cruciata. This cross gave an F,
hybrid with heart-shaped petals as in the mother plant; no
statements are made as to the size relations. In the F, genera-
tion there was a splitting into forms of biennis and cruciata;
we are told nothing of the proportions of these individuals in
the cultures or of their range of variation. One of the biennis-
like forms presented a dwarf habit which distinguished it from
the biennis parent in much the same way that nanella is dis-
tinguished from Lamarckiana. This plant, biennis nanella,
differed from Lamarckiana nanella by the same characters that
distinguish biennis from Lamarckiana. An important point of
resemblance to Lamarckiana nanella lay in its sensitiveness t0
bacteria which Zeylstra discovered within the tissues of this
type and showed to be responsible for certain abnormal char-
acters. De Vries has shown that Lamarckiana nanella grown in
a soil treated with calcium phosphate became healthy and Stomps
found that his biennis nanella responded in a similar way to this
treatment.
The second variant, biennis semi-gigas, appeared in a second
generation from the reciprocal cross cruciata X biennis. This
cross also gave an F, hybrid with flowers of the biennis type
No. 554] SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION 119
and in the F, generation there was likewise a splitting of the
culture into forms of biennis and cruciata. One of the biennis-
like forms presented a more vigorous habit and a larger size
of buds, flowers and leaves, suggesting the differences between
Lamarckiana and its derivative gigas. The style was longer
than in biennis and self-pollination, characteristic of biennis,
was impossible. This plant proved to be almost sterile.
A count of the chromosomes as shown by mitotic figures in
meristematic tissue of young buds determined them to be 21 in
number. This important fact placed the plant in that group
intermediate between the usual types of @nothera with 14
chromosomes and that very rare variant from Lamarckiana,
called gigas, which has 28 chromosomes. It has recently been
shown that certain plants that have been mistaken for gigas have
21 chromosomes and for these the name semi-gigas has been pro-
posed. Consequently Stomps calls the plant from the cross
cruciata X biennis with 21 chromosomes biennis semi-gigas.
The observation of this remarkable plant and the determina-
tion of its chromosome count is a matter of great interest. The
fact that the number of the chromosomes (21) is not twice the
number of the parent types (14) shows that the germinal varia-
tion did not take place after a normal fertilization, for a doub-
ling of the number of chromosomes in the fertilized egg or
embryo would give a plant with 28 chromosomes. It indicates
that a gamete produced by one of the plants in the F, generation
had 14 chromosomes and that this element combining with a
normal gamete (7 chromosomes) produced this exceptional plant
with 21 chromosomes.
I have suggested? a way in which gametes of an Œnothera
might be formed with 14 chromosomes in place of the normal
number. The presence of 28 chromosomes instead of the normal
number 14, during a heterotypic mitosis in an @nothera might
come about from a somewhat earlier appearance of that prema-
ture division of the chromosomes which normally takes place as
early as anaphase of this mitosis. Thus a pushing forward of this
premature fission of the chromosomes from the anaphase to e
metaphase of the heterotypie mitosis would result in the distribu-
tion of 14 chromosomes to each pole of the spindle. Another fis-
sion introduced before the metaphase of the homotypic mitosis
would make possible a group of 4 nuclei at the end of the reduc-
* Annals of Botany, Vol. XXV, p. 959, 1911.
120 * THE AMERICAN NATURALIST (Vou. XLVII
tion divisions each with 14 chromosomes. From such nuclei
gametes would be formed with 14 chromosomes,
The position of Stomps is clear. He believes that the Dutch
biennis and cruciata have identical germinal constitutions except
for the factors that determine floral structure and therefore
with respect to other characters can be crossed as though they
were homozygous. Since the cross gave two marked variants
which differed from the parents in other respects than those of
floral structure these two plants are mutants. These conclusions
are then applied by Stomps to the problem of the status of
Lamarckiana in the following line of reasoning. Since biennis
mutates and since biennis is probably an older species than
Lamarckiana it follows that mutations among the cenotheras are
older than Lamarckiana and that consequently the mutations
of this species can not be the result of hybridization.
The line of argument rests primarily on the assumption that
biennis and cruciata have exactly the same germinal constitu-
tion except for floral characters. This I can not believe possible
considering the long evolution back of the two lines. Why did
Stomps find it necessary to cross biennis with cruciata to obtain
his ‘‘mutants’’? If homozygous in all respects except for
flower structure why should not biennis alone or cruciata alone
give the same mutants? From my point of view Stomps really
made a cross between two rather closely related species and
obtained first the segregation of flower types to be expected in
the F, generation among which from my experience I should
expect a wide range of variation, and second Stomps obtained
two marked variants due to some germinal modification as the
result of the cross.
This sort of phenomenon I am obtaining frequently in crosses
of my races of American biennis and grandiflora. The nanella
condition of dwarfed growth is very common in F, generations.
And, last summer in an F, generation a large plant appeared
with leaves so thick and stems, buds and flowers so stocky that
I have hardly a doubt but that the cytological examination will
show an increase in the number of chromosomes.
In so far as the observations of Stomps bear upon the problem
of mutation my interpretation would be exactly the reverse of
his. To me they further illustrate the same phenomenon that I
am obtaining through my hybrids of biennis and grandiflora,
namely, that behavior by which these hybrids in the F, generation
No.554] SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION 121
throw off variants that in taxonomic practise would be consid-
ered new species readily distinguished from the parents of the
cross and from the F, hybrid. I have this past summer found
that F, hybrids similar in character to the F, will in the F,
generation repeat the performance of the F, and throw off again
some of the same marked variants.
It is a satisfaction to know that De Vries and Stomps stand
firmly by the original definition of a mutation as a germinal
variation (and this means inheritable) from a pure stock, i. e.,
from homozygous material. This is a valuable concept whether
or not mutation proves to be a rare phenomenon. Furthermore,
one of the most important lines of experimental study is that
which will endeavor to determine with precision the conditions
under which true mutations may arise. There has been a loose
usage of the term mutation which should it become prevalent will
take from the word the significance described above, and reduce it
to a meaning no more precise than that of a marked germinal
variation from any source. If the word mutation is to be kept in
the sense of De Vries it must be reserved for germinal variations
from homozygous stock.
BRADLEY Moore Davis
A CONVENIENT MICROSCOPE CASE
A VERY convenient case for holding microscopes, especially for
large, beginning courses where two or more students in different
Sections use the same instrument, is shown in the accompanying
photograph.
The case here shown was built to stand in a shallow offset in
the laboratory near a door, and fills a small space that would
otherwise be wasted. As is seen from the numbers below the sec-
tions, it will hold fifty standard microscopes. Each instrument
has a number on the base to correspond to the number on its re-
Spective section. Across the floor of each section, at the back, 18
nailed a 2 in. X 2 in. strip of wood to stop the base of the micro-
Scope and to serve as a shelf for the extra oculars. Holes of the
Proper diameter in the shelf would hold these oculars more
safely. The doors slide easily on a metal track with ball-bearing
Wheels and have brass pushes set flush with the surface of the
y ood. They may be fastened with a catch or with a lock and
ey,
122 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST (Von: XLVII
Below the case proper is a shelf to hold laboratory books. An
improvement over the case here shown would be to have two
shallow shelves, in place of one, divided into sections for the
further alphabetical distribution of the books. The case here de-
scribed is 84 inches high, 51 inches wide, and 13 inches deep,
outside measurements.
There is wasted, of course, a vertical strip about four inches
wide in the center of the case where the doors overlap, but it is
always hidden, whether the doors be open or shut.
Such a case, if well made, is practically dust-proof, and is eco-
nomical not only of space but of money as well, since the cost of
the individual microscope boxes may be saved in buying new in-
struments. <A case similar to this has been used by the writer for
several years and has proved entirely satisfactory.
ALBERT M. REESE
No. 554] SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION 123
A LITERARY NOTE ON THE LAW OF GERMINAL
CONTINUITY
THE distinctive theory of germinal continuity or continuity
of the germ-plasm is, historically speaking, of much more recent
origin that the broader doctrine of genetie continuity from
which it was derived and with which, in the usage of some
writers, it is made synonymous. Genetie continuity in its
widest sense embodies the proposition that “living matter
always arises by the agency of preexisting living matter,’
and in a more restricted sense means that all living cells must
be derived by continuous lineage from the cells of preexisting
generations. The theory of germinal continuity, in its most
highly developed form, conceives the germinal protoplasm as
dividing into two portions, from one of which the somatic or
body cells of the offspring are developed while the other portion
is reserved unchanged for the formation of the reproductive
material of the adult individual. The general doctrine of con-
tinuity is fundamentally essential to both these theories, but
germinal continuity, at least in any Weismannian sense, always
involves the further assumption of a transmission from genera-
tion to generation of an unmodified residue of the specially
organized ‘germinal substance, the germ-plasm, through a defi-
nite series of cells, but this concept does not imply that there is
necessarily a direct connection between the germ-cells of con-
secutive generations.
To Richard Owen the credit is usually given of being the
first to recognize the distinction between body-cells and germ-
cells and thus to foreshadow the idea of germinal continuity.
Writing in 1849, he said:
Not all the progeny of the primary impregnated germ-cell are re-
quired for the formation of the body in all animals: certain of the
derivative germ-cells may remain unchanged and become included in
that body which has been composed of their metamorphosed and
diversely combined or confluent brethren: so included, any derivative
germ-cell or the nucleus of such may commence and repeat the same
Processes of growth by imbibition, and of propagation by spontaneous
fission, as those to which itself owed its origin; followed by meta-
morphoses and combinations of the germ-masses so produced, which
concur to the development of another individual; and this may be, or
“Huxley, T. H., ‘‘Lay Sermons, Addresses and Reviews,’’ New York,
1870, p. 350.
124 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST (Vou. XLVII
a! not be, like that individual in which the secondary gorm: -cell or
rm-mass was included.
When the primary division of the impregnated germ-cell takes place,
it must divide its properties with its matter between the two cells result-
ing from the spontaneous fission of its nucleus: and this result must
follow every subsequent division. It is scarcely figurative therefore to
say that the primary or parent germ-cell has equally divided its
spermatic virtue amongst its countless progeny.
Owen’s suggestions apparently received no consideration and
were later disregarded by the author himself. Somewhat similar
ideas were expressed by Haeckel? in some of his earlier specu-
lations. Galton, says Weismann,‘ was the first to express ideas
resembling the theory of germinal continuity, but these ideas
were later considerably modified.®
A clear expression of the conception of germinal continuity is
found in the writings of Jager, but his ideas made little impres-
sion, and inaccurate citation of his work has sometimes caused
his disparagement. In 1877, restating previously expressed
propositions, he said :°
The basis of heredity consists in this, that throughout whole series of
generations the germ-protoplasm of animals retains unchanged its
specific quality in spite of all external influences. In the actual ontogeny
the available germ-protoplasm may divide into two groups, the onto-
genetic, from which the existing individual is formed, and the phylo-
Seis. Richard, ‘‘On ianea London, 1849, pp. 5-6, 63-64.
* Haeckel, E., ‘‘ Generelle Morphologie,’ ? 1866, pp. 287-
‘Weismann: AS ‘*The Germ-plasm, A Theory of Heredity,’? New York,
1902, p. 198.
*Galton’s early ideas were expressed as follows:
‘‘From the well-known circumstance that an individual may transmit
to his descendants ancestral qualities which he does not himself possess, we
are assured that they could not have been altogether destroyed in him, but
ust have maintained their existence in a latent form. Therefore each
individual may properly be conceived as consisting of two parts, one of
which is latent and only known to us by its effects on his posterity, while
the other is patent, and constitutes the person manifest to our senses.
‘‘The adjacent and, in a broad sense, separate lines of growth in which
the patent and latent elements are situated, diverge from a common group
and converge to a common contribution, because they were both evolved out
of elements contained in a structureless ovum, and they, jointly, contribute
the assat which form the structureless ova of their offspring.’ ’—@Galton,
. ‘On Blood-relationship,’’ Proceedings of the Royal Society of London,
Vol. 20, 1872, p. 394.
* Jiger, G.,
‘*Physiologische Briefe,’’ Kosmos, Jahrg. I, Bd. I, 1877,
>. r:
No.554] SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION ` 125
genetic, which is reserved until the time of puberty for the formation of
the reproductive material. This reservation of the phylogenetic material
I designated as the Continuity of the Germ-protoplasm.’
This clear expression of the doctrine of germinal continuity
apparently does not appear in Jager’s later work,® to which
reference is usually made.
Weismann in his essay on the ‘‘Continuity of the Germ-
plasm,’’® assumed that he was the first to give expression to this
conception but in a later work’® made acknowledgments to other
authors who had anticipated his theory. “With respect to Jäger,
however, he said :12
The praiseworthy attempt to do justice to my predecessors in this
particular subject has perhaps been carried too far. In Geddes and
Thompson’s “ Evolution of Sex” (p. 93), for instance, a quotation is
given from Jiiger which seems to prove that he anticipated me with
regard to the theory under consideration. The quotatién in which this
idea is expressed is, however, not taken from the book published in
1878 but from an essay written ten years later, and it concludes with
the following words: “ This reservation of the phylogenetic material I
described as the continuity of the germ-plasm.” But no mention is made
by — of the continuity of the gene in his book which ap-
m e früheren Auseinandersetzungen gingen dahin: Das Fundamen
der ace besteht darin, dass durch grosse Reihen von cease
hindurch das Keim Protoplasma eines Thieres eine sich stets gleichbleibende
Tro
Der Continuitat des Keimplasmas,’’ Jena, 1885; Essay IV in author-
ized er 2d ed., 1891, p. 163.
***The Germ-Plasm, A Theory of Heredity,” New York, 1902, pp.
Pay
"L. ¢., p. 200, footnote.
126 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVIL
peared in 1878, in which a connection between the germ-cells of
different generations is supposed to exist :—and this is not the ease. The
entirely new statement of his ideas has been influenced by those con-
tained in my essays which had appeared in the meanwhile.
As a matter of fact the quotation from Jäger which Weis-
mann repudiates actually appeared more than eight years before
the publication of Weismann’s essays, as the quotation from
Kosmos, given above, clearly shows. Although Jager coined the
expression ‘‘Continuity of the Germ-plasm,’’ the idea involved
seems to have attracted no attention until after the essays of
Weismann had aroused general scientific interest.
Jäger also assumed a material connection between the germ-
cells of different generations,’* and, in what Weismann char-
acterizes as ‘‘a few casual remarks,’’ Rauber*® expressed a con-
ception which some authors interpret as the same idea.
In the account of his exhaustive researches on the differentia-
tion of the reproductive cells Nussbaum gave clear expression to
the doctrine of the continuity of the germ-cells, which in a strict
sense means that germ-cells arise directly from one another.
The views held by Nussbaum?‘ were in part set forth in the
following words:
* See preceding quotations from Weismann.
* Rauber, A., ‘‘Formbildung und Formstérung in der Entwicklung von
Wirbelthieren, ws pet Jahrbuch, Vol. 6, 1880, p. 4. The ‘‘ casual
marks’’ are as follow
‘‘Die beiden Oa deren Verbindung das neue Wesen bewirkt,
sind bei den höheren Thierformen enthalten in besonderen Organen, den
Keimdriisen. Da aber die Keimdriisen die folgende Generation beherbergen,
so erscheint ein Individuum als der Träger zweier Generationen, seiner
theil der dualistischen Anlage. Die Triiger der Zukiinftigen Generation, die
Keimdriisen, stellen dagegen den Germinaltheil der dualistischen Anlage dar.
‘‘ Personal- und Germinaltheil gehen aber von einem befruchteten Ei
aus, eîn solches Ei enthält den Stoff mit dem Kriifteplan zu der genannten
dualistischen Anlage. Man kann darum << von einem Personaltheil und
—— des hetroskiatos Eies reden
* Nussbaum, M., ‘‘ Zur FOP EOL SiR des Geschlechts im Thierreich,’’
Archiv fiir mikroskopische AN Bd. 18, 1880, p. 112. The text of
the original is worded thus
‘*Es theilt sich sage das gefurchte Ei in das Zellenmaterial des
i len fiir In bei
Indivi und in die Zel die Erhaltung der Art. iden
Theilen geht die Zellenvermehrung continuirlich weiter; nur tritt im Leibe
Individuums die itstheilung hinzu, während in seinen Geschlechts-
zellen sich eine einfache additionelle Theilung vollzieht. Die beiden Zellen-
No. 554] SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION 127
The segmented ovum divides into the cell-material of the individual
and into the cells for the preservation of the species. In both divisions
the cell-multiplication proceeds continuously, but in the body of the
individual division of labor occurs, while in the reproductive cells
simple division only takes place. Both groups of cells and their off-
spring are propagated quite independently of each other, so that the
reproductive cells have no share in the development of the tissues of the
individual, and no seminal or ovicular cell arises from the cell-material
of the individual. After the segregation of the reproductive cells the
history of the individual and that of the species are entirely distinct,
and because of this relation the “constancy” of the species is more
easily understood; that is, the sharp persistence of the phenomenon of
atavism by means of which ancestral traits are transmitted. For sperm
and ovum are not derived from the cell-material of the parent organism,
but have a common origin with it. However, since they are preserved
within it, they are subject to the conditions which modify the parent
organism; therefore the transmission of “ acquired” characteristies is
not excluded.
Nussbaum is said by some to be the first to suggest the idea of
the cellular continuity of successive generations, but this con-
ception is clearly implied in Virchow’s aphorism’ ‘‘omnis
cellula a cellula,’’ and was fully stated in 1858 in the Law of
Genetie Cellular Continuity first clearly formulated by Vir-
chow?! as follows:
Just as an animal can originate only from an animal and a plant -
only from a plant, so every cell must arise from a preexisting cell.
Although there are individual cases in which strict proof is still want-
ing, yet the principle is firmly established that for all living beings,
whether they be entire plants or animal organisms or integrant parts of
the same, there exists an eternal law of continuous development.
gruppen und ihre Abkémmlinge vermehren sich aber durchaus unabhängig
von einander, so dass die Geschlechtszellen an dem Aufbau der Gewebe des
Individuums keinen Antheil haben, und aus dem Zellenmaterial des Indi-
viduums keine einzige Samen- oder Eizelle hervorgeht. Nach der Abspaltung
der Geschlechtszellen sind die Conti des Individuums und der Art völlig
getrennt, und wir glauben aus diesem Verhalten die ‘Constanz’ der Art,
d.h. die in der Erscheinung des Atavismus gipfelnde Zähigkeit, mit der sich
die Eigenthümlichkeiten der Vorfahren vererben, begreiflicher zu finden.
Denn Samen und Ei stammen nicht von dem Zellenmaterial des elterlichen
Organismus ab, sondern haben mit ihm gleichen Ursprung; da sie aber in
ihm aufbewahrt werden, so sind sie auch den Bedingungen unterworfen,
welche auf den elterlichen Organismus modificirend einwirken, weshalb die
Vererbung der ‘erworbenen’ Eigenschaften nicht ausgeschlossen ist.’’
* Archiv für Pathologische Anatomie, Bd. 8, 1855, p. 23.
“Die Cellularpathologie im ihrer Begründung auf physiologische und
pathologische Gewebelehre,’’ Berlin, 1858, p. 25.
128 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
On the other hand, to Nussbaum is sometimes credited the
theory of germinal continuity, but in such cases authors appar-
ently do not sharply distinguish continuity of the germ-plasm
from continuity of the germ-cells. Thus Minot" says:
We owe to Moritz Nussbaum the theory of germinal continuity—the
only theory of heredity which seems tenable at the present time.
Aceording to this theory, the germ-cells are set aside during the seg-
mentation of the ovum and preserve the essentially undifferentiated
qualities of the protoplasm and nucleus of the ovum, from the division
of which they arise.
However, irrespective of the conclusions that may be reached
as to whom priority in the statement of the theory of germinal
continuity belongs, it is to Weismann that credit must be given
for the development of this doctrine into an important theory
of heredity.
There would seem to be a gain in precision and clearness of
expression in discussions involving the idea of continuity in
development if a distinction were always made between (1)
genetic continuity, or biogenesis, (2) genetic cellular contin-
uity, (3) continuity of the germ-cell and (4) germinal con- .
tinuity. Thus restricted the term germinal continuity expresses
more closely the conception held by the greatest exponent of this
theory. Since Jäger first used the phrase ‘‘Continuity of the
-Germ-plasm’”’ I suggest that his name be linked with that of
Weismann in referring to this principle, which may well be
called the Jiger-Weismann Law of Germinal Continuity, the
esential doctrine of which is thus expressed :18
In each ontogeny, a part of the specifie germ-plasm contained in the
parent egg-cell is not used up in the construction of the body of the
offspring, but is reserved unchanged for the formation of the germ-
cells of the following generation.
However, the real significance of Weismann’s theory of ger-
minal continuity and its bearing on theories of heredity can not
be fully appreciated without at least a general acquaintance
with the somewhat voluminous literature of this subject.
W. STOCKBERGER
BUREAU OF PLANT INDUSTRY,
WASHINGTON, DO
" Minot, C. S., ‘‘Laboratory Text Book of Embryology,’’ Philadelphia,
1910, p. 28.
* Weismann, A., ‘‘Essays upon Heredity and Kindred Biological Prob-
lems,’’ authorized translation, 2d sess E Oxford, 1891, p. 170.
SECOND EDITION
AMERICAN MEN OF SCIENCE
A BIOGRAPHICAL DIRECTORY
BDITED BY J. McKEEN CATTELL
A so rig directory re 8 revision if it is to maintain its use usefulness. Nearly a th
ly a third of the names in the
Present edition are new, and the s had which appeared in the first d ivision have in nearly every revised. The
amount of ore required to prepare the revision has been as great as that given to the first edition. There has been no
ge stric ob ing ù
change in the al f the work. Greater iness Ds in confining its scope to the natural and
exact and for this reason a few names included in the first edition have been Efforts have been exerted
make the book as co lete and accurate as ible. are of course omissions se some men
DPN even to repeated requests Jor the in tion e md leading men of sci ve been again selected
by the methods thai were used before, and stars kave been to the subjects of research in the case of 269 new men who
ve obtained pl on the list. the as in selecting this group of scientific men to make a study of
conditions on which scientific research depends and conditios
so far as may be to im these
an Te the two statistical studies that have been te ape it he Dk the Second Edition
i econd edition of the Directory extends to more than 600 pages and contains more than 5500 sketches
is well printed on all rag paper and bound in buckram with epin label. Aeae the work has been
noreased in size by more than 50 per oent., it is sold at the same price as the first editio
Price: Five Dollars, net, Postage paid
THE SCIENCE PRESS
GARRISON, N. Y LANCASTER, PA.
SUB-STATION 84, NEW YORK CITY.
The American Journal of Science
Established by Benjamin Silliman in 1818
The Leading Scientific Journal in the United States
Devoted to the Physical and Natural Sciences, with special reference to
Physics, and Chemistry on the one hand, and to Geology and Mineralogy
on the other.
Editor: EDWARD S. DANA.
Agso ig
Clate Editors: Professor GEORGE L. GOODALE, JOHN TROWBRIDGE, W. G. FARLOW and WM. M. DAVIS on
of Cambridge; Professors A. . VERRILL, HENRY 8. WILLIAMS and L, V. PIRSSON, of New
Two Haven ; wae JOSEPH S$. AIMES, of Baltimore ; MR. J. S. DILLER, of Washington.
ine annually, in monthly numbers of about 80 pages each.
. U8 Journal ended its first series of 50 volumes as a quarterly in 1845; its second
se Dec-
ries of 50 volumes as a two-monthly in 1870; its third series as a monthly ended
em
ber, 1895. A Fourth Series commenced i in 1896.
Subscription d in the United States
$6.25 Price, $6 per year or 50 cents a number, postage prepai e
to Cana nada ; $6,40 to Countries in the Postal Union. Back numbers at reduced prices.
*-Ten-Volume Indexes, Vols. I-X XI-XX, fourth series, price one dollar. Address
The American Journal of Science |
New Haven, Conn.
TA ip Seen igh tease ne ARPE RON Ree RE Te
renee
The American Naturalist
A Monthly Journal, established in
with Special Reference to the
1867, Devoted to the Advancement of the ae Sciences
F.
of Organic Evolution and Her
CONTENTS OF AUGUST NUMB
Hardiness in Successiv eta Generations. L. R.
ea
gogy tt ae oe pag cee SOE in Fresh-water
hes.
The Formation ap} Con n Correlation Tables
when e Seire Number of Combinations is large. Dr.
u
Shorter Articles an wate ras The Production
of Pure Homoz Organisms a ed
erozygotes by “Bel fertilization, Profes
8S. J nnings. and Pg uti Fact tore
Mice not ate rm "C. Little. Physical
Fags pe Reg ol soo Processes, Dr. C. F. Cook.
acy in Scientific Review-
3 ur
Notes and Literature: r E and Origin of
Life in America, T. Barbour,
CONTENTS OF SEPTEMBER NUMBER
Asymmetric Color Resemblance in the Guines Pig.
Professor Joseph H. Kastle and G. D. Buckner.
On ae eanen Mortality with Respect to Seed
Wei ET we ugh tht gobi Cultures of Phaseolus
15. r
wales
A Case of portent in Asplanchna simulating
Mutation. Prcfessor J. H. Pow
Shorter Articles and Discussion : An inat Symbio-
tic Relation between a Waterbug and a Crayfish,
Professor James F. ara Double Eggs. Pro-
fessor Charles W. Hargitt
r merica: n Permian Verte-
brate pact a. O. P. Hay. M Federleys Breeding EX-
periments with the Moth Pygaera. A. H. Stur-
Rae ee ee Re ra D EA ee ae ay ee E RETA
n en EN EA EENEI EE VPE EEE AE E NETE EET R E FE E SEE E ae
CONTENTS OF OCTOBER NUMBER
I. Gametic aoe as a Cause of Correlations.
G. N, Collins
II. Mice; Their Breeding and Dran ngio Scientific
Pu r. J. Frank Daniel.
III. The Aan of Hyla arenicolor Cope, with
Notes on its Habits and Vanation. C. H.
Richardson, Jr.
IV. nee sor Colors in F, if a Cross between Non-
Varieties of Maize. Professor R. A.
eiai
We KETE —— ot Zea mays L. Dr. Walter
VI. Notes and riers + Patten on the Origin of
Vertebrates = y the General Value of Specu-
ations on the Phylogen Beings.
Professor Wm. E. Ritter.
CONTENTS OF NOVEMBER NUMBER
The Mendelian Notation as a Description of
Physiological Facts. Profiles r E. M. East.
bat
.
I. A FirstStudy on the Influence of the Starvation
of the Ascendants aR the Characteristics of
the Descendants.—. J. Arthur Harris.
IH. Relations in Batka ei
tru
W. A. Cannon,
Iv. —— a and Diseussion: On Tricolor
n Dogs and Guinea-pigs. Arend. L.
kA.
V. Notes ma Literature: The Classification of
Liverworts: Professor chp cor
Compeatle "Invertebrates; ee Honen ion
Atwood Kofoid.
CONTENTS OF DECEMBER NUMBER
i a pew ag Inheritance of Fecundity in
estic Fowl. Dr. Raymond P “ry
IL, Reflections ie aeons the Autonomy of Biological Sei-
Ti he! TR brener = theses Lamprey, Petro-
a Hussakof,
< orter sel Daka A Simple Test
of the Good Goodness of Fit of tendelinn tation
V. Notes and Literature: Notes Ichth:
Dr. David Starr Jordan. oe
VI. eN ume XLVI,
CONTENTS OF JANUARY NUMBER
I. Factors and Unit aaay in Mendelian
Heredity. Professor T. H. Morgan
Vertical Distribution of the Chætognat
Sa San Diego ea in Eohfions a ‘guar
oa of Isolati . Coinciden
A Family 4 ‘of Spotted Negroes, I. Simpso®
and Professor W. E. Castle.
The Psi of Fertilizers on Variation in Corn
and Beans, Professor J. K. Sha
pi
yi
bi ë be
R
wrll ha ss
Yearly ae $4.00
Dollar
Jonas
Soie Number 35 Cents
The NATURALIST wi
HE SCIENCE PRESS
— 84: NEW YORK
Garrison, N. Y
four months f os
ae
VOL. XLVII, NO. 555 ~ MARCH, 1913
THE
AMERICAN
NATURALIST
A MONTHLY JOURNAL
Devoted to the Advancement of the Biological Sciences with
Special Reference to the Factors of Evolution
CONTENTS
Page
I. Distribution = Copeman. of e cis Professor VERNON
YMAN KEL i - - =i
II. Castration in Relation to the Secondary Sexual Characters of Brown Leg-
oms. +H. D. Goonies =. ee
II. Simplification of Mendelian Formule. Professor W. E. CASTLE - - -170
IV. Notes and Literature : Some Recent Advances in ET a Pro-
fessor Roy L. MOODIE - 183
THE SCIENCE PRESS
LANCASTER, PA. GARRISON, N. Y.
NEW YORE: SUB-STATION 84
The American Naturalist
MSS. intended for ee and books, etc., intended for review should be
sent to the Editor of THE AMERICAN NATURALIST, Garrison-on-Hudson, New York.
Articles containing research work „bearing on the problems = are evolu-
tion are Senethilly w welcome, and wiil be given preference in publica
One hundred reprints of ae Arba are supplied to authors tres of charge.
Further reprints will be supplied at c
Su scriptions and Saar a should be sent to the publishers. The
subscription price is four dollars a year. Foreign postage is fifty cents and
Canadian postage twenty-five cents additional. The ee for single copies is
forty cents. The advertising rates are Four Dollars for a pa
THE SCIENCE PRESS
Lancaster, Pa. Garrison, N. Y.
NEW YORK: Sub-Station 84
Entered as second-class matter, we 2, 1908, at the Post Office at Lancaster, Pa., under the Act of
ongress of March 3, 1879.
FOR SALE TENTH EDITION.
ARCTIC, ICELAND and GREENLAND | THE MICROSCOPE;
BIRDS’ SKINS, an introductio n to Microscopic Methods and to Histo(eey
Well ee Low Prices +A Siaa HENRY GAGE, of Cornell Uni vas
articulars of and aboye rg ain Apii:
i ition. Price
Ó DINESEN Kra Cclcces and fally orined edition d ee:
Husavik, North Iceland, Via Leidie, England | COMSTOCK PUBLISHING CO., Ithaca, N. Y.
E
e °
To Ornithologists FINE LAND SHELLS
I have in stock and for sale nearly ten thousand species
and Mus = land shells, also > yery good stock of marine. Anea
eums rately labeled. Iam prepared to make up collec $ all
Tustrating or phase = the sip es +o Soe aon i
countries and islands. ne illustra
W. F.H. ROSENBERG angaa E shells p pe olas ae an ta hae v
se cco ased
Importer of Exotic Zoological Specimens cash. Correspondence solicit ted with travelers and Fs WEBB,
Only the finest m al handled W. TE 4
57, HAVERSTOCK HILL 202 Westminister Fonts Rochester, N. Y., U.S. A
London N. W., ENGLAND
Begs to announce the publication of a new Price List
(No. 17) of BIRD SKINS. This catalogue con-| | Lhe smerny of Chicago
tains nearly 6,000 species, and is the largest and ca ee
most complete price list of birds ever published. It one ie year. eee
is arranged in systematic order with authors’ names, bhe reap
indications of localities, and an index to Families.
It will be sent gratis and post free on application, as
will the following lists : h
University staff which is et al
No. 14, Mammals; No. 15, Bird’s Eggs; No. 16, e T iomractars: fr
Reptiles, Amphibia and Fishes ; No. 12, Lepidoptera .
No. 13, Coleoptera.
Largest stock in the world of specimens in all
branches of Zoology. Specimens gent on approval.
Please state which lists are required.
Detail
sent upon application.
The University of Chicago
Chicago, Illinois
THE
AMERICAN NATURALIST
VoL. XLVII March, 1913 No. 555
DISTRIBUTION AND SPECIES-FORMING OF
ECTO-PARASITES!
PROFESSOR VERNON LYMAN KELLOGG
STANFORD UNIVERSITY, CALIFORNIA
; I
Four years ago I completed, and published in Wyts-
man’s ‘‘Genera Insectorum,” a catalogue of the Mallo-
phaga (biting bird lice) of the world. This list gives the
host distribution of each of the known species and the
place or country of capture of the actual host individuals
for all cases in which these localities had been recorded.
It is, then, a classified list of the known Mallophagan spe-
cies with their known geographic and host distribution.
I have now in hand, nearly completed, as complement
to this already published catalogue, a classified list of all
the hosts, bird and mammal, from which Mallophaga
have been taken, together with the names of all the para-
Sites recorded from each species, and not only again the
actual geographical records of capture but also a state-
ment of the general geographical distribution of each
host Species. I have determined, for the birds at least,
which form the great bulk of the hosts, the synonymy of
the various names used for them by the various collectors
and reduced them all to the basis of the British Museum
Catalogue of the Birds of the World.
By these two lists, namely, the catalogue of parasite
Anil of this paper were read before a general meeting at the Second
tonal Congress of Entomology, Oxford, August, 1912.
129 .
130 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
species with hosts, and the catalogue of host species with
parasites, this group of ectoparasitic insects should be
accessible to a wider attention and a more thoroughgoing
study from entomologists than it has hitherto had. In-
deed the group is deserving of some special attention
from general naturalists because of the interesting sig-
nificance of the conditions of distribution and species
forming which obtain in it. It is to the setting out of a
few facts and some of the significance concerning distri-
bution and species forming among these insects that the
present paper is devoted.
II
The Mallophaga compose a small fairly homogeneous
group of about fifteen hundred insect species (as so far
known), which pass their whole lives on the bodies of birds
and mammals. Those species found on birds are never
found on mammals, and those on mammals never occur
on birds. Indeed, with exceptions in only two genera,
the Mallophaga of birds are of distinct families from
those of mammals, the two groups being distinguished
structurally by the loss in the mammal-infesting kinds
of one of the two tarsal claws, an adaptation connected
with the difference between the feathers and hair of the
hosts as habitat. Of the 1,500 known Mallophagan spe-
cies less than one hundred are mammal-infesting, the
others all occurring exclusively on birds.
As to the relations of the Mallophaga to other insects
I am convinced that they should be treated as a distinct
order, finding their nearest affinities in the wingless
Psocide, such as Atropos, the familiar book louse. This
relationship is shown not only by similarities in external
structure, some of which, however, are only examples of
parallelism or adaptive convergence, but by certain more
important common characters of internal anatomy, not-
ably a curious pharyngeal sclerite (perhaps the greatly
modified hypopharynx), found in both these groups and
nowhere else among insects. The habitat and food
No. 555] SPECIES-FORMING OF ECTO-PARASITES 131
habits, also, of the two groups add to the likelihood of
the derivation of the Mallophaga if not directly from the
Atropidæ, at least from an ancestor that might well have
been the conmon progenitor of both types.
The Mallophaga are all of small size, ranging from 1.5
to 10 mm. in length, with the great majority of them not
more than 4 or 5 mm. long and from 1 to 2 mm. in width.
The body is much flattened dorso-ventrally, offering an
interesting adaptive contrast, in this respect, to the later-
ally flattened fleas of similar habitat. The body is always
wholly wingless, usually strongly chitinized and smooth.
The mouth parts are of true biting type, the food being
bits of hair or feather or dermal scales, and dried or fresh
blood only incidentally and not by a direct breaking of the
skin of the host. There are no compound eyes, but a
single pair of ocelli placed on the lateral margins of the
much flattened head, and the antennæ are from three- to
five-segmented, and in about half the genera are capable
of being concealed in a small protecting groove on the
ventral face of the cheeks. The legs are of normal num-
ber, rather long and strong, flattened and fitted for run-
mng and clinging. The body is whitish, pale brownish
or even dark-brown, often well patterned by blotches or
bands of light to black-brown, on the paler ground.
These markings almost always indicate specially heavily
chitinized portions of the body wall.
The eggs are fastened to the hairs or feathers of the
host, and the hatching young are much like their parents
m appearance except for their smaller size and paler,
unpatterned softer skin. They acquire maturity without
any marked metamorphosis. They run freely about
from birth, and feed on the hairs or feathers just as their
parents do. Neither they nor the adults leave the body
of the host except under unusual circumstances. In hen-
houses the parasites of the fowls have been occasionally
found on the perches or in the nests, but I have often
Sought carefully, without finding a single parasite, on
Seaside rocks from which I had just frightened scores of
132 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST (Vou. XLVII
closely massed resting cormorant, pelicans and gulls, all
of them bird kinds whose individuals are practically
always well parasitized. When a bird dies or is killed
some of its Mallophagous parasites will sometimes wan-
der off of the cold body, but usually they remain on the
body and die there within a few days. Before dying they
frequently grasp a feather barbule with their strong
mandibles and are found there firmly fixed after death.
That they can not live, except unusually, for more than
a few days off the body of the warm-blooded host I have
proved by keeping them on feathers in ovens at the tem-
perature of the bird body or on feathers in vials next my
own body. They die in from two or three to six or seven
days off the host body, or on it after death of the bird. It
may be that the normal life of the adult Mallophagan is
but a week long, but the fact that the young die off the
host, or on it after its death, just as soon as the adults,
indicates that the parasites are simply unable to live
apart from their live hosts, for the only two apparent
conditions peculiar to life on a bird’s body, namely, a cer-
tain constant temperature and feathers for food, are cer-
tainly not difficult to reproduce off the body.
At times of actual contact of the bodies of their hosts
they undoubtedly migrate from bird to bird. Thus they
can move from male to female, or vice versa at mating,
from mother and father to fledglings in the nest, andfrom
individual to individual of the same species in the case
of gregarious birds perching together.
The Mallophaga are, then, true, permanent ecto-par-
asites, of simple development, some degradation and
adaptive modification of body, which occur in the num-
ber of one to several species on probably all kinds of
birds and mammals, and on practically all bird and mam-
mal individuals, but which, except in special and rather
uncommon cases of unusual abundance, cause little seri-
ous injury to their hosts. The familiar constant search-
ing of the plumage with the bill by birds is almost always
due to the slightly irritating influence of these small para-
No. 555] SPECIES-FORMING OF ECTO-PARASITES 133
sitic insects, but only rarely can this annoyance reach
such a pitch as to interfere much with the bird’s feed-
ing or resting or sleeping. And the loss of minute bits
of feather can certainly be of no consequence at all. The
Mallophaga then may be called benignant parasites, as
contrasted with the malevolent, blood-sucking fleas and
true lice affecting the same hosts.
Tit
With this fleeting acquaintanceship with the various
principal structural and physiological characters of our
group of insects, we may attend now to some of the spe-
cial facts of their distribution and their inter-ordinal re-
lationships, and to the problems which these facts pose
o us.
First, with regard to the taxonomic conditions within
the group. I have divided the order into two sub-orders,
Sharply distinguished by certain structural differences
whose physiological or ethologie significance, however,
is not at all plainly apparent. The most convenient rec-
ognition character for this sub-ordinal separation is the
condition of the antenne, short, broad, capitate, three-
Segmented and concealed in special antennary fosse in
one group; longer, slender, five-segmented, projecting
and without receiving fosse, in the other.
Each suborder contains two families, one of which, with
two-clawed members, occurs exclusively (with the ex-
ception of one or two species in each of four genera in
one case) on birds, and the other, with one-clawed mem-
bers, exclusively on mammals. Both of the mammal-
infesting families include but one genus each; while the
two bird-infesting families include fifteen and ten genera,
respectively,
The whole order then, with its one thousand five hun-
dred species, comprises but twenty-seven genera,
Srouped into four families, arranged in two suborders.
The disposition of the species among the genera has a
rather extraordinary aspect. Nine, or one third, of all
134 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
the genera, are represented by but one species each;
seven are represented by from two to ten species; three
are represented by from twenty to thirty species, three by
from forty to sixty-five species, one by one hundred and
fifty species, one by two hundred, and three by from two
hundred and twenty-five to two hundred and fifty species.
Thus while sixteen genera contain less than ten species
each, four genera contain more than two hundred species
each.
This extraordinary condition of the species in their re-
lation to each other presents an attractive problem.
What is its significance? What are indeed the special
conditions influencing species-forming within the group?
From many years’ work with these insects, including
the description of several hundred new species, and the
examination of long series of individuals of species in
several different genera, I can say with confidence that
the evolutionary factor of isolation plays a conspicuous
part in Mallophagan species-forming. One soon comes
to the acceptance of a very flexible species description for
any given Mallophagan kind. While the score of indi-
viduals of one kind that one may collect from a single
host individual will agree well with each other as to
details of structure and pattern, the specimens of the
same kind from another host individual of the same host
species collected either in the same locality or a distant
one, and the specimens from a third host individual and
from a fourth and fifth, and so on, will all show many
obvious, if mostly small, variations from the specimens
taken from the first or any other host individual.
That is, each host individual is, in a way, a small island,
biologically considered, with its inhabitants more or less
nearly completely isolated from the inhabitants of other
host islands. So that each species is made up of many
dislocated small groups which may have, as when they
are on birds of solitary habit, but little opportunity for
mixing and cross-breeding with the members of the spe-
cies-body as a whole. The group on one host bird may
No. 555] SPECIES-FORMING OF ECTO-PARASITES 135
meet the group on the mate of this host, and these two
mingling groups may send their repr tatives or their
offspring to the young of the two mated hosts. But that
is about the extent of their participation in the life and
character of their species as a whole, and it is an extent
which plainly must result in the establishment of an
hereditary strain characterized by the special slight
structural idiosyncrasies peculiar to the few ancestors
from which the strain takes its origin. In the case of the
parasites of more gregarious bird kinds, as the seabirds
that mass for rest or brooding on ocean rocks or shore
cliffs, or the swallows and swifts that live in colonies in
caves and chimneys, or those gallinaceous birds like the
partridges of California that gather in close bands of
two or three score individuals, or others of any kind of
similar habit which may give chance for repeated actual
personal contact of body with body sufficient to permit of
migration of the wingless but active parasites from bird
to bird, this element of isolation is less accented. But
it still plays an important figure. For both the wingless-
ness and the manifest stay-at-home habits of the para-
sites make their movement from host to host at best a
desultory and almost accidental one.
This combination of conditions, then, may serve to ex-
plain partly both why each species must be given a very
flexible description and why one might describe and name,
if he liked, many varieties of each species; and it ex-
Plains, in some measure, why there are a good many
Species in the order, and why there are many in each of
a few genera, although it does not explain, perhaps, why
there are some genera with very few, and indeed even, so
far as yet known, single species.
The explanation of the actually small number of genera
and families depends, I think, upon one of the conditions
in the life of the Mallophaga which is directly opposed,
In its influence, in a way, to the isolation condition making
for a variation that results in numerous varieties and
Species. It is this. Although the different host species
136 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou XLVII
may differ much among themselves as to habitat, habits,
plumage markings, ete., yet as places of residence and
providers of food for their external parasites they are all
much alike. The temperature is the same, the feathers
as food are about the same. Although the parasite’s
host may live in the water, the parasite itself, safely
tucked away next the skin or among the feathers, lives on
dry land in free air, for the water, even where it con-
tinually covers part of the plumage, as in swimmers, or
occasionally all of the plumage, as in divers, only touches
the plumage surface. Beneath this surface it is always
dry and there is always free air.
Thus despite an isolated life for the inhabitants of each
host island, and the great variety of these islands as re-
gards name and relation to phyletic mainlands, the actual
life conditions are monotonously alike on all these
islands. So that there is, for the Mallophaga, no such
variety of conditions of habitat and food and food-getting
and mate-seeking and egg-concealing and young-rearing
as would tend sharply to select and promote variations,
with a result of genus and family making. There is no
external influence at work promoting wide divergence.
The generic and family distinctions tend to be few; the
varietal and specific tend to be many.
IV
- As a direct outcome of these conditions of life of the
Mallophaga there arises an extremely interesting state
of affairs concerned with their host and geographic dis-
tribution, a state of affairs which reveals, I think, a prin-
ciple or fundamental consideration concerning the dis-
tribution of wingless ecto-parasites in general. This
special subject may be introduced by a swift résumé
of our present knowledge of the facts of the distribution
of the Mallophaga. In this résumé I include some par-
ticular illustrations, by examples, of certain special dis-
tributional ondion,
As Mallophaga have been taken so far from but a
No. 555] SPECIES-FORMING OF ECTO-PARASITES 137
hundred species of mammals, representing 48 genera, 24
families and 5 orders, any special scrutiny of the con-
ditions of their distribution among mammalian hosts
would hardly be worth while. But such serutiny can cer-
tainly now be advisedly undertaken as regards the dis-
tribution among birds. For the Mallophagan host list
includes already more than 1,100 bird species, represent-
ing 33 of the recognized 35 orders of living birds. The
known living bird species number, according to the Brit-
ish Museum Catalogue, about 18,500. This catalogue, I
should note, elevates to the position of species, or at least
to the seeming of species, by cataloguing them binomi-
ally, the so-called varieties or trinomially dubbed sub-
Species of the continental and North American ornithol-
ogists; and I have followed this custom in my list—al-
though against my belief in its taxonomic implication—
for the sake of having a common and universally access-
ible basis for the host names.
Thus one out of every seventeen known living bird spe-
cies is now included in the Mallophagan host list, as are
625 out of the 2,700 recognized living bird genera, and ~
120 out of the 160 living bird families. As comparatively
few bird kinds are still unknown, and as on the other
hand only a good beginning has been made in finding
and describing the Mallophagan kinds, it is certain that
the list of hosts of these parasites will increase rapidly in
proportion to the total number of bird species. From the
proportion of the number of different bird hosts par-
asitized by each Mallophagan species and the propor-
tion of bird families and genera already in the host
list, I estimate, roughly, the total number of living Mallo-
phagan species to be about 5,000.
From the three Acarinate or Ratitian bird orders,
namely, the Rheiformes, or South American rheas, the
Casuariiformes or Australian cassowaries, and the
Struthioniformes or African ostriches, only five species
of Mallophaga have so far been recorded. On the rheas
Occur three species of Lipeurus, one being found on each
138 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
of two host species and the other two on a third. On one
species of Australian cassowary are found two Mallo-
phagan kinds, one of which is the same species as that
found on two of the South American rheas, while from
the African ostrich, Struthio camelus, are recorded two
parasite species, one of which is the same as that found
on the third rhea. Here, at the very outset, is a remark-
able case of distribution. Identical parasitic species on
hosts as widely separated, geographically, as Australia
and South America and Africa, but hosts all of a certain
degree of genealogic affinity.
The order Tinamiformes, the tinamous of South Amer-
ica, curious birds, rather pheasant-like but presumably
not really pheasants nor true Galliformes of any kind, is
represented by eleven species in the Mallophagan host
list. Most of these tinamous are well parasitized, a spe-
cies of Nothura having four parasite species, one of
Crypturus five, one of Tinamus six, one of Rhynchotus
eight and another of Tinamus even nine parasite species
representing five genera, of which two are peculiar to the
` group. Of the other Mallophagan genera found on the
tinamous two that specially characterize the pheasants
and other gallinaceous birds are, by odds, the most com-
monly represented. And this condition suggests another
interesting problem. Is it going to be possible to get
suggestions regarding the phyletic affinities of hosts from
the character of their parasitic fauna? Take, for ex-
ample, an order of birds troublesome to the ornithological
taxonomists. Will the evidence of the presence on mem-
bers of this order of certain parasitic genera character-
istic of another order indicate their affinities to this
second order? It does indeed seem, in the case of the
Tinamiformes and Galliformes, as if the evidence from
the Mallophagan distribution was in conformity with that
suggested by certain structural similarities in the two
groups.
The great order Galliformes, including the pheasants,
partridges, quail, etc., is represented in the host list by
No. 555] SPECIES-FORMING OF ECTO-PARASITES 139
seventy-eight species, from which are recorded about 150
Mallophagan species representing six genera, two of
which, Goniodes and Goniocotes, are the most abundantly
represented and occur much more commonly on birds of
this order than those of any other unless it be the Tinami-
formes, just spoken of. The other Mallophagan spe-
cies recorded from the Galliformes belong to the large
genera Lipeurus, Colpocephalum and Menopon which in-
clude species from most bird orders. The Mallophagan
genus Docophorus, the second largest of all in the matter
of number of species, and abundantly represented on al-
most all other bird groups, is totally unrepresented on
the Galliformes. The Gallinaceous birds are, as a rule,
strongly parasitized both as regards number of Mallo-
phagan species and number of individuals. One of the
brush-turkeys, Megapodius, has ten parasitic species, the
painted Chinese pheasant has nine, and the Texan quail,
eight. The domestic fowl has twelve Mallophagan spe-
cies and its reputed ancestor, the wild Indian jungle fowl,
Gallus bankiva, four, all of which occur on its domesti-
cated descendant. The Mallophagan species Lipeurus
variabilis is common to nine different hosts of the family
Phasianide.
The small order of so-called pigeon grouse, the Ptero-
clidiformes, has two species in the host list, each parasi-
tized by the single Mallophagan species, Nirmus alchate,
not found on other birds. The two hosts species have
overlapping geographic ranges.
The Columbiformes, or doves and pigeons, are repre-
sented in the host list by 40 species. The Mallophagan
genera Goniodes and Goniocotes, so common also on the
Pheasants and tinamous, are very well represented
among the pigeon parasites. The single Mallophagan
Species Lipeurus baculus is recorded from nineteen of
the forty pigeon host species, whose geographic distri-
bution includes Europe, Asia, Africa, North America,
Malaysia, Australia, Madagascar and the Galapagos
Islands. The European-Asiatic rock dove, Columba
140 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
livia, immediate ancestor of the domestic pigeon, has two
Mallophagan parasites of which one, the wide-spread
Lipeurus baculus, is found on the domestic pigeon. The
other species, Goniocotes compar, is common to several
other wild doves, but, curiously enough, it has not been
recorded from the domestic pigeon. The isolated Gala-
pagos Island dove, Nesopelia galapagoensis, peculiar,
both in genus and species, to these islands, is parasitized
by Lipeurus baculus, and by four other Mallophagan
species not found on any other pigeons.
From the hoazin, strange aberrant bird of the Amazon
forests, and single representative of the order Opistho-
comiformes, I have recorded three Mallophagan para-
sites, two of them new species, and one a member of the
genus Goniocotes, a genus, rather cl teristic of the
pheasants and pigeons. It is exactly to the pheasant-
like birds that ornithologists seem at present inclined to
associate this lonely South American bird.
The Ralliformes, or rails, gallinules and coots, are
represented in the Mallophagan host list by twenty-three
species. One small genus of parasites, Oncophorus, 1s
almost limited to the order. The old world coot, or
mudhen, Fulica atra, has seven Mallophagan species rep-
resenting six genera. Its congeneric sister species of the
new world, Fulica americana, has twelve Mallophagan
species, of which five are identical with those found on
the old world coot. The parasite species Oncophorus
bisetosus occurs on six different rails, three of them
North and Central American and three of them Malay-
sian and Australian.
The Podicipedidiformes, or grebes, are represented in
the host list by six out of the 25 known species of the
order, from which are recorded eight Mallophagan kinds.
On five of the six grebe species occurs the Mallophagan
species Menopon tridens, found elsewhere also on certain
loons, auks and ducks. The six grebes are geographic-
ally distributed as follows: two new world, three old
world, and one cireumpolar.
No. 555] SPECIES-FORMING OF ECTO-PARASITES 141
Seven species of Mallophaga have been taken from
four species out of the known five of the order Colymbi-
formes or loons, one of which is limited to the old world
with three circumpolar in range. On three of these loons
occurs the Mallophagan species Docophorus colymbinus,
and Nirmus frontalis is common to two, and Menopon tri-
dens to two. But the continuity of geographical range
among the loons does not seem to have produced any
special effect of commonness of parasites to different
host species. In the preceding order, for example, that
of the grebes, there is more commonness of Mallophagan
species, although at the same time more isolation of the
hosts geographically.
From two penguins representing the order Sphenisci-
formes, three. Mallophagan species have been recorded.
Two of these belong to the genus Goniodes, a genus best
represented among the pheasants and pigeons. The
third is type-species of a genus so far not elsewhere
recorded.
The Procellariiformes, or petrels and albatrosses, of
which about a hundred living species are known, are rep-
resented in the host list by thirty-two species, and give
evidence of being a strongly parasitized group of birds.
Ten Mallophagan kinds have been taken from one species
of Puffinus, nine from another, eight from another and
Seven from a fourth. Besides these, four other species
of Puffinus are in the host list. On the four Puffinus
Species most infested there is one parasite kind common
to all, and four parasite species common to three of
them. Six species of albatrosses, genus Diomedea, are
included among the Procellariiform hosts. On five of
them occurs the giant Mallophagan species Lipeurus
f eros, 10 mm. long, and on five also the large, broad
Species Hurymetopus taurus. Nine species of Mallo-
Phaga have been recorded from the single albatross spe-
cies Diomedea albatrus, of the North Pacifice Ocean.
F our Mallophagan genera, each of them containing but
a single species, are peculiar to the order. : The birds of
142 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLVII
this order range the great oceans in overlapping zones
and reaches.
The order Alciformes, including 29 known living spe-
cies of auks, murres and puffins, is represented in the
host list by sixteen species which are parasitized by six-
teen Mallophagan species belonging to but two genera,
Docophorus and Nirmus, with the exception of one spe-
cies of Menopon. These two genera are, however, not
at all limited to the Alciformes, but are two of the largest
and most widely distributed of the Mallophagan genera.
Nirmus citrinus occurs on four Alciform hosts, and Nir-
mus maritimus, Docophorus celedoxus and Docophorus
montereyi on three each. Nirmus pacificus and Doco-
phorus atricolor occur on two each.
The homogeneous order Lariformes, or gulls and
terns, including 122 known living species, is represented
by fifty species in the host list, of which two dozen belong
to the gull genus Larus, and one dozen to the tern genus
Sterna. Gulls and terns are strongly parasitized. Thir-
teen species of Mallophaga, representing four genera,
have been recorded from Sterna fuliginosa, and ten spe-
cies from the tropical noddy, Anous stolidus. The gull
and tern parasites are mostly of the genus Docophorus
and Nirmus with some Menopon and Colpocephalum and
a few Lipeuri. Docophorus lari occurs on nineteen spe-
cies of Larus, and Nirmus bilineolatus on eleven. Doco-
phorus melanocephalus occurs on four species of Sterna.
Many of the members of this bird order range widely,
but some are limited to new world or old world shores.
The large order of waders and shore-birds, the Chara-
driiformes, is represented in the host-list by sixty-three
species. The Mallophagan genus Nirmus is especially
commonly met with on these birds, and has many species
characteristic of them. .From the cosmopolitan sander-
ling, Arenaria interpres, with its individuals from old
and new world meeting in high latitude breeding
grounds, fourteen Mallophagan species have been re-
corded, of which six are Nirmi. Ten Mallophagan kinds
No. 555] SPECIES-FORMING OF ECTO-PARASITES 143
occur on the European curlew, Numenius arquata, of
which one occurs also on the new world curlew, Numen-
ius longirostris. It is the only Mallophagan so far re-
corded from this host. Hematopus galapagoensis, limited
to the Galapagos Islands, has three Mallophagan species,
of which one is peculiar to it, one is a duck-infesting spe-
cies, probably a normal straggler under conditions which
I shall explain later, and one is a form found also on
Hematopus ostralegus, the common oyster-catcher of
Europe, Central Asia and Africa. The old world avocet,
Recurvirostra avocetta, has six Mallophagan species,
while the new world avocet, Recurvirostra americana, has
four, of which two, Nirmus pileus and Nirmus signatus,
are common to both hosts. The other two are new. Two
species of the curious aberrant Charadriiform family
Parride occur in the host-list, each having but a single
Mallophagan species, and that the same for both hosts.
One of the host species is limited to Australia, while the
other ranges from India to the Malay Peninsula.
The Gruiformes, or cranes, thirty-four living species,
are represented in the host-list by twelve species, para-
Sitized by twenty Mallophagan kinds. The herons and
egrets, order Ardeiformes, are represented by forty-five
Species. Lipeurus leucopygus occurs on both the old
world bittern, Botaurus stellaris, and the new world one,
Botaurus lentiginosus. It occurs also on two other
herons, both old world species. From Butorides sunde-
valli, peculiar to the Galapagos Islands, I have had four
Species, all previously described by me from various mar-
itime birds of the Pacific. This is a case of straggling,
but as I shall point out later in connection with the condi-
tions shown by certain other Galapagos Island hosts,
a case of what may be called normal straggling, unusual
on the whole, but possible and especially common in the
case of Galapagos, and perhaps other, island hosts.
The Palamedeiformes, or South American screamers,
are represented in the host-list by two species, parasi-
_ tized by three Mallophagan kinds. One of these is com-
144 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLVII
mon to both hosts. The flamingoes, constituting the
order Pheenicopteriformes, are parasitized by four spe-
cies of Mallophaga of four different genera.
The Anseriformes, swans, geese and ducks, are repre-
sented in the host-list by sixty-four species, seven being
- swans, nine geese and the rest ducks. The swans have
a Mallophagan genus, Ornithobius, peculiar to them,
which occurs on four out of the seven species. The spe-
cies bucephalus of this genus occurs on two old world
and one new world species. Six of the seven swan kinds
belong to the genus Cygnus. Three of these are old
world, two new world and one circum-polar in range.
Trinoton conspurcatum has been recorded from the three
old world and the single cireumpolar species, and Doco-
phorus cygni from two old world and one new world spe-
cies. Cygnus cygnus of Europe has six Mallophagan spe-
cies. The curious Australian swan Chenopsis atrata has
two parasite species neither of which occurs on any other
swan. Among the geese are three species of Anser, two
of them old world and one new world, with the parasite
Lipeurus jejunus common to them all, and four species
of Branta, one of which also carries Lipeurus jejunus.
This Mallophagan species also occurs on the domestic
goose. The forty-four species of ducks of the list are
parasitized by forty-two species of Mallophaga. Of these,
Docophorus icterodes is recorded from eleven duck spe-
cies, Lipeurus squalidus from fifteen and Trinoton luri-
dum from nineteen, these duck kinds including African,
Asiatic, European, North American, South American and
cosmopolitan species. A duck kind from Australia and
Malaysia has four parasitic species, all peculiar to it.
Three species of ducks have the three most familiar duck-
infesting Mallophaga, mentioned above, common to them
all. Anas boschas, the ancestor of the domestic duck, has
these three and just one more. But so far only one of
the three has been recorded from the domestic duck.
While many species of ducks, and most individuals of the
species, are parasitisized, it is rare that more than two
No. 555] SPECIES-FORMING OF ECTO-PARASITES 145
or three or four—the maximum is actually six—Mallo-
phagan species are found on a single host species. The
great bulk of the parasitization comes from compara-
tively few Mallophagan species, notably the three spe-
cies already named.
The Pelecaniformes, 75 living species, including the
pelicans, cormorants, boobies, man-o’-war and tropic
birds, are represented in the host list by thirty-three spe-
cies. Thirteen of these are cormorants of the genus
Phalacrocorax, and nine are boobies of the genus Sula.
Lipeurus setosus occurs on two African and two Aus-
tralian and Malaysian species of Phalacrocorax. Lipeu-
rus toxoceros occurs on one cosmopolitan cormorant and
on two others, one of South and Central America and
one of North America. Lipeurus faralloni is recorded
from three North American west coast species. Five
Species of Pelecanus, three new world and two old world,
are included in the list. Menopon titan occurs on two
of the new world and one of the old world species, Lipeu-
rus bifasciatus on one new world and both of the old
world forms, and Lipeurus forficulatus on two new world
and one old world species. Eleven species of Mallophaga
are recorded from the cosmopolitan man-o’-war bird,
Fregata aquila, and eight from the beautiful white tropic
bird, Phaeton ethereus.
The Cathartidiformes, or new world vultures, are rep-
resented in the host list by four species. There are but
nine species in the order. The four species in my list
are the great condor of the Andes, ranging from Pata-
gonia to Keuador; the great king vulture of the northern
Andes, Central America and Mexico; the rare Cali-
fornian condor of northern Mexico, Baja California, and
California north to its middle region; and finally, the
ubiquitous turkey vulture, smaller and far more abun-
dant than any of the others, that ranges over all of North
America and, in winter, gets into northern South Amer-
ica. Thus the ranges of the four species combined ex-
tend the whole length of the western coast of the new
146 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Von. XLVII
world. And although each bird has its own stretch of
coast mountains, the range of each overlaps that of some
other. The individuals of all these bird species, except
the last named, are few and solitary in habit, resting and
nesting in inaccessible mountain places, but meeting a
few of their kind occasionally at common table around
some dead or dying animal. Turning now to the para-
sites of these lonely birds, we find one species, the well-
marked, rather large Lipeurus assessor common to all
four vulture species. But assessor has been taken from
the wide-spread turkey vulture only in Panama, îi. e.,
within the range of the king vulture. Laemobothrium
delogramma is also found on both the king and the turkey
vultures, but has been taken from the latter host again
only from Panama specimens. The king vulture and
Californian condor, whose ranges overlap in Mexico, have
one parasite species, Menopon fasciatum, common to
both. These are the only cases of commonness of Mallo-
phagan species to two or more of these great vulture
kinds. And all are pretty well parasitized, seven Mallo-
phagan species being recorded from the king vulture, five
from the South American condor, five from the North
American turkey vulture, and two from the Californian
condor. It is well to keep in mind, in noting this rather
abundant parasitization, that the feeding habits of the
birds give some opportunity for the straggling of para-
sites from other bird or mammal kinds, serving, in the
persons of moribund or just dead individuals, as prey-
It is therefore indeed important to note that no mammal-
infesting Mallophaga have been taken from any vulture,
despite the excellent chances for such straggling. Per-
haps the difference between a mammal and a bird host is
too great to permit a parasite adaptively specialized for
life on one to persist successfully on the other. Or per-
haps there is a physiological antipathy, a negative chemo-
tropism, too strong to permit the straggling. Yet I re-
call that in my days as a bird-collector and maker of
skins, I repeatedly had the annoyance of discovering
No. 555] SPECIES-FORMING OF ECTO-PARASITES 147
that I was a temporary host for individuals of parasites
more normal to a duck or a barn owl than to man! But
these wanderers seemed as anxious to leave their chance-
found new host as was the host to be relieved of them; a
few moments was the usual extent of their stay.
This point of the reluctance of Mallophaga to migrate,
even with good opportunity, from normal or characteris-
tic host, to another, is emphasized when we come to ex-
amine the parasitic conditions of the next bird order, the
Accipitriformes, or faleons, hawks and eagles, almost all
species of which capture living mammals of one kind or
another. In the parasitic records of the seventy species
of this order included in my host list, there is not a single
record of a Mallophagan species of either of the strictly
mammal-infesting genera, and there are but three or four
records of bird-infesting species that are plainly strag-
glers from prey, as is, for example, a typical duck para-
site recorded from an American hawk, and a pigeon para-
site from a European falcon. In fact, the Mallophagan
Species taken from the birds of prey are about as charac-
teristic of their host-group as are those of any other
Sroup, although there are, indeed, no parasitic genera
Wholly peculiar to the birds of prey. The Mallophagan
Species Colpocephalum flavescens is found on twenty-one
Accipitrine species and Nirmus fuscus on eighteen, the
hosts representing species from all parts of the world,
Including, for Nirmus fuscus, at least, Australia. They
represent, too, most of the principal families and sub-
families of the order. Colpocephalum flavescens is found
on Thrysaëtos, a new world eagle genus, on Gypaétus, an
old world eagle, and on one cosmopolitan species of Aquila
and one old world Aquila. The eagles, like the great vul-
tures, are characteristically solitary birds, only the mem-
bers of each household, that is, male, female and young,
coming into contact with each other. They are typical
host islands, Some of the birds of prey are strongly
parasitized, as the golden eagle, Aquila chrysaétus, with
148 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
nine Mallophagan species, and the South American cara-
cara, Polyborus tharos, with eight.
In the Strigiformes, or owls, represented in our host
list by nineteen host species, we have added confirmation
of the Mallophagan hesitancy to straggle even with good
opportunity. There is no record of a mammal parasite
on any owl, nor but two or three of Mallophagan species
characteristic of birds of other orders. Of the charac-
teristic owl parasites, Docophorus cursor occurs on all
three species of Asio included in the host list. One of
these Asios is restricted to the Galapagos Islands, one
ranges Mexico and temperate North America, and one
occurs in both old and new worlds. The genus Strix,
barn owls, is represented by two species, one the old
world barn owl and the other the barn owl of temperate
North America. The Mallophagan species Docophorus
rostratus occurs on both of them. Asio accipitrinus, the
cosmopolitan hawk owl, carries seven Mallophagan
species.
The Psittaciformes, parrots and cockatoos, are repre-
sented in the host list by twenty-eight species, infested
usually by only one to two or three parasite kinds, al-
though five have been recorded from a Senegambiaa
Psittacus. It is pleasant to note that the cruel New Zea-
land Keas, which have adopted the extraordinary habit of
alighting on the backs of living sheep and tearing their
flesh, even through to the vitals, have at least three Mal-
lophagan parasite species to make life a little uncomfor-
table for them. One of these species, Lipeurus circum-
fasciatus, is recorded from three other parrots of Aus-
tralia and Malaysia.
The catch-all order Coraciiformes, including the
rollers, kingfishers, hoopoes, mot-mots, poor-wills, swifts
and humming-birds, is represented in the list by forty-
five species, of which six are kingfishers, six are hummers
and five are swifts. Of the five swifts three are of the
new world and two of the old. The Mallophagan genus
Nitzschia is peculiar to the swifts and is found, repre-
No. 555] SPECIES-FORMING OF ECTO-PARASITES 149
sented by four species, on all five in my list. Nitzschia
pulicaris is found on one old world and two new world spe-
cies. The humming-birds are not badly parasitized,
although three Mallophagan species have been recorded
from a single one of these tiny host kinds. They are
especially infested by the Mallophagan genus Physosto-
mum, although species of this genus occur on several
other passerine bird hosts.
The trogons, order Trogones, are represented in the
host list by two species, infected by two Mallophagan
species, both of the genus Nirmus. The Coceyzes, or
cuckoos, represented by twenty-three species, have usu-
ally but one, although sometimes two or three Mallo-
phagan kinds to a host species. And this condition of
slight parasitization is also true of the five species of
toucans and barbets, order Scansores, included in the list.
Docophorus latifrons is recorded both from the common
European cuckoo and, in varietal form, from the common
American cuckoo.
The order Piciformes, the woodpeckers, is represented
in the list by twenty-six species, each carrying but one to
two or three Mallophagan kinds to its discredit. The
woodpecker genus Dendrocopus is represented by six
_ Species of which five belong to the new world and one to
the old world. Docophorus superciliosus, described from
the old world species of Dendrocopus, occurs also on one
of the new world species and also on another old world
woodpecker of different genus. One of my Western
American Mallophaga species occurs on three wood-
pecker kinds in California, one in Baja California and
three in Costa Rica. It seems to be a pervasive parasite
of American West Coast woodpeckers. Of the seven
host species from which it is recorded three belong to the
one genus Melanerpes.
The order Eurylæmiformes, or Malayan broadbills, is
represented in the host list by one species parasitized by
two species of Mallophaga, while the order Menuri-
formes, the beautiful lyre-birds of Australia, three living
150 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
species, is also represented by one species, parasitized,
however, by six Mallophagan species all peculiar to it.
This brings us to the last bird order of our list, the
great group of Passeriformes, the perching and singing
birds, with its various familiar families of flycatchers,
swallows, wrens, thrushes, titmice, warblers, larks,
finches and sparrows, tanagers, blackbirds, crows and
jays, et al. It contains 5,000 known kinds, but is repre-
sented in our host list by but three hundred and eight
species, divided among more than a score of families.
Practically no Mallophagan species found on members
of this order occur on birds of any other order. Two
Mallophagan kinds have a wide host distribution within
the order. Docophorus communis has a host list of one
hundred and thirty Passeriform species, of which
thirty-eight are members of the family Fringillide,
this being more than half of all the Fringilline birds
from which Mallophaga have so far been recorded.
These one hundred and thirty hosts of Docophorus com-
munis represent most of the families of the Passeri-
formes and, in their geographic distribution, all of the
principal regions of the world. A score of varieties have
been named within the species, and a score more might
be. But this would be to say no more than that there is
a wide variation among the members of the species, and
to attempt to make categories of this variation is really
labor lost. This large variability of Docophorus com-
munis is simply the most conspicuous example within the
order of that condition of persistent variation, due chiefly
to isolation, that I spoke of at the beginning of this paper
as a condition occurring in almost all the Mallophagan
species; a variation fostered by isolation, unrestrained
by cross-breeding, but not specially emphasized by adapt-
ive modification, nor sharply selected for life and death
value. ;
Another Mallophagan species widely spread among
Passeriform hosts is Nirmus vulgatus, a species described
by me several years ago and which I have so far taken
No. 555] SPECIES-FORMING OF ECTO-PARASITES 151
from forty new world host kinds, including several
genera and species peculiar to the Galapagos Islands.
All the specimens from Galapagos Island hosts show a
number of small but obvious distinguishing characters,
and I have given them the varietal name galapagoensis.
This constant distinction would indicate that the Gala-
pagos individuals, though now infesting several different
host kinds, are all descended from a single original intro-
duction of the species; or that there is some external
modifying condition of life on Galapagos Island birds
that would produce a convergence among the descendants
of ancestors representing several introductions, a sup-
position hardly tenable, especially in the light of the pe-
culiar life conditions of the Mallophaga.
The Passeriform family Tyrannide, the new world
flycatchers, is represented in the list by eighteen species
parasitized by two Mallophagan species, of which but
two, one being Docophorus communis, are recorded from
old world Passeriform hosts. Although this family has
a continuous geographical distribution over North, Cen-
tral and South America, there is no unusual commonness
of parasitic distribution in it. No one Mallophagan kind
occurs on more than two flycatcher species, except in the
Galapagos islands, where Nirmus vulgatus var. gala-
pagoensis is found on all three of the flycatcher kinds
occurring there. All the other Mallophagan species on
these Galapagos flycatchers are forms restricted to the
islands, although not to the flycatchers.
The swallows, Hirundinidæ, are represented by ten
Species of which two are old world, five new world, two
both old and new world, and one from the Galapagos
Islands. From them are recorded twenty Mallophagan
Species, of which M enopon rusticum is found on one old
world, one new world, one old and new world, and one
Galapagos Island host. Docophorus excisus is found on
one old world and two new world hosts, and Nirmus
longus on two new world and the two old and new world
hosts. Seven Mallophagan species have been taken from
152 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
the Galapagos Island swallow, of which one is found on
two new world swallows and one is the Menopon rusticum
already mentioned as common to one old world, one new
world and one old and new world host.
Mallophaga have been taken from three species of wrens,
Troglodytide, of three different genera. Two species
of parasites have been taken from each host species, and
no one of these Mallophagan species occurs on more
than one host kind.
The Cinclide, or dippers, are represented in the list,
by two species of Cinclus, one from the old world and one
. belonging to the new. One Mallophagan species, a Men-
opon, is common to both hosts, and each host species has,
in addition, another Mallophagan species, a Docophorus
in one case and a Nirmus in the other.
The Mimide, or mocking-birds, are represented by
seven species, of which five belong to the genus Nesomi-
mus peculiar to the Galapagos islands. The other two
are North American. There is one Mallophagan species
on each of the American mockers, and from one to as
many as eight on the various Galapagos Island hosts.
But the Mallophaga of the Galapagos Island mockers
are mostly species common to numerous other birds of the
islands, some of these birds being widely separated phy-
letically from the Mimide. For example, the charac-
teristic Lipeurus baculus of the pigeons has been taken
from one of the mockers. This apparently abnormal
condition has a normal explanation that we shall take up
in connection with certain still more conspicuous ex-
amples of the anomalies among the Galapagos records.
The Turdide, or thrushes, are represented in the list by
twenty-three species. Docophorus communis occurs on
nine of them. Menopon thoracicum is recorded from the
old world Turdus viscivorus and from Merula grayi and
Catharus gracilirostris from Costa Rica. The Sylviide,
or old world warblers, are represented by five species, on
four of which Docophorus communis is the only parasite.
The Ampelide, or waxwings, are represented by four
No. 555] SPECIES-FORMING OF ECTO-PARASITES 153
. species, two of which are North American, one Central
American, and one common to both old and new worlds.
Docophorous communis and Nirmus brachythorax oceur
on three of the four species.
Mallophaga have been recorded from eight species of
Laniide, or shrikes, of which three are old world species,
three new world and two are Australian. Docophorus
communis occurs on five of the old and new world spe-
cies, but not on either of the Australian hosts. Four of
the eight species belong to the genus Lanius, three being
new world and the other an old world species. Doco-
phorus communis occurs on them all.
The Paride, or titmice and chickadees, are represented
in the host list by eleven species, four old world and
seven new world. Docophorus pari is recorded from
three old world species of three different genera. Doco-
phorus rutteri occurs on two new world species of the
Same genus and the same geographical region. Mallo-
phaga have been taken from three kinglets, family Regu-
lide, two of them old world species and one new world.
Physostomum frenatum is recorded from one old world
and one new world host species.
The rather large family of Mniotiltide, or wood-war-
blers, is represented by twelve species, three of them
from the Galapagos Islands, and the others from North,
Central and South America. Docophorus communis is the
only old world Mallophagan species occurring in the
group, being found on three of the American host species.
The Drepanide, or honey creepers of the Hawaiian
Islands, are represented in the list by three species of
three different genera. Seven Mallophagan species, all
except one peculiar to the host group, have been taken
from these three hosts. One of the Mallophagan species
1S Common to all three.
Mallophaga have been taken from five species of Alau-
did, or larks, three of them old world, one new world,
and one inhabiting both old and new worlds. Doco-
Phorus communis occurs on four of the lark species.
154 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVIL
Only three other Mallophagan kinds have been recorded
from the family.
The great family of sparrows and finches, the Fringil-
lide, including nearly 1,200 bird kinds, is represented in
the host-list by seventy-six species. The Mallophagan
species Docophorus communis has been recorded from
thirty-eight of these from the old and new worlds, and
Nirmus vulgatus from eighteen, all from the new world.
There have been almost no Mallophagan records made
from old world hosts since I described vulgatus, which is
possibly the explanation of the lack of any old world
records for it, although it may really be that the species
does not occur in? Europe. Among the Fringilline hosts
of the Mallophaga there are nine species representing
two genera, Camarhynchus and Geospiza, peculiar to the
Galapagos Islands. Most of these nine host species are
pretty strongly parasitized, one of them, indeed, Geopiza
fuliginosus, having had nineteen Mallophagan species
taken from it, the record as regards number of parasite
species from a single host form. Of these nineteen Mal-
lophagan species, four belong to the genus Docophorus,
five to Nirmus, five to Lipeurus, two to Colpocephalum,
two to Menopon, and one to Goniocotes. Among them
are included all of the seven species that have been re-
corded from Camarhynchus pallidus, the most parasitized
species of this sister sparrow genus peculiar to the
islands. But also there are included several Mallopha-
gan species found on various other host birds widely sep-
arated phyletically from Geopiza and Camarhynchus.
In fact, in studying the parasitization of the Galapagos
Island birds—and I have had in hand two very full col-
lections from them—one is struck by the breakdown of
the general rule that the Mallophaga of one host group,
as a genus or family or order, shall be more or less nearly
exclusively confined to members of the group, and hence
to be characteristic of it. For example, one does not
expect to find the abundant duck parasite, Trinoton luri-
*I have recently recorded Nirmus vulgatus from a starling from
Egyptian Sudan.
No. 555] SPECIES-FORMING OF ECTO--PARASITES 155
dum on pigeons, nor the familiar pigeon parasite, Lipeu-
rus baculus on ducks, and one does not so find them.
Nor to find on sparrows or hawks Mallophaga of the
genera Ancistrona, Eurymetopus and Philoceanus, char-
acteristic of maritime birds; nor on owls or cuckoos to
find certain maritime bird-infesting species of Lipeurus
and Docophorus, genera in themselves represented by
species on hosts of many orders. But in the two care-
fully made collections of Mallophaga from the Galapagos
Islands, representing in their host lists practically all the
bird species known to inhabit the islands, I have noted
the exception to be the rule. And from interviews with
the collectors—one of them was one of my own assist-
ants—I have determined the probable reason for this
unusual state of affairs. It is this: The birds of the
land, the birds of the shore, and the birds of the sea meet
and rest side by side on the shore rocks and sands. The
land birds live chiefly not in the dense, almost impene-
trable jungle of the interior of the islands, but in the
outer or shore fringe of it. Here they meet and mingle
with the hosts of sea birds that find resting and nesting
ground on these few small bits of solid earth set in the
midst of all the leagues of inhospitable moving waters
that constitute their range. This brings about the op-
portunity and the reality of an abnormal but natural
straggling, which results in an extraordinary and prob-
ably unique host distribution of the parasites. And thus
it is that the little Galapagos Island sparrow, Geospiza
fuliginosa, comes to be the bearer of more Mallophagan
Species than any other bird in the host list and has in-
cluded among its guests many that more rightfully be-
long to birds of ocean and shore sands.
The Tanagride, or tanagers, are represented in the
host list by ten species. Menopon thoracicum is com-
mon to four of them, all of Central American range. The
Icteridæ, including the blackbirds, grackles, meadow-
larks, and American orioles, are represented by twenty-
two host species, and the Sturnidæ, or starlings, by seven.
156 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
The Paradiseidex, the radiant birds of paradise, are rep-
resented in the list by eight species.
Finally, the Corvide, or crows and jays, are repre-
sented at present by thirty-two species, about one out of
ten of the known kinds, of which thirteen belong to the
genus Corvus. Both these numbers will be increased
when I am able to incorporate in the list the records,
already worked but not yet published, of a considerable
collection of Mallophaga from the crows and jays of
India, sent to me by Superintendant Annandale of the
Indian Museum at Calcutta. The Corvide are provided
with a number of parasite species characteristic of the
family, such as Docophorus atratus, Colpocephalum sub-
equale, Menopon mesoleucum, et al. This latter parasite
occurs on four species of Corvus, two of old world and
two of new world range. Colpocephalum subequale oc-
curs on two North American and one European species
of Corvus.
V
From these examples of Mallophagan distribution
illustrating various special conditions of host relations a
number of rather important points of significance appear.
Of two only, however, which indeed at bottom are really
one, shall I speak. First, there is apparent in Mallo-
phagan distribution a general faithfulness of parasite to
host kind or group of related host-kinds, and this without
much reference to geographical conditions. And second,
there appears a plain tendency for a single parasite spe-
cies to be common to two or more related host species,
even though these hosts be so widely separated geograph-
ically and so restricted to their separate geographic
ranges that all possible chance of contact between indi-
viduals of the different host species seems positively pre-
cluded. The American and the European avocets do not
meet; nor do the American and European coots. Yet
the two coots have five Mallophagan species in common,
and the two avocets two. The American and European
bitterns are both infested by a common parasite species.
No. 555] SPECIES-FORMING OF ECTO-PARASITES 157
The American and old world dippers or water ouzels are
in the same case. The same Mallophagan species occurs
on both an old world and a new world kinglet. One para-
site species is common to two old world and two new
world crows. Practically all of those isolated bird spe-
cies found only on the Galapagos Islands are infested by
Mallophaga that occur on related new world or even old
world hosts.
Now, removing all cases of even an imaginable rare
possible contact of bodies between these related but spe-
cifically distinct hosts, such as might occur in birds of
circum-polar range, or in gregarious maritime kinds
meeting on common mid-ocean islands, or in kinds occa-
sionally exported by man from their normal range, etc.,
and there are still left many cases of this commonness
of a parasite species to two or more usually rather closely
related host species of quite distinct geographic range.
How can this actual condition be explained?
I can see but one answer. That is, that the parasite
Species has been handed down practically unchanged to
the present specifically and even generically distinct sev-
eral bird species from their common ancestor of earlier
days. The parasite species dates from the days of this
ancestor. With the splitting up of the ancient host spe-
cies due to geographic wandering and isolation of groups
of its individuals, and their gradual divergence in plu-
mage, color and pattern, shape of bill or toes or wings,
caused partly by adaptation and partly by the simple per-
Sistence of chance variations fostered by the isolation
and inbreeding, there has been no equivalent evolution-
ary divergence of the isolated groups of individuals of
the parasite species. No adaptive changes have been
necessary for it. It has indeed been broken into isolated
Sroups of individuals, but no more than is normal to its
life under conditions less novel. I have already pointed
out the large variability that occurs within every Mal-
lophagan Species caused by the separation, more or less
complete and persisting, of its individuals into little
158 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST (Von. XLVII
groups and family strains each isolated on its host island
or succession of self-reproducing islands.
But the change of plumage markings, or of bill shape
or even of food and flight habit, of the separating host
kinds splitting off from a common ancestor need mean
nothing much for the parasite. So although in time we
come to have, derived from a common ancestor, an Amer-
ican avocet and a European one, an American coot and a
European one, we do not have an American avocet- or
coot-parasite and a European avocet- or coot-parasite.
But the parasite of the common avocet or coot ancestor
of the two present bird species remains unchanged and
is thus a single species common to the two geographically
separated, specifically distinct, never-meeting, host
species.
If this is a true explanation for the commonness of a
parasite of two separated host species, it is likely also
the explanation of the larger phenomenon of the general
faithfulness of certain parasite species or genera to cer-
tain bird groups—families, or even orders. I do indeed
believe that it is a commonness of the genealogy rather
than a commonness of adaptation that is the chief ex-
planation of this restriction of certain parasite groups to
certain host groups. It is in my eyes an unusually clear
example of the potency of heredity. There is more
nature than nurture in the upbringing of the Mallophaga.
Isolation and inheritance, then, are the two evolution
factors especially concerned in the species-forming and
the distribution of the Mallophaga. Adaptation seems
to play a very subordinate part. And this is a rather
unusual condition in insect biology. The plasticity of
insect nature combined with the stresses of insect life
and the necessary shifts for a living, have resulted in pro-
ducing among the insects some of the most striking ex-
amples of adaptive evolution to be found in the kingdom
of life. In the face of this fact, this little group of para-
sites may have by the very exceptionality of its evolu-
tionary behavior, an enhanced interest for us!
CASTRATION IN RELATION TO THE SECONDARY
SEXUAL CHARACTERS OF BROWN
LEGHORNS!
H. D. GOODALE
STATION FOR EXPERIMENTAL EVOLUTION
Introduction.—It has often been observed, in many
sexually dimorphic species of birds, that a female occa-
sionally occurs which exhibits many of the characters of
her mate. Frequently associated with this condition are
alterations, more or less pathological, in the ovary. It
has been said also that the male sometimes, and in par-
ticular the unsexed male of the domestic fowl, presents
characters resembling those of the female. However, it
has been pointed out that the supposed resemblance to the
female can also be interpreted as due to the failure of
the development of the normal adult male characters.
In other words, these modified males may be referred to
either a juvenile or to a female condition.
These considerations led, then, to the following ques-
tions. Will removal of the ovary from the young female
fowl cause her to assume the characters of the male?
Will removal of the testes from the young male cause him
to assume any female characters or will it cause him to
.Tetain his own juvenile characters or will it be without
effect? For answers the Brown Leghorns seemed to
furnish particularly favorable material, because: first,
the adult plumage, which is strongly sexually dimorphic,
is practically identical with that of the Jungle fowl;
Second, the comb of the female, while proportionally
smaller than that of the male, is larger than that of the
male of many other varieties; third, there are at least
*This paper with some changes was read before the American Society
of Naturalists at Princeton, N. J., December 28, 1911. Since then the
experimental results have been fully verified. Male characters have devel-
Oped on 25 females, following ovariotomy. A complete account of the
newer experiments will be published later.
159
160 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Von. XLVII
three distinct stages in the development of the young
bird’s plumage before the adult color is reached. The
first two stages do not exhibit sexual dimorphism, nor are
they identical with that of the adult female. Sexual
dimorphism appears first in the third juvenile plumage.
At this stage, while the young female rather closely re-
sembles the adult female, the young males in their tout
ensemble are distinct from either the adult male or
female, though sometimes feathers like those of the fe-
male may be found. A study of the characters of the
Brown Leghorn capon or poullard, therefore, should show
whether their characters are juvenile, male or female.
For most characters, the results obtained from a pre-
liminary set of experiments are clear cut.
Description of the Secondary Sexual Characters.—In
Table I is given a comparative statement of the more
pronounced secondary sexual characters common to
nearly all races of domestic chickens. There are other
differences between the sexes, which are more subtle and
therefore not considered here. In Table II are given
other secondary sexual characters found in the Brown
Leghorns but not in all other races of chickens.
Comment on Tables—Such exceptions to the general
statements given in Table I as occur, are mainly negative,
that is, they are characters which for one reason or
another do not become patent, as for example, the failure
of the whole or a part of the color pattern to become:
visible, particularly in the case of uniformly colored
birds.
In considering plumage characters aside from shape of
feather there are three features to be taken into account.
First, the localization of color in certain definite regions
of the body, thus forming the body pattern; second, the
localization of color on definite regions of the feather,
forming the feather pattern; third, the pigments them-
selves, which are associated with each pattern in various
ways.
It is rather striking, that in spite of the numerous
No. 555]
CASTRATION IN BROWN LEGHORNS
TABLE I?
A COMPARATIVE STATEMENT OF THE CHIEF SECONDARY SEXUAL CHARACTERS
or DOMESTIC CHICKENS, COMMON TO NEARLY ALL VARIETIES
161
Size, includ-
Body color
patte:
mi.i —
vi
Feather
pattern.
Behavior...
es
Adult
Male
Female
Young of Both
Sexes
ieee large.
Well developed.
. Pie sat saddle ke
arrow, pointed a
Barbules absent distal
h
dle, and
w fond bom Gf.
Tail eoreti: including sick-
les, g, curved and
pointed
distinct color
. hackle,
baek, saddle, wing front,
bow, win ade Ser
bar
tail breast aera vitae
surface.
-Usually uniform’ or with
central stripe
Relatively erect carriage,
pugnacious, frequ uen
crows, rarely ‘‘sings,’’
appears to feck brooding
instinct.
Relatively small.
Absent.
Hackle feathers similar to
hose of male but rela
betes sho sgi Pagie ore
unded addle
feathers posse neart
shor . broadly
psc ip
Barbules absent teak distal |
third o e fe semen
verge A present U her
Ch Fig. 3, D.
Tail
short, broa
at tips.
coverts, relatively
d and rounded
Relatively red areas; viz. 3
mainder oi
were or penciled when
t like that of the male.
dgan to fe-
male.
Barbules
resent.
Similar to fe-
male.
Varies with
different
Relatively horizontal car-|Peeps for a
riage, not pugnacious, e, en
does not crow Meg t follows a
‘sings’ 5 great deal iod
when in laying Bo weg when voice
rooding instine
until
approach-
ing
ity.
varieties of domestic chickens, there is, with one excep-
tion, only one basic body pattern, that of the Jungle fowl.
(See table.) All other patterns, with the exception of the
white crest of certain Polish, must be considered as modi-
*These tables make no pretense of giving all the characters which differ
in the two sexes, I have also ignored minor details in some characterizations.
Un iform, except as cay under color can be distinguished from the sur-
face color.
See also
«
162 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLVII
fications of the Jungle, usually by the loss or non-devel-
opment of a part. I know of no other distinctive pattern
in chickens, such as, for example, that exhibited by the
Mallard in ducks.
TABLE II?
A COMPARATIVE STATEMENT OF THE CHIEF SECONDARY SEXUAL CHARACTERS
F BROWN LEGHORNS, OTHER THAN THOSE GIVEN IN TABLE I
Adult Juvenile (Third Stage)
Male Female Male Female
Comb..... eon Ose Lops. Blade Erect. Rela- Erect. Rela-
rtion- proportion- tively large tively small
st large. ately small. and of quick and of slower
growth. growth.
Spurs..... Present. Usually absent,
but frequently
present in var-
ious conditions
develop-
of
ment
Plumage
color....|/Hackle, reddish|Hackle, yelow,| Mostly black, Similar to adult
orange, with! with dark-| each feather’ but markings
black central) brown central! being splashed) coarser.
stripe ck ipe; breast, with various
: ail,| amounts of
ark crimson;| primaries and| red. Feathers
saddle, reddish} concealed por-| of back often
orange, often’ tionsofsecond-| like those of
lac ies, coe young fem
central stripe;| rest of Body pattern
wing bay, red; “oie = ight of adult more
dorsal white or less clearly
area at base of cael in| indie
tail; rest of pper and
body black. salt fashion.
The feather patterns fall into two groups, viz., those
associated with sexual dimorphism and those not so asso-
ciated. In the male there is no pattern of the first group.
But penciling of the type found in the Dark Brahma
female appears never to occur in the male and therefore
belongs in the second class. Stippling is also usually
distinctive of the adult female, but it occurs in the young
male and under certain conditions (heterozygosis) in the
adult male. In the Jungle female the stippling often
approaches very closely the form of narrow concentric
lines or vermiculations. Possibly the stippling of the
Brown Leghorn female is due to the breaking up of such
No. 555] CASTRATION IN BROWN LEGHORNS 163
vermiculations and so is not strictly comparable with
that due to heterozygosis. However this may be, stip-
pling is normally a female or a juvenile male character.
The males corresponding to these two types of females
usually have uniformly colored feathers ventrally. The
dorsal regions are less constant in type, being usually
uniformly colored or else striped. In other breeds the
feather pattern may be alike in the two sexes.
The question of behavior depends upon so many condi-
tions, that only a few of the numerous reactions have
been mentioned in the table.
The following comments are intended to apply only to
Brown Leghorns.
While the comb of the female usually lops to one side
or the other, it does not always do so. There are indi-
cations, moreover, that by proper matings this character
could be transferred to the male.
Spurs are usually absent from the female, yet they are
occasionally well developed. Their presence can not be
taken as a certain indication of the assumption of a male
character by the female, for there was an old Scottish
race in which both sexes were spurred. Nor need they
indicate the presence of an abnormal ovary, for in one
case in which they had become well developed at 9 months
of age, the hen proved to be a splendid layer. These
spurred hens are probably due to the presence or absence
in the germ plasm of some definite determiner, as certain
of my breeding experiments indicate.
The plumage color within certain limits is variable, so
that it is a little difficult to describe briefly. American
fanciers recognize only one type of plumage color for
each sex, that described in the ‘‘American Standard of
Perfection,” but beside the ‘‘Standard’’ female there is
one in which the salmon breast is replaced by one of
nearly the same color as the back. Beside the ‘‘Stand-
ard” male is one in which the striping of the hackle and
saddle feathers is lost, and third, one in which there is
some red in the under parts. It is evident, moreover,
164 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLVII
from experiments in cross breeding, that the body pattern
of the Brown Leghorn is not a unit, but is composed of
several parts.
These departures from the ideal and the probable vari-
ability in the gametie constitution of supposedly pure-
bred stock may be expected to influence the behavior of
the birds under castration. They indicate also that a
character which at one time may behave as a secondary
sexual character, at others forms a normal character of
both races.
Experimental.—Without taking time to describe the
details of the experiments, except to note that the gonads
were removed from the chicks when they were 21-28 days
old, that is, they were much younger than is the case in
commercial caponization, we may proceed directly to a
consideration of the results, taking up first the effects of
castration on the male.
Seven of the castrated males reached four months of
age, then three were accidentally killed. The autopsies
on these three showed an entire absence of testicular —
material in two cases. The third had a tiny nodule, pos-
sibly testicular, on the mesentary near the former site of
the testis. All four survivors were kept until they were
16 months of age. Two were then killed for study. They
developed the normal plumage of the male and were it
not for the small comb and wattles they would have had
nearly the same appearance as a normal cock (Fig. 1).
They are, however, somewhat fuller plumaged and rather
heavier looking birds than a normal cock. The spurs are
well developed but on the other hand these capons are
less active in their movements, are non-combatants and
show no sexual instincts. They have never been heard
crowing, though they may be made to squawk or even
cluck like a cock.
One of these capons was somewhat anomalous in that
he had much the same appearance as a normal cock. He
had a large comb but did not crow. At one time he
* Unfortunately this material was not sectioned.
No. 555] CASTRATION IN BROWN LEGHORNS 165
showed some inclination to pay attention to the hens, but
as far as I was able to observe, it never went as far as an
attempt at copulation. At the autopsy it was found that
there had been an autoplastic transplantation of a bit of
the testis.
Fic. 1, carey Leghorn Capon. The colors are exactly those of the male as
given in Table
It will have been observed from the foregoing descrip-
tion, that the small comb of these capons is the only char-
acter which might be considered female. In all other
points the characters of the capon are the characters of
the cock, sometimes exaggerated (feather length), some-
times infantile (crowing instinct). None are positively
female, except perhaps the comb, which is much too large
to be purely infantile, and too small and of the wrong
proportions to be that of a normal adult female. On the
whole it most closely resembles that of the mature young
female before she has actually commenced to lay, or of
the adult female when out of laying condition. Comb size
is affected by so many conditions that the question as to
whether or not the capon has a female type of comb is
not easily answered, and therefore must await further
studies,
We may turn now to the effects of castration on the
166 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLVII
female. Unfortunately, only one of the females from
which the ovary (naturally only the left, since it was
assumed that the right had completely degenerated) was
removed, reached maturity. There is no doubt as to the
effect of ovariotomy on this individual (Fig. 2), which
Female Brown Leghorn from which the ovary was removed. The
colors, with the exception of some feathers as noted in the text, are those of the
male as given in Table II. The long saddle feathers are hidden by the wing,
but see Fig. 3, 0.
commonly passed as a cock, with those unacquainted with
the bird’s history. Nevertheless, the assumption of male
characters has not been quite complete, as is shown by a
consideration of the following features. First, the pres-
ence of feathers on the back which are very much hen-
like (Fig. 3, B). Second, the wing bow is poorly de-
veloped. Third, the shank is too short for that of a cock.
In some points of behavior, such as lack of the crowing
instinct, non-combativeness, cackle and general indiffer-
ence to the hens, she is hen-like. On the other hand, her
carriage is cock-like and by suitable means she has been
made to cluck like a cock and even to pay a little atten-
tion to the hens, though this last reaction was produced
only once or twice. The peculiar shape and carriage of the
tail probably has nothing to do with the effects of castra-
tion, since this bird had only half a rump. Moreover, a
rumpless cock occurred in this same strain.
No. 555] CASTRATION IN BROWN LEGHORNS 167
Some additional light on the question is afforded by the
effect produced by castration on a second female, which
died at the age of four months. When the first feathers
of the third stage began to appear, they were like those of
the young male. The later feathers, however, were those
of the normal female. The explanation of this anomalous
behavior was found at the autopsy, for it showed the
———
Fic. 3. Feathers from the are region of the various types of birds
deserved A, normal male; B an d ©, two sorts of feathers from the bird shown
n Fig. 2; D, normal female; E, capon.
presence of an ovary about one half the size of that of a
normal chick of the same age. As long as the ovary or
its normal secretion was practically absent, the develop-
ment of this female was along lines similar to that of the
male, but with the regeneration of the ovary develop-
ment returned to its usual course.
These experiment s, then, indicate clearly that while the
emale may assume male characters following the re-
moval of the ovary, the male assumes no positive female
characters after removal of the testes.
168 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLVII
Theoretical_—Certain of my breeding experiments have
seemed to show that the Brown Leghorn plumage colors
and pattern followed a sex-limited mode of descent. Cer-
tain difficulties, however, have arisen. As stated above,
it has become evident that the coloration and pattern of
the Brown Leghorns is not due to a single inheritable
unit, but to a complex. This means that its more or less
independent parts must be discovered and the mode of
inheritance as well as the conditions under which each
part becomes visible in the soma, worked out. Until this
is done it will be impossible to say what part sex-limited
inheritance plays in determining sexual differences. The
following representation, then, is merely an attempt to
formulate a working hypothesis.
The male may be considered to be duplex for an internal
secretion S, produced by the testes, which is necessary
for the full development of the comb and less clearly for
the crowing instinct and sexual behavior, but not for
plumage and spurs. In the female this secretion is re-
placed by one S’ produced by the ovary. (S’ may, per-
haps, stand in some simple chemical relation to S.) To
its effect is to be referred the female’s form and color.
When the ovary is removed or becomes pathological so
that its normal secretion is no longer produced, then the
male characters develop to an extent which is determined
by factors at present unknown to us. Nor are we con-
cerned here as to what part of the ovary or testis pro-
duces this secretion (or secretions, for S and S’, respect-
ively may well represent a number of secretions which
behave in the same general way). In any case the in-
ternal secretion may be conceived to be associated with
sex in the same manner as any other sex-limited char-
acter. The formula for the male would then be Ig Sd,
that for the female SJS’?. S is of course to be consid-
ered dominant to S. If this scheme represents the actual
condition of affairs it may not be necessary to suppose
that the female Brown Leghorn is simplex for L where L
represents the whole or a part of the male Leghorn
No. 555] CASTRATION IN BROWN LEGHORNS 169
pattern complex, for S’ might be able to transform two
doses of Z into the condition observed in the female as
well as one dose. This is, however, a matter to be tested
_by experiment.
In insects, Meisenheimer and others have shown that
castration is without effect on the secondary sexual char-
acters of either sex. This lack of association between the
secondary sexual characters and the gonads may find its
explanation in the absence of a modifying secretion from
these forms, the secondary sexual characters being deter-
mined solely by differences in the gametic constitution of
the sexes, for example of the form AA in one sex and AB
in the other, B being dominant over A and linked with
the sex determiner, in the usual fashion for a sex-limited
factor. Secondary sexual characters of insects would
then belong to a different category from those of the
birds. There is some evidence, however, that certain
characters of the female fowl are not under the control
of the secretion of the ovary, for they do not become
male-like after the removal of the ovary and therefore
are like the insects in this respect. This point requires
further study.
There is one more point to be considered. I have shown
that in the Brown Leghorns as well as in Rouen ducks
that the male does not assume female characters as
a result of castration. Does the adult male of other
Sorts of birds ever exhibit female characters? An affir-
mative answer is possible only in those cases in which the
juvenile plumage of the male is like that of the female.
But if we consider only those cases in which the juvenile
male plumage is unlike that of the female, we shall find
that conclusive evidence on this point is wanting, at least
I have thus far been unable to secure such evidence.
5 There are, of course, other ways of representing this association.
SIMPLIFICATION OF MENDELIAN FORMULÆ
PROFESSOR W. E. CASTLE
Bussey Instrrution, HARVARD UNIVERSITY
Proressor Bessey in his recent presidential address*
expresses the opinion that Mendelian terminology is need-
lessly complicated. This opinion most biologists will
heartily endorse, and not a few Mendelians will be among
their number. For those who work most extensively with
Mendelian formule feel most keenly the need of simpli-
fication in these the tools of their investigations.
Professor Morgan, in the January Narurauist,? makes
a commendable effort to introduce reforms. I desire
heartily to endorse his effort, but would suggest certain
modifications in method. i
The Mendelian may say in justification of existing us-
age that it has arisen naturally step by step as knowledge
of Mendelian phenomena has advanced, but this is of
course no justification of its continued use, if it has be-
come a hindrance rather than a help in the further ad-
vance of knowledge.
Morgan clearly points out the two historical steps by
which present usage was reached. The first of these was
Mendel’s original recognition of segregating dominant
and recessive characters existing in contrasted pairs, and
his convenient designation of the former by capitals and
of the latter by small letters. ‘This usage answered per-
fectly so long as only a single modification of any char-
acter came under consideration, and indeed Mendel’s
observations did not go beyond this. But this system
broke down when characters more complex in nature came
under observation, as for example when Cuénot showed
that more than a single differential factor exists between
gray mice and albino mice. (2) The ingenious and useful
1 Science, January 3, 1913.
2 Vol. 47, pp. 5-16. :
170
No. 555] SIMPLIFICATION OF MENDELIAN FORMULZ 171
‘*presence and absence’’ hypothesis of Bateson was the
second step which led to our present usage. On this hy-
potheses gray in mice is not the allelomorph of white, but
of no-gray; while the allelomorph of white is color, or
more properly speaking white is equivalent to no-color
and this is the allelomorph of color.
Both of these steps have been amply justified by their
utility in making possible the prediction of the previously
unpredictable consequences of particular crosses.
It was natural that in applying the presence and ab-
sence hypothesis the usage of Mendel should have been
retained, in accordance with which capital letters were
used as the symbols of dominant characters and small
letters as the symbols of recessive characters. But this
retention has involved most unfortunate consequences and
is, I believe, the real seat of our present difficulty.
Mendel’s small letters stood for realities as truly as did
the capitals. His A was a round form of pea, his a was a
wrinkled form of pea; his B was a yellow-seeded, his b a
sreen-seeded pea. But the significance of these terms has
been changed under the presence and absence hypothesis.
A still means a round pea, but a is simply a not-round
pea; it may or may not be wrinkled. Likewise B is still
a yellow-seeded pea, but b is nothing but a not-yellow
pea; it may or may not be green under the presence and
absence hypothesis. For all that b signifies now, the pea
may be blue, violet, indigo or carmine.
It is most unfortunate, therefore, that the small letters,
having lost their original significance, were not discarded
altogether, for under the presence and absence hypothesis
they have done nothing but cause mischief.
The investigator who employs them starts out well in-
tentioned with a clear notion that the small letters stand
for negation only, that they are merely signboards to
Show what characters he is talking about, but presently,
unless he is unusually careful, we find him talking about
them as if they stood for something, instead of nothing;
he speaks of repulsions and couplings or associations
172 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
between a and B, or even between a and b. Think of it!
How can something be coupled with nothing? How can
nothing be inseparably bound up with nothing? It seems
to me the consequent effect on inheritance is absolutely
“nothing”!
Not only do the small letters thus lead to confusion of
thought, they also tend to make formulæ needlessly cum-
bersome, for they call for the use of two symbols for
every character difference dealt with. These two sym-
bols also are so much alike that both printer and reader
are in momentary danger of confusing them, with the
consequence that what is is not, and what is not is!
The small letters are not indispensable to accurate and
exhaustive analysis of Mendelian phenomena, or to lucid
exposition of them. See, for example, the fundamental
researches of Cuénot into the color inheritance of mice,
and his classic ‘‘notes’’ describing them. Like Cuénot, I
have not found the use of the small letters necessary ; but
among nearly all other Mendelians the double termin-
ology has become so nearly universal that a different
usage seems almost to demand an apology. Indeed Lang’
has suggested that such offenders against uniformity as
Cuénot and I should be haled before an International
Congress and be directed to conform; since which time
I had almost abandoned hope of ever seeing improve-
ment in the current confusing system, but Morgan’s pro-
test and proposal gives me new courage.
What we need first of all to symplify our present usage
is to abandon the dual terminology. Where we are deal-
ing with a single set of variations, let a single set of sym-
bols suffice. Let us give up either the small letters or the
large ones, it matters not which. If we retain A, then we
have no need of a, for it is not, as Morgan at one time
seems to assert and at another to deny, the ‘‘residuum”’
when A is lost; it means on the presence and absence
hypothesis nothing but this, that A is not present. The
rest of the organism is the ‘‘residuum.’’ Morgan points
° Zeitsch. f. ind. Abstammungs- und Vererbungslehre, 4, p. 40, 1910.
No.555] SIMPLIFICATION OF MENDELIAN FORMULZ 1738
out and his paper illustrates amply how under the dual
system ‘‘the letters used may unintentionally come to
stand for different things.” The obvious thing to do, if
we attempt reform, is to omit the superfluous symbol,
either the small letter or the large one.
Morgan, however, clings to the dual nomenclature, but
suggests a reversal of the usual significance. Thus the
factor for pink-eye, he assumes, is present only in animals
which are not pink-eyed, and the factor for black body
color, he suggests, is present in all sorts of flies except
those which are black bodied. This is confusion worse
confounded.
But, seriously, I do not see that it is possible to improve
the existing terminology, so long as we use two terms of
opposite significance with reference to a single germinal
variation. Certainly merely reversing the significance of
existing terms will not do it. What we need first of all is
one set of symbols, used in a single significance.
If this reduction is allowed, then I think that another
aspect of Morgan’s proposition might be extremely use-
ful, viz., that a mutation which behaves as a recessive in
crosses be designated by a small letter. This proposition
was put into effect more than three years ago in a paper
dealing with color inheritance in mice, though Morgan
does not seem to have observed it. See Castle and Little
(1909). In the paper cited, three recessive color factors
of mice were designated by small letters, viz., ‘‘d, the dilu-
tion factor’’; ‘‘s, the factor which causes spotting with
white;’’ and ‘‘p, the pink-eye (or paucity) factor.’’
In that same paper all dominant color factors of mice
were designated by capitals. This seems to me a very
necessary complement to the use of small letters to ex-
press recessive variations, and is in entire harmony with
Mendel’s original usage. But neither of these proposals
can help matters much, unless we discard the duplicate
set of symbols, which is the chief cause of present con-
fusion. Thus if we use s for spotting, then we have no
‘Science, N. S., Vol. 30, pp. 312314.
174 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST (Vou. XLVII
occasion to use S for no-spotting. We simply leave out
all reference to spotting, and we shall understand that
there is none, but that the normal condition prevails.
To be very explicit, my proposals for simplification of
Mendelian terminology are three:
1. To abolish the current dual terminology and use only
one symbol, where a single variation from the normal is
involved.
2. To use a small letter to designate the factor respon-
sible for a variation which is recessive in crosses with the
normal.
3. To use a capital letter to designate the factor respon-
sible for a variation which is dominant in crosses with the.
normal.
These proposals were made in substance in publica-
tions of the year 1909 and are here renewed under en-
couragement of Morgan’s suggestive paper. Let us see
how they would work if applied to the cases enumerated
by Morgan. The eye color series described by Morgan,
l. c., page 13, involving three recessive mutations, is as
follows:
Revised Terminology Morgan’s Terminology
CC ne bee E sas PVE
WOPMINON (2 0s 1.6 fat cies ee v PvE
DE pi Pt ee ie SE p pVE
Pok vermilion... -ou erhoa pv pvE
Pe ee os he bore. oe e FV e
VOO ea oe Se ve Pve
PIR OO ar a pe pVe
Pink-vermilion-eosin ........... pve pve
The revised terminology is obviously shorter and
simpler. It is obtained by merely omitting the capital
letters from Morgan’s terminology, letters which stand
only for negations.. The symbols used are suggestive of
the names employed for the various color categories of
eyes, whereas in Morgan’s terminology the most con-
spicuous symbols are suggestive only of other categories
than the true one.
The revised terminology is more convenient than
No. 555] SIMPLIFICATION OF MENDELIAN FORMULZ 175
Morgan’s in calculating the expected result of any ma-
ting, and it is equally reliable. The result of every pos-
sible mating within the series can be readily computed
without the confusing presence of the large letters.
To those who have grown accustomed to the presence
and absence terminology the objection will suggest itself
that in naming the recessive character and ignoring its
allelomorph, we are naming an absence or negative and
disregarding what is present and positive. But this does
not follow. Because a character is recessive it does not
follow that it is negative. I quite agree with Morgan that
the physiological condition which produces an eosin eye
is as real as that which produces a vermilion, a pink or
a red eye, and no mere negation; it is simply different. It
is quite impossible to decide, from its behavior as a domi-
nant or recessive in crosses, whether a character is posi-
tive or negative. This I have pointed out elsewhere
(1911) and the same view has been repeatedly expressed
by Shull. We have on record many instances in which
one and the same character may behave at one time as a
dominant, at another time as a recessive.
Our terminology may well recognize the dominant or
recessive behavior of a variation, without implying any-
thing as to its positive or negative nature, which must in
many cases be conjectural or possibly non-existent. Dif-
ferent gradations of color, such as we have in the eye-
Series of Drosophila described by Morgan, may result
merely from quantitative variations in cell constituents
and consequent activities, nothing being lost. This idea
concerning the possible nature of Mendelian factors in
general I have developed elsewhere, concluding that ‘‘it
1s the substantial integrity of a quantitative variation
from cell-generation to cell-generation that constitutes
the basis of Mendelism. All else is imaginary.’”
Morgan applies his altered system of nomenclature also
to the body-color series and wing mutation series which
he has discovered. This nomenclature we may simplify,
* AMERICAN Naruraist, Vol. 46, p. 358, June, 1912.
176 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Von. XLVII
as we did in the case of the eye-color series, without im-
pairing its utility.
Bopy-coLor SERIES
Revised aa Morgan’s Terminology
Wild MF ca enaa rasau mal YBES’
SAUN arrr S ae Yy yBES
CUOW“DIACE © 6 55 lh ws yb ybES
POR SEY SOTA OER Ss e YBeS
Bane ea eas fa 8 YBEs'
WING-MUTATION SERIES
Revised Terminology Morgan’s Terminology
RLY Sais pits SOG Liesl ¢ normal MR
SRA PP E E wine crammane m mR
SS ee a E r Mr
oer gears minature 2:05. -¢... mr mr
The taste of the reader will govern his choice between
these two systems. Doubtless either can be used success-
fully, though the revised terminology seems to me prefer-
able on the ground of simplicity and suggestiveness.
In the series with which Morgan has dealt, all the muta-
tions under consideration are recessive in character, so
that one can read the names of the varieties directly from
his formule, if one disregards altogether his large letters
and pays attention only to the small ones. To insure
this I have suggested omitting the large ones.
But if one were to extend Morgan’s terminology to a
series in which dominant mutations as well as recessive
ones occur, hopeless confusion would result. For here
some of the large letters would stand for mutations, while
others would stand for the negation of mutations, so that
without a key constantly at hand the formule would be
unusable.
If, however, we use the single system of symbols as I
have suggested, a series which includes both dominant
and recessive mutations may be handled without con-
fusion. In this case every symbol is significant, and its
° For simplicity I here use E instead of Morgan’s Eb.
* Morgan’s list here contains S, but this I suspect is a misprint for $;
if so, it is a living witness to the dangers of the dual system.
No. 555] SIMPLIFICATION OF MENDELIAN FORMULZ 177
dominant or recessive character is indicated by the sym-
bol, whether large or small. For example, consider the
mouse-color series as described by Castle and Little
(1909). In the paper cited, nine color factors were de-
scribed, three of which clearly recessive have already been
mentioned, viz., d, p and s. The remaining six were con-
sidered dominant factors. Mr. Little has since suggested,
and I think with good reason, that one of them had
better be omitted, since its existence has not been demon-
strated beyond question. The six as given were C, the
color factor; Y, the yellow factor; Br, the brown factor;
B, the black factor; R, the restriction factor (producing a
yellow coat); and A, the agouti or gray factor. _
Mr. Little would omit either C or Y, since it has not
been shown beyond question that the effects which had
previously been ascribed to these two are not due to one
and the same agency.
With the eight symbols which would remain, three being
small letters, the others being or beginning with capitals,
it is possible to write, without duplication of terms, for-
mule descriptive of the entire color series. But in so
doing it would be necessary to designate the original or
wild form in terms of factors supposed to be lost in its
derivatives, and which have only come to light through
such loss. This, as Morgan points out, involves rede-
scribing the wild form every time a mutation arises and
should be avoided if possible. I therefore favor Morgan’s
Suggestion that each mutation as it arises be given some
suitable descriptive name, the initial or other significant
letter of which shall be its symbol. If, as is commonly
true, the mutation is recessive in crosses with the wild or
original type, its symbol will be a small letter. But if the
mutation is dominant,’ its symbol should be a large letter.
The original or wild type need not be described in terms
of its mutations, as every duplicate system of termin-
ology, even Morgan’s, requires. The system would ac-
“I have met two dominant mutations in guinea-pigs, one in rabbits, and
one in mice, so that they can searcely be called rare.
178 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST (Vou. XLVII
cordingly be capable of indefinite expansion without
constant remodeling.
I favor Morgan’s further suggestion that as new forms
arise through recombination of simple ‘‘mutations”’ these
be described, so far as possible, in terms of the simple
mutations composing them. This principle is clearly
illustrated in the names chosen by Morgan for the eye
color series of Drosophila. It is surprising how little
change this system necessitates in the common names
with which we are already familiar, for example, in the
mouse-color series.
The color mutations? of mice with inal I am person-
ally familiar number seven. If all of these are independ-
ent, i. e., not ‘‘coupled’’ or ‘‘associated,’’ there should be
theoretically possible 127 different combinations involv-
ing one or more of them. A considerable proportion of
these combinations has been produced in my laboratory
in the course of the last twelve years, the earlier and
simpler ones by Dr. G. M. Allen or myself, the later and
more complex ones by Mr. Little, who has in press an
extensive paper dealing with his investigations. I shall
deal with the series as known up to 1909. The historical
order of appearance of the mutations is now unknown;
I shall place them in the alphabetical order of the sym-
bols used. It is also unknown whether each of them arose
directly from the wild type. More probably they did not,
but experiment shows that they might have done so, since
each behaves in crosses as if it had a distinct and inde-
pendent basis in the germ-plasm.
Witp TYPE AND iTS Seven MUTATIONS
1. Wild= gray.
2. a=albino (transmitting gray in crosses).
3. b= black.
4. c= cinnamon.
5. d— dilute.
° I use the term mutation in the sense of unit-factor variation, not in that
of DeVries.
No. 555] SIMPLIFICATION OF MENDELIAN FORMULH 179
6. p — pink-eyed.
7. s=spotted.
8. Y=yellow.
The a mutation, however combined, if present in a homo-
zygous condition, prevents the development of pigment
in the skin, hair or eyes. The d mutation, under like cir-
cumstances, makes the pigmentation of the coat dilute, or
pale; the p mutation reduces even more strongly the pig-
mentation of coat and eyes alike, but does it in a different
way ; the s mutation causes pigment to be altogether want-
ing in certain areas of the coat more or less definite in
position and extent, which areas accordingly appear as
white spots.
Combinations of these four mutations present no diffi-
culties of description or recognition, though breeding
tests alone suffice to differentiate the several sorts of
albinos, since all look alike. The nomenclature also is
perfectly simple. Thus,
ap—albino transmitting the pink-eye mutation in
crosses.
adp=albino transmitting both dilution and pink-eye
in crosses, ete.
Combinations of b, c, and Y, one with another, form the
fundamental and best known color varieties, which will
now be considered.
In the b mutation, the fur is black; in the c mutation,
it is brownish gray, called cinnamon. In the Y mutation,
the coat is yellow. Of the several mutations mentioned,
Y alone is dominant over the wild gray, but it occurs only
in a heterozygous state, and hence never breeds true.
The complete color series involving these three muta-
tions, but excluding all others, is as follows:
Wild —eray.
b= black.
c — cinnamon.
bc—black-cinnamon (chocolate).
= yellow (giving also gray offspring).
bY —black-yellow (giving also black offspring).
180 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
cY —cinnamon-yellow (giving also cinnamon offspring).
bey =black-cinnamon-yellow (giving also black-cin-
namon offspring).
To express the modification which this series under-
goes if the d mutation is added to it, we need only pre-
fix the symbol d to each of the formule given and omit
the term wild as no longer applicable. The series then
becomes
d—dilute gray.
db = dilute black.
de= dilute cinnamon.
etc.
Similarly an added p factor gives us the series
p= pink-eyed gray.
pb — pink-eyed black.
pe = pink-eyed cinnamon.
etc.
Also an added s gives us the series
s=— spotted gray.
sb — spotted black.
sc — spotted cinnamon.
C.
Adding both d and p gives us the series
dp = dilute pink-eyed gray.
dpb = dilute pink-eyed black.
dpe — dilute pink-eyed cinnamon.
ete.
Adding d and s gives us the series
ds =— dilute spotted gray.
dsb = dilute spotted black.
dsc — dilute spotted cinnamon.
etc.
Adding p and s gives us the series
ps = pink-eyed spotted gray.
psb = pink-eyed spotted black.
psc = pink-eyed spotted cinnamon.
etc.
Adding simultaneously d, p and s, gives us the series
No. 555] SIMPLIFICATION OF MENDELIAN FORMULZ 181
dps = dilute pink-eyed spotted gray.
dpsb—=dilute pink-eyed spotted black.
dpsc= dilute pink-eyed spotted cinnamon.
ete.
We thus secure eight different variations of the funda-
mental color series, or a total of sixty-four colored varie-
ties. By prefixing a to the formula for each of these
varieties, we obtain formule for sixty-four different types
of albinos, which though all looking alike (being snow
white), yet would transmit in crosses the characteristics
each of a different one of the sixty-four colored varieties.
We have thus accounted for the entire one hundred and
twenty-eight variations which theoretically should result
from recombining seven distinct mutations with the orig-
inal form from which they sprang, and this has been
done in relatively simple terms. Only one formula in the
whole 128 contains as many as seven letters. This is
adpsbcY, and would be read ‘‘an albino transmitting
dilute pink-eyed spotted chocolate and dilute pink-eyed
spotted yellow.’’ All the other formule would contain
from one to six letters. The current presence and absence
system would require sixteen letters in every one of the
128 formule to express the same facts, and the same letter
would in some of the formule be a capital and in others
a small letter, so that the constant close attention of the
reader would be required to decide in each case whether
a particular mutation was or was not present. Morgan’s
System would be only slightly less cumbersome for it
would require in each formula fourteen instead of sixteen
letters, and the same confusion would result from the
presence of duplicate large and small letters. The mere
Statement of these facts is sufficient to show that Men-
delians can easily simplify their formule and make them-
selves more readily intelligible to each other and to their
fellow biologists, if they are only willing to do so.
There is another reason why I favor Morgan’s termin-
ology (as here simplified); it commits us to no physio-
logical theory, but simply states facts. We are not
182 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Von. XLVII
required to suppose that the wild form contains a num-
ber of factors which by mutation have been lost. We may
still do so, but we are not forced to do so. We are free
to suppose with Morgan that merely a ‘‘readjustment”’
has taken place, and to make no assumption as to its
nature, unless we choose to do so. This course does not
prejudice the investigator of the physiology of color pro-
duction but leaves him free to frame such hypotheses as
will from his point of view best meet the situation. He is
not bound down, for example, to a hypothesis of chromo-
gen and ferments and so tempted with Riddle to throw
over all Mendelism simply because Mendelians have in
his opinion misinterpreted chemical facts.
That terminology evidently is most desirable which
states demonstrated facts most clearly and simply, and
makes fewest assumptions as to their explanation. Other-
wise the investigator may be led to conclusions based on
his terminology rather than his facts, and this can lead
only to disaster.
NOTES AND LITERATURE
SOME RECENT ADVANCES IN VERTEBRATE PALEON-
TOLOGY
THE study of the extinct life of the globe must ever be the
central and basal point for an understanding of the manner in
which evolution has taken place. The ultimate appeal in the
theory of descent must necessarily rest with the facts in the
history of animal and plant life as it is read from the records
in the rocks. Organic evolution is now so firmly established in
the minds of present-day scientists that a statement of its
truth is no longer needed. But it is well for us to be cautious
in our statements about evolution, in not expressing more than
we can prove. It is quite possible that the vertebrates come from
the arachnoids as Patten contends, but the evidence on this
point is wholly lacking. It is also possible, nay even probable,
that the crossopterygian ganoids gave rise to the land verte-
brates and even a single species of this group may have been
such an ancestor, but no one knows whether they did or not
and to state, as many of our recent zoological text-books have
done, that such was the origin of land vertebrates, is to state
what is not known. It is true that the Stegocephali may have
given rise to the reptiles, indeed there is very little difference
between some of the reptiles and some of the Stegocephali but
the proof of the descent of all reptiles from any one-or all of
the groups of the Amphibia is more than any one has yet given.
The birds may and possibly did arise from the reptiles but the
early stages are still unknown. It is the firm belief of many that
paleontological proof will be forthcoming for sustaining the
ideas expressed by the theory of organic evolution but the facts
as they are brought to light by the study of paleontologists do
not serve to show that this is true. Smith Woodward says that
connecting links or even approximate links between nearly all
of the great vertebrate groups are still wanting from our large
collections. It may safely be said that 99 per cent. of all the col-
lections of fossil vertebrates in the world serve to show diversi-
fications of various groups of animals and not to connect them
in any satisfactory way. There are, to be sure, connections and
183
184 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vor. XLVII
definite ones between the smaller groups of many vertebrates
but not between the larger ones. Many writers, especially writ-
ers of text-books, assume much more than they can prove, and
the great majority of the modern zoological text-books are sadly
behind the times in matters of paleontological knowledge and
works that serve as standards and bases for the construction of
more elementary texts make the most bald misstatement of
acts.
The general trend of paleontological research is to round out
our knowledge of the diversity and structure of many groups;
the establishment of a few new groups especially of lower rank;
no one save Jaekel having had the temerity to propose new
groups higher than sub-classes.
Not all of the recent work in vertebrate paleontology is
reviewed here. Many excellent works have been sufficiently
noted elsewhere but sufficient is here given to show the tendency
of thought and work among the vertebrate paleontologists; that
of attention to matters of structure, occurrence, association,
interpretation of matters of organization and relationship, all
of which are fundamental to safe conclusions regarding the
larger problems of phylogeny. It is perhaps too early to arrive
at such conclusions in regard to phylogeny as we should wish
to have—but paleontology is 100 years old and more!
One of the more recent publications from the press of Gustav
Fischer is a volume entitled ‘‘ Die Abstammungslehre,’’ a col-
lection of twelve essays on the descent theory in the light of
recent researches. The ninth essay is one by Dr. O. Abel, in
which he discusses ‘‘ Die Bedeutung der fossilen Wirbelthiere
fiir die Abstammungslehre.’? Dr. Abel says there were two
ways in which he might discuss his subject, either by giving a-
short résumé of the investigations of paleontologists or by dis-
cussing the methods of paleontological investigation and the
bearing of the results of these methods on the descent theory.
He has chosen the latter and has discussed his subject in a
masterly manner. He has divided his paper into three parts
with various sub-headings and discusses a phase of paleonto-
logical methods in each division. He discusses the alleged lack
of material among paleontological specimens and shows that,
in a few instances at least, there is more material available for
study of the forms than there is for many of the recent species.
The discussion of the value of reconstructions in paleontology
No. 555] NOTES AND LITERATURE 185
is illustrated by various reconstructions of the pterodactyls from
Wagler’s restoration of Pterodactylus in 1830 to Eaton’s restora-
tion of Pteranodon in 1910. Dr. Abel contends that the recon-
struction of a fossil species is valuable, since it gives graphic-
ally all that is known of that form at the time the restoration
is given. The fact that it may be wrong is no reason why res-
torations should be abandoned, since they record the progress
of our knowledge of animal forms.
Dr. Abel uses as an illustration of the genetic line of descent
that of the Cetacea, in which group he is an acknowledged
authority. His discussion is illustrated from previous papers.
The descent of the whales has been brought about in the reduc-
tion of certain structures, such as the teeth and the limbs. As
an illustration of a line of descent which has operated in the way
of complication of structures he cites the elephant series which
has been made well known through the researches of Andrews
and Osborn. The reader notes with a sigh of relief that but
little attention is given to the line of descent of the horse (‘‘ das
Paradepferd der Paleontologie ’’).
Dr. Abel’s selection of the sea turtles as an example of Dollo’s
law that ‘‘ A structure once lost or reduced in development of
a race is never regained ”’ is timely and refreshing since it has
been but little used. He gives Wieland’s restorations of
Archelon and bases his conclusions on Dollo’s researches on the
phylogeny of Dermochelys coriacea. He discusses, in the two
last sections of the chapter, ‘‘ Stufenreihen ’’ and illustrates
his discussion by Dollo’s work on the dipnoan fishes, illustrat-
ing forms from the lower Devonian to recent and, in the last
Section, ‘‘ Ahnenreihen’’ he discusses the derivation of the
Sirenia and illustrates by the pelvic girdles of the sea cows
from the middle Eocene to recent.
The concluding remarks show a strong desire to further the
relation between paleontology and zoology ‘‘ damit wir mit
vereinten Kräften unserem gemeinsamen Ziele, der Aufhellung
der Stammesgeschichte, entgegenschreiten.’’ In view of the fact
that paleontology has been largely in the hands of the geolo-
gists this is a relation much to be wished.
Charles W. Gilmore? has described an interesting new form
of Alligatoride from the ‘‘ Hell Creek Beds’’ (Upper Creta-
ceous) of Montana. Only a portion of the skull was preserved
for description. This has been restored into the shape of the
"Proc. U. 8. Natl. Museum, 41, 297-302, 2 pls.
186 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVI
modern Alligator skull. After comparison with Diplocynodon,
Alligator and Bottosaurus, all members of the Alligatoridae,
Gilmore has described the new alligator as Brachychampsa
montana, new genus and species. He gives as the fundamental
generic character of the form
In the absence of a roof-like covering formed by the premaxillaries
over the anterior part of the external nares, Brachychampsa differs from
all known alligators, both recent and extinct.
Some of us may be inclined to question the validity of this
character for a genus but further study will doubtless establish
the form on a safe basis.
Dr. W. D. Matthew has reviewed briefly * the ideas relative to
the posture and habits of life of the great ground sloth, Mega-
therium, and its allies from the Pleistocene of North and South
America. Under Dr. Matthew’s direction there has been pre-
pared a small group of four of these large brutes in the atti-
tudes which have been suggested as possible by the study of
their skeletal anatomy. Two genera are represented—Lesto-
don and Mylodon. The Lestodon skeleton is mounted in the
familiar pose of the Megatherium reared against a tree trunk
and one Mylodon is digging at the roots of the same tree. The
writer says:
These poses illustrate the theory of the habits of the ground sloth de-
duced by Owen from the study of the skeleton—a model of scientific
reasoning whose accuracy has never been impugned.
The same writer in a short article* describes a recently
mounted skeleton of Agriochwrus as ‘‘a tree-climbing rumi-
nant.’’ The history of this genus is interesting in that
its various parts have been referred to no less than three mammalian
orders, the head to the artiodactyls, the fore foot to the creodonts and
the hind foot to the Ancylopoda.
Dr. Matthew opens his paper with the remark that
It seems somewhat paradoxical to imagine a ruminant climbing trees.
He says further:
The Agriocherus, however, while a member of the Oreodont family,
and like them provided with ruminating teeth, had the limbs and feet
modified in such a way as to enable it to climb trees as readily as a
jaguar or other large cat.
* American Museum Journal, XI, No. 4, p. 113.
a Museum Journal, XI, No. 5, pp. 162-163.
No. 555] NOTES AND LITERATURE 187
No one is more entitled to a view on this subject than Dr. Mat-
thew and even if we find it hard to accept his view of such a
paradox yet it behooves us not to be too skeptical.
Dr. Bashford Dean‘ has described a new ‘‘fossil aquarium”’
recently installed in the American Museum of Natural History.
Under his direction has been executed a group of Devonian
fishes,
all from a single locality (Cromarty) and a single rock layer in the
Old Red Sandstone of Scotland, with the best evidences therefore, that
the creatures shown really existed side by side.
The fishes shown seem to be swimming through the water as if
alive. It must be a very attractive group to museum visitors.
A very interesting and extremely useful work on ichthyosaurs
and plesiosaurs has been issued (1910) from the British Museum
(Natural History) as ‘‘A Descriptive Catalogue of the Marine
Reptiles of the Oxford Clay,” Part I, compiled by Dr. Charles
W. Andrews. The catalogue is largely based on the Leeds Col-
lection which the British Museum has been acquiring for the
past twenty years. The volume is issued in the usual excellent
form of all the previous British Museum catalogues, the illus-
trative work being photogravure, zine line and lithograph, all
executed with great care and attention to details.
The frontispiece is a photogravure of a nearly complete,
mounted skeleton of a plesiosaur (Cryptocleidus oxoniensis), a
dorsal view of which species has been used by. Abel for the
frontispiece to his ‘‘ Paleobiologie.”? The introduction discusses
the taxonomic characters of the ichthyosaurs and plesiosaurs, the
fauna of the Oxford clay and the distribution of the vertebrates.
A single species of Opthalmosaurus is discussed, and the details
of its anatomy are contained in the first 76 pages of the work,
illustrated by 42 text figures (including a restoration of the
skeleton) and two lithographic plates. Aside from a discussion
of the possible identity of Opthalmosaurus and Baptanodon of
America, the writer has confined his remarks to the osteologic
details
The plesiosaurs are more abundantly represented in species
than are the ichthyosaurs. There are four genera discussed in
the last 120 pages of the volume, illustrated by 52 text-figures,
8 lithographie and one photogravure plate (containing three
restorations of the various forms). As in the previous portion
* Amer. Mus. Journal, XI, No. 5, p. 161.
188 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
the writer has confined himself to the discussion of the details of
osteology and this will make the work doubly useful to students
who will find here an unbiased statement of the facts of struc-
ture of these two interesting groups of vertebrates. The work
will thus be regarded as a standard book of reference on the
forms there discussed. It may be regretted by some that the
author has neglected the excellent opportunity to discuss such
interesting factors as hyperphalangy, hyperdactyly, phylogeny,
reduction of structures due to aquatic life, but perhaps this would
be out of place in a museum catalogue and we may hope to have
the views of Dr. Andrews on these subjects at some other time.
The second volume of the series proposes to deal with the croco-
diles and pliosaurs of the Oxford clay. The work will be looked
for with much interest.
In a recent paper on Edestus® Dr. O. P. Hay discusses a re-
cently acquired specimen of this interesting Carboniferous shark
from the Des Moines Stage of Iowa, discovered in a coal mine
near Lehigh some 18 years ago by a miner. The specimen
shows the interesting relation of the so-called spines which have
been assigned various places by various writers. The specimen
seems to leave no doubt that the objects regarded hitherto as
spines are in reality the mandibular and maxillary cartilages of
a peculiar shark. Portions of the nasal and post-nasal cartilages
are preserved and Dr. Hay indicates a depression as the olfactory
pit. The cartilages are so crushed that the nature of the orbital
cavities can not be determined. The maxillary cartilage is some-
what larger than the mandibular, as in the modern sharks. The
paper is a very interesting contribution to the subject of Paleo-
zoic sharks. He suggests that the forms Toxoprion, Helicoprion
and Lissoprion, at present known only from detached pieces,
may in time prove to have the relations exhibited by the present
new species of Edestus; a relation which Dr. Eastman has claimed
for some time obtained in the forms.
A new mosasaur is indicated by Charles W. Gilmore® based on
imperfect remains from the Cretaceous of Alabama. Mr. Gil-
more is inclined to establish a new genus on the characteristic
form of the teeth of the new form. He calls the new genus Globi-
dens, deriving his name from the Latin globus and dens, con-
trary to the usual custom of employing Greek roots for generic
* Proc. U. 8. Natl. Museum, 42, 31-38, pls. 1-2, April 25, 1912
° Proc. U. 8. National Museum, 41, 479-484, pls. 39-40, January “31, 1912.
No. 555] NOTES AND LITERATURE 189
terms. The species is without doubt valid and is a very interest-
ing one in showing a new type of tooth for the mosasaurs, wherein
the tooth is a rounded ball instead of being sharp as in the ma-
jority of known mosasaurs. From its rarity one may be inclined
to question the normal condition of the teeth, but all the teeth
display the same characters, so Mr. Gilmore is justified in his
assumptions of the distinction of the form so far as the evidence
goes. The species is said to be related to Platecarpus which is
the common mosasaur of Kansas; but we may question whether
it is a true mosasauroid,
Mr. Maurice G. Mehl’ has described and illustrated an incom-
plete skull of the interesting and little known ecotylosaur, Pan-
tylus cordatus Cope, from the Permian Red Beds of Texas. The
Species has been given the rank of a suborder, the Pantylosauria,
by Case in his monograph of the Cotylosauria. The form is, how-
ever, known only from the skull and such reference may be sub-
ject to revision. Mr. Mehl was able, from the recently acquired
material, to more fully describe the dentition of this mollusc-
feeding animal. He illustrates his discussion by several line
figures.
The history of the dinosaurs will always be an interesting topic
for paleontologists. The recent contribution by Mr. Charles W.
Gilmore’ is an attempt toward the completion of the history of
this group of animals, wherein he describes ‘‘The Mounted
Skeletons of Camptosaurus in the United States National Mu-
seum.’’ His discussion is illustrated by drawings and photo-
graphs with a map of one of the Como, Wyoming, quarries show-
ing the positions of the Camptosaurus bones in the quarry. The
skeletons of the two species are mounted in the attitudes of walk-
ing on all fours and the erect attitude, which was possibly char-
acteristic of many of the Theropoda. The animals are repre-
Sented as being semiplantigrade in the hind foot and semidigiti-
grade in the fore.
Walter Granger’ has given a few notes on the locality and
manner of collection of ‘‘a new specimen of the four-toed horse’’
discovered ‘‘in the extreme northwestern corner of Wyoming, in
the Wahsatch formation of the Big Horn Basin.’’ Since the
form had previously been known only from fragments of jaws
containing teeth, the recent find is a remarkably large addition
‘Journal of Geology, XX, No. 1, 21, 1912.
* Proc. U. 8. Natl. Museum, 41, 687-696, pls. 55-61, February 8, 1912.
° American Museum Journal, XI, No. 3, pp. 85-88.
190 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
to the already rich collections of the American Museum. It is to
be hoped that the skeleton will be shortly described.
“A Revision of the Amphibia and Pisces of the Permian of
North America with a Description of Permian Insects’’ is the
work of E. C. Case, Louis Hussakof and E. H. Sellards, issued
as Publication No. 146 of the Carnegie Institution of Washing-
ton, on December 20, 1911. The larger part of the work, 148
pages, 51 text-figures and 25 plates, is given to the discussion of
the Amphibia which constitutes Dr. Case’s contribution to the
volume. Ten families of Amphibia are discussed in an historical,
systematic and morphological manner, the last two being given
approximately equal space. The ‘‘historical’’ portion of the
discussion consists of the history of discovery and the taxonomy
of the Permian forms as viewed by various writers from Cope
(1875) to Broom (1910). The chief taxonomic schemes are
given, with lists of species.
The systematic section opens with a table of ‘‘Classification’”’
which adopts the opinions of Zittel published many years ago
and which, in the main, seems to represent the facts as we now
know them. Dissent has already been made as to the inclusion
of the Diplocaulide in the order Microsauria to which group of
vertebrates they have not the slightest relationship. The anat-
omy and relationships of the group have been discussed else-
where” and it will only be necessary to state here that the struc-
ture, as we now know it, seems to point to a relationship of the
Diplocaulide with the true Amphibia, i. e., the Branchiosauria
and the Caudata. A new order, Diplocaulia, has been erected
for the reception of the species of the family. It is only proper
to say that Dr. Case includes the Diplocaulide with the Micro-
sauria provisionally. In the morphological section Dr. Case says
(p. 90):
Jaekel’s suggestion of the derivation of Diplocaulus from forms like
Ceraterpeton and Diceratosaurus is very probably correct.
He gives not the slightest reason for the assumption of the cor-
rectness of this view, which, in the light of the facts, can not be
regarded as other than preposterous. The derivation of Diplo-
caulus from such differently organized animals as Ceraterpeton
and Diceratosaurus is fully as fanciful as Jaekel’s suggestion to
r. Traquair of the probable descent of Hunsriickia ‘‘jene
ältesten Fische von terrestrischen Tetrapoden abstammen.’’
* Journal of Morphology, XXIII, No. 1, March, 1912.
No. 555] NOTES AND LITERATURE 191
The section on the temnospondylous Amphibia is taken up
with descriptions of the osteologic characters of the various
species with little or no attempt at phylogenetic conclusions.
This will make the present monograph the central point, a base
of supply, from which future discussions must radiate. Dr.
Case’s work is reviewed more in detail by Mr. Mehl in Science,
September 27, 1912, p. 408.
The second volume of Dr. Case’s series of monographie studies
on the American Permian vertebrates was issued October 25,
1911, as Publication No. 145 of the Carnegie Institution of Wash-
ington. In this volume Dr. Case has brought together all of the
important facts concerning the ‘‘Cotylosauria of North Amer-
ica” with many notes on foreign genera. The volume has 121
pages, 14 plates, 52 text-figures and 71 bibliographic references.
As in his previous volume on the ‘‘Pelycosauria’’ the author has
divided this volume into the following sections: ‘‘ Historical Re-
view,” ‘‘Classification,’’ ‘‘Systematic Revision,’’ ‘‘Morpholog-
ical Revision” and ‘‘Conclusion.”’
The reptilian order Cotylosauria of Cope at present has as-
signed to it by paleontologists thirty genera, distributed in ten
families and placed by Dr. Case in five suborders. Each species
has the original description and a ‘‘revised description’’ so that
later workers on these Permian reptiles will have at hand ready
information concerning all the Cotylosauria known up to the end
of the year 1911. À
The members of the group are known mostly from fragmen-
tary remains. Only in one case, that of Diadectes phaseolinus
Cope, was the author able to restore the approximate skeleton of
the species. Other forms have, however, been restored, notably,
Sclerosaurus from Europe by von Huene, Telerpeton from Scot-
land by Boulenger, Captorhinus and Seymouria from Texas by
Williston and Labidosaurus from Texas by Broili and Williston.
Much still remains to be determined as to the structure of nearly
all the species. 5
The facts of most general interest are the structure of the skull
of these reptiles and the description of a brain cast of Diadectes,
figured on Plate 7 , Figs. 2 and 3. The structure of the skull allies
the group with the stegocephalous Amphibia. The former no-
tions of the Cotylosauria allied the group with the Stegocephala.
Further study, however, has convinced Dr. Case that the group
is ‘‘very far from occupying the primitive position assigned to it
192 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Von. XLVII
by Cope.’’ Possibly new discoveries of the appendicular skele-
ton will widen this gap and give us more definite ideas of the or-
ganization of what are possibly the most primitive of the known
Reptilia. Similar ideas were formerly held as to the position of
the mammalian order Condylarthra, but further knowledge of
the anatomy of the skeleton of the body has convinced Dr.
Matthew that the group has many characters which are not at all
primitive and which would seem to remove the group from an
ancestral position.
The Cotylosauria originated probably as early as the middle
Pennsylvaniec, although the evidence for this is uncertain. Two
genera of reptile-like forms known from the Carboniferous of
Ohio and France, Eosauravus Williston and Sauravus Thevenin,
are doubtfully assigned to the order. If these are not Cotylo-
sauria then the order is Permian. The Cotylosaurian reptiles
have been found in America, Europe and Africa. There is little
relationship existing between the faunas of the various conti-
nents and the place of origin of the order is uncertain, since rep-
resentatives are found on both sides of the water at practically
the same time geologically. This same thing is true among other
fossil vertebrates, notably Hohippus, the Branchiosauria, the
Miecrosauria, the Embolomeri, etc. The significant conclusion is
reached that:
There is no single one of the Cotylosauria that ean be considered as an
ancestral form of the other reptiles. . . . It is impossible to derive the
Diapsidan and Synapsidan types from the known Cotylosaurs.
The make-up of the work is excellent. The figures are many of
them new and all are well executed. The author has drawn on
published matter to the Cotylosauria and has inserted figures
from Cope, Broili, Williston, Boulenger, Moodie, Thevenin, von
Huene and others, for all of which proper credit is given. The
photographie plates are an especial desideratum, for while it
leaves the exact description of the elements somewhat uncertain
to the reader, yet one feels more at ease on seeing a photograph
of the material. Most of the specimens described are in Walker
Museum at the University of Chicago and the American Museum
of Natural History in New York City.
Roy L. Moonie.
UNIVERSITY OF KANSAS
-~ (To be continued)
SECOND EDITION
AMERICAN MEN OF SCIENCE
A BIOGRAPHICAL DIRECTORY
EDITED BY J. McKEEN CATTELL
A Biographical directory requires revision if it is to maintain its usefulness. Nearly a third of the names in the
present edition are new, and the | 7 ‘ Pie baie i sia revised. The
T
make the book as complete and accurate as possible. There are of course omissions, if only because some men will not
have obtained places on the list. The editors object in i } ienti
Fe à e vist. selecting this group of scientific men has been to make a study of
the conditions on which scientific research depends and so far as may be to improve these conditions. ‘here are printed tn
™ appendiz the two statistical studies that have been Edition.
ui The second edition of the Directory extends to more than 600 pages and contains more than 5500 sketches
i is well printed on all rag paper and bound in buckram with leather label. Although the work has been
1m size by more than 50 per cent., it is sold at the same price as the first edition.
Price: Five Dollars, net, Postage paid
THE SCIENCE PRESS
GARRISON, N. Y. LANCASTER, PA.
SUB-STATION 84, NEW YORK CITY.
The American Journal of Science
Established by Benjamin Silliman in 1818
The Leadin g Scientific Journal in the United States
> voted to the Physical and Natural Sciences, with special reference to
hysics, and Chemistry on the one hand, and to Geology and Mineralogy
on the other,
ditor: EDWARD S. DANA.
Associate Editors ; Professor GEORGE L. GOODALE, JOHN TROWBRIDGE, W. G. FARLOW and WM. M. DAVIS
0f Cambridge; Professors A. E, VERRILL, HENRY S. WILLIAMS and L. V. PIRSSON, of N
Two Haven; Professor JOSEPH 8. AIMES, of Baltimore ; MR. J. S. DILLER, of Washington.
oe “mes annually, in monthly numbers of about 80 pages each.
sini a Journal ended its first series of 50 volumes as á quarterly in 1845; its second
eke 50 volumes as a two-monthly in 1870; its third series as a monthly ended Dec-
Sub 895. A Fourth Series commenced in 1896.
$6.25 we oe Price, $6 per year or 50 cents a number, postage prepaid in the United States
nada ; $6,40 to Countries in the Postal Union. Back numbers at reduced prices.
"= Ten-Volume Indexes, Vols. I-X XI-XX, fourth series, price one dollar. Address —
The American Journal of Science
New Haven, Conn. :
The American Naturalist
A Monthly Journal, established in 1867, Devoted to the Advancement of the Biological Sciences
with Special Reference to the Factors of cea Evolution and Heredity
CONTENTS OF OCTOBER NUMBE
R MBER
seedless EE oelenc cs —— on as a Cause of Sansone
Asymmetric Color ng ene Pets pous Pig. N. Collin
On Diferential rrie rit NunE to Bek Il, Mice Their Breeding = roa for Scientific
i tures haseo urposes. Dr.
boon yg Dred. Seber Bile. z zx: Ill, The eg rs: of Hyla deve Cope, we
A Case of. ca, Becton foes s simulating OP bate ies ask — bits and Varis >
utation rofes
IV. Aleurone Le În F F, if a Cross between Non-
Shorter Articles a one a e iar indi iA eig colored Varieties of Maize. Professor R. A.
Sener varies W E arete. gs eee Va agew ew Subspecies of Zea mays L. Dr. Walter
d Lite
a nee ee ee aye oes s Breedine Er- Vi. — = ai Literature: Rieter ce te ee vs
ertebrates a
he Sere oe oe oe eiieeii lations on the ts eats bani of Organic Beings.
Professor Wm.
CONTENTS OF NOVEMBER NUMBER
CONTENTS OF DECEMBER NUMBER
I endelian Notation as a Description of
Physiological Facts. Professor E. M. East. I, The Mendelian Inheritance of Feeundity in the
I, cae Mag eo s a opting s thes wa Mare Domestic Fowl. Dr. Raymond Pearl. ol
of the endants upon the Characteristics of - +
the Descendants.—Il. . Dr. J. Arthur Harris. Il, TS ar bin the ee ose Biological
otc. 2) ar negate aera De Ai whe s Spawning Habitsof the Sea Lamprey, Petro-
IV. Sho: ca aries = Discussion: On Tricolor e ar a Je Test
A COLT IV. rter Articles and piik A Simple
y e as ep aa oe sie tans wet the eee sa Ad of Mendelian Ratios.
ESA
V. Notes and Literature . The Classification of the I
Liverw worts ‘vero Douglas H Houghton Vv. ee fos ana “steratare: N Notes on Ichthyology-
Atwood Kefoid > VI. Aak isr see XLVI.
E,
CONTENTS OF JANUARY NUMBER genesis. Professor r Maynard M. Metcalf. oe
Ada poni in the Living and Non-living-
Factors and Unit Naa yg = a r Burton Edward Livingston. BE
at: ty. Professor T. H. M Ada ptations in Animal Reactions. Professor G
II, beier Distribution of the ch sa atha of ‘ar
Diego Region in Relation to the Ques- Adaptation from the Point of View of the Physi-
sad Dat Isolation vs. Coincidence. Ellis L. ologist. Professor Albert P. Mathews. into the
Michael. The Fitness of the Environment, an Taare pe
TH Tanny p Spotted Negroes. Q. I. Simpson Biological Significance of the Properties
and Professor W. E. Castle. r Lawrence J. Henderson. in Oeno-
Shorter Articles and Discussion : Mutations agi
IV. The pant of Fertilizers on Variation in Corn thera biennis L.: Professor Bradley M. Ds bert
and Beans. Professor J, K. Shaw. Convenient Microscope. Case: Professor oe
3 iterary Note om
minal Continuity. Dr. W. W. Stockberger-
E
: t .00
Single Number 35 Cents Yearly Subscription, $4
The NATURALIST will be sent to mew subscribers for four months for One
THE SCIENCE PRESS „|
Lancaster, *™
Garrison, N. Y. Sub-Station 84: NEW YORK
.
Pi
VOL. XLVII, NO. 556 APRIL, 1913
THE
AMERICAN
NATURALIST
A MONTHLY JOURNAL
Devoted to the Advancement of the Biological Sciences with
Special Reference to the Factors of Evolution
CONTENTS
Page
Alpheus Hyatt and his Principles of Research. Dr. ROBERT TRACY JACKSON 195
Peta of Tigem Development i in Nicotiana on Theories of Heredity.
ORLAND E. WHI BT Soa pede rca ir E e
TI. ee Articles and Discussion : Heredity in a Parthenogenetic Insect.
Hn
Multiple Aliclomonplis. A. H. STURTEVANT. Mendelism and ific
Hybrids. Dr. O. F. Coox. areca (2) 2 Fish a in = Pro-
fessor T. D. A. COCKERELL - = 229
TV. Notes and Literature: Some Recent Advances in Vertebrate Paleontology. Dr.
Roy L. MOODIE Ue ra a a ge oer
THE SCIENCE PRESS
LANOASTER, PA. GARRISON, N. ¥.
NEW YORK: SUB-STATION 8
The American Naturalist
MSS. intended for publication and books, etc., intended for — should be
sent to the i of THE AMERICAN NATURALIST, Garrison- on-Hudson, New York
Artic ontaining research work bearing on the problems as ‘organo evolu-
tion are supectaity welcome, and will be aie ee ao in publica
One hundrea reprints of sont daeta are supplied to Ere wa of charge.
Further ‘reprints will be supplied at c
scriptions and advertisement should be sent to the Bag sage The
exbsoriatibn price is four dollars a year. Foreign poste s fifty cents and
Canadian postage twenty-five cents additional. The . arge for single poh is
forty cents. The advertising rates are Four Dollars for
THE SCIENCE PRESS
Lancaster, Pa. Garrison, N. Y.
NEW YORK: Sub-Station 84
Entered as second-class matter, April 2, 1908, at the Post Office at Lancaster, Pa., under the Aet of
Congress of March 3, 1879.
FOR SALE TENTH EDITION.
ARCTIC, ICELAND and GREENLAND E
BIRDS’ SKINS, THE MICROSCOPE,
an introduction to Microscopic Methods and to Histol ee +
Well Fpa Low Prices = rece HENRY GAG on, Cone izarea ia hina
rticulars of 350 pree ppe a above gures in a
G. DINESEN: Bird collecto and fally RSA aR SO
Husavik, North Iceland, Via Leidle, Rngianid COMSTOCK PUBLISHING CO., Ithaca, N-
aaea ar a
2 2
To Ornithologists FINE LAND SHELLS
I have in stock and gine T SS thousand d species
and Museums See ee ee pata
lustra every hase of he Pita booklet on Tb
b e
W. F. H. ROSENBERG Beautiful sheli ofthe Philippines, and other ee
Importer of Exotic Zoological Specimens coe iners trespondence ria, went travelers $ = ex DEBB, oes.
Only the finest te
57, HAVERSTOCK HILL Ste Weatzainisver Rond, Rochester, NÑ. Y. l
London N. W., ENGLAND
Begs to announce the publication of a new Price List
(No. 17) of BIRD SKINS. This catalogue con- The ae of Chicago
tains nearly 6,000 species, and is the largest and
most complete price list of birds ever published. It A colleges, the
is arranged in systematic order with authors’ names, : patito ve and one
indications of localities, and an index to Families. i Arte Literature, Sconce
It will be sent gratis and post free on application, as tie oy Medicine, Ede
. . * n
will the following lists : is gendre Pages
he summer by 4
No. 14, Mammals; No. 15, Bird’s Eggs; No. 16,
Reptiles, Amphibia and Fishes ; No. 12, Lepidoptera ;
No. 13, Coleoptera.
Largest stock in the world of specimens in all
branches of Zoology. Specimens sent on approval.
Please state which lists are required.
Summer Quarter, 1913
16—July 23
Wiss heer
will be
PROFESSOR ALPHEUS HYATT.
THE
AMERICAN NATURALIST
Vor. XLVII April, 1913 No. 556
ALPHEUS HYATT AND HIS PRINCIPLES
OF RESEARCH!
DR. ROBERT TRACY JACKSON
Prorrssor Hyarr devoted his life to pure science in the
best sense of the word. While known primarily for his
work on fossil cephalopods, in his researches he covered
a wide range of groups, doing critical work on sponges,
bryozoans, pelecypods, gastropods, cephalopods and in-
sects. He also published a number of purely philo-
sophical papers on his subject. He taught zoology and
palæontology, was a museum administrator, an organizer
of societies, and maintained a seaside laboratory at
Annisquam, Mass. He was fond of social life and was
a most genial and charming host. With strong personal
feelings and convictions, he was remarkably tolerant of
differences of opinion. One of the most approachable
of men, he was very kind and considerate to young men.
The accompanying portrait is from a bas-relief made by
Professor Hyatt’s daughter, now the wife of Dr. Alfred
G. Mayer.
Professor Hyatt was essentially philosophical in all
his work, and his researches were largely devoted to evo-
lutionary problems. His publications contain most im-
portant conclusions and generalizations. He discovered
new principles and greatly expanded the principles of
others, so that he was justly considered the founder of
*A paper given before the Palæontological Society of America, at the
New Haven meeting, December, 1912.
195
196 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [VoL. XLVII
a school of evolutionary research. A leader in this
school was the late Charles Emerson Beecher, an emi-
nent professor in Yale University. I wish to point out
briefly what these principles are, and their application,
but without going into the question of who first enun-
ciated the principles, which is often difficult to ascertain.
For the present purpose it is sufficient to consider them
as the principles that Hyatt made use of and welded into
a component whole for phylogenetic investigation.
It was my privilege to be intimately associated with
Professor Hyatt as a student and assistant from 1886,
until his death, in 1902, and I can not too strongly ex-
press the help and pleasure derived from his boundless
enthusiasm, ever ready sympathy and wise counsel. He
was laborious and painstaking in his work, constantly
urged the importance of large series of individuals for
study, and the importance of the bearing of abnormal or
pathological specimens. The value of a specimen to him
was for what it showed, by itself, and in its relation to
associated forms. He urged the comparative study of
young and adult, living and fossil forms in a united
study. To a zoologist the only difference that should be
recognized between living and fossil animals is the con-
dition of preservation and the time element. A study
of the recent throws light upon the fossil, and conversely
a study of the fossil throws light upon the recent. A
united study of both recent and fossil gives a grasp upon
a group that can not be attained from either alone.
Stages in development were constantly uppermost in
Professor Hyatt’s mind, not stages in the embryo only,
which are the main conception of stages to most zoolo-
gists, but stages throughout the life of the individual,
from the egg to the adult and old age. It was the later,
or postembryonic, stages that he especially urged the
importance of to the phylogenist, and he demonstrated
that these later stages possess characters which are
directly comparable to the adult condition of related
forms. In other words, that the ontogeny of the indi-
No. 556] ALPHEUS HYATT `. 197
vidual gives in abbreviated form a recapitulation of the
phylogeny of the group. This is the law of morpho-
genesis of Hyatt? by which he endeavored to demonstrate
that a natural classification may be made by a system of
analysis in which the individual is the unit of compari-
son, because its life in all its phases, morphological and
physiological, healthy or pathological, embryo, larva,
adolescent, adult and old (ontogeny), correlates with
the morphological and physiological history of the group
to which it belongs (phylogeny).
To the student of invertebrate fossils these animals
present certain advantages, not only on account of their
relative abundance, but also because, in many forms at
least, from the study of a single specimen, one can gather
in a more or less complete degree the stages through
which it has passed in development. As Hyatt? says:
How unreasonable it would seem to a student of fossil Mammalia, if
he were requested to do what it would be appropriate to require from
a student of fossil Cephalopoda, viz., to describe from the investigation
of a single perfect fossil skeleton of an adult, not only the character-
isties of the skeleton at the stage of growth at which the animal died,
but the developmental stages of this same skeleton, and in case it were
the remains of an old, outgrown animal, also, the retrograde meta-
morphoses through which it had passed during its last stages of decline.
It might require a lifetime to make out the stages of a single species
of mammal satisfactorily from the isolated specimens which would be
found and the attempt would be hopeless for all the youngest stages of
growth, while the bones were still cartilaginous. This kind of evidence,
however, is readily obtainable among fossil Cephalopods . . . and it
can be obtained in good collections everywhere.
While this is especially true of the tetrabranchiate
cephalopods, it is also true in a more or less complete
degree of some other groups of molluses, as well as many
brachiopods, echinoderms and corals.
As examples of types showing stages in development,
the following may be cited. The living Nautilus has a
close-coiled shell, but in its development passes through
*A. Hyatt, ‘‘ Genesis es e Arietide,’’ Smithsonian Contributions to
Knowledge, Washington, 1
* A. Hyatt, ‘* Phylogeny ane an Acquired Charaeteristie,’’ Proc. Amer. Phil.
Soc., Vol. 32, 1894.
198 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
arcuate, loose-coiled, then close-coiled stages directly
comparable to the adults of Paleozoic eyrtoceran, gyro-
ceran and nautiloid representatives of its own group.
As shown by J. Perrin Smith,* the highly evolved Cre-
taceous Placenticeras pacificum which in the adult has
complex sutures, in the development of these parts
passes through simpler stages which are comparable to
the adult structures of nautiloid, goniatitie and glyphio-
ceran forms, followed by stages in which the septa are
comparable to those of early Ammonites, before it as-
sumes its adult generic features. The recent Pecten has
strongly marked ears, but the young shell is strikingly
different, first having a rounded nuculoid form, followed
successively by Rhombopteria, Pterinopecten and Avi-
culopecten stages before its adult character is attained.
In Echini the recent Goniocidaris and other genera,
both recent and fossil, have two or more columns of
plates in each interambulacral area, but in the young
they pass through a stage in which there is a single plate
at the ventral border of the interambulacra, which is
comparable as a stage in development to the adult of the
Ordovician Bothriocidaris which retains a single column
of plates in each interambulacral area in the adult. The
Lower Carboniferous echinoid Oligoporus which in each
ambulacrum has four columns of plates with, in addition,
scattered isolated plates, passes through stages with
primary plates only, as in Paleechinus, then primary and
occluded plates as in Maccoya, followed by four columns,
without isolated plates, as in Lovenechinus, before at-
taining its generic character. In Brachiopoda, as shown
abundantly by Beecher and others, stages in develop-
ment are shown in the exterior and interior of the shell
and the brachial supports which can be closely correlated
with adult characters of more primitive representatives
in the group.
While stages in development from the young to the
adult are typically all progressive, in senescence, the
‘J. P. Smith, ‘‘The Development and Phylogeny of Placenticeras,’’
Proc. California Acad. Sci., Ser. 3, Geology, Vol. 1, No. 7, 1900
No. 556] ALPHEUS HY ATT 199
stages that appear are in the main regressive. Nauti-
loids and ammonoids, which are characterized by close-
coiled shells, build loose-coiled or even uncoiled addi-
tions; specialized Ammonites with complex septa, in
Senescence build simpler septa. Paleozoic Echini, which
are characterized by many columns of plates in an inter-
ambulacral area, lose some of these columns in old age
growth, all in these features taking on simpler characters
comparable to those seen in their own youth, and also
comparable to the characters of adults in regressive
series in their own groups.
As an aid in describing stages, Professor Hyatt® de-
vised a classification of stages in development and decline
which is a great convenience in exact description. In
this classification the ontogeny is primarily divided into
embryonic and postembryonic periods, the latter being
for the most part the more important in phylogenetic
work. Of embryonic stages the protembryo is repre-
sented by the egg and segmentation stages of the same,
comparable to the simple and colonial Protozoa as adult
forms. The mesembryo is the blastula stage, with a
single layer of cells on the periphery of a hollow sphere,
comparable to Volvox and Eudorina, the Mesozoa of
Hyatt. The metembryo is the gastrula stage, compara-
ble to the simplest of the sponges. The neoembryo is a
later stage represented by the early ciliated cephalula
stage of a brachiopod and the trochosphere of a molluse,
comparable to the embryo of chetopod worms and other
Celomata. The typembryo is that stage in development
when the features of the great group to which the animal
belongs appear. In Mollusca the shell gland and plate-
like beginnings of the shell appear at this stage. In
brachiopods, two folds of the second segment of the em-
bryo turn forward and the corneous shell begins to
appear. The phylembryo is the completed embryonic
Stage and is the first ontogenetic stage that is applicable
"A. Hyatt, ‘*Values in Classification of the Stages of Growth and
Decline with Propositions for a New Nomenelature.’’? [Somewhat altered
in later publications. R.T. J .] Proe. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., Vol 23, 1888.
200 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
in paleontological study. It is the stage in which the
characters of the class to which the animal belongs are
established. This period is represented by the protechi-
nus of Echini, the protegulum of Brachiopoda, the pro-
dissoconch of Pelecypoda, the protecium of Bryozoa, the
protoconch of Cephalous Mollusca and the protaspis of
the Tritobita. This stage in development is represented
in fossil as well as living forms in many types, and the
primitive radicle that it represents as a phylogenetic
stage has been pointed out as Paterina for the Brachi-
opoda by Beecher, as a nuculoid type for certain Pele-
eypoda, and as Bothriocidaris for the whole class of
Echini by Jackson.
Of postembryonic stages the first are the nepionic or
babyhood stages, abundantly recognizable in fossil as
well as recent types. Succeeding these are the neanic,
or youthful stages. The ephebic is the adult, or that
stage in which the full species characters are evinced.
Senescence or old age is expressed in gerontic stages, in
and by such loss an approach is commonly made to the
youthful character before such features are attained.
Gerontic stages while in a measure repeating youthful
characters, do so in the inverse order to that in which
they are acquired in ontogeny. As shown abundantly
by Hyatt, senescent features are prophetic of the adult
characters in regressive series of the group.
In studies of ontogeny it often occurs that stages need
to be further subdivided. For this purpose Professor
Hyatt introduced the prefixes ana, meta and para, so that
one can speak of the ananepionic, metanepionic or para-
nepionic stage of Nautilus, ete. By means of this
simple nomenclature the life stages of any organism are
divisible into ten main or thirty minor periods, which
are thus readily and clearly expressed.
In ontogeny, as shown by overwhelming evidence, the
organism passes through stages which repeat the char-
acters of adults of more primitive types in serial order,
and it is believed that this serial order may be safely
No. 556] ALPHEUS HY ATT . 201
accepted as a recapitulation of the phylogeny of the
group in hand. Stages are not equally clear in all types,
for stages may be skipped, or may be telescoped in
specialized forms, but in primitive forms (Nautilus,
Lingula, Pecten, Cidaris) they are astonishingly clear
and complete. By some investigators stages have been
denied and the recapitulation theory considered a myth.
I can not enter into discussion here, but can simply say
that it is felt that opponents have not considered the
evidence. Cumings® has recently put the matter well
in a defence of the Recapitulation Theory. .
The principle of acceleration of development, origi-
nated by Professor Hyatt,’ is at once an explanation of
the existence of stages in development, and the loss, or
skipping of stages as well. This principle maintains
that features appearing at or near the adult period of
development are inherited at earlier and earlier stages
in successive generations until they exist only in the
extreme young or are skipped as stages in development.
As examples of accelerations: In certain Paleozoic
Echini the full number of columns of ambulacral and
interambulacral plates are attained only in the adult.
In more specialized species the similar columns are taken
on much earlier in both areas than they appear in lower
species (Melonechinus). The pelecypod Hinnites is at-
tached by the fixation of one valve to foreign objects
when about one fourth grown, and then loses its young
pecteniform character. The allied Spondylus is attached
when very much younger and thus earlier loses the
Similar stage. Plicatula is attached at the close of the
prodissoconch stage and has lost the pecteniform stage
altogether. In primitive tritobites (Solenopleura, Sao)
the protaspis is rounded with neither dorsal eyes nor
*E. R. Cumings, ‘‘Paleontology and the Recapitulation Theory,’’ Proe.
Indiana Acad. Sci., twenty-fifth anniversary meeting, 1909.
"A. Hyatt, “On, Parallelism between the Different Stages of Life in the
Individual and Those in the Entire Group of the Molluscous Order Tetra-
branchiata,’? Mem. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., Vol. 1, 1866, p. 203. See also
[minutes of meeting of February 21, 1866] Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist.,
Vol. 10, pp. 302-303.
202 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [VoL. XLVII
ornamentation. In the specialized genera Acidaspis and
Arges, as shown by Beecher, both dorsal eyes and dentic-
ulate ornamentations occur in the protaspis.
In acceleration of development, when skipping of
stages occurs, it is not the earliest or embryonic stages
that are skipped, but later or postembryonic. Embryonic
stages are clung to with striking pertinacity. Stages
are often run together or telescoped as expressed by
Grabau,® when in a specialized type more than one phase
may be represented at a single stage, although such
stages are clearly distinct in more primitive types.
As an outgrowth of Professor Hyatt’s studies of
stages in development, the principle of colonial develop-
ment has been enunciated independently by Ruedemann®
in Graptolites, by Cumings!® in Bryozoa and by Lang"?
also in Bryozoa. These investigators show that in the
growth of the colony there are distinct stages in develop-
ment which can be correlated with the adult characters
of more primitive colonial forms. In this respect the
colony behaves as an individual. Cumings introduces
the terms nepiastic, neanastic, ephebastic, gerontastic as
descriptive adjectives of these colonial stages. It is
felt that this special nomenclature for colonial stages is
unnecessary and therefore undesirable, because the
simpler the terminology can be kept in such work, the
more likely it is to be widely accepted and made use of.
Another phase of stages is localized stages in develop-
ment in which I'? showed that throughout the life of the
individual stages may be found in localized parts which
‘A. W. Grabau, ‘‘Studies of Gastropoda. IIT. On Orthogenetie Varia-
tion,’? AMER. NATURALIST, Vol. 41, 1907 :
°R. Ruedemann, ‘‘Growth and nating. rv of Goniograptus thureaw
M’Coy,’’ Bull. N. Y. State Mus., No. 52, 1902.
R. Ruedemann, ‘‘Graptolites of New York.” Pt. 1, Mem. N. Y. State
"A No. 7 , 1904, Pt. 2, idem, No. 11, 1
. Cumings, «Development of Some Püss Bryozoa,’’ Amer.
Journ. Sci. (4), Vol. 17, 1904,
“wW
. D. Lang, ‘‘The Jurassic Form of the ‘Genera’ Stomatopora and
pisema ”” Geol. Mag., dec. 5, Vol. 1, 1904.
ces , Jackson, ‘*Localized Stages in Development in Plants and Ani-
mals,’? cote Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., Vol. 5, 1899.
No. 556] ALPHEUS HYATT 203
repeat the characters seen in youth and in the adults of
more primitive types. Such localized stages are shown
by many trees and other plants. In the oak, ash and
hickory, suckers from the base of the tree have simple
forms of leaves, comparable to those seen in young seed-
lings. Beneath the flower (rose, peony), at the tips of
branches (hickory, sassafras) and in diseased or feeble
growths (tulip-tree, red cedar) leaves often occur which
in simplicity of character are comparable to those of
seedlings or more primitive species in the group.
Localized stages occur also in herbaceous plants as
shown by Cushman.1?
Amongst animals localized stages are shown where
during growth there is an addition of similar parts as
the plates in echinoderms, septa in cephalopods and in
the developing zooids of colonies of corals and, accord-
ing to Ruedemann, in Graptolites. In these types the
parts as added present stages which are comparable to
Stages seen in the ontogenesis of the individual as a
whole. In Echini new plates are added to the corona
immediately below the oculars, and at this region
throughout life the ambulacral plates are of a simple
character, whereas the older earlier formed plates during
their individual development may have taken on com-
plex characters, for example, in Centrechinus (Diadema)
ambulacral plates are compound, but close to the oculars
are simple. In the Palwozoic family of the Paleechin-
ide, the ambulacrum at the equator, or midzone, has from
two to twelve columns of plates in each area, but in those
genera with many columns there are only two columns
dorsally in the area where new plates are added. In
crinoids, in which the arms have the plates arranged in
a biserial manner (Encrinus, Platycrinus) as shown by
Grabau,!! a uniserial arrangement exists at the tips
"a. A, Cushman, ‘‘ Studies of Localized Stages of Growth in Some Com-
mon New England Plants,’? AMER. NATURALIST, 1902; idem, ‘‘ Studies of
Loealized Stages in Some Plants of the Botanic Gardens of Harvard Uni-
versity,’? AMER. NATURALIST, 1903. ;
* A. W. Grabau, ‘‘ Notes on the Development of the Biserial Arms in Cer-
tain Crinoids,’? Amer. Journ. Sci. (4), Vol. 16, 1903.
204 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou.XLVII
where the young plates are added. In Ammonites, as
Placenticeras, in which the sutures of the septa are com-
plex, often in a very high degree, we find that at the inner,
or umbilical, portion of each individual septum a simpler
condition exists, and greater complexity is attained in
passing from the ventral portion of the septum outward,
or dorsally. This simpler ventral portion in an adult
can be compared with the simpler condition in a whole
septum of the young, or with the septum of the adult in
a more primitive and geologically older representative
of the group. |
Parallelism is a most important principle and was
constantly used by Professor Hyatt in his studies. Par-
allelism is the taking on of a similar form in independent
lines of descent. It may help one in explaining the
origin of structures, but is sometimes confusing as indi-
cating a basis of relationship which is misleading. In
Crustacea the recent isopod Serolis closely resembles a
trilobite. The uncoiled gastropod shell Vermetus closely
resembles the worm Serpula. Spondylus, Chama and
Miilleria amongst Pelecypoda, and Davidsonella and
Derbya among Brachiopoda are all attached by the cal-
careous fixation of one valve and closely resemble
Ostrea, which has a similar habit of life. The complex
septa of the Tertiary nautiloid Aturia closely resemble
those of the Devonian ammonoid Goniatites. Echini
with imbricating coronal plates were considered as
related on account of this character, but this structure
appears in several independent lines in the group. The
recent deep-sea Echinothuriide have many rows of
ambulacral plates only in the peristome. By this char-
acter they have been associated with the Paleozoic
Lepidocentride which have the same feature. I believe
however that it is purely a parallelism and not a basis
for genetic connection.
Larval adaptation is the term applied to special fea-
tures built up as youthful adaptations and which are not,
therefore, of phylogenetic significance. Such adapta-
tions are a marked feature of certain groups as the ven-
tral spurs developed in the embryonic glochidial stage of
No. 556] ALPHEUS HYATT 205
the Unionide. Larval adaptations are most marked in
the youthful stages of some insects, as in caterpillars. In
most invertebrates, however, at least in postembryonic
stages, larval adaptations are uncommon and can usually
be eliminated as a factor in studying ontogenetic stages.
The Hyatt principles have been used as a working
basis in the phylogenetic classification of three entire
classes of animals, the Brachiopoda and Trilobita by
Beecher'® and the Echini by myself.1* They have also
been used as a basis of partial classifications of Cepha-
lopoda by Hyatt himself, of Protozoa by Cushman,” of
Pelecypoda by Jackson,!8 of Gastropoda by Grabau,!®
and also to a certain extent in suggesting genetic relation-
ships in a number of other groups of animals and in
plants by various investigators.
If I may be permitted to speak of my own studies. I
have recently completed a phylogenetic study of the
Kchini, and throughout the work made use of the Hyatt
principles. In this use there was no occasion to qualify
a single one. To work out principles largely on one
group (the Cephalopoda) as did Hyatt, and then to have
his followers apply these principles successfully to many
widely separate groups, and even to seek and ascertain
facts on the basis of the implied principles, is strong evi-
dence that he got at fundamental truths.
At present the phylogeny of invertebrates is little
studied, paleontologists are largely occupied with ques-
tions of stratigraphy, and zoologists occupy themselves
with other lines of work. In future, as phylogenetic work
is prosecuted, I believe that Hyatt will be looked on as
the master mind who pointed out the methods by which
to ascertain the true phylogenetic relations of inverte-
brate organic forms.
"C. E. Beecher, ‘‘Studies in Evolution,’’ New York, 1901.
RET Jackson, ‘t Phylogeny of the Echini,’’? Mem. Boston Soc. Nat.
Hist., Vol.
y J. A. Pies ‘‘ Developmental Stages in the Lagenide,’’? AMER.
NaTuRALIST, Vol 39, 1905.
R T Jackson, ‘‘ Phylogeny of the Pelecypoda,’’ Mem. Boston Soc. Nat.
Hist., Vol. 4, 1890.
"i W, Graban, ‘t Phylogeny of Fusus and Its Allies,’’ Smithsonian Mise.
Coll., Vol. 44, 1904
THE BEARING OF TERATOLOGICAL DEVELOP-
MENT IN NICOTIANA ON THEORIES
OF HEREDITY?!
ORLAND E. WHITE
Bussey Institution, HARVARD UNIVERSITY
Ir is desirable, though difficult, to atack genetic prob-
lems by both pedigree-culture and cytological methods.
It is desirable because the problems are viewed from
different standpoints; it is difficult because few forms
are especially favorable for either kind of work. The
present paper is a preliminary report upon certain char-
acters in a species fairly desirable from each point of
attack.
Among plants teratological phenomena are common,
especially those known as fasciations, Masters? citing,
in 1869, 120 genera in which they were not infrequent.
The term fasciation is a broad one and includes, from
a genetic standpoint, some very different phenomena.
At least two distinct kinds of variation are now empha-
sized in genetic work, somatic and germinal, although
often it is impossible to distinguish between them ex-
cept by experimental cultures. Fasciation is a phenom-
enon of variation in which both types occur, though the
evidence on this point is not all that could be desired.
All observers agree that the fasciated character is con-
stant and heritable in such races as Celosia cristata?
(cockscomb), Pisum sativum umbellatum,t Sedum re-
flexum cristata, some races of Zea mays and Nicotiana
1 Contribution from the Laboratory of Genetics, Bussey Institution of
Harvard University.
? Masters, M. T., ‘‘ Vegetable prais pp. 9-21, London, 1869.
"De Vries, H., ‘The Mutation Theory,” 2: 68, 516-519, 1910; also
Lynch, iwi, t‘ Evolution of Planti)? Journ. Roy. Hort. Soc., 25: 17-31,
1900.
*De Vries, H., ibid., p. 513, 1910. See also Lynch, I., ibid.
* Masters, M. T., ibid., pp. 18-19, 1869.
* East, E. M., and H. K. Hayes, ‘‘Inheritance in Maize,’’ Conn. Agr.
206
No. 556] DEVELOPMENT IN NICOTIANA 207
tabacum fasciata. On the other hand, many examples
of fasciation are slight or severe somatic modifications,
no more permanent than a swollen limb due to a bruise
in our own bodies, or a bone spavin in a horse’s foot,
though the tissue proliferation may remain as a lasting
sear. Examples of this form may be found in @nothera,’
Nasturtium,’ Picris hieracioides and Raphanus raphan-
istrum.® Such modifications are imperfectly under-
stood, but may be brought about directly or indirectly
by external agencies such as bruises, culture methods
and insect injuries to the initial meristem.
Aside from the work of Mendel? and De Vries,1! the
phenomena of fasciation have not been dealt with in the
light of modern genetics. Mendel’s investigations were
made on a fasciated strain of pea (Pisum sativum um-
bellatum). When crossed with a non-fasciated strain
the teratological character was recessive and segregated
in F, in a simple 3:1 ratio. This result was essentially
confirmed by Lock and Bateson, although environmental
conditions were found by them to affect the character
more than is usual in such phenomena.
De Vries failed to distinguish between fasciations
strictly heritable and those non-heritable. The only con-
Exp. Sta. Bull., No. 167, and Contrib. from Lab. of Genetics, Bussey Inst.
of Harvard Univ., No. 9, p. 133, Pl. XXII (a) and (b), 1911; also Emerson,
R. A., personal RRR 1911.
nox, A. A., ‘‘Induction, Development and Seige of Fascia-
dom, ds eek Inst. of Wash. Pub. 98: 1-21, Pls. I-V, 19
, A. A, bid, p. 14.
Pc : “Cas de virescence et de fasciation —— pn
Rev. Gén. de Baignins: 12: 323-327, 1900; also Godron, A., ‘‘ Mélanges
teratologie végétale,’? Mem. Soc. d. Sc. Nat. d. Cherbourg, 16: T
p
‘t Versuche über Pflanzen-Hybriden,’’ Verh. Naturf.
Ver. in Brünn, 10 Abh., p. I. See Bateson, W., ‘‘Mendel’s Principles of
Heredity,” pp. 322, 328, 330, Cambridge Univ. Press, 1909.
*De Vries H., ibid., III, ‘‘The Inconstancy of Fasciated Races,’’ pp.
488-596, 1910; “ s Monstenonibile héréditaires offertes en échange aux Jardins
Botaniques, 1? Boh) Joiw boule D: 62-93, 1897; ‘‘Over de erfelykheid der fas-
ciatién. Avec un résumé en langue rangaine,” Bot. Jaarboek Dodonaea, 6:
72, 1894; ‘Sur la culture des monstruosités,’’ Comptes Rendus, 128: 125,
1899; “Sur la culture des fasciations des espèces annuelles et biannuelles,”?
Rev. Gén. de Bot., 2: 136, 1899.
208 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou XLVII
stant fasciated race!? with which he worked is the cocks-
comb and his experimental researches on this plant led
him to conclude that ‘‘complete atavists,’’ or normal
plants carrying the fasciated character in a latent state,
are very rare, and even under repeated selection are to
be obtained in very small numbers. Further, the normal
plants thus obtained do not breed true, but revert very
soon to the abnormal condition. While investigations
have not been made showing definitely that many of De
Vries’s fasciations were not heritable, but were simply
somatic modifications, enough evidence is at hand from
numerous sources to justify at least the expression of a
strong doubt of their heritable character. According to
the observations of Knox, fasciated stems in Œnotheras
are not germinal in origin, but traceable directly, in
most cases, to insect injuries. Observations by Molliard
on Raphanus and Picris support this conclusion, while
Godron was unable to secure fasciated individuals from
the seeds of a Picris plant thus affected. The fact that
fasciation appears in every generation of Gnothera
plants in varying percentages, in certain cultures, espe-
cially those of a biennial nature, is best explainable on a
re-infection basis. Spiral torsion races such as Dipsacus
sylvestris torsus in De Vries’s cultures behaved, from
a genetic standpoint, in the same manner as his fasciated
races. Races of Dipsacus species are rich in torsions in
Holland and Denmark, but, according to Johannsen,"
the seeds of torsus strains when grown in England pro-
duced normal progeny. This would indicate an environ-
mental rather than a germinal basis as a causal factor.
In all of De Vries’s experimental cultures of fasciated
races (with the exception of Celosia) only a certain per
cent. (averaging in most races 50 per cent. or less) of
the individuals in each generation possessed the abnor-
mality, and he was never able to breed a constant and
* Possibly Geranium molle fasciatum may be an exception in which more
than one unit factor is responsible for the anomaly. Otherwise it should have
bred true at least by the sixth generation if the seed sown each year was
from carefully guarded plants.
* Johannsen, W., public lecture IV, Boston, 1911.
No. 556] DEVELOPMENT IN NICOTIANA 209
genetically pure race. Even though he had been able to
do this, doubt could still be cast upon the belief that he
was dealing with a strictly heritable character, because
the only method that seems to preclude doubt is crossing
with the normal and securing the F, ratio. This method
would eliminate the suspicion that minute bacterial or
even ultra-microscopie organisms were acting as causal
agents.
Emerson and East in their maize studies have ob-
tained races breeding constant for fasciated ears. I
have myself examined such a race in Emerson’s cultures.
Hus, on the other hand, with the same sort of an ab-
normality in the same plant species, Zea mays, secured
results similar to those of De Vries.!‘ Is the difference
in results due to methods or to the nature of the plant
abnormality itself? I shall consider the results of De
Vries and others holding similar opinions in greater de-
tail in a later paper, as such results entail an extended
review.
Tue PROBLEM AND THE MATERIAL
The problem to be discussed briefly in this paper is the
relation of the cytological phenomena in the reduction
divisions to certain segregating Mendelian characters,
and the nature of these characters in development and
inheritance,
The material upon which the study is largely based is
a fasciated variety of Nicotiana tabacum. Although
fasciations are very common in many genera and not
infrequent in others, they have never been recorded (so
far as I can determine) in Nicotiana. The present race
was obtained from the selfed seed of a mutant found
growing in a field of Cuban tobacco in the district of
Partidos, near the town of Alquiza, Cuba, in 1907. Iam
indebted to Dr. E. M. East and to Mr. J. S. Dewey?® for
“Hus, H., and Murdock, A. W., ‘Inheritance of Fasciation in Zea
mays,’’ Plant World, 14: 88-96, 1911.
*Mr. J. S. Dewey is superintendent of the United States tobaceo planta-
ps belonging to the same company that controls the Cuban plantation near
quiza.
210 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
data on this race, prior to the summer of 1910. The
sport is characterized by a flattened, fasciated condition
of the stem and floral structures, and a consequent in-
crease in the number of leaves. The original mutant is
described by Dewey as possessing 152 leaves on the main
stalk, flowers abnormal, stem fasciated. When the ab-
normal plants were studied in more detail, many smaller
teratological features were found, and these were espe-
cially plentiful in connection with the floral structures.
The pistil frequently was incapable of functioning, be-
cause of various forms of tissue proliferation in the re-
gion of the stigma. The style was often shortened, coiled
or fused near its base with an anther (staminody of the
pistil). The ovary locules were very much increased in
number, ranging from two (extremely rare) to as high
S
Fic. 1. | Stems and flowers from the abnormal and normal strains of N. tabacum.
No. 556] DEVELOPMENT IN NICOTIANA 211
as twenty. Very often two or even three distinct pistils
were formed in the same flower, all of which in some
cases could function. The stamens were affected in both
filament and anther. The filaments were often coiled,
twisted, shortened or fused to the corolla. In rare cases,
they were petaliferous. The anther deformities con-
sisted of split anthers, anthers with small pistils grow-
ing from them—two or three to an anther being present
in one case (pistillody of the anthers). The number of
pollen sacs varied from the normal four to six.
The corolla and calyx were often split, and the lobes
of the calyx and not uncommonly of the corolla, were ir-
regular in size and shape. Occasionally the calyx and
corolla merged into each other by a spiral twist. Two
flowers sometimes were enclosed by the same calyx.
Once or twice flowers have been found consisting of only
a corolla and a few stamens, growing on the side of the
normal corolla and partly fused with it. The corollas
never show a doubling phenomenon to accommodate the
increase in petal number but the circumference of the
flower is extended, and very often these flowers are as
regular and symmetrical as those of the normal. Two
cases of leaves fused at the base have been found and
the phyllotaxy is altered and irregular. The fasciated
plants when young are practically indistinguishable
from the normal. The anatomical features have not been
investigated sufficiently for a report upon them at this
time, and it is possible that differences between the nor-
mal and abnormal seedlings will be found when this part
of the study is completed.
Five generations of the abnormal strain have been
grown, amounting in all to over a thousand plants, and
each individual plant has possessed the unmistakable
characters of the original mutant. The monstrous char-
acter is, however, a variable one, since the stems may be
extremely flattened throughout the greater part of their
length or only flattened and fasciated toward their apical
ends. Other characters, as already implied, fluctuate
between extremes, depending in part on environment
212
THE AMERICAN NATURALIST
[Von. XLVII
A COMPARISON OF CERTAIN CHARACTERS OF THE F; AND Fz GENERATION OF
303-1-12 is a type of extreme abnormalness.
tabacum. (304 X 402)—1-10 = normal Fz segregate.
heterozygous F: segregate similar to the Fi (304 X 402)-30.
301-1-2 represents the extreme
(304 X 402)—1-12 = abnormal
Stem
No. of
Leaves
Height,
In.
Flower
m
N
w
oP
| #P |
F
303-1-12
301-1-2
V. abn.
N.(?)
~
a
>
@
epals ..
S
Petals .
Stamens
r
T
i)
d
w ONN e IO OD
Normal as in
(304 X402)-1-10
(304 x 402)
-30
N.(?)
-
(304 X402)
=1-10
(304 X402)
—1-12
(304 X402)
-1-34
(304 X402)
-1-6
V. abn.
S. abn.
N.(?)
32
ano bo Our gr cr w NNO
“I o& bo ta a w NNN
pel p ee
T
©
:
x
Y ann wW NOD
U OO w NNN
oO BCom wV won
w
lod
do Cnn NH Ann bo AAD
w oan w el OF
1 Double flower.
pi pmi pet
G oea w NNO [im “100 SJ bo or or or w (eee
|
z NNN A ONN T Se) Y noa YN Aon
to oro cr bo Or or or
leo NNO w NYS
= Soo V MDD
213
a| 25 26
|
23
22
(304 X 402)-1-6
21
402 is the normal N,
20
19
18
17
15 | 16
heterozygous Fz segregate.
14
DEVELOPMENT IN NICOTIANA
(304 X 402)-1-34
No. 556]
ABNORMAL X Norma Nicotiana (304 X402) WITH THOSE OF THE PARENT STRAINS
variation of the abnormal characters toward the normal.
F2 segregate.
a oD ae
©1919 M Ors A} inn N wow : 215 7 nne
OoN M Nee M| DDO A RAO T ANN A DDD M
r ret rH m ord ox
7 OOH + DON M 11911 AN OHH tT DOK A ONG P
is]
v Oro v DNAN N [ADA A OD O H st t ONO m
al
oe SOR v moo MINN A NON ¥ Cas f ORR o
<H
q eR D noo M1, Heas A KAO i DNN M DDA y
© <H
0 Gre 0 a COS M| DDA NAN NNO NAN NOOO + oro M
A m A ri m rt
l «
a -
z ono ¥ g Nee ojoo N 00g P Nee + DoS m|.
x
hi ONN + x COS Hl) HHH A HSS v DAS € COS v
ia)
N COR o Ea Ory MDADA N KON + BRE © ÖSO M
oh a| £
+ OGO v a COS m| INI N CON M DHE M OOD +
D BO, oO | COG M/HHH A SHH A FEE V ORR
: t
T OoN a eA oroe m| DRS N SS TY Or B Pro 5
{ NNE Soo N| DOA A NFF ane moo M
bt
? Ooo m Noo T a OOS i ONO tT DDA A
: Se ae TE A OR i ee © OOO M
yi nos p Tie Si oats a Foe M DHE H WSO od
214 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou.XLVII
and in part on the innate nature of the character itself.
One may confuse this fluctuation to the are made by a
swinging pendulum. The are through which the pendu-
lum can swing is limited, but within those limits the are
may be medium, large or small, depending on the agen-
cies that set the pendulum in motion. Agencies very dif-
ferent in nature may produce the same result. The pen-
dulum is the material body which makes the are recog-
nizable as an entity, and in this simile may be compared to
the gene for fasciation. When the pendulum is motion-
less, there is no are, and there would be no fasciation if
the gene remained potential.
A more definite idea of the characters of the plant and
their variability may be secured by consulting the table
on page 212. It should be stated that plants have been
grown under many environments and with many varia-
tions in culture. But so far as our present interest goes,
no very great changes have resulted. The race has al-
ways been clearly distinguishable in the adult state from
the normal, whether grown under cramped greenhouse
conditions, or out-of-doors; whether surrounded by a
Cuban or a New England environment. No especial care,
such as De Vries prescribes, regarding culture and
transplantation has been given, and yet the anomaly has
always bred absolutely true and no ‘‘atavists’’ have ap-
peared.
The normal Cuban variety from which the fasciated
strain arose is characterized by a normal round stem,
regular phyllotaxy, flowers with five petals, sepals,
stamens and a two-loculed ovary. The number of com-
mercial leaves varies between 20 and 25, all leaf counts
in the present investigation, being made by the commer-
cial method.!? Fertility is practically 100 per cent. Oc-
casionally among hundreds of flowers examined a flower
is found with an extra sepal or petal, otherwise abnor-
malities are unknown in our cultures of the normal va-
riety.
All leaves were recorded up to the first leafless branch (‘‘ bald sucker’’),
exclusive of the first three basal leaves.
No. 556] DEVELOPMENT IN NICOTIANA | 215
In the cultures at the Bussey Institution of Harvard
University the normal Cuban is known as 402: the fasci-
ated strain as 300-309, the range in numbers represent-
ing an attempt at selection.
METHODS
Data were collected on each plant and tabulated sepa-
rately. The characters noted were, extent of fasciation
in the stem; number of leaves, petals, sepals, stamens
and ovary locules. Twenty-five flowers were taken from
each plant and the parts of each flower recorded sepa-
rately. In all crosses made the flowers were castrated
in the bud and bagged. Pollen was taken only from
anthers still in the closed bud and 95 per cent. alcohol
was liberally used after each operation on hands and
instruments. The Webber system of recording the
plants by number was used. All seed was sown in steril-
ized soil and all possible care taken to avoid mixtures.
EXPERIMENTAL WORK
Numerous crosses were made between distinct species
and the abnormal race, but all of the progeny were ster-
ile, though the abnormal character was visible in their
flowers and in the increased number of leaves which they
ore.
Four crosses were made between normal N. tabacum
varieties and the abnormal, all of which produced fer-
tile F, plants. The most interesting of these is a cross
of the abnormal with the normal Cuban variety from
which it mutated. Three generations of this cross,
(304 X 402) have been grown. The F, generation con-
sisted of 39 plants, the F, of 97 and the F, of 647, total-
ing 783 individuals. The F, was intermediate in char-
acter between the two parents, as the table will show.
The F, gave the three expected types in the ratio of
1:2:1, the actual numbers being:
eS AE ee ee ke ee ee ee ee E Oe ee we
| Normal | ‘Heterozygote | Abnormal
|
|
|
52 | 17
p | *
216 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
The F, selections gave the results expected in F,.
Counting the total progeny (248) from F, and F, hetero-
ZY mere! the fas are:
Normal | Heterozy gote Abnormal
E ae ae E A E E E A 68 | 124 56
Dand. Siig OEE Cts, T as ates 62 124 oo Es
The F, heterozygotes were in appearance duplicates
of the F, individuals and after a little experience could
be easily distinguished from the abnormal homozygotes.
Clean segregates were obtained from the heterozygous
Fig F, segr: gates from the abnormal x normal (304 X 402) Nicotiana. Abnorm
das heterozygote pesa normal homozygote. The grandparents in appearance are
duplicates of the two homozygotes
No. 556] DEVELOPMENT IN NICOTIANA 217
plants in both F, and F, and the homozygous normals
and abnormals obtained in this manner bred true in F,
and F,. Not being satisfied that only one factor repre-
sented the difference between the normal and the abnor-
mal, I thought that it might be possible, through selection,
to secure a normal strain from the abnormal, or at least
to modify the unit character, as Castle and his students
appear to have done with the hooded pattern in rats.
Selection work was started by selecting from the cul-
tures the most abnormal and the least abnormal plants
as seed producers. The work was carried through two
generations with no prospect of success and there it re-
mains at present. Progeny of the least abnormal plants
were as much fasciated and otherwise abnormal as the
original parent strain growing beside it. And one could
not distinguish the least abnormal from the most ab-
normal strain except by the label. So far as the work
has progressed, this fasciated strain seems no more amen-
able to selection than the cockscomb with which De Vries
worked, and of which he said ‘‘at present at least there
seems not to be any prospect of obtaining a pure atav-
istic strain.’’18
From a comparison between the drawing in Gerarde’s
Herball of 15971® and certain woodcuts from old horti-
cultural magazines with the plants as they are to-day, it
does not appear that much change has taken place in the
cockscomb fasciation since its introduction into Europe
in 1570.
The changes in the expression of the comb that gar-
deners and florists will maintain have taken place as a re-
sult of selection can all be accounted for by the influence
of the environmental factor.
Lock planted seeds of very slightly fasciated individ-
uals of the F, generation of normal X fasciated stem in
Pisum. The F, plants were almost, if not as much fas-
ciated, as the original grandparent strain.”
* De Vries, H., ‘‘The Mutation Theory,’’ 2: 519, 1910.
» Gerarde, J koe, ‘¢Herball or Generall Historie of Plantes,’’ Ist ed.,
Pp. 323-325, Fig. on p. 323, 1597. » Lock, R. H., loc. cit., p. 106.
218 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
This fasciated strain of pea (Mummy Pea or Pisum
sativum umbellatum) would appear to have been a very
constant race, at least since 1597, when it was figured in
Gerarde’s ‘‘ Herball.’’ 21
From the results of hybridization and selection, one
may draw the conclusion that the fasciated mutant
differed from the normal parent strain by only one fac-
tor and that it represents a mutation upon the variabil-
ity of which selection has no modifying effect. The
character itself appears to be due to one underlying
cause and its variableness is only the external manifes-
tation of the capricious working of that cause.
After completing a satisfactory study of the gross
aspects of this character, a cytological investigation was
made, with the hope that here might be found a clue to
the cause or causes underlying the appearance of the
anomaly.
_ CYTOLOGY
Much trouble in fixing material was caused through
the presence of resinous substances in the tissues. Flem-
ming’s medium and strong solutions were finally found
to be the most successful, although prolonged bleaching
of the sections with H,O, was necessary to eliminate the
blackening. Care had to be exercised to secure quick
penetration, as poor fixation and shrinkage were likely
to result after a bath of over 24 hours. The prepara-
tions were stained in Heidenhain’s iron hematoxylin
and counterstained with clove oil saturated with ery-
throsin. This combination usually gave the best results
—a deep black chromatin stain against a brilliant red
background. Preparations were also stained with the
safranin-gentianviolet-orange G combination of Flem-
ming and restained with iron hematoxylin. This method
gave very sharp outlines, not easily obtainable in some
phases, when the ordinary hematoxylin method was
used. Another combination which was found valuable
in cases where the chromosomes were closely crowded
z Compare with photograph in Darbishire, A. D., ‘‘ Breeding and Men-
delian Discovery,’’ p. 22, Fig. 8, 1911.
No. 556] DEVELOPMENT IN NICOTIANA 219
together, as in certain metaphases, is safranin, magdala
red and azure II. Large quantities of the fresh mate-
rial of the anthers in various stages of maturity were
stained with methyl green and microscopically exam-
ined. In most cases one anther of a bud to be fixed was
inspected in this manner. This precaution was neces-
sary as a check on the occurrence of artifacts from
fixation.
Briefly, conditions in the normal Cuban variety (402)
are as follows. The ordinary maturation processes are
those cytologists have so often described for plants, and
need no recapitulation here. The spireme in prophase
is single and, just preceding diakinesis, breaks up into
segments which take the form of twisted and horseshoe-
shaped loops. The latter resemble Davis’s figures for
O. grandiflora22 Each loop consists of two spireme seg-
ments joined at one end, which in the later heterotypic
phases separate and go to opposite poles. Each seg-
ment is interpreted as a somatic chromosome, and the
members of a pair are homologues. The other phases
present nothing peculiar. The homotypic chromosomes
appear as entities first in very late anaphase of the first
division. The reduced chromosome number, as deter-
mined by very numerous counts of heterotypic meta-
phases and anaphases, and homotypic telophases is 24, the
2n being 48. The somatic number (2n) was determined
by adding together the homotypic telophase chromo-
somes of a tetrad and dividing the entire number by two.
Polar views of the metaphase of the first division in sec-
tions of 104 have repeatedly shown the 24 gemini, each
geminal chromosome consisting of a diakinetic pair.
Variation of chromosome number in these normal (402)
anthers is very rarely, if ever, to be found. None was
found in the present investigation. Irregular divisions
are not common, although occasionally one sees lagging
chromosomes. Usually the phases of a single pollen sac
* Davis, B. M., ‘‘Cytological Studies on @nothera, I. Pollen Develop-
wah sf neies grandiflora,” Ann. Bot., 23: 551-571, Pl. XLI, Figs. 31,
220 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vor. XLVII
are more advanced at one end than at the other and the
maturation processes are at a similar stage in the differ-
ent sacs of the same anther. Cursory examination of re-
duction phenomena in the ovule confirmed these observa-
tions.
Many anthers of the abnormal (300-309) when ex-
amined cytologically, were entirely normal in all their
phases of maturation. Others showed evidences of al-
most total sterility through premature breaking down
of the archesporial tissue, while still others were only
partially sterile. Anthers of this strain were mentioned
earlier as sometimes having more than four pollen sacs.
In such cases the maturation phases were in very dif-
ferent stages in the different sacs. In one sac the arche-
sporium might be in early prophase, while in other com-
partments there would be almost mature pollen. This
extreme variation in maturation was not confined to
anthers with an abnormal sac number, but was often true
of those normal in this respect. Conditions in the
anthers of the abnormal strain are similar as regards
the normal cytological phenomena, but various abnor-
malities are not uncommon. These manifest themselves
in such a manner that one can not avoid believing that
some subtle agent is at work here, too, distorting the in-
ternal as well as the larger so-called external characters.
In both reduction divisions in all the strains examined,
various abnormal phenomena are to be found which are
not due to fixation or other technical operations. Con-
trasted with the normal (402) the maturation phases in
different sacs of the same anther may be far apart.
Nearly mature pollen is present in some sacs, while
others in the same anther may not have progressed
farther than diakinesis. Pollen tetrads are often rare
in nearly mature anthers. This is true of at least five
per cent. of those examined. Mother-cells may break
down during early prophase, diakinesis or any of the
later phases. In early prophase, the nuclear membrane
may disappear and the whole archesporium disintegrate.
No. 556] DEVELOPMENT IN NICOTIANA 221
Again, I have found that in some sacs most of the
archesporium has broken down, but some few cells seem
to have escaped destruction and matured. The meta-
phase, so far as I have observed, is not so likely to be dis-
turbed. An occasional premature splitting of the chromo-
somes takes place, increasing the number to be seen in
the polar view of the nuclear plate. These are rare, but
they have been observed in both the abnormal strain and
the abnormal segregates. This feature has been referred
to as a premature splitting,?* but it may be interpreted
as an actual increase in number such as Wilson found in
Metapodius,2* Stevens in Diabrotica? and Strasburger
in Wikstroemia.®
In one pollen mother-cell, 51 chromosomes were clearly
distinguishable, but disintegration had already com-
menced. In another case 30 were counted, the mother-
cell appearing perfectly normal, although in the anther
containing it irregular divisions were taking place. The
nuclear metaphases in which such an increase in num-
ber can be seen are rare, but so far as I have observed,
and I have counted many nuclear plates ideal for such
work, they only occur in the abnormal or in the abnormal
segregates. The heterotypic anaphases of the abnormal
often show the chromosomes lagging or distributed pro-
miscuously over the spindle. In only one case so far have
I found irregular conditions in the telophase and this
only in the case of one mother-cell. Counting is unsatis-
factory in the anaphase of the first division, as the nu-
cleus is small and the chromosomes are many.
Irregular divisions are present in the homotypic, but
most of the abnormalities occur during the heterotypic
mitosis.
* Preparatory for the homotypiec division.
* Wilson, E. B., ‘Studies on Chromosomes. V. The Chromosomes. of
Metapodius, a Gootstbation to the Hypothesis of the Genetic Continuity of
oo ’? Journ. of Exp. Zool., 6: 147-205, 1909, 1 plate and 13 text
er Stevens, N. M., ‘‘Further Observations on Supernumerary Chromo-
Somes, and Sex Ratios in Diabrotica soror,’’ Biol. Bull., 22: 231-238, beet
1-13, 1912. * Strasburger, E., ‘¢Chromomenzahl,’’ Flora, 100:
222 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
It is impossible to say whether pollen grains capable
of functioning ever result from those divisions where the
chromosomes are irregularly distributed. The irregu-
larities in reduction do not produce supernumerary
pollen grains, such as have been described by Juel and
Strasburger for Hemerocallis, for in all tetrads mature
enough to show the separation of the pollen grains I have
always counted four. One might expect an increase in
number of pollen grains formed by one mother-cell,
judging from the grosser manifestations of this abnor-’
mal factor. Functioning pollen is formed in quantity
and no trouble at all is found in securing plenty of selfed
seed of the abnormal strain.
Reduction phenomena in the ovule of the abnormal
have so far been given only a superficial examination
and the observations are not complete enough to report.
Observations on the ripe capsules of selfed plants would
lead one to believe that here, as in the case of the pollen,
partial sterility is present, due to the abortive develop-
ment of the ovules, but the latter is only a supposition,
which further cytological study may or may not support.
Cytological examination of the anthers of the three
classes of plants obtained from the abnormal X normal
(304 X 402) was made. The conditions in the reduction
divisions of the normal and homozygous abnormal segre-
gates are identical with those present in the two grand-
parents. The heterozygote differs from the pure ab-
normal in degree only, having fewer sterile anthers and
other abnormalities. Otherwise what has been said of
the pure abnormal (300-309) applies also to the hetero-
zygote.
In connection with this cross, it is interesting to note
what bearing the nature of the reduction divisions in the
ovule (300-309) might have upon the F, ratio. The ab-
normal class, although within the probable error, is al-
ways deficient. This is true also in the fasciated peas
with which Mendel?” worked and in one race of peas hav-
a Loe. cit.
No. 556] DEVELOPMENT IN NICOTIANA 223
ing sterile anthers with which Bateson?* experimented.
While the number of plants has not been large in any of
these cases, one wonders why it is always the abnormal
(pure) class which is deficient. If the reduction phe-
nomena in the ovules of the abnormal Nicotiana agree
with the conditions present in the anthers, it seems not
unreasonable to believe that there may be a relation be-
tween the mortality of the gametes carrying the factor
for abnormalness and the deficiency in the ratio. In-
creased mortality of this class of gametes over the nor-
mal class would reduce the chances for combinations of
the abnormal gametes, and as a consequence the normal
and heterozygote combinations would be increased.
SUMMARY OF OBSERVATIONS
Concluding, one must bear in mind that the facts so
far obtained seem to warrant the belief that some agent
is at work on the internal structure as well as on the so-
called external, and is of such a nature as to produce ab-
normalities in cell structure as well as in cell complexes
or plant organs. The data, as a whole, raise a question
as to the significance of chromosomes in inheritance.
Two strains of Nicotiana tabacum have been investi-
gated, one being a sport from the other. The sport has
been shown to differ from the normal in the possession
of a unit character due to one Mendelian factor. When
it is crossed with the normal, there results in F, a simple
Mendelian ratio of 3:1 as regards normal and abnormal
characters. The heterozygote is, with a little practise,
distinguishable, making the ratio 1:2:1 with abnormal-
ness partially dominant. The F, generation has proved
these segregates to breed true. Absolutely clean normal
segregates appear in F, and breed true. The abnormal
character has been described in detail, and shown to
affect practically all the structural parts of the plant
individual, even to the germ cells. Both strains have
the same chromosome number, 48 and 24, as a definite
mode,
” Bateson, W., and others, Reports to the Evol. Com., II, p. 91, 1905.
224 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVIi
CHROMOSOMES IN RELATION TO MENDELIAN FACTORS AND
A Puystcat Basis or INHERITANCE
Suppose we maintain the factor for the abnormal con-
dition to be a particle of one chromosome. Gametes of
the abnormal strain all contain the factor for abnormal-
ness, as reciprocal crosses with the normal give the same
results. In a cross a pollen grain of the abnormal strain
unites with an egg of normal (402) parentage, and an
intermediate is produced in F,. The chromosome con-
taining the factor for abnormalness is partly neutralized
by pairing with a normal homologue. Gametes of two
kinds are formed in approximately equal numbers in F,,
those containing the factor for abnormalness and those
without it. But on a chromosome hypothesis, how are
these gametes formed? There are two reduction di-
visions and 48 chromosomes, 24 of abnormal parentage
and 24 of normal. According to current cytological in-
vestigation and interpretation, each chromosome sepa-
rates from its homologue in its entirety during the first
reduction division, so that, eventually, two kinds of
gametes are formed as regards chromosomes. The fac-
tor for abnormalness or fasciation is in one chromosome,
and chromosomes are believed to be in homologous pairs
—one maternal with one paternal. The chromosomes of a
homologous pair separate during the heterotypic ana-
phase, one going to each pole, it being contrary to current
interpretation to believe that both members of a pair may
go to the same pole. On this basis, according to the law
of chance, approximately half the nuclei at the end of the
heterotypic division will contain the chromosome carry-
ing the factor for abnormalness and from half it will be
absent.
Experimentally it has been shown that we have been
dealing with only one pair of unit characters and that no
complications are present. The various crosses have al-
ways given uniform results in F,, even between species,
and the fertile cross has given a close 1:2:1 ratio in Fə
Logically, then, one is led to believe that one out of the
No. 556] DEVELOPMENT IN NICOTIANA 225
24 chromosomes of abnormal parentage, and only one can
contain the factor for abnormalness and produce the ex-
perimental results. If more than one contained it, the
ratio in F, would be changed. For example, if it were
present in two chromosomes, the ratio (as suggested by
Emerson)?° must be 15:1 or in this particular case
where the heterozygote is distinguishable, 7:8:1. We
might postulate its presence in all 24 chromosomes and
believe, as Cannon*® did, that parental chromosomes sep-
arate as a phalanx in the F, reduction division, each group
going to one pole and thereby bringing about the forma-
tion of pure parental gametes. But the cytological in-
vestigations of Sutton, Rosenberg, Strasburger and
others have brought to light evidence which precludes
such a supposition. The experimental data from genetic
researches are also opposed to this hypothesis, if one at-
tempts to show a relation between the reduction division
and Mendelian segregation. On a chromosome hypoth-
esis, then, one must believe the factor for abnormalness
to be present in only one chromosome out of the 48 con-
cerned in the F, reduction phenomena, in order to be in
agreement with the experimental results. This being
the case, how is one to account for the abnormalities
which occur during the reduction divisions in the anthers
of the F, heterozygote? For they affect, not alone one
chromosome, but all the nuclear and cell material con-
cerned in the formation of the pollen grains. Can one
postulate the influence of one chromosome to be so great,
at times, as to bring destruction to its 23 associates of ab-
normal parentage, its 24 associates of normal parentage,
as well as all the other organized contents of the mother-
cell? Why, it may well be asked, if this destruction is the
result of the activity of one chromosome does not it take
place in the case of every anther and of every pollen
mother-cell? Why should it affect only two or three
* Emerson, R. A., ‘Genetic Correlation and Spurious Allelomorphism in
Maize,’’ 24th Ann. Rpt. Nebr. Agr. Exp. Sta., pp. 59-90, 1911.
* Cannon, W. A., “A Cytological Basis for the Mendelian Laws,” Bull.
Torr. Bot. Club, 29: 657-661, 1902.
226 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
anthers in a flower containing 8 or 10? Not because it is
absent from the other anthers, because the pollen from
these anthers transmits the character. It is not a ques-
tion of segregation then, but one of environment.
Evidently the gene is inactive or latent, for we know
there is something present which for convenience we call
a gene, and yet we can not see any of the visible signs of
its presence, such as we see in the affected anthers. On
a morphological conception it must be there; physiolog-
ically for the time being, so far as we can determine, it is
non-existent. The inactivity we may suppose is due to a
lack of a properly adjusted environment. This proper
adjustment is only true of a few anthers in the F, plants.
We believe this scarcity to be due to two kinds of latency
—inactivity of the gene as in the pure abnormal and inac-
tivity of the gene because of association with the cell ma-
terials that trace their lineage back to the sperm of the
normal father. But latency is a vague term. In ge-
netics, it is used to describe the period between the disap-
pearance of a character and its reappearance. By push-
ing this conception to its logical conclusion it is clear
that one can practically never prove the origin of a new
character. Fasciation, while new to Nicotiana, is phy-
logenetically an old character. The production of purple
fruits in Rosa would mean, phylogenetically, the reap-
pearance of a latent character, for purple fruits are com-
mon to the Amelanchiers and to a species of Pyrus.**
The characters of the whole plant kingdom would be
in a state of latency and patency, of inactivity and ac-
tivity. To determine whether a character were new OF
not would involve a canvass of that part of the plant
kingdom phylogenetically older than the family under in-
vestigation. Of course, we speak of segregation in
phylogenetical lines, but the term has a different mean-
ing in such cases. My F, normal segregates are pure
and will breed true for absence of abnormalness, I be-
lieve, for any number of generations unless a new muta-
* Pyrus Niedwetekyana,
No. 556] DEVELOPMENT IN NICOTIANA 227
tion occurs. These recurrent mutations, Johannsen says,
are rare in his experience, but they are admitted to occur
in almost any long-continued pedigree line, and if fasci-
ation should appear as a repeated mutation after 20 gen-
erations of plants involving 2,000,000 individuals had
been grown, is one to infer that the gene was present all
this time, but latent or inactive? Or is this a new gene
produced by the same condition that brought about the
original fasciation? Logically, if one defends the latency
conception, he must believe that the original gene for
fasciation was inactive in all these millions of plants,
which in our present stage of knowledge is a ridiculous
assumption, since the term is used to describe a somatic
appearance. Applied to genetic problems in general,
hopeless chaos would result. But on the supposition
that a portion of a chromosome is responsible for the
abnormality, it seems to me necessary to assume the
chromosome to be capable of becoming active or latent
without cause. For it seems probable that the anthers
are all alike from a constitutional standpoint. How else
can one account for the normal anthers and the abnormal
ones, the normal pollen mother-cells and those affected
by the abnormality?
The conception of latency is not necessary in the case
of complete or incomplete dominance in F, hybrids, for
in such cases there is evidence that a gene from one pa-
rent may be partially or completely inhibited in its ex-
pression by factors from the other parent, and this 1s
probably what happens when we bring a line of chromo-
somes and cell materials from the normal (402) plants
and associate them (by fertilization) with a line of cell
materials from the abnormal (300-309). -
While the phenomena of segregation described in the
preceding pages may be capable of interpretation on a
morphological basis, the gene for fasciation appears to
me to lie deeper in sporogenesis than chromosomes.
The abnormal character development appears most
easily interpreted from a physiological standpoint. In
228 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
F, there is no break in the continuity of its manifesta-
tions between sporophyte and gametophyte, even though
reduction and probably segregation have occurred. And
should we not expect to see such a break if segregation
by chromosomes took place in sporogenesis?
The evidence as a whole I think, warrants one in the
suggestion that chromosomes are characters of the zygote
and gametophyte, on the same footing in development
with other plant characters. It is more difficult to com-
prehend this conception of these bodies, because they ap-
pear as characters in the development of the cell, rather
than in the development of the larger unit, the individ-
ual organism. They are characters in the sense that they
disappear and reappear at a place and time in the life
history of the organism which we can predict. They can
be transferred from one race of organisms to another
provided fertile F, hybrids are possible. They are in-
fluenced in as definite a manner, by the underlying cause
represented by the term factor for abnormalness, as are
the zygotic expressions included in the word fasciation.
Concluding, I realize these speculations are largely
negative in character, but they are in accord with a stead-
ily growing skepticism among students of genetics as to
the importance of chromosomes in inheritance, and their
relation to segregating Mendelian characters. The im-
pression has been distinctly gained from a study of this
abnormal strain and its crosses with the normal that
chromosomes are not the omnipotent creators of destiny,
but characters on the same footing with other structures.
The same dynamic forces, whatever they are, are chang-
ing and modifying these chromosome characters in the
same capricious manner as those of a grosser nature.
One would be inclined to ascribe these changes to an
ultra-microscopic parasitic organism were it not for the
experimental evidence in F,, which precludes such a be-
lief.
My warmest thanks are due Dr. E. M. East for sugges-
tions and criticisms while engaged in this investigation.
July, 1912.
SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION
HEREDITY IN A PARTHENOGENETIC INSECT
(APHIS)?
STATEMENT OF PROBLEM
As is well known, Johanssen has found that in self-fertilizing
strains of beans selection within the strain—selection in the
‘* pure line ’’—does not change the mean of successive fraterni-
ties. If this conclusion holds generally we should expect it to
hold among parthenogenetic species also. Among asexually
reproducing animals Jennings (1909) finds that it is true for
Paramecium and Hanel (1907) for Hydra.
Shull (1910) has found that strains of Hydatina from New
York differ from a strain from Baltimore in the rate of produc-
tion of males, and Whitney (1912) has found a similar differ-
ence in strains. For Daphnia (Woltereck, 1910) the persistence
of the mode is less easily determined because of a high degree
of variability depending on conditions.
Insects seemed to offer a new field for Auch studies, one in
which we might expect external conditions to play a smaller
rôle, and because of the well-known parthenogenesis of Aphids
and their availability it was determined to test so far as it could
be done in a few weeks of a summer, the suitability of plant lice
for studies of this sort.
MATERIAL AND METHOD
After some experimenting it was decided to use Aphis rumicis,
an aphid that commonly infests the poppies and nasturtiums
about Cold Spring Harbor.
Potted poppies and nasturtiums were kept growing in the
laboratory in large aquarium jars (about $ meter high) covered
with cheese cloth. Each plant was carefully inspected to make
sure that there were no aphids upon it. Then one gravid female
was placed on each plant and its movements and reproduction
carefully watched. All young in these summer broods were
produced parthenogenetically.
*From The Biological Laboratory of the Brooklyn Institute of Arts and `
Sciences, Cold Spring Harbor, Long Island.
229
230
THE AMERICAN NATURALIST
[Vou. XLVII
& Mother Offspring
© ai
Z | Length Ratio 1 2 3
: Wings 12 13 14
aa 3+4 T eat Y pab a a a
1..137° 24° 1.541 Absent |42 30 1.40148 30 1.43/37. 25 1.48
9.32. 33 161| Absent [42 .29 1.45/45 26 1.73/46 30 1.53
45 32 i4445 209 15543 31 139
3.. — — — Sa 6. 1.50/88. 26 14637 2- 12
4. 32 21 1.52| Absent |37 25 1.4835 25 1.4037 26 1.42
39. 29.5 1.32189 29 1.34/41 30 1.87
5.. —. — — 4 27 15629 27 i444 20 L58
äi SE iJia 87 1.5230 20.5 153
5a.|35. 24 1:46 | Absent |29: -19 1.53/28 15126 17.5 1.49
s 33 23.5. 1.40/28.5 18.5 1.54
g a 1.22 | Present 133.8 22:5 1.4929 21 1.38/30 1 1.58
5c .|35> 26.5 1.32 |: Present |24. 15.5 :1.55/23:5 15 1.57/28 16.5 1.70
6../30 20 150 | Absent 39 24 1.63/37 . 25 14839 24 63
"184.5 24 1.4437 26 1.4232 22.5 1.42
3 = Mother Offspring
e Length Ratio 7 4
3 2 Wings 18 S 19 i
3 t : 3d 3d 4t ;
Oe oe 3+4 T ua Ratio| #4 ir Ratio| 34 $e Ratio
1 aT %4 1.54| Absent |41 27.5 1.4937.5 27- 1.39/38 22.5 1.69
2..137 23 1.61 | Absent |43 28.5 1.5144 32 1.38/44 1.
a po > — 35 %6 14333 3 14330 2 15
4..|32 21 1.52 | Absent 38 26 14638 29 13137 26 142
35 255 1.37185 24.5 1.43!
5.. — — — 40 27 1.48/39 25 1.6636 25 1.44
39 25 1:56
5a.|35 24 46 t237 18 1.5029.3 19.5 1.5030.5 20.5 1.49
5b. 133 27 1.22 Present 36 24 1.5028 21.5 1.3030 19 1.58
5c.|85 26.5 1.32) Present 26 165 1.5827 17 159
6../30 20 .50 | Absent. 31 22 1.41/36 - 27 1.33355 26 1.37
37-25 1.48 35.5 23 1.5435 23 152
No.556] SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION 231
Offspring
4 5 6
sey lọ Y Wings of These Host Plant
oO S o Buh aa a a eae ee
A A a 7o 16240 235 160 Present Shirley poppy
(grew poorly)
43 30 1.43/44 29 1.52/44 30 1.47 Present Opium poppy
44.5 33.5 1.383142 29 1.45 inged
s 94 1,65696 255 141194. 23 148 Absent Shirley poppy
(Wingless) :
42 27 1.56/36 28 1.29440 29 1.38 Absent Nasturtium
40.5 29.5 1.37/36 26.5 1.36/36 26 1.38| (Wingless) ,
45.5 28 16340 27 1.48 39 26 1.5 Absent Opium poppy
36. 25 1.44/85 26 1.35/36 22.5 1.60 (Wingless) :
=“ ©19 1433 230 160275 20 14 Absent Opium poppy
(Wingless) :
20 16 1.251381.5 20 1.58/32 23 1.39 Absent Opium poppy
34.5 21 1.64/33.5 20 1.68 25 16 1.56 Absent Opium poppy
7 2 15236 %4 1503 2 L _ Present Opium poppy
s5 = 232 15087 2% 1538 2 146 (Winged)
Offspring
10 11
sa 21 22 Wings of These Host Plant
Ji. = Ratio fog vg Ratio ompring
42 25 1.68 Present Shirley poppy
(grew poorly)
42.5 31 1.37/42.5 31 1.37 Presen Opium poppy
Absent Shirley poppy.
9 aila 80 “150 Absent Nasturtium
a. 3s sbi 28 1.46 Absent Opium poppy
w is í oa 52 ee Absent Opium poppy
32.3 215 1.5036 22 41.64 Absent Opium poppy
| Absent Opium poppy
35.5 22.5 1.5836 23.5 1.53 Present Opium poppy
36.5 22.5 1.6236 24 150
232 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
The characteristic whose inheritance it was finally decided to
study was the ratio of the third antennal joint to the fourth
antennal joint. This ratio offered the advantage of a fairly large
range, i. e., from 1.25 to 1.75; and the mode of a fraternity was
soon observed to vary from about 1.35 to 1.55.
The measurements were made upon the mother at the same
time with the offspring. The offspring were measured when it
was obvious that they were mature and soon to breed. The
insects were first etherized and the measurements were then
made with a micrometer eyepiece, with a magnification such that
the third antennal joint averaged about 32 units.
RESULTS
The following table gives the numerical data derived from the
measurements made:
The ratios that are derived from measurements of the off-
spring are grouped into classes, and the frequency of the classes
shown graphically in Figs. 1-7.
First, it appears that all aphids fall into two classes, winged
and wingless. While the winged mothers had a smaller antennal
ratio than the wingless mothers, the antennal ratio shows practi-
cally no difference in the winged and wingless offspring. Thus
10-winged offspring of a wingless mother give an average
antennal index of 1.54, and 5 wingless offspring of the same
mother give an average antennal index of 1.48. From a wingless
mother with antennal index of 1.46 were derived 13 wingless
offspring with an average index of 1.49, while from another
wingless mother with antennal index of 1.50 were derived 22
winged offspring with an antennal index of 1.49. We may com-
pare the antennal indices of the two lots of offspring whether
they happen to be winged or not.
The nature of the food plant may be, on the other hand, of
importance for the antennal index. Thus of two mothers with
practically the same antennal index, one was fed on opium and
the other on nasturtium. The progeny of the first finds its
mode at 1.50 to 1.59; of the second at 1.30-1.39. It was not
possible to determine from comparative studies whether there
is uniformly a reduction of the index in the offspring of nastur-
tium-fed mothers, or whether this result was due to the fact
that the nasturtium-fed mothers belonged to a special strain
with a low index. In our ignorance it is clearly permissible to
No.556] SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION 233
compare only offspring from similarly fed mothers. All data
considered below are from offspring of opium-fed mothers.
To decide whether or not we have ‘‘pure lines” in Aphis it
is necessary to breed two generations of offspring; it is better
goog 1.22.
Fie. 1.
5
Opium poppy g Tren 1. 61
Fig. 6.
Fig. 2. 6
= Opium
2 Mother, 1.50
Mother, 1.46.
Fig. 3.
5c
Mother, 1.32. Fic. 7.
Opium 4
' Nasturtium
Fig. 4. Mother, 1.52
5b
Opium a
to breed more. It is necessary to breed two lines through these
generations; it is better to breed three or more. The results so
far obtained are inadequate since they continue only one line
through two generations of offspring. The data obtained are as
follows:
A wingless mother, whose antennal index was not obtained,
was fed on opium poppy and produced 18 offspring. The dis-
tribution of the antennal ratios of these offspring is as given
im Fig. 1. The mode is at 1.50-1.59, the average is 1.53. From
this fraternity three individuals were now selected as ers
of the next. We may call them 5a, 5b and 5c (Figs. 4, 5, 6).
has the highest antennal ratio, 1.46. The mode of the progeny is 5
1.55 (1.50-1.59) and the average ratio is 1.49. 5c has the next
lowest ratio, 1.32. Her progeny also have the mode at 1.50-1.59.
The third mother (5b) has a ratio of 1.22. The progeny is
few in numbers and has two modes of which the major is at
1.50-1.59 like the two others; and the average is 1.47.
The foregoing series of facts may be tabulated as in Table A.
234 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVI
TABLE A
Offspring
Family Maternal Ratio j
Mode | Mean
5a 1.46 1.50-1.59 | 1.49
5c 1.32 1.50-1.59 1.61
5b 1.22 1.50-1.59 | 1.47 a
The table shows clearly that while the range in the maternal
ratio is .24, the range in the means is only .14 and that there
is no close relation between the order of the maternal ratios
and the order of the fraternal means. In all the fraternities
the mode stands in the 1.50-1.59 class.
CONCLUSIONS
In so far as this series goes, then, it speaks for the conclusion
that, in the parthenogenetic Aphis rumicis, the progeny does
not inherit the somatic idiosyncrasies of the parent but does
inherit from the underlying germ plasm common to all; and
hence progeny of somatically quite different sisters tend, on the
average, to be alike. The somatic differences in the partheno-
genetic line are not inherited.
James P. KELLY
BIBLIOGRAPHY
HANEL, ELISE. 1907. Vererbung bei ee Fortpflanzung von
a grisea. Jenaische Zeitschr., 43, pp. 321-372.
jaan H.8. 1909. gauges nig Variation in the Simplest Organisms.
Amer. Nat., XLIII, pp. 7.
SHULL, A. PRALIN. 1910. 8 Artificial Production of the Partheno-
genetic and Sexual Phases of the Life Cycle of Hydatina senta. AMER.
1
Wuirney, D. D. 1912. ‘‘Strains’’ in Hydatina senta. Biol. Bull., XXII,
. 205-218.
WOLTERECK, R. 1910. Weitere experimentelle Untersuchungen Über
Artveränderung, spezielle über das Wesen quantitativer rei
bei Daphniden. Biol. Centralbl., B. 30, p. 679-688
THE HIMALAYAN RABBIT CASE, WITH SOME CON-
SIDERATIONS ON MULTIPLE ALLELOMORPHS
Ir has been shown by Castle (’06, 09), Hurst (’06) and Pun-
nett (712) that the Himalayan pattern in rabbits behaves as a
simple recessive to self color, and as a simple dominant to albino.
Thus, as Punnett points out, we might suppose self to be the
double dominant, Himalayan a recessive in one factor, and al-
bino a double recessive. But, to use Punnett’s words:
No.556] SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION 235
The F, from self X albino should consequently contain Himalayans
as well as true albinos. But among the large number of animals reared
from such matings no Himalayans have hitherto been recorded, and for
the present the relations between these various forms remain obscure.
If we suppose that albino may be either the second single re-
cessive or the double recessive we avoid this difficulty, but are
then unable to explain why albino X Himalayan should not, at
least occasionally, produce selfs by recombination.
Now it seems to me that the facts of the case are fitted equally
well by either of two hypotheses. In the first place, we may con-
sider, as above, that Himalayan is a single recessive and albino a
double recessive—if we suppose the two factors concerned to be
completely linked. The gametic (not zyg gotic) constitution of —
the three types would then be represented thus, C being the color
producer and S the factor changing Himalayan to self.
Self — C8
Himalayan — Cs
Albino — cs
If C and S be completely linked no cS individual can be ob-
tained, and CS X cs would give no: Cs in F..
On the other hand, we may consider the factor for self as
allelomorphic to that for Himalayan pattern, and also to that for
albinism. Then the three pure types might be represented thus
(zygotic formule) :
Self — SS
Himalayan — HH
Albino —AA
S, H, and A being allelomorphie each to itself or to either of the
others, the crosses would result thus:
Sel S
Himalayan — HH
F.
i SH — self
SS
F, SH$+3 self
HH —1 Himalayan
Self — Sg
Albino — AA
F, SA — self
(Salo sat
SA se
F, | sA]
S
| AA —-1 albino
236 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
Himalayan — HH
Albino —AA
F, HA — Himalayan
HH
HA 3 Himalayan
HA
AA — 1 albino
An explanation similar to the second one above has been given
by de Meijere (’10) for Jacobson’s results with Papilio Memnon.
The evidence on this case is, however, very incomplete, and there
are complications due to sex. Either triple allelomorphs or
complete coupling would seem to cover the facts as we have them
at present. Shull (’11) has also used a system of three allelo-
morphs for a case in Lychnis dioica. I shall refer to this case
again.
It will be seen that triple allelomorphs may be substituted for
complete coupling as an explanation of any case where only
three of the four combinations possible on the complete coupling
scheme are known. But if we have the double dominant, both
single recessives, and the double recessive, then triple allelo-
morphism will no longer work. Thus, if a race of albino rabbits
is discovered which produces self when mated to Himalayan,
complete linkage will be the most likely explanation of the case.
There are certain other cases which fulfil the above require-
ments. Emerson (711) has reported a case in beans (green
leaves—green pods, green leaves—yellow pods, and yellow
leaves—yellow pods are the three races concerned). The similar
eases of complete linkage reported for corn by East and by
Emerson are probably more easily explainable by linkage than
by multiple allelomorphs, as, at least in some eases, all four pos-
sible races are found. Baur (712) has a case in Aquilegia,
where three types of leaves are found—green, variegated (green
and yellowish green), and yellowish green. These behave toward
each other in a manner exactly similar to that of the self, Hima-
layan and albino rabbits. Finally, Morgan (’12) has reported
a case in Drosophila ampelophila. Red eye is a dominant to
eosin and to white, and eosin is also a dominant to white. No
two types ever give the third when crossed, either in F, or in F»
The explanation which has been given in beans, columbines and
flies has been that of two allelomorphie pairs, completely linked
to each other.
No.556] SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION 237
The question as to which of these views is the more probable
is closely bound up with the presence and absence hypothesis.
On a strict application of this idea there is of course no possibil-
ity of more than two members of any given allelomorphie group.
The presence and absence hypothesis as a universal principle
has been criticized by Morgan (’13) in a recent paper, on what
seem to me very strong grounds. It seems very unlikely that
protoplasm (chromatin?) is such a simple substance that the
only possible change in a given unit (molecule?) involves the
loss of that unit. On the other hand, if a slight change takes
place in a chemically complex gene, is it necessary to suppose
that its allelomorphic relations must be upset? That very slight
changes in the constitution of a gene might easily affect its be-
havior in ontogeny will, I think, be readily granted.
It is to be noted that in all the cases cited above the supposed
three allelomorphs have similar ontogenetic effects. Thus the
three in rabbits, in Aquilegia, and in Papilio all affect the distri-
bution of pigment (and, in Papilio, also the shape of the wings),
those in Lychnis the sex, those in beans the production of the
same color in different organs, and those in Drosophila the pro-
duction of different colors in the same organ. This may perhaps
seem to be in favor of the view that we have here different modi-
fications of the same gene, rather than two distinct genes and
their absences.
The history of the red-white-eosin group of eye colors in
Drosophila is interesting when considered from the viewpoint of
the presence and absence hypothesis. The first white-eyed fly
arose as a mutant in red stock. On presence and absence it must
have been caused by the simultaneous loss of two factors, which
were called C and O by Morgan. Then, in white-eyed stock there
appeared an eosin-eyed fly. Here the factor called O, just lost,
must have been put back again. Finally, in one of my own cul-
tures, eosin has given rise to white by mutation. In both these
latter cases the flies had miniature wings, and in the white-to-
eosin case they also had black body color. These characters give
a cheek on the results, and make it extremely unlikely that any
contamination had occurred. Further evidence to this effect is
1 After this paper went to press it was pointed out to me by Mr. H. J.
Muller that there is another possible explanation of this case, which does not
involve mutation from eosin to white. This interpretation can not be
entered into until certain phenomena observed by Mr. C. B. e have
been more fully investigated.
238 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
given, in the eosin-to-white case, by the fact that the mutant fly
was one of 127 obtained from a single pair, all of her brothers
and sisters being of the expected classes (half of the females
heterozygous for white), as were likewise the flies from six sister
pairs.”
The presence and absence hypothesis involving a dropping
out of whole genes or addition of entirely new ones does not offer
as simple an explanation of this case as does the conception that
we have here a relatively unstable gene, which does not drop out
entirely, but undergoes various changes, that from white to eosin
being reversible.
It should be noted that Shull (’11) has reported a case of
what he calls reversible mutation in the sex-determining factor
in Lychnis, which is very similar to the above red-eosin-white
ease. He has adopted a system of triple allelomorphs to explain
it, though admitting that complete linkage will also cover the
facts. He has also considered the bearing of the case upon the
presence and absence hypothesis and upon the nature of muta-
tion, reaching conclusions somewhat similar to those given above.
A. H. STURTEVANT
COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY,
January, 1913
LITERATURE CITED
Baur, E. 1912. Vererbungs- und Bastardierungsversuche mit ne
L SPERA Zts. ind. san -Vererb.-Lehre, 6, p.
Castle, W. E. 1906. dity of Coa PEN ters in BASEE and
. pu pen
8.
—— (and others). 1909. Studies of a in Rabbits. Carnegie
Inst. Wash. publ. 114
m R. A. 1911. Genetie Correlation and Spurious Allelomorphism
i n Maize. Ann. Rept. Nebr. Agr. Sta., 24, p.
Harst, C. C. 1906. Mendelian Characters in Plants and Animals. Rep.
Conf. Gen., Roy. Hort. Soc. London, p. 114
de Meijere, J. a H. 1910. Uber Jacobsons Ziichtangavereushe beziiglich
des Polymorphismus von Papilio Memnon L. 9, und über die Vererbung
sekundarer Geschlechtsmerkmale. zti. ind. Abst.-Vererb.-Lehre, 3.
p. 161.
Te s H. 1912. Further Experiments with Mutations in Eye Color
ophila. Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 15, p. 323.
4 01 Factors and Unit Characters in Mendelian Heredity. AM.
NAT., 47, p. 5.
Punnett, Je c. 1912. Inheritance of Coat-color in Rabbits. Jour. Genet.,
2; p. 221.
2 There has been at least one case where eosin has seemed to arise as @
mutant in red stock, but as there was no other character to serve as a check
against contamination, the case does not carry very great weight.
No.556] SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION 239
Shull, G. H. 1911. Reversible Sex-mutants in Lychnis dioica. Bot. Gaz.,
9.
MENDELISM AND INTERSPECIFIC HYBRIDS
THE complications of modern Mendelism have greatly in-
creased the difficulty of discussing the practical applications of
heredity. The word Mendelism itself has two essentially different
meanings that are being used indiscriminately. A particular
form of alternative inheritance is called Mendelism and the same
name is applied to a general theory of heredity. It is true that
the Mendelian theory was suggested by the Mendelian form of
inheritance, but the facts are also capable of other interpreta-
tions. Many of the proposed applications of Mendelism to breed-
ing and eugenics are in reality only inferences from the theory
and are not in real accord with the facts on which they are sup-
posed to be based.
An example of such a discrepancy may be found in the AMERI-
CAN Naturauist for July, 1912, in a paper entitled: ‘‘ Evidence
of Alternative Inheritance in the F, Generation from Crosses of
Bos indicus on Bos taurus.” Though readers are evidently ex-
pected to believe that the hybrids are showing a typical Men-.
delian inheritance of the contrasted parental characters, the facts
stated in the paper show that the behavior of the hybrids is not
in accord with the Mendelian theory of heredity. Alternative in-
heritance is manifested in these bovine hybrids, but it is not the
Mendelian form of alternative inheritance, with the contrasted
parental characters behaving as independent units combined by
the laws of chance. Instead of showing a Mendelian freedom of
combination of the contrasted characters, these hybrids afford a
much better illustration of a different principle of heredity, the
coherence of characters derived from the same parental stock.
As the paper by Dr. Nabours seems to represent the only at-
tempt that has been made to give a scientific account of a unique
series of hybrids, it would be very undesirable to have the general
conclusion regarding the application of Mendelism accepted
without challenge. In addition to the scientific questions in-
volved, the importance of finding the best way of securing a full
utilization of the tick-resistant Brahma cattle in Texas will ap-
peal to all who have had the pleasure of seeing Mr. Borden ’s im-
ported animals and their hybrid offspring. But practical recom-
mendations are hardly in order until the facts are better under-
240 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou XLVI
stood. To view these hybrids as a typical case of Mendelism is
to overlook some of the distinctions which need to be recognized
before correct applications can be expected.
ALTERNATIVE INHERITANCE
It seems to be taken for granted by Dr. Nabours, as by many
other recent writers, that all forms of alternative inheritance
represent the so-called Mendelian principle of heredity, that is,
the alternative transmission of unit-characters in pure germ-
cells. In reality the facts of alternative inheritance extend far
beyond the field of Mendelism into regions where the Mendelian
conception of alternative transmission can not be applied.’
The old assumption regarding hybrids and mixed races was
that they represented intermediate combinations or averages be-
tween the contrasted characters of the parental stocks. A gen-
eration ago belief in ‘‘the swamping effects of intercrossing’’ was
even more general among biologists than acceptance of Mendel-
ism is now. But we have learned that the ‘‘swamping effects’’
were largely imaginary. The scientific world has its history of
easily forgotten fads, no less than the world of politics or
fashion.
The usual result of crossing is not the formation of an inter-
mediate average, but the reappearance of the parental characters
in the later generations of the hybrids, if not in the first. Recog-
nition of the principle of alternative inheritance is having a
revolutionary effect upon the science of heredity. The facts of
Mendelism are of special interest because they represent extreme
cases of alternative inheritance, but the interest is in no way de-
pendent upon the Mendelian theory of heredity. Indeed, the
theory often interferes with appreciation of the facts.
MENDELISM A THEORY OF ALTERNATIVE TRANSMISSION
Mendelism, as a theory of heredity, is an assumption that alter-
native inheritance is due to alternative transmission of independ-
ent particles or ‘‘units,’’ which are supposed to represent the
characters in the protoplasm at the time when the germ-cells are
formed. If sufficient magnification could be applied, so that the
structure of the protoplasm in the germ-cells could be fully
1 Cook, O. F., ‘Dimorphie Leaves of Cotton and Allied Plants in Relation
to Heredity,’’ Bulletin 221, Bureau of Plant Industry, U. S. Department
of Agriculture, pp. 36-50.
No.556] SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION 241
shown, believers in the Mendelian theory would expect to find
separate ‘‘gens’’ or discrete particles of some sort to represent
the various characters of the adult animals or plants. The gens
that represent the characters of different parents are supposed to
remain entirely distinct and to find their ways into different
germ-cells. Each germ-cell of a hybrid is supposed to receive
only a single set of these hypothetical character-units or gens,
representing the contrasted characters of the parents, and the
sets are supposed to be made up by chance assortment. Thus the
different germ-cells produced by a hybrid are supposed to repre-
sent all the combinations of the contrasted parental characters
that are theoretically possible under the laws of chance.
The theory of Mendelism has greatly stimulated the study of
cytology, in the hope of finding the supposed character-germs as
actual, visible particles in the protoplasm. Some writers have
argued that the chromosomes or chromomeres represent the char-
acters, or at least the contrasted Mendelian characters, and have
attempted to trace a definite relation between the behavior of
the chromosomes and the inheritance of the characters. Other
writers do not indulge in such speculations, but believe in alter-
native transmission for mathematical reasons. Typical cases of
Mendelism are relied upon as affording sufficient proof of the
theory of alternative transmission. The Mendelian theory ac-
cords with the numerical facts of Mendelism, but this is not a
sufficient proof of its correctness, for it is not the only interpre-
tation that the facts will admit. Elaborate Mendelian computa-
tions create in the casual reader an impression of mathematical
certainty, but the same computations could be made under other
theories of alternative inheritance.
ALTERNATIVE INHERITANCE AND NORMAL DIVERSITY
The facts of alternative inheritance are not at all confined to
cases where the characters show the exact numerical proportions
typical of Mendelism. Alternative inheritance is a general law
that applies even in the vast and highly diversified groups of
interbreeding individuals that constitute natural species. The
typical Mendelian cases usually appear as results of previous
artificial breeding of pure strains.”
The normal diversity (heterism) everywhere manifested among
* Cook, O. F., ‘‘Pure Strains as Artifacts of Breeding,’’ THE AMERICAN
NATURALIST, 43: 241, April, 1909.
242 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
the members of natural species is a result of alternative inherit-
ance of contrasted parental characters, no less than the typical
eases of Mendelism. If inheritance were not alternative, heter-
ism would not be maintained. Each species or separate group
of interbreeding individuals would gradually decline into a gen-
eral uniform average. Under conditions of normal interbreed-
ing among the representatives of different lines of descent there
is no such tendency to uniformity. The offspring of the same
parents differ normally among themselves in the same ways that
the parents and ancestors have differed. Though each individ-
ual can bring into expression only one set of differences, other
ancestral characters are likely to reappear in later generations.
It is only by special methods of breeding in single or narrow
lines of descent that conditions of uniform heredity can be es-
tablished.
ALTERNATIVE EXPRESSION INSTEAD OF ALTERNATIVE TRANS-
MISSION
That characters are transmitted without being brought into
expression is one of the best known facts of heredity, for which
the theory of Mendelism makes no adequate provision. The idea
of alternative expression of characters accommodates the numer-
ical data of Mendelism as well as the idea of alternative trans-
mission, and is in far better accord with other facts of variation.
Diversity in natural species, and reversions that arise in select
varieties and in hybrid stocks, afford adequate evidence for hold-
ing that alternative inheritance is due, not to alternative trans-
mission of characters, but to alternative expression. When the
facts of alternative expression are taken into account the theory
of alternative transmission becomes unnecessary.’
COHERENCE OF CHARACTERS IN INTERSPECIFIC HYBRIDS
The contrasted characters of interspecific hybrids do not be-
have as independent Mendelian units, but tend to remain more
or less united with others derived from the same parental stock.
This coherence of expression often interferes with the formation
of the combinations of characters according to the Mendelian
theory of independent segregation of discrete units.*
3 Cook, O. F., ‘Transmission Inheritance Distinct from Expression In-
here ” Science, N. S., 25: 911, 1907.
* Examples of ohai of characters in cotton hybrids have been de-
No.556] SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION 243
Mendelian reactions are likely to be obtained when defective
mutations, such as cluster cottons or hornless breeds of cattle, are
crossed with normal varieties, but not when normal representa-
tives of two species are crossed, like the Upland and Egyptian
cotton or the cow and the zebu. Though there can be no ques-
tion of the purity of the parental stocks with reference to many
contrasted characters, interspecific hybrids seldom show the
typical Mendelian behavior.
Non-MENDELIAN BEHAVIOR OF THE BOVINE HYBRIDS
The facts stated by Dr. Nabours regarding the bovine hybrids
do not show that the behavior of the characters is essentially
Mendelian. Even if the parental breeds were segregated in the
Same proportions as in simple Mendelian hybrids, the result
would still be essentially non-Mendelian, for the parental types
differ by many sharply contrasted characters. Such a segrega-
tion of ‘‘pure Brahma and pure Durham’’ would mean that
there had been a complete coherence of all of the characters of
the two parental stocks, instead of a Mendelian segregation and
recombination of independent units. The actual facts appear to
lie somewhere between complete coherence and complete segre-
gation.
If the Mendelian conceptions of heredity applied to these
bovine hybrids, the segregation of ‘‘pure Brahma and pure
Durham,’’ instead of appearing to be the rule, would occur only
in extremely rare cases, because of the numerous differences of
the parental types. Indeed, my own impression on this point is
somewhat more Mendelian than the account given by Dr. Na-
bours. Though it was noticed that several individuals of the
second generation were distinctly more Brahma-like and more
Durham-like than any of the first generation, there were only
two or three that suggested the idea of complete segregation of
the parental types. The fact that impressed me was not that so
much segregation of the contrasted parental characters had taken
place in the second generation, but so little. The various colors
and textures of hair and skin, the horns, humps and dewlaps
were generally brought into coordinated, harmonious expression,
scribed in several publications of the Bureau of Plant Industry, U. S.
Department of Agriculture. Bull. 147, ‘‘ Suppressed and Intensified Char-
acters in Cotton Hybrids’’; Bull. 156, ‘A Study of Diversity in Egyptian
Cotton,’’ and Cir. 66, Basecaur. Selection on the Farm by the Characters of
the Stalks, Lean and Bolls.’
244 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou.XLVII
instead of behaving as separate ‘‘units’’ combined by indiscrim-
inate alternative transmission. Even the more complete rever-
sions to the parental types may be considered as results of non-
Mendelian coherence of characters in expression, rather than as
examples of Mendelian segregation and recombination of inde-
pendent ‘‘units.’’®
COMPARISON OF BOVINE HYBRIDS WITH COTTON HYBRIDS
The practical question to be determined is whether the Dur-
ham-like and Brahma-like individuals of the second and later
generations are equal to the original parental varieties, and
whether the intermediate individuals maintain the average of the
first generation. In the second generation of interspecific cotton
hybrids it is usual to find many degenerate plants with an ob-
vious resemblance to one or the other of the parental stocks,
though usually abnormal and inferior. But among the cattle the
second generation hybrids seemed much less different from the
first generation, both in constitution and in external features.
No general tendency to inferiority in the second generation, as
_ compared with the first, either in vigor or in resistance to ticks,
had been detected by Mr. Borden. But the experiments have
not continued long enough to afford adequate evidence on this
point.
If the analogy of cotton should be found to apply with the
bovine hybrids the Brahma-like and Durham-like animals that
appear in the second and later generations will not prove to be
equal to the Brahmas and Durhams that have not been hybrid-
ized, nor will the intermediate individuals show as high an aver-
age as the first generation. One of the usual results of crossing,
even among varieties of the same species, is to destroy the ef-
fects of previous selection in establishing a uniform expression
of the characters of the parent varieties. The fact that many of
the second generation of Brahma hybrids are magnificent ani-
mals does not prove that equally superior hybrid varieties can
be established. To increase the pure stock of Brahma cattle, and
thus increase the possibilities of producing first generation hy-
*In a more recent paper Dr. Nabours has recognized the divergence from
typical Mendelism, in the following statement: ‘‘As a matter of fact, ob-
servations made this summer and to be described later, indicate that the
segregation is not so simple as it at first appeared to be.’’ See, ‘‘Possi-
bilities of a New Breed of Cattle for the South’’, in American Breeders
Magazine, 4: 45, March, 1913.
No. 556] SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION 245
brids, may be more important thar the breeding of hybrid va-
rieties. At least this is the suggesiion to be drawn from the fail-
ure of many attempts to develop superior useful varieties of cot-
ton and other seed-propagated plants from interspecific hybrids.
As a barrier to a permanent union of two species degeneration
in the second or later generations of a hybrid stock may be as
effective as sterility in the first generation. It may prove very
fortunate that Mr. Borden has imported Brahma cows as well as
bulls, for this may make it possible to perpetuate the Indian
breeds in Texas.
A tendency to deterioration in the later generations of hy-
brids is likely to be masked as long as hybrids are crossed back
on one of the parental stocks, instead of being bred with each
other. This is because even dilute hybrids share some of the
stimulation effect shown in the first generation. But these ques-
tions of vigor and fertility, though of fundamental importance
in practical breeding, lie outside of the range of the Mendelian
theory. Vigor and fertility are phenomena of expression in the
first generation, whereas the theory of Mendelism relates to the
transmission of characters to the second and later generations.
Mendelism has served a useful purpose in opening the way to a
better understanding of the various forms of alternative inherit-
ance, but the overshadowing Mendelian theory of heredity as a
process of alternative transmission of character-unit particles
needs to be cleared away.
This theory that alternative inheritance is due to alternative
transmission does not lead to more correct ideas of the nature of
heredity or to better methods of breeding. Instead of providing
us with a simple method of making any desired combination of
characters of different species, as writers on Mendelism have led
the publie to believe, the facts of alternative inheritance indi-
cate that it is very difficult, if not altogether impossible, to se-
cure permanent combinations of characters of different species.
In plants that can be propagated from cuttings, hybrid combi-
nations can be maintained, but this affords no assurance regard-
ing types that are limited to sexual reproduction.
O. F. Cook
BUREAU or PLANT INDUSTRY,
U. S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE,
December 27, 1912
246 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
ORDOVICIAN (?) FISH REMAINS IN COLORADO
Durine the past year Mr. P. G. Worcester, of the Colorado
Geological Survey, has been investigating certain strata near
Ohio City, Colorado, supposed to be of Ordovician age. The
particular horizon under discussion contains Receptaculites
owent Hall (southeast of Fairview Mt.), Halysites catenulatus
(L.) (basin east of north end of Fossil Ridge), Platystro-
phia (?) sp. (Fossil Ridge), and Heliolites (?) sp. with Haly-
sites catenulatus at head of Alder Creek, west of Fossil Ridge.
The Heliolites (?) is the same as that in the Cañon City Ordovi-
cian. These fossils were identified by Professor J. Henderson,
and so far as it is possible to determine from them, the rocks
should certainly be Ordovician. The first Devonian fossils were
found about 100 feet above this horizon.
However, closely associated with the invertebrates cited, and
certainly of the same age, are rather numerous fragmentary
remains of fishes. These may be briefly described as follows:
1. A fragment of a plate exhibiting fine grooves with deep
pits; resembling, so far as it goes, the plate of Coccosteus dis-
jectus from the Old Red Sandstone, figured by A. S. Woodward,
Cat. Fossil Fishes Brit. Mus., Part II, pl. VIII, fig. 1. The
structure is also nearly identical with that of Astraspis deside-
rata, from the Ordovician of Cafion City, as figured by Walcott,
Bull. Geol. Soc. Amer., Vol. 3 (1891), pl. 3, f. 7. Some of the
other figures of Astraspis might well belong to Coccostean fishes.
2. A large fragment, having a diameter of over 30 mm., is
covered with irregular obtuse vermiform ridges, and is saaatly
like the appieaaed plate of Rhizodus ornatus (Woodward, t.
c., pl. xii, f. 5). so far as the sculpture goes. This particular
spits is lower Carboniferous, but Rhizodontid fishes also occur
in the Devonian.
3. Numerous fragments of striated spines, some short, conical
and straight; others more slender and curved. These appear to
exactly correspond, so far as they go, with the spines of Dipla-
canthus, from the lower Old Red Sandstone. One of the sup-
posedly Coccosteoid plates, 5 mm. thick, with the surface finely
striate, with punctate more or less branching striæ or grooves,
occurs in the same piece of rock as a supposed Diplacanthus
spine, the two almost touching.
According to the available evidence, we seem therefore to
No. 556] SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION 247
$
have three families of fishes represented: (1) Coccosteidæ; (2)
Rhizodontidæ; (3) Diplacanthidæ. The genera and species can
not be precisely determined.
These fish remains, taken by themselves, would certainly be
regarded as Devonian. Walcott’s Ordovician species from
Cañon City were said by Professor James Hall to have such a
Devonian facies that he would certainly have referred them to
the Devonian, but for the accompanying invertebrate fauna.
In general, when there is a conflict between the evidence
from vertebrate and invertebrate fossils, the vertebrates must
be allowed the most weight; but it is evident that the numerous
and varied Devonian fishes had ancestors, so it is to be expected
that types more or less like those of the Devonian will be found
in older rocks. I understand from Mr. Worcester that there
is no reason to believe that the Silurian is represented in the
locality.
Schuchert (‘‘Paleogeography of North America’’) remarks
that in the Ordovicie or Ordovician, during the retreat of the sea,
The first evidence of those peculiar heavily armored fishes belonging
to the ostracoderms appears in cleanly washed beach sands and less
abundantly in dolomites at three widely separated places in Colorado
and Wyoming. They are now all fragmentary and seem to have been
washed into the sea by the rivers. From this can it be inferred that
during some earlier inundation the marine ancestors of these fishes were
retained upon the-land in relict seas, and under the stress of evanescent
waters became modified into the armored double-breathing animals that
gave rise later to the true fishes? Such being the interpretation, the
marine fishes must then have been derived from land [freshwater]
fishes, as suggested by Chamberlin and Salisbury.
The two localities in addition to the famous one at Cafion City
are (Dr. Eastman in litt.) in the Big Horn Mts., and in the
Black Hills uplift, in a bed lying above the Deadwood Forma-
tion, Both were discovered by Mr. N. H. Darton. These all
agree in the character of their fish remains.
T. D. A. CocKERELL
UNIvErsiry oF COLORADO,
December 14
NOTES AND LITERATURE
SOME RECENT ADVANCES IN VERTEBRATE
PALEONTOLOGY. II.
Waldemar Lindgren in a discussion of ‘‘The Tertiary Gravels
of the Sierra Nevada of California, ’”™! gives (p. 51) a brief review
of the history of fossil mammals of the auriferous gravels of Cali-
fornia. In this connection the author has touched on the age of the
famous ‘‘ Calaveras skull,’’ which some have thought indicated a
Tertiary age for man in California. The skull has in the past
provoked much discussion and it is interesting to have new light
brought forward. Mr. Lindgren, through his associate, Mr. J.
M. Boutwell, interviewed some of the older residents of the re-
gion in which the ‘‘ Calaveras skull’? was found. One resident
remembered the details of the ‘‘find’’ and stated to Mr. Boutwell
that the mine in which the skull was found had been ‘‘salted’’
with the subsequently famous ‘‘Calaveras skull’’ as a practical
joke by one of the neighborhood humorists. While this is not of
very definite evidence for the non-Tertiary age of the ‘‘ Calaveras
skull’’ yet it fully sustains the important researches of Sinclair
and Holmes, who could find no good evidence for the skull being
other than that of the modern Indian.
The Kansas University Science Bulletin issued during the past
summer contains three articles on fossil vertebrates. A new
species of Eryops (E. willistoni) and the history of the develop-
ment of our knowledge of the temnospondylous Amphibia is the
subject-matter of one of the papers. The earliest known temno-,
spondyle was described by Agassiz as a fish in 1777. The amphib-
ian nature of the fossil was not noted until 1847 when it was cor-
rectly defined by Goldfuss and later by Jaeger. A list of 58
species is given, nearly or quite all of which belong with the
Temnospondylia. The order Temnospondylia and the family
Eryopide are defined and the geological range and geographical
distribution given. The new temnospondyle (Eryops willistont)
is from the reputed Permian of Oklahoma. The species is quite
distinct and the characters are shown in six plates of drawings of
the skeletal remains.
An armored Dinosaur (Stegopelta landerensis Williston) is
£ Prof. Paper 73, U. S. Geol. Surv.
248
No. 556] NOTES AND LITERATURE 249
described in another paper” and illustrated in five plates. The
material is in the University of Chicago. The form is one of the
later, peculiar, armored, bizarre, stegosaurian dinosaurs allied to
Polacanthus of England, Stereocephalus of Canada, Hierosaurus
of Kansas Niobrara Cretaceous, Ankylosaurus of Montana and
other widely distributed genera of armored dinosaurs. The dino-
saur was found in a marine deposit associated with plesiosaur re-
mains. A short sketch of the horizon, the Hailey shales of the
Wyoming Cretaceous, is given.
The soft parts of Cretaceous fishes are described and figured in
the other paper,’* and a new herring from the Cretaceous near
Waco, Texas, is described as Thrissopater intestinalis, so called
on account of the preservation of the intestines. The form is
allied to T. magnus of the English Cretaceous. Another form of
fish, identified provisionally as Empo nepaholica Cope, is repre-
sented by the cast of the stomach, a portion of the intestine and
a pectoral fin with a few scales.
Dr. S. W. Williston has reviewed the question of the homology
of the wing finger of Pterodactyls** and has given a new restora-
tion of a pterodactyl as it probably appeared in life. The
restoration is based on Dr. Williston’s previous restoration of the
skeleton of Nyctosawrus gracilis Marsh published in Eastman’s
translation of Zittel’s ‘‘Paleontology’’ (II, 255).
The question which has interested anatomists for nearly a cen-
tury is whether the wing finger of the pterodactyls is the fourth
or fifth. There have been many arguments for each determina-
tion. Cuvier was the first who correctly interpreted the homol-
ogy of the wing finger, basing his determination on the phalan-
geal formula of other reptiles. Plieninger has recently raised the
question as to whether the interpretation of the phalangeal form-
ula, 2, 3, 4, 5, 3 for the hand and 2, 3, 4, 5, 4 for the foot, is the
primitive one for the Reptilia. Dr. Williston answers this ques-
tion conclusively in the affirmative and quotes as evidence newly
acquired facts from the Permian vertebrates of Texas and New
Mexico. To substantiate his claim he figures the entire arm of
three genera of Permian reptiles, Limnoscelis, Ophiacodon and
Varanosaurus. In all of these genera, known from nearly per-
fect material, the phalangeal formula is as given above.
The author gives further notes on the function of the pteroid
“Vol. V, No. 14.
* Vol. V, No. 15.
* Journ. Geol., XIX, 696-705, 4 figs.
250 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVI
bone, which has been interpreted as a vestige of the first finger.
He considers it to be simply an ossified tendon supporting the
patagial membrane running from the arm to the neck. He bases
this conclusion on the relations of this structure in the well pre-
served skeleton of Nyctosaurus in the Field Museum fully de-
scribed some few years ago by Dr. Williston.
In view of these facts there seems no longer to be any question
that the wing finger of the pterodactyls is the fourth. The re-
duction of the phalanges of the wing finger from the primitive
number of 5 to 4 is accounted for on the assumption that the claw
of the finger has been lost as has the same structure in the bats.
Further evidence is brought forth in the nature of the carpus to
sustain the homology of the wing finger of the pterodactyls with
the fourth digit of other reptiles.
The Annals of the Queensland Museum” contains two articles
on fossil vertebrates by C. W. de Wis, former director of the
museum. One of the papers describes a new species of bird,
Paleolestes gorei, based on a single phalange. The specimen is
carefully described, but the geological position is not given, the
comparisons of the new form with other species of the same kind
are not attempted so that one wonders just why the paper was
published, since it really throws no new light on the subject ex-
cepting perhaps to extreme ornithological experts.
The same author in a few lines describes a new cestraciont fish
from a single imperfect tooth. The form is insufficiently defined
and no comparisons are given.
A new member of the theropodous Dinosauria has been de-
seribed by Mignon Talbot’? from remains discovered in an ‘‘er-
ratic bowlder’’ of Connecticut Valley Triassic sandstone, which
according to Talbot was carried two or three miles from its orig-
inal source by the glacier. The stone contains the larger part of
the skeleton of a small dinosaur of the carnivorous type, a mem-
ber, undoubtedly, of those reptiles which made the so-called
‘‘bird-tracks’’ in the Connecticut Valley sandstone, so admirably
described by Hiteheock, Lull and others. The find is a very un-
usual and exceedingly interesting one, since Triassic dinosaurs
are not at all abundant. The animal when alive could not have
been much larger than an ordinary-sized chicken, thus serving to
restrain the common conception of dinosaur sizes.
* Brisbane, Australia, No. 10, November, 1911.
1° Amer. Journ. Science, June, 1911
No. 556] NOTES AND LITERATURE 251
Portions of the hind limb, arm, skull, ribs, ventral scutelle or
abdominal ribs and portions of about thirty vertebre are briefly
described. The animal is compared with Compsognathus, to
which it is closely allied and the new generic and specific terms,
Podokesaurus holyokensis, are proposed. The specimen has been
sent to Yale University Museum, where it will be prepared and
further described by Dr. Lull.
Osborn * has given a discussion of the ‘‘Crania of T'yranno-
saurus and Allosaurus,’’ illustrated with many beautiful figures,
photographs and drawings. The discussion of the osteology of
the skulls is based on the most recent nomenclature of the cranial
elements and the various specimens are figured from many points
of view, so that the reader gets an adequate notion of the appear-
ance of the skulls of these remarkable dinosaurs. The figures
(Plates III and IV) of the brain cavity, which is figured from
the dorsal side in Fig. 17, will be of great interest to the general
zoologist.
Comparison of the intracranial cavity of Tyrannosaurus with the mid-
section of the skull of Sphenodon and brain in situ as figured by Dendy
shows that the intracranial eravity in Tyrannosaurus corresponds with
the outer surface and foldings of the dura mater and is thus merely a
east of the outer envelope of the brain, which gives us little idea either
of the form or size of the brain itself. . . . The cast of Tyrannosaurus
gives us a means of measuring the size of the dura mater envelope. It
displaces 530 cubic centimeters of water. If the brain proper bore the
same proportion to the dura mater envelope as that of Sphenodon, the
bulk of the brain of Tyrannosaurus may be estimated at 250 cubice cen-
timeters.
This sized brain in a skull 50 inches in length would not indi-
cate a high degree of intelligence.
Further on in Part II of the same memoir the same author dis-
cusses ‘‘Integument of the Iguanodont Dinosaur Trachodon.”
based on a marvelously complete ‘‘mummy’’ discovered in the
Cretaceous of Converse County, Wyoming. The ‘‘mummy”’ and
the impressions of the skin are figured in several excellent halftone
plates, with explanatory line drawings. Osborn says of the skin:
Properly speaking the skin is not squamate, or imbricating, as in the
lizards, but is rather tubereulate. There is no evidence of a squamous
overlapping, or of an imbrieating arrangement of the scales anywhere.
Although this bipedal dinosaur when standing erect attained a
" Memoirs of the American Museum, N. S., Vol. I, pt. 1, 1912.
252 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
height of 14 feet the individual tubercles are of very small
size, never attaining a greater diameter than 5 millimeters. The
paper closes with a reconstruction of Trachodon mirabile Cope
in two attitudes, bipedal and quadrupedal and a discussion of
a ‘‘Theory of Color Pattern’’ and ‘‘ Habits of the Trachodonts.”’
In regard to Trachodon annectans Osborn says:
If the animals had spent any considerable part of their lives on dry land,
even on the sands bordering the streams, the effect of the impact would
certainly be observed in the retention of hoofs or ungues, in the coarsen-
ing of the palmar epidermis of the manus, because the fore limbs would
certainly have been used occasionally, at least, in contact with the earth.
There are no hoofs and the epidermal thickenings or pads are very
lightly developed.
The conclusion then seems to be that the animals were largely
aquatic.
The same author in Part III of the same series gives the
attempts to arrive at some definite system of measurements for
mammalian skulls with especial reference to the horse, in a
paper entitled ‘‘Craniometery of the Equidex.’’ The author
divides the discussion into (I) Craniometric Systems, 1875-
1912; in which is given the results of the labors of Franck,
1875; Branco, 1883; Nehring, 1884; Tscherski, 1892; Salensky,
1902; Ewart, 1907; Bradley, 1907; and Osborn, 1912, the discus-
sions being illustrated by figures and tables. (II) Distinctions
between Horses, Asses and Zebras. (IIL) Cytocephaly, the Bend-
ing of the Face on the Cranium, the chief conclusions of which are:
(1) in young animals the palatal and cranial lines are more
nearly in the same plane; (2) in certain animals the deflection
increases rapidly with age; (3) a horizontal and upward deflec-
tion is generally characteristic of primitive browsing types; (4)
the downward deflection of the face and palate is highly char-
acteristic of certain grazing types. (IV) Craniometry and
Odontometry in Paleontology.
In fossil skulls the indices lose value because the slightest degree of
erushing or distortion seriously disturbs an index. Nevertheless the
indices and ratios should be used wherever obtainable. Since fossil
skulls and dental series are rarely complete or perfect, the paleontol-
ogist requires an additional series of detailed measurements of parts of
the skull not needed by the zoologist.
Harold J. Cook in Volume 7, Parts 3, 4, and 5, of the Nebraska
Geological Survey has given descriptions of a new genus an
No. 556] NOTES AND LITERATURE 253
two new species of Miocene rhinoceroses and a ‘‘Faunal Lists
of the Tertiary Formations of Sioux County, Nebraska.’’ These
_ formations extend from the Lower Oligocene to the Pleistocene
and many species are listed, 11 pages being taken up with the
lists. Peterson,?® however, states that one of the above species
was based on a deciduous dentition.
Dr. R. S. Lull in the Yale Alumni Weekly of November 8,
1912, gives a very interesting account of his expedition to Texas
in search of the remains of early horses, which he found in
abundance.
Broili*® has described very carefully a new specimen of
Pterodactylus micronyx H. von Meyer from the lithographic
Slates of Eichstaedt in Bavaria. The nearly complete animal
is seen from the dorsal side as it lies in the stone.
The same author? describes and figures very fully the
osteology of the skull of Placodus based on a series of specimens
of this peculiar, primitive, yet highly specialized reptile. On
page 151 are given four reconstructions of the dorsal, ventral,
lateral and occipital views of the skull. The animal is very
peculiar in many ways and of very uncertain relationship, being
assigned to several reptilian groups by the various authors
who have studied the species. The maxillary and palatine teeth
have the unusual form of pavement crushing teeth, the palatine
teeth are especially large and broad, the middle one of the
three on each palatine measuring nearly one by two inches.
That the animal was a feeder on molluses or hard vegetation
Would seem quite probable. Zittel in his ‘‘Handbuch der
Paleontologie’’ lists six species of this genus; the one described
by Broili being P. gigas Ag. The animal possesses a single
temporal opening in the skull and amphiplatyan vertebre, with
the nostrils located far back on the skull with the nasals reduced,
indicating an aquatic habit of life.
In the American Journal of Science for November, 1912, S.
W. Williston describes and figures further portions of the
osteology of the peculiar Permian reptile Limnoscelis from New
Mexico, together with a restoration of the skeleton of the species
L. paludis Will. Nearly the entire osteology of the species is
* Science, December 6, 1912, p. 801.
“Zeitschrift der Deutschen Geologischen Gesellschaft, Bd. 64, Jahrg.
1912, H. 3, 3
* Paleontographica, Bd. LIX, pp. 149-155, with figures and Taf. XIV.
254 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
known and much of it is preserved intact. Only a few caudal
vertebræ and a few spines of the vertebræ are unknown, which
for a fossil form is remarkable. In regard to the habits of the
animal the author says:
Taking into consideration the very short and stout legs with their
broad flattened feet, the absence of claws, the elongate body and tail,
it would seem not at all improbable that Limnoscelis was more or less
at home in the water, though not strictly an aquatic animal. In much
probability it lived in and about the marshes on the mud flats. . ..
From the press of the E. Schweizerbart’sche Verlagsbuch-
handlung Nägle und Dr. Sprösser, Stuttgart, 1912, is a volume
entitled ‘‘ Grundzüge der Paleobiologie der Wirbelthiere,’’ von
O. Abel, professor of paleontology in the University of Vienna.
The work comprises an octavo volume of 708 pages with 470
figures and a photographie reproduction of the skeleton of
Cryptocleidus oxoniensis Phil. as mounted in the American
Museum. The work is dedicated to Louis Dollo, professor of
paleontology in Brussels. The work is divided into four sec-
tions as follows: (I) Geschichte und Entwickelung der Paleon-
tologie, (II) Die Ueberreste der fossilen Wirbelthiere, (III) Die
Wirbelthiere im Kampfe mit der Aussenwelt, (IV) Paläobi-
ologie und Phylogenie. The work is too extensive for an ade-
quate review in this place and it will suffice to say here some-
thing of the manner of treatment of the subject matter of the
volume. The usual systematic method of compiling a paleon-
tological work is not followed but the subject matter is pre-
sented from the standpoint of the adaptation of the animal to
its environment and is thus very refreshing to the zoological
paleontologists. Such items as the auditory apparatus of the
mosasaurs, the parietal organ, expansion of the thorax, dental
reduction in the pterosaurs, convergence and parallelism,
Todeskampf are taken at random throughout the work to indi-
cate the nature of the subject matter. Most of the figures are
copied from the works of other authors but a few are new.
Recent and extinct species are figured side by side when they
illustrate the same biologic phenomenon, as for instance on page
438, the recent Myliobatis aquila is illustrated side by side with
the silurian Thelodus scoticus. On page 214 he states that the
present writer is mistaken in his correlation of the digits of
the Branchiosauria and that the second finger has wrongly been
regarded as the first. His reasoning is not adequate to sup-
No. 556] NOTES AND LITERATURE 255
port his contention. Why should we regard the first finger as
having been lost? It would be interesting to have Abel’s further
views on this matter. The oldest amphibian has but four digits
in the hand and they doubtless never had more, but we don’t
know. His discussion of the origin of the thumb is open to
question as has been suggested by Doctor Matthew in a pre-
vious review of this work. The work as a whole is well printed;
the illustrations are clear and show care in selection. The work
is, I am sure, a welcome addition to our libraries.
Whatever we may think of the ‘‘ Arachnid Theory’’ for the
origin of the vertebrates, as outlined in Patten’s ‘‘Evolution of
the Vertebrates and their Kin,’’ we must all acknowledge our
debt to Professor Patten for the information on the oldest known
vertebrates as outlined in Chapters XX and XXI of that work.
Those of us especially who are engaged in the attempt of teach-
ing something of the nature of the oldest known vertebrates must
feel grateful to the author for the excellent discussions of these
most interesting vertebrates, which he discusses and figures so
fully and so beautifully. The text of these two chapters is illus-
trated with 33 exquisite drawings and photographs based on ac-
tual specimens or on the most authoritative works. The writer
of these reviews feels a personal debt to Professor Patten for the
figures of the left pectoral limb of Eusthanopteron fordi ( Whit-
eaves) from the Devonian of Canada. He says of the limb that it
indieates the way ... in which the typical skeleton of the pectoral
appendage of the tetrapoda has been derived from the biserial pectoral
fin of fishes,
We should like to modify the sentence to say may instead of has,
for no one knows whether or not this was the way of the origin
of the tetrapodous limb. Restorations of Cephalaspis, Lasanius,
Birkenia, Thelodus, Lanarkia, Drepanaspis and Bothriolepis are
given, as well as two photographie pages of specimens of Bothri-
olepis as they occur in the rock; one slab containing nearly a dozen
more or less complete specimens. By means of sections Professor
Patten has arrived at some conclusions which seem to point, in
his Opinion, to the arachnoids. The structures he describes are
certainly very interesting in their resemblance to arachnid struc-
tures. If his interpretation of their value is doubted he has the
Satisfaction of knowing that no better interpretation has been
given. To say that they are characters due to parallelism is beg-
256 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
ging the question. If they do not indicate arachnid relation-
ships what do they indicate?
Bertram G. Smith? gives a very interesting discussion of
‘*Phylogeny’’ (in the Amphibia) in his valuable memoir on
‘‘ Embryology of Cryptobranchus.’’ The keynote to his discus-
sion is contained in the following sentence:
In the present state of our knowledge it is impossible to reach an un-
qualified decision of the question under consideration. .. . atever
light may be shed by future discoveries on the question of the derivation
of the amphibia from the crossopterygia or the dipnoi it is clear that
the point of origin is not far from either stock; in other words, that the
three lines of descent have separated from a common stem at no very
great intervals.
The discussion is illustrated by a figure of the pectoral limb
of the crossopterygian Sauripterus taylori Hall, based on a speci-
men in the American Museum.
Louise Kellogg?* has a very interesting paper on the ‘‘Pleisto-
cene Rodents of California.’’ The material described is from the
cave deposits and the asphalt beds of California. The discussion
is intended especially as an elucidation of the possible changes in
climatic conditions during the Pleistocene as indicated by the
rodent fauna. The species are listed according to the life zones
which they indicate; the Upper Sonoran, Transition and Boreal
all being indicated by several species; there being but slight indi-
eation of change since the time of deposition of the deposits.
Two new subspecies are described.
Roy L. MooDIE.
UNIVERSITY OF KANSAS
* Journal of Morphology, Vol. 23, No. 3, p. 540 ff.
2 Bull. of Dept. Geol. Univ. Calif., Vol. 7, No. 8, pp. 1517168.
SECOND EDITION
AMERICAN MEN OF SCIENCE
A BIOGRAPHICAL DIRECTORY
EDITED 2 < McKEEN CATTELL
a ond is to maintain its usefulness. Nearly a third of the names in the
present edition are new, “ta e aki which a a ir in the first division have in nearly ade 4 The
of work required to at re ther been as that given to the first edition. There has been no
change in the general plan of the work. Greater strictness in confining tts scope to the natural and
sciences, and for this reason a few names included in the first edition have omi been exerted to
make the book as complete a There are of course om: some men will not
nd accurate as possible. issions, ý
reply even to repeated requests for the information needed. . The thousand leading men of science have been again selected
by the methods that were used before, and stars rome been added to the subjects of research in y case of eri new men who
=- obtained — on the list. “The editor’s object in selecting this group of scientific men has been to make a study of
the conditions See smite research depends and so far as ma be to m aa a thee ars pened
an appendiz two statistical studies that have been ae the Se
The seoo i — of the e <a to more than 600 pages and contains n 5500 sketches
see is ‘wall pet — on all rag paper and bound in buckram teat — label. Although ‘oo weak has been
size by more than 50 sie oent., iti is sold at the same price as the first edition.
Price: Five Dollars, net, Postage paid
THE SCIENCE PRESS
GARRISON, N. Y. LANCASTER, PA.
SUB-STATION 84, NEW YORK CITY.
The American Journal of Science
Established by Benjamin Silliman in 1818
The Leading Scientific Journal in the United States
Devoted to the Physical and Natural Sciences, with special reference to
Physics, and Chemistry on the one hand, and to Geology and Mineralogy
on the other.
Nan Editor: EDWARD S. DANA.
Editors: Professor GEORGE L. GOODALE, JOHN TROWBRIDGE, W. G. FARLOW and WM. M. DAVIS
of Cambri ridge; Professors A. E. VERRILL, HENRY 8. WILLIAMS and L. V. PIRSSON, of New
T Haven; Professor JOSEPH 8. AIMES, of Baltimore ; MR. J. 8. DILLER, of Was
Wo volumes annually, in monthly numbers of about 80 pages each.
This Journal ended its first series of 50 volumes as a quarterly in 1845; its second
series of 50 volumes as a two-monthly in 1870; its third series as a monthly ended Dec-
ember, 1895. A Fourth Series commenced in 1896.
$6.2 Subscription Price, $6 per year or 50 cents a number, apres prepaid in the United States
5 to Canada ; $6,40 to Countries in the Postal Union. at reduced prices.
t@-Ten-Volume Indexes, Vols. I-X XI-XX, fourth series, price one dollar. Address
The American Journal of Science
New Haven, Conn.
The American Naturalist
A Monthly Journal, established in 1867, Devoted to the Adv
cement of the Biological Sciences
with Special Reference to the Factors of Organic Evolution and Heredity
CONTENTS OF OCTOBER NUMB
Gametic ue as a Cause of a
G. N. Collin:
IL gir a Their Breeding and Rearing for Scientific
urposes,
Lon
.
J. Frank Daniel.
IIM. a Tateiatton of Hyla arenicolor Cope, with
Notes y —_ Habits and Varation. C. H.
Richa: ir, OE
IV. santas: Colors in F, if a Cross between Non-
i Varieties of Maize. Professor R. A.
Ne ae Tce obo Stoo of Zea mays L. Dr. Walter
VI. Notes eid ae ature: Patten on the Origin of
Vertebrates and rte moi Value of Specu-
lations on the Pe pees of Organic Beings,
rofessor Wm.
CONTENTS OF NOVEMBER NUMBER
I. The Mendelian Notation as a Description of
Physi eked car ee cts. Professor E. M. East.
Ik A Peet Sinay of the Influence of the Starvation
of the Ascendants upon the Characteristics o of
the Descendants.—Ii. Dr. J. A
TI. a —— Lenaid. DE
IV. goed Articles and Discussion: On Tricolor
ogs and Guinea-pigs. Arend. L,
Frases ae
V. Notes and Literatu re: The a wes ss
Liverworts: Professor Douglas
a Invertebrates; Professor Chases
Atwood Kefoid.
CONTENTS OF DECEMBER NUMBER
The Mendelian Inheritance of Fecundity in the
Domestic Fowl, Dr. Raymond Pearl,
oe onthe Autonomy by Biological Sci-
fessor Otto Glaser.
HL The! Pun RT AAE = Eg Sen Sora ghee Petro-
myzon marinus.
IV. Shorter Articles and ee p pe le Test
of a aes of Fitof Mend elisi Ration. e
lam
Pop
V, a and Literature: Notes on Ichthy
Dr. David Starr Jordan. =
VI. Index to Volume XLVI.
CONTENTS OF JANUARY NUMBER
Factors and Unit Characters in on aaa
Heredity.
ri
ero T: = Morga
Il, Vertical Distribut of the Ch resto aii
the = Diego kesion in Relation tothe quer
tion of Isolation vs. Coincidence. Ellis L.
Mic
A Family of Spotted Negroes. Q. I. Simpson
essor W. E. Castle.
The Bet of Fertilizers = Variation in Corn
d Beans, Professor J. K. Shaw.
a R
CONTENTS OF THE FEBRUARY NUMBER
essor Burton Edward Livin D,
Adaptations in Animal Reactii a Pone G. H
Adaptation from the Point of dane = the Physi-
ologist. pagan See P. Mat i
The Fitness of t nment, an ante into the
Biological Aiea pakoe 3 the Properties of Matter.
Professor ops “nee J, Hend
Shorter Articles and Discus on Mutations in Oeno-
a3 fessor Bradle ey M. ones A
Convenient Microscope Case: Profess Ibert
M. Reese. A Liter: yti ap res om the Taw of Ger-
minal Continuity. Dr. W W. Stockberger.
CONTENTS OF THE MARCH NUMBER
Anger and Species-forming of Ecto-pars-
Professor Vernon Lyman Kellogg.
Castration " Relation to the Secondary Sexual
of Brown Leghorns. H. D.
p
H
=
nes
Perni - Mendelian Formule. Profes-
sor W. E. Cast
IV. Notes and te nee. Some Recent Advances
in Vertebrate Paleontology. f Roy
L. Meiri
Single Number 35 Cents
Yearly Subscription, $4.00
The NATURALIST will be sent to new subscribers for four months for One Dollar
THE SCIENCE PRESS
Garrison, N. Y. Sub-Station 84: NEW YORK Lancaster, Pa.
ee
. VOL. XLVII, NO. 557 ~ MAY, 1913
THE
AMERICAN
NATURALIST
A MONTHLY JOURNAL.
Devoted to the Advancement of the Biological Sciences with
Special Reference to the Factors of Evolution
CONTENTS
I. Inheritance = ee in Duroc —_— Swine. Professor Epw. N.
WENTWOR = = ae A ee
TI. Natural and zirien ee seigenee in the Genus Nicotiana. RicHARD
WELLIN - 279
TI, Shorter Articles and Discussion : Simplified Mendelian Formulae. Professor
R.A. EMERSON. The Influence of the ra ee ca of Agriculturein Wyo-
ming on the Bird Fauna. B.H. Gro
- Notes and Literature: The Depths of the Ocean. Dr. ALFRED G. MAYER. The
Growth of Groups in the Animal Kingdom. Professor H. S. JENNINGS- - 314
q
THE SCIENCE PRESS
LANCASTER, PA. GARRISON, N. Y.
NEW YORE: SUB-STATION 84
The American
Naturalist
intended for Aretha and books, etc., intended for itn should ey
M
MSS.
sent to Mea Editor of THE A
or
articles containing summaries
RICAN NATURALIST, Garrison- -on-Huds
of research work beat rin on the
problems of me evolution are especially welcome, and will be given preference
in ~~ ape
rea reprints of ype le are supplied to authors free of charge.
F idir slar will be supplie
Subscription
subscription price is four dollars a year.
Canadian postage twenty-five cents additional.
ons and a aat aat should be sent to the publishers.
The
Foreign oe is fifty cents and
arge for single copies is
forty cents. The advertising rates are Four Dollars fers a page.
THE SCIENCE PRESS
NEW YORK: Sub- Station 84
Lancaster, Pa.
A.elace matt
, April 2, 1908, at
Garrison, N. Y.
+ OFF
+ Lancaster, Pa., under the Act of
Congress of March 3, 1879.
FOR SALE
ARCTIC, ICELAND and GREENLAND
RDS’ SKINS
Well Prepared Low Prices
Particulars of
NESEN, Bird Collecto
Husavik, gost Iceland, Via Leidle, Band
TENTH EDITION.
THE MICROSCOPE,
an introduction to ee Methods and to Histology,
by Seen HENRY GAGE, ©: rnell aiv
and above op in this new
ata re on. Price i sid.
COMSTOCK PUBLISHING CO., Ithaca, N. Y.
BUTTERFLY-HUNTING IN
An LANDS
tes of a Field Naturalist
By George B. Los oe M.A., M.D. (Oxon.),
late Vice-President Entomological Society, London. To
a eee added Translations ey Papers by Fritz fee
SN
‘‘ Interesting descriptions of the general features of
the countries visited, their history, geography, flora
and inhabitants . . . will appeal as much to
those interested in travel as to the naturalist, as itis
delightful reading. . It is the kind of book
that helps er naturalists and we can’t have too
many of them. . .-. The Appendix consists of
iiio of valuable papers by Fritz Muller, and
is very useful and indispensable for those not under-
standing the original language. There is much to
praise and nothing to condemn in the work, and it is
a valuable addition to the popular ead on natural
history and travel. ””— Entomological
Lo pma a & Co.
443 Fourth A New York
FINE LAND SHELLS
I have in stock and for sale rae ten thousan Ate a
of aay shells T z Paik meg ard =_— e. nai yi
ura
trating $ every 7 phase of a ithe su e subject “and “From easy al
ustra
pavers shells of the Philippines and other port gee =
be mailed free. Strictly scientific ' collections pure. — ve
cash. Correspondence solicit th tra rome: dod es EBB.
Only the finest material handled.
202 Westminister Road, Rochester, N.
The University of Chicago
on during the Sum-
fiers E the same basis as
quarters of the
aduate colleges, the
schools, a and = pea
`%
The University of Chicago
THE
AMERICAN NATURALIST
Vou. XLVII May, 1913 No. 557
INHERITANCE OF MAMMÆ IN DUROC JERSEY
SWINE
PROFESSOR EDW. N. WENTWORTH
Iowa COLLEGE
Tue relative fixity of character and definite methods of
variation in the mamme of swine make them a fruitful
field for inheritance studies. The observations incorpo-
rated into this paper were made upon swine used in a
feeding experiment at the Iowa State College. There
were fifty-seven grade Duroc Jersey sows and five hun-
dred and ten pigs of 1912 farrowing included in the in-
vestigation.
The sows may be divided into two groups, one of forty
two-year-old animals and the other of their yearling
daughters, seventeen in number. In all, there are three
generations for comparative study, a rare combination
in such numbers among ordinary slow-breeding farm ani-
mals. There were two boars in use in the experiment.
one a yearling, the other a two-year-old, both closely
related as ordinary pedigree breeding is considered.
From the standpoint of mamme pattern, the boars were
*The writer wishes to make acknowledgments to Professor John M.
Evvard, of the Iowa Station, for the facilities he put at the writer’s dis-
posal and to Mr. A. R. Chappel, a senior student, for great assistance in the
collection of data. But most of all, acknowledgments must be made to
T. Castle, of Harvard University, for his assistance in the study of the
data while the writer was working up his material at the Bussey Institution.
257
258 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vow. XLVII
quite similar somatically, the only difference being that
the asymmetry present occurred on opposite sides in the
two animals. In the older boar the right nipple of the
second pair was not developed, and in the younger boar
the left nipple of the same pair was suppressed.
i
The Mamme Pattern.—What may be termed the ‘‘nor-
mal” mamme pattern consists in the occurrence along
the ventral side of regularly placed pairs. The first pair
lies just behind the junction of the ribs with the sternum.
The last pair is inguinal in position, and its members lie
close together near the median plane. The intermediate
pairs are spaced about equally between, although a
slightly greater distance separates the last two pairs. In
the male with ten mamme (five pairs), the sheath open-
ing lies between the second and third pairs, while the
fourth pair is about the same relative distance to the rear
of the third. In the female the nipples are similarly
placed, but less readily located in a definite manner, be-
cause of the absence of the sheath.
It has been assumed by some writers that the paired
mammez bear a relation to the metameric structure of the
No. 557] INHERITANCE OF MAMMZ IN SWINE 259
individual. Williams particularly contends for this view,
claiming that each somite in the original ancestral condi-
tion possessed its pair of glands. He also invokes the
theory of reversion to account for the definite places in
which supernumerary nipples oceur. Bateson, on the con-
trary, defines the position of the teats as occurring regu-
larly on the ‘‘mammary lines.’’ These lines diverge
toward the axille and converge toward the inguinal
region. He assumes that mamme may appear at any
point on these lines and apparently with only slight rela-
tionship to the somites.
Embryology.—Embryologically, Bateson’s idea of the
mammary lines seems to be well supported. In the swine
embryo of 14-15 mm. the mammary ridges appear plainly
visible in a dorso-lateral position. At about 17 mm. small
elevations (‘‘primitive teats’’) appear on the surface of
these ridges. When about 19-20 mm. long, the inter-
vening parts of ridges are resorbed, leaving the teats at
the point in which they will normally develop.
This entirely precedes the formation of the true mam-
mary tissue. In fact Creighton says that in the kitten
the latter may not appear until after birth, although
guinea pigs and swine show an earlier development. The
factors that govern the transverse division of the lateral
mammary tissue into mamme, so far as the writer has
been able to discover, are unknown. Most authors have
insisted that metamerism has nothing to do with it, but
offer little demonstrable in its place. Suffice it to say,
however, there is some force that serves to maintain
Symmetry and regularity of division in the majority of
cases. An attempt will be made to show some of its
effects in the following study, even though it can not be
definitely named and its action described.
Types of Variation—The simplest type of variation
in the number of mamme consists of one more or one less
pair than is the usual number. The writer has assumed
the first pair and the inguinal pair constant, because of
their definite position. On this assumption, the addition
260 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou XLVII
or substraction of a pair of mamme must occur at some
intermediate point. If a pair is added, it may be asso-
ciated with a closer spacing of the teats, or possibly with
a greater body length from the tip of the sternum to the
border of the groin. If subtracted, the opposite con-
dition would obtain. No observations were made on this
point, and indeed it would be difficult to make them, be-
cause of the elastic nature of the tissue, the difficulty in
handling the animals, and their marked variability in
size and proportions.
There are two common sorts of asymmetry that may
occur separately or together. These are the ‘‘suppressed
nipple’ and the ‘‘triangular’’ patterns. The former
consists in the non-appearance of one member of a pair,
while the latter shows one teat placed opposite two teats
on the other side. The single teat is located at a point
midway between the opposite two, and is always on the
mammary line. The suppressed mamma variation ap-
peared in 29.8 per cent. of the offspring and the triangle
in 21.7 per cent.
The suppressed mamma variation may occur twice in
the same animal, either on the same or opposite sides of
the body, the two sorts of repetition being about equally
frequent. But whenever the variation is repeated on the
same side of the body, a normally placed pair of mamme
always intervenes. Less frequently a pair of mamme
seems to be omitted altogether, leaving an empty space
where normally a pair of mamme would occur. This may
be interpreted as the suppression of two mamme on op-
posite sides in one pair. The writer is rather doubtful
of this interpretation, however, and does not include it in
the 29.8 per cent. already mentioned. The omission of a
pair was found in only 5 cases, or less than 1 per cent.
of all.
The triangle pattern shows three or perhaps four types
of compounding. Two triangles may appear with the
single nipples on the same side and separated by one or
more normal pairs, or they may be separated similarly,
No. 557] INHERITANCE OF MAMMZ IN SWINE 261
but have the single nipples on opposite sides. The third
type is where no normal pair divides the two triangles
and two mamme on one side balance three on the other.
In this case, where more than two triangles are present,
three nipples on one side may balance four opposite or
four may balance five. This last condition occurred in
only two cases. The fourth type is doubtful and difficult
to describe. It is as though the two triangles have their
bases on opposite sides of the animal, but have one side in
juxtaposition with the corresponding side of the other.
In other words, two of the mamme form the sides of two
oppositely facing triangles and give a two-balancing-two
effect. The mamme on one side are opposite a point
intermediate between those on the other. This effect may
possibly be brought about by a combination of the sup-
pressed nipple and triangle type as well. In seven indi-
viduals the triangle and suppressed nipple were found on
the same animal, separated by one or more normal pairs.
There sometimes appears a pattern in which the mam-
mæ of one side are set ahead of the points where they
commonly occur, as though one lateral row were pushed
slightly forward. This may be characteristic of the entire
mammary series or of only one or two pairs. The ar-
rangement is seldom so distorted that the identity of the
pairs is lost, but occasionally it approaches the fourth
compound type of triangle just discussed. A suggestion
has been offered that this distortion may be due to the
position of the fetus during pregnancy, so that when the
abdominal walls grow together, the mamme do not lie
exactly opposite. An objection to this is that not only
would the abdomen show the asymmetry, but also the ribs
and sides. No observations were made on this point, but
to the writer the explanation offered seems doubtful.
The Seat of Greatest Variation—For convenience in
description, the pairs of mamme may be numbered from
the most forward pair to the rear. Considering the first
pair and inguinal pair as constant, the mamme of the
intervening region were tabulated by number. This
262 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
method, of course, made the fifth and sixth pairs of much
lower frequency than the other five, since so many ani-
mals had but ten mamme. In figuring percentage fre-
quencies for each position the total number of mammez
possible in all of the animals, if each had a pair in the
position under consideration, was used as a basis for
computation. The columns 14, 24, etc., show the frequen-
cies of mamme forming the apex of a triangle, in the
position between pairs 1 and 2, 2 and 3, ete.
The total number of mamme for each position which
could occur if there were no variations is 1,138 for the
first four and inguinal pairs. The constancy of the last
named pair is particularly marked, only nine variations
obtaining.
PANEER EEEE
| Pair
| 1 | pels | 2 | 3 | sy | 4
Bale a | 1,112 = 5 989 | 37 E 088| 14 | 1,095
Per cent. frequency mamme . ie 715 86. 906) 3.25 95. 606 1.23 | 96.221
Per cent. frequency variations . 285| 3.094. | 4 ri
| Pair
| 414 5 | 6 | 6% | Inguinal
Mer niob 2: 2) 4.05. a x 19 | 649 | 28 | 127 7 | 1129
Per cent. frequency mamme . 2.7 o2: a 16. u > ayi 4.023 | 99.209
Per cent. frequency variations . 13| | 0.791
Arranging the pairs in order of frequency of variation,
the following sequence holds: 6th, 2d, 5th, 3d, 4th, 1st and
inguinal. It is probable that the rank of the sixth is not
significant, due to the lack of numbers in proportion to
the others, but there is no question about the second pair
being a leading seat of variation. In a former article on-
this subject the writer called attention to this fact with-
out presenting figures. It is worth while noting that this
variance in the second pair is perhaps not characteristic
of swine as a whole, but simply due to the fact that both
boars showed in this pair their variation from normal
patterns.
‘The point of most frequent appearance of the triangu-
No. 557] INHERITANCE OF MAMMZ IN SWINE 263
lar type is of interest, although possibly not significant.
The rank is as follows:
Per Cent.
Hetween Sth and: Gth co... ours sas se yess ei 16.09
petrween Gh Sila TER: eves caus cos ce S 4.023
Between: 2d Oud Ban. cite ibis Stic add wae’ 3.25
Between 40h tad: Dih os con ddadievsdcxubiasnss wane 2.7
Petwo Jat ond Bae. ag eine eka ke ae 2.2
1.23
Between 3d and 4th .......... pi ae ee Pree ag E
Once more, if we discard the results between 5th and
6th, and 6th and 7th, because of small numbers, we find
the high per cent. of variability at the second pair.
The point of appearance of the suppressed nipple vari-
ation was plotted in the same way and the following order
of appearance was foun
Per Cent.
Oh PRIF is es a va eee ee E e A s A 6.9
PO 1 EE acs E E E E T A E 6.3
OO e S AES E 5 oe A A E E E E N om oe 1.3
ah Par oS ceed cee a A bes eke ees = 12
Sa DOW. irr vies s cbc ces ohhh ee eA kR a iy 0.5
inguinal pair... i.) ec cr ven eves ct eukyertene nes 0.2
Ye errr opr ep per yet CM nee mot ay ee 0.0
Again the second pair is shown as the chief seat of
variation. It may be well to mention that while there
was a possibility of 1,138 mamme appearing in the Ist,
2d, 3d, 4th, and inguinal pairs, only 704 mamme could
have appeared in the 5th pair and 174 mamme in the
sixth, because of the small numbers of animals having
over ten and twelve mamma, respectively.
No. Triangles 5 Prs. Prs. mae Ae a F
1 4 53 23 79
2 8 10 18
3 2 1 3
4 2 1
f 4 63 35 101
Mean No. triangles = 1.267.
Standard deviation triangles = .5609.
Mean No. mamme = 6.3168.
Standard artea pairs = .7889.
r = .1666 = .065.
264 . THE AMERICAN NATURALIST (Vou. XLVII
Relation of Increased Pairs to the Common Variations.
—A correlation was arranged between an increased num-
ber of pairs and the two common asymmetrical varia-
tions.
Nipples pant 5 Prs 6 Prs. | 7 Prs J
1 1 91 24 116
2 9 9
1 91 33 125
Mean of suppressed nipples = 1.072
Standard piar of suppressed dipon = ee:
Mean = 6.256.
Standard ends == 408.
r = .5089 + .0447
While the correlation does not show a marked relation
between the number of triangles and the increased num-
ber of mamme, yet another method of plotting shows
that there is a very significant relation between them and
that the tendency to these variations may possibly be
only a function of a large number of mamme rather than
a definitely heritable unit.
No. of Pairs
5 Prs, 6 Prs. 7 Prs.
WO PU er ae 217 296 56
No. each kind of animals with triangle......... 4 63 35
Per cent. animals of each class with triangle..... 1.84 21.28 62.5
go nimals of each hues with suppressed mam-
E SEA SO ata e E E E A eae 1 91 33
ag cent. animals of each class with suppressed
e E twigs eos a a S 46 30.74 | 58.93 _
The increased percentage of animals with the two
types of variation among the animals with a larger num-
ber of mamme speaks for itself.
This relation of the variations to the increased number
of pairs, in connection with the fact that the variations
appear most frequently in the pairs between the first, and
inguinal, furnishes additional basis for the statement
made earlier in the paper that the number of mammez is
increased by modifications between the first and inguinal
pair.
No. 557] INHERITANCE OF MAMMZ IN SWINE 265
Inheritance of the Two Forms of Variation.—The
‘‘triangles’? show a marked degree of inheritance.
Neither boar carried the triangular pattern somatically,
but the offspring of the two were summarized separately
to see if any difference developed in the offspring. Both
boars possessed the ‘‘suppressed nipple’’ type, and, as
might be expected, show little difference in breeding.
Pigs By OLD BOAR
th | PigewithSup-| With |
Triangle pressed Nipple | Neither
Sows with triangle........... No. 17 ‘geen
; Per cent. 30.00 20.00 50.00
Sows with suppressed nipple... eke 2 14 6
: Per cent. 4.7 33.3 62.0
Sows with neither............ No. 45 60 169
Per cent. 16.6 22.2 62.5
It is evident that a distinctly higher proportion of
‘‘triangles’’ appears in the pigs from sows of the same
type. Also a distinctly greater percentage of pigs with
the suppressed nipple comes from sows of the suppressed-
nipple type, but the difference between the breeding char-
acter of the three classes of sows is not so marked with
this variation, probably because the boar supplies the
latter pattern with each mating.
Pies By YounG Boar.
Pigs with (Pise with Sup- With
Triangle ssed Mamma; Neither
Sows with triangle........... No. 13 4 16
f> Per cent. 39.394 12:121 48.485
Sows with symmetrical pairs. .. No. 23
Per cent.) 9.574 24.468 65.957
Combining the two tables, there appears a result which
may be more significant than in either when separate. In
this table in the cases where a pig possesses both varia-
tions, he is listed twice, so that the percentage runs
slightly over one hundred. There is one duplication from
sows with the triangle and four duplications in the off-
Spring of the ‘‘normal’’ sows.
266 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
Pigs with
Tange | Suppressed | weither
Sows with triangle........... No. 30 15 44
Per cent. 34.091 17.045 50.000
Sows with suppressed mamma . No. 14 26
Per cent. 4.762 33.33 61.905
Sows with even pair.......... No. 54 83 31
Per cent. 14.835 22.802 63.461
It is of interest to note that each form of variation ap-
pears in about one third of the offspring of the mothers
that bear the same variation. Where the mother does not
possess either type, the triangle appears in about one-
seventh of the offspring and the suppressed mamma in
one fourth. It is possible that a three-factor Mendelian
ratio would account for the results, but since the factors
are unknown it is scarcely worth while to present it.
Two of the sows possessed both the triangle and the
suppressed mamma, and are not listed above. A close
agreement with the preceding table may be noted.
Pigs with
Triangle | sg npn | Even Pairs
| amma |
. | |
Sows with both variations. .... No. 15 | 1 | 10
Per cent.| 31.25 6.25 | 625
The constancy of the per cent. of even pairs in the two
tables is undoubtedly worthy of notice. Neither boar pos-
sessed the triangle. Sows with the triangle produced 39
pigs with the triangle and 69 without. Sows without the
triangle produced 56 pigs with it and 349 without. The
character is apparently inherited as a distinct entity even
though it may be merely a function of an increased num-
ber of mammez. The sows without the triangle may be
divided on their breeding performance into two groups.
The first produced only offspring without triangles (124
pigs) while the second produced 56 pigs with triangles,
225 without. The proportions here look significant. In
the first group the ratio of those possessing triangles to
those without is about 1:2. In the second it is O:N and
No. 557] INHERITANCE OF MAMMZ IN SWINE 267
in the third 1:4. The relative frequencies of these three
groups also look promising: 124 (O:N):281 (1:4):
108 (1:2). The simple 1:2:1 ratio is approximated,
although the excess of the second group is a little high.
Records on next year’s pigs are needed to prove the
soundness of this method of division.
In a similar way the suppressed mamme show a strong
degree of inheritance. Both boars possessed the sup-
pressed mamma pattern. Sows with the suppressed
mamma produced 17 offspring with it and 49 without.
Sows without it produced 94 with and 350 without. The
ratios are approximately 1:3 and 1:3.7. Separating the
sows without the character into two groups on the same
basis as in the preceding case the following appears:
65 (1:3) from sows with the suppressed mamma, 388 (1:3)
from sows without the suppressed mamma and 56 (O:N)
from sows without the suppressed mamma. The frequen-
cies look like two 3:1 ratios combined in which the two
groups of threeand one group of one are similar, but it is
not the normal ratio of 7:1. This also may be only ap-
parent, however, and another year’s test is needed to
throw more light on the subject. It is beyond doubt,
nevertheless, that these two forms of variation are dis-
tinctly inherited and the manner of inheritance only is
that which remains to be demonstrated.
Evidences of Segregation of the Two Types of Varia-
tion—The grand-dams were plotted against their pigs
of the 1912 litters and the correlations were figured in
comparison with the dams. The results were not enlight-
ening, as the following table shows.
Correlation between No. triangles in grand-dams and
19123 pigs oo. eva c eeepc ncn sens Gases ute veces’ — .0064 + .0624
Correlation between No. triangles in dams and 1912 pigs .2241 + .0592
Correlation between No. suppressed nipples in grand-dams
snd 1912 pigs ....3e:»rsrrresssir sorit ariii — -0966 + .0618
Correlation between No. suppressed nipples in dams and
1918 pigs -l.ei eee ei — .0052 + .0624
In the negative correlations the probable error is either
268 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vow XLVII
^
approximately equal to the coefficient or else far larger,
so that no emphasis can be placed on the result. In
arranging them according to per cent. of offspring bear-
ing the same variation the following is obtained:
Per Cent. of Pigs with
Supressed Nipple
Grand-dams without suppressed nipple ..........
Dams without suppressed nipple ............... 22.22
Grand-dams with suppressed nipple ..........--. 11.76
Dams with suppressed nipple .............+.-+5 EERE
No difference shows between the two classes, so it is
possible that the presence of the variation in the boars
tends to even things up.
Per Cent. Pigs with
Triangle
Grand-dams without triangle .....6. 606.040.0005’
Dams without triangle -ressa a eai 10.47
Grand-dima with (angle... s6 sos 50 56s Aree n 16.66
Dame WE URDE icc rss ee oo ts + oe ag dee ees 29.03
In the ease of the triangle, the grand-dams without the
variation have a higher per cent. of offspring possessing
it than do the dams, but where the triangle is present in
the dams and grand-dams the younger generation seems
to have the greater power of transmission. Since the old
boar previously mentioned is the sire of the dams, and
the young boar the sire of the 1912 pigs, there has been no
point of entrance for the triangle somatically. The per-
centages show some sort of segregation of a recessive
character, but further matings are necessary to clarify
the matter.
Variation in Number of Mamme.—There is quite a
wide range in the number of teats that may be present.
The smallest number found in these litters is nine, while
in the litters of last year, elsewhere reported, one pig ap-
peared with only eight. The highest number recorded
on one animal was sixteen, these including a pair of rudi-
-mentaries to the rear of the inguinal pair. Of the mam-
mz on the mammary lines of the abdomen fourteen is
highest number.
The relative frequency of occurrence of these different
No. 557] INHERITANCE OF MAMMZ IN SWINE 269
numbers among the swine studied is shown in the follow-
ing table:
Number Mamme
[wo ee lee
PEIN UOI ie ee oe 4 |
195 | 135 | 127 | 33 |
Per cent. ees ar aes se 0:78 | 38.31 | 26.52 | 24.95 | 6.48 | 2.95
Nearly 90 per cent (89.8) of the pigs bear ten, eleven or
twelve mamme, and may therefore be considered the
normal types of the Duroc. Jersey. In Bateson’s data on
Tamworth’s and cross-bred Berkshires in his ‘‘ Materials
for the Study of Variation,’’ he finds that twelve is the
lowest number of mamme occurring, fourteen is the mode
and seventy-seven per cent. fall on thirteen, fourteen and
fifteen. His numbers are much smaller (35), but it is
highly probable that there is a difference in breeds as
regards number of mamma, particularly between those
of bacon and lard type.
Correlation of Number of Mamme between Dams and
Pigs.—The coefficient of correlation for number of mam-
mz between the sows and pigs was not high (.2626 +
028), yet it showed distinct inheritance. There was ap-
parently no difference due to sex, as the boar pigs showed
a correlation of .1734 + .04 to their mothers, and the sow
pigs were only slightly greater, .2133 + .04. Since with
the probable errors in consideration the two coefficients
overlap, it seems doubtful if sex makes any difference in
the inheritance.
Evidence of Segregation in Number of Mamme.—The
sows of the first generation were plotted against their
grand-daughters giving the following results.
a Number of Mamme of Pigs
Tand-dams mete
9 10 | 11 12 13 14 Total
10 3 4 1 13
11 1 5 4 10
12 39 25 4 78
13 7 5 1 13
ee | rr 1 Be Ps a.
TO VONN 1 ii ss 16 1 1 117
TOM a e ES.
Coefficient of correlation = .2962 + .057.
270 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST (Vou. XLVII
The parents themselves showed a correlation to the off-
spring as follows:
No. Mamme Pigs
Dams
9 | 10 | 11 12 i u Total
10 ilg.. p 10 52
11 be 6 11
12 21 18 6 45
13 1 1 1 3
14 4 2 6
etd ok 1° | 60 38 16 1 I 117
Coefficient of correlation = .1418 + .061.
The grandparents are much more closely correlated
with the pigs (.2962 + .057). Two explanations may be
offered for this. Among the fifteen dams there were five
pairs of sisters, so that there were only ten grand-dams
to correlate. This would throw some of the litters into
one class that were separated when correlated with the
dams and so would modify the coefficient. An interpre-
tation more satisfactory to the writer is that the higher
coefficient between grand-dam and offspring represents
the segregation of some mammary character the limits of
which can not, at present, be defined.
Relation of Asymmetrical to Symmetrical Pattern.—
An interesting point because of the constancy of the ratio
lies in the relation of the symmetrical and asymmetrical
patterns. In the pigs they occur in the ratio of 1:2, or
172 asymmetrical to 337 symmetrical. In the writer’s
paper of last year, already cited, the same ratio held and
seemed unaffected by patterns in the parent. If divided
according to sex, we find no difference, the boars showing
89 asymmetrical to 174 symmetrical and the sows showing
83 of the first to 163 of the second. The fact that both
parents bear the asymmetrical pattern may influence the
per cent. of asymmetry in the pigs, but this influence is
very slight. Where boar and sows were asymmetrical the
ratio was 50:85, while when the boar only was asymmet-
rical the ratio was 122:252. Putting them on the same
No. 557] INHERITANCE OF MAMMZ IN SWINE 271
basis, we find a ratio of 1:1.7 and 1:2.06. There may be
significance in the difference between the two ratios, but
the writer is inclined to think there is not, for last year’s
work gave 35 asymmetrical to 68 symmetrical pigs from
two asymmetrical parents, and 33 to 62 from one asym-
metrical parent.
Another method of plotting these ratios shows that
differences may occur in connection with an increased
number of pairs. When the animals have ten pairs, only
four animals out of 199, or less than two per cent., show
the variations. When the animals have six pairs, the
number of animals having even pairs throughout are
about equal with the number having the variation, 127
and 135, respectively. When the animals have seven
pairs, the chances are about two to one that the animal
will have one or the other variation (33:15). Placed on
a percentage basis the following table results, showing
that asymmetry is closely related to an increased number
of pairs.
Animals with
| 5Prs, | 6 Prs. | 7 Prs.
a RCT aN ee oer FOE: | 199 . | 262 48
No. animals with the variations............... | 4 | 135 33
Per cent. animals with the variations........... | 201 | 5152 68.75
Inheritance of Asymmetry.—The old boar possessed
his asymmetrical nipple on the left side, the young boar
on the right. The two boars were tabulated in their
matings to sows possessed of each kind of asymmetry.
OLD Boar (EXTRA NIPPLE ON LEFT)
ra with agar iA Ri eae
Sows with extra nipple on left ......... 18
Sows with extra nipple on right ........ 4 p
mymmetrical bows cis: iiaei 45 47
Youxe Boar (EXTRA NIPPLE ON RIGHT)
"R with ger” ay
; n Left
Sows with extra nipple on left .......-. 3
Sows with extra nipple on right ......-- 0
Symmetrical sows sav- errre 11
272 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
With the older boar no evidence of the inheritance of
unilateral asymmetry is shown. With the younger boar,
however, there is a distinct excess of pigs showing the
asymmetry on the same side as the father. Since there
is no means of telling from the external appearance what
recessive characters the sow may be carrying, it is pos-
sible that there is a marked difference in the lateral pre-
disposition of the two boars.
An examination of the offspring of asymmetrical and
symmetrical sows shows a slight tendency toward the
production of asymmetry in the offspring of that kind of
parents. Eighteen sows of this type produced 96 pigs
with even pairs and 74 without. Thirty-nine symmetrical
sows produced 215 pigs with even pairs and 125 without.
Using the asymmetrical pigs as the base, the first ratio
is 1:1.297 and the second is 1:1.72. While we are justi-
fied in assuming a degree of inheritance of asymmetry,
we are not yet able to show the same by definite units.
Is Inheritance Lateral or by Pairs?—The embryolog-
ical origin of the mammary tissue suggests that there
may be a lateral inheritance. In order to determine this,
the right side of the mother was correlated with both the
right and left sides of the offspring, and the left side of
the mother correlated in the same way. The offspring
of the two boars were separated, since the old boar had
six teats on the left side and five on the right, while in the
young boar this relation was reversed.
The results were disappointing if one expected a high
correlation.
Pigs by Pigs by
Yous Boar Old Boar
Right side dam to right side pig ...... .1196 + .0353 .1601 + .0346
Right side dam to left side pig ....... .0384 + .0353 .2326 + .0346
Left side dam to right side pig ....... — .0023 + .0353 1436 + .0346
Left side dam to left side pig ........ — .0296 + .0353 2132 + .0346
In the last three correlations in the pigs by the young
boar, the probable error equals or exceeds the correlation,
and in the pigs by the old boar, the probable error per-
mits the correlations to just about meet each other or
No. 557] INHERITANCE OF MAMMA IN SWINE 273
even overlap. In the pigs by the young boar the corre-
lation between the same sides of sow and offspring ex-
ceeds that of the opposite sides, but in the offspring of
the old boar the left side of the pig is more closely cor-
related to either side of the mother than is the right side
of the pig. These contradictions lead the writer to be-
lieve that the inheritance is not lateral.
All of the offspring were tabulated as to number of
pairs against their dams and the correlation. was deter-
mined. The coefficient is .1994 + .028, large enough to
show some inheritance. As the animals included here
possess the two common types of variation, or were from
dams possessing those types, a second table was prepared
of pigs with symmetrical pairs from sows of the same
type. A larger coefficient resulted, .3588 + .039, but even
this is not satisfactory, as the boars possess the sup-
pressed nipple, and of course, the offspring represent a
selected group, although not selected from a standpoint
that should favor the correlation.
Another method of tabulating may show the inheritance
more graphically. The boars have six pairs, with one
mamma suppressed.
Av. for ens pig All Av. for Symmetrical
No, Pairs in Sow Indivi Individuals
5 5.27
6 5.76 5.48
7 5.90 5.65
There is a distinct increase in the means of the off-
spring as the number of pairs increases in the parent.
The mating of the boars to the sows with the following
number of mamme is interesting:
Boars Sows Pigs with 5 Prs. 6 Prs. 7 Prs.
6 prs. 5 prs. 69 60 2
6 prs. 6 prs. 103 162 34
6 prs. 7 prs. 28 40 12
This corroborates the results above.
The foregoing tables lead the writer to believe that the
method of inheritance is by the pair rather than the side,
274 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
although the determination of the pair as a Mendelizing
unit must be deferred until further study is made.
Rudimentaries in the Abdominal Series.—Bateson looks
on rudimentaries that occur asymmetrically in the ab-
dominal series of mamma, as a sort of supernumerary
organ systematically and different qualitatively from the
normal mamme. He so classifies them because of their
visible differences and because of their ability to displace
normal mamme from the ordinary paired state. It seems
to the writer that while this distinction may be all right
from Bateson’s standpoint, from the standpoint of hered-
ity it is without weight. The factor that causes the trans-
verse sectioning of the strips of mammary tissue is
obviously separate from the forces that cause develop-
ment of the glands. This factor operates irrespective of
whether the gland be destined to develop or not, and it is
very evidently this factor (probably complex) that is
inherited.
At birth or shortly after it is difficult to tell whether a
mamma will develop functionally or not. There are some
that are so small and undeveloped that one may be posi-
tive as to their rudimentary state throughout life, but
there are others for which prediction is very uncertain.
The writer has left all doubtful cases out of consideration
and has figured asymmetry due to a rudimentary nipple
in relation to asymmetry produced by developed teats.
There are 89 asymmetrical males. One of these is
asymmetrical from the presence of a rudimentary; two
more possess a rudimentary each, but are asymmetrical
through the presence of functional ‘‘triangles’’; and two
symmetrical boars possess rudimentaries as one member
of a pair. It must be understood in connection with the
foregoing that all of the mamme of the male are really
rudimentary, and that what the writer has termed rudi-
mentary in the preceding statement refers to mamme
that are so much smaller as to occupy a relation similar
to the rudimentary and normal mamme in the young
female.
No. 557] INHERITANCE OF MAMMZ IN SWINE 275
Highty-three asymmetrical sows show only one indi-
vidual whose asymmetry is due to the presence of a rudi-
mentary. One sow has a rudimentary, but is asymmet-
rical from a functional ‘‘triangle,’’ and one symmetrical
sow shows a rudimentary in one of her pairs.
Summarized this shows that only 1.123 per cent. of the
asymmetrical males have their asymmetry caused by
rudimentaries, and only 1.204 per cent. of the females.
From this evidence it would seem that rudimentaries do
not represent a step in the variation of the mammary
linear series, but from the standpoint of heredity should
be treated the same as normal teats, the lack of develop-
ment being probably due to fluctuating somatic causes.
It is interesting to compare the variability of the nip-
ples of the male, which are rudimentary throughout life,
with the teats of the female, which are potentially func-
tional. The coefficient of variability for the boar pigs is
-1009 + .003 and for the sow pigs it is .0943 + .0028. The
probable error permits a minimum separation of the two
coefficients of only .0008, so that the difference between
the two is probably not significant. Inthe litters of 1911,
already referred to, the boar pigs were slightly more
Stable than the sows, which would further argue against
a qualitatively constant significant difference.
The Rudimentaries to the Rear of the Inguinal Pair —
In the previous discussion no account has been taken of a
pair of rudimentaries which occur on the lower forward
part of the scrotum of the male, and well to the rear on
the inner thighs of the female. The pair is entirely dis-
tinct from the others, and readily recognizable from its
location and also from the fact that so far as the writer
has observed it is always rudimentary. It seems prob-
able that it lacks almost entirely the backing of mammary
tissue found in the othermamme. The writer has already
described the inheritance of the character in another
paper, so will simply summarize the results. The pair
behave as a Mendelian unit character in heredity, domi-
nant in males but recessive in females. That is, it is
276 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou XLVII
developed somatically in the male when either simplex
(Rr) or duplex (RR), but develops in the female only in
the duplex (RR) condition. The boars used were sim-
plex from their behavior in breeding, while the sows
embodied all three types.
Boar (Rr)
Boar Pigs Sow ow Pigs
Low Type | No. Sows jat
Absent Present Absent Present
RR 9 Expectation 0 39 20 20
Actual 0 39 27 13
Expectation 17 51 66 22
Rr 16 Actual 23 44 64 24
Expectation 60 60 95 0
rr 24 Actual 66 54 95 0
Fifteen of those recorded in the first two columns were
daughters of some of the remaining. In each case the
gametic composition assigned the young sows from their
breeding performance confirmed the formula assigned the
mother. There is some yariation from the expectation
particularly in the female pigs from the RR sows and the
male pigs fromthe Rr mothers. The numbers are too small
to permit of the deviation being significant, however, and
the departure from expectation in the sow pigs in the
first instance shows that the rudimentaries are not a dis-
tinetly feminine character. Attention should be called to
the fact that in the male the deviations from expectation
are on the same side.
The following table was plotted to see if the rudimen-
taries are a function of an increased number of mamme,
similar to the two common types of variation.
| Number of Mamme per Animal
padom d g daha
No. animaba aa i 181 | 131 | 135 a 36 | 16
58 | 52
75.00 44.28 | 38.52
59
32.59 |
The fluctuating percentages in connection with the fact
that the two lowest percentages are recorded against the
No. 557] INHERITANCE OF MAMMZ IN SWINE 277
highest numbers of mamme, would incline the writer to
believe that the rudimentary mamme of the scrotum and
thigh are independent of the abdominal series, and
furthermore that the Mendelian interpretation is correct.
Conclusions.—I. There are two common sorts of varia-
tion from the even paired type in the mamme of swine,
aside from the simple addition and subtraction of pairs.
These are the ‘‘triangle’’ and ‘‘suppressed’’ nipple vari-
ations. Each shows a definite tendency to reproduce
itself in the offspring, but both are apparently associated
with an increased number of pairs.
II. The seat of the greatest variation in the animals
under discussion is the second pair of mamme. This is
perhaps due to the type of variation in the sires.
II. There is apparently a breed difference in regard
to the number of mammæ. Bateson shows that in Tam-
worths and Berkshires, 13, 14 and 15 mamme are typical,
occurring in 77 per cent. of the cases. The Duroc Jerseys
studied show in 90 per cent. of the animals, 10, 11 or 12
mamme.
IV. The ratio of asymmetrical to symmetrical patterns
increases as the number of mamme increase. With five
pairs symmetry is almost constant; with six pairs, sym-
metry and asymmetry are equal. With seven pairs
asymmetry outnumbers symmetry 2 to 1.
V. No evidence definitely showed that asymmetry is
unilateral in inheritance. Asymmetry on one side of the
parent does not, on the average, produce asymmetry on
the same side only of the offspring.
VI. Sows differing in number of mammæ, when mated
with the same boar, produce offspring variable in number
of mamme. In general, sows with a large number of
mamme produce more offspring of a corresponding sort
than do sows with a small number of mamme. The differ-
ence, however, is not great, and neither sort apparently
breeds true. The correlation of mother and offspring in 7
number of mamme is measured by the coefficient .2626 +
028.
278 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vow. XLVII
VII. There is a distinct inheritance of the tendency to
produce a greater number of pairs, the correlation being
3088 + .034.
VIII. There is no evidence of lateral inheritance of the
mamme, the inheritance by pairs being a more probable
hypothesis.
IX. No definitely Mendelizing units were found in the
abdominal mammary series, but the relations between
grandparents and offspring and parents and offspring,
do indicate a segregation of some sort.
X. Rudimentaries in the functional mammary series
have the same effect on the pattern as normal mamme,
and probably represent lack of development. There is
no greater tendency to variation among the rudimentary
nipples of the male than among the potentially func-
tional nipples of the female.
XI. The paired rudimentaries to the rear of the ingui-
nal pair behave as a simple Mendelian unit-character,
sex-limited in inheritance.
LITERATURE CITED
Bateson, Wm
1894. Materials for the Study of Variation.
E Cha
1877. Development of the mesic kem Mammary Functions. Journal
Anat. and Phys., XI, p.
Klaatsch, H.
84. Zur Morphologie der Saugethier Zitzen. Morph. Jahrbuch, Bd. 9.
Schultze, O.
1893. Beitrag zur Entwicklungs geschichte der eeu Verh. d.
hys. Med. Ges. zu Wurzburg, XXVI,
Wentworth, E. N.
1912. Another Sex-limited Character. Science, N. S., Vol. XXXV,
. 913, p.
Takitini of — in Swine. American Breeder’s Associa-
tion, Vol. 8,
Williams, W. Roger.
1891. Polymastism with Special Reference pe Mamme Erratice, ete.
Journal Anat. 'and Phys., XXV, p. 225.
STUDIES OF NATURAL AND ARTIFICIAL PAR-
THENOGENESIS IN THE GENUS
NICOTIANA.
RICHARD WELLINGTON
Associate HORTICULTURIST, New YORK AGRICULTURAL
EXPERIMENT STATION
4
PaRTHENOGENESIS is a phenomenon that is known to
exist in many widely separated genera of the higher
plants. In but few cases does it seem likely that the
regular reduction of gametogenesis with the subsequent
nuclear fusion of fertilization never occurs, yet it is
probable—from the frequent discovery of new examples
—that it will ultimately be found that the ability to dis-
pense with typical sexual reproduction is comparatively
common. Should this prove to be the case, one would be
forced to conclude that sexual reproduction was devel-
oped for reasons other than protoplasmic necessity, as
Maupas and his followers would have biologists believe.
This is the fundamental problem toward the solution
of which all data on parthenogenesis contribute, but
pending the time when it can be discussed intelligently,
there are sub-questions that are not without their inter-
est. Loeb’s researches have shown that the stimulus to
development which is an attendant result of fertiliza-
tion, is physico-chemical. Observations on several
genera of parthenogenetic insects have shown that the
presence or absence of sexual reproduction is largely de-
pendent upon external conditions such as food, light,
temperature, ete. Little is known of the rôle played by
such stimuli in parthenogenesis in plants, however, al-
though knowledge on the subject is of some import aside
*Contribution from the Laboratory of Genetics, Bussey Institution of
Harvard University. ;
279
280 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
from theory. For example, the geneticist is concerned,
if, under any of the conditions likely to obtain in his ex-
periments, plants ordinarily reproducing sexually should
be incited to reproduce parthenogenetically.
This paper describes some facts on the subject ob-
tained by experiments on the genus Nicotiana.
Tue MATERIAL.
The material used in the investigation was turned over
to me by Professor E. M. East, who had received it from
various parts of the world. Each species had been culti-
vated in pure lines for at least three generations, so that
it may be considered to be fairly well known. The spe-
cific names used are those accepted by Comes in his
‘‘ Monographie du genre Nicotiana,’’ Naples, 1899. To
his descriptions, and to such figures as are published in
the Botanical Magazine, the plants corresponded per-
fectly. To all intents and purposes, therefore, the plants
may be considered wild, although they have been under
cultivation several years.
The writer desires to express his thanks to Professor
East, under whose direction the investigation was car-
ried out, for the use of the pedigreed material and for
much valuable advice. Certain unpublished data ob-
tained in his own researches on Nicotiana are incorpo-
rated with his consent.
HISTORICAL.
For historical purposes it is only necessary to give a
brief review of Hans Winkler’s paper, ‘‘Uber Partheno-
genesis und Apogamie im Pflanzenreiche,’’ published in
1908; and the less comprehensive paper, ‘‘Parthéno-
génése des Végétaux Supérieurs,’’ of L. Blaringhem,
published in 1909. Blaringhem in his historical account
of this subject, states:
Déja Camerarius dans sa lettre célèbre sur le sexe des plantes (De
sexu plantarum epistola, 1694) reconnaît que dans ses essais de cas-
tration du Mais il obtient, malgré l'absence de pollen, le développement
de graines fertiles sur les épis latéreaux femelles.
No. 557] PARTHENOGENESIS IN NICOTIANA 281
Among the early observers of parthenogenetic? qualities
in plants are given Spallanzani (1767-1779), Henschel
(1817-1818), Lecoq (1827), Giron de Buzareinques
(1827-1833), Ramisch (1833-1838), Bernhardi (1834-
1839), Tenore (1854), Gasparini (1846) and Naudin
(1856). As a few of the plants cited by these authors are
at the present time the object of research, Blaringhem
gives a list of the observed plants with an indication of
the more doubtful.
The list is given as follows:
(a) Plantes Dioiques.
Bryonia dioica d’après Naudin (confirmé en 1904
par Bitter),
Cannabis sativa d’après Camerarius, Spallanzani,
Henschel, Girou de Buzareinques, Berhardi et
Naudin,
Datisca cannabina d’après Wenderoth et Fresen-
ius (très douteux),
Lychnis dioica d’après Henschel a Girou de Buz-
areinques,
Mercurialis annua d’après Lecoq, Ramisch, Nau-
din et Thuret,
Pistacia narbonensis d’après Bocconi et Tenore,
Spinacia oleracea d’après Spallanzani, Lecoq et
Girou de Buzareinques.
(b) Plantes Monoiques.
Cucurbita Melopepo, C. Citrullus et autres espéces
d’aprés Spallanzani, Sageret et Henschel,
Ficus Carica d’après Gasparini,
Urtica pilulifera d’aprés Henschel (trés douteux).
Winkler, in his introduction, cites Celebogyne ilicifolia
J. Smith, a dicecius member of the Euphorbiacee native
to eastern Australia, which had been cultivated since
1829 at Kew in three ‘‘weiblichen Stocken,’’ as the first
mentioned case of seed production without the assistance
of pollen grains. This observation led Smith to believe
? No doubt many of these observations were incorrect, owing to imperfect
control.
282 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vow. XLVII
that pollen is not essential for the perfecting of Euphor-
biaceæ seed. In 1857 A. Braun described Chara crinita
Wallr. as a true case of parthenogenesis. In 1877, Stras-
burger with the aid of modern technique found that the
embryos in Celebogyne ilicifolia were formed without
fertilization, but that parthenogenesis was absent, as the
embryos came not from unfertilized eggs, but from ad-
ventitious growths (Sprossungen) of the nucellus tissue.
In 1900, Juel definitely proved its existence in Anten-
naria, thus establishing its presence in the higher plants.
As botanical investigators do not always agree in the
use of the terms parthenogenesis and apogamy, Winkler
divides all reproductive phenomena into three divisions,
namely: Amphimixis, Pseudomixis, and Apomixis.
1. Amphimixis, which designates the normal sexual
process.
2. Pseudomixis, which means the replacement of true
sex-cell fusions by a false sexual process. Pseudomixis
thus differs from amphimixis, essentially, only in the cir-
cumstance that the fusing cells are not differentiated as
gametes. As an example of the pseudomictic (pseudo-
miktische) method of reproduction is cited Lastrea pseu-
domas var. polydactyla Wills, in which the sporophyte
arises from a prothallium cell, its primordial nucleus
fusing with a nucleus from a neighboring cell. Farmer
and Digby (1907, p. 191) name this procedure ‘‘pseudo-
apogamy.’’ All non-sexual nuclear or cell fusions must
not be considered as pseudosexual, however, for there is
an asexual cell fusion in addition to the sexual and the
pseudosexual, as, for example, the nucleus fusion de-
scribed by Nemec (1902, 1903) in chloralized roots of
Vicia, and also the frequently mentioned nucleus fusion
in the young ascus of the Ascomycetes.
3. Apomixis, which is the replacement of sexual repro-
duction by another, an asexual process, which is not
bound up with nuclear fusions. For it, there is already
another term, namely that of apogamy. This latter term
was applied by de Bary (1878, p. 479) for the fact, ‘‘dass
No. 557] PARTHENOGENESIS IN NICOTIANA 283
einer Species (oder Varietit) die sexuelle Zeugung ver-
loren geht und durch einen anderen Reproduktionsproc-
ess ersetzt wird.” The word apogamy used with the
meaning intended by de Bary covers the term apomixis
of Winkler; but as all the recent authors use the expres-
sion apogamy in a new sense, the introduction of a new
term seems justifiable.
Apomixis is subdivided into vegetative pasada
apogamy, and parthenogenesis:
(A) Vegetative propagation consists of the replace-
ment of fertilization by vegetative formations (Aus-
läuferbildungen), arising of leafy (blattbürtiger) shoots,
vivipary and similar examples of simple vegetative divi-
sion and the adventitious embryo formation from nu-
cellus cells.
(B) Apogamy, the origin through apomixis of a
sporophyte out of vegetative cells of the gametophyte, is
subdivided into (a) somatic apogamy, if the cell or the
cell complex which produces the sporophyte possesses
the diploid chromosome number, and (b) generative
apogamy, if the mother cells of the sporophyte carry
only the haploid chromosome number.
(C) Parthenogenesis, the apomictic origin of a sporo-
phyte from an egg, is subdivided into (a) somatic par-
thenogenesis, if the egg possesses a nucleus with the
diploid or unreduced chromosome number, and (b) gener-
ative parthenogenesis, if the nucleus of the egg is pro-
vided with only the haploid number of chromosomes.
Winkler remarks, it is probable that the relations be-
tween somatic apogamy and apospory are very close, as
the former without the latter is surely not thinkable,
while the latter (the primary proceeding) may exist
without somatic apogamy. Examples of somatic apog-
amy are given, but no certain cases of generative apog-
amy are known; nevertheless, Winkler is very certain
that their existence is possible.
Somatic parthenogenesis can be obtained in two ways:
first, it can combine with apospory, that is, a normal
284 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
sporophyte cell with the diploid number of chromosomes
can grow directly into the gametophyte; second, the
gametophyte can arise from the spores in the usual man-
ner, except that the reduction division is discontinued.
Examples are known for both cases. After discussing
the cell division of the more interesting cases of somatic
parthenogenesis, he sums up the families in which it
occurs, as follows:
1. Polypodiacee (Athyrium Filix-femina var. claris-
sima Bolton and var. wnco-glomeratum Stansfield ; Scolo-
pendrium vulgare var. crispum Drummonde).
2. Marsiliacee (Marsilia Drummondii R. Br.).
3. Ranuneculacee (Thalictrum purpurascens, Th.
Fendleri).
4. Rosacee (Alchimilla § Eualchimilla).
5. Thymelæaceæ (Wikstroemia indica).
6. Composite (Antennaria alpina, A. fallax, A. neo-
dioica; Taraxacum; Hieracium § Archieracium and
§ Pilosella, almost completely).
According to Juel (1900, 1904), Murbeck (1901), Guérin
(1904) and, Strasburger (1904, 1907), somatic partheno-
genesis is simply a vegetative process, the egg being
merely an ovate-shaped body cell of the sporophyte.
Winkler disagrees with this opinion, for if it be true, the
female individuals of parthenogenetic plants could pro-
duce only female offspring. But this is not the case, for
from parthenogenetic seed of Thalictrum Fendleri, Day
obtained seeds which yielded abundantly staminate and
pistillate plants. Thus, it is conclusively proven that »
cells are not always equivalent, even though they are
physiologically and morphologically alike.
Two theoretical cases of generative parthenogenesis
are given as thinkable; first, the whole cycle of develop-
ment could occur without a change in the number of chro-
mosomes, that is, the haploid number is retained through-
out; second, a regenerative doubling of the chromosomes
could appear in the development of an egg with the hap-
loid number into the sporophyte. No examples of the
latter are known to occur in the plant kingdom.
No. 557] PARTHENOGENESIS IN NICOTIANA 285
Merogany (Merogonie) is given a brief notice. This
expression was first used by Delage (1899), for the suc-
cessful fertilization of a denucleated fragment of an egg
by a spermatozoon. It was established in animals by O.
and R. Hertwig (1887) and Boveri (1889) and in the
plant Cystosira barbata by Winkler (1901).
Parthenocarpy is more fully discussed, as it has much
in common with both parthenogenesis and apogamy, and
_ isa great source of danger in investigations made to de-
termine their presence or absence. Noll (1902) intro- —
duced the term, and defined it as the capacity of many
plants, under exclusion of pollen, to form fruits out-
wardly normal, but in which seeds are absent or aborted.
This condition was discovered by the elder Gartner
(1788) who named it ‘‘frutificatio spuria’’ and was for
the first time critically investigated by the younger Gärt-
ner (1844), who called it ‘‘Fruchtungsvermégen.’’
Winkler thinks that it might be possible to separate the
cases of stimulative parthenocarpy, in which the seedless
fruits are produced only after pollination with their own
or foreign pollen or in consequence of an insect prick or
some other irritation; and the cases of vegetative par-
thenocarpy, in which the seedless fruits are formed with-
out any pollination or other outer irritation. The latter
phenomenon is thought to occur less frequently than the
former. Noll in 1902 described it in the cucumber
(Gurke) ard mentioned the then known cases, the fig and
the seedless medlar. Ewert? has found that several kinds
of fruit can develop without the assistance of pollen.
The best results were obtained when all the blossoms
of an individual plant were protected from fertilization,
as otherwise the fertilized flowers were so markedly
favored in their development when compared with the
remaining unfertilized ones, that the latter dropped while
immature.
*Ewert (1909, 1911) has noted the presence of parthenocarpy in the
apple, pear, grape and gooseberry, and Kirschner (1900) has noted the
same in the quince.
286 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
The relation between parthenocarpy and partheno-
genesis of higher plants is very close, as all the known
eases of parthenogenesis are associated with partheno-
earpy, for not only embryos and seeds, but fruits develop
at the same time without fertilization. Since both fruits
and seeds which appear perfectly normal will develop,
although they are without embryos, one can not be posi-
tive about parthenogenesis unless the presence of the
embryo is ascertained.
In the discussion on the causes of parthenogenesis and
apogamy, Winkler suggests the possibility of physico-
chemical changes operating in a flower in consequence of
non-pollination, and causing the parthenogenetic de-
velopment of the ovules. Also, similar changes might be
induced by the entrance of the pollen tube, even though
fertilization did not take place, as when parthenocarpic
fruits appear. If mutations occur which can supply the
proper conditions for these physico-chemical changes,
then it is possible to explain the inheritance of the par-
thenogenetic character after it has once appeared.
Physical changes in the cytoplasm surrounding the egg,
as well as changes in the osmotic pressure, are considered
as only theoretical explanations for parthenogenesis. If
they should be a cause, Winkler asks, why should these
changes occur in some flowers and not in others; and if
they appear in all flowers, why should not parthenoge-
netic embryo formations occur in all? |
One who is not acquainted with Winkler’s and Blar-
inghem’s papers should refer to the originals, as it
is impossible to give all the subject matter proper treat-
ment in a brief review. The complete bibliographies
appended to these papers are also well worthy of refer-
ence,
TESTS FOR THE Presence or NATURAL PARTHENOGENESIS
IN THE GeNus NICOTIANA
The writer obtained no viable seed in his numerous
castration experiments with the exception of one doubt-
No. 557] ##PARTHENOGENESIS IN NICOTIANA 287
ful case of N. plumbaginifolia. The seed of this excep-
tion was secured in a field experiment conducted on the
heavy clay loam of western New York, used as a check
on the experiments of Professor Hast made on the light
sandy loam of eastern Massachusetts. Since the seed
from this one capsule of N. plumbaginifolia was all that
was obtained from ninety-eight emasculated blossoms of
this species, it is reasonable to treat it as the result of an
experimental error.
The method of testing for parthenogenesis in these
field experiments consisted simply in emasculating and
covering the flowers. Both paper sacks and cotton bat-
ting were used to protect the stigmas from self or cross-
pollination. When the latter covering was used the
anthers were removed with the assistance of a small wire
hook which minimized the injury to the corolla and the
cotton wad was then fastened over the end of the corolla
tube with the aid of a rubber band. The supposed ad-
vantage of the cotton batting was that it would interfere
less with the photosynthesis processes, than the paper
sack, as it excludes much less air and sunlight. The seed
of N. plumbaginifolia was obtained from a capsule
covered with the cotton batting; otherwise, no definite
results were noted in favor of either covering. As the
heavy rains and strong winds will break off the capsules
covered with cotton, it is advisable to enclose them with
netting sacks.
The extent of these emasculation experiments of Pro-
fessor East and myself in which not a single seed was
produced outside of the capsule of N. plumbaginifolia
already noted, is already seen by referring to Table I.
Mrs. R. H. Thomas was much more fortunate in her
emasculation work, as she obtained fertile seed with no
apparent difficulty. Why parthenogenetic tobacco seed
should develop so readily in England and so rarely, if
ever, in the eastern part of the United States is difficult
to understand. The explanation may be found in the
differences of the soils and the climatic conditions of the
288 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
two places, but this assumption is improbable. It seems
more likely that new buds which escaped notice were
developed in the course of her experiments. This ex-
planation of these divergent results is very probable, as
adventitious buds appear for several weeks after the
formation of the first buds. Both self-fertilized and par-
thenogenetic blossoms produce offspring true to the
mother species; and consequently an error, if it did oc-
cur, could not be detected.
.
TABLE I
FIELD CASTRATION EXPERIMENT
Mass. N.Y.
Species „2 Elsa
S E Treatment ZAE Treatment No. Seed
N. > var. grandiflora. ..|14 Emas. and covered | 0 Emas. and covered
N: dienuaig 22k oe 17| Emas. and covered 0
N. So sales Sid eS oe, 12 | Emas. and covered | 0
N. Forgetiana....:... `... .| 20 | Emas. and covered | 0
N uho a a aa 8| Emas. and covered | 0
N. Langsdorffiit........... 12 | Emas. and covered | 0 | 54| Emas. and covered 0
N. Langsdorffit var. grandi- 3
OS... eee 8| Emas. and covered | 0 | 87| Emas. and covered 0
N. basso Biel oo)! pee rn peas 16 | Emas. and covered | 0 | 45| Emas. and covered 0
N. paniculata. oa. 1| Emas. and covered | 0
N. oraraa Cr wee 11 | Emas. and covered | 0 | 98| Emas. and covered Several
(1 capsule)
N. quadrivalvis... ...... ʻ.|14 | Emas. and covered | 0
N. rustica var. brazilica. . 14 | Emas. and covered | 0 | 16) Emas. and covered 0
N. rustica var. humilis..... “| 20 Emas. and covered | 0 |113, Emas. and covered 0
N. sna Ho var. tevana..... 12 | Emas. and covered | 0
NV. suavedions; 6. eo 3. 0 | Emas. and covered | 0 | 13| Emas. and covered 0
N. rere: (broadleaf)....|10| Emas. and covered | 0 | 11| Emas. and covered 0
N. tabacum (calyciflora) . . 83| Emas. and covered 0
N. tabacum (fasciated)....| 14 Emas. and covered | 0
N. tabacum (Havana)..... 28 | Emas. and covered | 0
N. tabacum (Sumatra)... .. 16 | Emas. and covered | 0 | 74| Emas. and covered 0
N. tabacum var. fruticosa . . 77| Emas. and covered 0
N. v T0-
phylla purpurea..... 33 Joana
EXPERIMENTS ON THE ARTIFICIAL PRODUCTION oF APOMIC-
TIC SEED IN THE GENUS NICOTIANA
For the simplification of the following subject matter,
the experimental procedures used in the attempted pro-
duction of parthenogenetic seed have been divided into
four classes, namely, the effects of foreign pollen, of
mutilation, of fumigation, and of injections.
No. 557] PARTHENOGENESIS IN NICOTIANA 289
THE EFFECTS oF Foreign POLLEN
Gärtner (Burbidge, 1877), while making species
crosses, obtained seed in a few cases which produced
plants true to the maternal species and also true hybrids.
Mrs. R. H. Thomas (1909) and Professor E. M. East-
have also observed the same phenomenon in their work.
Professor East’s results were as follows:
Seed was obtained which produced plants like the
mother species and also true hybrids, from crosses
N. paniculatat X N. alata var. grandiflora, N. rustica X
N. tabacum, and N. tabacum X N. Bigelovii; seed which
produced plants like the mother species and no true hy-
brids, from crosses N. paniculata X N. Langsdorfii,
N. paniculata X N. longiflora, N. paniculata X N. For-
getiana, and N. Bigelovii X N. sylvestris; and seed which
produced no true hybrids on one occasion but did pro-
duce true hybrids on other occasions, from cross N. taba-
cum var. lancifolia X N. alata var. grandiflora. These
crosses gave per capsule from one to twenty-five good
seeds that produced plants true to the mother parent,
and many angular and undeveloped seed that produced
very few hybrids. In the cases where no hybrids were
produced, abortive seeds—probably hybrid in character
—were present.
These seeds, true to the mother species, are thought
by Professor East to be due to adventitious embryos
arising from the tissue of the nucellus, for no case of
seed formation after simple castration occurred in some
hundreds of experiments, nor did seed giving maternal
plants arise in any but wide species crosses giving sterile
or nearly sterile progeny. If such be the case, partheno-
genesis did not occur in these crosses.
Pollen grains of certain species in the plant kingdom
are known to be capable of instigating the development
of parthenocarpiec fruits and of polyembryonic seed of
foreign species, but whether they can cause the partheno-
genetic development of ovules is still a question; even
* The authorities for the specific names of the Nicotiana species used in
these experiments are given on p. 23
290 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
though varieties of Vitis vinifera have been noted by
Millardet (1901) as giving only Vitis vinifera progeny,
when pollinated by Ampelopsis hederacea. Examples of
the parthenocarpic fruits, however, are common. The
writer, while attempting to cross the tomato with the
Jerusalem Cherry (Solanum Pseudo-capsicum) obtained
parthenocarpic tomato fruits, but no fruit of any kind
developed when the reciprocal cross was made. Parthe-
nocarpic Seckel pear fruits were also produced by the
application of Yellow Transparent apple pollen. In the
crosses between Nicotiana species already mentioned,
seed true to the mother parent was produced; but as in
the case of the Vitis vinifera, there is no positive proof
of a parthenogenetic development. What stimulatory
effect is imparted by the pollen grain must be due either
to an irritation caused by the entrance of the pollen tube
or to the exudation of a ‘‘growth enzyme.”’
THe Errects or MUTILATION
The floral and axial organs of the plants were muti-
lated by emasculation, by the removal of the anthers, by
decapitation, by the removal of both the stigmas and
anthers, and by burning various portions of young buds,
with the object of upsetting the normal functional proc-
esses in such a way as to incite the parthenogenetic de-
velopment of seed. To simple emasculation and decapi-
tation were added several modifications. Emasculated
buds were covered with both paper bags and celluloid
covers, but no advantages in favor of either covering
could be detected. The decapitated buds were covered
with the same two coverings, and in addition buds were
left uncovered, but no differences in the results of these
three methods were noted. Theoretically, the buds pro-
vided with the greatest amount of light and air should
be favored in their development, but in this particular
case, the results did not permit one to draw conclusions,
since only negative results were obtained. Since cap-
sules of N. tabacum were found to develop from polli-
nated flowers as well under the paper bags as under the
No. 557] PARTHENOGENESIS IN NICOTIANA 291
celluloid covers, the latter covering was soon discarded.
The advantages of the paper bags are, first, they cover
a great many buds and, second, they are put on and re-
moved very easily.
Clusters of buds that had been emasculated as well as
those that had been decapitated were also ringed a few
inches below the buds. The operation was performed
with the hope that the food stored above the injury would
upset the natural equilibrium of nutrition in such a way
as to cause the development of the ovules. In these ring-
ing experiments only negative results were obtained, al-
though Ewert found that injuries to gooseberry branches
favored the development of parthenocarpic fruits.
Neither the tickling of N. tabacum buds, varying in
size from small to large, with a camel’s hair brush every
half hour for five consecutive hours, nor the cutting of
the bases of N. suaveolens and N. commutata buds, with
the point of a scalpel, gave results. Professor East has,
however, produced a slight swelling in the capsules, but
no seeds, by occasionally tickling the buds of the follow-
ing species with a sharp-pointed instrument—N. tabacum
(vars. fasciated, Sumatra, broadleaf, and Havana),
N. alata, N. Bigelovii, N. Forgetiana, N. glutinosa,
N. Langsdorfii, N. Langsdorffii var. grandiflora, N. long-
iflora, N. paniculata, N. plumbaginifolia, N. quadrival-
vis, N. rustica (vars. humilis, brazilica, and texana).
Stimulation was also attempted, as already noted, by
burning or rather singeing buds varying in development
from very young to nearly mature, with a heated plati-
num wire. The hot wire was applied to various portions
of the buds, namely, to the base, to the top of the ovary,
the stigma, and to both the stigma and the ovary. When
the pistils were not injured, the blossoms were covered
with bags, but covering was not considered essential
when the pistils were made functionless. N. Langsdorffi
var. grandiflora. and N. plumbaginifolia gave no results,
but one capsule of N. tabacum produced fifty-six appa-
rently normal seeds—none of which germinated after a
292 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
period of several months’ rest. The stage of maturity
and the parts burned of each bud were not recorded and
therefore the condition and exact treatment of this par-
ticular bud are unknown.
As a check on the uncovered decapitated pistils,® pollen
from the same and other varieties was applied directly
to the cut surface of the styles; in addition to pollen, cane-
sugar solutions varying from 25 per cent. to 50 per cent.
in strength,® stigmatic fluids, and in one instance nectar
taken from the base of buds, were also applied. If the
shortened pistils could be fertilized, it was thought that
certain impossible crosses, as N. alata X N. Forgetiana
and Mirabilis Jalapa X M. longiflora might be made,
providing the difficulty existed in the extreme length of
the styles. In one case, the applied stigmatic fiuid and
the pollen grains were taken from the same species. This
precaution was used, as it was thought that the stigmatic
fluid of one species might contain an enzyme or an in-
hibiting substance which would prevent the germination
of foreign pollen grains. This supposition was sup-
ported by the growth of pollen grains in stigmatic fluids
placed within Van Tieghem cells. For instance, the
N. glauca pollen grains germinated and made good
growth in the stigmatic fluid taken from N. glauca plants,
while N. suaveolens pollen grains did not extend their
pollen tubes in the stigmatic fluid taken from N. For-
getiana. If the tissue of the style contains an inhibiting
agent, also, the germination of pollen grains on the cut
style would be of no benefit. (This supposition may ex-
plain the negative results.7)
Ewert (1909) quotes Gärtner who states that Henschel obtained seven
ripe fertile seed from six blossoms of Salvia sclarea whose pistils had been
destroyed, and four abortive seeds from three capsules of Polemonium
gracile whose pistils had also been destroyed.
“A 334 per cent. strength was used in the later work, as the pollen
grains of N. glauca, N. longiflora and N. tabacum germinated readily and
made good growth in this solution.
* The presence of one or more inhibiting agents might be used to explain
the failure of grafts between plant species, for they may act like the anti-
bodies, produced in animals by the transference of the blood of one species
to that of another, and cause death.
No. 557] PARTHENOGENESIS IN NICOTIANA 293
Whether the pollen tubes in these experiments reached
the ovules is not known, but probably not, since no fertile
seed was produced. The production of numerous seed
normal in appearance indicates, however, either that the
pollen tubes must have stimulated the nucellus tissue in
some way, or that normal seed development was started
but not finished, for no seed of any kind was produced in
the decapitated blossoms where pollen grains were not
applied.
The total abortive seed produced by the nallaniión of
the decapitated styles included two from N. tabacum
where the stubs were covered with 50 per cent. cane
sugar solution and self-pollinated, four from the same
species where the stubs were covered with stigmatic fluid
and self-pollinated, twenty-seven from N. paniculata
where the stubs were covered with stigmatic fluid and
self-pollinated, and fourteen from N. tabacum where
N. Forgetiana pollen and no fluid was applied.
In connection with the decapitation experiments, an
experiment on the grafting of pistils? was conducted.
One hypothesis for the non-crossing of certain species,
as has already been mentioned, is the extraordinary
length of the style. By removing a portion of the style
and grafting the stigma end of a pistil of either the same
or another species to the stub, the style was shortened
from one to one and a half inches. Immediately after
grafting, the stigmas were pollinated. From one of the
five grafted N. tabacum blossoms was produced one abor-
tive seed. The development of this one seed may or may
not have been due to the penetration of one or more
pollen tubes, as in the cases where pollen grains were
applied directly to the decapitated pistils.
*The grafting technique is simple, nevertheless, the operation is difficult,
owing to the small size of the styles. A light splinter was first attached to
the base of the style by means of collodion, then the upper portion of the
style was removed with a sharp knife. The end of the pistil to be grafted
on the stub was cut off at the same angle and placed on the stub and made
fast with the collodion:
THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
294
“seule
‘spnq jo eseq pesuig | 0 pus arm “4d 4ox7 z "e pyofrnboqwunyd *N
“seule
; ‘seuss pesulg | 0 pue ər “4d 40H O Po `` *pomauvd 'N
0 UnNIDQD I, `N resns '}4uə9 sad Gg ‘deoaq iG Bags Cee Nama cde vmpmanuvd * A
"BAR AOQS poog 22 PS JPS dood e roo Mice ay ee Dypynaiund *
0 pesseq pus 'deoaq | ¢ pa a “Dypynovund `N
‘aATZIOGB’ paag | T pesseq pure ‘seu ZI Pe ee **pypynavund *
*‘quiod jodjeos
PA spg R eseq I) 0 eee pus mo 2 ne ries ea ygopsbuvT *N
‘SBU
‘spnq jo əseq pesuig | 0 pus anm “9d 30H E ee ufuopsbuv] *N
0 puniyabloyy `N Ivdns “jue0 Jad fgg ‘deoa q yo peee ufiopshbuv ‘N
0 nunyab1og *N HS ‘deoa q en ee vpopsbuvT `N
seule
‘seuns pesuIg | 0 pue ər “9d 40H Ge aa ..r'.. 1 OOnDO N
0 pesseq pus “deq I ee O e a n s e a ponmi ‘N
0 ‘deoo q A a eS tess * ponb N
0 pə19409 pug ‘SEUN G Y CRTANE RS: eee *ponmb ‘N
0 uguopsbuvT `N vgopsbuvT * “deoog ee eee Sy punyabsog `N
0 pəIə409 puv ‘seum E Secs * DUDYADLO A N
0 JPS iesns "yuo 13d gg *deooq Į DALOUPUDAD “IBA DIDID * N
0 DLDPUny *N iesns “yueo Jad fog “deo q I DALOYIPUDAD *IBA DIDID `N
0 wffLopsBun'T 'N qens *}uə9 19d s “duq Z DLOYIUPUD4D “IBA DIDID *N
0 DUuDniyabLo N regns *yu00 Jed fgg "desa q A DLOYIPUDAD “IBA DIW `N
0 FPS Hels ‘duooq Z D4OfIpuD4D “IVA MDW `N
0 DDPUDS * AT JPS dese I pLoyipunib ‘IGA DDIW * NV
0 punyabiog *N FPS “deooq Z ‘* DLOIpUDAD ‘IBA DPW `N
à 819}
syavuoy tty uod | PMLI ‘SNS quomywesy, =e “ant sopoodg
Il ATaVL `
ASAOH ƏNIDUOJ—SINAIWINAJXY NOILYTILAWN
295
PARTHENOGENESIS IN NICOTIANA
No. 557]
"SOLIBAO "SBU
pux svuisys yoq pəZuig| 0 pueg orm "4d 40H Ph fs ae Unm * NT
‘afnsdvoa əuo ur əuroq ‘SBU
paag “sBULaTyS pesuig | 99 pue əm 4d 40H Err Beee Unm * N
0 JPS 18409 N “dusoqq I oo. ws 4:0 > oS oe ee UNIV) ‘N
‘ajnsdvo əuo UI puNnoy paag | g JPS resns "yu90 Jad QG *deoaq E IE ee Unm *N
0 Dnb * N 183ns '4ua Jad gg “deq to Pe E KEN A wung N
0 DUDUIDLOA *N Iedns '4ua Jed fgg ‘deIa q TO ED FOO Crn UnIoq `N
0 pə3u pues "duq g ae eee EREN wmnanqn} . N
I JPS peyyeas pug "deaa q HEFL ee Re ea Je N, Uno} ‘N
0 pomon pueseug | g | [retest tees eee: unmg "N
0 posult pus ‘SEU cL. +e eee eto ewer N ungDpqn ‘N
0 pamaos pue wew |: OF | PT poe arer * Unm *N
‘so[nsdvo 19440
ul pəəs əuo pur əpms
-dvd əuo ur spəəs ðYL/ 9 jPS 0 poned pie <d00ed i Se 1 gt re ee wnIDqGn} *N
“eNO
əuo UL poureju0a posg| FT punyablog *N 0 pouted pus -deoere tt dc Br es a ar Uno * N
0 pə19409 pus ‘deooq et ge ete eee unovqgn} 'N
"urod yedyeos
qm spnq jo eseq Moj 0 pM fo TE pee 8uaj0aapns *N
0 punyablog *N JPS "deq nne o Treun SUNONDNSE * N
0 DUDYIBLO H] 'N JPS "deq E E a EA R ənsnpung N
0 “deI q CP PLECARE an. LOPUD N
syaeuoy at uəjlod | pmi “39g juourywasy, ae sojoodg
(panwjuop) IT ATIAVL
296 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
The mutilation experiments all proved to be valueless
in the production of fertile seed; nevertheless, they were
interesting, since they were the only methods, except
where actual crosses were made and where chloroform
gas was used, which caused any seed development.
(See Table II—Mutilation Experiments.)
EFFECTS or EF uMIGATION
Several species, the names of which are listed in Table
III, were exposed before the plants had reached the flow-
ering stage to gases given off by acetone, carbon tetra-
chloride, chloroform, ether, ethyl acetate, ethyl bromide,
ethyl chloride, ethyl iodide, and formaldehyde. As in
the previous experiments, the buds were emasculated
and bagged. The object of this experiment, as of the one
on mutilation of the plants, was to endeavor to upset the
normal development of the floral organs in such a way as
to cause the production of seed without the aid of fertili-
zation.
The methods used in conducting this experiment were
simple. Plants, growing in six-inch pots, were fumigated
approximately one seventh of a cubic foot when drawn
in at the top. The bags were closed either around the
stems which had been previously surrounded with cotton
batting or about the top of the pots, the method of treat-
ment depending on the height of the plants. When
everything was in readiness for fumigation, the gas was
set free by the opening of the vial which was glued to the
interior of the bag. Though the seams and the bottoms
of the bags were sealed by melted paraffine, the retention
of all the gas was not expected. A sufficient quantity
was present, however, when acetone and formaldehyde
were used, for the foliage of the plants, treated with these
gases, to become noticeably injured.
297
No. 557] PARTHENOGENESIS IN NICOTIANA
TABLE III
FUMIGATION EXPERIMENTS— FORCING HOUSE
$2. 3|
Species Ht. oo Liquid np t AE, Remarks
990| g
N. alata var. grandiflora... 3 Ethyl acetate | 8 24] O | Leaves drooped, three cap-
sules developed.
N. oe? var. grandiflora. . 13 Ethyl acetate | 12 |24| 0 | Leaves drooped.
Ni PNQUOON fe. has cok, 4 Acetone 12 | 40| O | Several eae injured.
N. Bigelovii A ae 2h « ~ |12}40/ 0 | Slight injury.
Dewey's Sport No. 1...... 5 Ethyl acetate 4/43) 0 td pirni
Dewey's Sport No. 1...... 94 Ethyl acetate | 4|72| 0 ury, six capsules
develope d.
Dewey’s Sport No. 1...... 44 Ethyl acetate | 6/43) 0 injury.
Dewey’s Sport No.1...... 93 Ethyl acetate | 6/72} 0 No injury, three capsules
develop
Dewey’s Sport No.1...... 5 Chloroform 2|43| 0 o injury
Dewey's Sport No.1...... 12} Chloroform 2 |72| 0 bye e capsule had six locules,
— developed.
Dewey’s Sport No. 1...... 4 Chloroform 4/43) 0 No in
Dewey’s Sport No.1...... 93 Chloroform 4|72| 0 | No tly one capsule
developed.
Dewey's Sport No.1...... 6 Formaldehyde | 4/43} 0
Dewey’s Sport No. 1...... 134 Formaldehyde | 4 |72| 0 | Five capsules developed.
Dewey’s Sport No. 1...... 33 CCl: 4 |43| 0 | No inj
Dewey’s Sport No.1...... 9} CCh 4|72| 0 injury, four capsules
developed.
Dewey's Sport No. 1...... 54 CCl 6 | 43] 0 | No injury.
Dewey's Sport No.1...... 114 CCl 6|72| 0 | No injury, five capsules
develop
N. Forgetiana............ 14 Formaldehyde | 8 |72| 0
N. longifiora............. Ethyl chloride | 12 24| 0 | Four capsules developed.
N. longiflora ean ean Sessile Ethyl i 12 | 24] 0
N. longiflora eG ats Er AE ssil thyl i 12 |24| 0 Ei capsules developed.
N. longiflora SR Serene 22 Ethyl acetate |12 |24| 0 | Two capsules developed.
N. longiflora ete sg cure Sessile Ethyl acetate |12 |24| 0 Four capsules developed.
N. paniculata............ 4} | Ethyl bromide | 2 |22| 0 | No injury.
N: paniculata..........., 5 Ethyl bromide | 4 | 22] 0 | No injury
N. panicylata............ Ethyl bromide | 6 |20| 0 | Cover a bell-jar—not a
gradi
N. paniculata............ 6} | Ethyl bromide | 8|72| 0 | No inj
N. paniculata............ 64 Ethyl bromide | 12|72| 0 | No iniy, seven capsules
; developed.
N. MaG, inn 6 Formaldehyde | 4 |20| 0
N. paniculata............ 7 Formaldehyde | 2/20} 0
N. paniculata............ 54 Acetone 2 |22 | 0 | Slight injury to foliage.
N. paniculata............ 7 Acetone 4 | 22} 0 | No injury to fo
N. paniculata............ 103 Chloroform 1|22| 2 F sic abe one capsule
evelo
N. paniculata..........., 10 Chloroform 2/22; 0 o injury:
N. paniculata...” 11 Ether 4|22| 0 | No injury
N. plumbaginifolia... ..... Short Ether 12 |24| 0
N. plumbaginifolia... Short 12 |24| 0
N. plumbaginifolia... 104 Ethyl iodide 8|24| 0
N. plumbaginifolia... ` 14} Ethyl iodide | 8|24/ 0
+ Plumbaginifolia....... . 13 Ethyl bromide |12 |40 | 0 | One capsule developed.
N. quadrivalvis... st Ethyl bromide |12 |24| 0 Ne ar wih one capsule
V
298
THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
TABLE III (Continued)
Untreated plants of all bey above species were
f
of each test
val F
S Ht. Plant, Liquid Pyr E A: Remarks
OO} g
N: quadrivalvis.. 2.2 oes. 93 Ethyl bromide | 12 | 24 | 0 | No alia two capsules
develop
N. quadrivalvis: icnn 8 Ethyl bromide | 8 | 24} 0 o tei “two capsules
T ed.
N. quadrivalvis........... 10 Ethyl bromide | 8 |24| 0 | No
N. quadrivalvis.. ......... 7 Ethyl chloride | 12 |24| 0 Three pape developed.
N. quadrivalvis........... 6 Ethyl chloride | 12 |24| 0 | Three capsules developed.
N, quadrwalvig ici. Oe. os 9 CCl 4 |22| 0 | No injury
N. quadrivalvis......0.55... 12 Ch 2|22| 0 | No injury.
N. rustica var. texana..... 6ł Acetone 4 |43| 0 | No apparent injury.
N. rustica var. terana..... 203 Acetone 4|72| 0 | Terminal growth pe foie:
four capsules dev eloped.
N. rustica var. terana..... 9 Acetone 6|43 | O | Terminal leaves, slightly
N. rustica var. texana..... 21} Acetone 6|72| 0 One Teat injured, four cap-
Ar de
N. rustica var. texana..... 5 Ethyl bromide.| 4/43] 0 njury.
N. rustica var. terana..... 17 Ethyl bromide | 4|72| 0 No insur, seven capsules
dev
N. rustica var. texana..... 53 Ethyl bromide | 6| 43] 0 | One leaf slightly —
N. rustica var. terana..... 17% Ethyl bromide | 6|72| 0 | One termi inal blosso
leafy, six capsules s de-
ane ve
N. rus var. terana..... 7 Ether 4/43); 0 | No
N. rustica var. terana..... 15% Ether 4/7210 Terminal. bud injured and
produced leafy blossom.
Eight capsules devel-
oped.
N. rustica var. terana..... 6 Ether 6 |43| 0 | No injury.
N. rustica var. texana..... 18 Ether 6|72| 0 | No injury, thirteen cap-
developed.
N. Bandara i050. aaa. Chloroform 8|24| 0 | No injury, three capsules
develop
N. Bandara ii ra Chloroform 12 |24| 0 o awa " one capsule
dev
N. syloestrie io cso) Sessile Chloroform | 12} 24} 0 Leaves toana) turned yel-
h after two days-
N, eyloestria 65 SA Sessile Chloroform 12/24/10
N. ayluesiria. s 6 ote... Sessile Ether 8| 24] 0
N. alee ee Sessile Ether 8| 24] 0
N. syloestris co se Sessile CCl; 12 | 24 | 0 | No injury.
N. syluetivie: 6268. BAG. Sessile CCl: 12 |24| 0 o injury.
N. tabacum var. fruticosa 11 t 8|72| 0 | No injury.
N. tabacum var. fruticosa 54 Ether 12 |72| 0 | No injury.
N, tabacum var. fruticosa .. 74 Cl 8|72| 0 | No injury.
N. tabacum var. fruticosa 5} CCl: 12 |72 | 0 | No injury.
N. trigonophylla.......... 5 Ethyl bromide |12 |40| 0
N. trigonophylla.......... 1} Acetone 12 |40 | 0 | Leaves injured.
N. trigonophylla.......... 33 CCh 12|40| 0 | Noinjury,
held as checks on the wee
aes . texana plant produced one leafy terminal blosso
otherwise, all the shits were nied Ee
No. 557] PARTHENOGENESIS IN NICOTIANA 299
A N. paniculata plant treated with chloroform gave
two abortive seeds, but none of the other species produced
a seed. N. rustica var. texana, however, after two expos-
ures to acetone vapor underwent very marked morpho-
logical changes in the structure of the terminal blossoms,
both of the main and of the lateral stems. In other
words, the most exposed buds suffered the greatest in-
jury. As the ether, ethyl bromide, and check treatments
produced one blossom apiece which was similarly af-
fected, and no other species, even though treated with
acetone, was injured in the same way, indicates that the
N. rustica var. texana floral parts are somewhat un-
stable. This opinion is substantiated by Penzig who in
his Pflanzen-Teratologie cites observations where N. rus-
tica blossoms have been modified to such a degree that
the petals have turned green and where five blossoms
have been compressed into a common calyx. Perhaps
the presence of a small amount of chlorophyll in the
greenish yellow corollas is an indication of a close rela-
tionship of the petalous to the leafy condition. Even
though the N. rustica blossoms are easily modified, it is
very evident that the acetone vapor caused a disturbance
in the natural development of the floral organs, for the
two treated plants were affected in the same way and de-
gree. The calyxes, corollas and stamens were modified
markedly, while the carpels and pistils and most of the
stamens were usually normal in appearance. For in-
stance, in some cases the calyxes were fused together and
enlarged to such a size that they resembled distorted and
crinkled leaves. One blossom had three sepals fused to
the corolla and two sepals located one half inch below the
base of the blossom. The lower two had a node as dis-
tinct as any leaf on the branch, and within their axis were
borne two small buds, which lacked calyxes. One of the
upper three sepals also bore a similar naked bud in its
axis. It may be that in this case the acetone vapor
stunted the branches in such a way that many latent
buds were present in a very small space. The corollas
300 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
in some cases were entirely replaced by small green
leaves—smaller than the sepals—and in other cases they
were partially replaced by leafy tissue. A few stamens
had their filaments flattened and their anthers replaced
by asmall green leaf. These changes might be advanced,
as an evidence of the evolutionary development of the
floral organs, if the theory that these organs are simply
modified leaves and that reversions are frequently caused
by injuries were not already so well substantiated.
Whether any mutations might have occurred in the prog-
eny produced from these blossoms is unknown, as fer-
tilization of the ovules was not attempted. No partheno-
genetic seed was obtained from these injured blossoms,
and this might have been expected, since leafy forma-
‘ tions in the blossoms are generally accompanied by
sterility.
EFFECTS or LIQUID INJECTIONS
The forcing of liquids into the plants was performed
with the same object in view as in the preceding experi-
ments, viz., to endeavor to stimulate cell division and
thus possibly produce unfertilized seed. To certain
liquids has been ascribed the power of being able to cause
mutations when injected into the buds of certain plants,
but in this experiment all the injections were made
directly into stems of plants, eight to twenty inches in
height.
The apparatus used was simple. Glass capillary tubes
were connected by rubber tubing to glass tubes, about
30 inches long and about one quarter inch in diameter,
which contained the liquids. The rubber tubing permit-
ted the stems to lengthen without disturbing the opera-
tions. The end of the capillary tube was inserted from
one eighth inch to one quarter inch into the stem, the dis-
tance depending upon the diameter of the stems and 1
inch to 15 inches below the terminal bud. An application
of collodion held the capillary tube in place and stopped
all leakage. After having supported the tube, the pinch-
No. 557] PARTHENOGENESIS IN NICOTIANA 301
cock—previously fastened to the rubber tubing—was
released and the liquid flowed into the stem as rapidly as
it could be used by the plant. The injection was assisted
by the weight of its own column, and, in the most cases,
by the addition of a short column of mercury, suspended
by the surface tension of the liquid. The use of the mer-
cury required considerable care, for when the surface
tension was overcome by a jar, the mercury sank to the
bottom and plugged the capillary tubes.
The treated species were: N. tabacum var. fruticosa,
N. paniculata, N. Langsdorffi var. grandiflora, N. Langs-
dorffii, N. alata var. grandiflora, N. attenuata, and N.
Sandare.
The materials used for the injections are: Sodium phos-
phate, butyric and valerie acids, ethyl acetate, acetone,
benzol, chloroform, formaldehyde, methyl blue, saffranin
and thiazin. The last three are simply stains and were
used to trace the course of the liquids. The coloring
matter was found to follow the vascular bundles of the
stems and the leaves for several inches, and yet the
slightest trace was not discovered in the buds. Acetone,
butyric, and valeric acids of .5 per cent. strength caused
severe injury, formaldyhyde at 2 per cent. caused a
slight injury to the foliage, but no other liquid caused a
noticeable disturbance.
All the treated plants, as in the previous experiments,
had at least one cluster of buds emasculated and bagged,
but all to no purpose, since not even one abortive seed
developed.
SuMMARY
1. Seed giving plants true to the maternal species in
the F, generation accompanied by aborted seed prob-
ably hybrid in nature, was found when certain Nicotiana
species were cross-fertilized. Hybrid plants and plants
purely maternal were obtained from the same capsules in
other crosses.
2. The capsules of several Nicotiana species were
302 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
caused to swell slightly by merely tickling them with a
sharp-pointed instrument, but no seeds were produced.
3. Abortive seed probably without embryos was pro-
duced by singeing young buds with a hot platinum wire,
by the exposure of young plants to chloroform gas, and
by cutting away a portion of the pistil and pollinating
the stub both with and without the accompaniment of a
germinative fluid.
4. Abortive seed was produced by shortening the pis-
tils of a flower and grafting the stigma end of another
pistil on to the stub and pollinating the same.
5. The ringing of the branches below a cluster of buds
did not assist in the production of seed.
6. No seed was produced by the simple methods of
emasculation and decapitation of blossoms, except in one
doubtful case of N. plumbaginifolia.
7. It is likely that an agent inhibitory to the growth of
pollen grains is present in the stigmatic fluids of certain
species of the genus Nicotiana; at least, the pollen grains
of N. suaveolens did not germinate in N. Forgetiana
stigmatic fluid when placed within a Van Tieghem cell.
8. The exposure of young N. rustica var. texana plants
to acetone gas caused the transformation of the corollas
and the stamens of most of the terminal flowers into
leafy tissue; otherwise, except in the mentioned case of
the chloroform, no results were secured by the use of
anaesthetic and toxic gases.
9. The injection of chemicals into the stems of tobacco
plants was valueless in the production of seed.
10. As no unquestionable case of parthenogenetic seed
was produced in the several hundred trials, it seems very
improbable that parthenogenesis exists in the genus
Nicotiana—at least in the species tested. The seed ob-
tained in the crosses which came true to the mother
species is probably polyembryonic—the stimulus of de-
velopment being imparted either by the penetrating pol-
len tubes or by a substance exuded from the same.
No. 557] PARTHENOGENESIS IN NICOTIANA 303
NICOTIANA SPECIES USED IN THE EXPERIMENTS
N.alata Lk. & Otto var. grandi- N. rustica L. var. humilis Schrank.
flora Comes. N. rustica L. var. texana Comes.
N. attenuata Torr N.Sandare Hort. (hybrid)
N. Bigelovii Wats N. suaveolens Lehm
Dewey’s Sport No. 1. N. sylvestris Speg & Comes.
N. Forgetiana Sand. N. tabacum (broadleaf).
N. tabacum (ealyciflora).
N. glutinosa L. N. tabacum (fasciated).
N. Langsdorfii Weinm. N. tabacum (Havana).
N. Langsdorffii Weinm. var. gran- N. tabacum L. var. fruticosa Comes.
diflora Comes. N. tabacum var. lancifolia (W.)
Comes.
N. tabacum L. var. macrophylla
purpurea.
N. tabacum L. (Sumatra).
N. trigonophylla Dun.
N. plumbaginifolia Viv.
N. quadrivalvis Pursh.
N. rustica L. var. brazilica Schrank.
SELECTED BIBLIOGRAPHY
Bary, A. de (1878). Ueber apogame Farne und die Erscheinung der Apo-
gamie im Allgemeinen. Botan. Zeitung, Bd. 36, 1878,
Bateson, Ms Pi 9). Mendel’s Principles of Heredity. Cambridge; 1909,
249,
pp.
Pa (1839). Sur la formation des graines sans l’aide de la fécon-
dation, Ann. Se. Nat. Bot., 2 sér., t. XII, i
Bitter, G. (1904). Parthenogenesis wad Variabilität der Bryonia dioica.
Abh. d. Nat. Ver. zu Bremen, Ba. XIII, 1904, pp. 99-107.
Blaringhem, L. (1907). Mutation et traumatismes. Bull. scient. de la Fr.
a Belg., t. XLI, pp. 1-248.
(1907). Production d’une variété nouvelle d’Epinards, Spinacia
oleracea var. polygama. C. R. Ac. Sc., Paris, t. CXLVII.
—— (1909). La Parthénogénése des Plantes Supérieures, pp. 113-170.
Boveri, Th. (1889). Ein geschlechtlich erzeugter Organismus ohne miitter-
liche Eigenschaften. Sitzungsber. d. Gesellsch. f. Morphol. u. Physiol.
zu München, Bd. 5, 1 3.
paar A, (1857 A Üb Parthenogetlesis bei Pflanzen. Abhandt. d. kgl.
. a, pipes zu Berlin, Phys. K1., 1856, pp. 311-376.
Borbiage, F. W. (1877). The Propagation and Improvement of Culti-
vated Plants, Edinburgh and London, 1877, p. 543.
Camerarius, R. J. (1691 a.). Semina mori subventanea. Ephemerid. Germ.,
D
IX, p. 212.
=~ (2002 pt h mercurialis subventanea. Ephem. Germ., Dee. II,
p. 9
- (1694). De Sexu plantarum epistola. Ephem. Germ., Dec. ITI, Ann
IMI, p. 31. hem traduction allemande par M. re (Ostwald ’s
Klassiker, No.
304 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
Darwin, C. (1893). Variation of Animals and Plants under Domestication.
Second edition, revised. London, Vol. II, 1893, p. 1
Day, D. F. (1896). Parthenogenesis in Thalictrum Fendleri. Bot. Gaz.,
. 241,
2
Delage, Y. (1899). Etudes sur la mérogonie. Arch. de zoologie expérim.
et gén., 3 sér., T. 7,1 9, p. 383.
Ewert, R. (1906). Blutenbiologie und Tragbarkóii unserer Obstbäume.
La ndw. Jahrb., Bd. 35, 1906, pp. 259-287
—— (1907). Die Parthenocatpie oder Jungfernfrüchtigkeit der Obst-
a rlin
—— (1909). Neuere Untersuchungen über Parthanckarpie ca a
und einigen anderen fruchttragenden Gewiichsen. Landw. Jahrb., Bd.
XXXVIII, 1909, pp. 767-839.
—— (1910). Parthenokarpie bei der Stachelbeere. Ibid., Bd., XXXIX,
1910, pp. 463-470,
Farlow, W. G. (1874). An Asexual Growth from the Prothallus of Pteris
cretica. Quart. Jour. of Microse. Sci., Vol. 14, 1874, pp. 266-271.
Farmer, J. B., and Digby, L. (1907). Studies in Apospory and Apogamy
in Ferns. Ann. of Bot., Vol. 21, 1907, pp. 161-199.
Focke, W. O. (1881). Panji- Mischlin nge. Berlin, 1881, pp. 271-286.
Ganong, bie F. (1898). On polyembryony and its Morphilogy in Opuntia
, Ba. 25, 18 1
vu . 221,
Gärtner, J. (1788). De fructibus et seminibus plantarum. Stuttgard,
Gärtner, C. F. (1844). Versuche und Beobachtungen über die Befrucht-
ungsorgane der vollkommneren Gewächse. Stuttgart
—— (1849). Versuche und Beobachtungen über die Bastarderzeugung im
Pflanzenreich. Stuttgart, 1849.
Gasparrini, G. (1846). Origine de 1’embryon dans les graines des plantes
phanérogames. Ann. Sc. Nat. Bot., 3 sér., t. V, pp. 305-312.
Girou De Buzareingues (1828). La Génération. Paris, in-8°.
(1829). riences sur la génération des plantes. Ann. Se. Nat.,
sér. I, t. 16, pp. 140-
— (1830). Expériences « sur la génération des plantes. Ann. Sc. Nat.,
sér. I, t. 19, pp. 297-305
—— (1833). Expériences sur la génération des plantes. Ann. Sc. Nat.,
sér. I, t. 30, pp. 398—410.
Goebel, K. (1900). Organography of Plants. English edition by Balfour,
B Oxford, Pt. 1, 1900.
Guérin, P. (1904). Les connaissances actuelles sur la fécondation chez les
E is.
néroga:
Hertwig, O. u. R. (1887). Experimentelle cig age am thierischen Ei. Jen.
Zeitschr. f. Naturwiss., Bd. 20, 1887, pp. 120 u. 477.
Jost (1907). Ueber die Selbsterilitit einiger tien. Bot. Ztg., Heft V
? ,
Jost, L. (1907). Lectures on Plant Physiology. TE translation by
Gibson, H. J. ord, 1907.
Juel, O. (1898). Pasthieiesaete bei Antennaria alpina (L) R. Br. V. M.
Botan. Centralbl., 74, 1898, pp. 369-372.
—— (1900). Vergleichende Untersuchungen über typische und partheno-
No. 557] PARTHENOGENESIS IN NICOTIANA 305
sae ig Fortpflanzung bei der Gattung Antennaria. Kgl. svenska
k.-Akad. Handl., Bd. 33, No. 5, 1900, pp. 1-39.
inhi. O. (1900). Uber die kernlose Mispel. Jahresh. d. Vereins. f.
vaterl. Naturk. in Wurttemburg, 1
—— (1905). Parthenogenesis bei TEET REREN Ibid., Bd. 61, 1905,
pp. liii—liv.
Lecoq (1827). Recherches sur la reproduction des végétaux. Clermont
d’après de Candolle, A., Introduction à la Botanique, t. I, p. 549.
Massart, J. (1902). Sur la age Ps ocean Blu. der jard.
botan. de l’état à Bruxelles, Bd. . 3.
Millardet, A. (1901). Note sur la mia iaiia chez les Ampélidées.
Revue de Viticulture, T. 16, 1901, pp. 677—680.
Müller-Thurgau (1898). Abbiagigkelt der Ausbildung der Traubenbeeren
pes einiger anderer Früchte von der aH oa na der Samen. Landw.
hrb. der Schweiz., 1898, pp. 155,
Marbeck, Sv. (1901). E AA Embryobildung in der Gattung
hemilla. Lunds Univ. Arsskrift, Bd. 36, Afd. 2, No. 7, 1
Te ge 04). Parthenogenesis bei den Gattungen Taraxacum und Hiera-
cium. Bot. Notiser, 1904, p.
Nathanson, A. (1900). Ueber Parthenogenesis bei Marsilia und ihre
Abhängigkeit von der Temperatur. Ber. deutsch. Bot. Gaz., Bd. 18,
09.
Naudin, C. (1856). Observations relatives à la formation des graines sans
e secours du pollen. C. R. Ac. , t. n° 10
Nemec, B. (1902, 1903). Ueber ungesshieehtiishe Kernverschmelzungen. I.
IL. III. Sitzungsber. d. kgl. béhm. Gesellsch. d. Wissensch., 1902,
No. LIX, 1903, No. XXVII und No, XLII.
Noll, F. (1902). Taber Fruchtbildung ohne vorausgegangene Bestaiibung
(Partenoearpie) bei der Gurke. Sitewngsber. d. Niederrhein. Geselisch.
f. Natur. u. Heilk. zu Bonn, 1902, S.-A.
Ostenfeld, C. H. (1904). Zur Kent tnis der Apogamie in der Gattung
Hieracium. Ber, d. deutsch. bot. Gesellsch., Bd. XXII, 1904, p. 376.
ee (1906). Castention re Hybridization Experiments with some
Species of Hieracia. Botan. Tiddskr., Bd. 27, 1906, pp. 225-248.
—— u. Rosenberg, O. Holes ‘scans concerning apogamy and hybridiza-
tion of the Hieracia Series Zeitschr. f. Induk. Abstam, u.
10.
Gaz., Vol. 33, 1902, pp. 363-375
——— (1904). Ueber Parthenogenesis bei Thalictrum purpurascens. Ber. d.
deutsch. botan. Gesellsch., Bd. 22, 1904, pp. 274-283.
Penzig, O. (1894). Pfanzen- Terat logie. Genua, Bd. 2, 1894, p. 178.
Pfeffer, ee (1903). Physiology of Plants. English translation by Ewart,
, Oxford, Vol. TI, 1903.
onan O. (1906). Ueber die Embryobildung in der ray eg aban
B 161
306 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
Smith, J. (1841). Notice of a Plant which Produces Seed Without Any
ppa se Action of Pollen. Transact. of the Linn. Soc. London, Vol,
18, 1841, pp. 50
Spallanzani FR, iexpécienees pour servir à l’histoire de la génération
des animaux et des plantes. Genè
Strasburger, E. (1877). Ueber Debrecstany und Zelltheilung. Leipzig,
1877.
—— (1878). Ueber Polyembryonie. Jen. Zeitschr. f. Naturwiss., Bd. 12.
1878, pp. 647-670.
— (1904). Apogamie in Eualchemilla. Jahr. f. wiss. Bot., Bd. XLI,
1905, pp. 88-164.
ee (1907). Apogamie bei Marsilia. Flora, Bd. XCVII, 1907, pp.
123-191,
—— (1909). Zeitpunkt der Bestimmung des Geschlechts, Apogamie,
Parthenogenesis, und Reduktionsteilung. Histol. Beiträge, Heft VII,
1909
oot R. H. rg Parthenogenesis in Nicotiana. Mendel Jour., No.
1, 1909, pp.
Treub, M. ( a eds femelle et ee E a dans le Ficus hirta.
Vahl. Ebenda, 2 sér., T. 3, 1902, pp. 124-157.
Webber, H. J. (190 5). Neves on Citrus erir Am. Br. Assoc., Vol. 1,
9
Winkler, Hans (1908). Parthenogenesis und Apogamie in Pflanzenreiche,
Progr. rei bot., Bd. 11, Heft 3, 1908, pp. 293-454.
SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION
SIMPLIFIED MENDELIAN FORMULA
I was somewhat surprised by Morgan’s and Castle’s sugges-
tions for a simplification of Mendelian formule. My surprise
was not occasioned so much by the forms these suggestions took
as by the fact that any pronounced changes were deemed neces-
sary. I had not only employed the usual formule in my own
work but had found no difficulty worth mentioning in under-
standing the formule used by most other workers in Mendelian
fields. My experience with students in elementary courses in
genetics had not prepared me for the idea that such formule
were particularly difficult. Nevertheless I believe in simplifying
the formule if some system can be found that will be applicable
to all sorts of Mendelian inheritance. I believe, however, that I
have no right to adopt formule for my own cases, no matter how
simple they might be, if the same type of formula could not read-
ily be applied to the materials with which other investigators
are working. Such procedure on my part would result in no
end of confusion if followed by any considerable number of work-
ers each using his own special type of formula. The important
question now is not whether I prefer a new style of formula that
fits my case but whether it will fit all sorts of cases so that, if it
is an improvement on the old style, it can be adopted by others
and not necessitate the use of two styles where but one sufficed
before.
Let us examine Morgan’s and Castle’s suggestions in the
light of these remarks. Morgan’s principal objection to the usual
type of formula—that ‘‘it is not sufficiently elastic to allow the
introduction of a new term in the series, unless a complete re-
vision of the method is made each time that a new mutation in
kind oecurs’’—seems to me to have little merit. Morgan uses eye
color in Drosophila to illustrate his contention. Four eye colors
had been designated as follows: red PVO, vermilion pVO, pink
PvO, and orange pvO. A fifth color, eosin, arose and was found
to produce red when crossed with orange, and hence was as-
sumed to have the formula PVo. Morgan regards this as ‘‘in-
consistent with the scheme already adopted because the small
letter o stands for a character called eosin,’’ whereas the capital
letter P had been used for pink, O for orange, V for vermilion,
* AMERICAN NATURALIST, 47; 5-16, and 47: 170-182, 1913.
308 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
ete. Morgan’s trouble lies in the fact that he is attempting to
force a letter to represent a character rather than merely one of
the factors concerned in the development of that character or to
represent the character and one of the factors. As a matter of
fact, in the formula PVo, the character eosin is not represented
by o but by PV when O is absent (with the addition, perhaps, of
many factors as yet unknown). Similarly P does not stand for
pink but for one of the factors concerned in the production of
pink. One of the other factors concerned in the development of
pink Morgan has identified and named O; there are probably
other factors as yet unidentified. For orange he has identified
only a single factor and that is this same O. No one has shown
more clearly than Morgan that a character is not determined by
a single factor. Why then should it be thought necessary to
designate the first factor identified for any character, say pink,
by the initial letter of that word? It is quite likely that P is no
more important in the production of pink than is O. And it is
equally probable that O is no more concerned in the development
of orange than are perhaps a half dozen other factors not yet
identified. The logical thing in such cases is to adopt Baur’s
A-B-C- designations, which fit in readily with current Men-
delian usage. True, as Morgan insists, this necessitates the con-
stant use of a key. But what system does not? What is there in
Morgan’s PVO, or even in his later PVE, to suggest red color?
It is fortunate that Mendelians ‘‘have not always taken the
pains to state explicitly that the symbols represent both a factor
and a residuum,” for this, it seems to me, is not true. The re-
siduum left when any factor is lost is usually not represented
except by the few factors that have been identified in it. It is
careless without doubt to leave so much to be taken for granted,
but it would be cumbersome to have to write for pink
POS e
Perhaps we might use a single X to represent an unknown num-
ber of unidentified factors, or perhaps it would be as well to use
UR for this unexplored residuum.
I am inclined to agree fully with Castle that Morgan’s sugges-
tion for a change in the current Mendelian formule is ‘‘con-
fusion worse confounded,” but here our agreement stops. I can
see that it might be possible to do away with the use of small
letters, since on the presence-and-absence hypothesis they repre-
sent nothing but the absence of factors designated by the corre-
sponding capital letters. The designations of eye colors in
No. 557] SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION 309
Drosophila (if we adapt Morgan’s earlier scheme) would then
become PVO, VO, PO, PV and O, instead of PVO, pVO, PvO,
PVo and pvO, for red, vermilion, pink, eosin and orange re-
spectively. The great difficulty in thus leaving out the small
letters comes in distinguishing the heterozygous from the homo-
zygous condition. True we can let PVO stand for the hetero-
zygous condition of the three factors and PPVVOO for the
homozygous condition. Then PPVO would indicate what is
now commonly expressed by PPVvOo. But we now use the
single letters when we wish merely to designate phenotypic
differences or to indicate the factors in gametes, where of course
all factors are simplex, and employ duplicate letters only when
we desire to indicate genotypic differences. If then the small
letters are discarded, we shall need to use some arbitrary sign
to distinguish phenotypes from genotypes, else PVO might as
now stand for a group of phenotypically like individuals or for a
class having the genotypic constitution now commonly indicated
by PpVvOo.
But Castle’s suggestion is far from what is outlined above.
He would use no letter to represent red eye color in Drosophila
but merely write normal. For vermilion he would use v, for
pink p, for pink-vermilion pv, ete. My first notion on reading
the list of designations for eye color in fruit flies was that
Castle used them only as abbreviations for the names of the
colors, and v is keniiy a better abbreviation for vermilion than
is say Verm. or V’r’m’l’n. Now why, I thought, should one sug-
gest such character abbreviations as a revised Mendelian termi-
nology when Mendelism is concerned fundamentally with gametic
factors and only incidentally with the zygotic characters that
happen to develop through the interaction of particular com-
binations of gametic factors in a particular environment. But
Castle’s terminology is not concerned with mere abbreviations
for characters, as witness:
The revised terminology is more convenient than Morgan’s in calcu-
lating the expected result of any mating, and is equally reliable. The
results of every possible mating within the series can be readily com-
puted without the confusing presence of the large letters.
Here I must frankly admit that I have experienced great diffi-
culty in using Castle’s terminology in calculating the expected
results of matings in case of the eye colors in Drosophila, though
this is probably due to some misunderstanding of just how
-Castle’s formule are to be used. For instance, a cross of v
(vermilion) with p (pink) should, if ordinary usage were fol-
310 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
lowed, produce vp (vermilion-pink) whereas it actually pro-
duces red.
The use of capital letters for dominant factors and small
letters for recessive ones, while it may work well in some cases,
would be difficult of application in others. Brown color in
beans is dominant? to yellow but recessive to black. Shall we
then use B orb? True, Castle limits the use of the capital letter
to the ‘‘factor responsible for a variation which is dominant in
crosses with the normal’? (italics mine), but who is to say what
is the normal color of beans? The use of capital letters for some
characters and small letters for others is, however, a minor
matter and would not alone disqualify the proposed terminology.
When one is considering any new scheme, it is natural that he
should try it out on material with which he is familiar. I have,
therefore, attempted to apply Castle’s suggestions to aleurone
colors in maize. To make the matter as simple as possible, I
will leave out of consideration color patterns and also the vari-
ous dilutions or intensities of color and limit myself to the state-
ment that aleurone may be purple, red, or white. In an account
of certain crosses published last year? I made use of the symbols
‘suggested by East and Hayes: C a general color factor, È con-
cerned with C in the production of red, P resulting in purple
when both C and R are present, and J an inhibitor of color
development. I listed 14 kinds of white aleurone.* Now if we
were to adapt Castle’s formule for albino mice to these white
maize types, we might use wP for whites transmitting purple in
crosses, wr for whites transmitting red, and wPr for those trans-
mitting both purple and red. But there are seven kinds of
whites, all of which might yield purples in appropriate crosses
with non-purples. How shall we distinguish between them ?
Of course we could add to w the letters C, R, P, I or such ones
of these as might be necessary to indicate the factors latent in a
particular white, but wCRPI is no improvement over CEPI
from the standpoint of simplicity. Students in elementary
courses in genetics who have used maize for laboratory material
have had little trouble in caleulating that when a white maize
CCrrPpli is crossed with another white maize ccRRPpli there
*On the presence-and-absence hypothesis it is hardly allowable to speak
of the relation of two non-allelomorphic characters in terms of dominance.
Brown is epistatic to yellow and hypostatie to black: Each is dominant to
its own absence.
* AMERICAN NATURALIST, 46: 612-615, 1912.
*I now have much additional evidence for my assumption as to the dif-
ferent sorts of white aleurone.
No. 557] NOTES AND LITERATURE 311
should result, on the average out of every 16 grains in the first
generation, 3 purple, 1 red and 12 white grains. I do not doubt
that the calculation could be made with equal rapidity and
accuracy if the small letters were omitted and the capital letters
used in the same significance. The cross would then be:
CCPI X RRPI. The greatest difficulty with this plan would
come in designating the white now known as crpi, unless we
employ a mere dash, It is possible that there is some
simple way of applying Castle’s scheme to such a case as this,
a way which I have stupidly overlooked or perhaps I have not
understood the scheme at all. If there is some simple termi-
nology that is workable, I shall be glad to use it, but I must con-
fess to being suspicious of very simple formule for the complex
phenomena of inheritance. iA finka
UNIVERSITY OF NEBRASKA
THE INFLUENCE OF THE DEVELOPMENT OF AGRI-
CULTURE IN WYOMING UPON THE BIRD FAUNA
WYoMING is an interesting field of inquiry for the zoologist,
not only because it is new and unexplored, but because changing
agricultural conditions in the state have unbalanced the fauna,
so that new adjustments are taking place.
This is particularly true of the birds, and since going to the
state two years ago, I have been collecting data from various
sources to learn to what extent the former distribution of the
birds has been affected.
The larger part of Wyoming remains practically unchanged
as yet by the presence of man, but numerous towns have sprung
up, with the attendant planting of shade trees, which furnish
good nesting places for birds, and the same may be said of the
ranches. It is in these restricted areas that the changes in
adjustment may be expected to be most manifest.
Again the increased raising of grain in many localities has
produced a more abundant food supply for birds which live
largely upon seeds.
Old residents of the state, and collectors whose experience
extends over a period of several years, are almost universally
of the opinion that certain birds are much more abundant now
than formerly. In their replies to circular letters sent out,
they have frequently specified the species which have been
affected in this way. It will be readily seen that those men-
312 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
tioned are the ones which would be expected to show the influ-
ences of the factors indicated above. Those most frequently
mentioned as having increased in numbers include the robin,
meadow lark, bluebird, mourning dove, crow, grackle and cow
birds.
Many birds which were reported as rare in W. C. Knight’s
‘‘ Birds of Wyoming,’’ published in 1902, are now reported by
collectors as being fairly common. It seems, therefore, that
Wyoming is rapidly becoming a more hospitable place for birds
in general.
There is considerable evidence to show that the quail has only
recently migrated into the state, and that its migration was
from Nebraska up the valley of the Platte River. At present
it has penetrated as far as the mouth of Horse Shoe Creek on
the Platte and as far as Uva on the Laramie River, which is a
tributary of the Platte. The quail seems to have appeared in
Wyoming first about 1890, and one informant thinks that it
dies off during the winters from lack of food, and is prevented
from further migration into Wyoming only because of lack of
seeds.
A similar evidence of the effect of food supply upon the pres-
ence of birds in the state is given by Stanley Jewitt, a govern-
ment collector, who says:
I have found some kinds [of birds] very common in the more culti-
vated sections of Idaho and Wyoming during the last three years that
were almost, if not entirely, unknown a few years ago. Such birds as
the bobolink, yellow-headed blackbird and lark bunting, follow the
farmer as soon as irrigation systems are completed.
One of the most interesting points ascertained is in regard
to the English sparrow. In reply to a query as to whether there
are any isolated towns in Wyoming to which this sparrow has
not yet found its way, Professor B. C. Buffum replied that
there seem to be none of these sparrows in some of the smaller
interior towns, such as Tensleep and Nowood.
About ten or fifteen species of birds new to the state have
been reported since the publication of Professor W. C. Knight’s
book in 1902. It is hardly possible that these have all come into
the state since that time. Most of them had probably been
overlooked before, but however this may be, new birds can be
expected to enter the state from time to time, and certain of
those already there will become more numerous as conditions
are made more favorable for their existence.
The quotations which follow are indicative of the source and
No. 557] NOTES AND LITERATURE 313
reliability of the information from which the data of this paper
were taken. They are extracts from letters received in reply
to questions sent out by the writer. They are representative
of the letters received from people who have had wide experi-
ence in the state. I think the conclusion that the changed con-
ditions in the state in respect to increased raising of grain, tree
planting and the irrigation of large tracts have been the direct
cause of the increase in the number of birds, is justified. An
increase which has been so marked that residents of the state in
general have noticed and commented upon it.
QUOTATIONS FROM LETTERS RECEIVED
1. From William Richard, taxidermist, Cody, Wyo.:
It has been my opinion for several years that the birds are on the
increase, excepting the sage hens, ducks and eagles, which seem to be
decreasing.
2. From Louis Knowles, forest supervisor, Sundance National
Forest, Sundance, Wyo. :
There has been a marked increase in the number of birds in this
region during the last ten or fifteen years. The increase has been in
numbers and not in species. The increase is undoubtedly due to the
gradual increase of cultivated areas.
With Reference to the Quail
3. From John Hunton, one of the oldest and best informed
citizens of Wyoming, Fort Laramie, Wyo.:
The quail of the bob white species first made its appearance in the
Wyoming section of the Platte Valley at the Wyoming-Nebraska line in
the summer of 1890. They have gradually worked up the valley until
reaching the vicinity of Guernsey. They have also worked up the
Laramie River to the neighborhood of Uva. They are not and have not
been numerous, being pioneers, as it were. During the winter of 1908-
09 a covey of twenty-two frequented my yard here and fed with my
chickens. On last Friday morning, June 14, I heard two bob whites on
my meadow at Gray Rocks on the Laramie River, ten miles west of here.
Occasional coveys are to be seen or heard along the valleys of both
rivers as far as I have indicated. The quail evidently followed the
course of the Platte Valley from Nebraska, and they are gradually
working farther up the tributaries of the Platte as fast as the grain
belt advances, I believe the cultivation of the soil to grains of various
kinds is the only thing which has induced them to migrate west.
B. H. Grove
UNIVERSITY OF WYOMING
NOTES AND LITERATURE
THE DEPTHS OF THE OCEAN’
THE publication of this work marks an epoch in the advance
of the science of oceanography second only to that initiated upon
the return of the Challenger Expedition, but while the explora-
tions of the Challenger were extensive and of necessity some-
what superficial, these later studies conducted by the Michel
Sars are predominately intensive and thorough.
Not the least valuable of the lessons the book teaches us is the
fact that through the skillful and courageous use of a small vessel
by trained experts, results of the highest value to science may
yet be achieved.
One admires the courage of the leaders of this expedition who
ventured to cross and recross the Atlantic in a little steamer
only 125 feet in length, and with a coal supply capable of carry-
ing her only 3,400 miles at the economical speed of 9 knots.
The cruise was evidently conducted under the most auspicious
conditions respecting its management, the Norwegian govern-
ment providing the vessel, while Sir John Murray supplied the
funds necessary for the expenses of the expedition; and it may
be well to recall the fact that the most successful expeditions of
the United States Fish Commission steamer Albatross were con-
ducted under a somewhat similar arrangement between the late
Dr. Alexander Agassiz and the government.
Thus the ripe experience of the veteran leader in this field of
research, Sir John Murray, was enlisted to perfect the methods
of such active young students of oceanography as Dr, Hjort and
his able associates, Professors Koefoed, Gran, and Helland-Han-
sen, all of whom accompanied the expedition.
The cruise lasted from April until August, 1910, extending
from Plymouth to Gibraltar, thence to the Canaries and then to
the Azores, from which region a run was made into the Sar-
gasso Sea and on to Newfoundland, and thence to Glasgow and
Bergen.
The book before us is, however, far more than an account of
this cruise, rich as its results are in achievement in new fields,
for it is actually an epitome of all results hitherto attained in
1A general account of the modern science of oceanography based largely
on the scientific researches of the Norwegian steamer Michel Sars in the
North. Atlantic; by Sir John Murray, K.C.B., F.R.S., ete., and Dr. Johan
Hjort, Director of Norwegian Fisheries, with contributions from Professor
A. Appelléf, Professor H. H. Gran, and Dr. B. Helland-Hansen, xx + 821
pp., 575 figures. Macmillan and Co., Limited, London.
314
No. 557] NOTES AND LITERATURE 315
oceanography, and is thus comparable with Agassiz’s ‘‘Three
Cruises of the Blake’’ of 1888.
The first thing which strikes one upon reading this account of
the cruise of the Michel Sars, however, is the enormous advance
‘which has been made since Agassiz wrote his well-known work.
The book is written in that plain, honest English which the
readers of Darwin learned to love so well. It is difficult to re-
view because so crowded with facts of the highest interest, and
it sparkles with that rare enthusiasm which characterizes the
writings of those happy men of science to whom years and
knowledge bring no lessening of youth’s enthusiasm. At times
the language seems quaint, for most of the chapters were written
by students to whom English is not a native tongue; but this only
adds to the readableness of the book. Indeed, it is a work which
people of general culture as well as specialists may read with
sustained interest from cover to cover. It is a fitting monument
to the life-work of the great ‘‘Naturalist of the Challenger Ex-
pedition,” Sir John Murray.
The historical chapter, and that upon the depths of the ocean
are by Sir John Murray. Physical oceanography is written by
Dr. Helland-Hansen, the phytoplankton by Professor Gran, the
bottom fauna by Professor Appelléf, and the narrative, equip-
ment, fishes of the sea bottom, pelagic animals and general biol-
ogy are by Dr. Hjort, there being ten chapters in the book.
The signal success of this expedition was due to two factors:
a corps of able, enthusiastic students already distinguished by
high achievement in these studies, and the possession of excep-
tionally good apparatus provided through the generous support
of the Norwegian government and of Sir John Murray.
Thus the ship carried a huge otter trawl, and a Petersen fish
trawl, so efficient that in one haul they captured nearly as many
individual fishes as the Challenger discovered in its twenty-five
hauls between 1,500 and 2,000 fathoms. There were also large
vertical closing nets 3 meters wide and 9 long, and hauls were at
times made with ten nets and trawls out at various depths at one
and the same time. The collections were thus exceptionally rich
in species, some new and many rare forms such as Spirula,
Melanocetus krechi, a remarkable genus allied to Gastrostomus,
new Leptocephali, many larval fishes with telescopic eyes and a
specimen of the giant squid.
But the results, important as they may be, will not be chiefly
memorable for the new species and interesting forms discovered,
for the intensive studies of the physics and chemistry of the sea,
316 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
and the application of new methods made possible by improved
apparatus has led to the dicsovery of certain general laws.
For example, Professor Gran, using a steam centrifuge capable
of centrifuging 1,200 c.c. of sea water at a speed of 700-800
revolutions per minute, discovered the unsuspected fact that the
smallest pelagic plants, the nannoplankton which pass readily
through the meshes of an ordinary silk net, are far more abun-
dant than are the larger forms. He found, also, that pelagic
plant life is most abundant at depths of 10-20 meters, but be-
comes extremely scanty below 100 meters, and he confirms the
conclusion of Nathansohn that marine plant-life thrives best
where ascending currents bring upward a supply of nitrogenous
compounds derived from the decomposition of organic matter in
the deep sea. Gran concludes that in the tropics the phyto-
plankton consists of numerous species, most of which are rare,
whereas in the colder waters there are few species but great ag-
gregations of individuals.
Professor Helland-Hansen made use of a new form of photo-
graphic-plate photometer which he himself had invented. He
was thus enabled to demonstrate that a good deal of sunlight
penetrates to a depth of 1,000 meters, but at 1,700 meters his
plates were unaffected by an exposure of 2 hours’ duration. The
sun’s rays at a depth of 500 meters in clear tropical water still
retain a definite direction, not having yet become diffuse. But
the most important discovery is the fact that the red rays are
absorbed more quickly than the blue. Thus little or no red light
ean penetrate into the depths and the dark red color so char-
acteristic of the animals of the deep sea is explained by the fact
that, there being no red light where they live, they appear black
and are thus rendered invisible.
The ship was well supplied with oceanographic apparatus,
having a number of Ekman’s current meters, Richter’s revers-
ing thermometers, Petterson-Nansen’s water bottle and Petter-
son’s insulating deep-sea bottle, enabling one to bring samples
of water to the deck and there determine the temperature which
the water had when at the bottom of the sea.
The Michel Sars is certainly to be congratulated upon the
success attending their skillful use of this apparatus. For ex-
ample, the vessel ventured to anchor in a depth of 400 meters
over a hard bottom in the straits of Gibraltar and then to make
use of two Ekman current meters, one at a constant depth of 10
meters and the other at various depths down to the bottom.
They achieved the first accurate quantitative determinations of
No. 557] NOTES AND LITERATURE 317
the currents ever attained at Gibraltar and found that there is
a surface current passing inward from the Atlantic to the
Mediterranean, while at the same time a strong bottom-current
of dense water passes outward into the Atlantic. The boundary
between these two currents is usually at a depth of about 150
fathoms but this is greatly affected by the tidal conditions, for
during one hour the current flowed outward toward the Atlantic
even at the surface.
Other studies in the open Atlantic far from land enabled them
to distinguish currents due to tidal action at the surprising depth
of more than 1,000 fathoms. Indeed, a most interesting part of
the book is devoted to the discussion of the physics of oceanic
and tidal currents, and the expedition has achieved a hopeful
purpose if it has done little more than point out the possibilities
of research in the complex subject of the relation between tidal
waves and tidal currents. The right-handed deviation of mov-
ing masses of water in the northern hemisphere due to the earth’s
rotation is clearly shown as a result of titration to determine the
densities of sea water at various depths. Thus it is shown that
the dense, relatively warm water of the Mediterranean spreads
out in a great wedge in the intermediate depths of the Atlantic,
and that most of this water moves northward off the coast of
Portugal.
Through studies in density it is shown that the so-called
‘‘Gulf Stream’’ water overlies the cold water of Arctic origin.
But it is impossible to do more than merely indicate a few of
the more important facts and laws presented in this remarkable
book. In fact it is impossible to review a work which is itself a
review of all previous studies as well as a medium for the presen-
tation of newly discovered facts.
An appreciated feature of the book is the numerous charts,
maps and hydrographic sections showing density and tempera-
ture gradients, the distribution of oxygen in the ocean, and the
most recent results of exploration in soundings.
For example, it is shown that in 1910 the temperature at 400
fathoms in a certain place was 5° C. colder than in 1873 when
the Challenger worked in the same region.
The area of the ocean is stated to be 139,295,000 square miles,
of which 58.42 per cent, has a depth of between 2,000-3,000
fathoms, and about one sixth is less than 1,000 fathoms deep.
The hydrographie sections from the Sargasso Sea to New-
foundland, and from Newfoundland to Ireland, as well as the
more intensive studies of the Spanish Bay and Gibraltar, and of
318 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
the Wyville Thomson Ridge between the Faroe and Shetland
Islands are especially interesting.
Other charts based upon the researches of Knudsen, Osten-
feld, and Brenneke show the distribution of dissolved oxygen in
the Atlantic down to 1,500 fathoms between 60° N. and 50° S.
latitude, proving that the higher the salinity and the tempera-
ture the less the absorption of oxygen, and hence the relative
deficiency of oxygen in the surface waters of the tropics.
In a work of this magnitude there must needs be errors and
omissions, but these are so infrequent and of such small moment
that it seems ungracious to call attention to a few of the more
noticeable. The impalpable chalky deposit found in coral reef
regions is still referred to as ‘‘coral mud,’’ although in 1910
Vaughan stated that it was a chemical precipitate, and this
enabled: G. Harold Drew, of Cambridge, to demonstrate that it
is actually a precipitate caused by the action of a bacillus in
depriving the warm tropical water of its nitrogen, thus enabling
the calcium to combine with the dissolved CO, to form calcium
carbonate.
In the table at the bottom of page 175, the statement ‘‘the
number of grams of salts per liter of sea water’’ should read
‘‘the number of grams of salts per 1,000 grams of sea water.’’
On page 187 ‘‘ purifying sarcodic matter’’ should read ‘‘ putri-
fying sarcodic matter.’’ But such criticisms are really puerile,
and are given chiefly to show the negligible character of the
errors in the book, the editorial work upon which reflects great
credit upon Messrs. James Chumley and Dr. Caspari.
A happy feature in the editorial arrangement of the book is
the system of marginal notes which enable one quickly to dis-
cover the subjects of each paragraph. One regrets the absence
of a bibliography, but the introduction of such a list would have
perhaps too greatly enlarged the size of the book.
Apart from the purely scientific side which we have been con-
sidering the book indicates the possible practical value of these
studies. For example, it is shown that the growth-rate of pine
trees on the coast of Norway bears a direct relation to the tem-
perature of the ocean water, and for six successive years when
the amount of heat in the ‘‘Gulf Stream water’’ was great in the
month of May the air temperature in Norway was high in the
following winter. The water-temperature also bears a direct re-
lation to the time of the blossoming of Tussilago farfara at
Upsala. Also, Dr. Hjort shows that the southern limit of the
No. 557] NOTES AND LITERATURE 319
valuable boreal food fishes everywhere coincides with the iso-
therm of 10° C. at a depth of 100 meters.
ALFRED G. MAYER.
THE GROWTH OF GROUPS IN THE ANIMAL KINGDOM
ANY one who makes an intensive study of many representa-
tives of some organism becomes impressed by the fact that they
form many slightly differing groups, and is led to ask how these
diversities have arisen, This has been the experience of Lloyd?
in studying the rats of India, in connection with the problem of
plague prevention. He has therefore been moved to present in
book form his impressions as to how the observed groups prob-
ably arise, together with the facts on which these impressions are
based; and some general deductions from these impressions.
The facts observed in the study of the rats are of the following
character: (1) Small groups of rats differing in some respects
from the forms regarded as typical, oceur frequently here and
there. (2) Such groups, with the same exceptional characters,
appear in various widely separated places, showing that the dif-
ferent small groups have arisen independently of each other.
(3) ‘This is true, however, only in the case of groups whose
peculiarity appears as a single character unit. Those groups
whose peculiarity is made up of several uncorrelated characters
arise on one occasion only’’ (p. 50). Descriptions and figures
of many such cases are given; the account here is of much value
and interest.
Such facts naturally lead the author to hold that groups of
this sort have arisen by mutation: that is, by a dropping out or
alteration of single unit characters, in the Mendelian sense; that
the same character often drops out in different localities, giving
rise to small groups of independent origin, yet having the same
distinctive features. This part of the discussion would have been
given more precision by consideration of the work on inheritance
in rodents and other organisms, as carried on by Castle and
others. Further, the pure line work with homozygotes and in
vegetative reproduction might give definiteness to many of the
author’s rather vague views as to the nature of these groups.
The conclusions of Lloyd along these lines will appear somewhat
halting and loose to persons steeped in the experimental work in
***The Growth of Groups in the Animal Kingdom,’’ by R. E. Lloyd,
Longmans, Green and Co., 1912, 185 pp., $1.75.
320 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
the two fields mentioned. Lloyd’s distinctive contribution is the
demonstration that there exist in certain wild organisms the
same conditions that are found in experimentation.
The author’s interest lies mainly in bringing the work into
relation with the species concept as employed in systematic zool-
ogy, and in showing its opposition to what he calls the ‘‘accepted’’
view that diverse groups of organisms arise gradually, by a proc-
ess of selection among minute gradations. He shows that many
of the so-called species of rats are distinguished from each other
in the same way as are the small groups he has observed; there-
fore there is not ground for supposing all the members of such
species to be descended from a common stock. ‘‘Animal species
appear to be conventional rather than real’’ (p. 117). But
among the author’s fluctuating views on this point is the doubt-
ful assertion that ‘‘there seems to be reason for believing that the
distinction between specific and varietal characters which was
recognized by De Vries in plants is also recognizable among
higher animals’’ (p. 139) ; which would seem to imply that there
is some sort of reality underlying the distinction of species. The
matter is not analyzed with precision.
In a special chapter the author attempts to apply to certain
problems of disease and abnormality in man the idea that new
forms arise by mutation. Here again, those who have at hand
such a work as Davenport’s ‘‘Eugenics’’ will find the presenta-
tion vague, though tending in the same direction as in the work
mentioned.
In a concluding chapter the author abandons empirical evi-
dence for an attempt to criticize the theory of natural selection
from a general and philosophical point of view. Much is made
of the supposed requirement that variation should be ‘‘in all
directions,’’ the criticism depending ‘‘on the assumption that we
can not imagine things varying in all directions’’ (p. 175).
Further, adaptation is held not to be a phenomenon needing
explanation. The rest of the discussion is of a similar character,
showing less precision of analysis than any other part of the
work.
The author states in the preface that the book is offered ‘‘as an
assortment of opinions which may be of suggestive value.’? The
observed facts in regard to the diverse groups of rats, however,
make it more than this.
H. S. JENNINGS
Pablished March, 1913. Pages x+484. Price, $3.00 net
University Control
By J. McKeen Carrett, Professor of Psychology in Columbia University
Together with a series of Two Hundred and Ninety-nine Unsigned Letters by Leading Men of Science
holding AA Positions and Articles by JosepPm Jastrow, Gzoram T. Lapp, Jonn J. STEvENson, J. E.
CREIGHTON, J. McKeen CATTELL, Georem M. STRATTON, Biwi Paton, JOHN Jay CHAPMAN, JAMES P.,
IPSN oa JACOB ities SCHURMAN.
wend = questions concerning general university administration are dealt with in an original and
ae ety eat Nae
ese cabanas and examples are taken from fos Cattell’s informed and thorough discussion of the
of university nck a subject upon iore w as had much to say of late, finding occasion for caustic
criticism of existing American ae and sta the champion of an academic democracy and a teach-
ing T upon which a ma enter iyase “forfeiting his self. -respect.—The Dial.
nees and paragraphs a E eae en the expert , highly- scr mind, the suggestions that come to re-
St a sie tell us mths a new day is about to dawn in educational writing.—The Boston Evening Transcri
SCIENCE AND EDUCATION
A series of volumes for the promotion of scientific eines and educational elation:
VOLUME I. The Foundations of Science. By H. Porncar#. Containing the authorized English translatio
by on BRUCE — of “Science and Hypothesis,” ae Value of Science,” and “Science
VOLUME ns Medical eee and Education. By Ricnarp M. Pearce, Wmu1am H. Wetca, W. H.
HowELL, FRANKLIN P. Mat ALL, LEewELLYsS F. BARKER, CHmaRrLES S. Minot, W. B. Cannon, W. T.
COUNCILMAN, Ean Smr, S. J. MELTZER, James Ewine, W. W. pai Henry H. DONALDSON,
CHRISTIAN A. HERT ER, and Henry P. BOWDITCH. n Press.
VOLUME HI. University Control. Now Ready.
GARRISON, N. Y. THE SCIENCE PRESS LANCASTER, PA.
SUB-STATION 84, NEW YORK CITY
The American Journal of Science
Established by Benjamin Silliman in 1818
The Leading Scientific Journal in the United States
Devoted to the Physical and Natural Sciences, with special reference to
Physics, and Chemistry on the one hand, and to Geology and Mineralogy
on the other.
Associate Deria Professor GEORGE L. O a RI a W. G. FARLOW and WM. M. DAVIS
ambridge; Professors A. E. VERRILL, HENRY S. WILLIAMS and L. V. PIRSSON, of New
gcc Professor JOSEPH S. AIMES, of Baltimore ; MR. J. S. DILLER, of Washington.
Two volumes annually, in monthly numbers of about 80 pages eac each.
This Journal ended its first series of 50 volumes as a quarterly in 1845; its second
Series of 50 volumes as a two-monthly in 1870; its third series as a monthly ‘ended Dec-
ember, 1895. A Fourth Series commenced in 1896.
$6 Subscription price, $6 per year or 50 cents a number, postage prepaid in the United States
-25 to Canada ; $6,40 to Countries in the Postal Union. Back numbers at reduced prices.
te-Ten-Volume Indexes, Vols. I-X XI-XX, fourth series, price one dollar. Address
The American Journal of Science
New Haven, Conn.
The American Naturalist
1867, Devoted to d
Cee ae Saai Reference to the Factors of schon Evolution and Her
Journal, established in
e Advancement of the oe a Sciencea
CONTENTS OF NOVEMBER NUMBER
I, The Mendelian Notation as a Description of
Physiological Facts. Professor E. M. East.
I, A FirstStudy on the became ag of the Starvation
of the Ascendants ee a ee =
the Descendan rthur Harri
Itt. ge iy et ‘Relations in Vara anng Dr.
IV. Shorter chia and Discussion: On Tricolor
Coat in Dogs and Guinea-pigs. Arend, L.
H eico
V. Notes and Literature: The Classification of the
Liverworts: Professor Douglas Hou sdei
Campbell, Invertebrates; Professor Char
Atwood Kefoid.
CONTENTS OF DECEMBER NUMBER
I, The Mendelian ck ge mig ee of Fecundity in the
Domestic Fowl. mond Pearl.
IL aleotan on = Autonomy of Biological Sci-
ence. Professor Otto Glas
III. The Spawning ahi ofthe Sea Lamprey, Petro-
myzon marinus. Dr. L. Hussakof.
IV. Shorter Articles and Discussion: A Simple Test
a ecos pegs Sf as of Mendelian Ratios.
V. Notes and a acre Notes on Ichthyology.
Dr. David Starr Jordan,
VI. Index to Volume XLVI.
CONTENTS OF JANUARY NUMBER
L de ow and Unit Characters in Mendelian
eredity. Professor T. = a> organ
IL Vertical Distribution of Chætognaths of
Diego Region He a ioa eeen aa
ton of Isolation vs. Coincidence. Ellis
e
IL A Bdeg Ki ‘of tted Negroes, I. Simpson
ew E. Castle, 3 P
IV. pie: aiin of gig on oe in Corn
end Beans. Professor J. K. Shaw
CONTENTS OF THE FEBRUARY NUMBER
Brie ores through Natural Selection and Ortho-
Profe ge go get Metcalf.
AMARE ic the Living and Nou-living. Pro
essor Burron vaeard) Livingston.
Ada =e in Animal Reactions. Professor G. H.
‘Adasen from the Point of View of the Physi-
EREE Professor [onset dal Mathews.
The Fitness of the Environment, an Inquiry into the
Biblogien! Pina eg the Prope rties of Matter.
Professor Lawr notes pega
rte: pad Sheet sion: "Mutations in Oeno-
thera biennis Eee Professor Bra ey M wey A
ony
CONTENTS OF THE MARCH NUMBER
I. Distribution and Species-forming of Ecto-para-
si Professor Vernon Lyman Kellogg.
Il. Castration in Relation to the Secondary Sexual
oe eg of Brown Leghorns. H. D.
HE Stiepiihektind on er Fortoule. Profes-
sor W. E. Cast
IV. Notes and Taide: Some ae Bie Advances
Professor Roy
ONTENTS OF THE APRIL NUMBER
Alpheus ne dived and vantage Research.
ce of erato ical Development in Nicotiana
orient sear Orland E. White.
PME ge Arle and Discussion: Heredity in a Par-
thenogenetic Insect, “Tames = Rely. The
i oe alayan Rabbit Case iat Mae
é omo
ations on "a iple e orphe, o À
lism
Hyde m cig Gi
Fish Remains i in fo to og
Cockere
Notes and Prena Some Recent Advances in
Vertebrate Paleontology. Dr. Roy L. Moodie.
SEENEN ai
Single Number 35 Cents
The NATURALIST will be sent to new subscribers for four months for One
THE SCIENCE PRESS
Sub-Station 84: NEW YORK
Garrison, N. Y.
Yearly Subscription, $4.00
Dollar
Lancaster, Pa-
——
VOL. XLVII, NO. 558 JUNE, 1913
THE
AMERICAN
NATURALIST
A MONTHLY JOURNAL
Devoted to the Advancement of the Biological Sciences with
Special Reference to the Factors of Evolution
CONTENTS
Page
patna “ Tricolor in ee Dr. H. D. GOODALE and cuore T B
MOR
I. iey i Determiners in ree ena Experimental prendre: — H.
S.J ian z
u nal Variation in Pectinatella. ANNIE P. uscutaist and Dr. C. B.
Bivins “ - - 361
IV. Shorter cece and oe cic ‘ates Versus pE in Mendelian
Formule. Professor T. H. Morean. The Possible Tn of REIER in ag
Mitet. Profis D. A, BM- =
V. Notes and Literature: Valuation of the Sea. Professor CHAS. C. ADAMs- - 378
THE SCIENCE PRESS
LANCASTER, PA. GARRISON, N. Y.
NEW YORK: SUB-STATION 84
e 4
University Control
By J. MoKgen CATTELL, Professor of Psychology in Columbia University
Together with a series of Two Hundred and i nee Letters by Leading Men of Science
holding Academic Positions and pera by JoszpH Jastrow, Gzores T. Lapp, Jonn J. Stavenson, J. E.
CREIGHTON, J. McKeen Catretn, Gnorce M. STRATTON, POPE Se Joan Jary CHAPMAN, James P.
DRY and JAcoB GOULD SCHURMAN.
great variety of questions concerning general university administration are dealt with in an original and
sisal way.—Nature.
These quotations and examples are taken from Professor Cattell’s informed and thorough discussion of the
subject oi university control, a subject Der n which he m site muc a See say of late, finding occasion for caustic
eriticism of existing American conditio standing champion of an academic democracy and a teach-
ing src br upon which a man may ae without piira his itn aa t.—The Dial.
Sentences and paragraphs that betoken the expert , highly-trained mind, the suggestions that come to re-
fresh ad tell us that a new day is about to dawn in educational writing.—The Boston Evening Transcript.
SCIENCE AND EDUCATION
A series of volumes for the promotion of scientific research and educational progress
VOLUME I. The Foundations of Science. By H. Porvcarfi. Containing the authorized English translation
by Gzores Bruce Harsrep of “Science and Hypothesis,” ‘‘The Value of Science,” and “Science
and Me = Tesa.
VOLUME II. Medical Research and Education. By Rıcmaro M. Prarce, Wit H. Werom, W. H.
Hows, Franzuin P. MALL, LeweLLYs F. BARKER, Cmarres S. Minot, W. B. Cannon, W. T
COUNCILMAN, THEOBALD Surru, G. N. Stewart, C. M. Jackson, E. P. Lyon, James B. HÐRRICK, JOHN
s$ Dopson, C. R. — W. Oputzxs, S. J. Muurzer, Jamms Ewrna, W. W. Koen, Henny H. DONALD-
N, CHRISTIAN A. HERTER, and Henry P. Bowprrcs. In P
wont HE University © Control. Now Ready. Pages FR Pie $3.00 net.
GARRISON, N. Y. THE SCIENCE PRESS LANCASTER, PA.
SUB-STATION 84, NEW YORK CITY
The American Journal of Science
“Established by Benjamin Silliman in 1818
The Leading Scientific Journal in the United States
Devoted to the Physical and Natural Sciences, with special reference to
Physics, and Chemistry on the one hand, and to Geology and Mineralogy
on the other.
ditor: EDWARD S. DANA.
Associate Editors: Professor GEORGE L. DOn JOHN TROWBRIDGE, W. G. FARLOW and WM. M. DAVIS
of bridge; Professors A. E. VERRILL, HENRY S. WILLIAMS and L. V. PIRSSON, of New
Haven; Professor JOSEPH §. AIMES, of Baltimore ; MR. J. S. DILLER, of Washington.
Two volumes annually, in monthly numbers of about 80 pages each.
This Journal ended its first series of 50 volumes as a quarterly in 1845; its second
series of 50 volumes as a two-monthly in 1870; its third series as a monthly ‘ended Dec-
ember, 1895. A Fourth Series commenced in 1896.
Subscription price, $6 per year or 50 cents a number, postage prepaid in the United States
$6.25 to Canada ; $6,40 to Countries in the Postal Union. Back numbers at reduced prices-
s&@ Ten-Volume Indexes, Vols. I-X XI-XX, fourth series, price one dollar. Address
The American Journal of Science
New Haven, Conn.
THE
AMERICAN NATURALIST
VoL. XLVII June, 1913 No. 558
HEREDITY OF TRICOLOR IN GUINEA-PIGS
H. D. GOODALE AND T. H. MORGAN
We undertook the following experiments with guinea-
pigs in order to see whether the tricolor and bicolor con-
ditions described by Galton for Basset hounds could be
brought in line with modern Mendelian interpretation.
According to his recent paper, Castle was led to study
the same problem from the same point of view. He has
published a brief and important statement summarizing
his results.
Our work was begun in 1908 and has gone on steadily,
but slowly, since then, until a contagious disease de-
stroyed the stock. It soon became evident that the prob-
lem is one of extreme complexity, and for its complete
solution a much more elaborate and better planned series
of experiments will be necessary. We hope that our re-
sults, fragmentary though they be, may serve to put on
record the actual facts observed and that certain pro-
visional suggestions that are made will be further tested.
The inheritance of color in guinea-pigs has been ex-
tensively studied by Castle. Animals with a coat of
uniform color may be agouti, black, yellow (red) or
albino. We are concerned here only with black, red and
white (not necessarily albino). When black guinea-pigs
are crossed to red ones the offspring are black, or black
with traces of red. Castle points out that the F, black
is not so dark as in the pure black strain, but shows evi-
321
322 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST (Vor. XLVII
dence of the red. He states that the development of
black does not hinder the development of some red pig-
ment also in the hybrid, but the red so developed is con-
cealed by the black. Black he regards as epistatic to red.
Castle states in his recent book (1912) that in the F, gen-
eration three blacks to one red are produced.
Spotted animals contain white in patches. These
patches may be very small in extent, or, at the other ex-
treme, extend over the whole coat so that the eyes alone
have dark pigment. These black-eyed whites, however,
do not breed true, but produce spotted offspring, the
spotting being variable. Black-eyed white mice give this
result, and are to be sharply separated from albinos that
have pink eyes and white hair. Albino guinea-pigs often
have small patches of black, especially on the feet and
ears, but this is not true for albino mice or rats.
In guinea-pigs the spotted animals may be black and
white; or red and white. These races are said to breed
true, or at least certain bicolor races of these kinds breed
true. In addition there are races having red, black and
white in their coats. These are the tricolors and it is
with this race that we are here chiefly concerned. It has
just been said that the tricolor is a distinct race, but this
must not be understood to mean that they do not pro-
duce bicolor animals. In fact, amongst the offspring, bi-
color animals continually crop out. It is this fact that
has led Castle in his recent article to state that tri-
colors do not breed true. The bicolors produced in this
way seem to differ from the pure races of bicolor in that
they may produce tricolors again. For the present the
question may be left open whether pure races of bicolors
could be produced by selection of bicolors thrown by tri-
color parents. Of course, if bicolor races had originally
been incrossed, such a separation would be expected. In
our experiments, at least, some bicolor individuals have
appeared that seem to breed true, although the experi-
ments are not extensive enough to settle the question.
In the following account, therefore, it should be under-
No. 558] HEREDITY OF TRICOLOR IN GUINEA-PIGS 323
324 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
stood that when we speak of bicolored types we refer
simply to the somatic character, and, as stated provi-
sionally, we shall rank all of our bicolors, genetically, as
tricolors.
Our chief problem resolves itself, therefore, into the
question of how the different types of tricolor behave
when mated to each other.
METHODS
The following methods were used in these experiments:
Marking.—At first the guinea-pigs were marked by
means of a numbered aluminum disk attached to the ear
with wire staple. This method was unsatisfactory, as
the tags were frequently torn off and lost. A system of
ear holes was substituted, but this method had the disad-
vantage that the holes sometimes heal up in young ani-
mals. We know, however, of no better method.
Records.—The young animals were each given a num-
ber taken consecutively, and opposite the first individual
of each litter the mother’s and father’s number was re-
corded together with the date of birth. A journal was
also kept in which the records of the various matings
were kept.
Matings.—As a rule several females were mated simul-
taneously with a single male. In the early part of the
work the mothers were allowed to litter in the common
pen and the mother identified by the presence of milk in
her breasts. Sometimes two litters resulted at the same
time, in which case it was impossible to assign the young
to the proper mother. To avoid this, if more than one
female seemed likely to litter at the same time, the fe-
males were isolated until after they had littered.
Charts—A young individual was killed and skinned
and the skin stretched just enough to hold it flat and
then dried. From this a cardboard pattern was prepared
and the outlines of all the sketches drawn from this.
The midline of the sketch was divided into six equal parts,
as an aid in locating the areas, and the various areas of
No.558] HEREDITY OF TRICOLOR IN GUINEA-PIGS 325
326 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
the skin drawn on the outline in free hand.t The major-
ity of the sketches were made from animals which had
been preserved in formalin, sometimes in poor condition
when put into the formalin. A few of the dead animals
were lost by being thrown out by the attendant while
cleaning.
The Material—Our original tricolors were purchased
from a dealer. It is important to note that in these ani-
mals the color that we designate as red is a red and not
a yellow. Animals that are spotted black, white and yel-
low also occur. The self-colored red and black animals
were from the pedigreed stock of Mr. B. B. Horton, to
whom we are under many obligations for the opportu-
nity to carry on this work at ‘‘Oakwood.’’ The tricolors
are known to fanciers as tortoise and white.
In the figures solid black represent black; stippled
areas represent yellow; white crosses on black represent
yellow hairs; and black crosses represent black hairs.
Small circles indicate agouti areas.
Breepinc RECORDS
The breeding began with 4019 (short-haired) and
402 $ (long-haired with rosettes). No. 401 we classify
as tricolor black (see diagram).® She is the original fe-
male from which all the stock has descended. No. 402
also is tricolor (see diagram), but the black and red areas
are nearly evenly balanced.® :
The offspring from this pair are numbered from 403
to 414, inclusive; five, 405, 406, 407 (balanced), 408, 412,
*The presence of a few scattered white hairs on the toes has been disre-
garded in classifying the animal as well as preparing the sketches. Ear
color also has not been considered except for bicolor black, and then only
when a patch of red was present here but not elsewhere on the body.
‘After the pedigree chart was made the individual figures of the guinea-
pigs were more carefully compared and in a few cases, in which the classi-
fication was doubtful (such, for instance, as whether a pattern in tricolor
black is tricolor red) was changed; the designation in the text is to be
preferred to that in the table in case of disagreement.
° Note that 401 and 402 are partially reversed as to color areas.
No.558] HEREDITY OF TRICOLOR IN GUINEA-PIGS 327
X A
328 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou.XLVII
are classified as tricolor reds; 403, 404, 410, 411, 413, 414,’
are classified as tricolor black, while No. 409 is classified
as bicolor black.
Of these offspring only one is classified as bicolor, and
she (409) has a trace of red on her right front leg (see
diagram).
The next step was to mate, inter se, the tricolor blacks
and the tricolor reds. For instance, 4109 mated to 414¢
(both tricolor black) gave five tricolor blacks, 464, 465,
466, 507, 508, and three bicolor blacks—463, 475, 476. It
is clear, in this instance, that tricolor blacks tended to
produce the same color, i. e., tricolor blacks.
Again, tricolor black 403 g and 4042 (she may be 413),
gave three tricolor blacks, 419, 420 and 428, and three
intermediates, 421, 422 and 430, and four bicolor blacks,
418, 423, 424, 429. Four of these bicolor blacks have a
trace of red. |
No. 414 bred to 4139 produced eight tricolor blacks:
452, 453, 490, 491, 439, 514, 515, 517; one intermediate,
516; one bicolor black, 513; two tricolor reds, 488 and
489. In this case the tricolor blacks gave two tricolor
reds.
Tricolor Red’
Tricolor red 408 2 by 406 ¢ gave one intermediate, 442;
two bicolor reds, 441 and 442 A. There was present with
this female at birth of the next litter, another, viz., 412d,
which, however, probably was not concerned in its pa-
rentage. The offspring were one tricolor black, 493;
two bicolor black, 494, 495, and one tricolor red, 492.
Bicolor Blacks
No. 409 2 (note red on leg) was mated to 520 f and gave
one intermediate, 554; two bicolor blacks, 552, 553 (red-
dish spot on left shoulder).
* The labels of 404, 410 and 413 were lost and thus the diagrams confused
with one another, but not as to their parentage.
ë Many of the tricolor reds contained much white and thus may have had
more potential black, lying beneath the white, than was patent.
No.558] HEREDITY OF TRICOLOR IN GUINEA-PIGS 329
330. THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
No. 4099 mated to 503¢ gave one bicolor black, 533,
and one tricolor black, 534. We were unable to breed the
bicolor reds inter se because of the lack of an adult bi-
color red male of this stock.
Second Generation Crosses
There were no matings of tricolor blacks in this gen-
eration. A tricolor red, black-cross, was made between
489 2 by 492 3 (son) which gave bicolor red, 509, 510, 511.
No more offspring could be obtained.
No. 4239 bicolor black by tricolor black 469g gave
tricolor black, 504, 521, 522, and bicolor black, 503 and
520.
Conclusions
Tricolor blacks, inter se, gave a large number (21) of
their own kind, a large number (14) of bicolor blacks,
while. 9 out of the 46 were either tricolor reds or inter-
mediate; there were no bicolor reds. The two remain-
ing individuals were classed as bicolor black, but may
almost as well be called tricolor.
On the other hand, the tricolor reds mated, inter se,
produced in 20 individuals all four classes, viz., two tri-
color reds, two tricolor blacks, four intermeha bi six
bicolor reds and six bicolor blacks. The bicolor blacks
bred, inter se, produced three tricolor blacks, one inter-
mediate, eleven bicolor blacks, one tricolor red and one
individual belonging to the black series, whose classifi-
cation as bicolor or tricolor is uncertain. Selection for
blacks gave more blacks, but the selection for red was
inconclusive.
Spotted to Uniform Coat
The original tricolor black female, No. 401, was mated
to a red male from Horton’s stock and gave seven uni-
form reds, 425, 426, 427 (note rA spot), 436, 437, 454
(minute spot of white on nose), 45
One pair of these F, reds was as (lack of females
preventing mating more). From this pair we obtained
uniform reds, 483, 484, 495, 498, 528, 594, 595, and bi-
331
HEREDITY OF TRICOLOR IN GUINEA-PIGS
No. 558 ]
332 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST (Vou. XLVII
color reds? (mainly red), 482, 496, 497, 527, 596, and one
individual, 526, much like the bicolor reds, but with a
minute spot of black. It is noteworthy that although
Pedigree of “uniform” blacks
and reds used in matings de-
scribed in text. They came from
Mr. Horton’s stock.
black entered into the original cross from one side it was
not recovered except for the small spot of black on 526.
Yet uniform black is described as dominant to red. If
401 was heterozygous for the black factor (as a single
factor) black would not necessarily be expected. Only
against this view is the fact that her matings with tri-
color did not indicate this, and the small black spot on
526 could not be explained if this assumption were true.
One back-cross between 5269 with her father, 427,
gave one bicolor red, 576; and 577 (red, partially de-
stroyed when found) and 578, classified as red.
On the other hand, when tricolor black 401 2 was mated
to self black, 309 (Horton’s stock), one young was pro-
duced, a self-colored black. In this case also uniform
dominates, but the color is black.
No. 401 2 was also bred to another black male, and pro-
duced one black, 544, one red, 545, and one tortoise, 546.
This male appears to have been homozygous as regards
lack of spotted white, heterozygous for black (B b), and
also heterozygous for some factor that causes black to
° On the whole the bicolor reds produced in F, when uniform was crossed
in, had less white than the bicolor reds extracted from the tricolor series,
and the white tends to occur on the anterior portion of the body.
333
334 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vot. XLVII
appear in spots, 7. e., a factor analogous to the factor
commonly recognized as the white spotting factor.
In the following crosses some tortoise colors appeared.
A tortoise is black-and-red with no white.
Tricolor black, 4109, by red, 339 3, gave four tortoise,
viz., 536, 537, 538, 539.
Bicolor black, 4239, by red, 339, gave two tortoise,
540 (with white blaze—not in figure) and 541.
Tricolor black, 4139, by a self-black, 341 g, gave one
uniform red.
Tricolor black, 491°, by same, 341 3, gave black, 551.
Tricolor black, 5132 (nearly bicolor black), by same
male, gave uniform black, 590, and uniform red, 591.
Black, 4712 (out of 4019, by 3093), by father, 309,
gave black, 518 and 519. Later when mated to another
self black, 341 3, she gave red, 547, 548; black, 549.
Bicolor red, 5092 (nearly red?), by bicolor black, 535
(nearly black), gave tricolor black, 581, and tricolor in-
termediate, 532. These two opposite bicolors gave tri-
colors and so far as 502 is concerned two animals almost
completely pigmented over the posterior half of the body
produced a young that was white in these parts. Simi-
lar relations might have been pointed out in the other
crosses; but reverse cases also occur.
Tortoise Inter Se, Etc.
Tortoise, 5382 and 5369, by 5373, gave two bicolor
reds, 583, 580; two uniform red, 584, 585. It would ap-
pear that tortoise, while not showing white may carry
it in the same way in which a uniform animal may carry
it. It is also striking that the result is like that obtained
in F, from the mating of 401 tricolor black, to self-color
red, although the F, is somatically very different.
Tortoise, 5249, by uniform black, 341 g (never crossed
with spotted animals as far as known), gave tortoise,
566, and red, 567 (not on charts).
Tortoise, 524, by uniform black, 341, gave bicolor
black, 587 (almost uniform); and two tortoise, 588
and 589.
No.558] HEREDITY OF TRICOLOR IN GUINEA-PIGS 300
336 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
In Castle’s paper of 1905 he gives the result of certain
matings between black-red and black-red. Combining
the result from two tables (pages 34 and 36) there is a
total of 20 black-reds and 9 reds. It may be doubted
whether Castle’s black-reds are always the same as our
tortoise, because he speaks in the text (page 32) of a
reddish-black (1,179) and (1,180), but in the table stamps
them as black. One parent of these animals was black;
the other red. Therefore, his ‘‘black-reds’’ themselves
were heterozygous.
Matings of 427 3
This animal is one of the red offspring (except for
partial blaze), out of 401, tricolor black 9, by 201¢ uni-
form red. He was extensively mated. His offspring, by
his sister, have been already described.
No. 427 3, mated to tricolor black, 4109, gave tricolor
black, 558, tricolor red, 593, tortoise, 557 (white foot),
559 (had white hind toes), 592 (nearly black).
No. 427 3, mated to tricolor black, 5229, gave tortoise,
574, and tricolor black, 575 (not charted).
No. 427 ĝ, mated to tricolor red, 489, gave uniform red,
568, tortoise, 569 (note extension of black), and tricolor
black, 570 (not drawn).
No. 427 ¢ was mated to three sisters, all bicolor reds,
but not closely related to 427, viz., 509, 510 and 511.
With 509 he gave uniform red, 562, 561 (not charted)
and bicolor red, 562. ->
With 510 he gave uniform red, 563, 565, 565 A, and bi-
color red, 564.
With 511 he gave uniform red, 571, 572, and bicolor
red, 573.
Evidently 427 is heterozygous for uniform and carries
no black. But when mated to black spotted, viz., 489, etc.,
he gave black spotted offspring.
No. 427 J, mated with bicolor black, 423, gave four tor-
toise, 579, 580, 597 and 598.
307
HEREDITY OF TRICOLOR IN GUINEA-PIGS
58]
y
No.
338 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
Agouti Spotted with White by Tricolors
A spotted agouti 2 mated to tricolor black, 414, gave
three tricolor blacks, 385, 499, 487, and two bicolor reds
with agouti spots (i. e., they had white spots, red- spots
and agouti spots), viz., 486, 487 and one, viz., 500, spotted
agouti. It may seem that when agouti spots are present
they take the place of the black. Castle’s (1905) records
= support this suggestion. The agouti female seems to
have been heterozygous for the agouti factor.’°
Discussion
It has been stated by Castle that when guinea-pigs with
uniform coat are crossed to spotted guinea-pigs the off-
spring have uniform coats.1 Our own limited experience
confirms this statement. In the F, generation a variable
offspring is obtained, ranging from uniform to much
spotted. This question will be considered later.
_ A question of fundamental importance is whether the
uniform coat can be treated as allelomorphie to spotted
coat. This involves the question whether spotting is the
product of one factor or of more than one.
In rats and in mice the same question has come up and
Cuénot has handled the problem on the basis of a pair of
allelomorphs. The main evidence on which the assump-
tion of a pair of allelomorphs rests, is derived from the
number of kinds of offspring in the F, generation. If
uniform coat is treated as allelomorphic to spotted coat,
the F, expectation is three uniform to one spotted, and
this condition is the reported result for this generation.
On the other hand, if the spotted coat is due to more
than one factor the situation becomes complicated, and
the F, expectation is no longer three to one, unless we
* One of the progeny of the mating of tricolor blacks, 469 ¢, by bicolor
black, 423, calls for special attention. This individual, TB 521, had among
the other pigmented hairs a great many that had a ace base and a black
tip. These recall, but are not identical with, agouti hai
t Castle’s mating shows in some cases apparent silica to the rule, but
possibly the uniform animals were not entirely homozygous. Exceptionally
a blaze may appear in the F,’s.
No.558] HEREDITY OF TRICOLOR IN GUINEA-PIGS 339
340 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
assume that there is one factor whose ‘‘absence’’ makes
possible the development of the spotted coat. It seems
to us that the experimental evidence, more especially
the selection experiments of Cuénot and of Castle, sug-
gest the possibility that the ‘‘spotted coat’? is a very
complex affair, depending presumably on a number of
factors.
Although this possibility has been repudiated by
Castle and not considered by Cuénot, it may be at least
worth serious examination; for, if it should prove true,
an entirely different appearance will be given to the se-
lection experiments referred to above. Now, the fact that
the modal class changes when much spotted (with white)
and little spotted (with white) animals are seleeted, and
the fact stated by Cuénot that much spotted behaves like
a dominant to little spotted, suggests that we may be deal-
ing here with a mixed population that may be treated in
conformity with a Mendelian interpretation of the prob-
em.
If much spotting has arisen through a series of progres-
sive mutations, the following hypothesis may serve at
least to put the facts in a new light.
It may be expresed in a general way as follows: If one
special condition must be realized before any spotting
can occur (the first realized stage may be simply due to a
recessive spotting factor ss. Such an animal, mated to
pure uniforms, will give:
S S Uniform
s s Spotted
S s F?
S $ Fd
SS Ss
Ss—ss
ISG 985 les F,
which is the simple Mendelian ratio of 3:1. In other
words, the first realized stage of the spotted is a modifi-
cation of the original factor and therefore its allelo-
morph. This means that in all ss animals the spotted
No.558] HEREDITY OF TRICOLOR IN GUINEA-PIGS 341
342 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
condition appears, its extent being determined by other
factors.
The extension of spotting would be considered as due
to successive mutations which could only be realized after
the first stage ss had occurred. Such stages would be
represented by 888,51, SSS2S2, 888383 or complexes of these,
namely, sss,$,8383 Or ssS,s,8,83, ete. Selection would
then consist in eliminating from such combinations dif-
ferent factors. The hypothesis is in a sense complex, but
so are the facts. We shall consider this hypothesis later
after our facts have been presented.
Castle has recently pointed out that there are cases of
yellow-and-white-spotted guinea-pigs that breed true.
In these he assumes that a chromogen factor (the one
that makes any color possible) is irregularly distributed.
Hence, wherever color is produced that color is yellow.
Where no color is produced, because of the absence of the
color producer, white results. Black-and-white races, if
such exist (Castle does not specifically mention such
races except black-and-white from tricolors of the tri-
color series), would fall under a similar scheme. Yellow-
and-black animals also exist with no white (Castle). In
this case the color factor for black is assumed to be dis-
tributed irregularly.
Castle’s explanation for the tricolors is as follows:
Now the tricolor race is a yellow one spotted both with white and with
black, i. e., it results from irregularity in distribution through the coat
of two different chemical substances, the color factor and the black
factor. These two factors are known to be independent of each other
in heredity. See Castle (1909). It is therefore not to be supposed
that they will commonly coincide in distribution. If the black factor
extends over all the colored areas, the animal will be black-and-white.
If the black factor falls only on areas which lack the color factor, it
will produce no visible effect, and the animal will be yellow-and-white.
If, finally, the black factor falls on some of the colored areas but not
on all of them, those in which it falls will be black, the others yellow,
and the uncolored areas of course white. Hence a tricolor will result.
But the gametie composition of these tricolors will not be different
from that of the black-and-whites or red-and-whites produced by the
No.558] HEREDITY OF TRICOLOR IN GUINEA-PIGS 343
344 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [VoL. XLVII
same race, since all alike will be characterized by irregularity in dis-
tribution of the same two factors A tricolor race on this hypothesis
should be unfixable, as has up to the present time been found to be
true.
It will be observed that this hypothesis rests on the
fact that two characters are irregularly distributed, viz.,
black and white, and on the assumption that yellow is al-
ways uniformly distributed. What is meant by irregu-
larity in the distribution of a character except as a state-
ment of a fact is not clear. The words suggest somatic
distribution of factors, at least the factors for black and
for white, that have come from the germ-cell. On the
other hand, it may be that the heritage of every cell is like
that of all the others; and regional differences give rise to
difference in pigment development. But on the last view
the irregularity in distribution of the character is not
explained by referring it to regional differentiation, for
the question is left as uncertain as before.
There may be involved, moreover, the question of the
inheritance of a pattern or patterns, for, if the spots are
localized, as Castle says in his earlier papers, or, at
least, if spot-areas are present, the distribution of black
and white may not be so simple a problem as indicated
by the hypothesis under consideration. Furthermore, if
spotting is due not to one or two, but to several factors,
a further complication is present. And finally, if a given
spot is black on one side of the body and its mate is yel-
low on the other side, even the assumption of many fac-
tors will have difficulty in explaining the results unless a
somatic segregation of the factors is assumed. Until
these questions have been cleared up the explanation of
the inheritance of spotting is likely to remain obscure.
Hagedoorn has recently? pointed out that for the oc-
currence of spots in rabbits and in certain other animals
(cats, goats), Castle’s explanation may not apply. He
concludes that the distribution of color in these tricolor
animals must depend upon the cooperation of many fac-
? AMER. NAT., November, 1912.
No.558] HEREDITY OF TRICOLOR IN GUINEA-PIGS 345
346 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
tors. He also points out that in tricolor dogs a spot, if
on the back, is black; if on the leg, yellow. If this view is
correct it would seem to follow that regional differences
determine the color that develops, or that somatic segre-
gation of color factors is definite in respect to body
regions.
In the case of the Norway rat, a wild gray bred to a
spotted animal gives offspring that generally contain a
white spot on the belly. It would seem, in this case, that
the ‘‘factor’’ for spotting in this region of the body is
dominant over the uniform coat—the other spotting fac-
tors may be recessive, and for their development depend
on the ss-factor.®
So long as these questions remain on such an unsatis-
factory basis we can do little more than adopt provision-
ally some such view as Castle’s, or else describe the facts
without regard to any special theory. In the following
account, therefore, we shall attempt little more than a
description of the results that we have obtained. Our
description resolves itself, therefore, into the question
of the heredity of black-and-white somatic areas. The
question of whether these are overlapping areas as
Castle assumes or else spot centers in which color or no
color may occur, or both is left undecided. It is certain
that a spot may be large or small, and, therefore, the
realized pattern is variable. Possibly we may get a
clearer idea of this question if we look upon the spot as a
center from which color, if present, is more likely to
spread, and, if we assume somatic segregation in an
early stage of the embryo the extent of the spot will be
a measure of the extent to which a given cell containing
the color factor multiplies as compared with neighboring
*'We may conceive of spotting factors in two ways: Each area or center
may be supposed to have a representative in the germ and each of these
representatives to be entirely independent of each other in inheritance. OF
there might be several factors of different sorts, such that one produces &
certain pattern, another a different pattern, a third factor a third pattern
and so on. The overlapping of these various patterns would still produce
spotted animals.
No.558] HEREDITY OF TRICOLOR IN GUINEA-PIGS 347
areas that have the white factor. In pigeons the dark
wing-bar of some breeds may be white in other breeds,
although pigment is present, elsewhere. We can not as-
sume, of course, a pigment producer to be absent from
the germ. It seems more probable that there are special
color producers, which if present in the germ, and there-
fore in all the body cells, give a definite reaction in that
region where a white band is formed. In this case there
is no localization factor inherent as such, i. e., there is no
need to assume somatic segregation, but only germinal
segregation of a particular special factor that is realized
in a special part. The substitution of a white area for a
colored one in guinea-pigs might be looked at in the same
way. But the extent to which the spot develops is a more
difficult and perhaps a different problem.
The most obvious objection to Castle’s hypothesis of
overlapping areas is the excess of bicolors recorded both
in his own and in our results, assuming that no true bi-
colors were in the stock. An exact lap of the black
area over the red (yellow) could happen only when the
black spots were of the same size or larger, and occur
in exactly the same places as the red area left by the dis-
tribution of white producing factor. This would be ex-
pected to happen rarely, but, as stated above, tricolors
throw a considerable percentage of bicolors.
Our matings show that the distributor for black is dom-
inant, as seen in tricolor by uniform and tortoise by uni-
form giving tortoise; and tricolor by tricolor giving bi-
color black. On this basis our original race of tricolors
must have been heterozygous for the black distributor,
and hence could throw some bicolor blacks which are real
bicolors, not overlapped bicolors. This explains our ex-
cess of bicolor black which belonged to both types.
[Vou. XLVII
THE AMERICAN NATURALIST
348
e v
CAUSES AND DETERMINERS IN RADICALLY
EXPERIMENTAL ANALYSIS
PROFESSOR H. S. JENNINGS
THE JoHns HOPKINS UNIVERSITY
Even where the experimental situation is clear, disa-
greement often exists as to the causes or determiners of
given phenomena. For clearing the mind on such mat-
ters, as well as for guiding experimentation, the writer
has found useful two rules of thought, which are here
submitted. The bald statements of the rules will be fol-
lowed by a commentary with illustrations.
Rule 1. Radically Experimental Thinking.—Test all
questions or doubtful propositions as to causation, de-
termination, explanation, by seeking mentally an experi-
ment which, if carried out, would decide the matter. If
no such experiment is conceivable, the question is one
with which science can not deal.
Or: Reduce all questions to an experimental situation.
Rule 2. Causation of Differences——In seeking causes
or determiners, compare two cases and discover to what
is due the difference between them. A cause or deter-
miner is that which brings about the difference between
two specifiable cases.
1. RADICALLY EXPERIMENTAL THINKING
What sort of knowledge is sought in the questions:
How is this phenomenon caused or determined? How
can we understand or account for this?
One of the things we desire to know is this: What con-
ditions can be found which, if supplied, will produce the
thing we are trying to understand; if changed or altered
will change or do away with it? Finding conditions is
called observation; supplying, altering or removing them
is called experiment; this question therefore asks for
conditions discoverable by observation and experiment.
The search for and formulation of such conditions makes
349
350 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
up a large part of the work of science; does the search
for other sorts of conditions form any part of its work?
Men do indeed infer certain things confessedly not dis-
coverable by observation or experiment, but these evi-
dently deserve, and commonly receive, a classification by
themselves, as something else than science; otherwise
science itself would require division into experiential and
non-experiential, the former including what is commonly
practised as science. Our rule is the test for this classi-
fication; a question that could not be answered by any
conceivable experiment (or series of experiments) does
not belong to (experiential) science.
But what does ‘‘conceivable experiment’’ include and
exclude? An experiment is a change in one or more of a
given set of conditions; ideally carried out it involves the
presence of two similar systems, known to act in the same
way; on one of the systems a certain condition is then
altered, and the difference this brings about is observed.
In cases where this ideal can not be fulfilled, it forms the
standard for mental reference with relation to the ex-
periment as actually tried. The possibility of experi-
menting comes from the observed fact that conditions
which sometimes occur or act together need not always
do so. Now, a proposition to separate such conditions
as are in the nature of things inseparable would not be
a conceivable experiment. Is such a proposition involved
in the question whether psychic processes affect physical
ones?
But often a change in some one of a given or specified
set of conditions is conceivable where it is not practi-
cable. This may be for technical reasons; we have not
obtained control of the conditions. Or the system under
consideration may belong to past time. But in both these
cases, when we assert that a specified condition is the
cause of a certain result, we mean that if this condition
could be or had been altered, as is done in experimenta-
tion, the result would have been different.
It is this mental reference to an experimental situation
No. 558] CAUSES AND DETERMINERS 351
that is the essential point for clearing one’s thought.
Two diverse cases that require this clearing are of fre-
quent occurrence. (1) A question expressed in general
terms is so conceived by one person as to require for its
answer a certain experiment, while another person
understands it in such a way that it requires another ex-
periment; thence arises argumentation at cross pur-
poses. Clear statement of the problem as an experi-
mental situation reveals at once that two diverse ques-
tions are under discussion, and gives either immediate
agreement, or a method of solving the difficulty by ex-
perimentation.
(2) Questions or propositions as to causality or ex-
planation are frequently so framed that they exclude an
answer by any conceivable experiment in changing con-
ditions. The attempt to state them as an experimental
situation at once reveals that they do not belong to (ex-
periential) science. Questions expressed in general terms
are frequently so understood that no experiment or
series of experiments could answer them, though the
Same questions may be so interpreted that they are
answerable by experiment. When one side of a discus-
sion understands the question in one of these ways, the
other side in the other way, the resulting confusion is
dispelled by the attempt to formulate the question as an
experimental situation. Our second practical rule aids
powerfully in clearing up such matters; it will therefore
be taken up before passing to illustrations.
2. CAUSATION as THE PRODUCTION oF THE DIFFERENCE
BETWEEN Two SPECIFIED CASES
Nothing in science appears so productive of confusion
and disagreement as attempts to state causes or deter-
miners of things. Clearing of thought results if one
adopts, at least as a preliminary measure, the rule to
search for the causes or determiners of the difference
between two specified cases.
The production of an event or a result requires, as a
352 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
rule (at least in biology), the previous occurrence of a
great number of conditions, alteration of any of which
would change the result. Consider, for example, what an
infinity of conditions must be fulfilled for the produc- |
tion of the brown color of a human skin or of a human
eye; or for the swimming of an organism toward a
window. Hence many minds revolt against the asserta-
tion that any particular thing 2 (a chromosome; a nu-
cleus; a single physical agent, such as light) is the de-
terminer or the cause for this result :—for it takes much
more than the ‘‘determiner’’ to produce it. But other
minds, apparently equally sane, persist in speaking of
particular determiners or causes for exactly such cases.
The difference is due neither to stupidity on one part or
the other, nor to disagreement as to the experimental
situation, but to a different conception of what is im-
plied experimentally by ‘‘determiner’’ or ‘‘cause.’’? One
party thinks, when speaking of determination, of every-
thing necessary in order that the given result shall be
produced; so that ‘‘a determiner’’ would to him mean
something supplying all these required conditions. The
other means by a determiner that which brings about the
difference between a case that gives this particular re-
sult, and another which does not. The first view insists
that many things are necessary in order to produce the
result; the second insists that if the ‘‘determiner”’ w is
altered, the result is altered or done away with. Both
are correct.
If one is seeking to understand, rather than to criticize
or confute, the solution of the apparent disagreement
lies in clearly distinguishing these two things, and in
noting the meaning which underlies the proposition ex-
amined. The difference between a person with brown
eyes and a similar person with eyes not brown may be de-
cided or determined by something which by no means
supplies all the conditions necessary for the production
of the brown color. It takes an entire state to go to war,
but a very small difference in the conditions may deter-
No. 558] CAUSES AND DETERMINERS 353
mine whether war or peace shall prevail. It might in-
deed be clearer if for the word determiner in such a
meaning, some such name as ‘‘decider’’ were used, but
it is important not to confuse a criticism of linguistic fit-
ness with a denial of experimental facts. All the ‘‘de-
terminers’’ spoken of in the formulations of Mendelian
inheritance appear clearly to be such in the sense only of
‘*deciders.’’
Conclusions deducible only from discovery of all the
conditions necessary to produce a certain result must, of
course, not be drawn from experiments showing a de-
terminer only in the sense of ‘‘decider’’ between two
possibilities; this appears not infrequent. Such illegiti-
mate conclusions are perhaps most usually drawn when
persons understanding determination in the first sense
examine the statements of those that use the word in the
second sense; this is a source of polemics.
Since to produce almost any result an indefinitely great
number of preceding conditions, of diverse sorts, must
have been fulfilled, and since neither thought nor prac-
tical investigation can handle all these at once, it be-
comes necessary to so analyze our problems that at a
particular juncture only one cause or determiner (and
that a definite one) need be sought. . The key for this is
the following principle:
A single sufficient determining factor can be found
only for the difference between two cases.
With relation to this, several points must be grasped.
1. Evidently two cases may be so chosen that the dif-
ference between them is not due to a single determining
cause. But by proper analysis problems can be brought
(at least usually) to a situation where but a single de-
termining cause is required; this is done by comparing
cases that differ only in certain defined features; and in
bringing the two cases closer and closer together, till
finally the difference between them is due to but a single
experimental cause.
2. For the difference between two cases that are di-
354 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST ~ [VoL. XLVII
verse even in several respects, a relatively simple and
unequivocal complex of causes can, as a rule, be discoy-
ered, so that the problem for investigation becomes
clearly limited. But to search for all the causes of any-
thing taken by itself is (in biology at least) a hopelessly
indefinite and unlimited task.
3. Search for a single definite and unequivocal cause
or determiner of a given result or characteristic has
meaning only when there is at least implicitly a compar-
ison with something else, for nothing is in itself com-
pletely and exclusively determined by any single pre-
ceding condition. What cause or determiner will be
found depends upon what comparison is made. When
the comparison is not specified, it may be made with di-
verse things by different minds; thence arise apparent
disagreements. The cause or determiner of brownness of
skin in man is some peculiarity of the germ cell, when
we compare a given brown individual with a white one
that has lived under the same conditions; it is exposure
to sun when we compare a brown individual that has
lived in the open with his in-door brother; if some other
comparison is made, the cause is still different. It is
really the difference between the two cases that we ac-
count for, and both members of the comparison must be
considered before the cause can be given.
4. When seeking the cause of a given result, it may be
unnecessary to state what we are comparing it with, be-
cause that is evident. But much obscurity and disagree-
ment would be avoided if that were always made clear;
the investigator himself should at least have thought
through the comparison carefully.
5. While it is helpful if in experimentation the two
cases compared can both be concretely present, for clear-
ness of thought this is not indispensable. One of them
may be supplied mentally.
6. By successively comparing our given case with
others, taking first those which differ from it but little, .
and passing then to cases which differ from it in other re-
No. 558] CAUSES AND DETERMINERS 355
spects, and in a greater number of ways, the causal analy-
sis may be carried to any extent desired. In this way is
reached, so far as it can be reached, that complete state-
ment of all the things on which a given process or result
depends, with its accompanying ‘‘mental model’’ of the
process,—that is commonly set forth as the aim of scien-
tific investigation. At the same time, by classifying all
the various sorts of preceding differences (‘‘causes’’)
and the correspondi (‘‘effects’’),
we obtain general rules or laws.
7. But the statements or mental models of given proc-
esses referred to above can never be really complete in
the sense of specifying everything that must have oc-
curred in order that the given result should appear. For
all differences between cases we find preceding differ-
ences, and so backward indefinitely. If this infinite re-
gress appears unsatisfactory, it is the constitution of
nature that is at fault. But any given investigation
seeks, for definite purposes, to trace the determining
differences back only to a certain stage. The investiga-
tor commonly finds that after a time the preceding dif-
ference of conditions passes into a field through which
he is not interested in tracing it; as when a biologist
finds a result to be due to a preceding difference in tem-
perature.
8. Expressed accurately, the principle underlying all
this is: Every succeeding difference in perceptual condi-
tions is experimentally bound up with a preceding dif-
ference in perceptual conditions. This may be called
the postulate of experimental analysis. Cause or de-
terminer, and effect or thing determined, are both dif-
ferences between specifiable cases. In common usage
the term cause or determiner is loosely employed to ex-
press that which is added, or that which is subtracted, to
produce one case from the other; it may, therefore, as
well be the absence of something as the presence of
something. Thus, the determiner for blueness of eyes,
as compared with brownness of eyes, is, loosely, but con-
á
356 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
veniently expresed, the absence of something present
in the germ cell that produced the brown eyes. The ap-
parent absurdity of saying that something is deter-
mined by nothing disappears when we understand that
this merely means that the difference between the given
case (blue eyes) and some other (brown eyes) is due to
the lack in the former of something present in the latter.
This sort of analysis is necessary for all statements re-
garding determiners in Mendelian inheritance, and when
properly carried out it reveals their true meaning and
rids them of offense.
9. The question may be raised whether this way of
looking at causation is a mere practical device for clear-
ing thought in particular cases, or whether it has a wider
significance. Is all causation only of differences? Is it
only of differences that a causal explanation can prop-
erly be given? Is causal formulation inapplicable to
things taken by themselves, without differentiation or
comparison? Does all causal formulation necessarily
imply comparison? It appears that all this might be
affirmed; here the matter is raised merely as a question.*
3. [ILLUSTRATIVE QUESTIONS FOR RADICALLY EXPERIMENTAL
ANALYSIS
A. Some assert that a certain chromosome is a deter-
miner of s@x; others dissent.
What experiment or experiments would decide? Or
has the word determiner here no experimental meaning?
The positive assertion is evidently absurd if it is taken
to mean that the chromosome contains all the conditions
necessary for the production of the sex characteristics
(male or female). Interpreted in accordance with our
two rules, it means merely that if two similar eggs side
by side produce animals of the same sex, and if from
one of these a certain chromosome could be removed (or
1 Mills’s ‘‘method of differences’’ set forth in his ‘‘Logie’’ is not the
search for the causes of differences between cases, recommended above, but
merely the examination of differences, as an aid to causal investigation of
things taken by themselves.
No. 558] CAUSES AND DETERMINERS 357
to one a certain chromosome could be added), this egg
would now produce an animal of the other sex. The
question is thus purely an experimental one. Of the
enormous number of conditions necessary for the pro-
duction of the sexual characteristics, this assertion
specifies one, which happens to be practically interest-
ing to us. We trace the difference in sex between two
individuals back to a difference between the two eggs
from which they came. We may then trace the differ-
ence between the eggs back to differences between the
sperms; the latter to differences between the chromosome
groups of the parents, and the process of tracing back
is limited only by our knowledge. All these preceding
differences (and any others that may yet be found to
cause a difference of sex) are equally sex determiners;
the discovery of one kind of sex determiner (in our sense
of determiner) does not preclude the discovery of a
thousand others.
B. Some assert that the brown color of the skin (or
some other color characteristic) is hereditary; others
dissent, asserting that it is due to oxidation of a certain
chemical compound, or to exposure to the sun.
Applying rule 2, when we compare individuals that
have lived under the same conditions and find one (a)
dark, the other (b) white, we must conclude that the dif-
ference is hereditary, in the sense of determined by a
difference in the germ cells. But this difference in the
germ cells may be of such a nature as to prevent oxida-
tion in one case, while permitting it in the other; it is
then likewise true that the cause for the color is oxida-
tion. The same individual a that is dark might perhaps
not be so if not exposed to the sun; it is then true that
exposure is the cause of the color. All these statements
as to causes are elliptical, and all are equally true; at
which one we arrive depends on what comparisons are
made; what differences we are accounting for.
C. Some assert that the nucleus is the ‘‘bearer of the
hereditary qualities”; others deny this with ridicule.
358 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
Making precise by means of our two rules this loose
and obscure proposition, it means the following experi-
mental situation. If two eggs side by side were identical
in cytoplasm and in environmental conditions (through-
out), but differed in their nuclei, the specified ‘‘heredi-
tary qualities” produced would differ. If the assertion
is that the nucleus is the exclusive ‘‘bearer,’’ it further
means that if two eggs side by side were identical in nu-
cleus and in environmental conditions, but differed in
cytoplasm, the specified ‘‘hereditary qualities’’ pro-
duced would not differ. The questions are experimental
ones, of the highest interest, on which much work has
been done.
But if the assertion is understood to mean that the
nucleus contains all the conditions necessary for the pro-
duction of the hereditary qualities; or if it means that
the characters produced are independent of the environ-
ment—of course experiments already tried show its in-
correctness. Only by reducing it to an experimental
situation does it become a profitable question.
D. Some assert that the development of muscular
tissue or of nervous tissue (or the like) is determined
within the cells; others dissent.
This means that if the two cells were kept under same
conditions, one would still produce muscle, the other
nerve. It does not mean that the cell contains within
itself all the conditions necessary for the production of
muscle (or nerve); and it leaves open the question what
the two cells would produce if they were kept under di-
~~ conditions.
. Some assert that the movement of a given organ-
ism is unequivocally determined oe some external agent
(as light); others dissent.
If the assertion is only that nee two organisms are
alike in internal and in other external conditions, a dif-
ference in the light on the two may unequivocally deter-
mine a difference in movement, it is correct. If, on the
other hand, it asserts that when two organisms are sub-
No. 558] CAUSES AND DETERMINERS 359
jected to the same conditions of light, an internal dif-
ference of condition may not equally unequivocally de-
ermine a difference in the movement (so that one may,
for example, move toward the source of light while the
other does not), it is incorrect. What is unequivocally
determined is always a difference between two cases;
what determines the difference depends on the compari-
son made.
F. Some assert that physical conditions affect psychic
states, and vice versa; that the physical and psychical
interact; others dissent.
To assert that physical conditions affect psychic states
can mean only, from a radically experimental point of
view, that a preceding alteration in an exclusively phys-
ical condition results in a change in a psychical condi-
tion (pain, sensation). The experiment appears to occur
frequently, and to give as unequivocal results as any ex-
periments in science (unless we suspect all physical
changes to be accompanied by psychical ones, in which
case we drop the radically experimental standpoint).
(It will be observed that experimentation can have noth-
ing to say on the question sometimes discussed as to
whether the physical and psychic conditions occurring
at the same time have a relation of cause and effect; this
is a typical example of a question that can not be re-
duced to an experimental situation.)
The converse assertion is that a change in an exclu-
sively psychical condition produces a change in physical
conditions. The experimental situation is not a conceiv-
able one, unless psychical changes do occur unaccom-
panied by physical ones.
G. Some assert that entelechy is required for deter-
mining what happens in development; others dissent.
The bearing that experiment can have on this question
is to discover whether there ever occur cases in which
two systems alike in all perceptual respects act in two
perceptually different ways. If no such cases occur, no
additional agent is experimentally demanded. If such
360 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vowu. XLVII
cases do occur, the question whether entelechy is to be
brought in is a non-experimental one.
4. RELATION or RADICALLY EXPERIMENTAL ANALYSIS TO
THER FORMULATIONS
Radically experimental analysis thus reduces all ques-
tions to an experimental situation; seeks for every ex-
isting perceptual difference between cases to find a pre-
ceding perceptual difference on which the later one
experimentally depends; and results in a formulation or
explanation which includes only perceptual factors.
We often find, particularly in biology, formulations
or explanations which are based on non-perceptual fac-
tors. This non-perceptual character is not always real-
ized, nor readily detectible; it will be brought out by
applying to the doctrine in question the two rules set
forth above. In other cases the formulation confessedly
includes non-perceptual factors; such is the vitalism of
Driesch.
For clear thinking as to all such doctrines, confessed
or unconfessed, a grasp of their relations to radically ex-
perimental analysis is essential. The crucial questions
are: Can radically experimental analysis be carried
through all parts of science, even biology? That is, can
experimental causes be found for all that occurs? If so,
are other sorts of causes likewise required? Is recourse
to formulations including non-perceptual factors due to
(1) a supposed lack of experimentally perceptible de-
termining differences for all differences in results; or
(2) to a mental need for some other conditions, in addi-
tion to the perceptual ones, to show perhaps ‘‘why’’ the
perceptual conditions produce the results they do?
Supplementary non-perceptual theories of the first sort,
based on an assumed lack of perceptual determining
factors, tend to discourage experimentation or the search
for perceptual determining factors; while supplemen-
tary theories of the second sort have nothing to do with
experimental science.
April 18, 1913
CLONAL VARIATION IN PECTINATELLA
ANNIE P. HENCHMAN AND DR. C. B. DAVENPORT
Tue freshwater Bryozoan Pectinatella magnifica pro-
duces, as is well known, lenticular statoblasts or winter
buds that carry at the margin hooks whose number va-
ries from 11 to 26. The statoblasts develop in the funi-
culus of the zooids. The zooids arise by budding from
embryonic tissue which is laid down even in the stato-
blast-embryo of the preceding generation. The zooids
of a colony are thus related as closely as possible, being
developed parts of one and the same germplasm. The
zooids of a colony are found in branches or twigs that
radiate from a center and, in Pectinatella, are thick, short
and blunt, forming a stellate colony. Many of these
corms lie in contact with each other on the surface of a
more or less spherical mass of jelly that is secreted by
the colony. The colonies are in close contact like the
facets of a compound eye. As the gelatinous mass in-
creases so does the area available for the colony and thus
additional space is allowed for their growth.
Whence come the colonies that lie on the surface of any
one of the gelatinous masses? In part they arise by fis-
sion of preexisting colonies. A given colony gains an el-
liptical shape and then constricts in the short axis; the
periphery of the colony is increased and room made for
new branches and new young buds. If all colonies on the
surface of a given mass arose thus we could refer the
origin of them all to the original colony that came from
the statoblast. But, unfortunately, things are not so
simple. For two statoblasts may germinate in close
proximity to each other on the same substratum and,
under such circumstances, the masses of jelly they se-
crete will flow together and form parts of a single mass.
Thus the gelatinous masses in nature are of two sorts:
361
362 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
simple, all of whose colonies (and included statoblasts)
carry the same germplasm and compound, those whose
colonies and statoblasts carry more than one kind of
germplasm. These can not, in general, be distinguished
by gross appearance.
Recent studies have shown that parts of organisms
that are derived from the same germplasm (without the
intervention of sexual reproduction) are much more con-
stant in their morphological features than parts .of or-
ganisms that, however closely related, are each the prod-
uct of the union of two germ cells. For germ cells are
necessarily more or less unlike, and may be very unlike,
and, consequently, their progeny will be variable. We
should expect then (to return to the Pectinatella masses)
to find them of two kinds, (a) with a relative constancy
in the modes of the distributions of the statoblast-hooks,
and (b) with two or more modes (centers of variation)
of statoblast-hooks in different colonies from the same
mass.
HISTORICAL
The first statistical study of variation in the number
of hooks per statoblast made was, in 1900, by one of us.
In 1906, Miss Alice W. Wilcox showed that a Pectinatella
mass is derived from statoblast-embryos the products
of which repeatedly divide, move from each other and,
as they enlarge, come in contact again. Her study makes
it probable that a mass may be derived either from one
or from two or more independent statoblast-colonies.
Braem (1911, pp. 321, 323) refers to a mass derived from
about 80 statoblasts, but the product of a great propor-
tion of them perished. He has also a mass derived from
only one statoblast. Braem points out that the number
of hooks per statoblast tends to increase with the age of
the colony and of the whole mass. He considers a pos-
sible difference in heredity tendencies inside the differ-
ent colonies and concludes that this factor is small as
compared with other factors, above all, temperature of
the water.
No.558] CLONAL VARIATION IN PECTINATELLA 363
Thus he finds that, in one and the same colony, the
mean number of hooks increases with the temperature of
the colony when the hooks are being formed and, in sup-
port of this contention, gives tables of his countings from
the same mass between July and October. Some of his
data support this conclusion strongly, as shown in
able I.
TABLE I
Braem’s Date of Ex- No.of |
ed ol amination, BiadoSiogi | Nn mber of Description of Mass.
24 Aug. 23 30 14.33 Derived from 5 statoblasts.
5 First statoblast Jun ne
25 Sept. 14 12 17.50 From peripheral zo
26 Sept. 14 34 18.47 a nn from the same
18 Sept. 6 145 | 14,12 Deriv ee bips 2 statoblasts.
19 Sept. 24 441 | 14.69 | Oldest portion.
20 Sept. 24 302 | 15.44 Perishers (younger ) zone.
21 Sept. 24 | 16.65 .
22 July 16 3 | 13.33 | First statoblast.
23 Aug. 3 56 | 15.52
In other cases the hypothesis is not sustained as shown
in Table Ta.
TABLE Ia
B , Tum-
wig pod com nes Date of Exam. | pinata: Siapa juje Phen Description of Mass
10 Aug. 7 32 12.94 Mass from 1 EE
lst statoblas
11 Aug. 31 287 14.21 (Same mass
12 Sept. 10 235 13.82 [Same mass.
13 Oct. 5 440 14.47 Same mass.
14 Aug. 31 258 14.56
IS o l Bent. 16 365 14.30 o
The remaining series have determinations at two dates
only and are less significant, though supporting the hy-
pothesis, so far as they go.
INFLUENCE OF AGE ON THE NuMBER oF Hooks
In our work, colonies of Pectinatella were grown on a
clean board kept at the dam, lowest lake, Cold Spring
Harbor, and examined daily. The first young colonies
364 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
that attached themselves to the board in June were doubt-
less statoblast colonies (although the shell of the stato-
blast was not found) as no embryos were seen until
July. None of the colonies formed statoblasts during
June, but began to form them early in July. At various
dates some of these elementary colonies were removed
from the board and the hooks of their statoblasts counted.
Later the separate colonies grew together and their
origin became confused, but it is certain that the sets of
statoblasts given in Table II are each derived from a
single statoblast-ancestor. All statoblasts that possessed
well-developed hooks were counted—there was no selec-
tion.
TABLE II
Dano OF FREQUENCIES OF NUMBERS OF HOOKS PER STATOBLAST IN
EACH OF SEVERAL COLONIES, COUNTED AT DIFFERENT DATES
Number of Hooks
Date, 1912 cei 1 Average
12 | 18 14 15 16 17 18 | 19 | 20 | 21
July 6 5 9 5 i 15.1
July 9 1 2 2 1 15.5
July 9 3 3 4 2 1 1 16.0
July 17! Pe 3 6 7 6 15.5
July 172 4 27 16 6 15.5
July 19 1 9 24 5 5 15.1
July 19 144 1°.20 10 6 2 14.7
Aug. 8 2 14 9 $ J1 15.5
Aug. 83 3 4 1 1 15.0
216! 40 99 | 55 27 |210/0/1
Our studies, though not made on one and the same
simple mass at successive periods, have been made on
several colonies early in the season (beginning July) and
at the end of the season (October). Counts on 241 stato-
blasts from 13 colonies made in July average 15.3 hooks;
7,255 statoblasts of one mass made in October gave an
average of 15.6 hooks; 5,593 statoblasts from a probably
1 Many gay
*Few, if any, undeveloped. The two colonies taken on the 17th were
small, adjacent ‘isd attached to each other. Probably from the same
statoblast. :
* Colony in full life and vigor; immature statoblasts on funiculi.
No.558] CLONAL VARIATION IN PECTINATELLA 365
complex mass counted at the same time in October gave
an average of 16.0 hooks. Thus the difference between
two sets of counts made in the same month on two dis-
tinct masses is greater than between the July and Oc-
tober counts. The highest average number of hooks
found in any mass during October was in Mass B, 3,802
individuals, with an average of 16.6 hooks.
Comparing with Braem’s, it appears that our counts
run much the higher. The average of all counts made by
Braem is 14.34, which is decidedly lower than our July
average (15.3); and in one colony he obtained an average
of 12.94 hooks. A great mass found at Jackson Park,
Chicago, in August, 1898, gave an average of 13.78 hooks.
It is clear, accordingly, that however important the tem-
perature factor may be,‘ it is secondary in importance
to some other factor that determines the variation in the
number of hooks.
The number of hooks is determined by the number of
pocket folds arising in the membrane that secretes the
chitinous covering of the statoblast; and the question
now transfers itself to the reason why in some stato-
blasts few, in others many, such folds occur. At one time
we entertained the hypothesis that there was a causal re-
lation between thickness of membrane and the size of and
distance between pocket folds, such that a thin mem-
brane permits smaller and more numerous folds. Un-
fortunately, it was not feasible to measure the thickness
of the setigerous membrane, for by the time the number
of eventual hooks can be determined the membrane has
become relatively thin and very irregular in thickness.
Our study did serve to indicate that the number of hooks
can not be determined in a mechanical way by the thick-
ness of the membrane, but that, on the contrary, the folds
follow, and their number is determined by, the number
* Unfortunately, we made no thermometriec determinations of the tem-
peratures of the lake water. The lake is spring fed and shaded around
the edges. As a guess, it rarely exceeds 20° C. in temperature; the July
temperature is probably about 18°.
366 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
of centers of cell keratinization. In some statoblasts the
number of these centers is small; in others great.
To test the hypothesis that the size of the cells in the
setigerous membrane covering the statoblast influences
the number of folds arising in it, we measured the diam-
eter of the facets on the dise and on the float of stato-
blasts with 20 hooks and those with 12 hooks. The aver-
age diameter of a facet on the disc in 25 measurements
(each based on a row of facets) was, in statoblasts with
20 hooks, 8.37»; in statoblasts with 12 hooks (14 sets of
measurements) 8.25». On the float, in statoblasts with
20 hooks, 9.54, in statoblasts with 12 hooks, 9.40». It
results first, that the facets (cells?) of the float are
slightly larger than those of the disc, but that the differ-
ence in size of the facets in statoblasts with many and
those with few hooks is neglible.
Since there seems to be nothing in the interrelation of
parts to determine that the number of hooks shall be
great or small one is naturally led to suspect that in these
varying statoblasts we are actually dealing with distinct
biotypes. We turn, consequently, to that phase of the
question. The ideal conditions for an answer to the in-
quiry whether there are distinct biotypes in respect to
number of hooks are these: To plant several statoblasts
(with varying number of hooks) from each of the sev-
eral independently arisen colonies and count the number
of hooks on the statoblasts that are produced therefrom.
We have not abandoned the hope of meeting these condi-
tions, but our attempts to do so have hitherto been frus-
trated. Of nine statoblasts affixed (by shellac) to sub-
merged wood none hatched. Also, colonies observed
daily from hatching were eaten up by the larve of cad-
dis flies (Hydropsyche). Finally after we had secured a
good development of colonies free from predaceous in-
sects all our work was brought to naught by the destruc-
tion of our floats.
We have, however, sought to get the required informa-
tion in a more indirect way. We have studied the num-
No.558] CLONAL VARIATION IN PECTINATELLA 367
ber of hooks on statoblasts from different masses in
order to see if there was less variation inside of one mass
than between different masses. This method has its
clear limitations ; for one does not know whether a given
mass is simple or compound in origin. If, in any large
mass, the modes, or the average, of the number of hooks
varies greatly between colonies, that is evidence of the
compound nature of the mass. If, on the contrary, the
averages of all the different colonies of a mass are
closely alike that indicates the homogeneity and prob-
ably simple nature of the mass—its origin from one
statoblast.
TABLE III
Mass 1
Colony No. | N 11/12] 13 | 134 | 15 | 16 | 17 | 18 | 19 2021| Average
1 460| |4] 22 |148 |324 |272 |165| 48| 10 |7 15.62 = 1.26
2 884| |2| 37 |145 |303 |259|173| 46| 26 |8 15.66 = 1.36
3 828| |1| 33 |165 |320 | 243 | 155| -72| 9 |1j1] 15.58 = 1.30
7 720| 16] 31 |136 |324 |2 32| 76| 7 |4|1| 15.62 = 1.30
8 523| 121 41 296 |249 1 63| 11 |4/2| 15.59 = 1.33
10 361 31 |155 |335 | 241 |161| 69| 8 15.59 = 1
12 508| |2| 30 |189 |319 |242 |120| 59| 35 |4 15.57 = 1.39
13 337 39 |134 | 305 | 258 |130| 92| 39 |3 15.75 = 1.42
14 288 63 |180 | 270 | 230 | 139 | 104| 4 15.57 = 1.43
17 326 28 | 150 | 337 | 240 | 153 | 77| 15 15.63 = 1.28
18 401| |3| 45 |207 |331 |217 |154| 30| 10 |3 15.36 = 1.26
20 3| 26 |155 |313 |273 | 152| 69| 9 15.60 = 1.25
21 560 39 |179 | 332 | 257 | 146 | 43| 4 15.44 = 1.19
22 439|2|2| 18 |158 |291 |265 |164| 87| 11 |2 15.70 = 1.32
24 272 26 |143 | 298 | 268 | 180| 63| 18 |4 15.71 = 1.30
TABLE IV
Mass 2
Colony No.| N |12| 13 | 14 | 15 | 16 | 17 | 18 | 19 | 20 |21/26, Average
1 689 20 |130 | 251 282 |190 | 101| 23| 3/1 15.91 = 1.35
4 284 10 | 67 | 240 | 278 | 240 | 144| 18 | 4 16.19 = 1.27
6 679|2| 25 |113 | 260 05| 8| 10| 3 15.88 = 1.27
10 14 | 128 | 243 | 274 | 189 | 108 | 43 15.99 =
16 501 |6| 12 |106 |281 | 291 | 192 | 84| 26; 2 15.89 = 1.30
20 387 26 | 109 | 299 | 307 | 1 13; 3 15.78 = 1
A 2n 83 |220 | 310 |238 |116| 25 | 7 16.18 = 1.25
26 11 | 79 |198 |308 | 249 | 127| 23 | 3 | |3| 16.23 = 1
30 367 16 | 93 | 237 | 308 | 2 85! 11 15.98 + 1.20
31 250 60 | 260 | 232 | 112 | 44 16.14 + 1.31
33 5 | 283 | 237 | 230 | 154 13 16.13 = 1.30
308 16 | 117 | 253 | 263 | 214 | 123 | 10 | 3 15.97 = 1.31
205 15 | 98 | 230 | 351 | 205 = 1,26
36 308 10 | 71 |198 | 341 | 257 | 84| 26 | 13 16.19 = 1.25
40 259 12 | 16 |286 |305 |220| 93| 15| 4 16.02 = 1.20
Sa
368
THE AMERICAN NATURALIST
[ Vou. XLVII
In any case the data collected have an interest of their
own and are herewith put on record.
TABLE V
Mass 3
Colony NG. + Vil | 18 1) 14 4 18) 16 | 17) 38-119} 20 Average
1 646 15 |. 70} 271 | 280 | 210) 121} 28 5 16.10 = 1.30
3 746| 1 11 | 101 | 243 | 291 | 213 [111 16 | 13 16.06. = 1.33
4 708 20 | 105 | 196 | 253 | 237 | 151| 30 g | -10.20 = LAL
5 513|. 2 | 16 | 94| 270|311)|214| 72| 14 8 | 15.92 = 1.24
8 362| 5 | 292 1777 254| 2903 207/105] 251 11 | 16.04 = 1.37
9 282 7 | 85 | 262 | 252 | 227 | 124! 39 4-16.16 = 133
15 442| 5 | 32 |152| 290 | 265|167| 66| 18 5 | 15.66 = 1.35
17 4211 2 7 | 71|195 | 287/197/207| 59 | 26 | 16.53 + 1.51
18 297 10 | 125 | 266 | 226 | 215 | 128 | 30 16.02 = 1.36
22 488 4 | 8212403051951311 33 | 10 16.18 = 1.33
24 271 11 92 | 214 | 262 | 196 | 148 | 63 | 15 16.31 = 1.47
25 419| 2 7 | 88 | 224 |344|215| 86| 31 2 | 16.06 + 1.24
26 279 7 50 | 172 | 211 | 283 | 168 | 79 | 29 16.68 = 1.45
31 236 8 | 47 | 170 | 343 | 280 | 102 | 42 8 16.36 = 1.23
32 221 5 | 68 172 | 240 | 231 | 190 | 77 18 16.59 + 1.45
TABLE VI
Mass 4
Colony No. N 112) 13 | m4 | 16°) 16 1-17 | 18:1920 21 Average
1 342 12 | 73 |208 292 237 | 12381: 50) 6 16.27 = 1.34
2 278| 4 25| 97 | 255 |238|212| 94| 50 | 25 17.11 = 1.54
3 269 4 | 41 |119 | 197 | 204 290 | 104 | 41 17.05 = 1.47
5 356 6 | 45 | 180 | 213 | 225 | 188 | 82| 56 6 | 16.81 = 1.58
6 559 |2; 16 |140 | 265 | 286 |170| 89| 29! 4 15.85 = 1.35
T 537 30 | 132 | 276 | 238 | 212 | 73 | 30 9 | 16.86 = 1.40
8 231 39 | 126 | 177 | 307 | 230 78| 43 16.97 = 1.40
10 268 4 | 26 | 134 | 231 | 250 | 220 93| 34 8 | 16.44 = 1.44
12 29913} 10 | 94 |291 | 271 ;2111101; 13| 7 15.95 + 1.27
13 158 25 | 171 | 241 | 234 | 228 | 82| 13 6 | 16.80 + 1.37
14 254 $1 | 184 | 217 | 272 | 225| 71) BI 16.94 + 1.41
15 253 24 | 174 | 245 | 170 | 253 | 87| 39 8 | 16.91 + 1.49
16 156 32 | 141 | 160 | 320 | 192 109 | 45 17.01 + 1.43
Te 198 5 | 40/136 | 227 | 237 | 3771116) 511 1 16.96 + 1.57
18 132 30 | 167 | 258 | 212 | 250| 68); 15 16.75 + 1.34
Note.—Each of the Tables III-VIII, gives for a num-
ber of separate colonies of one and the same mass the
frequency of occurrence of each number of hooks to a
statoblast. The actual number of statoblasts counted is
given in the column headed N; the columns to the right
of N are for the entries corresponding to the number of
No.558] CLONAL VARIATION IN PECTINATELLA 369
hooks named at the top of the column; the frequencies
are reduced to 1,000 statoblasts per colony. The column
at the extreme right gives the average number of hooks
for each colony together with the standard deviation of
the distribution.
TABLE VII
Mass 5
Colony No. | N |1213| 14 | 15 | 16 | 17 | 18 | 19 |20/21|/22| Average
1 239 13 | 104 | 268 | 242 | 214 | 101 |50| 8 17.08 = 1.41
2 572 5| 24 |113 | 217 | 217 | 230 | 144 |45| 5 17.14 = 1.50
7 213 3 |258 |282| 70|28195| 17.19 = 1.33
8 179 22 | 112 | 223 | 330 | 196 | 61/4511 16.98 + 1.38
9 177 237 | 305 | 237 | 85 |45! 17.12 = 1.26
11 7! | 9| 56 |141 |150 |234 |196 | 159 56 17.05 = 1.64
15 116 17| 7 0 | 268 | 319 | 104 |2 17.21 + 1.26
16 | 103 | 244 | 308 218| 90 24/13 17.08 = 1.29
20 163 6 12| 61 203 | 203 | 320 85| 66| 17.44 = 1.48
21 337 5| 83 160 |297 | 210 | 142 |74/18 17.42 = 1.48
22 323| |25| 99 |235 | 272 | 189 | 118 16.11 = 1.46
24 336 3! 77 223 283 |202 |122| 63 |24| 3 16.36 = 1.46
31 272 7! 66/239 280|184|165| 52| 7 16.31 = 1.38
32 357 | 653/216 289 240| 126| 62| 8 15.38 = 1.33
34 333 1869| 222 | 291 | 228 | 102 | 54| 12| 3 15.24 = 1.41
TABLE VIII
Mass 6
Colony No. | N |12l13 14 |15 |16 |17 18 |19 20 21122123|24|26! Average
1 461| | 2| 201128260217215 74| 481313|7|2|2| 17.11 + 1.72
2 617| (20110306'298183| 70| 10 2 5.77
5 4 21105 277/351161! 72| 17) 4 15.85 = 1.21
6 531| 2/19158, 335|258|149| 60| 16 15.61 = 1.25
12 | | 15|274|228)157| 28) 4 16.22 + 1.36
14 492| 8/37 173 260 211 185 96) 26) 4 15.72 = 1.48
20 252| |16| 64/190 266.238 159] 52| 12) 4 16.40 = 1.42
25 45 44| 67 178/222 378| 89 22 17.18 = 1.32
31 2/37 142/317 283/154) 58| 6| 2
47 171| 6| | 76/111/251/263/175| 99| 16 16.70 = 1.47
49 322| | 6146 280.295 193 62| 16 < 15.79
50 278/14 58/212 330/205126| 51| 4 15.25 = 1.31
51 200 | 65 185 225 275|10¢ 120 20/10) 17.65 = 1.53
52 280| 4 25 125/310 250186) 89| 7| 4 15.75 = 1.30
53 340) | 3 50 217 282 209 170 47| 18| 3 16.45 = 1.38
From Tables ITI to VIII it appears that certain Pecti-
natella masses are characterized by a great constancy in
the modal and the average number of hooks in a colony.
Thus, in Table IIT the range in the average is only from
15.36 to 15.75, or 0.4, and the modal number of hooks is
370 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
constantly 15 in all colonies of the mass. So, too, in
Table IV with one exception the mode of the 15 colonies
is 16 despite the fact that the average for the whole mass
is near the dividing line between 15 and 16, viz., 16.03.
The remaining masses show a greater or less commin-
gling of biotypes. Thus, in Table V the empirical mode
varies from 15 to 17 and the range of the average num-
ber of statoblast hooks to a colony is .76. In Table VI
the mode ranges from 15 to 18 and the range of the aver-
age is 1.20. Tables VII and VIII show masses 5 and 6
to be even more variable with a range of 2.40 hooks in
the averages.
Examining the standard deviations, we find no evi-
dence that, except for the fact that, as is usually the case,
the standard deviation tends to increase with the aver-
age, the great variability of masses 5 and 6 is due to a
corresponding variability inside the individual colony.’
We conclude, consequently, that the difference in varia-
bility between masses 1 and 2, on the one hand, and
masses 3 to 6, on the other, is due to the fact that the
former are simple in origin and the latter are compound;
the former represents one biotype, the latter two or more
biotypes. Compare the pairs of distributions in Table
IX for mass 1 and mass 6—the most unalike having been
selected in each case.
TABLE IX
COMPARISONS OF Two UNLIKE DISTRIBUTIONS IN
Mass 1
No. of Hooks |12/13| 14 | 15 | 16 | 17 | 18 | 19 | 20 29] Average
Colony 13 | 39) 134 | 305 258 | 130 92| 39) 3 | | 15.75 = 1.42
Colony 21 39| 179 | 332 | 257 | 146 | 43| 4 | 15.44 = 1.19
Mass 6
Colony 50 |14|58| 212 330 | 205 136| bii 4 | | 15.25 = 1.31
Colony 51 65 | 185 | 225 | 275 | 100 | 120 2010| 17.65 = 1.53
*The highly exceptional colony 1 of mass 6 being neglected. Unfor-
tunately, we have no data concerning the position on the mass of this
remarkable colony. In a paper just received from Braem (1913) a sim-
ilarly highly variable colony is described.
No.558] CLONAL VARIATION IN PECTINATELLA 371
The difference between the members of the first pair
is chiefly in the scattering of the distribution—in the
variability—inside the colony. The difference between
the members of the second pair is a difference of mode—
of type. , These latter two distributions, and others in
Table VIII, have little in common; they are the product
of distinct biotypes.
Inside of a single biotype—inside of a single colony—
there is a great variability in the number of hooks. Why
is this? Unfortunately, we do not know. The query is
one with others concerning the cause of variability, upon
which we hope to shed some light.
Our study suggests that the difference in the average
number of hooks in mid and late summer statoblasts is
not due merely to the differences of age, temperature and
food conditions in these two seasons, but probably also
to the circumstance that the biotype that forms many
hooks is one that develops later in the season than the
others. Our study has, indeed, solved few problems, it
has rather shown what a fine field for investigation is
offered by the remarkable variation of the hooks on the
Statoblasts of Pectinatella.
CoLD SPRING HARBOR, N. Y.,
February 25, 1913
LITERATURE CITED
Braem, F. 1911. Die Variation bei den Statoblasten von Pectinatella
magnifica. Arch. f. Entw. Mech. der Organismen, XXXII, 814-348.
Braem, F. 1912. Nachträgliches über die Variation der Statoblasten von
Pectinatella. Arch. f. Entw. Mech. der Organismen, XXXV, 46-55,
Oct
Davenport, C. B. 1900. On the Variation of the Statoblasts of Pectinatella
magnifica from Lake Michigan at Chicago. AMER. Nat., X
959-968
Wilcox, Alice W. 1906. Locomotion in Young Colonies of Pectinatella
magnifica, Biol. Bull., XI, 245-249, Pls. 8, 9.
SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION
SIMPLICITY VERSUS ADEQUACY IN MENDELIAN
FORMULA
IN this journal for March, 1913, Professor William E. Castle
discusses and criticizes in a friendly spirit certain suggestions
concerning Mendelian nomenclature that I brought forward in
the January number of the same journal. There are so many
essential points on which we agree and so few on which we dis-
agree that I should like to make clear the necessity of having for
our work on Drosophila a dual set of symbols. Castle finds, on
the other hand, that for mice and for guinea-pigs a single set
of letters, abc, suffices to make clear his results and to cover his
theoretical ideas.
There are three reasons why in certain cases it seems necessary
to use more than a single system of lettering for factors.
1. Castle’s scheme gives us no way of adequately representing
heterozygous forms. In dealing with such combinations it is an
essential both to the author and to the reader to have the hetero-
zygote represented with its constituent allelomorphs. Instead of
making the system more cumbersome the dual set of symbols is
helpful.
2. We are dealing in Drosophila with about one hundred
mutations, of which forty-five have been sufficiently studied to
show that they fall into three groups. Within these groups the
factors concerned show linkage to each other, but no factor of
one group shows linkage with any factor of any other group.
Linkage means some sort of relation which we interpret in terms
of a linear series. We further interpret this series in terms of
chromosomes, but even if the series is taken merely as an abstract
principle the need of a dual system of letters to express the
order of the factors in a paired linear series is imperative,
so that we may represent interchanges between the pairs.
To take the sex-linked group of factors, for example. In a
heterozygous female there are two linear series present, corre-
sponding to her duplex condition, or, as we think, to the two
homologous sex chromosomes. Any factor in the one series has
a correlative factor in the other series (in the other chromosome)
in a corresponding position, and in order to treat the linkage of
the factors we must have some method of representing and of
distinguishing them. If from the mother the factors aBcdE
enter the combination and from the father AbCDe, the hetero-
zygous female is represented by the two groups:
372
No.558] SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION 373
aBcdE
AbCDe
In all problems relating to crossing-over of the factors from the
one series to the other the location of each factor (and its allelo-
morph) is expressed by the formula just given, whereas one in
which even the duplex condition is represented by small letters
in a single line (abcde) fails to indicate the order of the factors
in their mutual relations in the two series.
3. In cases in which sex-linked factors are involved the half
formula of the female will sometimes suffice (if thought of in
duplex), but in the male the half formula will not suffice when
some of the factors are sex-linked and others not. If a and b are
sex-linked, then the formula abcde fails to represent the condi-
tion in the male, for only cde are present in duplex.
In contrasting his scheme with mine Castle (page 176) uses the
full formule for my cases and the abbreviated formule for his
own, to the apparent advantage of the latter. If he tried to
express in his formule what I have expressed in mine, and had
omitted from my formule what he omits from his own, the ad-
vantage would have appeared differently. For shorthand pur-
poses the most abbreviated form of any system will be employed
in each particular case, except where for special reasons the
comparative formula, in spite of its length, gives a clearer idea
of the relations involved. When representing eye colors, for
instance, we put into the formule only the symbols for the
particular eye colors under consideration, but not, of course,
the symbols for other eye colors that are not being used. Castle
gives the impression that I would use all the known symbols for
eye color each time F wrote out the formula for the eyes, but
obviously nothing of the sort is intended, for we have other eye
colors that do not appear in papers that are not concerned
with them.
Castle uses small letters for the recessive mutants, as I also
propose to do in exactly the same sense. He scores a point—
admittedly—when he says that in my formule the factor B which
he reads as black is the only factor that is not present in the
black fly. There is just one unfortunate line on page 13 that
gives Castle the opportunity to make this jibe, while the whole
spirit of the paper goes to show that the small letter stands for
the factor carried by the recessive mutant. In order that no
misunderstanding of this sort may again arise let me state that
small p is the factor for pink; small b the factor for black;
small v the factor for vermilion; small m the factor for minia-
ture. The allelomorphs of these factors in the normal flies are
dominant and are represented by the capital letters P, B, V, M.
374 . THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
These are the allelomorphs that I assume to have changed in
some way to give the factors for the mutations in question.
I do not understand, after the very explicit statement in my
paper, why I failed to make clear what I meant by ‘‘residuum”’
and as I can not hope to make the matter any clearer I shall not
attempt here to discuss it further.
In writing my original paper I had considered the question as
to the manner of representing the dominant mutant, but since
that paper dealt mainly with the presence and absence theory,
in which absence meant the recessive condition, I decided not to
complicate the discussion with the treatment of the dominant
and did not mention dominant except in a footnote on page 13.
Castle has called attention to the necessity for considering this
matter and has pointed out a distinct weakness in my scheme, if
the aforesaid footnote be made the basis for the case of domi-
nants. I gladly avail myself, therefore, of this occasion to fur-
ther develop this topic. Agreeing that at times it is important to
distinguish in the same formula between the dominant mutant
factors and the dominant normal allelomorphs of recessive
mutant factors, I would suggest that in such cases the letter
standing for dominant mutant factor be primed: D’E’F’. The
allelomorphs of these factors that occur in the normal type can
be most conveniently represented by d’e’f’. The entire scheme
will be:
Meotemive mintents ic ok i's 50k cas nw bs oe 6 abe
Tuar MUON ONE i ceo. ies ee ees ABC
SPORTS TAN BSS oS es reinn D'E'F'
WOE MMOMOTONG a 661s oi hess ies ees Pef
In many cases it may not be necessary to distinguish whether
the dominant is the normal or the mutant form. In this, as in
all cases, abbreviated formulæ that readily suggest themselves
as occasion arises will be employed, and in general, of course,
only as much of the scheme will be used as is essential for the
matter in hand. But when more complicated questions arise
than can be discussed on Castle’s curtailed formula, the plan
here suggested may, I hope, be found both simple and convenient.
T. H. MORGAN
COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY
*Or in more general terms; if the factor is named after the dominant
character, prime the allelomorphs. Since in the case of Drosophila we
always take the symbol from the name of the mutant the above statement
is equivalent to saying, if the mutant is dominant, prime the allelomorphs.
THE POSSIBLE ORIGIN OF MUTATIONS IN
SOMATIC CELLS
THAT mutations are accompanied by some change in the
germ-plasm is, I take it, indisputable. Have we, however, any
reason to suppose that the change takes place within the germ
cells? I am not sure, as a matter of fact, that genetists in gen-
eral regard the gametes as the place of origin of mutations. It
is true, however, that experiments in the artificial production
of mutations in plants? have been limited largely to treatments
of the ovaries from about the time of the reduction division to
about the time of fertilization. This suggests a belief on the
part of investigators that mutations are most likely to be induced
in the gametes or in the stages of the plant closely associated
with gamete formation. MacDougal (loc. cit.) considered it
most probable that mutations take place just prior to the reduc-
tion division.
The very uniqueness of the reduction division has perhaps
suggested the likelihood of the occurrence of chance irregulari-
ties in it resulting in the production of mutations. Davis? has
interpreted the occurrence of 21 chromosomes in semi-gigas
forms of @nothera as possibly brought about by a pushing
forward of the premature fission of the chromosomes from the
anaphase to the metaphase of a heterotypic mitosis followed by
another fission before the metaphase of the following homotypic
mitosis, resulting in the production of gametes with 14 chromo-
somes, which are supposed to unite with normal gametes (with
7 chromosomes). The gigas forms of @nothera, with their 28
chromosomes, however, seem more readily explained by the
assumption of a double fission of chromosomes in some mitosis
after fertilization. Otherwise we must assume that both male
and female gametes with 14 chromosomes are produced at about
the same time and that two such gametes happen to meet in
fertilization—certainly a rare chance.
The heterozygous condition of the new character in some
mutations and the frequent appearance of mutations as seed-
sports rather than as bud-sports may, at first thought, make it
seem reasonable that they might have their origin in the gametes
or at least at about the time of gametogenesis. Neither of these
occurrences, however, affords any real evidence for placing any
such limit upon the time of origin of a mutation. The reason
for this statement will become apparent later.
East? has called attention to the asexual production of varia-
1 MacDougal, D. T., Pop. ae Mon., 69: 207-225, 1906; Carnegie Pub.
81: 61-64, 1907. Gager, C. S, Mem. N. Y. Bot. Gard, 4: 22, 1908.
Humbert, E. P., Zeit. ind. Abst. Vererb., 4: 161-226, 1911.
‘Davis, B. M, Annals of Botany, 25: 959, 1911
? East, E. M., Ann. Rpt. Conn. Agr. Expt. Sta., “1910, p. 139.
375
376 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
tions in the potato that are known to mendelize in sexual repro-
duction, but has regarded these occurrences as a segregation of
characters in somatic cell divisions (of a heterozygous plant?)
rather than as a change in genetic factors, which alone can be
regarded as a true mutation.
The interpretation that I have given to the results of a study
of the inheritance of a recurring somatic variation in maize have
some interest in this connection.t The results in brief are
these: (1) The more red there is in the pericarp of the seeds
of variegated-eared maize (‘‘ealico’’ corn), the more likely is
the progeny of these seeds to have self-red ears and the corre-
spondingly less likely to have variegated ears. (2) Red ears
thus produced behave like F, red ears produced by crossing
self-red races with variegated races or self-red races with white
races, depending upon whether the variegated parent ear was
homozygous or heterozygous and upon whether it was selfed or
eross-pollinated. (3) Red ears that behave exactly like crosses
between pure reds and pure whites occasionally arise from the
seeds of white races crossed by pollen from variegated races.
My interpretation of these results postulates the presence of
a genetic factor for self-color, S, in occasional gametes instead
of the ordinary variegation factor, V. The presence of S in
female gametes is apparently due to a change of V to S in
somatic cells from which these gametes arise and this change in
genetic factors apparently manifests itself in the development
of red pigment in such pericarp cells as are directly descended
from the original modified cell. The larger the mass of modified
cells the more red appears in the pericarp and the more likely
are the female gametes to carry the S factor. But since red
never develops in the pericarp until the seeds are nearly mature,
it happens that the somatic variation does not become visible
until weeks after the gametes are formed and until still longer
after the change in factors occurs. It is reasonable to suppose
that the presence of the S factor in the male gametes is due to the
same sort of change in the somatic cells from which they arise as
that responsible for the presence of S in the female gametes. This
somatic variation, however, never becomes visible because the
staminate inflorescence dies very soon after the pollen is shed.
It is quite possible indeed that such a somatic change would
never become apparent even if the tassel did not die too early,
for a color limited principally to the cob and to the pericarp of
the seeds could scarcely be expected to appear in the tassel.
It seems possible that the production of self-colored plants
“These results were presented at the Cleveland meeting of the American
Society of Naturalists, January 2, 1913. The paper will be printed later.
No.558] SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION 377
from variegated ones as here outlined’ bears more than a super-
ficial resemblance to mutation. The comparative frequency of
the change in factors from V to S in variegated plants is per-
haps the most striking dissimilarity between the two. Muta-
tions must certainly result from the loss or gain or the modifica-
tion of genetic factors. They must arise potentially whenever
a change in genetic factors takes place, whether in the somatic
cells or germ cells of the parent or in the early somatic cells of
the mutant offspring. It is conceivable that many mutations
may arise in a manner similar to the origin of red-eared maize
plants from the male gametes of variegated maize—similar in the
sense that the change in genetic factors may occur in somatic
cells without any visible modification of those cells or of any
part of the plant body arising from them.
East has shown (loc. cit.) that Mendelian characters of potato
tubers sometimes arise as bud-variations. If the same charac-
ters should be found to appear as seed-sports, that fact would
not, in some cases at least, preclude the possibility of their
having had their potential origin in somatic cells of the parent
plant. If a change of genetic factors having to do with tuber
shape should occur in the growing point of an underground
stem, the change would doubtless manifest itself in any tubers
that grew from the modified cells of that stem (provided that
the new character were a dominant one or that, the change
affected both of the like genetic factors of the modified cells)
and the change would at once be recognized as a bud-sport.
But if exactly the same change should occur in the growing
point of an aerial stem, the new tuber shape obviously could not
manifest itself in the parent plant and would appear, if at all,
only among the seedlings of that plant where it would of course
be classed as a ‘‘seed-sport.”’
Whether or not mutations do arise as suggested here, the pos-
_ sibility seems great enough to warrant the extension of experi-
ments in their artificial production to include the treatment not
merely of plant ovaries but of all growing parts from which
gametes may be expected eventually to arise. In animals of
course treatment would have to be aimed at the germinal tissue
but with the higher plants in general almost any meristematic
tissue is potentially germinal tisue.
R. A. EMERSON
UNIVERSITY OF NEBRASKA
°Correns has reported results with Mirabilis similar to my results with
maize (Correns, C., Ber. Deutsch. Gesel., 28: 418-434, 1910). There is
little doubt also that de Vries’s results with Antirrhinum, listed by him as
ever-sporting variation, are to be interpreted in the same way (Vries, H.
de, ‘‘ Species and Varieties,’’ pp. 315-322, 1905). _
NOTES AND LITERATURE
VALUATION OF THE SEA’
Ir is very interesting to see a small country like Denmark lead
so prominently in several lines of ecologic study. The nestor of
plant ecologists, Warming, has done his work here. The ecology
of fresh-water animals, particularly the plankton, has been stud-
ied by Wesenberg-Lund; the marine animals have been persist-
ently studied by Dr. C. G. Joh. Petersen, and the ecological in-
terrelations of the vegetation and the animals (particularly the
) have been studied recently by the plant ecologist Ostenfeld.
And although this is not all that has been done, it shows very
clearly the network of problems on sea and land which has been
studied from a modern ecological standpoint.
The paper now under consideration is one of the latest ecolog-
ical contributions to a study of the conditions of life upon the
sea bottom. The senior author, Dr. Petersen, has been at work
on these problems since 1883. This long interval affords him a`
splendid opportunity to observe the character of the changes on
the sea bottom. He says: ‘‘The impression of the fauna as a
whole remains, however, unchanged within such a short period of
time as one generation. This holds good for the Kattegat and
the Baltic, thus for comparatively open and large stretches of
water.’ Through his studies of the fishes, particularly the
plaice, he came to the conclusion that, ‘‘To understand the dis-
tribution of animals right on the bottom, we must study the oc-
currence of each species throughout the whole of its life.” When
he learned that the plaice from the western part of Limfjord
were inhibited in growth for 8 months, but when transported to
its central part they increased four to five times their original
weight, he concluded that serious attention must be given to their
food. The cause for this difference he thought was due to the
relative amounts of food present—but how was this to be deter-
mined? This led to a long series of experiments in methods of
2<¢ Valuation of the Sea. I. Animal Life of the Sea-Bottom, Its Food
and Quantity’’ (quantitative studies). By C. G. Joh. Peterson and P.
Boysen Jensen. Report of the Danish Biological Station to the Board of
Agriculture, Vol. XX, pp. 1-76, Plates VI, 1911. Translated from ‘‘ Fiskeri-
Beretning for 1910.’’ Copenhagen.
378
No. 558] NOTES AND LITERATURE 379
taking bottom samples by means of an apparatus attached to a
long pole. By means of such methods he and his former assist-
ant compared the number of animals per square meter. Dahl
(1893) had made quantitative studies of the sea bottom at low
tide by digging and the quantitative investigations by Petersen
are believed by him to be the first made off shore. To improve
these bottom studies a new apparatus was devised for work in
deeper waters and the results of the present study are the first
product of this new device, which permits samples of the bottom
to be brought up in their natural position. Detritus collectors
were also used in these studies. With the new sampler it was
found that when food was abundant on the bottom there was a
surface layer of brown or gray, and when the food was scanty
this layer was black and malodorous. In view of the fact that
the digestive tube of most of the animals which were not vege-
table feeders or predaceous, contained a substance much like the
surface brown layer, Petersen decided to investigate this sub-
ject more fully. The bottom layer he calls the ‘‘dust-fine detri-
tus.” This layer in addition to its inorganic parts consists of
plant and animal remains, including some plankton organisms.
Here then is a very much neglected source of food, and he re-
marks: ‘‘We have so long and so often heard of the role the
plankton is considered to play in the economy of the sea, that we
almost forget the other sources of food, which, however, at any
rate in = smaller waters, certainly have even greater im-
portance,’
The dependence of animals upon plants for nutrition is just as
intimate in the sea as upon the land. Therefore to understand
the transformation of substance in the sea from the inorganic to
the various kinds of animals one must begin with the marine
plants. This phase of the subject was investigated by Jensen.
In addition to the plankton plants there are those attached to
the bottom, the alge and grass wrack Zostera. The plankton of
the North Sea is more abundant than in the more enclosed
waters of the Kattegat. This plankton is not an important
source of organic material; the main supply on the bottom is
therefore either the alge or the Zostera. Jensen shows that a
characteristic feature of the metabolism of the sea is that the
organic materials do not remain where they are formed but tend
to become widely distributed, more or less uniformly over large
areas. This might well be called Jensen’s law. The vegetation
380 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
of the sea, on account of its very limited range, except the veg-
etable plankton (and bacteria), is in marked contrast with that
on land. And if it were not for the broadcast scattering of plant
remains ‘‘the greater part of the bottom of the sea would be
bare, not only of vegetation, but also of the animal life dependent
on the vegetation.” The source or sources of bottom deposits
was now investigated in detail. In this connection the origin of
the bottom deposits in Danish lakes is instructive. Wesenberg-
Lund has found a considerable amount of organic materials on
the bottom of these lakes. This layer is eaten by animals and a
bottom soil is formed which has passed through the digestive
systems of animals. This material is called gytje and is ‘‘ formed
in pure clean water chiefly by the excremental agency of the bot-
tom-fauna.’’ These organic materials are derived from the land,
the littoral zone, or from the plankton. In deep lakes the plank-
ton materials are dissolved before they reach the bottom, but in
shallow lakes the soft parts of the plankton are also added to this
layer. This condition naturally calls to the reviewer’s mind the
activity of earthworms in the soil, and Dall’s? discussion of the
banks of excrement formed by fish on the borders of the con-
tinental slopes.
Returning now to the bottom deposits in Danish waters, it is
interesting to note the character of the organic bottom layer.
This forms a brown layer from 1-2 mm. thick, composed of
fluffy fine materials, both organic and inorganic. When tested
for cellulose but little was found, but large amounts of pectose
were present and similar relations resulted in tests of Zos-
tera, thus supporting the view that Zostera was an impor-
tant source of this organic material. Below this upper layer
is a dark blue one, and both layers are free from odor.
This kind of bottom is found in depths of more than 6 me-
ters. When these bottom samples are examined it is found that
the amount of carbon is greater when Zostera is abundant,
rather than when plankton is abundant, and therefore Jensen
concludes that the ‘‘main source of organic matter in the sea
bottom must be due to the Zostera belt and not to the plankton
organisms.’’ Bottom samples taken out at sea show that there is
a progressive diminution of carbon with distance from the shore,
and therefore he again concludes that: ‘‘the organic matter in
the sea bottom is mainly derived from the benthos formation at
* Pro. Biol. Soc. Wash., Vol. 5, pp. 10-11, 1890.
No. 558] NOTES AND LITERATURE 381
the coasts... . The result of these investigations is, therefore that
the plants of the Zostera belt and not the plankton organisms
constitute the principal source of the organic matter in the
sea bottom.’’ And this is in harmony with Petersen’s conten-
tion that Zostera ‘‘is certainly the plant, which for a great part
conditions the fish-wealth of our coasts and attracts the fishes
from the open and deeper waters into the shallow, enclosed bays
and fjords.’ These are very important conclusions and de-
serve the careful consideration of students of marine animals in
other localities. These investigations may well serve as models
for investigators in many other regions, and this point of view
should also be applied to lakes and streams.
When the black, foul-smelling bottom layer is examined it is
found to contain much methane or marsh gas, probably due to
the activity of bacteria, small amounts of oxygen and carbon
dioxide. The black color is mainly due to ferrous sulphide,
which in fresh water is mainly due to the reduction of sulphates
by anerobie bacteria. These black muds contain the greatest
amounts of organic materials. These soils are most abundant
in the inner fjords, and they represent an early stage of the
conditions, which in its extreme development is found in the
Black Sea. Jensen states that he does not know of a similar
condition of affairs in fresh water where he is inclined to think
such a condition is prevented by humic acid. This recalls the
phenomenon of ‘‘stagnation’’ which Whipple and others have
studied in American lakes, and which is even occasionally found
in rivers heavily charged with sewage. He concludes this chap-
ter with this striking sentence: ‘‘We may therefore, to a certain
extent, regard the large oceans as the lungs of the sea, which
supply the water-masses of the inner seas with oxygen and
remove the superfluous organic matter.”’
Jensen next considers the transportation of the organic ma-
terials from its course near the shores to the bottom. The winds
are found to be an important agent in the process, as is shown
by the presence of a larger amount of débris in the water after
storms. By centrifuging this material is removed from the
water, and when examined microscopically it is found to be
composed mostly of materials so finely divided that it is not pos-
sible to recognize its source. Examined chemically, as well as
microscopically, it is found to be ‘‘completely identical with the
uppermost brown layer on the sea bottom.”’
382 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou.XLVII
The food of the animals of the Danish fjords is discussed by
Petersen. The oyster has commonly been considered as a plank-
ton feeder, although the materials found in its digestive tube are
indistinguishable from the surface brown layer of the bottom
and Petersen believes that the oyster feeds, in the main, upon
the organic parts of the dust-fine detritus. The growth of oysters
on objects raised from the bottom has been supposed to support
the view that they were plankton feeders, but now since it is
known, through the use of the centrifuge, that ‘‘pure’’ water
contains the dust-fine detritus which is everywhere available, it
also supports the view that the oyster feeds upon this as well.
Petersen remarks that Lohmann was the first to recognize this
detritus as an essential source of food for plankton animals, and
now Petersen gives it much greater extension and importance.
Thus in the past a clear distinction has not been made between
the ordinary plankton and detritus feeding animals. Such
feeders may be divided into two classes, those which filter the
material out of the water, and those which take it off the bottom.
In addition to the oyster the food of several other animals is
considered, such as Echinoderms, shrimp and Cardium. He
observed in an aquarium that the long-siphoned bivalve Abra
sucks in through the siphon the surface layer of detritus and he
suggests that the short-siphoned bivalves probably take their
detritus directly from the water. To the reviewer it seems that
here are several important suggestions for the students of our
American Unionide. These molluscs are probably detritus feed-
ers also, rather than wholly plankton feeders, and this may be a
factor in their greater development in streams, compared with
ponds and lakes, on account of the superior powers of streams
in transporting detritus and other food.
Instead of taking up the food relations of each species, Peter-
sen decided upon a larger unit, the animal community of Lim-
fjord, Thisted Bredning, and he studied the mass of animals
living on a square meter of the soft bottom. A review of the
food relations of such a sample area showed that it was ‘‘a
detritus-eating Lamellibranch-worm community with its preda-
tory animals. This animal community forms the basis for a
great part of the fish-life there.’’ There are other communities.
Thus nearer the shore in about 5 meters and less of water the
Zostera zone begins, and this is a region which has not been
No. 558] NOTES AND LITERATURE 383
investigated quantitatively. Here the dominant animals are
small gastropods, Rissoa, Littorina, Nudibranchs, Mytilis, Amphi-
pods, Isopods and numerous animals which abound in Zostera.
Shoreward from this zone is the sand bottom, and finally the
strand, each with its characteristic animals and food habits.
Such a study calls to mind Mobius’s description of the oyster
bank as a biocceenose. In discussing the food relations of these
communities Petersen adds a word of caution to those who in
the future use the word plankton. They should not use it with-
out stating exactly what is meant, whether plankton captured
by a net, that which is small enough to pass through the net,
and the detritus plankton. In summing up the general relation
of these communities Petersen remarks: ‘‘All seems to me to
indicate, that the greatest mass of the bottom-fauna per square
unit is to be found in the smaller waters, where the bottom-flora
oceurs at least in the neighborhood, whilst the bottom of the
oceans is as a rule to be regarded as waste regions. . . . One thing
is certain, at any rate, the great, rich fisheries are not prosecuted
on the open oceans, but always in more or less close proximity
to the coasts or in the smaller waters.’’
For a detailed study of the productivity of the different kinds
of bottom Petersen found it necessary to devise various forms
of bottom samplers, so that the mass of life for a unit area of
bottom might be determined. His investigations in this line
were begun in 1896, but his earlier results were not published.
His latest invention is a bottom sampler which permits one to
secure a specimen of soft bottom, with the layers of mud in their
natural position, from an area of about one tenth of a square
meter. The animals are taken from this sample and their rough
weight and dry weight are determined. The dry weight is be-
lieved to be the most precise estimate of the amount of life which
a given unit area of bottom can produce. The many difficulties
encountered in making such determinations are discussed fully,
because he was eager to make, if possible, some calculation of the
annual production of such a bottom. The fish are estimated to
consume about 3 grams per square meter, and the whelks and
starfish may eat twice as much food substance as the fish, or
about 6 grams dry weight per square meter. For the Thisted
Bredning, he estimates that the total amount of dry matter on
the bottom.is about 30 grams per square meter. He estimates
384 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou.XLVII
that the bottom fauna reproduces its own mass each year, and
consumes its own weight of food several times during the same
period. Of course these estimates are provisional.
A very interesting and unique feature of this report is the
series of four large diagrams which show the relative density
of the population of the sea bottom. Each diagram represents
one fourth of a square meter and its population. The drawings
are natural size and show the average fauna. The suggestion is
made that such quantitative pictures of the sea bottom would be
suitable for museum exhibits, and progressive curators will no
doubt utilize this idea.
This is a paper of more than usual interest, and one which
will appeal to a variety of students. The general physiologist
will be particularly interested in it for its bearing on the problem
of the metabolism of the sea, the ecologist for the mutual food
relations of the plants and animals, the economist and fish cul-
turalist for its bearing on the problem of increasing the economic
productivity of the sea, and the paleontologist, the geographer
and the oceanographer each in turn will find much of interest.
Cas. C. ADAMS
UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOIS
The American
Naturalist
intended for ences and books, etc., intended for review should be
MSS.
sent to the pie! of THEA
Shor summ
icles con sae
ERICAN NATURAL
aries of research work bearing
IST, T, Garrison-on- -Hudson, New Bagnn
on
problems of Beba wioluiien are especially welcome, and will be given preference
in publication.
ndred reprints of ph bite ip are supplied to authors free of charge.
ne hu
F — Bea will be supplied atc
tions and ja tine as a "e be sent to the agr rened
ear.
pita additional.
subscription price is four dollars a
Canadian postage twenty-five
The
oreign postage is fifty cents and
The charge for single sopies is
forty cents. The advertising eet are Four Dollars for a page.
THE SCIENCE PRESS
NEW YORK: Sub-Station 84
Lancaster, Pa.
Entered as second-class matter, April 2, 1908, at the Po
Co.
Garrison, N. Y.
st Office at Lancaster, Pa., under the Act of
ngress of March 3, 1879.
FOR SALE
ARCTIC, ces and GREENLAND
DS’ SKINS,
Well Te Low Prices
articulars of
G. DINE ESEN, Bird Collect
Husavik, North Iceland, Via Leidle, "Bigiahd
BUTTERFLY-HUNTING IN
MANY LANDS
Notes of a Field Naturalist
pds George B. Longstaft, M.A., M.D. (Oxon.),
Vice-President Entomological Society, London
oa an added a Araneo o of ——— By Fritz Miiller
“th i =e ge Be ng terflie E R
“pistoa ¢ G colored). me pp. XX+728. $7.00
{Postage 22 cents.)
t > . ».
‘Interesting descriptions of the general features of
e0
bi appeal as much to
ce $ EPAR in cave as to the naturalist, as itis
ei : ul reading. . . It is the kind of book
at helps ig naturalists and we can’t have too
ao The Appendix consists of
>i ons of valuable papers by Fritz Muller, and
very useful and indispensable for those not under-
Standing the original language. There is much to
qE Ee nothing to oe in the work, and it is
hie e addition e popular works on natural
ry and travel. eames News.
Longmans, Green, & Co.
443 Fourth Ave. New
York
TENTH EDITION.
THE MICROSCOPE,
an introduction to Microscopic Methods and to page
oy SIMON HENRY GAGE, =; Cornell eh my TA
350 1 : octavo and above
and on. Price $2.00 gag
COMST OCK PUBLISHING CO., Ithaca, N. Y.
FINE LAND SHELLS
I have in stock and igh sale soek of a ten eost d speci
of land shells, a ron
countries
beautiful mee of the ‘paippines, and ott
be mailed £ scientific collec
cash. Cor ed with travelers oy arts sapere
0 ~~ the finest m “sig ae FP EBB,
202 Westminister Road, Rochester, N. LN
The University o of Chicago
ction during the S Sum ,
mer uae om be same bas as
pa E rotee
The University of Chicago
The American Naturalist
A Monthly wae ae established
Special riai to the Fa
867, Devoted to the Advance
ctors of Organic Evolution and Heredi
ment of the Seo Sciences
CONTENTS QF DECEMBER NUMBER
I. The bape ey a ge of lb ig in the
Domestic . Dr. Raymond P
i, ay ge = ine the Autonomy € “ot eric Sci-
Ii The 5 spawning T ag of the Sea Lamprey, Petro-
myzon marinus. Dr. L. Hussakof.
IV. Shorter Articles and Discussion : A Simple Test
of the Toadies of a of Mendelian Ratios.
Dr. J Arthur Harri
CONTENTS OF JANUARY NUMBER
I. Factors and Unit Characters in Mendelian
Heredity. Professor T H. Morgan
II, Vertical Distribution of the Cheetognath: of
oe San Do Region in Relstion tothe Qaes
tion of Isolation vs. Coincidence. Ellis L,
ohael
mL A Pionir of Spotted ha Q. I. Simpson
and Professor W. E. Cas
. Notes eee Literature: a tes IV. T Tren of Fertilizers on 2 Variation in Corn
7 d erature: N aaret d Beans. Professor J. K. Shaw
VI. Indes to Volume XLVI,
CONTENTS OF THE FEBRUARY NUMBER
Adaptation p ugh Natural peppe men Te Ortho- CONTENTS OF THE Ah NUMBER
genesis, essor Maynar etca
Ada tation An the Living and Non- -living, Pro- L the and Species- of Ecto-para-
Tato n Edward Livingsto Professo: venue Lyman papei
Adapiations Sin kata Reacti Poloa G. H. it Fiama Ta Sexual
Adaptation from the Point of Poe of the Physi-
ologist. Professor Albert P. M
The Fitness of the Environment, ee Tis into the
Biological are the Properties o f Matter.
Profes
A Literary Note ¢ on the ine of Ger-
minal Continuity. Dr. W. W. Stockberger.
erence hy of Brown ooo oe
II. aene of Mendelian Formule. Profes-
sor W. E. Castle.
Ty. kst and Literature. Some Recent Advances
in Vertebrate Paleontology. Professor Roy
L. Moodie.
CONTENTS OF THE APRIL NUMBER
AEE re da and Fag ahs nea of
jea a Teratological Development in Nicotiana
on Theories of Heredity. For land E. White.
Shorter Articles and Discussion patie na Par-
thenogenetic Insect, pies bgt eee. The
Himalayan rari gg with Some Consider-
ations on Multiple Allelom manr
Sturtevant. Mendaliam and Inte cific
Hybrids. Dr. O. F. Cook. Ordovi = p
rae was man S Gonaende. ebi
erell.
Notes hoary granite Some Recent Advances in
Vertebrate Paleontology. Dr. Roy L. Moodie.
CONTENTS OF THE MAY NUMBER
Inheritance of Mamme in Duroc Jersey Swine.
fessor Edward N. Wentworth.
Natural and Artificial Parthenogenesis in the Genus
Nicotiana. Richard ———— ait
Shorter Articles and Discussion Simplified Men ie
ian Formule. Professo: SL ee Emerson. jas
Tenuen of the Development of Agriculture
dees on the Bird Fau ae . Grove
Notes an rature: The Depth of the Ocean.
as i a heer The Growth of f Groups in the
nimal Kingdom. Professor H. S. Je:
Pro-
Single Number 35 Cents
Yearly w $4.00
she £,
The NATURALIST will be sent to »
four BAUS Vs
THE SCIENCE PRESS -
Garrison, N. Y.
Sub-Station 84: NEW Y
Lancaster, Pa.
VOL. XLVII, NO. 559 ©
THE
AMERICAN
NATURALIST
A MONTHLY JOURNAL
Devoted to the Advancement of the Biological Sciences with
Special Reference to the Factors of Evolution
CONTENTS
Doctrines held as Vitalism. Professor H. S. JENNINGS
Ho om
owls. Dr. PHILIP B. HADLE
ongo. DONALD STEEL
Notes and Literature: Work in Genetic Problems in Protozoa at Yale. Professor
i DAVID STARR JORDAN 434
Pe
MIDDLETON, Notes on Ichthyology. President
THE SCIENCE PRESS
LANOASTER, PA. GARRISON, N. T.
NEW YORK: SUB-STATION 84
JULY, 1913
Page
- 385
The Presence of the Barred ae Pattern in the White — — of
~ 41
pee Articles and Discussion: The ae hinis of ——— in the Bel-
- 42
University Control
By J. MoKren CATTELL, Professor of Psychology in Columbia University
Together with a series of Two Hundred and ergs Se Unsigned Letters by Leading Men of Science
holding Academic Positions and Articles by Josepa Jastrow, Gmoram T. Lapp, Joun J. Sruvenson, J. E.
Gruienton, J. McKaen GATTELL, Gmoram M. STRATTON, Da Paton, Jonn Jay Caapman, James P,
Munros and Jacos GOULD SCHURMAN.
A great variety of questions concerning general university administration are dealt with in an original and
helpful way.—Nature
Th
ese quotations and examples are taken from ter i Cattell’s informed and oo discussion of the
subject of university control, a subject upon which he has had much to say of late, finding occasion for caustic
eriticism of exis erican conditions, and standing as the chensiplisn = an academic democracy and a teach-
ing a upon which a man may enter without festelting his self-re The Dial.
Sente and paragraphs that betoken the expert, highly-trained eave! the suggestions that come to re-
fresh ba tell ı us that a new day is about to dawn in educational writing.—The Boston Evening Transcri
SCIENCE AND EDUCATION
A series of volumes for the promotion of scientific research and educational progress
VOLUME I. The Foundations of Science. By H. Pornoa. Containing the authorized English translation
' Gmoram Broom- Hausrap of “Science and’ Hypothesis,” “The Value of Science,” and “Science
thod.’”’: In Press.
VOLUME II. Medical Research and Education. By Ricnarn M. Psarce, Wiruatam H. Werom, W. H.
Howstn, Francum P. Manu, LewsuLys F. Barker, Cuartms S. Minor, W. B. Cannon, W. T.
Councinman, THzosatp Smrrs, G. N. SrewarT, C. M. Jacgson, E. P. Lyon, James B. HBRRICK, JOHN
= Dopson, C. R. Barpnen, W. Orxtis, S. J. Maurzer, Jamms Ewrna, W. W. Konn, Haner H. Donau-
N, CE 3 R, and Henry P. Bownrrcn. In Press.
COLUME II. University Control. Now Ready. Pages x-+-484. Price, $3.00 net.
GARRISON, N, Y. THE SCIENCE PRESS LANCASTER, PA.
SUB-STATION 84, NEW YORK CITY
The American Journal of Science
Established by Benjamin Silliman in 1818
The Leading Scientific Journal in the United States
Devoted to the Physical and Natural Sciences, with special reference to
Physics, and Chemistry on the one hand, and to Geology and Mineralogy
on the other.
Editor: EDWARD S. DANA.
— — Professor GEORGE L. GOODALE, JOHN TROWBRIDGE, W. G. FARLOW and WM. M. DAVIS
ambridge; Professors A. VERRILL, HENRY S. WILLIAMS and L. V. PIRSSON, of New
as Professor JOSEPH S. AIMES, of Baltimore ; MR. J. S. DILLER, of Washington.
Two volumes annually, in monthly numbers of about 80 pages each.
This Journal ended its first series of 50 volumes as a quarterly in 1845; its second
series of 50 volumes as a two-monthly in 1870; its third series as a monthly ended Dee
ember, 1895. A Fourth Series commenced in 1896.
Subscription price, $6 per year or 50 cents a number, postage prepaid in the United oe
$6.25 to Canada ; $6,40 to Countries in the Postal Union. Back numbers at reduced p
see-Ten-Volume Indexes, Vols. I-X XI-XX, fourth series, price one dollar. aa
The American Journal of Science
New Haven, Conn.
THE
AMERICAN NATURALIST
Vor. XLVII July, 1913 No. 559
DOCTRINES HELD AS VITALISM
PROFESSOR H. S. JENNINGS
THE JOHNS HOPKINS UNIVERSITY
1. A well-known zoologist remarks that before certain
papers had elucidated vitalism, he had had a personal
meaning for the word, but after, he did not know at all
what vitalism means.!* Are not many of us in this case?
And is not the remedy more papers on vitalism, such as
we have recently had from Lovejoy, Ritter, Glaser, Wood-
ruff, MacDougall and others—in order that we may
know what is in each other’s minds? In the obscurity,
persons holding the same views are rallying to different
battle cries, while those with diverse views march in sup-
posed alliance. The following has arisen in the course of
an attempt by the writer to clear his own mind on the
matter, and particularly to discover for practical pur-
poses whether the principles underlying the work of the
biologist are essentially diverse from those of the rest
of science. |
The papers of Lovejoy? have been of the greatest value
in distinguishing and classifying the views commonly
held as vitalism, but there appear to be still certain im-
portant distinctions that need emphasis before the ob-
security is quite dissipated.
***V, L. K.,’’ in Science, October 20, 1911, p. 520
* Science, November 26, 1909; April 21, 1911; Joly 21, 1911; November
15, 1912.
385
386 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou XLVII
Two DIVERSE GeneraL Criasses oF VITALISTIC DOCTRINE
2. Two fundamentally diverse questions are dealt with
in discussions of vitalism, often as if they were the same.
The two questions bear respectively upon (4) the need
for the division of science into two contrasted parts;
and (B) the nature of science.
A, The doctrine perhaps most commonly signified by
vitalism is that there is a deep-lying distinction of some
sort between what occurs in the living, and what occurs
in the non-living; with a correlative deep-lying distinc-
tion between the sciences that deal with the two; so that
science must on this account be divided into two kinds,
vitalistic and non-vitalistic.
B. Vitalism is sometimes used to signify merely the
doctrine that mechanistic formulation is not adequate for
giving an account of nature. In place of it there must
then be put some other formulation, and this is at times
called vitalistic. The clearest statement I have found of
this is given by Rádl
One either banishes completely the idea of causality from science, or
one distributes it in quantitative elements present everywhere, whose
origin one holds not to be open to investigation; or one conceives the
elements to be qualitative entities. The first view leads to geometry,
the second to mechanism, the third to vitalism.*
3. It is clear that this ‘‘vitalism’’ B is the doctrine held
for physics and chemistry under the name of ‘‘energet-
ics’? by such men as Ostwald. It is not presented by
Rádl as characterizing a difference between the living
and the non-living; it merely holds that science is neces-
sarily non-mechanistic. It would be equally valid if there
were no living things as objects of study.
4. Lack of clear distinction as to which of these two
doctrines is meant by vitalism results in discussion at
cross-purposes, one party dealing with the doctrine 4,
the other with B. Not infrequently indeed the two ques-
tions appear to be confused in the mind of a single
ES from Rádl, ‘‘Geschichte der Biologischen Theorien,’’ Ba. 1,
p: 81. :
No. 559] DOCTRINES HELD AS VITALISM 387
thinker, the grounds he gives for vitalism tending merely
_ to show that nature can not be explained mechanically,
while the conclusion he draws is that there is a distine-
tion between the living and the non-living; though he may
also hold that the non-living can not be explained me-
chanically. In this way it is evident that no difference
in principle is made between the living and non-living.*
5. To clear up this matter one may propose to himself
the following: ;
Test Question Suppose it were demonstrated that
mechanical formulation? is not adequate for living things,
would that establish vitalism, without a correlative dem-
onstration that it is adequate for non-living things?
If one answers this question affirmatively, his vitalism
is of the class B, not requiring any difference in prin-
ciple between the living and the non-living.
6. My own ‘‘personal meaning’’ for vitalism had been
that set forth under 4; I had supposed it an irreducible
minimum for a vitalistic doctrine that it should make a
deep-lying distinction of some sort between the science
of the living and that of the non-living; but the argu-
ments for vitalism adduced by various authors show that:
not all share this idea. It appears clear that the doctrine
B, that mechanism is not adequate to nature in general,
has no distinctive interest for the biologist; he shares his
interest in such a question on an equal footing, theoret-
ical and practical, with the physicist. Many persons who
do not call themselves vitalists hold that the mechanical
formulation of nature (as simply masses moving in space
and time, and the laws of such movements, with nothing
*A grosser form of the same confusion is at times seen in the proposition
that science can not ‘‘explain’’ life. These statements as a rule imply
such a meaning of the word explain that it is equally true that science can
explain nothing whatever—so that again no distinction is made between the
living and the non-livng. See the excellent development of this point by
Glaser, Pop. Sci. Monthly, July, 1912.
* For our purposes it is immaterial just what is understood by mechanical
formulation, provided the meaning is the same when applied to the living
as when applied to the non-living.
388 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
else) has not demonstrated itself adequate for nature,
organic or inorganic; and perhaps incline to the view
that it will be shown inadequate. Such, for example, is
the position taken by Biitschli, in what he considers to be
an attack on vitalism, such also is the position of the
present writer. ‘‘Vitalists’’ that hold to nothing more
than this will avoid classification with a totally different
set of theorists if they pronounce themselves clearly on
this question; and the same is true for ‘‘non-vitalists.’’
Do you or do you not hold that there is a deep-lying dis-
tinction between the science of the living and that of the
non-living? Do you hold that mechanism is or is not ade-
quate to nature? These questions are not identical.
VITALISM AS THE DOCTRINE THAT THERE IS A DEEP-LYING
DISTINCTION BETWEEN THE SCIENCE OF THE LIVING
i AND THAT OF THE NON-LIVING
7. Leaving aside such ‘‘vitalism’’ as is merely a gen-
eral alternative to ‘‘mechanism,’’ and understanding by
it the doctrine that there is a deep-lying distinction be-
tween the occurrences in the living and those in the non-
living (which I believe is the idea that at least lurks in
the background in most minds, even though the grounds
discussed may not directly bear upon it)—then its valid-
ity is open to the following:
8. Test.—Examination to determine whether the char
acteristics of living things, or of the science of living
things, that are urged as ground for vitalism, are really
distinctive of the living, as contrasted with the non-liv-
ing. If both living and non-living are found to possess
them, these characteristics furnish no ground for vital-
ism.
Much clearing of the atmosphere would result if we
could so much as get a general expression of opinion as
to whether this is a valid test. In the following I pro-
pose to examine by the aid of this test the common vital-
* Bütschli, O., ‘‘Mechanismus und Vitalismus,’’ Leipzig, 1901, pp. 1-8-
No. 559] DOCTRINES HELD AS VITALISM 389
ism of class A. Different grounds may be urged, and
have been urged, for making a deep-lying distinction be-
tween the living and non-living; we shall take up the main
classes of these.
‘*DescRIPTIVE’’ VITALISM
D. 9. Descriptive and more or less superficial differ-
ences of course exist between the living and the non-liv-
ing; this is the basis for distinguishing ‘‘biology’’ from
‘‘physics’’ or ‘‘geology.’? The question of vitalism is,
whether there are deeper lying distinctions than those so
expressed, such as to require the division of science into
two contrasted parts, vitalistic and non-vitalistic. Many
distinctions may be admitted to exist, and to be of inter-
est, without their being considered ground for such a di-
vision of science. i
10. It is of course difficult or impossible to state a
priori what sort of a difference would be sufficient ground
for holding science divisible into two contrasted parts.
The following seem to be fair propositions: (1) The
burden of showing that there exists a difference of suff-
cient depth to require the division of science into two
contrasted parts is upon those that make the positive
claim that there is such a difference; (2) the difference
must be one as to the nature and laws of the occurrences
in the two fields.
11. The most plausible descriptive ground for vitalism
would be that which maintained that since living things
have consciousness, while others, so far as we know, do
not, we have here, eo ipso, a deep-lying difference be-
tween the two fields; and this quite independently of the
question whether the activities of living things require
consciousness for their explanation. Besides the im-
possibility of demonstrating the presence of conscious-
ness in living things generally, and its absence in the
non-living, such vitalism appears quite sterile, since all
that it would express is now expressed by using the word
consciousness.
390 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vow. XLVII
Quite a different matter would be the contention that
the fact of consciousness in organisms requires us to use
in accounting for their activities different principles from
those employed in the inorganic; this comes up at a later
point.
12. Other descriptive differences are sometimes urged,
such as the fact that only among living things exist bod-
ies that have both individualized forms and complex
structure. Few, however, consider such differences to
actually constitute ground for vitalism, though they may
be held to serve as indices to other differences, that do
constitute such ground. Such essential differences fall
in one of the two classes, E and F, set forth in following
paragraphs:
ViraLisM BASED ON THE OccURRENCES IN Livine THINGS
13. The differences in occurrences that are seriously
proposed as a basis for distinguishing vitalistic from
physical science appear to fall into two general classes:
E. Vitalism based in some way on the appearance of
new laws of action in living things, although these new
modes of action depend experimentally on the percep-
tual’ conditions there found.
F. Vitalism based on the doctrine that the activity of
some non-perceptual’ agent must be considered in ac-
counting for what occurs in living things, so that the per-
ceptual conditions alone do not furnish unequivocal de-
termining factors for what occurs (‘‘experimental inde-
terminism’’),
14. It may aid in understanding the drift of what fol-
lows to state first the conclusion to which the analysis
comes. This conclusion is that theories of the sort men-
tioned under E do not make any valid distinction between
the science of the living and that of the non-living, even
* By perceptual or physical condition is meant any condition which could
be detected by any sort of physical tests, beyond the single effect from
which its presence is first asswmed. This poirt is analyzed in detail in my
paper in Science of June 16, 1911.
No. 559] DOCTRINES HELD AS VITALISM 391
if we admit that what they state for the living is correct ;
this conclusion results from a consideration of the na-
ture and method of science. Those mentioned under F,
on the other hand, if admitted for living things, make a
real difference of fundamental character between the two
fields (unless we admit experimental indeterminism for
the non-living also).
E. Virauism Basen on New Laws or Action IN Living
THINGS
15. This ‘‘doctrine of organic autonomy’’® is well ex-
pressed by Lovejoy as follows:
What the vitalist maintains is that, even given a complete knowledge
both of all the laws of motion of inorganie particles and of the actual
configuration of the particles composing a given body at a given cross-
section of time, you could not from such knowledge deduce what the
motion of the particles, and the consequent action of the living body,
would be.
Lovejoy later continues:
Again, such a view would not, in itself, deny that the behavior of
organisms is a function of the number and configuration of the material
particles composing them.
16. Now, with regard to all theories fulfilling these con-
ditions, the essential question is as follows:
Wren if it be granted that under the conditions found
in living things, the laws of action are diverse from those
observable in the non-living, does the science of living
things therefore bear a relation to the rest of science dif-
fering from that borne by the parts of inorganic science
to each other? Or would this be merely one example, out
of many, that from a knowledge of what happens under
given conditions, it is frequently not possible to predict
what will happen under other conditions?
17. An affirmative answer to this latter question will
take away the ground for dividing science into two di-
visions, vitalistic and non-vitalistic, on such a basis. In
the following it is proposed to examine the main sup-
* Science, April 21, 1911.
392 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
posed grounds for vitalism falling under E, to discover
whether they do make distinctions between the sciences
of the living and the non-living that are essentially di-
verse from the internal differentiations of inorganic
science.
The answer to this question will depend to a certain
extent at least upon one’s views as to the nature and
method of progress in science; the way scientific gener-
alizations (‘‘laws’’) are reached. The questions of vital-
ism come back so directly to this that the best method of
exposition will be to take up the nature and method of
science explicitly.
18. Formulation of the Work of Science—To under-
stand the nature of science it is necessary to look at it in
process of formation: to consider the condition of affairs
before a given part of science is formulated, and to ob-
serve how the formulation occurs. To look upon science
as something done and fixed, in order to grasp its char-
acter, is most misleading. Yet it is not uncommon. Berg-
son says, for example, that we necessarily treat the liv-
ing like the inert, ‘‘carrying over into this new field the
same habits that have succeeded so well in the old; and it
is right to do so.’’® But if we look on science as forming
habits (rather than as exclusively a thing with habits
formed), there will appear no reason why it should not
have the same direct and original relation to the living as
to the non-living, forming its habits on the former as well
as on the latter.
19. Viewing the matter in this way, we may say that
science is a name for humanity’s process of making a
survey of the universe, with an attempt to formulate the
results of this survey. So far as it deals with occur-
rences, we may say that it is an attempt to determine the
conditions under which things happen. So far as it for-
mulates its results, it gives ‘fa series of propositions as-
serting what under given conditions our experience
*<Creative Evolution,’’ p. 195.
No. 559] DOCTRINES HELD AS VITALISM 393
would be.’’!° Or, since all ‘‘conditions,’’ so far as we can
deal with them, are experiences, what science tries to
formulate reduces to propositions of the following form:
‘‘When you have such and such experiences, you will
have such and such other experiences.’’"
Thus science is a process of getting varied experiences,
including the experience of discovering how diverse ex-
periences are interconnected, and of formulating these
experiences, particularly the interconnections.
20. Generalizations, laws, are formulations, of the
sort characterized above, that cover many experiences or
things at once. The possibility of generalizations de-
pends upon the fact that things which differ in some re-
spects may be (or act) alike in other respects. This is
what makes science as a system possible. Everything
distinguishable is unique in some respect; otherwise, it
would not be distinguishable; it differs at least in place
or in time, and so in its relation to the rest of the config-
uration of the universe, from everything else. But it is
found that certain of the differences between things do
not affect certain of their properties or actions, so that
we do find uniformities in nature. The study of how
things or processes are determined is largely a study of
what antecedent differences do, what do not, alter the
particular succeeding difference in which we are inter-
ested; or just what succeeding differences they do make.
But whether a given diversity does affect a given prop-
erty or action is determinable, in the first instance, only
by experience.
21. Interruption of the Exposition in Order to Make
the Application of this Point to Certain Doctrines Pro-
posed as Vitalistic—The fact that two things which dif-
fer in some respects act alike in some respects is cer-
tainly nothing peculiar to living things. On this ground
I can not see anything vitalistic in any sense, in one of
* Balfour, ‘‘ Defense of aa Doubt,’’ p. 181.
“This formulation of w e tries to do leaves quite open the
underlying question of how m eee that we should have the experiences
we do, and so appears to be valid whatever one’s metaphysics.
394 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
the so-called vitalistic doctrines set forth by Lovejoy.
This doctrine Lovejoy characterizes as follows:
There is, however, a doctrine which goes beyond this mere assertion
of organie autonomy, and declares that (in part) the action of living
bodies is not strictly a function of the number and spatial configuration
of the particles composing them at any given instant. In other words,
organisms not only have unique laws of their own, but these laws can
not even be stated in terms of the number and arrangement of the organ-
ism’s physical components.”
It is the doctrine that certain vital phenomena are not dependent upon
“any fixed configuration of material parts existing in the organism or
cell at the moments at which the phenomena take place ”—i. e., that the
same phenomena occur in a given organism in spite of profound modi-
fications of the composition and configuration of the parts, through a
sort of redivision = labor and redistribution of functions among the
parts that remain
22. Ina Lae paper‘ I interpreted the proposition
quoted above, that the laws of organisms ‘‘can not even
be stated in terms of the number and arrangement of the
organism’s physical components,’’ as a statement of
Driesch’s view, that the organism’s physical components
fail to include the factors necessary for the determina-
tion of the diversities that occur, so that the same set of
perceptual components may act in different ways at dif-
ferent times (as determined, according to Driesch, by a
non-perceptual factor), thus giving experimental inde-
terminism. It appears, however, from the discussion in
Lovejoy’s later papers'® that he meant merely the fact
‘that the same phenomena occur in a given organism in
spite of profound modifications of the composition and
configuration of the parts.’’ But this can be asserted
equally as a positive fact for both living and non-living.
With this interpretation we could in the first of the two
statements quoted above substitute ‘‘bodies’’ for ‘‘liv-
ing bodies,” and have a proposition that holds for
things in general. An iron body of a certain form moves
toward the earth. We may change the form in most
* Lovejoy, Science, April ar p Italics in original.
2 Lovejoy, Science, July 2
1 Science, June 16, 1911.
* Science, July 21, 1911, and November 15, 1912.
No. 559] DOCTRINES HELD AS VITALISM 395
varied ways; it still moves toward the earth. We may
change the material, substituting lead, brass, stone, wood;
it still moves toward the earth. We may change both
form and material in most radical ways; it still moves
toward the earth. Ina clock that keeps time we may sub-
stitute iron wheels for brass ones; we may remove a
number of the wheels, and substitute others in different
number and form and made of different material, and
still have the clock keep time. A stream that flows to the
sea will still flow to the sea though its bed be altered in
many ways; if obstacles are interposed, it will dig be-
neath, or overflow, or go around, or carry the obstacle
away, and finally reach the sea. A microscope bringing
light to a focus may be made of lenses of different ma-
terials, in different forms, in different arrangements. A
diffraction grating may be substituted for a prism, in
order to separate the rays of light of different velocities.
23. In all these cases it is evident: (1) that the partic-
ular changes made are such as do not affect radically the
particular action in question; (2) we could make changes
that would alter this action; (3) furthermore, in most
eases at least, the process gone through does differ in
certain respects after the change is made, although the
general result remains the same. Now, precisely these
Same three statements can be made for the phenomena
in organisms. When we remove a part of the egg of the
sea urchin, or otherwise alter it, and it continues to de-
velop, it is evident (1) that the change made is one that
does not radically affect the development; this is a mere
statement of the observed facts. But (2) we can readily
make an alteration that will prevent the characteristic
action, just as we can in the clock. No one, of course, de-
nies this: all that is necessary is to remove the nucleus,
or destroy its characteristic structure; and other changes
will accomplish the same result. Again, (3) the proc-
esses after the egg has been altered are somewhat dif-
ferent from what they were before (as no one denies),
though the development takes in its main features the
396 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou XLVII
same course as before. The parallel appears to be com-
plete between what happens when the organism is
changed in ways not essential to its characteristic action,
and what happens when the same thing is done for an in-
organic combination. :
24. I therefore quite agree with Lovejoy that when so
interpreted ‘‘it is surprising that this, of itself, should be
regarded as violating the rule of causal uniformity.” +°
It appears equally surprising that it should be regarded
as exemplifying something not common in the inorganic.
To formulate the laws of what happens ‘‘in terms of the
number and arrangement of the physical components’’
requires, for organic and inorganic equally, that we
should recall that different sets of physical components
often give the same laws (at least in main features) ; and
the scientific procedure, in both fields, is to determine ex-
perimentally what alterations do, what do not, make a
difference in the particular feature in which we are in-
terested. Such an experimental analysis is (in large
measure at least) equally practicable in the non-living
and the living, and it has been successfully carried far in
the latter. I therefore do not see how vitalism of any
kind can be based on this state of affairs.
25. The vitalism of Driesch is based, not on the gen-
eral principle, as interpreted above, but upon certain
very special conditions which he believes can be demon-
strated to exist in organisms, and which, in their special
nature, render it impossible that the organism should
continue to act in the ‘‘normal’’ way after division, ex-
cept as some non-perceptual agent of a peculiar char-
acter acts as a determining factor. The concrete reason-
ing leading to this view is summarized in section 42 of
the present paper.
26. Resumption of the Exposition of the Work of Sci-
ence.—After we have had certain experiences of things
and their interconnections, we can use these in prediction ;
indeed, the formulated scientific statement is in most
* Lovejoy, Science, July 21, 1911.
No. 559] DOCTRINES HELD AS VITALISM 397
cases essentially a prediction, for it says that if you get
one set of experiences, you will have another also. But
the prediction is made on the basis of experience already
had. It could not be predicted without experience that
the union of C, H and O in certain proportions will give
the characteristic properties of the alcohols. There is
no a priori reason that can be given for the appearance,
in the first instance, of these characteristics. Yet we can
use the experienced fact that they do appear in further
prediction or explanation of what occurs under certain
conditions. We learn by experience in the alcohol series
what effect is produced by adding certain radicals; after
this we can predict what effect such addition will have,
provided other conditions do not alter the case. Whether
any given set of the other conditions will alter the case
can again be determined, in the first instance, only by
experience,
This is certainly typical for the actual process of
building up a large part of science. For such parts the
fact of special importance here is the one last stated:
Whether any given change in the conditions will alter
the action can be determined, in the first instance, only
by experience. This is exemplified in multitudes of in-
stances by physical science, especially in the cases of
‘“‘eritical points.” By numerous observations it is de-
termined what progressive change in the properties of a
substance is made by a certain amount of change in some
condition, as temperature. A general law can be de-
duced which, since it works regularly so far as observed,
would naturally be extended to include changes in parts
of the scale not observed. But this would give false re-
sults, for at a certain point the characteristics suddenly
change, becoming totally diverse from what they were,
as in solidifying or vaporizing. Such sudden changes are
most marked in chemistry. We have two substances
mixed together, as H and O. We observe and formulate
the changes they undergo as certain conditions are grad-
ually changed. But at a certain point in this gradual
398 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
change of conditions, the characteristics of the two sub-
stances alter radically, in a way quite diverse from that
which our formulation hitherto has given us; in place
of the two gases H and O there appears, for example,
water. The science of chemistry deals with multitudes
of these sudden changes, which are quite out of line with
what is observed before precisely the necessary condi-
tions are reached for producing them.
27. Now, among the things which have to be learned
empirically are the effects of configurations. This is
true even on the most strictly mechanistic view. The
laws of the motion of a body when the configuration is
such that forces from two other bodies act upon it at
right angles had to be learned by experience, before they
could be used in prediction. By varying the position of
the bodies, the angles of the directions of the forces, the
number of bodies or forces, ete., the laws of such varia-
tions were worked out, till now we have an extensive
system that can be used in prediction. In chemistry we
have a set of rules as to the effects of configuration that
are not apparently continuous with the rules obtained
in the way just set forth; the rules for the results when
H and O are in one combination or another; when C, H
and O, are in one configuration or another, had to be
learned by experience in each case. We have thus in this
direction a large store of propositions regarding config-
urations, that may be used in prediction. But for what
will happen under any configuration never before ex-
perienced the only test is experience. It would have been
quite impossible, for example, from a knowledge of what
happens in the configurations given by the compounds of
copper to predict the laws for the configurations given
by compounds of carbon.
28. Application to the ‘‘Doctrine of Organic Auton-
omy.’’—This asserts, as we have seen, that with a knowl-
edge of ‘‘all the laws of motion of inorganic particles
and of the actual configuration of the particles compos-
No. 559] DOCTRINES HELD AS VITALISM 399
ing a living body,’’ one could not deduce the action of
the living body.
Now, the configurations in living things are either the
same as those in the non-living or they are different. If
they, and all other conditions, are the same, and yet we
get different results from them, then the uniformity of
nature fails, and we drop into indeterminism. On the
other hand, if they are different, then according to pre-
cisely the principles and practise of inorganic science,
this different configuration is a matter whose conse-
quences are to be learned only by experience. After it
has been learned by experience it is a datum to be em-
ployed in prediction, exactly as are the corresponding
data of inorganic science. The process of acquiring and
using the knowledge is the same as that employed
throughout the rest of science. To divide science into
two divisions because the processes are the same in the
two appears contrary to reason.
29. The thing that would show that the occurrences
proceed on different principles in the two cases would be
to discover that the same combinations acted differently
in the two fields, for the fact that things in one configu-
ration do not behave as they do in another is illustrated
thoroughout inorganic science. The arguments for vital-
ism appear to lead, if maintained in a form such as to
show a real difference in principle between living and
non-living, almost always thus directly to indeterminism.
30. The strict mechanical theory holds that when we
have gained an acquaintance with the elementary par-
ticles and with certain of the laws of their movements,
combinations and interactions, we have experienced in
principle everything that may occur, so that anything
else which occurs can be expressed in terms of what we
have already discovered. Thus, if we could be informed
of the nature of the elementary particles and of their
configuration in a living body, we could predict its action
without acquiring further empirical knowledge.
31. But suppose that we discovered and could demon-
400 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vow XLVII
strate that in some of the configurations shown by living
things, the particles move differently from their move-
ments in the configurations dealt with hitherto in me-
chanics. This would simply show that the theory was
in error which held that all possible effectively different
configurations had in principle been experienced. It
would leave us in the same condition that science would
have been in if men had tried to predict the results of all
configurations before the effects produced when two
forces act at right angles had been experienced. To
make the experience fuller, so that prediction would be
possible, would require merely the extension of the same
process used in getting the fundamental data of mechan-
ics. The fact that some men supposed that they had
gotten all the possible different sorts of experience when
they had not seems no ground for dividing science into
two contrasted parts; particularly when the second sup-
posed part is built by a continuation of the process that
produced the first.
32. While the considerations just set forth appear the
decisive ones, certain other points may be noticed. The
mechanical theory that from our knowledge of inorganic
particles, their combinations and movements, we could
predict behavior under all conditions that can be stated
is one that, as matter of fact, can not be verified either
for the inorganic or the organic. It may be held that
perhaps the reason for this is that we do not yet know
the conditions accurately enough to apply the laws of
mechanics. But this answer can be given with equal
force for the organic and the inorganic. To make excep-
tions to the mechanical theory largely destroys its raison
d’étre; for it is commonly held, not because it can be
demonstrated, but because it furnishes a theoretically
universal formula. If we fall back on the empirical evi-
dence, we find difficulties of exactly the same character
in applying the mechanical view to chemistry as to biol-
ogy. There appears in the evident fact that the mechan-
ical theory is as yet equally inadequate in the two fields
No. 559] DOCTRINES HELD AS VITALISM 401
no ground for making a fundamental distinction between
them.
33. A very subordinate additional possible ground for
vitalism may be mentioned here. It may be held that
combinations which have in fact never been produced
before are frequently appearing in living things. This
idea seems possibly in part the basis of Bergson’s vital-
ism. Owing to the almost infinite number of variable
factors involved in biological processes, it appears not
improbable that this state of affairs actually holds. This
might make it quite impossible to predict some of the
things that will occur in biology, even with a knowledge
of everything that had gone before; since the only test
for what a new configuration will produce is experience.
Does this constitute a basis for division of science into
vitalistic and non-vitalistic? Apparently not. Suppose
that a given previously unpredictable thing occurs, as a
result of a configuration that had not before been real-
ized. Suppose this be therefore accounted a vitalistic
process. Now, suppose that after the lapse of time the
same configuration recurs, and thus the same thing
happens. It would now be no longer vitalistic. But the
mere difference between a process that occurs once and
the same process if it occurs again can hardly be consid-
ered sufficient for separating science into two divisions
differing in fundamental principles. Just how many
times a thing occurs seems rather irrelevant to the na-
ture of the process, or to the nature of the science with
which it deals.
On the other hand, if the same combination later re-
curred and did not give the same results, then indeed
would we have a new principle involved; at the same time
we should have to follow Bergson into indeterminism,
the natural terminus of vitalistic theories.
34. Psycho-vitalism and Finalistic Vitalism.—These
two doctrines differ, but for our present purposes they
may be dealt with together. The former holds that the
fact of consciousness in organisms requires us to use dif-
402 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST (Vou. XLVII
ferent principles for explaining what occurs in them from
those employed in the inorganic; maintaining that in ex-
plaining movements consciousness must be substituted
on the same footing of effectiveness for physical deter-
mining factors. Finalistic vitalism makes a similar
claim for the employment of the end or purpose of a
process, in explaining what happens.
In regard to both these doctrines, it appears that we
are confronted with the same dilemma that we meet in
other cases. Either for all diversities in physical action
we can find antecedent physical diversities which are
uniformly connected with the succeeding ones, so as to
furnish a causal explanation for the latter, or we can not.
In the former case a complete account or explanation of
the processes can be given on the same principles as in ~
all experimental science, so that there is no ground for
separating off these processes in a special division of
science. In the latter case we fall again into physical
and experimental indeterminism; from the same phys-
ical conditions diverse physical results may follow, de-
pending upon diversities in some factor not physical.
This I should admit to be valid vitalism; it illustrates
the way a vitalistic argument appears to wind up almost
inevitably at experimental indeterminism.
F. Vrrauism BASED on THE Doctrine THAT A NON-PER-
CEPTUAL AGENT TAKES AN ACTIVE PART IN THE
Processes Ix Livine THINGS, ALTERING
WHAT THE PERCEPTUAL CONDITIONS
ALONE WOULD PRODUCE
35. The doctrine that a non-perceptual vital agent (as
consciousness, purpose, entelechy) actively intervenes
in the processes of organisms is at once the archetype
and culmination of vitalistie doctrine; the one fully
worked out exemplar of this type is the system of Driesch.
36. My analysis leads me to agree fully with Driesch
that only by such active or dynamic vitalism is a real dif-
ference in principle made between the science of the oc-
No. 559] DOCTRINES HELD AS VITALISM 403
currences in organisms and that for the inorganic. The
change of Driesch’s views on this point is worth sketch-
ing, as the type of the logical development of an attempt
to establish a valid difference in principle between the
living and the non-living. Driesch’s earlier attempts in
this direction (in his ‘‘Die Biologie als selbständige
Grundwissenschaft’’ (1893), and the ‘‘Analytische
Theorie der Organischen Entwicklung’’ (1894)), con-
sisted in the advocacy of a ‘‘static teleology’’ for de-
velopment; holding that purposiveness is shown, but this
is ‘‘given’’ in the original structure of the egg, as that
of a machine may be said to be given in its structure.
But for the detailed analysis of the changes that occur,
in the egg as in the machine, he held that perceptual de-
termining conditions could be found for everything that
happens:
We even expect from the future that these analyses will be constituted
of entirely clear and definitely perceptual (greifbaren) chemical, phys-
ical and structural elements, and that within the analysis there will not
be found even the slightest appearance of the teleological view-point.”
37. But later Driesch became convinced that by such
a descriptive or static theory the autonomy of life proc-
esses is not demonstrated, and he thereupon turned to
an active or dynamic vitalism, in which the vitalistic
agent alters the physical processes occurring. The steps
by which his opinion on this matter became changed are
fully and explicitly set forth in the paper on ‘‘Die
Maschinentheorie des Lebens’’ (1896) and that on ‘‘Die
Lokalisation morphogenetischer Vorgiinge’’ (1899). In
the former paper he remarks that in his earlier theoret-
ical papers, ‘‘I saw the specifically biological feature of
organic processes in a given order or structure, as I
called it; in something ‘static’; biology was for me in
this sense tectonics.’’!8 In the latter paper, after stating
this point again, he remarks, ‘‘I hardly need to empha-
size the fact that I have now abandoned this standpoint’’
* Translation from ‘‘ Analytische Theorie der Organischen Entwicklung,’’
1894, p. 149.
38 tt Die Maschinentheorie des Lebens,’’ Biol. Centralbl., 16 (1896), p. 363.
404 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
(p. 36); he insists on the need, if vitalism is to be dem-
onstrated, of showing that a vitalistic agent is at work
at particular steps of the occurrences. In a general
theoretical paper of 1902 he says, ‘‘But such a descrip-
tive teleology as I have myself formerly held has noth-
ing to do with the assertion of real autonomy of the life
processes.’’!® This distinction between static and dy-
namic theories has been maintained by Driesch ever
since; it is emphasized in ‘‘The Science and Philosophy
of the Organism” (II, p. 136, ete.), static teleological”
theories not leading to vitalism, while dynamic theories
O SO.
The true problem is: by what single acts does the restoration of
“ equilibrium ” take place here, especially in those cases in which it is
proved that entelechy is at work, and that physicochemical diversities
and potentials are not able to offer a sufficient explanation of wha
happens.”
Driesch answers this question by holding that a non-
perceptual vitalistic agent may actively intervene at cer-
tain steps in the processes, altering what would other-
wise occur. The method by which this agent operates we
g take up in a moment.
. Now, it results from the occasional?? active inter-
enn of such a non- perceptual agent that the same
physical combination may give sometimes one physical
result, sometimes another, depending upon whether, and
2 ‘í Zwei Beweise für die Autonomie von Lebensvorgiingen,’’ Separatab-
druck aus: bga des V. Internat. Zool. Congress, p. 2
% It is to be noted that Driesch’s pegy eon are throughout
beai it is only the difference between ‘‘stat and ‘‘dynamic’’
that rmines whether a gives one of these Scie asserts ‘‘a real
autonomy of the life processes.’
* <í Science and Philosophy of the Organism,’’ II, p. 177.
= Driesch does not hold that this agent is active in all the processes in
organisms—so that it is by no means a mere name for the aggregate or
unity or consequence of the physical conditions present. ‘*‘We know
already that not every event that takes place during morp nee and
metabolism is the direct outcome of entelechian acts’’ (‘‘Science and
Philosophy of the Organism,’’ II, p. 150). He does to death ‘‘any gone
which tries to make entelechy arise as a new elemental consequence of some
constellation’’ of physical conditions: ‘‘entelechy can not be regarded as
arising from material conditions of any sort’’ (ibid., p. 254).
No. 559] DOCTRINES HELD AS VITALISM 405
how, the non-perceptual agent takes part in the process.
This being so, it would evidently be impossible from a
complete knowledge of all the physical or perceptual con-
ditions to predict what would result from a given situa-
tion, even after one had once experienced it. In a ptevi-
ous paper, I have characterized as experimental inde-
terminism this condition of affairs, in which, in the words
of Driesch ‘‘Two systems absolutely identical in every
physico-chemical respect, may behave differently under
absolutely identical conditions, in case that the systems
are living systems’’;?4 and have pointed out that for the
work of the investigator experimental indeterminism
presents the same practical situation as would absolute
indeterminism.
39. It would certainly be difficult to imagine a more
fundamental difference, either theoretical or practical,
between two divisions of science, than that resulting
from the acceptance of experimental indeterminism,
along with the determining activity of a non-perceptual
agent, for the living; science might well be divided into
two contrasted parts, vitalistic and non-vitalistic, on
such a basis.2° Furthermore, as I have already set
forth, this appears to me the form to which all vitalistic
doctrines come, if they make any really valid distinction
in principle between the sciences of the living and the
non-living. It is perhaps worthy of note in this connec-
tion that the two most influential systems of vitalism at
the present time—that of Driesch and that of Bergson
—are avowedly such systems of indeterminism, either ex-
perimental or absolute.?¢
* Science, June 16, 1911.
*See Jennings, Science, October 4, 1912.
* Unless indeed it be atatid that such Pap E holds also for
the e inorgahie—certainly not a widespread doctrin
ergson’s views are not, like those of Shia put in such clear form
that it is easy to perceive just wherein the indeterminism lies, or whether
the word as he employs it has any precise meaning. Apparently, how-
ever, the ground for Bergson’s indeterminism is the idea that time makes a
change in the action of things, without at the same time. necessarily
changing the physical substratum of such action. This appears to give the
equivalent of experimental indeterminism.
406 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou XLVII
40. The inquiry remains as to the grounds for this
proper form of vitalism, based on the active interven-
tion of a non-perceptual agent, and involving experi-
mental indeterminism. Many doctrines of this char-
acter appear as mere general reflections, with no attempt
at precise formulation of grounds and consequences; to
the critic they are intangible. Driesch deserves the
gratitude of all students of such matters for working
out in full such a doctrine; for showing us whither such
a road leads. The complex hierarchy of non-corporeal
entities at which Driesch arrives, and which appears so
fantastic to some critics, is the logical result of this full
working out; persons who hold to the intervention of a
non-perceptual agent, but refuse to draw the further
consequences of such a doctrine, have no just ground
for criticism until they have shown how such interven-
tion can intelligibly produce the results it does without
such a system as Driesch sets forth.
41. With the details of that system we shall not deal,
but examine only the basis for the fundamental assump-
tion. What ground is there for supposing that situations
do occur which involve experimental indeterminism,
and consequently the activity of a non-perceptual agent?
42. The concrete grounds which Driesch sets forth
may be summarized as follows, taking the argument
from development as a type. Driesch holds (1) that in
order that what is produced should be determined by
physical factors, it can be demonstrated that the egg
would have to be a complex machine, with ‘typical’ di-
versities in the three directions of space, these diversi-
ties being necessary for the production of organisms dif-
ferentiated in the three directions of space; (2) that a
machine with such necessary typical diversities can not
be divided in any plane you please and the pieces con-
tinue to act as did the whole machine (for the pieces
would of course lack some of the necessary typical dif-
ferentiations). Therefore (3) what the egg produces
can not be determined (alone) by physical diversities in
No. 559] DOCTRINES HELD AS VITALISM 407
space, but must be determined by the differentiations of
some complex, but non-spatial, non-perceptual agent
(for, being non-spatial, such an agent is not altered by
division, as the physical machine is).
43. The further development of Driesch’s system con-
sists in working out logically, with extreme acuteness
and subtlety, the characteristics of this complex, non-
spatial agent, to which Driesch gives the name entelechy.
We may take his conclusions as showing to what doc-
trines such a view leads. What we are now interested
in is this; just where and how would arise situations in-
volving experimental indeterminism?
44. Driesch sets forth that a physical system without
entelechy acts differently from the same system with it:
‘a material system in space left to itself will behave
differently from what it would if controlled by entel-
echy ;’’27 ‘*without entelechy there would be other chem-
ical results,” 28 ete.
45. Now, precisely how does entelechy take hold to
alter the action that would otherwise occur? So long as
a vitalistic theory remains vagye and refuses to specify
the precise difference between the action if it holds and
the action if it does not hold, we lack the essential point
for forming a judgment of it. Driesch deserves the
highest credit for recognizing this, and refusing to take
refuge in vagueness; he attempts to show just how the
vitalistic agent may act.
The general condition for anything to happen in the
universe is, that uncompensated differences of intensity
(of energy, ete.) exist; if two unequal ‘‘forces’’ act
against each other, movement occurs in the direction of
the greater, ete.
Now, just what entelechy does, according to Driesch,
is to compensate some of the existing differences of in-
tensity—thus holding back the action that would occur
—and later to release that which was held back. This is
*¢¢Seience and Philosophy of the Organism,’’ II, p. 336.
* Ibid., p. 254
408 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou XLVII
said to happen mainly or only ‘‘in the spheres of chem-
ical and of aggregative events,’’*° these of course com-
prising most of what happens within organisms.
But entelechy is able, so far as we know from the facts concerned in
restitution and adaptation, to suspend for as long a period as it wants
any one of all the reactions which are possible with such compounds as
are present, and which would happen without entelechy. And entelechy
may regulate this suspending of reactions now in one direction and now
in another, suspending and permitting possible becoming whenever
required for its purposes.
This is the only thing that entelechy can do.*
46. It requires little thought to perceive how power-
ful such an agent would be. In a cell containing chem-
icals a, b, c, d, ete., all of which tend to interact, it could
allow a and c to unite, but prevent a and d, ete. If our
four chemicals were H,SO,, HCl, NaOH and KOH, such
an agent could restrain the union of H,SO, and KOH,
and of HCl and NaOH, permitting the rest; as a result
we should get a certain set of compounds. Or, if en-
telechy restrained others, we should get a different set
of compounds from the same chemicals. If an organism
swallowed poison, or if poison were in any way pro-
duced within its tissues, this agent could hold back the
action of the poison on the tissues, so that the organism
would be unharmed, until it had had time to eliminate
these poisons through its excretory apparatus. If one
of the two cells of an egg contained all the conditions re-
quired for producing both the anterior and the posterior
part of the body, such an agent could hold back one set
of processes and permit the other, thus deciding which
part of the body should be produced. Or if the egg con-
tained all conditions necessary for producing both a
starfish and a sea urchin, such an agent could in this way
decide which animal should be produced. If an organ-
ism contained the conditions necessary for producing
"L. Cy P- 180.
*L. ¢., pp. 178, 180, 185, 187, ete.
No. 559] DOCTRINES HELD AS VITALISM 409
any of the actions of which men are capable, this agent
could determine which actions would occur.
47. In such suspension of action entelechy transforms
kinetic energy into potential energy; stopping a move-
ment, the energy of the latter becomes potential (instead
of being dissipated as heat, as is usual in stoppages that
occur through other agencies). Later the movement can
continue again, the potential energy being reconverted
into kinetic.®? Thus there is no offense to the principle
of the conservation of energy; this is the reason why the
action of entelechy is to be conceived in this precise way.
Driesch takes up the case of a moving element having a
mass m, and shows just how the process would work;
the kinetic energy ‘‘is transformed into an equivalent
amount of ‘potential’ energy located at the place of m
and kept there till it is set free, that is, transformed into
kinetic energy” 3? again.
48. Now, this portrays clearly the situation that in-
volves experimental indeterminism. Consider this mass
m, moving at a certain speed. It is stopped in a certain
position by entelechy ; its kinetic energy is converted into
potential. Another body of the same mass lies in the
same relative position; it has not been stopped by en-
telechy. The two masses are alike in all respects, but
one contains a great amount of potential energy, the
other none. There is no way of calculating from the
position and the mass the amount of energy contained.
If we studied one and determined its potential energy
experimentally, we could tell nothing as to the potential
energy of the other, though the two were perceptually
alike in all respects. One would lie quiet; the other, on
being released by entelechy, would proceed on its way
with all the energy that it had before possessed.
This situation would be striking in the case of chem-
ical reactions. Two substances, a and b, are in juxtapo-
sition, under given external conditions. They do not
2L. c., pp. 219-221.
“iL. 6, p. 220,
410 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
unite, being restrained by entelechy. Again, the same two
substances are in juxtaposition, under the same condi-
tions. This time they do unite, not being restrained by
entelechy. If we have several chemicals in juxtaposi-
tion, the variety of results obtainable as a result of se-
lective suspension by entelechy would be very great. By
studying what happens under given conditions in one or
several cases, one could discover no rule that would
hold, as to what would happen under the same conditions
in another case.
49. It is evident that the conditions set forth by
Driesch for the operation of entelechy are present in
every organism, and in every cell of every organism.
Thus if the experimenter on organisms reaches different
results in different cases, he may be quite on the wrong
track in searching for some perceptual difference in the
two cases; the diversity of results may be due to the di-
verse operation of entelechy on perceptually identical
systems. This Driesch fully recognizes, as the quota-
tion given in section 38 shows; other statements to the
same effect, such as: ‘‘I reject absolute indeterminism,
but accept experimental indeterminism,’’ are quoted in
a former paper.*4
50. It will be observed that the acceptance of experi-
mental indeterminism is a necessary consequence of the
exposition of the work of entelechy given in the ‘‘Science
and Philosophy of the Organism.’’ But apparently this
is an undesigned consequence; what the author at-
tempted to establish is the activity of the non-perceptual
agent, and he is merely compelled to accept experi-
mental indeterminism into the bargain, apparently with
some reluctance. He has not, so far as I know, touched
in his published works upon the difficulty for experimen-
tation induced by this condition of affairs. He now,
* Science, October 4, 1912.
* The quotations rae Driesch on experimental indeterminism give
this and former napers are from letters, and are published with: his
permission. (But see note at end of this paper.)
>
No. 559] DOCTRINES HELD AS VITALISM 411
as Lovejoy has recently set forth,’ endeavors to mini-
mize the difficulties presented to the experimenter by this
condition of affairs, holding that ‘‘practically experi-
mental indeterminism is not a great danger for science.’’
51. Certainly such a conclusion can not be deduced
from the arguments advanced by Driesch while endeav-
oring to establish the activity of his non-perceptual
agent. ‘‘Chemical and aggregative events,’’ which he
holds to be the sphere of operation of entelechy, com-
prise most of the events taking place in organisms, and
if ‘‘entelechy is able . . . to suspend for as long a period
as it wants any one of all the reactions which are pos-
sible with such compounds as are present, and which
would happen without entelechy,’’ ete., no experiment in
biology fails to present the conditions for the interfer-
ence of entelechy. Hence the experimenter must always
be in doubt as to whether it is worth while to search for
preceding perceptual differences determining different
results in two experiments. Just so far as it does pre-
sent such difficulties for experimentation, and no farther,
is there basis for such a determining activity of a non-
perceptual agent as set forth in Driesch’s vitalism.
52. But is there reason to believe that if we could actu-
ally perceive all potentially perceptual diversities, we
should really ever find that two systems identical in all
perceptual factors behave differently? To me it ap-
pears that there is none; and that, so far as develop-
ment goes, it can be asserted that for every case cited
in support of vitalism in which diversities of develop-
ment arise, definite preceding perceptual diversities can
be pointed out, which experimentally determine the later
diversities. I question whether any one would attempt
to cite a case in which this can not be done. If this be
the state of the case throughout, then empirical demon-
stration of experimental indeterminism is impossible,
for no case of it ever arises.
53. If this be true, it seems — for forming a
* Science, November 15, 1912.
412 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vow. XLVII
judgment of the validity of this sort of vitalism. Now,
it appears to me that in his recent attempt to show that
such vitalism does not seriously affect experimental
science—in the letter quoted by Lovejoy—Driesch in ef-
fect admits this; pulls the empirical foundations from
beneath his theory, so far as they depend on the occur-
rence of any particular cases in which two perceptually
similar systems behave differently, and is left in the posi-
tion of maintaining in general what he denies for all
particular cases; at least he saves himself from this
position only by the expedient of asserting the ‘‘very
great probability’’ of certain conclusions, in place of
their certainty. The passage lends itself so fully to the `
arguments of those convinced that any doctrine involv-
ing experimental indeterminism has no sound basis that
I should have hesitated to make use of it until similar
statements were incorporated into some formal publica-
tion by Driesch, save for the fact that, with Driesch’s
permission, it has already been given currency by Love-
joy.°* The passage is as follows:
Practically, we may say that complete knowledge of the physico-
chemical constitution of a given egg in a given state and of the behavior
following this constitution in one case implies the same knowledge for
other cases (among the same species) with a very great probability.
But this is a probability in principle and ean never be more. It would
not even be a probability in the case that we did not know the origin
(or history) of the “ given egg in a given state,” viz.: that this egg 1s
the egg, say, of an ascidian. But to know this “history ” or “ origin”
is, of course, already more than simply to know “ the physico-chemical
constitution” and its consequences in one case (which suffices in the
realm of the inorganic).
It may be that the eggs of fishes, echinoids and birds are the same in
all essentials of the physico-chemical constitution. There happens
smnetiing very different in the different cases on account of the different
“ entelechies.”
In spite of this; we know what will happen with great probability
from one case, if you know that this egg “ comes from a bird” and that
the other “comes from an Echinoid.” (I, intentionally, leave out of
account here the existing differences in size, shape, ete., of the eggs in
question; these may be not among the “ essentials.” )
= Science, November 15, 1912. (See note at end of the present paper.)
No. 559] DOCTRINES HELD AS VITALISM 413
Therefore: practically “ experimental indeterminism ” is not a great
danger for science.
54. There are here two main points that are of inter-
est in the present connection.
(1) In the case of comparing eggs from the same or-
ganism, evidently the situation resulting in experimental
indeterminism never arises so far as the ‘‘very great
probability’’ is realized. Thus the differences in the de-
velopment of different cells of the sea urchin egg, or of
fragments of Tubularia, or of the ascidian, on which
Driesch bases so largely his vitalism, are all due experi-
mentally to perceptual differences in the conditions, so
that so far as experimental explanation goes, they are
accounted for in the same sense that any diversity of
action is accounted for in the inorganic world.
The only escape from this lies in Driesch’s substitu-
tion of ‘‘very great probability” for certainty. The
special grounds for this substitution are not evident.
Even with regard to inorganic events, no man can say
absolutely that what has happened under given condi-
tions will ‘‘certainly’’? always happen under the same
conditions; for the only test of this is experience, and
some cases are not yet experienced. But no distinction
along this line between organic and inorganic is evident,
when once a ‘‘very great probability” is admitted for
the organic.*§
Those who begin by assuming intervention by a non-
perceptual agent might argue that under the same con-
ditions throughout, the purposes of entelechy would al-
ways be the same, hence it would always cause the same
things to be done under the same conditions. But this is
merely another way of admitting that no cases showing
experimental indeterminism ever occur.
(2) With regard to eggs from diverse organisms there
are two main points:
(a) The distinction made between knowing the his-
tory or origin, and knowing the physico-chemical consti-
* But see note at the end of this paper.
414 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vor XLVII
tution signifies the following experimental situation. If
an experimenter could have the egg of a starfish and
another of a sea urchin presented to him, knowing noth-
ing of their origin, could examine each so thoroughly as
to perceive all the perceptual characters, all the physical
diversities well known to exist between the two, and
could observe that one develops into a starfish, the other
into a sea urchin—he could not predict, when a similar
pair are again presented, which would produce a starfish.
which a sea urchin (although it is admitted that he could
if he knew the origin of the two). Is there any plausible
ground for such a proposition?
(b) As between these eggs from different organisms,
the assertion is that the diversities in what occurs are
not due to the present and observable differences in
physical constitution, these differences being supposedly
‘‘not among the essentials.’’
Now, this abandons experimental evidence and all
possibility of such, for it is well known that the eggs of
different organisms do show differences in constitution,
and that these differences are followed regularly by dif-
ferences in what happens, which is all that experimental
science can discover.
55. The result of these two admissions is then to leave
without any possible empirical basis the idea that two
perceptually identical systems can give diverse results,
save only if there are ever cases with eggs of the same
organism where the ‘‘very great probability’’ spoken of
is not realized. All admit that the eggs of diverse or-
ganisms are perceptually diverse; Driesch admits that
the eggs of the same organism always do the same thing
under the same conditions ‘‘with very great probabil-
ity.” Nothing then is left, so far as development is con-
cerned, but the substitution of this ‘‘very great probabil-
ity” for ‘‘certainty,’’ as a basis for the idea that an ex-
perimental, perceptual, cause is ever lacking for any di-
versities in result; and so for that kind of vitalism which
requires and depends upon experimental indeterminism.
No. 559] DOCTRINES HELD AS VITALISM 415
SUMMARY
In conclusion, the point of view developed in the fore-
going may be briefly characterized and compared with
that presented in certain other discussions. It agrees, 1
take it, with Lovejoy, Spaulding, and others, in admitting
the possible validity of a ‘‘vitalism’’ that makes no dis-
tinction between the science of the living and that of the
non-living, holding merely that mechanistic formulation
is not adequate to nature in general; such ‘‘vitalism’’
being synonymous with ‘‘energetics’’ or ‘‘temporalism,”’
or some similar doctrine. Confusion of such a doctrine
with a vitalism that holds to a deep-lying distinction be-
tween the science of the living and that of the non-living
is a common source of misunderstanding.
As to doctrines which attempt to make such a deep
lying distinction, dividing science into two contrasted
kinds, vitalistic and non-vitalistic, it farther admits (with,
I judge, Lovejoy, Bergson, Woodruff, Ritter, Spaulding,
Glaser and others) that configurations perhaps exist in
the living, whose laws of action are not predictable from
a formulation of what happens in configurations occur-
ring in the non-living. But this is held to be merely an
example of a general principle, equally well exemplified
when diverse inorganic configurations are compared:
from formulating the action of one configuration, that of
another can not be predicted with certainty, until its ac-
tion has also been experienced; this continual recourse
to observation and experiment being one of the essen-
tial features of science in general. Hence it holds that
such facts present no ground for dividing science into
two divisions, vitalistic and non-vitalistic; but also that
study of the organic configurations of matter gives re-
sults that are as fundamental as the study of inorganic
configutations; results which no exclusive study of the
latter could ever supply. Parts of biology are therefore
‘‘antonomous’’ in the same sense, and in no other sense,
that the science of the compounds of carbon is autono-
416 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vor XLVII
mous in comparison with that of the compounds of
copper.
It thus holds, in agreement with Driesch, that any
‘static’ doctrine, in which admittedly the perceptual
conditions determine what happens in the living system,
does not make a difference in principle between the laws
of the living and those of the non-living; but that to make
such a difference, it must be held that the same condi-
tions may act diversely in the two fields; thus giving rise
to experimental indeterminism (and perhaps to the as-
sumption of a non-perceptual factor for determining the
diversities not otherwise accounted for, as in the vital-
ism of Driesch). But it holds (I take it with Lovejoy,
Glaser, Woodruff, Spaulding, Sumner and perhaps
most investigators) that we do not have grounds for
supposing that such a condition exists; and that even
Driesch’s presentation results in the non-existence of
any actual cases of experimental indeterminism.
Note.—Since this paper was written Driesch has published an article
(‘‘Ueber die Bestimmtheit und die Voraussagbarkeit des Naturwerdens,’’
of experimental indeterminism for the organie (p. 65); and (2) attempts
to show that the grounds for substituting very great probability in place of
certainty are stronger for the living than for the non-living. The argument
n this second point is a somewhat abstruse one, based on certain conse-
quences held to flow from the concept of individuality.
BOOKS AND PAPERS REFERRED TO
Balfour, A. J.
1879. A Defence of Philosophie Doubt.
Bergson, H.
1911. Creative Evolution. 407 pp. New York.
Bütschli, O.
1901. Mechanismus und Vitalismus. 107 pp. Leipzig.
Driesch, H.
1893. Die — als selbständige Grundwissenschaft.' 61 pp.
1894, pL Theorie der organischen Entwickelung. [eipzig.
1896. Die Maschinentheorie des Lebens. Biol. Centralblatt, Bd. 16,
pp. 353-371.
1899. Die Lokalisation morphogenetischer Vorgänge. Ein Beweis
vitalistischen Geschehens. 82 pp. Leipzig. (Also, Arch. f.
Entw.-mech., Bd. 8, pp. 35-111.)
No. 559] DOCTRINES HELD AS VITALISM 417
1902. Zwei Beweise fiir die Autonomie von Lebensvorgiingen. 12 pp.
Sonderabdruck aus: Verhdlg. des V. Internat. So ae -Con-
gresses.
1908. The Science and Philosophy of the Organism, Vol. 2. 381 pp.
London.
Glaser, O.
1912. Isa oF eer Explanation of Life Possible? Popular Science
nthly, July, pp. 78-89.
1912, Mikans on the rre of Biological Science. AMERICAN
NATURALIST, Vol. 46, pp. —728.
Jennings, H.
1911. Vitalism and Experimental Investigation. Science, Vol. 33,
pp. 927-
1912. Driesch’s Vitalism and Experimental Indeterminism. Science,
Vol. 36, pp. 434—435.
Lovejoy, A. O.
1909. Review of Driesch, ‘‘The Science and Philosophy of the Organ-
ism.’’ Science, Vol. 30, pp. —766.
1911. The Meaning of Vitalism. Science, Vol. 33, ar 610-614,
1911. The Import of Vitalism. Science, Vol. 34, pp.
1912. The Meaning of Driesch and the Meaning of Att Science,
Vol. 36, pp. 672-675.
gre cg R.
Neo-vitalism and the Logic of Science. Science, Vol. 37, pp.
` 104-106.
Rádl, E.
1905. Geschichte der biologischen Theorien. I. Teil. Leipzig.
Ritter, W. E.
1911. The Controversy between Materialism and Vitalism: Can it be
nded? Science, Vol. 33, pp. 437—441.
Spaulding, E. G.
1909. Review of Driesch’s ‘‘The Science and eT of the
Maat ism.’’ Philosophical Review, Vol. 18, pp. 437—442.
Sumner, F,
1910. Pei of Driesch’s ‘‘The Science and Philosophy of the
m.’’? Journal of Philosophy, a and Scientific
INUN Vol. 7, pp. 309-330.
Woodruff, C. E.
1911. Modern Vitalism. New York Medical Journal, August 19 and
August 26. 41 pp.
THE PRESENCE OF THE BARRED PLUMAGE
PATTERN IN THE WHITE LEGHORN
BREED OF FOWLS-
DR. PHILIP B. HADLEY
In connection with certain inheritance studies, which
were undertaken primarily with another purpose in view,
a quantity of data are at hand which relate to the con-
stitution of the White Leghorn breed of fowls. In the
course of the studies mentioned many crosses were made
between the White Leghorn (g) and females belonging
to a variety of black breeds, such as Black Hamburg,
Black Minorca, Black Java and Black Spanish. In F,,
and later generations, there appeared a proportion of
birds which possessed over the entire body a typical
barred plumage pattern. This circumstance led to an
inquiry regarding the source of this character in the
cases mentioned, and the results of this study appear
to warrant the conclusions presented in this paper.
EXPERIMENTAL Resuuts IN F,
The stock used in these experiments was the best that
could be obtained from reliable breeders who had bred
the respective varieties for a long period of years. In
all the crosses to be mentioned the White Leghorn 3 was
used with black 99. First will be described the results
obtained from the mating: White Leghorn ¢ X Black
Hamburg 9.
In the first generation from this cross nothing but
white birds was obtained (110 individuals). No birds
were, however, pure white. All showed black fleckings
which were apparent in some cases only upon close ob-
servation. In a small proportion of birds, both males
and females, there were present from one to three
1 Contribution No. 18 from the Biological Laboratory of the Rhode
Island Agricultural Experiment Station, Kingston, R. I.
No. 559] BARRED PLUMAGE PATTERN 419
Fie. 1. White Leghorn ¢.
wholly barred or more often partly barred feathers.
These usually occurred either among the wing coverts or
the tail coverts, although they were occasionally seen in
the primary and secondary wing feathers or on the neck.
The barring on these feathers was always most distinct
at the distal end of the feather, but was never of so good
a quality as seen in the Barred Plymouth Rock breed.
The ‘‘under color” was usually dark. For these F, re-
sults two series of matings were made and 110 chicks
reared. In each series a different White Leghorn ¢ was
used, but the results were the same in both cases.
EXPERIMENTAL RESULTs IN F,
Of the F, fowls raised in 1910 one cockerel and five
pullets were bred together in 1911. The cockerel was
hatched as a pure white bird with no trace of black down
feathering. When adult, a single feather showing a buff-
yellow bar appeared ‘among the coverts of each wing.
Among the saddle feathers were a few showing some buff.
420 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
Fie. 2. Black Hamburg 9.
Of the F, females employed in 1911, 201 G was a nearly
pure white bird but showed a few splashes of black in the
saddle feathers and wing coverts. Hen 201 L was hatched
with a large patch of black down on the back, but even-
tually became a pure white bird. Hen 202 G showed
many black splashed feathers on back and wings, while
211 B and 211 V had a small amount of black ticking.
Hen 211 K was almost pure white.
The results of these matings showed blacks, grays,
whites, splashed whites and barred birds. The blacks
possessed as good color as in the original parent stock;
the grays appeared as dilute blacks. Some of the whites
were pure whites while others showed black ticking.
The splashed individuals showed many grades, some
being heavily splashed, some slightly. In the barred
birds the barring covered the entire body. It was often
indistinct, owing to the dark under color, which was never
so light as in pure-bred Barred Plymouth Rocks. The
barring appeared to correspond fairly well, however,
with the barring depicted in early illustrations of years
No. 559] BARRED PLUMAGE PATTERN 421
Fie. 3. F, Cross-bred g.
ago, before the Barred Rocks had been developed to the
present state of perfection. The proportions in which
these different types appeared in the 1911 series is shown
in the accompanying table (Table I).
TABLE I
RESULTS IN 1911 FROM MATING
a(W. Ll. go Xx B.D) X(W: DL gx BO).
: | | Total | Black Barred |
Mating | Mother | Num- | White - - — | Gray
ber | Gi Y J! | o | | 2 |
314 Wig | won ols (0) 8 | oO fijo
315 201 ey: 16 0 | ere Se 2 0 3] 0
316 202 G | 6 | 0 0 Pere Te 4.8 0j- 9
317 211 B H 0 EN | 0o 1-0 z: 9
4 211 K 23 | 18 | 01.0. 32) Oo Oo; 3
Pade MLF oe ae we pi Poe] BO tae,
Totals seseoens 117 | 9 0i 9 | 3 | a r- 5 4
Expected...... 117 | 87} |0] 74| | 1448 | 75 aoe
Totals .....,... 117 90 | | 16 | bs Rae
Expected...... | 117 | 8722) Trs | 2144
* Includes the four gray fowls.
422 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
Fic, 4. F, Cross-bred Q.
Before discussing this case, the results of a similar
mating of other F, birds, in 1912, may be presented. The
F, male was 8 L, mated with his sisters, 8 B, 8 G, 8 H
and 8 Z, all of which resembled the F, females in the
1911 series.
TABLE II
RESULTS IN 1912 FROM MATING
(W.L. 3 XB. H. 9) X O(W. L. g XB. H. 9).
n : | | Black | Barred
Mating No. sag White ——— m [M
| No. | elelr alg]:
456 aS Se a oor 1
457 13 See. rs oe 0 1
58 14 io Ùo i a 1 0
459 S18 164 8 tM ee
= Pia o I DS J ot Slr
Totals. .....-..+0-.+00 137 106 0 6 EE h VE
Expected 10214 | 0 | 8% 117, | 8% |
Totals ee w T 7 : E T O
Expected............ eH] S T
Discussion
It may now be asked how the presence of the barred
No. 559] BARRED PLUMAGE PATTERN 423
Fig. 5. Fe Barred g-
birds is to be explained. Since it would be impossible
for the Black Hamburg females to carry the barring fac-
tor, unless they also possessed an inhibition for barring,
the obvious conclusion is that this pattern came from
the White Leghorn. We may tentatively assume then
that the W. L. ¢ is homozygous for barring, and attempt
to ascertain to what extent the experimental results
agree with the expected results in such a case.
First, it may be said that the W. L. breed in all prob-
ability carries a factor for black pigmentation (N), and
also a factor which inhibits the manifestation of black
in the plumage (I). Furthermore we may assume that
it possesses a color factor C, and that the male is homo-
zygous for the absence of the female sex factor, F, for
which the females are heterozygous. In addition to this
we may assume that in gametogenesis the barring fac-
tor, B, is repelled by F. There is no reason for assum-
ing that the W. L. ¢ is other than homozygous for I.
ha may then write the zygotic formulas of the W.
.ß as:
424 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
Fic. 6. Fə Barred Q.
C-B-N»f-I
forming gametes
° OBNfI- CBNfI.
As to the zygotic constitution of the Black Hamburg
?2 there is no reason for supposing that they contain
either B or I, although they do contain C and N; also
they may be looked upon as heterozygous for F. We
may therefore write their zygotic formula as
C.b.N.F fi.
forming gametes
CoN Fi - CbNfi.
But, since, in all probability, none of the birds in these
experiments lacks the factors C or N, we may leave these
out of consideration, thus writing the W. L. ¢ formula:
Bofol.
forming gametes
Bfl- BHI,
and the B. H. ° formula as
No. 559] BARRED PLUMAGE PATTERN 425
b.F fi.
forming gametes
bFi- bFi.
The mating then becomes
W.L. Bfl BfI
B.H. bFi bFi
Bf Ti = white gg, heterozygous, for barring and inhibiting factor.
BbFfIi= white 29, heterozygous, for barring and inhibiting factor.
In other words, the F, from mating of W. L. § X B.
H. 2 gives birds that are all white, but heterozygous for
B and I. The fact that some F, birds put up barred
feathers may be explained on the ground that the domi-
nance of the inhibiting factor (I), in heterozygous con-
dition, was not complete. Where a little black was per-
mitted to show, there it filled the pattern of an already
barred feather.
What now takes place when the F, whites are mated
among themselves? The F, males with the zygotic con-
stitution Bbffli form gametes BfI Bfi bfI bfi. The F,
females with the zygotic constitution Bb Ff Ii form
gametes BfI bFi Bfi bFI. The mating of the F, stock
may therefore be represented :
8 BfI.bfi . Bfi. bfI
Q Bfl.bFi.Bfi.bFI giving in F,
( B.f,I, (1) White, homozygous for B and I.
Bbf,li (2) White, heterozygous for B and J.
B.f,Ji (2) White, homozygous for B; heterozygous for I.
Bbf,I, (1) White, heterozygous for B; homozygous for I.
Bbf;i (1) Barred, heterozygous for B; no I.
B.fsig (1) Barred, homozygous for B; no I.
Bb Ff Ii (2) White, heterozygous for B and I.
bb Ff i, (1) Black, no B nor I.
Bb Ff I, (1) White, heterozygous for B; homozygous for I.
F? | bb Ff Ii (2) White; no B; heterozygous for I.
Bb Ff i (1) Barred, heterozygous; no J.
bb Ff I, (1) White, no B; homozygous for I.
Sà
The data presented above may be summarized as fol-
ows:
426 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou XLVII
Characters
sessosess
J
<n
o| mom | Aa
Q
6
1 1
1
8
In other words, among every 16 birds in F, we might
expect to find 12 whites, 3 barred and 1 black. The whites
should be equally divided between the sexes; of the three
barred birds, two should be male and one female; the
one black should be a female. Moreover, one of the
barred males should be homozygous for this factor, while
the other male and the female should be heterozygous.
Other birds, including both males and females, should
carry the barring factor but not manifest the pattern
since they will also be either homozygous or heterozygous
for the inhibiting factor, J.
Having thus outlined what we should expect to see re-
sult in F,, provided the original W. L. cockerel was actu-
ally homozygous for barring and also possessed factors
C, N and I, we may now attempt to ascertain to what ex-
tent these theoretical results agree with the experimental
data and furnish an interpretation for them.
First, referring back to Table I, it is apparent that the
expected 3:1 ratio of a white X black cross is fairly
closely realized among the 117 birds included in this
table. Actual results were 90 white: 27 dark, while the
expected are 88 white: 29 dark. Whereas we should ex-
pect only 7 + blacks, all females, we actually have 12
blacks (16 including the grays), including 9 females and
3 of undetermined sex. In part explanation of the dis-
crepancy it may be said, however, that in very young
chicks it is impossible to distinguish the blacks from the
barred. In case chicks die during the first week of life,
all those which would later develop barring must be de-
scribed as black. It therefore can not be doubted that
several of the birds described as black were actually
No. 559] BARRED PLUMAGE PATTERN 427
barred. The only way to avoid this difficulty is to embody
in the tables no chicks which die under three weeks of
age. This plan was adhered to in the collection of data
presented in Table II.
Regarding the barred birds, it is clear that more are
called for than actually appeared; but, as already ex-
plained, the number would probably have been made up
by addition of birds from the blacks, if these chicks had
lived long enough to develop their barring. It is appar-
ent, however, that the ratio of males to females is in the
right sense.
Turning now to the results of similar matings pre-
sented in Table II, it is apparent that the experimental
results conform more closely to the expected. In this
case all the chicks were over three weeks old when de-
scribed. The obtained ratio of whites to blacks is 106: 31,
while the expected is 102:35. The actual ratio of black
to barred birds was 7:24, while the expected was
8+ :25-+. As was to be expected, no black males ap-
peared, while the number of barred males was approxi-
mately twice the number of the barred females (14:6),
the expected being 17 +:8 +.
It is thus clear that when only chicks over three weeks
old are included in the tables, the actual and the expected
ratios find close agreement, and appear to demonstrate
the correctness of the view that the male White Leghorn
fowl is homozygous for the barred plumage pattern. Evi-
dence similar to that presented above has been secured
from matings of White Leghorn ¢ with Black Minorca,
Black Java and Black Spanish hens. Crosses involving
the White Leghorn ? have not yet been made, but it seems
likely that these fowls are heterozygous for the barred
character, which probably follows lines of inheritance
similar to the barring of the Barred Plymouth Rock
breed. In the White Leghorn breed, of which several
different males have now been tested, the barred pattern
appears to exist as a eryptomere, much as in the breed of
428 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
White Plymouth Rocks, the chief difference in these two
races being that whereas the white of the White Rock is
a ‘‘recessive white,’’ occasioned, in all probability, by
the dropping out of a color factor, the White Leghorn is
a so-called ‘‘dominant white,’’ determined by the pres-
ence of an inhibitor acting upon one or both of the color
factors, which also appear to be present in this breed.
CONCLUSIONS
These results serve to confirm suggestions made by
Davenport? regarding the presence of barring in some
of his White Leghorn stock, and also to explain some of
the results obtained by Hurst‘ in matings, which involved
the White Leghorn breed. They also help to explain
some of those cases known to many poultrymen® in
which barring (the ‘‘cuckoo marking’’) has resulted from
the crossing of black (or dark) with white breeds in
which the presence of the barred plumage pattern was
not suspected.
Obviously this work has no bearing upon the origin
of the barred pattern. It merely indicates that the White
Leghorn breed of fowls, as studied, carries factors for
both black and barring. The failure of the black to show
depends upon the action of the inhibitor, J, while the
barred pattern can appear only in the presence of the
uninhabited N or C.
March 4, 1913
* Davenport, C. B., ‘‘ Inheritance in Poultry,’’ Publication No. 52 of the
Carnegie foitats of Washington; Papers of the Station for Experi-
mental Evolution, No. 7, 1906.
‘‘ Inheritance of Characters in the Domestic Fowl,’’ Publication No. 121
of the Carnegie Institution of Washington; Papers of the Station for
Experimental Evolution, No. 14, 1909.
* Hurst, C. C., Report II to the Evolution Committee of the Royal Society,
London, England, 1905.
* Wright, L., ‘‘New Book of Poultry,’’ London (Cassell), 1905.
SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION
NOTES ON THE GEOLOGIC WORK OF TERMITES IN
THE BELGIAN CONGO, AFRICA
THE following notes were taken during 1911 in the region
about seventy-five miles west of Lake Tanganyika between lati-
tudes 4°15’ and 5° south. This region lies along the western
base of the great mountain system which passes to the west of
Lake Tanganyika.
The Loami River Region.—The gentle slope between the base
of the mountain and the swamp of the Loami river is pretty
generally covered with termites’ nests averaging about ten feet
in height and forty feet in diameter at the base. Some of the
mounds are much larger, but they are generally composed of
_two nests which were started so close together as to grow into
one mound. They are very much rounded by weathering, but
a few of them have newly formed pinnacles projecting from
near the tops.
In many well-drained places as many as five hills to the acre
may be counted, but this is more than are ordinarily found.
One may walk for three or four hours, however, through country
averaging more than one nest to the acre. The most favorable
places for the nests seem to be where the soil is deep and well
drained.
Methods of Construction—The newest nests recognized were
small slightly raised mounds about three feet in diameter with
‚two or three small chimney-like pinnacles rising from them.
Before there was anything to attract attention above the surface
of the ground, the termites had made a nest below the surface
and had mixed the surrounding soil with excrement from their
bodies to form a stiff clay. From this base, they then built
small chimneys about a foot in diameter, with passages about
two inches in diameter leading from the nest. It is up through
these openings that the mounds are built, the small white ants
carrying up little balls of soft clay and plastering them around
the tops of the chimneys. This is the only work in which I have
seen the workers expose themselves to the sunlight.
The chimneys are continually being washed down by the
storms, forming large rounded mounds with passageways about
two inches in diameter leading through them and down below
the surface of the ground. These passageways are enlarged at
irregular intervals into spherical chambers about four inches
429
430 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST -[VoL. XLVII
Fic. 1.. Termites nests in Stanleyville. Photos. by D. Steel.
in diameter, and in each chamber a cellular ball of chewed-up
vegetation is made to fit loosely. The eggs are stuck to the walls
of the cells and are presumably hatched by the heat from the
organic matter. A ball freshly dug and containing the eggs is
always noticeably warm.
I have never seen the eggs being put in place, but have been
told that they are carried from the queen and put in place by
the workers.
Fig. 1 gives a section through an ant-hill as shown in an exca-
vation made to get clay for plastering the walls of a house.
No.559] SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION 431
I have seen a termites’ nest excavated for this purpose to a
depth of five feet, but further than this I have no evidence as to
the depth of their work. Laterally their passageways seem to
underlie vast areas, as it is seldom that one can put a wooden box
on the ground so far from a foraging route that the insects will
not find it out in a few days.
The Stanleyville Region—There are a great many termite
nests in the forest country around Stanleyville, but they are of
a slightly different character from those previously described.
The newer portions of the Stanleyville nests, instead of being
chimney-like structures, resemble the white ants’ nests of Brazil
as described by Dr. Branner. They are built of earth, in many
cases containing grains of sand and masticated vegetable matter.
This is built on in a plastic condition leaving no external open-
ings and hardens on exposure.
The walls of these nests wash down, forming rounded mounds
and in time form mounds similar to those described from the
Loami valley.
A general idea of the age of the nests can occasionally be ob-
tained in this region from the size of some of the trees which are
found growing on the mounds. Fig. 2 shows the stump of a
camwood tree which grew on a mound near Stanleyville. Cam-
wood is a hard, red wood much resembling rosewood in appear-
ance, and this stump is thirty inches across the top.
Along the Kasai River—Still another variety of termite nest
is found in the drainage of the Kasai river. This variety does
not show the aversion to poorly drained localities that was noted
in the Loami valley, but seems rather to prefer the clayey soil
of the lowlands to sandstone hill areas.
The nature of the above-ground portions of the nests is illus-
trated in Figs. 3 and 4. While these termites have extensive
underground foraging trails similar to those mentioned above,
there seems to be much less of the nest below the general surface
of the ground.
-~ The live part of the nest is a dome-shaped chamber at or
slightly above the surface of the ground. This chamber ordi-
narily has walls about six inches thick of firmly cemented sandy
clay and enclosing a cellular mass consisting mostly of masticated
vegetation. Fig. 3 shows one of these chambers which has been
broken open. It also shows a portion of the cellular mass within.
The largest of these nests reach a height of about twelve feet
432 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST- (Vorn. XLVII
2 me te rons nest in Stanleyville.
Fic. 3. > br akio termites ear Dima on the Kasai e
Fic. 4. A termites bot i near Diak Photos. by D. Stee
No. 559] SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION 433
and have a diameter at the base of ten or twelve feet. They have
no visible openings.
Habits of African Termites.—While the ants of equatorial
Africa do not seem to be nearly so numerous or of nearly so
much importance to man as those of tropical America,: the
termites and their work are evident throughout practically the
entire Congo basin. They are not a serious pest, however, as
their habits are known, and only simple precautions are required
to prevent their ravages.
Termites seldom expose themselves to the light, so if an object
is placed on supports so far from the ground that they can not
easily fill up the intervening space with earth, it is practically
safe from their attacks. If, on the other hand, the object hap-
pens to be an especially palatable piece of wood, a bale of cloth,
or a leather case, and is placed directly on the ground, it is
remarkable how soon the termites will find it and begin their
attack. A box left in this way seldom suffers much damage the
first day, but if left for several days, the bottom may be pretty
completely eaten away.
I have never known termites to do any damage farther than
about two feet above ground, but there is another insect, a small
beetle, which will often eat away the entire inside of building
timber leaving nothing visible of their work but the small holes
where the insects enter the stick and finely powdered wood which
they throw out through those holes.
There are several species of timber, however, which are not
attacked by either insect. The walls of practically all of the
buildings of the Congo are supported by timbers driven into
the ground, and where these timbers are selected by natives who
understand the habits of the insects, they are seldom eaten away.
Termites as Food.—I noticed one evening that termites were
Swarming from all of the nests around our camp. A ery went
up among the natives, and the women and children ran with
dishes of water and seated themselves around the openings in
the nests. They then caught as many of the insects as they
could, and either put them into the water so that they could not,
fly away, or ate them at once. Those which were put into the
water were afterwards dried and were considered a delicacy.
DonaLp STEEL
OROVILLE, CALIF.
1J. C. Branner, ‘‘Geologie Work of Ants in Tropical America,” Bull.
Geol Soc. Amer., XXI, 444-496
NOTES AND LITERATURE
WORK ON GENETIC PROBLEMS IN PROTOZOA
AT YALE
Two ideals are commonly represented in the practise of uni-
versity laboratories. Some concentrate upon a unified set of
problems, endeavoring thus to make a definite mark upon science;
others cultivate breadth, the different workers taking up prob-
lems lying in diverse fields. The work done in recent years at
the Yale Zoological Laboratory by Professor L. L. Woodruff
and his associates is an interesting example of the former type;
the present is an attempt to give a unified survey of this work,
which has been directed with concentration and effectiveness
upon the general questions of reproduction in unicellular animals.
The work on these matters may be represented as a tree with a
single trunk and diverging branches. The trunk consists of the
study of Woodruff’s culture of a single line of Paramecium,
begun in 1907, to test the hypothesis that death is a necessary
consequence of continued reproduction without conjugation.
This study was itself an outgrowth of an investigation (the seed
of the tree) made by Woodruff as a student under the direction
of the investigator who has been chiefly responsible for the recent
revival of work on the more general problems of reproduction in
the Protozoa, Professor Calkins, of Columbia University. This
first investigation (1) led to results in agreement with the views
of Maupas and of Calkins, that continued reproduction without
conjugation results inevitably in death.
All the cultures give incontestable proof that the species studied
[Oxytricha fallax, Pleurotricha lanceolata, and Gastrostyla steinii| pass
through cyclical periods of general vitality. The periods of depression
lead to death if the culture is subjected to the same nyo E
Minor fluctuations also occur which may be called “rhythms
A rhythm is a minor periodie rise and fall of the Sion rate, due
to some unknown factor in cell metabolism, from which recovery is
autonomous.
A cycle is a periodic rise and fall of the fission rate, extending over a
varying number of rhythms, and ending in the extinction of the race
unless it is “ rejuvenated” by conjugation or changed environment
(1, page 627).
Woodruff, however, felt that the matter needed further test,
particularly with relation to the part played by environmental
434
No. 559] NOTES AND LITERATURE 435
conditions, as compared with that dependent upon internal
factors. Suspecting that the ultimate death might be due rather
to the constancy of the conditions than to anything inherent in
the process of living, he set in progress on May 1, 1907, a line
derived from a single individual of Paramecium aurelia, keep-
ing it under varied conditions. That is, the culture medium was
altered from day to day. This line was found to reproduce
actively, without degeneration and without conjugation. From
time to time Woodruff has published brief papers showing the
progress of this line and the relation of the facts to general
problems. Such bulletins have been issued at the 465th genera-
tion (5) ; then at generations 490 (3), 1,185 (6), 1,238 (7), 1,795
(9), 2,121 (10), and 3,029 (22). The culture at last accounts
had been in progress five years, during which time the animals
had reproduced 3,029 times without conjugation; the potential
number of progeny produced being represented by 2 raised to
the 3,029th power (a number composed of 912 integers), and
constituting a volume of protoplasm equal to 10'°° times the
volume of the earth (22, page 123). Woodruff well concludes:
I believe this result proves beyond question that the protoplasm of a
single cell may be self-sufficient to reproduce itself indefinitely, under
favorable environmental conditions, without recourse to conjugation,
and clearly indicates that senescence and the need of fertilization are
not primary attributes of living matter (22, page 123).
This conclusion has been supported by the work of other inves-
tigators (notably by that of Enriques), but all will agree that the
mainstay of this most important generalization is this work of
oodruff,
Under varied conditions the reproductive power of this line
thus showed itself to be indefinitely great. Now arose the ques-
tion whetlier the variation of the conditions was the essential
point, or whether the death in a constant hay infusion may not
be due to a lack in the hay of elements essential to the prolonged
life of the cultures; in other words, whether it may not be a case
of slow starvation. To test this, Woodruff and Baitsell (15) on
October 1, 1910, separated from the line living under varied
conditions a set which was kept in a constant medium of 14 per
cent. beef extract. After seven months the authors report that
this was ‘‘ practically as favorable a medium for the reproduction
of this pedigree culture of Paramecium aurelia as the ‘varied’
environment, and therefore . . . it appears fair to conclude that
436 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
it is the ‘composition’ of the medium rather than the. changes
in the medium which is conducive to the unlimited development
of this culture without conjugation or artificial stimulation’’
(15, page 141).
From this basic investigation, giving conclusive results on an
ancient and fundamental problem, have grown branch studies by
Woodruff and his associates on a large number of diverse factors
affecting reproduction. This work has been done mainly on
Paramecium, as a contribution to the general effort to get the
genetic physiology of one type animal fully cleared up, but other
infusoria have likewise been dealt with. We may divide these
studies into (1) those on internal factors and (2) those on exter-
nal factors.
1. Internal Factors—In his first paper (1) as we saw, Wood-
ruff distinguished certain small changes in the reproductive rate,
which he called rhythms. The question comes up as to whether
these, like the changes resulting in death, may not be due to
something in the environmental condition, perhaps to fluctua-
tions in these conditions. This problem was attacked by Wood-
ruff and Baitsell (16). Their result was that practically con-
stant conditions of the environment tend to bring out the
rhythms more clearly, from which it is concluded that they are
due to causes within the organism. A possible chance for doubt
of this conclusion arises from the question whether the pre-
cautions taken to keep the bacterial content of the cultures uni-
form were adequate; certain work done in the Zoological Labora-
tory of the Johns Hopkins University indicates that they were
not—in which case the fluctuations in the reproductive rate
might be due to variations in the bacterial content of the
medium,
Baitsell’s study (13, 23) of the effects of conjugation between
closely related individuals in Stylonychia pustulata belongs here.
It was found that after such conjugations the animals do not
continue to reproduce. Baitsell summarizes as follows:
The experiments show conclusively, it is believed, that conjugation is
induced by external conditions affecting the organisms, and bears no
prape i in this form at least, to a particular period of the life cycle.
suggested that infertility of syzygies in these cultures is the
eig of the fact that the gametes had an identical environmental
history (23, page 74).
With regard to the second suggested conclusion, doubt may be
raised, since it was not shown that under the conditions gametes
No. 559] NOTES AND LITERATURE 437
with diverse environmental history give more fertile pairs; pos-
sibly conjugation involves regularly the death of a large pro-
portion of the gametes.
Here perhaps belongs also the study by Woodruff (14) show-
ing that Paramecium caudatum and Paramecium aurelia are
distinet species:
Since one of the crucial tests of a species is its ability to breed true
to type indefinitely, aurelia and caudatum have adequately met this
test during more generations than any other animal under observation
(14, page 237).
2. External Factors.—Studies of the effects of a long list of
external factors on reproduction have branched out from the
main trunk given by the study of the life cycle. In his ‘‘seed
paper’’ of 1905 (1), Woodruff had included a number of experi-
ments with various chemical and physical agents, showing par-
ticularly that Protozoa are extremely sensitive to solutions of
electrolytes. He followed this up in 1908 (4) with a study of
the effects of aleohol. This showed that:
(1) Minute doses of aleohol will decrease the rate of division at one
period of the life cycle and increase it at another period of the life
cycle. (2) When alcohol increases the division rate the effect is not
continuous, but gradually diminishes and finally the rate of division
falls below that of the control. ... (4) Treatment with alcohol lowers
the resistance of the organisms to copper sulphate (4, page 104).
Woodruff and Bunzel (8) further undertook a precise study
of the directly destructive effects of various salts and acids on
Paramecia taken from the pedigree culture serving for the
trunk experiments. The results of this work, not bearing directly
on reproduction, lie a little to one side of the main stream of
experimentation ; the conclusion is:
Considered as a whole, the results of the experiments indicate a
marked parallelism between the order of toxicity of the various cations
toward Paramecium and the ionice potential of the ions employed (8,
page 194).
A considerable number of studies (11, 12, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21)
are devoted to analysis of the effects of the environmental con-
ditions to which the animals are subjected in their natural lives,
—the culture media—upon reproduction and vitality. A paper
by Woodruff (12) on ‘‘The Effect of Excretion Products of
Paramecium on its Rate of Reproduction” concludes:
438 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
(1) The rate of reproduction of P. aurelia and P. caudatum is in-
fluenced by the volume of the culture medium, within the limits tested
[i. e., 2, 5, 20 and 40 drops of varied environment medium] and the
greater the volume the more rapid is the rate of division. (2) Par-
amecia excrete substances which are toxic to themselves when present
in their environment, and these substances are more effective when the
organisms are confined in limited volumes of the culture fluid. (3) The
excretion products of Paramecium play an appreciable part in de-
termining the period of maximum numbers, rate of decline, ete., of this
animal in hay infusions (12, page 581).
A careful study of the effects of changes of temperature on
reproduction made by Woodruff and Baitsell (17) showed that
the temperature coefficient (factor by which the rate of repro-
duction is multiplied when the temperature is raised ten degrees)
is approximately 2.7, so that the rate of cell division is influenced
by the temperature in a manner similar to that for a chemical
reaction.
These studies of environmental action had shown Woodruff
that different races of Paramecium are adapted to different con-
ditions, and that this throws light on the diverse results reportéd
by different observers. In a paper of 1911 (18), he concludes:
(1) The discrepant results of various workers on the longevity of
Paramecium are in all probability due to variation in the cultural
demands of the race isolated for study. (2) It is probable that most,
if not all, normal individuals have under suitable environmental condi-
tions, unlimited power of reproduction without conjugation or artificial
stimulation (18, page 65).
In this second statement much is involved in the word
‘‘normal’’; the experience of the Johns Hopkins Laboratory is
that some lines die out after a time, even though they may at
first multiply in the usual way.
The study of cultural action was next made general and
extended to the other organisms in the infusorian cultures, by a
careful examination of the source and sequence of development
of the organisms usually found in the cultures of decaying vege-
tation. The conclusions are of practical interest for the labora-
tory worker. Woodruff finds that Protozoa are rarely introduced
rom the air; and that Paramecium is not introduced dry, on
hay or otherwise.
Air, water, and hay are all sources from which Protozoa are derived,
and increase in importance in the order given. Of these three, however,
No. 559] NOTES AND LITERATURE 439
air is practically a negligible factor in seeding infusions (19, page 263).
The order in which different common forms most frequently
appear, reach their maximum, and disappear in hay infusions is
shown in the following list (taken from 19, page 243).
APPEARANCE MAXIMUM DISAPPEARANCE
1. Monads. 1. Monads. 1. Monads.
2. Colpoda. 2. Colpoda. 2. Colpoda.
3. Hypotrichida. 3. Hypotrichida. 3. Hypotrichida.
4. Paramecium. 4. Paramecium. 4. Amæba
5. Vorticella. 5. Amæba. 5. Paramecium.
6. Amæba. 6. Vorticella. 6. Vorticella.
As hay infusion is the typical culture medium for such organ-
isms, a study was made by Fine (20) of its chemical properties,
with particular relation to the acidity, the purpose being to
correlate, so far as possible, the chemical conditions with the
protozoan sequence. The paper: concludes:
The acidity of hay infusions is essentially due to bacteria, their
efficiency in producing acid being governed by the concentration of the
infusion in acid-yielding materials. The protozoa play a relatively
small part in the production of acid.
The sequence of protozoa and the course of the Sy aie _acidity
possess no intimately mutual relation. Either may vary wi wide
limits without appreciably influencing the course of the ee
This line of work is evidently still under active treatment,
since we note that the Journal of Experimental Zoology prom-
ises a paper by Woodruff on ‘‘The Effect of Excretion Products
of Infusoria on the Same and on Different Species, with Special
Reference to the Protozoan Sequence in Infusions.”
The problems of reproduction, age and death are bound up in
recent theories with those of the size of cells and nuclei; a paper
on this aspect of matter in the same journal is likewise promised
from Woodruff.
Among the laboratories of this country which have made a
definite mark on some unified problem of general interest (and
such are happily now becoming numerous), certainly a most
honorable place must be accorded to this work done at Yale by
oodruff and his associates.
A. R. MIDDLETON
ZOOLOGICAL LABORATORY OF THE JOHNS HOPKINS UNIVERSITY
440 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vowu. XLVII
CHRONOLOGICAL LIST OF PAPERS
(In the above review the papers are referred to by the serial numbers
here given in parentheses. The papers in the Proceedings of the Society of
Experimental Biology and Medicine and in Science are merely short ab-
stracts on ar ie ay ig in full in other papers.)
(1) Woodruff, L. L., An Experimental Study on the Life History of
TRU dle Sy PRN, Exp. Zool., 2: 585-632, November, 1905.—
the Determination of Species, Science, 25: 734-735, May 10, 1907.—(3)
Id., The Life Cycle of Paramecium, Proc. Soc. Exp. Bi iol. and Med., 5: 124,
May 20, 1908.—(4) Id., The Effect of Alcohol on the Life Cycle of Infu-
soria, Biol. Bul., 15: 85-104, 1908.— (5) Id., The Life Cycle of Paramecium
when Subjected to a Varied Environment, ppuan Nat., 42: 520-526, oy
1908.—(6) Id., Studies on the Life Cycle of Pardneclam: Proc. Soc. Exp
Biol. and Med., 6: 117-118, May 26, 1909.—(7) Id., Further Studies on
the Life Cycle of Poramectum, Biol. Bul., 17: 287-308, September, 1909.—
(8) Woodruff, L. L., and Bunzel, H. H., The Relative “oxieity of Various
Salts and Acids towne Paramecium, Amer Journ. Physiol., 25: 190—194,
, Proc. Soe
May 18, 1910.—(10) ia, Owe Thou sand Generations of Paramecium,
Archi f. Protistenkunde, 21: 263-266, 1911.— (11) Id., The Effect of
Culture Medium Contaminated with Excretion Products s! Paramecium on
its Rate of Reproduction, Proc. Soc. Exp. Biol. and Med., 8: 100, April 19,
1911.— (12) Id., The geen of Exeretion Products of la on its
Rate of Reproduction, Journ. Exp. Zool., 10: 557-581, May, 1911.— (13)
Baitsell, G. A., Conjugation P e Related Individuals of Stylonychia,
Proc. Soc, Ex a Biol. and Med., 8: 5, May 17, 1911.—(14) Woodruff, L. L.,
Paramecium aurelia and Promina caudatum, Journ. Morphol., 22: 223-
pie June, 1911.—(15) Woodruff, ” L., and Battsell, G. A., The Reprodue-
n of Paramecium aurelia in a << Constant?? Culture Medium of Beef
in the Reproductive Activity of Infusoria, Journ. Exp. Zool., 11: 339-359,
November 20, 1911.—(17) Id., The Temperature ferrin of the Rate of
Reproduction of Paeahi aurelia, Amer. Journ. Physiol., 29: 147-155,
December 1, 1911.— (18) Woodruff, k Tas Bridenee on the Adaptation of
Paramecium to Different Environments, Biol. Bul., 22: 60-65, December,
1911.—(19) Id., Observations on the Origin and Baaise of the Protozoan
Fauna of Hay Leite: Journ, Exp. Zool., 12: 205-264, February 10, 1912.
—(20) Fine, M. S., Chemical Properties of Hay Infusions with Special
Reference to the Titratable Acidity and its Relation to the Protozoan
Sequence, Journ. Exp. Zool, 12: 2, February 10, 1912.—(21) Woodruff,
L. L., The Sequence of Protozoan Fauna in Hay Infusions, Proc. Soc. rae
Biol. ‘wd Med., 9: 65-66, February 21, 1912.— (22) Woodruff, L. L.,
Five-year Sudncwad Race of Paramecium without Conjugation, Proc. Soc.
i e Hypotri oria.
jugation between Closely Related Individvals af elonsehd spatiale,
Journ. Exp. Zool., 13: 47-75, July 5, 1912.
No. 559] NOTES AND LITERATURE 441
NOTES ON ICHTHYOLOGY
THE most imposing work in ichthyology for the year is Dr. C.
H. Eigenmann’s ‘‘Fresh Water Fishes of British Guiana,’’ pub-
lished in the Memoirs of the Carnegie Museum, No. 5. This
paper contains a very full discussion of the different species of
the region concerned, with synonymy and notes of various kinds.
It is also accompanied by an excellent series of maps and figures,
with an illuminating discussion of the fauna of British Guiana
and northern Brazil. This paper is the result of a most im-
portant expedition made by Dr. Eigenmann under the auspices
of the Carnegie Museum at Pittsburgh.
Another work of very great importance is the ‘‘Résultats des
Campagnes Scientifiques’’ of Albert the First, Prince of Monaco.
In Fascicule XXXV of this splendidly printed series, Dr. Eric
Zugmayer gives the results of the work of the Yacht Princesse-
Alice for the ten years from 1901 to 1910. Many species, old and
new, are described, with a series of admirable plates representing
deep sea fishes of, the Mediterranean which the learned and in-
defatigable prince has brought to light.
In the Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., 1912, Mr. C. Tate Regan dis-
cusses the relations of the various families of eels.
In another paper he discusses the relations of the Blennioid
fishes which, following Gill, he divides into numerous families,
the Brotulids with the Fierasfers and Zoarces being regarded as
among these Blennioid families. In another paper Mr. Regan
discusses the affinities of the Mailed Cheek fishes. Following
Cuvier and Jespersen, he assigns the sticklebacks to this group,
contrary to the views of all other recent systematists. I can not
believe that the sticklebacks have any affinity with the mailed
cheek fishes, the ossified skin on the cheek being an analogy only.
In another paper Mr. Regan discusses the hag fishes of the
genus Heptatretus. The different groups characterized by the
number of gill openings, ranging from 6 to 14, are not regarded
as separate genera.
In another paper the anatomy of the Discocephali is under
discussion. He regards these fishes, in spite of the singular
sucking dise on the head, as allies of the perch-like fishes, per-
haps not far removed from Naucrates.
442 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
In another paper Mr. Regan discusses the family of Caris-
tiide which he regards as allies of Beryx. He compares Caristius
with Platyberyz, lately described by Zugmayer from Cape St.
Vincent. He thinks that the two belong to the same genus and
are perhaps not even specifically distinct. In this he is appar-
ently wrong; Platyberyx seems related to Beryx but Caristius is,
as I have already indicated, closely related to the Bramide. It
is still nearer to Pteraclis from which it is mainly distinguished
by the short anal fin, the anal fin in Pteraclis being nearly as
long as the dorsal fin. The species described from Japan by
Bellotti, as Pteraclis macropus, belongs also to this group and is
in fact a second species of the genus Caristius.
Regan also describes in Ann. and Mag. and in the Proc. Biol.
Soc. a large number of species from the rivers of South America
with valuable notes and figures.
In the Records of the Canterbury Museum, Edgar A. Waite
gives additions and modifications of the basic list of the fishes of
New Zealand.
In the Trans. New Zeal. Inst. are given a number of valuable
‘notes on New Zealand fishes. The grotesque Aegeonichthys ap-
pelli of Clarke is figured and also the extraordinary Oreosoma
atlanticum, which has not been seen since the original specimen
of Cuvier. The fish has seven ventral rays like others referred
to the family of Zeide.
In the Indiana University Studies, 1912, Dr. Eigenmann de-
scribes a number of new species from the rivers of northern Co-
lombia and in the Ann. Carn. Mus., 1911, he describes numerous
Characin fishes from rivers of northern South America.
In the Proc. Linn. Soc. N. Y., Mr. J. T. Nichols gives a list of
the fishes known to occur within fifty miles of New York, os in
number, with figures of several.
In the Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist., Mr. Nichols describes a
new frog fish from Barbadoes, Antennarius astroscopus. He also
gives a figure of the little known Pseudomonacanthus amphioxys.
In another paper Mr. Nichols gives notes on Cuban fishes.
Siphostoma torrei and Xystema havana are described as new. -
In the Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash., E. W. Gudger gives notes on
fishes from Beaufort, North Carolina.
In the Proc, Biol. Soc. Wash., T. D. A. Cockerell gives valuable
notes on the seales of flounders, soles, codfish and other forms.
No. 559] NOTES AND LITERATURE 443
In the Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., Dr. C. H. Gilbert and C. V.
Burke describe a number of new snail-fishes from the waters of
Japan.
In the same proceedings Charles V. Burke describes additional
species of snail-fishes or Liparids, including the new genus Poly-
pera based on Neoliparis greeni. Cyclogaster bristolense is de-
scribed from Bristol Bay, C. megacephalus from Bering Sea,
Careproctus gilberti from Kadiak Island, Paraliparis deani
from Alaska, Paraliparis garmani from New England and
Rhinoliparis attenuatus from Bering Sea.
In the same proceedings Barton A. Bean and A. C. Weed de-
scribe an important collection of fishes from Java.
In the same proceedings Lewis Radcliffe describes 29 new
species allied to the codfishes, from the Philippines. A new
genus, Macrouroides inflaticeps, is made type of a distinct family.
In the same proceedings D. S. Jordan and C. W. Metz describe
two new species from Hawaii.
In the same proceedings Professor J. O. Snyder enumerates
the fishes collected by him in the Riu Kiu Islands, with numerous
figures of interesting forms. The fauna of these islands is
strictly tropical, in many regards not very different from that
of Samoa but with some characteristic Japanese species.
In the same proceedings Professor Snyder enumerates the
Species obtained in the Albatross expedition of 1906 in the waters
of Japan. Many new species are described and figured.
In the Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash., B. W. Evermann and H. B.
Latimer describe a collection obtained from the Olympic Penin-
sula in the state of Washington. In the proceedings of 1908 B.
W. Evermann and W. C. Kendall describe and figure a European
pipe fish, Nerophis wquoreus, obtained in the western Atlantic,
the first American record of this species.
In the Bull. Bur. Fish., 1910, Gilbert and Burke describe the
fishes collected in Alaska by the steamer Albatross on its way to
Japan. About forty new species were obtained in this expedi-
tion,
In the same bulletin W. C. Kendall describes a new flat fish
from the Georges Bank, off New Foundland, under the name of
Pseudopleuronectes dignabilis.
In the Mitteil. Naturh. Mus. Hamburg, 1912, Georg Duncker
discusses the genera of the pipe fishes.
444 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vouw. XLVII
In the Ann. Mus. Zool. Univ. Napoli, J. Pellegrin describes
fishes in the Museum of Naples, mostly obtained by an expedition
to the Red Sea.
In the Report of the British Antarctic Expedition of Shackle-
ton, Mr. Edgar R. Waite describes the fishes taken in the Ant-
arctic, four species only, all of the family of Nototheniide.
In the Bull. Americ. Mus. Nat. Hist., L. Hussakof describes
eight Chimeroids of the Cretaceous of North America.
In the Ann. N. Y. Acad. Sci., R. D. O. Johnson describes an
extraordinary climbing catfish, Arges marmoratus, from Co-
lombia. In connection with this, Dr. Bashford Dean remarks
that ‘‘it is hardly to the credit of our cloth that these observa-
tions on fishes should be first made by a mining engineer.’’
In the Zoologischen Anzeiger, 1912, Dr. L. F. de Beaufort de-
scribes new Gobies from Ceram and Waigeu.
In the Zool. Jahrb., L. S. Berg describes the origin of the
fishes of the basin of the river Amur.
Under the title of ‘‘Faune de la Russie,’’ Dr. Berg describes
and catalogues the fishes of Russia, a valuable paper, accom-
panied by good descriptions, which unfortunately for most of
us are mainly in Russian.
In the Bull. Mus. d’Hist. Nat, Paris, 1912, Dr. Pelligrin enu-
merates fishes from the New Hebrides with the description of
Callechelys guichenoti, hitherto imperfectly known.
In the Bull. Inst. Oceanog. of the Prince of Monaco, Dr. Zug-
mayer describes numerous deep-sea fishes obtained by the prince.
` In the Bull. Soc. Zool. de France, 1912, Dr. Louis Fage de-
scribes a collection of fishes from the coast of Morocco.
Under the head of ‘‘ Figures and Descriptions of the Fishes of
Japan,’’ Mr, Shigeho Tanaka, lecturer in the Imperial Univer-
sity, continues his series of excellent descriptions and figures of
Japanese fishes, the text being both in Japanese and in English.
Of this series ten fascicules have been published. When it is fin-
ished it will give a most complete and valuable account of the
fishes of Japan. No attempt is made to classify these species,
one being taken up after another in the order which the author
finds most convenient, a matter of necessity under the circum-
stances of publication.
In the Journal Coll. Sci. Imp. Univ. Tokyo, H. Ohshima de-
scribes in detail the luminous organs of various fishes, among
them the small deep-water sharks of the coast of Japan.
No. 559] NOTES AND LITERATURE 445
In the Proc. Roy. Soc. Queensland, A. R. MeCulloch describes
some new Atherinide from Australia.
In the Rec, West. Austr. Mus., Mr. McCulloch publishes notes
on various fishes from western Australia.
In the Records of the Canterbury Museum, Mr. Waite de-
scribes the many species, some of them of remarkable interest,
obtained by the trawling expedition of New Zealand.
In the Revue Institute d’Agronomie, Montevideo, Professor
André Bouyat gives popular accounts in Spanish, with photo-
graphs, of the principal food fishes of the coast of Uruguay.
In the Zoologischen Anzeiger, George Wagner discusses the
possibility of the existence of the species of Gar pike described
from a Chinese drawing under the name of Lepisosteus sinensis.
No naturalist has ever found a gar pike in China and the ques-
tion of where this specimen was obtained from which this draw-
ing is made is still uncertain.
In the Bull. Soc. Zool. de France, Mr. F. Priem describes the
fossil fishes of the Argentine Republic.
In the Field Mus. Nat. Hist., Dr. Seth E. Meek describes new
fishes of numerous species from the rivers of Costa Rica. Dr.
Meek and S. F. Hildebrand also describe a number of new spe-
cies from Panama. :
In the Trans, Amer. Fish Soc., at St. Louis, are numerous val-
uable papers relating chiefly to the culture or to the diseases of
fishes. One of the many papers of practical value is an account
of the fur seal herd of the Pribilof Island and the prospects for
its increase, by C. H. Townsend. The sole cause of the reduction
in numbers of these animals has been the killing of females at
sea, known as pelagic sealing. In the early Russian days before
the present methods of removing the bristles from seal skins,
leaving the soft underfur, was discovered in London, the most
valuable fur was that of the young animals at the age of four
months when they change the black coat for the silver gray of the
first year. In those days these silver-gray pups were killed in-
discriminately on land without regard to sex, a matter which
naturally rapidly reduced the herd. But so long as the females
are protected, both on land and sea, there is no reason why the
herd should not enormously increase, probably in time with
proper management on the land, so as to yield even more than
the 100,000 skins of superfluous males which were taken each
year during the lease of the Alaska Commercial Company.
446 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
In the Publ. Leland Stanford Jr. Univ., Professor E. C. Starks
describes the skeletons of various families of mackerel-like fishes.
In a general way he finds that the real relations of these forms,
as indicated by their skeletons, correspond very nearly to the
impressions made by their external characters. Among other
things there is no immediate relation between the genus Gerres
and the genus Leiognathus. These have some superficial resem-
blances, and have been placed in the same family by Dr. Bou-
lenger,
In the Bureau of Fisheries documents Dr. G. H. Parker dis-
cusses the effect of explosions of motor boats and guns on fishes.
These sounds under water are extremely faint and have little
effect on the animals. Some of the noises made by the fishes them-
selves seem to have a certain attraction to others of their kind.
In the Biennial Report of the Commissioners of Fisheries of
Wisconsin is a valuable discussion of the brook trout disease in
the hatcheries of Wisconsin, the disease in this case being due to
a parasitic crustacean, a small copepod, Lernwopoda edwardsi.
This creature is a parasite on the eastern brook trout but not on
the other species of trout reared in Wisconsin. The best remedy
seems to be to clean up the hatcheries, scraping the ponds, and
introducing the sand filter. It is also suggested that the old
trout, most usually affected, be got rid of early and that the
copepods may be drawn apart by means of electric lights.
In the Bull. Bur. Fisher., G. H. Parker discusses the sense
structures of a small shark.
In the Fishing Gazette, Dr. Hussakof describes the spoonbill
cat fishery of the lower Mississippi.
Under the head of Dogfish, D. E. Lane, of Bellingham, Wash-
ington, attempts to show that the species of Squalus have a great
commercial value, the oil from the livers being capable of many
uses through purification, and the bodies susceptible of being
made into a high-grade fertilizer.
In the Zool. Soc. Bull., F. B. Sumner describes in detail the
adaptive colors among fishes and the changes which some of them
undergo. In a certain species of turbot from the Bay of Naples
marked all over in life with gray and dark spots of different
shades and sizes, it is found that this fish placed on different bot-
toms adapts itself not only to the general color tone, but to the
texture and pattern as well.
No. 559] NOTES AND LITERATURE 447.
In the Bull. Inst. Oceanog., Dr. Fage discusses the attempts to
introduce the salmon in the Mediterranean, thus far unsuccessful.
In several papers in the Anatomischen Anzeiger, E. P. Allis,
Jr., describes the blood vessels and other structures of many
species of sharks and other fishes.
In the Proc. 7th Internat. Zool. Cong., Professor H. F. Nach-
trieb describes the lateral line of the paddlefish. Another paper
is in the Journal of Experimental Zoology.
In the Bulletin of the Bureau of Fisheries, XXXII, for 1912,
under the head of ‘‘The Age at Maturity of the Pacific Salmon
of the Genus Oncorhynchus,’’ Dr. Charles H. Gilbert gives a de-
tailed account of his investigations of the scales of the salmon,
following a method begun by Johnston in his studies of the sal-
mon of Scotland. In this paper he shows that the age of the
salmon can be determined by its scales and because the salmon
of the Pacifice Coast runs periodically, this information thus
secured may be of great commercial importance. A few years
ago a similar study was undertaken by Professor J. P. MeMur-
rich. Unfortunately this work, which was otherwise well done,
rested on an initial mistake. The red salmon, which was taken
' by him to be a four-year old, was actually five years of age.
Summing up, Dr. Gilbert presents the following conclusions:
1. The sockeye spawn normally either in their fourth or fifth,
the king salmon either in their fourth, fifth, sixth or seventh
year, the females of both species being preponderatingly four-
year fish,
2. The young of both sockeye and king salmon may migrate
seaward shortly after hatching, or may reside in fresh water
until their second spring. Those of the first type grow more
rapidly than the second, but are subject to greater dangers and
develop proportionately fewer adults. :
3. Coho salmon spawn normally only in their third year. The
young migrate either as fry or yearlings, but adults are de-
veloped almost exclusively from those which migrate as year-
lings.
4. Dog salmon mature normally either in their third, fourth
or fifth years, the humpback always in their second year. The
young of both pass to sea as soon as they are free swimming.,
5. The term ‘‘grilse,’’ as used for Pacific salmon, signifies con-
Spicuously undersized fish which sparingly accompany the
448 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVI
spawning run. They are precociously developed in advance of
the normal spawning period of the species. So far as known, the
grilse of the king salmon, coho and dog salmon are exclusively
males, of the sockeye, almost exclusively males, except on the
Columbia River, where both sexes are about equally represented.
The larger grilse meet or overlap in size the smaller of those in-
dividuals which mature one year later at the normal period.
6. Grilse of the sockeye are in their third year, of the king sal-
mon in their second or third year, of the coho and the dog salmon
in their second year.
7. The great differences in size observed in spawning runs are
closely correlated with age, the younger fish averaging constantly
smaller than those one year older, though the curves of the two
may overlap.
This article is also printed in the Pacific Fisherman.
F. L. Landacre in the Jour. Comp. Neur. discusses certain
ganglia of the gar pike and their relations and significance.
In the Bur. Fish. Doc., A. B. Alexander discusses the halibut
fishing grounds of the Pacific Coast.
In the Rapp. Cons. Internat. de la Mer, Professor D. W.
Thompson, of Dundee, describes the distribution of the cod and
haddock,
In the Bull. Soc. Géol. de France, Mr. Priem discusses the
fossil fishes of the Upper Tertiary in southern France and also
the Mezozoie fishes of the same region.
In the Bull Amer. Mus., Dr. Hussakof describes a sawfish
embryo.
In the Bull. Bur. Fish., Professor J. O. Snyder describes under
the name of Salmo regalis, the royal silver trout of Lake Tahoe.
It is one of the most remarkable of the many American species
of trout, being of beautiful steel blue and silver with very few
spots. It is probably older and more primitive than any of the
other trout, doubtless being part of the original fauna of Lake
Lahontan,
DAVID STARR JORDAN.
The American
Naturalist
intended for serpy and books, etc., intended for review el be
MSS
sent to Moriah Editor of THE AMER
RICAN NATURALIST, Garrison-on- Hudson, N
articles containing summarie
w York.
s of research work bear aring: on the
roblems of a evolution are especially welcome, and will be given preference
in —
red reprints of pide gs are supplied to authors free of charge.
“pee
Further; Capati will be supplied a
Subscription
s and advertisoment should be sent to the groga
aara price is four dollars a
Canadian postage
forty cents.
For
twenty-five cents additional.
The advertising rates are Four Dollars for a page.
The
eign postage cents and
The charge for single copies is
THE SCIENCE PRESS
Lancaster, Pa.
Garrison, N. Y.
NEW YORK: Sub-Station 84
Entered as second-class matter, April 2, 1908, at th
Con
e Post ‘ae at Lancaster, Pa., under the Act of
mgress of March 3, 1
FOR SALE
ARCTIC, ICELAND and GREENLAND
BIRDS’ SKIN
Well Prepared
G. D to
Husavik, North Iceland, Via Leidle, England
BUTTERFLY-HUNTING IN
MANY LANDS
Notes of a Field Naturalist
colored), 8v0, pp. XX+728. $7.00
(Postage 22 cents.)
“‘ Interesting descriptions of the general features of
the countries visited, their history, geography, flora
ta
delightful reading. It is the kind of book
that helps make naturalists and we can’t have too
many of them e Appendix consists 0
translations of sk papers by Fritz Muller, and
is very useful and indispensable for those not under-
standing the original language. There is much to
Praise and nothing to condemn in the work, and it is
à valuable addition to the popular prea on natural
history and travel. Entomological New.
Longmans, Green, & Co.
443 Fourth w York
TENTH EDITION.
THE MICROSCOPE,
an introduction to Microscopic Methods and to Histology,
v SIMON howe GAGE, of Caaan University. Over
lar; vo and above 250 oo ook oats new
and fully ition. Price $2.00,
COMSTOCK PUBLISHING CO., pis N. Y.
FINE LAND SHELLS
Tha stock and for sale — ten Gou —
of land shell. also a ting be << k of All are ac
curately ease d, Ia per make u ‘collections il
phase of the aiee am e = a all
ands. A fine iifastrated boo! klet
aoe uate colleges, the
graduat s, and the profes-
heer yee s provide courses =
Arts, graiia Scone
Commerce and Administr =
The American Naturalist
A Monthly Journal, established in 1867, Devoted to the
with Fac
Special Reference to the
Advancement of the eee Sciences
tors of Organic Evolution and Her
CONTENTS OF JANUARY NUMBER
Characters in Mendelian
edity. Professor T. H. Morgan
II, Vertical Distribution of the Ch f
the San Diego Region in Relation tothe Ques-
tion of Isolation vs. Coincidence. Ellis L.
Michael,
Ii, A falar of Spotted a hag I. Simpson
d Pr mae W. E cC z a
IV. whe. Effect of Patihe on y Variation in Corn
and Beans, Professor J, K, 8
CONTENTS OF THE FEBRUARY NUMBER
Adaptation through Natural Selection and Ortho-
genesis. Krofessor MAynari M. Metcalf.
Ada pena in the Living and Non-living. Pro-
essor Burton Edward Livingston.
ago en in Animal Reactions. Professor G. H.
Adaptation from the Point of View of the Physi
ologist. ee ae Ma ng ee
Literary Note on the Law of Ger-
Sinai Continuity. Dr. W, W. Stockberger.
CONTENTS OF THE MARCH NUMBER
L T and Species-forming of Ecto-para-
Professor Vernon Lyman Kellogg.
IL. Castration in malaga to the Secondary Sexual
Leghorns. H. D.
Gate e.
II. Simplification of Mendelian Formule. Profes-
sor W. E. Castle
Ty. T and Literature: Some mn Freer
essor Roy
ertebrate Paleontology.
a Moodie,
CONTENTS OF THE APRIL NUMBER
—* Hyatt and es longa of Research.
Robert Tracy Jackso
Development in Nicotiana
Bearin 3 i oie:
Ss Theories of rei tc d E. bar
Dr,
Hybrids. Dr. O.
Fish a seg in (Mba ag "Professor T. D. A-
Notes and pean Some Rean Lae in
Vertebrate Paleontology. Dr
ONT ENTS OF THE MAY NUMBER
eer eng of Mamme in Duroc Jersey Swine. Pro
ward N. Wentworth.
er, oa pinto Partheno — the Genus
Nicotiana. Richard Wellin i ~
~~ — — Discussion : simplited M —
inte f th De velop Ps Tol hese ay
ee p e Develo an o eu ture in
Wyo: sope aches Bird on B. Oars
otes and L ture: ted Dep
Alfred = gors
Animal Kingdom. Professor H. S. Jennings.
CONTENTS OF THE JUNE NUMBER
I. Heredity of Tricolor in Guinea-pigs. Dr. H. D.
Goodale and Professor T. H. Mo he
II. Causes and Determinersin Radi
mental Analysis, Professor H. S. Jennings.
II. Clonal Variation in Pectinatella. Annie P.
Henchman ae Dr. C. B. Davenport.
Professor T.
ise mpli¢i
in Mendeli
Profes Adequacy in 3 The Possible Origin
of gente ag Somatic Cells. Professor
V. Notes and Literature: Valuation of the Sea.
Professor Chas. C. Adam
— aa
Single Number 35 Cents
The NATURALIST will be sent to new subscribers for four months for One Dollar
THE SCIENCE PRESS
Sub-Station 84: NEW YORK
Garrison, N. Y.
Yearly Subscription, $4.00
Lancaster, Pa.
THE
AMERICAN NATURALIST
Vou. XLVII August, 1913 No. 560
GENETICAL STUDIES ON CGENOTHERA. IV
THe Benavior or HYBRIDS BETWEEN (nothera biennis
AND Œ. grandiflora IN THE SECOND AND
THIRD GENERATIONS!
DR. BRADLEY MOORE DAVIS
UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA
Tose who have followed the reports of my genetical
studies on @nothera (Davis, 710, 11 and ’12a) must have
noted that I have obtained during the past four years a
series of hybrids from the cross grandiflora X biennis
with various points of strong resemblance to forms of
(nothera Lamarckiana De Vries. I say forms of Œ.
Lamarckiana because it is, I think, clear (Davis 12a,
p. 383) that this species has within itself a number of
biotypes which, although in most respects essentially
similar, differ from one another in the size of the petals,
in the height of the stigma relative to the tips of the
anthers, and, to a lesser degree, in some other charac-
ters. These biotypes may be segregated by critical se-
lection and cultivation through pure lines and I venture
to believe that the Lamarckiana of De Vries’s cultures
was less pure when he began his studies twenty-five years
ago than it is to-day. At the present time a very large-
flowered type (petals 4-4.5 cm. long) is generally thought
* An abstract of this paper was presented before the American Society of
Naturalists at its meeting in Cleveland on January 2, 1913.
449
450 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST (Vou. XLVII
of when this plant is discussed. Lamarckiana then, like
many species, has its minor strains which may be iso-
lated.
Heribert-Nilsson (’12) in his recent extended analyt-
ical studies on Œ. Lamarckiana reaches the same con-
clusion that Lamarckiana is not a simple species but, on
the contrary, polymorphic. His investigations are the
first serious attempts to bring forward evidence that will
explain the ‘‘mutants’’ and minor varieties as deriva-
tives from a hybrid through the segregation and recom-
bination of characters on Mendelian principles. These
studies form a very important contribution to the re-
search upon this interesting plant.
I have not as yet among my hybrids of biennis and
grandiflora obtained any plant that matches in all re-
spects any one of the biotypes of Lamarckiana. On the
other hand, there is, I believe, no important character of
taxonomic value presented by Lamarckiana through its
various biotypes that has not appeared in some of my
hybrids. I have, as it were, surrounded the group of
biotypes, which we call the species Lamarckiana, with a
circle of hybrids that in various characters agree with
the plants that have come down to us through the cul-
tures of De Vries. If the group of biotypes of Lamarck-
iana is enlarged to include certain of its so-called
‘‘mutants’? the number of my hybrids with points of
resemblance to this larger assemblage is correspondingly
increased,
My studies have now reached a stage where I have data
to present on the behavior of hybrids between biennis
and grandiflora in the F, and F; generations. These
later hybrids have a two-fold interest; first with respect
to their possible interpretation in relation to Mendelian
principles of inheritance, and second, with respect to the
behavior of certain types in the F, generation, which
types repeat in the F, the history of the F, parent
hybrid in throwing the same marked variants, and thus
exhibit a behavior similar to that of Lamarckiana when
No. 560] GENETICAL STUDIES ON (2NOTHERA 451
in successive generations it produces a series of similar
mutants.”
There has come to light during the past year a his-
torical matter of interest which bears very directly on
the problem of the origin of the Lamarckiana of De
Vries’s cultures. This is the determination of Lamarck’s
plant, Enothera Lamarckiana Seringe (1828), grown in
Paris at about 1796 or somewhat earlier, as a form
of Œ. grandiflora Solander (1789)—=@Œ. grandiflora
‘‘ Aiton.” The evidence for this determination (see
Davis, ’12b) is very convincing and there can be, I think,
no doubt but that De Vries (’01, Vol. I, pp. 316, 317) was
mistaken when he identified the material of his cultures
with the type specimen of Œ. Lamarckiana Seringe, the
sheet upon which Lamarck (?1798) based his deserip-
tion in the Encyclopédie Méthodique Botanique. It
should be remembered that Professor De Vries made this
identification some years before the rediscovery of Œ.
grandifiora at its original habitat in Alabama in 1904,
and consequently before there was available our present
information on this species.
(Enothera Lamarckiana Seringe (1828) now becomes
a synonym of Œ. grandiflora Solander, described in
Aiton’s ‘‘Hortus Kewensis’’ (1789), and the material of
De Vries’s cultures can not bear the name Lamarckiana
with Seringe as an authority. I have suggested, how-
ever, in the paper cited above (Davis, ’12b, p. 530) that
the plant of De Vries’s cultures retain the name La-
marckiana to be written in the form Œ. Lamarckiana
De Vries. A change of name for this plant would be
most unfortunate, since it would result in endless con-
fusion in the literature of experimental morphology.
The evidence indicates that Œ. Lamarckiana De Vries
has come to us as the product of the garden through a
long history of cultivation and that its parentage is far
from pure; in short, that it is of hybrid origin. As a
garden plant we are seemingly justified in giving it the
name Œ. Lamarckiana De Vries by Article 50 of the code
452 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Von. XLVII
formulated by the International Botanical Congress
held in Vienna in 1905.
The effect of the separation of @. Lamarckiana De
Vries from Lamarck’s plant of about 1796 is to make far
more tangible the problem of its origin. In former
papers in the Naruratist (Davis, ’11, p. 226; ’12, p. 379)
I have criticized adversely the attempts that have been
made to place the appearance of Lamarckiana De Vries
in Europe at dates previous to 1778 when Œ. grandiflora
Solander was introduced at Kew. In a recent contribu-
tion Gates (713, pp. 17-19) admits that the presence of
Lamarckiana in Europe previous to 1760 is not estab-
lished and thus abandons his former position when he
sought to prove its very early introduction from Amer-
ica. With Lamarck’s plant (Œ. Lamarckiana Seringe)
removed from the discussion we are brought to periods
where we may hope for more direct evidence on the his-
tory of Lamarckiana De Vries than that furnished by
old accounts and figures. This matter will be further
discussed at the end of this paper in the section entitled,
‘‘The Problem of the Origin of Œ. Lamarckiana sis
Vries.’’
The material of this paper will be arranged under the
following headings: (1) F, Generations in the Family
from the F, Hybrid 10.30La, (2) F, Generations in the
Family from the F, Hybrid 10.30Lb, (3) Hybrids of
grandiflora B X biennis D in the F, Generation, (4) A
Discussion of the Behavior of the Hybrids in the Second
and Third Generations with Reference to the Stability
of Mendelian Factors, (5) The Habit of ‘‘Mutation’’ in
Œ. Lamarckiana De Vries considered with Reference to
the Behavior of the Hybrids between biennis and grandi-
flora, (6) The Problem of the Origin of @. Lamarckiana
De Vries.
No.560] GENETICAL STUDIES ON (ENOTHERA 453
1. F, GENERATIONS IN THE FAMILY FROM THE F, HYBRID
10.30La
The F, hybrid plant designated 10.30Za has already
been described and figured (Davis, ’11, pp. 211-213, Figs.
9, 10, 11), and a brief account of its F, generation was
given in my last paper (Davis, ’12a, pp. 410-413). The
plant was the result of the cross grandiflora B X bi-
ennis A, the latter parent being a rather small-flowered
race of biennis from Woods Hole, Massachusetts. The
F, generation from 10.30La consisted of 1,451 plants,
among which could be readily selected at an early stage
of development a group of 141 rosettes much smaller
than those constituting the mass of the culture and
sharply distinguished by their strongly etiolated leaves
of a narrower form. From these etiolated rosettes de-
veloped a class of dwarfs, the later foliage of which out-
grew the etiolated peculiarities of the young plants and
became green. The normal green rosettes constituting
the mass of the culture presented a remarkable range of
form, but inclined more towards the female parent of the
cross, grandiflora B.
A large proportion of the plants, at maturity, were
fairly close to the F, hybrid plant 10.30La, but there was
presented a wide variation from this form with a mark-
edly greater tendency towards the grandiflora parent
type. Although the range of variation clearly indicated
a process of segregation in this F, generation, it was a
Segregation modified by a general progressive advance
in the size of the plant organs. Thus, with respect to
flower size, the culture gave a large number of plants
(about 50) with flowers as large as or larger than the
grandiflora parent, while the smallest flowers represented
were 2-4 times larger than those of the biennis parent.
The leaves throughout the mass of the culture were, as
a whole, larger than those of the parents of the cross and
generally distinctly crinkled.
It should be recalled (see Davis, ’12a, p. 412) that a
454 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
number of remarkable forms appeared in the F, culture
in addition to the segregates, forms which no taxonomist
would think of relating to either parent of the cross or
to the F, hybrid plant 10.30La. Some of these forms
were sterile, but the 141 peculiar dwarfs from etiolated
rosettes and the extreme types showing progressive evo-
lution were fertile, as was the culture, as a whole.
The problem which I outlined for study through the
F, generation was two-fold: (1) Would extreme types of
the F,, such as the dwarfs, hold their characteristics, and
(2) Would a selfed plant representative of the mass of
the F, produce an F, progeny with points of similarity
to the F, generation? If this proved true there would be
presented a behavior analogous to that of Lamarckiana
Fic. 1. Dwarf, 11. ae ra, in the ” from the F, plant 30La, hybrid of
grandifo ra Bx biennis This plant came from an a. psi and shows
the irregular Areria 2 ravira of is dwarfs.
No. 560] GENETICAL STUDIES ON GENOTHERA 455
Fie. 2. Dw rarf, w hey in tape Fə from the F, plant 10.30Za, hybrid of
grandiflora B x bie nflorescence and two nent from the lower
portion of the phone: pe beria Gae varied forms of the lea
which throws off in successive generations marked vari-
ants which hold true when self-fertilized.
A plant, 11.41ra, was selected as being representative
of the F, dwarfs from etiolated rosettes (Davis, ’12a,
p. 413) and, being selfed, became the parent of an F, gen-
eration (culture 12.53). The stunted growth and irregu-
lar branching characteristic of these dwarfs was well il-
lustrated by this plant, 11.41ra (Fig. 1), as was also the
varied form of the leaves (Fig. 2). The peculiarities of
the etiolated rosettes from which the dwarfs come are
well shown by the two plants at the bottom of Fig. 4.
456 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLVII
From the F, dwarf, 11.4lra, 243 seeds, the con-
tents of a aiglo selfed capsule, were sown (culture
12.53). These produced 116 seedlings, the leaves
of which, following the cotyledons were strongly
etiolated in the lower half in the manner character-
istic of these dwarfs; 69 rosettes were potted and car-
ried to an tarang stage of development; 48 plants
were brought to maturity. The rosettes were all etio-
lated, in some cases over three fourths of the basal por-
tion of the leaves, in others somewhat less; the leaves
were narrow and long-petioled. The F, generation
(culture 12.53), from the F, dwarf, 11.41ra, was then ab-
solutely true to the characters of the etiolated rosettes,
one of which is shown in Fig. 4, 12.53a. The 48 plants
brought to maturity presented the dwarf habit with ir-
r ETE g 5 Ps
Fie. 3. A type, 11.4ic, in the F; from the F, plant 10.30La, sir of
grandiflora B x biennis A. This plant ermeas closely the character of the
mass of the F, generation and was similar the F, parent 10.30La aaar for
a progressive advance in leaf and flower Bi ze.
No. 560] GENETICAL STUDIES ON GENOTHERA 457
regular branching and varied leaf form characteristic
of the F, parent, 11.41ra; these plants also outgrew later
the etiolated peculiarities of their rosettes. The flower
size among these 48 plants of the F, varied greatly, a
further point of similarity to the group of dwarfs in the
F, generation. It appears then, as far as this culture in
the F, gives evidence, that the dwarfs from etiolated
lo cin .
L.5 Laa, Y lL.53 a
Fic. 4. 12.52a and 12 rosettes i the Fs from the Fə plant 11.410
(Fig. 3), the first, representative of the n rosettes constituting the mass of
the cigars the second, one of 18 e delat rosettes that developed into dwarfs.
shige ne of the rae Sa ei in the F; from the F dwarf 11.4ira (Figs.
1 and 2); it holds perfectly the Sari of its F parent, and is shown for
inpia with 12.52ra
rosettes in the F, generation constitute a group of plants
very stable and perhaps homozygous with respect to
their most striking peculiarities.
458 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLVII
The second part of my study of this family concerned
the behavior in the F, of a plant representative of the
mass of the F, generation. The individual chosen,
11.41¢ (Davis, ’12a, p. 412), was a large plant (Fig. 3)
with long branches from the base and a foliage of con-
spicuously crinkled leaves. The type was represented
by about 170 plants in the culture and, intergrading with
other forms, stood close to the center around which the
mass of the culture varied. This plant, 11.41¢, was sim-
ilar to the F, parent hybrid, 10.30La, except that it
showed something of the general progressive advance
throughout the F, generation in the broader and more
crinkled leaves and in the somewhat larger flowers
(petals 2.5 em. long).
From the plant 11.41¢ an F, generation was grown
(culture 12.52). There were sown 411 seeds, the contents
of 3 selfed capsules and 285 rosettes developed. Among
the seedlings 18 plants at once caught my attention as
having etiolated leaves following the cotyledons. These
18 seedlings developed into small rosettes with narrow,
strongly etiolated leaves, which could not be distin-
guished from the etiolated dwarfs that have been de-
scribed above. The contrast between the green rosettes
of this culture, 12.52, and these etiolated dwarfs, is
illustrated in Fig. 4, which shows sister plants, 12.52a
green and representative of the mass of the culture, and
12.52ra one of the 18 etiolated dwarf types. By the side
of 12.52ra, for comparison (see Fig. 4), is shown one of
the 48 etiolated dwarfs in culture 12.53, which, although
an F, individual from 11.41ra, illustrates accurately the
appearance of the etiolated dwarfs in the F, generation.
It will be noted that the two dwarfs, 12.52ra and 12.53a,
are of the same type.
The 18 etiolated rosettes of the F, culture 12.52 grew
into dwarfs indistinguishable in all essentials from the
48 plants of the F, generation 12.53 and the 141 plants in
the F, represented by 11.41ra (Figs. 1 and 2). They out-
grew the etiolated condition of the younger stage, but re-
No. 560] GENETICAL STUDIES ON GENOTHERA 459
mained dwarfs, branching irregularly and presenting
varied forms of leaves; there was also exhibited the same
wide range of flower size. The evidence was then clear
that in this family an F, plant of a type close to the mass
of the F, culture could throw off in the F, the same class
of dwarfs that appeared in the F, generation.
The normal green rosettes constituting the mass of
the culture 12.52 (see Fig. 4, 12.52a) inclined strongly
towards the grandiflora parent of the cross, but presented
broader leaves not so strongly cut at the base. There
was a wide range of variation among the rosettes, and
forms appeared with narrow leaves which developed into
plants with a foliage markedly different from the mass
of the culture. The mass of the culture presented the
same evidence of progressive evolution which was shown
in the F, generation, i. e., the leaves were large and
crinkled as in the F, parent plant 11.41c, and there was
likewise maintained the same advance in the size of the
flowers, which ranged from types as large as or larger
than the grandiflora parent to types as small as that of
the F, hybrid 10.30Za. In short, this F, generation, cul-
ture 12.52, from a plant 11.41c, fairly representative of
the mass of the F,, repeated the performance of the F,
in exhibiting a large class of the same type of dwarf from
etiolated rosettes and also repeated very much the same
range of variation in leaf and flower characters shown by
the F, generation. There was then presented a behavior
closely parallel to that of Lamarckiana when it throws off
in successive generations the same marked types of vari-
ants, which hold true.
Late in the season two plants were noted (12.52fa and
12.52fb) upon which a large number of flowers were 5-
merous, i. e., the flowers had 5 sepals, 5 petals, 10 stamens,
and as far as noted 5 cells in the ovary. I am not aware
that this character has before been noted in the genus
(Enothera. These flowers were not restricted to partic-
ular branches and were found in the same inflorescence
with normal flowers. The 5-merous flowers, were not ob-
460 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLVII
served by me until October, too late in the season to self-
pollinate with the hope of obtaining seed. Open-polli-
nated seed was, however, collected from these two plants
and will be sown in the hope that this interesting sport
may be followed in later generations.
The genealogy of the family from the F, hybrid
10.30La, in so far as it refers to the production of dwarfs,
is presented in outline as follows:
Culture 12.53, consisting of 48
plants, all true to the dwarf type
from etiolated rosettes as repre-
sented by 12.53a (Fig. 4).
12.52a (Fig. 4).
12.52ra (Fig. 4), an F, dwarf
F from an etiolated rosette, repre-
sentative of 18 rosettes in this
F, generation of 259 plants.
J
11.4le (Fig. 3), an F, hybrid
representative of the mass of this
F, generation of 1,451 plants.
11.41ra (Figs. 1 and 2), an F, dwarf
from an etiolated rosette, representative of
F, 141 dwarfs in this F, generation of 1,451
plants.
EERE
10.30La, F, hybrid.
grandiflora B X biennis A.
2. F, GENERATIONS IN THE FAMILY FROM THE F, HYBRID
10.30Lb
The F, hybrid designated 10.30Lb was a sister plant to
10.30La and, therefore, also the product of the cross
grandiflora B X biennis A. Tt has been described and
figured in the earlier paper (Davis, ’11, pp. 213-216, Figs.
12, 13 and 14), and a brief account of its F, generation
No. 560] GENETICAL STUDIES ON G2NOTHERA 461
will be found in my last contribution (Davis, ’12a, pp.
413-415). From the F, generation of 992 rosettes, cul-
ture 11.42, a group of 147 were sharply distinguished by
their uniformly small size and narrow leaves. These de-
veloped into a class of
very remarkable dwarf
plants (Davis, ’12a, p. 415,
11.42r) which at maturity
were from 3—4 dm. high,
rarely branched, and bore
medium-sized flowers
(Fig. 5). The leaves of
the rosettes and mature
plants were fully green;
there was no etiolation so
characteristic of the group
of dwarfs from the sister
F, hybrid 10.30Za. The
ahurectel of the young
dwarf rosettes is shown in
Fig. 7 and Fig. 9, 12.59a,
in comparison with ro-
settes. (shown above) sim-
ilar to forms representa-
tive of the mass of the
culture,
The rosettes constitu-
ting the mass of the cul-
ture exhibited a wide
range of form with the ex-
tremes approaching the
rosettes of the biennis and
rand: Fic. 5. Dwarf, 11.42r, in the F,
grandiflora parents; there the F, plant 10.30 Lb, hybrid of preen
was not shown a clearly fora Bx biennis A. This plant ca paps
tte similar to that shown in Fig. T,
defined tendency towards °,"s*t* sim
either parent of the cross.
From these rosettes a much more varied culture devel-
oped than the F, generation from the plant 10.30La.
462 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLVII
There was more evidence of segregation towards the
respective parents, but the same progressive advance in
flower size. Many plants bore flowers as large as or
larger than those of the grandiflora parent, while no plant
presented flowers as small as those of the biennis parent.
The foliage was extremely varied, ranging from lanceo-
late leaves to broadly elliptical or ovate leaves with well-
defined crinkles.
A larger number of remarkable forms appeared in this
culture, 11.42 (see Davis, ’12a, p. 415), than in the one
from the plant 10.30La, forms that would rank as types
specifically distinct from either parent of the cross and
from the F, hybrid plant 10.30Lb. Among these we shall
refer to (1) the dwarf type 11.42r (Fig. 5), (2) a small-
leaved type 11.42f (Fig. 6), (3) a large-flowered type with
large crinkled leaves 11.429 (Fig. 8), rather common and
fairly repr tative of the mass of the culture, (4) a
medium-flowered type remarkable for its broad-much-
crinkled leaves 11.427 (Fig. 14), and (5) a plant with very
narrow leaves and very small flowers, anthers sterile
11.427 (Fig. 15).
The same problem lay before me in the study of the F,
generations from these types in the F, of the plant
10.30Lb, as in the family which has just been described
from the sister plant 10.30Za. Would the extreme types
such as the dwarfs hold their characters, thus proving to
be homozygous, and would selfed plants more or less
representative of the mass of the F, repeat in their F,
generations something of the history of the F,?
Of the 147 dwarf rosettes in the F, from 10.30L) there
were brought to maturity 90 plants. These constituted,
as stated above, a very uniform group with characters
well shown in Fig. 5. One of these, 11.42ra, was selected
and selfed to become the parent of an F, generation.
The contents of one capsule, 196 very small seeds, were
sown and gave culture 12.59, comprising 66 rosettes, all
similar and dwarf. One of these rosettes is shown in
No.560] GENETICAL STUDIES ON G@NOTHERA 463
Fig. 7 and Fig. 9, 12.59a, and it should be noted that the
specimen is not a seedling, but a half-grown rosette com-
parable in point of age to the large rosettes (shown
above) which represent closely the normal form and size.
The dwarfs are delicate plants, very sensitive to drought,
and I was able to bring only 46 individuals to maturity.
These proved to be in all respects similar to the dwarfs
of the F, generation, except that they were even smaller
in stature and flower size; this further dwarfing was,
however, probably due to less favorable cultivation.
From the behavior of this F, we may, I believe, safely
conclude that the dwarfs of the F., representing an ex-
treme type, are stable, or homozygous, with respect to
their most important characteristics.
There will now be described the F, generation from a
small-leaved plant, 11.42f (Fig. 6), about 1 m. high, with
F A type, 11. et in the Fə from the F, plant 10.30Lb, aes of
grandifto ora Bx biennis A. A form Po gira ere by small leaves, medium-sized
flowers, and large capsules.
464 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLVII
medium-sized flowers and large capsules (3.3 cm. long).
This type (Davis, ’12a, p. 415, 11.42f) was represented by
several plants in the F, from 10.30Zb. It illustrated an
extreme combination of small leaves with large capsules,
Fic. 7. Rosettes in the Fz: 5a ee of the mass of the culture
from the Fə plant 11.42f (Fig. ne 12.55ra a sister rosette, one of 8 dwarfs in
the same culture; 12.59@ a rosette from a on similar to 11.42r (Fig. 5).
but must not be regarded as representing a class since its
characters intergraded through numbers of plants into
the mass of the culture. The contents of one selfed
capsule, 219 seeds, were sown as culture 12.55; these pro-
duced 75 seedlings from which 62 rosettes developed.
No. 560] GENETICAL STUDIES ON C2ENOTHERA 465
From the mass of rosettes with characters as illus-
trated in Fig. 7, 12.55a, a group of 8 dwarfs (Fig. 7,
12.55ra) was quickly recognized. One can hardly im-
agine a much sharper contrast between rosettes in the
same culture than is shown in this illustration (Fig. 7,
12.55ra compared with 12.55a). By the side of the dwarf
12.55ra is a rosette, 12.59a, of the F, from one of the
dwarfs of the F,, 11.42ra (similar to Fig. 5). A com-
parison will show how perfectly the F, type 11.42f (Fig.
6) has repeated the behavior of its parent hybrid F, plant
10.30Lb in throwing off a class of similar dwarfs. The
8 dwarfs of the culture 12.55 were set out under con-
ditions ill-suited to their constitution and I had great
difficulty in saving 5 plants from a period of drought.
These are now in the hot house, where it is hoped that
they may be brought to maturity.?
The normal rosettes of the F, culture 12.55, excluding
the 8 dwarfs described above, developed a fairly uniform
set of plants which at maturity exhibited a foliage of
broader and more crinkled leaves than those of the F,
parent hybrid 11.42f. This progressive advance in foli-
age was also supplemented by a greater vigor and size of
the plants, although the flowers remained without marked
change. Summarizing the behavior of the F, plant 11.42f
in the F, generation, the most striking points were the
repetition of the behavior of the F, parent hybrid 10.30Lb
in throwing off the same types of dwarfs, and a much
greater uniformity among the normal plants with appar-
ent advance in leaf size and vegetative vigor.
The next form to be considered is a plant, 11.429, which
was fairly representative of the mass of the F, genera-
tion from 10.30Lb. This plant (Davis, ’12a, p. 415,
11.429) was 1.5 m. high and characterized by large flowers
(petals about 4 cm. long) and large crinkled leaves (Fig.
8). It was a type rather common and intergrading with
other forms of the culture. It exhibited a decided pro-
gressive advance in flower and leaf size over the F,
* Of the 5 dwarfs 3 are now (June 1, 1913) almost full grown and true
to the type.
466 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLVII
parent plant 10.30Lb, but stood close to the center around
which the mass of the F, culture varied.
From this plant, 11.429 (Fig. 8), the contents of two
Fie. 8. e, 11.429, representative of the mass of the F generation fro
the F, plant 10.30Lb, hybrid of grandiflora B x biennis A. A form ATE
by large, crinkled leaves and large flowers (petals 4 cm. long).
capsules, about 900 seeds, were sown (culture 12.56) and
377 rosettes developed. Among the rosettes a group of
20 dwarfs very shortly defined itself. The characters of
the dwarfs are illustrated in Fig. 9, 12.56ra, where they
may be compared with those of a normal rosette, 12.56a,
shown above. The same sort of contrast is here exhibited
as that illustrated by Fig. 7 for the culture from 11.42/.
By the side of the dwarf 12.56ra is again figured the
No. 560] GENETICAL STUDIES ON @NOTHERA 467
rosette 12.59a (compare Fig. 9 with Fig. 7) of the F,
from one of the dwarfs in the F,, 11.42ra (similar to Fig.
5). Figs. 7 and 9 then illustrate the same behavior, in
the first case that of the F, plant 11.42/, and in the second
case that of the F, sister plant 11.429, and both plants
have produced a class of dwarfs similar to that which
appeared in the F, 11.42r, the type shown in Fig. 5. I
had the same difficulty with the 20 dwarfs from 11.429 as
with the 8 from 11.42 and was only able to save 7 plants
from a period of drought. These at the present writing
are also in the hothouse, where they bid fair to reach
maturity.’
An outline of the genealogy of the sets of dwarfs pro-
duced by the family from the F, hybrid 10.30Lb will make
clearer its complications. The important feature is of
course the close parallelism of this history with the be-
havior of Lamarckiana when it produces in successive
generations a marked variant that breeds true.
Culture 12.59 consisting of 65
plants, all true to the dwarf type
as represented by 11.42r (Fig. 5).
12.55a (Fig. 7). 12.56a (Figs. 9, 10 and 11)
12.55ra (Fig. 7), an F, 12.56ra (Fig. 9), an F,
F dwarf, representative of 8 | dwarf, representative of 20
? | dwarfs in this F, genera- | dwarfs in this F, genera-
tion of 62 plants. tion of 377 plants.
l l
11.42f (Fig. 6). 11.42g (Fig. 8), an F, hybrid
representative of the mass of this
F, generation of 992 plants.
11.42r (Fig. 5), an F, dwarf,
F, representative of 147 dwarfs in
this F, generation of 992 plants.
I
10.30Lb, F, hybrid
|
grandiflora B X biennis A.
*Of the 7 dwarfs 4 are now (June 1, 1913) almost full grown and true
to the type.
468 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST (Vou. XLVII
Of the 357 normal green rosettes in culture 12.56 from
11.429, 128 plants were set out and brought to maturity.
A single interesting rosette with leaves sharply streaked
with white failed to live. The rosettes consisted of un-
usually broad, ovate or elliptical leaves, loosely arranged
(see Fig. 9, 12.56a). The group of plants at maturity
0 Cm,
Fig. 9. Rosettes in the F;: 12.56a representative of the mass of the culture
from the F, plant 11.42g (Fig. 8); 12.56ra a sister rosette, one of 20 dwarfs in
the same culture; 12.59a a rosette from a plant deities to 11.42r (Fig. 5
exhibited a range of variation in flower and leaf size, but
on the whole was remarkably uniform except for the plant
12.56x to be described later.
No. 560] GENETICAL STUDIES ON (ENOTHERA 469
The type characteristic of this group (culture 12.56) is
one of the most interesting among my hybrids and will be
1G Mature plant, 12.56a, from the rosette 12.56a (Fig. 9), “gapped
tive of the mass of the Fs generation from the Fe hybrid 11.429 (Fig. 8). A form
remarkable for the size and thickness of the leaves, size of flowers and general
vigor.
briefly described. It is a large plant, 1.5-2 m. high,
with long branches from the base (Fig. 10), stem green
above, reddish below, leaves much larger and thicker than
in grandiflora, and strongly crinkled. Inflorescence (Fig.
11) grandiflora-like, very dense on the main branches,
bracts persistent. Buds 8-9 em. long, cone circular in
section, sepals green, their tips attenuate. Petals about
470 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLVII
4 cm. long. Stigma 5-8 mm. above the tips of the anthers.
Capsules 2.8 em. long.
Although this type presented many of the peculiarities
of the grandiflora parent, there was evident a remarkable
Fie Flowering side branch of the F; hybrid 12.56a (Fig. 10), showing
the pear nflorescence and broad crinkled bracts. At the right is a
leaf from the fowl er tia of the main stem.
degree of progressive evolution in the size and thickness
of the leaves, size of the flowers, and general vigor.
These progressive advances introduce characteristics of
No. 560] GENETICAL STUDIES ON (2NOTHERA 471
Lamarckiana and make this type a very favorable one
for back crossing with certain races of biennis which in
certain respects (e. g., stem coloration, rosette characters,
ete.) are closer to Lamarckiana. Such a back cross was
made last summer with biennis D and should result in a
further advance towards the synthesis of Lamarckiana-
like hybrids between grandiflora and forms of biennis.
The single plant, designated 12.56” in the culture de-
Mature plant, 12.567, a remarkable type represented by a single
individual in the > from t ‘ie Fə hybrid 11.42g (Fig. 8). A form shea orl wd
as stocky habit and very large thick leaves. > The plant had. at least 21 chro
omes, the ciple number
472 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLVII
scribed above, presented characters that distinguished it
from the mass in much the same way that gigas is dis-
tinguished from Lamarckiana. In the rosette stage the
plant was marked because of the exceptional thickness
and large size of the leaves. The mature plant, some-
what more than 1 m. high (Fig. 12), was much shorter
1 Flowering a shoot of the F; hybrid 12.56% (Fig. 12), perlak ng the
four- angled buds, and dense inflorescence, flat-topped because of the short inter-
nodes. the right is a feat from the lower portion of the main rai m.
and more stocky (gigas-like) than the average of the cul-
ture; the leaves were even thicker. The inflorescence
(Fig. 13) was more dense because of the shorter inter-
nodes so that the top appeared flattened as in gigas.
No. 560] GENETICAL STUDIES ON (2NOTHERA 473
The buds, 8-9 em. long, presented a stouter cone, 4-
angled, and the sepal tips were less attenuate and thicker.
The petals were about 4 cm. long, the hypanthium was
shorter, and the stigma lobes, 4-6 mm. above the tips of
the anthers, were thicker than in the type representative
of the mass of the culture. The capsules, 1.8 cm. long,
were shorter and stouter. So many of these points of
difference suggest the characteristics of gigas that it was
not surprising to find the chromosome count to be above
14, the normal diploid number for @inothera. It is diffi-
cult to determine the exact number, but from counts made
this spring at the growing points of seedlings from this
plant I am certain that the chromosome count is at least
as high as 21, the triploid number. It will be remem-
bered that the triploid number has been determined by
both Miss Lutz (712) and Stomps (712) for ‘‘mutants’’
derived from lata and Lamarckiana to which Stomps has
given the name semi-gigas. We have then in this plant
(12.56x) a variant from the parent hybrid which probably
corresponds closely to the ‘‘triploid mutants’? of La-
marckiana or its derivatives.
There will now be briefly described the F, generation
from a type 11.421, represented by a single plant in the
F, from 10.30Lb (Davis, ’12a, p. 415, 11.427). This plant,
about 1 m. high, was remarkable for its broad, entire,
much-crinkled leaves (Fig. 14) ; the flowers were medium-
sized (petals 2 em. long). The contents of two capsules,
222 seeds, were sown, from which 117 plants were ob-
tained and brought to maturity (culture 12.58). The
mass of the rosettes consisted of broad elliptical leaves,
crinkled and loosely arranged. Several rosettes were
grandifiora-like, intergrading, however, with the mass,
and 8 presented a long narrow form of leaf. The culture
at maturity was very well graded from plants 1.6 m. high,
with flowers as large as those of grandiflora (petals 3.5
em. long) to plants the counterpart of the F, parent
hybrid 11.427. The foliage of the culture as a whole con-
tinued the progressive advance of 11.42] as shown by
474 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Von XLVII
larger leaves which were more strongly crinkled. The
plants from the 8 rosettes with narrow leaves also had at
Fic. A type, 11.421, in the F from the F, 10.30Lb, hybrid of
nae B x biennis A, represented by a single plan A form socal
by its broad, entire, much crinkled leaves and somes sized flowers (peta
2 cm. long).
maturity smaller and narrower leaves; the flowers were
medium-sized (petals 2.5 em. long). They constituted a
clearly defined group but could not be called dwarfs. It
is interesting to note that an F, type so clearly defined as
11.427 may, nevertheless, be strongly heterozygous and
consequently may be very far from representing a stable
segregate in the F..
A remarkable plant, 11.42), appeared in the F, from
10.30Lb (Davis, ’12a, p. 415, 11.427) which in habit and
No. 560] GENETICAL STUDIES ON GENOTHERA 475
foliage agreed very closely with the ‘‘mutant’’ @nothera
elliptica obtained by De Vries (’01, vol. I, pp. 280-284)
from Lamarckiana. This plant, 7 dm. high, developed
from a rosette with narrow leaves and at maturity pre-
sented a foliage of very narrow leaves well illustrated in
15. A type, 11.42j, in the F from the F, plant 10.30Lb, hybrid of
raii Bx Spud A, represented by a single plant. A remarkable for m with
f y narrow leave with very small flowers (petals 6 mm. gia ng),
s pelen na it epee and foliage matched closely De Vries’s
e.
mutant ” @nothera elliptica
Fig. 15, which shows the top of the main stem. The
476 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLVII
flowers, however, were very small (petals 6 mm. long) and
the anthers as far as observed were completely sterile.
Since this plant apparently could not be selfed, I pol-
linated it from a large sister plant of the F, with grandi-
flora-like flowers. The result was 154 seeds from several
capsules which gave 46 plants in the F, generation (cul-
ture 12.57). Of the rosettes, 40 proved to be large-leaved,
exhibiting much variation, but with several plants similar
to grandiflora; 6 rosettes bore long narrow leaves.
From the 40 large-leaved rosettes there developed
plants 1.2-1.5 m. high with a foliage of crinkled leaves,
and medium-sized flowers (petals 2-2.5 em. long). Of
the 6 narrow-leaved rosettes, 5 developed plants which
agreed with the ‘‘elliptica’’ type and 1 became a broad-
leaved form similar to the 40 described above. The 41
large-leaved plants of the culture evidently took their
characteristics largely from the pollen parent of the cross
and represented something of a blend. I am at a loss to
account for the five individuals of the ‘‘elliptica’’ type
unless they came from apogamously formed seed. The
‘‘elliptica’’ type has since appeared in other F, genera-
tions from the cross grandiflora X biennis, and it appears
to be a not uncommon expression of one of the extreme
forms which may be thrown in the F, of this cross.
(To be continued)
THE INFLUENCE OF PROTRACTED AND INTER-
MITTENT FASTING UPON GROWTH
DR. SERGIUS MORGULIS
In an earlier paper on inanition! I pointed out the
significance of the period following a prolonged fast in
investigating the problem of growth. Prolonged starva-
tion—notwithstanding the exhaustion which it produces
—seems to exercise a rejuvenating effect upon the as-
similative capacity of the organism, which builds itself up
again with surprising rapidity as soon as feeding is re-
sumed. It was also shown there, that the increase in
weight of the animal does not necessarily correspond to
the quantity of ingested food, being somewhat greater
than the latter, which is due to absorption of water from
the surroundings. Whereas inanition causes a relatively
greater loss of dry substance than of water, it was found
that ‘‘the effect of resumed feeding (upon the sala-
mander) is to increase the water content more relatively
than the dry substance’’ (p. 213).
Since those results were published I had an oppor-
tunity of collecting more material bearing upon this topic.
The experiments were made with the salamander Triton
cristatus, and strengthen my former observations on
Diemyctylus viridescens. In the subjoined Table A the -
data as to the weight of nine salamanders with the exact
amounts of food taken during 7 to 14 days after starva-
tion are summarized. The renewal of feeding after
Several weeks of privation does not generally proceed
smoothly, the animals either taking sick or refusing the
food, hence the relapses with the diminution of the body
weight which may be seen occasionally throughout the
table.
*Morgulis, S., ‘‘Studies of Inanition in its Bearing upon the Problem of
Growth,’’ I, Arch. f. Entw.-Mech., Bd, 32, 169-268, 3 plates, 1911.
477
478 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLVII
That the rate of growth is independent of the amount
of nutrition is revealed by these experiments in a striking
manner ; they show rather the reverse, namely, the utiliza-
tion of the food by the organism according to the need of
its tissues and cells. The impulse to grow plays the lead-
ing part here, not the quantity of food brought into the
digestive organs, and in this respect the growth after
starvation has much in common with embryonic growth.
TABLE A
o. 2 3 4 | 5 6 7 8 9
' ae amie : eee eS, ti i Sey sh cata 4 BEA See ao
3 [sald] sal 52] s,| dls, | sil =, [sil 54 34l 34/34] s| 32) 3g) 8
2A 6| #20 eer | e0 pete ~O/! a8 oO ee -D eS 20 -sS Pekas) 24 oe 38 p
s| BS] 39| 88| 38| 35| 32| S| gs) 28| 58| 35| 5a| 35| 22) Se] 28| Be) gs
"IS 3 E z ee 35| 85/3 3 =
p |54] 23) 85| 43/84) 22) 54) 23) e<| oe) 64) 23/54 | 23) E+) 23) P1
A i e = E e fa Luke fa i
: aes Le
1 0450/0.631|.1020'0.755) .1125/1.067|.0580 0 0480 0.889 .0870/0.826 .0920 0.887 .1300
2 0368/0.749'.0790 0.865) .0565 1.093|.062 7|.0610\1.077 .0870/0.967 .1460/1.084).1300
3 372 .0490/0.959' .0590 1.102) .0910 1.025.061 0 69 .1460 0.978).1300
4 215/0.897|.0590'0.973! .0590 1.207|.0570 0.988 |.0625|0.937 .1450/1.122|.1270 1
5 )920/0.977!.0520'0.923'.0525 1.231|.0655 1.0411.06 09 .1450 1270 0.909 .1300
6 )920/0.977!.0520 0.923) .0525'1.251|.0690'1.104|.0540 0.887 .1210|1.146.1270 0.864 .1520
7 )920|0.961|.0725 0.919 .0740 1.251|.0690 1.104 '.0540'0.978 .0890|1.140 .1270 1.063).1070
8 0|1.001).1100'1.011!.0930 1.308 30/1.037/.1¢ 020 .0890/1.090 1.146|.1070
)920/1.001|.0770/1.011 701.308.0800 /)1.037).0 1.020 .0890|1.090 1.146
)920/0.937|.0700 1.107 .0665 1.308 .1070/1.05 7/.0870/1.02( l, 8901.090 1.146
1920!0.937 0700 1.107 .0665/1.351!.1030!1.157|.0780/1 '.0890/1.090 1.146
0920/0.937'.1580'1.107|.1270.1.351'.1030/1.157 0780/1.02 ',0890) 1.090 1.146
092¢ 227| 1580 1.227) .1270 1.399 .1030/1.263 .0780|1.120 .0890/1.243 ‘1.200,
Food offers merely a greater or less scope to the inherent
growth-tendency of the organism, and, like so many other
factors, may either increase or decrease its effect. It is
possible that the reduction in size of the cells, or rather
the diminished ratio between cell-body and nucleus, has
something to do with the observed processes of intense
growth, and that the rejuvenescence of the organism is
analogous to the condition in the embryo, where the cell-
body is likewise small in relation to its nucleus. There
is certainly more than mere superficial resemblance be-
tween the two phenomena of growth from the point of
view of the protein metabolism. Already in the eighties
No.560] INFLUENCE OF FASTING ON GROWTH 479
Kahan? observed that after seventeen days of inanition
(when the body had suffered a loss of 31 per cent.) rabbits
gained 56 per cent. in weight on a diet even less sufficient
than that, which could just maintain them in a state of
equilibrium under normal conditions. The retention of
protein by the cells, as their principal building material,
is greater than usual, and along with it goes the retention
of water.
If the growth of the body as regards weight cor-
responded to the amount of food taken for that period of
time, then the coefficient of growth should be equal,
G/F=1. According as to whether a larger or smaller
portion of the food is transformed into body substance,
i. e., participates in growth, the coefficient ought to vary
from 0 to 1. Furthermore, when the increase in weight
of the animal exceeds the quantity of ingested food, the
coefficient will rise above 1. In the following Table B we
give the records of the body weights for consecutive days,
the amount of food ingested and the corresponding coeffi-
cient of growth of four animals.
TABLE B
ANIMAL 1
7 December Total
Date Nov. tor
3 22 | 23 24 25 26 27 29 |7 Days
S ——
-910 .631 .679| .729| .780| .922)| 1.077; .898
pine in
eight.. —30.6% | +.048 | +.050 | +.051 | +.142 | +.155| — |+.267
Amount of
ood given
(in grm.)
on previous
d .0450 | .0368| .0535| .1215| .0920) — | .3488
Ratio be- .
tween in-
reasein
weight and
amount of
od o. | 1.07 | 126 | .95 | 117 108 | — 7
* Kahan, J. A., ‘‘Der Einfluss des Hungerns auf das Körpergewicht bei
der Auffiitterung von Tieren mit einer beschriinkten Nahrungsmenge nach
einem tiberstandenen Hunger,’’ Russ. Medizin, Nr. 17-19, 1885.
480 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST (VoL. XLVII
ANIMAL 2
Total
Date Nov T for
> 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 |7Days
Body weight
in acci 802 631 749 .872) .897| 977 ? .961) 1.001
Difference in
weight.... —29.3%|+.118 +.123| +.025 +.080| ? |—.016 +.040; +.370
Amount of (?)
food given
(in grm.)
onpreviou
Gay. 227: .1020| .0790) .0490) .0590|.0520) —— | .0725) .4125
Ratio be-
tween in-
crease in
weight and
unt of
Spe ark 1.16 Loe 2.0L) 136 ? ? .56 | .89
ANIMAL 3
Da Wor. January —
. 3 4 5 17 8 9 10 | 7 days
Body weight |
in grm... .|1.064 755.865; .959| .973; .923| — .919| 1.011
Difference in |
ight... —29.0%| +.110| +.094 +.014' —.050) — | —.004| +.092 +.256
Amount of |
given
(in grm. |
onprevious |
Gay 654 .1125} .0565| .0590, —— |.0525| —— | .0740| .3545
Ratio be- |
tween in- |
rease in
weight and
ount of
DRN .98 | 1.67 a ? ? 1.28 Ta
ANIMAL 5
|
Date | Nov. Jaanoty oo
ee 2 3 4 5 6 7 s | o [Ders
Body weight ;
in grm... ./1.140 .882|) .917| 1.025; .988| 1.041| 1.104) — ! 1.037
Difference in
eigh 22.7%| +.035| +.108; —.037| +.053 +.063} — |—.067| +.155
Amount of
(in grm.)
on previous
ay... .0480| .0610| — | .0625| .0690/.0540| —— | .2945
Ratio be-
ween i
crease i
weight and
amount of
eas 73 177; —— | .85 91 ? ? 53
No.560] INFLUENCE OF FASTING ON GROWTH 481
The animals were weighed both before and immediately
after feeding, so that the amount of food consumed could
be ascertained accurately by subtracting the former
weight from the latter. After twenty-four hours the
animals were weighed again, the difference between this
weight and that of the previous day giving the growth for
twenty-four hours. In some cases the increase is only a
fraction of the quantity of food which the animals re-
ceived; not infrequently, however, it has been even
greater than that quantity. In the case of the four sala-
manders recorded above there are ten out of eighteen
determinations, which show an excess of growth over the
amount of ingested food. We find that the coefficient of
growth never falls below 0.5 (the one instance where it is
only 0.24 is obviously accidental) ; in other words, as re-
gards weight the increase of the body is never equal to
less than one half of the quantity of ingested material,
and the average coefficient for all four animals for a
seven-day period of renewed feeding is 0.73. This fact
is particularly significant when we compare it with the
condition found in continually fed specimens. In the
case of other four control salamanders it was found that
the coefficient of growth was only 0.26, i. e., only about
26 per cent. of the food had gone to the building up of the
body substance.
When the growth occasioned by a return to a normal
diet after a protracted starvation is studied from the
point of view of the body dimensions instead of the body
weight, it appears that it is exceedingly slow during the
first two weeks, showing that during that time primarily
the internal organs undergo reparation, the enlargement
of the musculature and of the skeleton ensuing sub-
sequently.
Salamanders fed intermittently did not become as
heavy nor as large as the control specimens; that is to
say, their growth has been retarded from the point of
view of both weight and size. The coincidence of the
results of measuring both weight and length of the body
482 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLVII
strengthens our conclusion that frequently repeated
starvation affects unfavorably the vitality of the organ-
ism. The conclusion concurs with that of Kahan,? who
subjected pigeons two or three times to hunger, feeding
them very abundantly in the periods between, and found
that their power of resistance declines with each new
experience of starvation.
Der nach vorhergegangenem Hungern bei unbeschriinkter Nahrungs-
aufnahme aufgefiitterte Organismus zeigt die Folgen der früheren
Nahrungsentziehung, . . . und bei wiederholter Nahrungsentziehung
rascher verfällt, als der ends (p. 277)
Seland* experimenting with chickens got quite different
results. He allowed his birds to reach a state of equi-
librium in body weight, when food was withdrawn for
periods of one to two days, and then they were again fed.
He discovered that the periodically fasting birds grew
heavier than the control, although they were actually
getting less food. According to von Seland, the increase
is not caused by a deposit of fat, but by an accumulation
of albuminous material, and the periodic fasting has the
effect of making the body heavier, stronger and more
solid. Von Seland’s assertion, however, regarding the in-
crease in quantity of the albuminous substances lacks the
proof of chemical analysis.
We saw in the foregoing that after a period of pro-
tracted starvation, when about one fourth of the body
weight has been lost, growth is very intense and the per
cent. of the consumed food which becomes converted into
the substance of the organism is nearly three times as
large as in the continually fed salamanders. The 1m-
pulse to grow determines the degree of utilization of the
nutriment, the rate of growth being regulated by the pat-
ticular state of the cells of the organism, which in turn 1s
probably occasioned by the relation of the nucleus to the
*Kahan, J. A., ‘‘Mit Auffiitterung abwechselnde akute experimentelle
Inanition,’’ St.-Petersburger med. Wochenschr., Nr. 30, 275-277, 1886.
*V. Seland, ‘‘Ueber die Nachwirkung der Nahrongsentzichung auf die
Erniihrung,’’ Biol. Centralbl., Bd. 7, 145-158, 184-192, 214-224, 246-256,
271-281, 1887.
No. 560]. INFLUENCE OF FASTING ON GROWTH 483
cell-body. We shall attempt now to demonstrate this
point further by comparing the results obtained for long
periods with differently nourished animals. The data
which are given in the subjoined tables are so arranged
that the number of times when either the starved or the
periodically fasting salamanders received food is just
one half of the number of feedings of the control speci-
mens for some definite length of time. We take the
number of feedings which could be obtained from the in-
dividual records as indicating the approximate amount
of consumed food, since the actual quantities—except in
a few instances—have not been measured directly. It is
clear, of course, that animals fed ad libitum do not always
take the same quantity of food, nor is it likely that dif-
ferent animals consume each similar amounts, but in the
run of weeks it may be expected that the positive and
negative variations will compensate for each other. We
may, therefore, accept the number of times at which the
animals received food as a measure for the total quantity
of food consumed during a certain period. Furthermore,
to make the weights of the different animals comparable
with one another they have been computed on the assump-
tion that the initial weight of all animals was one gram.
In Table C we have the data of four groups of starved
Salamanders and of their corresponding controls. The
first two groups, each comprising four individuals, are
compared at the end of 112 days, during which period the
control specimens were fed 96 times, while the others
(after 7-8 weeks of complete inanition) were fed 48
times. The ratio between the number of feedings being
1-- 0.5, it follows that by the end of 112 days the control
animals have probably consumed twice as much food as
the starved animals. The final body weight at the close
of this period was 3.823 g. and 4.265 g. (1st group), and
3.092 g. and 3.694 g. (2d group), respectively. Taking the
mean of these two groups, we get 1--1.165 as the ratio
between the final weights, and 1+ 2.45 as the ratio be-
tween the daily increase in the control and starved
484 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Von. XLVII
animals. Examining the data of the third and fourth
groups where in the course of 84 days the control speci-
mens were fed 72 times and the starved ones only 36 times
we encounter practically the same result.
TABLE C
| | Animals Fed after| Ratio Between
Group | Control Animals | protracted Star- A and B
| (4) vation (B) (A =1)
|
Number of feedings E] 96 48 1+0.5
ae | 96 48 1+0.5
lil 72 36 1+0.5
iv 72 36 1+0.5
Body weight i 3.823 | 4.265 1+1.116
(Initial wt. =1 gr.) ii | 3.092 | 3.694 1+1.195
iii | 2.557 | 2.170 1 9
w 2.635 1+0.867
Daily increase in body Ea 0.029 0.068 1+2.345
weight ii | 0.022 0.056 1+2.545
iii | 0.022 0.033 1+1.500
iv | 0.028 0.046 1+1.643
The fact that in the case of these last two groups the
starved individuals have not reached the same weight as
the corresponding controls, whereas in the former two
groups they even became by one-sixth heavier than the
controls, must be attributed to the shorter duration of
the feeding-up of these animals. We find thus that a
fasting experience enables the organism to attain almost
the same weight (or even a greater weight) which animals
that did not have such an experience attain, upon half the
quantity of their food supply, because the rate of mon
after starvation is considerably greater.
We may proceed now in a similar fashion to caipani
the effect of continual and of intermittent feeding upon
the growth of the body. These data are recorded in
Table D, and are likewise calculated for an initial weight
of one gram. The ratio between the number of feedings
of these two kinds of animals being 1 —-0.5, the respective
body-weights have not become 0.5 of that of the control
specimens, but 0.57-0.81; in other words, the intermit-
tently fed animals have increased somewhat more than
No.560] INFLUENCE OF FASTING ON GROWTH 485
the control animals would have done with the same
quantity of food. Taking the average for all four groups
together, we find that the intermittently fed specimens
with one half the amount of food reach a little over two
thirds of the body weight of the continually fed ones.
TABLE D
Group | Control Animals | p satay ania ls ieS
(A) (0) (4=1)
Number of feedings i 120 60 1+0.5
ii 120 60 1+0.5
iii 120 60 +
iv 108 54 1+0.5
Body weight i 4.395 2.520 1+0.573
(Initial wt. =1 gr.)| ii 3.550 2.885 1+0.813
iii 3.520 2.490 1+0.708
iv 3.616 2.501 1+0.692
Daily increase in body) i 0.028 0.025 1 +0.893
weight | ii 0.022 | 0.032 1+1.455
iii 0.021 | 0.025 1+1.191
| iv 0.024 | 0.028 1 +1.167
Assuming the values for the normally fed animals equal
to 1, we may sum up the results of our comparison of the
growth in weight of continually fed individuals (a) and
those starved (b) or intermittently fasting (c) in the fol-
lowing formule:
a b | e |
1 0.5 0.5 reres of food. `
1 2.01 1.18 ncrease in weight.
1 1.01 0.70 aes body weight.
The results of the above study are obviously at variance
with those of von Seland who found that his periodically
fasting birds have been faring best. This difference in
our results may, of course, be accounted for by the cir-
cumstance that the periods of fasting of my salamanders
have been rather long (one to three weeks; also in
Kahan’s experiments the periods were from one and a
half to two weeks) whereas von Seland’s chickens have
never fasted more than 12 to 48 hours at any time.
486 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLVII
-Why does the intermittent feeding produce such an in-
hibiting effect upon the growth of the body in weight?
Before attempting to answer this question it should be
recalled that these animals utilize a larger portion of their
food in building up their tissues than normally fed sala-
manders do, the rate of their growth being likewise about
one fifth greater. We also pointed out that the animals
remained smaller in size and lighter in weight than the
controls. We meet, thus, in the case of the periodically
starved salamanders two contrary phenomena: on the
one hand, we observed and directly measured on a number
of individuals their deficient growth; on the other hand,
we found that the growth activity has not been impaired,
but even somewhat greater than in the case of the control
Tritons. In the paper, already referred to in the begin-
ning of this article, I showed that the water content of
the organism increases 4 per cent. when salamanders are
returned to a normal diet after protracted starvation.
The water content probably comes back to the natural
level when the animals have again reached their normal
state. In the case of the intermittently fasting sala-
manders this may not happen, if the fast is repeated
before the effect of the preceding inanition has been
overcome. If we recall that the per cent. of water in
the organism of starved individuals is also somewhat
higher than the usual (by 1.5 per cent.) it becomes quite
probable that water may be accumulating in the tissues
of intermittently starved specimens to the extent of being
a hindrance to their growth. :
Acute hunger has an entirely different effect. It may
“even exhaust the organism for a time, but so long as de-
generation has not set in—degenerative changes appear
generally in the advanced stages of starvation—inanition
may produce an invigorating influence upon the organ-
ism, which has its parallel in the embryonic growth only.
The temporary relief which the organs of digestion get
may contribute much towards improving their capacity,
but the resulting rejuvenation of the organism is a com-
No.560] INFLUENCE OF FASTING ON GROWTH 487
posite effect of the activity of all its cells. The chief
reason for the revitalization of the organism is in the en-
hanced need of the cells for nourishment. The cells be-
come ‘‘avaricious,’’ if we may say so, and the increased
proportion of the nucleus in the cell organization may
perhaps in a measure be responsible for that.
From all that has preceded the conclusion can be drawn
that periodic starvation is more detrimental to the organ-
ism than acute starvation followed by a liberal supply
of food. In the former case the individual remains below
the level of the normally fed animals; in the latter case,
on the contrary, provided the inanition has not been
carried too far, the restorative process may go even be-
yond the limit attainable under normal conditions. From
the viewpoint of practical application this conclusion is
evidently of importance, suggesting to those who have
made the problem of social welfare their own the dangers
to the health and vigor of mankind which lurk in the more
commonly occurring underfeeding and chronic starva-
tion, especially of the young and growing generation.
CAMBRIAN HOLOTHURIANS'!
AUSTIN H. CLARK
Preface.—In a recent number of Science? Dr. Hubert
Lyman Clark published a most interesting and valuable
summary of the literature on the fossil remains of the
Holothuroidea, accompanied by critical remarks. The
greater part of his paper is devoted to a consideration of
Dr. Charles D. Waleott’s contribution to the knowledge
of Cambrian geology and paleontology in which there
are described as holothurians, under the new generic
names Eldonia, Laggania, Louisella and Mackenzia, four
new forms from the Middle Cambrian of British Colum-
ia.$
Dr. Clark reaches the conclusion that Laggania can
not positively be assigned to any invertebrate phylum,
for he sees ‘‘nothing beyond the probable form of the
body, and the terminal mouth, to suggest a holothurian,
and these characters are equally suggestive of actini-
ans;’’ Louisella he does not believe is a holothurian,
though he can offer no suggestion as to its proper sys-
tematic position; Mackenzia he does not consider a holo-
thurian; he hints that it may be an actinian, though he
hastens to emphasize the fact that he does not positively
make that assertion; Eldonia he is sure is not a holothu-
rian, but he does not place it in any phylum.
To sum up Dr. Clark’s criticism, he is sure that none
of the four genera established by Dr. Walcott really
belong to the Holothuroidea, but he is quite unable to
suggest a more logical resting place for any of them.
* Published by permission of the secretary of the Smithsonian Institution
who, however, does not hold himself responsible for any of the views
expressed.
* Science, Vol. 35 (N. 8.), No. 894 (February 16, 1912) , P. 274.
° Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections, Vol. 57, No. 3, pp. 41-58.
488
No. 560] CAMBRIAN HOLOTHURIANS 489
Dr. Clark remarks that in Fig. 2 on plate 13 (repre-
senting Mackenzia costalis) ‘‘the terminal mouth sur-
rounded by a jointed or notched ring is distinctly shown;
in the specimen I was unable to make out these points
satisfactorily’’; I can personally vouch for the presence
of the ‘‘notched ring’’; but after the specimen was pho-
tographed Dr. Walcott tells me that it was subjected to
an acid bath in order to remove a deposit of calcite, and
while it was in that bath the ring seems to have disap-
peared.
Dr. Clark laments that ‘‘if Eldonia is a holothurian,
it becomes virtually impossible to define the class except
in terms of the alimentary canal; indeed, if Eldonia is a
holothurian, the echinoderms themselves can be defined
in no other terms, for Eldonia lacks every single charac-
ter which justifies the customary view that holothurians
are echinoderms.” I can not agree that Eldonia lacks
every characteristic echinodermal character; but even if
it did and we were forced to define the class Holothu-
roidea on the basis of the digestive tube the Holothu-
roidea would merely be brought into line with very many
of the other animal groups. I would like to see Dr. Clark
draw up a definition which would successfully differen-
tiate the Trichoptera from the Lepidoptera, or the
Orthoptera from the Neuroptera, or a definition which
would include all the members of the Diptera, but exclude
all other insects. The more we learn about the various
types of animals the more it is impressed upon us that
the dividing lines between them are purely arbitrary, and
that there is a fundamental unity covering the whole field
of zodlogy.
Introduction——My study of the specimens upon which
these new genera and species were based was entirely
independent of that made by Dr. Walcott, and, on account
of our entirely different previous training, I approached
the problems presented in an entirely different way. Ex-
cepting Eldonia, I did not examine any of the genera in
detail until after his paper was in press. After its publi-
490 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLVII
cation the bearing of these new genera from the Cam-
brian upon certain phases of marine biology, especially
on the probable age of the deep-sea fauna, led me to
examine all of them with the greatest care in order to
determine to my complete satisfaction whether the classi-
fication made by Dr. Walcott was beyond doubt justified
by the available facts.
Dr. Clark and I examined the material together during
a visit which he made to Washington; but we did not dis-
cuss the classification or the systematic position of the
genera.
After the publication of Dr. Clark’s article, as my ex-
amination of the material had led me to conclusions quite
different from those at which he had arrived, it seemed
advisable to put on record the results of my studies so
that those to whom the material is not accessible may
have, in addition to the published figures, which are won-
derfully good and leave little to be desired, the conclu-
sions of three entirely independent investigators, each
with a very different previous training, and each entirely
uninfluenced by the conclusions arrived at by the others.
Before taking up the discussion of these forms in
detail it is advisable to give a brief outline of the general
principles of deduction by which my conclusions regard-
ing them have been reached.
The characters by which animals are identified are of
two classes, the fundamental, or characters of prime sys-
tematic importance, and the correlative, or characters of
prime practical importance, though often of no system-
atic importance whatever.
In the exceedingly rapid work, often under the most
unfavorable conditions, demanded in the identification of
organisms brought up by the dredge at sea one has no
chance to look for fundamental characters. The general
shape of the organisms, coupled with a few other obvious
features, alone are depended upon. Thus a shell with a
more or less polished surface and perfect bilateral sym-
metry is at once known to be a brachiopod, regardless of
No. 560] CAMBRIAN HOLOTHURIANS 491
whether it possesses a stalk or not; a soft and flabby,
more or less shiny, tubular object, with or without body
processes, is at once identified as a holothurian, no mat-
ter whether tentacles are visible or not, and quite regard-
less of its symmetry. In deep-sea work one soon gets to
know the representatives of the various phyla by char-
acters never mentioned in systematic treatises, and never
even dreamed of by the laboratory student; yet the iden-
tification by these characters after practise is quite as
sure as the identification by the features of real classi-
ficatory significance.
The identification of many fossils calls for essentially
the same mental processes as the rapid identification of
animals brought up by the dredge; one must be prepared
to grasp at once the salient correlative features if the
fundamental characters are obscured. Unfortunately
this method of work has often yielded deplorable results
when applied by paleontologists unacquainted with the
practical side of the work of the marine biologist; but
this is no reason why it should not lead to perfectly re-
liable conclusions when logically applied.
The chief of the correlative characters in any group of
animals is the general body form taken in connection with
the size. Thus in differentiating echinoderms from other
organisms at sea we rely entirely upon size and shape;
there is no time to look for radial symmetry ; we probably
take this in subconsciously, though it may be to a large
extent mentally ignored.
When any member of a group of animals adopts a mode
of life entirely different from that of all the other mem-
bers of the same group we must be prepared to encounter
extraordinary, sudden and unexpected changes in its
organization which are not connected with the more usual
type of organization by any intermediates; and it must
be remembered that such changes affect first of all the
general body form. Among such animals we almost
always find the group characters developed in a most
erratic manner; some structures will be very highly spe-
492 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST (Vou. XLVII
cialized, sometimes specialized far beyond what is seen
in any other member of the group, while others will be
in a very rudimentary or primitive state of development,
or even absent altogether.
The echinoderms differ very abruptly from the crusta-
cean line of descent from which they took their origin
and, similarly, each echinoderm class differs very ab-
ruptly from all the others. We see in all the echinoderms
to-day most perplexing combinations of primitive and
highly specialized characters associated in all sorts of
ways, and this leads us naturally to the assumption that
there was no definite intergrade between the echinoderms
and the barnacles, but that the former sprang from the
latter or, more strictly speaking, from the same phylo-
genetic line which may be traced by easy stages to the
latter, by a broad saltation in which the assumption of
the free habit and the correlated assumption of pentara-
diate symmetry combined to make the existence of inter-
grading forms impossible, while at the same time it
resulted in the formation by the echinoderms, at the very
moment of their origin, of two widely diverse stocks, the
heteroradiate (including the Pelmatozoa, the Echinoidea
and the Holothuroidea) and the astroradiate (including
the Asteroidea and the Ophiuroidea) between which there
are, and can be, no intergrading forms.
Thus in dealing with the echinoderms we must be ever
on the alert to detect sudden saltations. We must also be
prepared to eliminate from our minds all ideas of hypo-
thetical ancestors from which all echinoderms are com-
monly supposed to have been derived, but which probably
never existed; and, along with the hypothetical ancestor
myth, to banish from our thoughts all ideas of funda-
mental echinodermal structures, equally non-existent.
No echinodermal structure is of such fundamental im-
portance in the economy of the animals that it can not be
either profoundly modified or even dispensed with
altogether under special conditions, reverting to a type
more or less characteristic of some other phylum. The
No. 560] CAMBRIAN HOLOTHURIANS 493.
pentaradiate symmetry is often brought forward as a
character of the highest importance; but it is the result
not of a class peculiarity, but of simple mechanics; the
somatic divisions in the echinoderms are marked by lines
of weakness; hence the divisions of the body must be
uneven in number, so that no line of weakness will go
straight through the body, thus subjecting the animal to
danger through a shearing strain; when the somatic divi-
sions are by lines of extra strength, as in the ceelenterates,
the divisions are always equal, as in this case the con-
tinuation of a line of strength directly across the body
gives added rigidity.
We know enough about organic life at the present day
to be somewhat sceptical when new phyla are proposed to
include problematical forms. If we can not allocate an
animal on the basis of some supposedly fundamental
character, or if it falls on the basis of a single character
in a phylum from all the groups in which it differs in all
the others, we ignore that character entirely and take up
another. In every group each character has a definite
and restricted application, beyond the limits of which
it is quite valueless. The echinoderms are commonly said
to be pentaradiate, and the great majority certainly are;
but certain genera, entirely or in part, possess three, four
(like most meduse), six, seven, eight or ten rays; we
recognize them as echinoderms just the same. Specimens
of the genus Limnocnida are commonly pentaradiate;
but we instantly recognize them not as echinoderms, but
as hydromeduse. The echinoderms we say have abund-
ant calcareous deposits in the skin, and often also in the
deeper parts of the body; the genus Pelagothuria has no
trace of any calcareous deposits whatever, but no one
doubts that it is an echi
These few obvious cases are selected from an almost
unlimited choice; they show conclusively that any char-
acter, no matter how fundamental it may be, may sud-
denly become quite worthless, forcing us to depend en-
tirely upon other characters which in other cases are
494 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLVII
more or less ignored. Thus, to take two instances from
the fossil crinoids, in the genus Marsupites the only fea-
ture which can possibly give a clew to its true affinities is
the arm structure, which is that of an ordinary comatu-
lid; and in the allied genus Uintacrinus the arm and pin-
nule structure alone are found to be reliable.
Eldonia.—In Eldonia there are only two structures
upon which we can hope to base our deductions concern-
ing its systematic position: (1) the bell-like general
shape, and (2) the coiled digestive tube with two tentacle
clusters at the anterior end.
1. The bell-like shape suggests the celenterates, and
such forms as Trochosphera or trochophore larve.
The highly specialized digestive tube at once negatives
the supposition that Eldonia may be a celenterate.
Trochosphera has a general form and an internal
structure which is certainly suggestive of Eldonia; but
there are many reasons why it is not possible to connect
the two. In the first place there is the question of animal
mechanics; the size of the members of each group of ani-
mals is limited by physical and mechanical considerations
due to the requirements of fundamental structure, ete.
Thus we do not find butterflies as large as ordinary birds,
nor cetaceans so small as the average fish; their structure
is not adaptable to the limitations imposed by such sizes.
Trochosphera is surrounded by a band of cilia, just below
-= which is the mouth, and below that another band of cilia.
Ciliated bands do not transform into broad body fringes
such as we see in Eldonia; they are more or less uncertain
structures, and are present as ciliated bands, or are absent
altogether. Trochosphera has a powerful retractor mus-
cle attached to the posterior portion of the alimentary
canal; powerful retractor muscles are a feature of all the
rotifers; there is no trace of any retractor muscle in
Eldonia.
In Trochosphera, and in the so-called trochophore
larve, the anus opens at the pole determined by the cili-
ated band as the equator, while the mouth is just below
No. 560] CAMBRIAN HOLOTHURIANS 495
the chief ciliated band. In Eldonia the mouth is the more
central, and there appears to be a possibility that the
anus is on the dorsal surface above the fringed border.
The ciliated bands of Trochosphera have a very definite
connection with the mouth, a connection not evident be-
tween the fringed border of Eldonia and the mouth, the
relationships in the latter being almost exactly like the
relationships between the digestive tube and the ex-
panded brim in such holothurians as Euphronides tan-
neri. Although the superficial resemblance between El-
donia and Trochosphera (including trochophore larve)
is certainly striking, I can not see the slightest reason
for connecting the two; the relation between them is pre-
cisely similar to that between certain of the pteropods
and the nautilus, which, on account of their remarkable
similarity, were for a long while placed in the same
genus.
2. Certain ‘‘worms’’ have a digestive system suggest-
ing that of Eldonia; but such worms are never provided
with oral tentacles, possessing instead a tough protrusible
proboscis; nor do they ever have the digestive tube dif-
ferentiated as in Eldonia; nor do they ever have the body
of a type which, on account of the structure of the body
wall and the general internal anatomy, particularly the -
type of muscular investment, could by any stretch of the
imagination be supposed to assume a bell-like form.
Certain heteroradiate echinoderms, as some holothu-
rians belonging to the family Elpidiide, a few echinoids,
and the (recent) endocyclic crinoids, have a digestive
tube resembling very closely that of Eldonia, and in the
holothurians there are always tentacles about its anterior
end. Moreover, in many of the Elpidiide, as, for instance,
in Euphronides tanneri, the body is entirely surrounded
by a broad brim with marginal lappets, just as it is in
Eldonia.
Judging from all the evidence which we have—and the
specimens of Eldonia are among the most wonderfully
preserved fossils which have ever come to light—Eldonia
496 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLVII
can be nothing else than a heteroradiate echinoderm, and
among the heteroradiate echinoderms a holothurian, in
which class it comes nearest to certain of the Elpidiide.
Affinities of Eldonia.—In Eldonia the body is medusa-
_like, circular, bordered with a broad Euphronides-like
brim of uniform width; the mouth and anus are near
together, the mouth being nearer the center; the general
configuration of the digestive system is very similar to
that seen in the endocyclic crinoids; there are two large
many-branched tentacles, one on either side of the mouth.
Eldonia seems to me to be a pelagic derivative from
some elpidiid type; the body has shortened so that the
mouth and anus have become closely approximated; the
brim surrounding the body has become laterally extended
and uniformly developed, so that a swimming bell has
resulted. Eldonia is therefore an elpidiid holothurian
which has become flattened dorsoventrally and at the
same time laterally expanded into a circular form re-
sembling that of the meduse.
We are familiar with just such a transformation in
the echinoids; Dendraster, Echinarachnius, Arachnoides,
ete., are flattened, circular and disk-like, though derived
from ovoid, globular or more or less spherical types. In
-these the flattening has been in the direction of the radial
symmetry so that the oral pole is at or near the center of
one surface and the aboral pole at or near the center of
the other. In Eldonia the flattening has possibly, though
not certainly, been in a plane at right angles to this so
that the oral pole is at one edge of the circular disk and
the aboral pole at the other. This is only a slight advance
over the conditions seen in Benthodytes typicus, so that
it need occasion no surprise.
The reduction of the number of tentacles in Eldonia to
two possibly indicates a suppression of three of the
radial systems, leaving only two of the original five.
Many of the crinoids show a more or less complete reduc-
tion of two or three of the radial systems; indeed, in
Tetracrinus one is invariably absent.
No. 560] CAMBRIAN HOLOTHURIANS 497
In certain forms among the Comasteride, as, for in-
stance, in Comatula micraster, ambulacral grooves, nerves
and tentacles may be entirely absent from six out of the
ten arms, or from three out of the five rays, leaving, as in
Eldonia, only two of the original five divisions function-
ing normally, and these two may be three times as large
as the others.
If we can assume that the two tentacles of Eldonia in-
dicate a suppression of three of the original five radial
systems, or a carrying out to completion of the condition
already far advanced in many of the Elpidiide, a reason-
able explanation of the structure of Eldonia becomes a
relatively simple matter.
If we take a form like Scytoplanes typicus or Euphro-
nides tanneri and shorten the body so as to bring the
mouth and anus near together, giving the digestive tube
exactly the same shape that it assumes in the so-called
endocyclic crinoids, the two radial muscles would form
a circular band of concentric muscle fibers just beyond
the enteric canal, exactly as we see them in Eldonia.
Ordinarily among the echinoderms the mouth is at one
pole of the radial symmetry and the anus is at the other.
In the recent crinoids the anus has become entirely dis-
sociated from the aboral radial pole and has migrated to
a position near the mouth. It is thus evident that the
connection between the anus and the aboral pole is not
absolutely unchangeable.
The water vascular system centers, in all echinoderms,
in a ring about the esophagus, from which (usually) |
five radial canals are given off. How then can we ac-
count for the small central ring in the center of Eldonia,
far removed from the mouth? The first question to be
answered is whether the arrangement of the water vas-
cular system about the mouth is really fundamental, or
whether it is merely a matter of mechanical convenience
when the mouth happens to be, as it usually is, at or near
one of the apices of the pentamerous symmetry.
Now among the crinoids there are two families, the
498 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vor. XLVII
Comasteridæ and the Uintacrinidæ, in which the mouth,
instead of being as usual in the center of the ventral sur-
face of the disk, is lateral, situated typically on the very
edge of the ventral surface of the disk, between the bases
of two of the arm groups. In these families the tubes
of the water vascular system, above which ambulacral
grooves usually, though not always, run, instead of con-
verging in five large vessels to the circumoral ring lead
from the arms to a large trunk vessel which runs around
the periphery of the disk with the anal tube instead of
the mouth as its center. This large peripheral ring, is
interrupted posteriorly, and the mouth passes through it
anteriorly; but it indicates a tendency for the water vas-
cular system to transform from a ring about the mouth
to a ring about the anal tube, or more correctly, into a
ring about the ventral pole of the body regardless of the
position of the mouth. In this connection it would be
interesting to determine if in the Comasteride the so-
called stone canals were confined to the circumoral ring,
or if they showed a tendency to migrate secondarily
along the peripheral water tube.
With the assumption by Eldonia of the circular form
and the spiral digestive tube the muscles assumed a con-
centric arrangement. Probably at the same time the
water tubes, following the course of the muscles, also at-
tained the form of a peripheral canal, after the same
manner as we see almost consummated in the Comas-
teride. The peripheral water tubes in Eldonia serve
largely as braces to bind the animal together, just as they
serve as braces in the marginal brim of Euphronides
tanneri. This function would, for mechanical reasons,
induce a diminution in the diameter of the central ring,
in order that they might function to the best advantage;
but the muscular ring, in order to preserve a maximum
availability for expansion and contraction, would remain
with the greatest possible diameter. Thus we should
theoretically reach a condition precisely like that seen in
Eldonia; a very large concentric muscular ring, and a -
No. 560] CAMBRIAN HOLOTHURIANS 499
very small, also concentric, apical water vascular ring
with exceedingly long tubes reaching out into the margi-
nal tube feet, fused together into a broad and uniform
marginal brim.
In Eldonia the radial canals so-called are the canals of
the podia transformed into a system of braces, exactly as
they are transformed into a system of braces in Euphro-
nides tanneri, Benthodytes typica, and many similar
forms; in these species, which live supported upon ooze
and have developed a broad brim about their body so
that they will not sink into it, the ring canal of the water
vascular system retains its original position about the
cesophagus, while in Eldonia, which floats free in the
water, and possesses a medusoid body form, the canals
have become enormously elongated and of uniform length
all around, serving as body supports (like the ribs of an
umbrella) instead of merely as supports for an expanded
brim; and, as a necessary result of the change in the
mechanics of the body, the central ring of the water
vascular system has migrated from its original position
about the gullet to an apical position in the center of the
apical portion of the animal, equidistant from the border
on every side.
The entire dissociation of the water vascular system
from the mouth is the most difficult thing to explain in
Eldonia. But, after all, this is not without a parallel. In
the bilaterally symmetrical invertebrates one of the most
fundamental structures is the nerve ring about the cesoph-
agus, consisting of the supracwsophageal ganglion, the
two circumesophageal ganglionic connectives and the -
subesophageal ganglion. The relationship of these
nerves is entirely changed in the crinoids; here we find a
cireumesophageal ring consisting of the supracsopha-
geal ganglion alone, the subesophageal ganglion at the
dorsal pole, with its continuation directly downward at
right angles to the plane of the digestive canal instead of
parallel to and directly beneath it, and the cireumcesopha-
geal ganglionic connectives resolved into numerous nerve
500 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Von XLVII
strands parallel to, instead of passing horizontally
around, the gullet. Surely if such a fundamental re-
arrangement can take place in the nervous system we can
not be surprised in seeing the water vascular system
become entirely dissociated from the mouth.
Pelagic animals tend to become delicate and translu-
cent, and if belonging to groups with a more or less cal-
cified (or chitinous) skeleton, to reduce that skeleton to
a minimum or to dispense with it entirely. Thus the
entire absence of any trace of a skeleton in Eldonia does
not prevent us from suggesting an affinity with the holo-
thurians, more especially as the recent pelagic holothu-
rian Pelagothuria has no trace whatever of calcareous
elements.
Dr. Clark remarks that the oral tentacles of Eldonia
are suggestive of the marginal clusters of Lucernaria
and its allies, or perhaps are not fundamentally different
from those of some rhizostomous meduse. This would
naturally be the case no matter to what group, Eldonia
belonged. The tentacles of Eldonia undoubtedly are sub-
ject to the same mechanical and physical forces as are
those of the pelagic medusæ, and this would be amply
sufficient to induce a strongly marked parallelism, no
matter what their ultimate origin might have been.
The body of Pelagothuria is tubular, with the mouth
at one end and the anal opening at the other; its ali-
mentary canal is in loops (a long-drawn-out spiral) ; the
swimming organ is merely an expansion of the oral disk.
Pelagothuria, therefore, though similarly pelagic, is radi-
cally different from Eldonia, derived from a radically
different stock.
The embryology and metamorphosis of the echino-
derms lead us to believe that they were derived from
phyllopod crustacean ancestry through the barnacles as
a result of the sudden suppression of one half of the body
and the consequent assumption of a circular body form.
Since there are only two tentacles in Eldonia, we might
suggest the remote possibility that Eldonia may have
No. 560] CAMBRIAN HOLOTHURIANS 501
arisen from a form like Scytoplanes typicus by a further
sudden suppression of half of the body and the dropping
out of three of the rays, the rest of the body curving
about so as to form again a circular animal from one
originally pentamerous, though ultimately derived from
bilateral ancestors.
Louisella——No marine animal is known except among
the Elpidiide with a body form resembling that of
Louisella pedunculata. A comparison between this fossil
and such recent species as Scotoplanes insignis shows a
similarity that can not but be more than superficial.
Dr. Clark in speaking of Lowisella says that ‘‘none of
the podia are sufficiently defined to enable one to make
out even the form, let alone the structure, whereas if they
were really like those of Scotoplanes and other elasipods,
their rigidity would have caused them to be as well de-
fined as any part of the body outline.’’ Every one who
has collected specimens of certain of the species of Elpi-
diide knows that they are as delicate and as difficult to
preserve as are many, if not most, meduse; even when
hardened in alcohol the podia of such forms as Deima
pacificum are extremely soft and flabby. If any species
of the group adopted a pelagic habit this character would
naturally be greatly accentuated.
Laggania.—lIt is difficult to see how Laggania cambria
can be interpreted otherwise than as a holothurian of the
elpidiid type, a form related to such species as Bentho-
dytes sanguinolenta, or especially to B. siboge.
Circumstantial Evidence Suggesting the Possible Oc-
currence of the Elpidiide in the Paleozoic.—As I under-
stand the three holothurians from the Middle Cambrian _
described by Dr. Walcott (Eldonia, Laggania and Loui-
sella), they all fall within, or are closely related to, the
family Elpidiide. Now the Elpidiide are preeminently
creatures of the deep sea, and represent possibly the
most strictly abyssal group to be found among marine
organisms. The Siboga dredged one species in 31 fath-
oms, and the first species to be described was found in
t502 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Voi. XLVII
50 fathoms in the Arctic Ocean; but the great majority
of the species oceur below 1,000 fathoms, extending
downward to 2,900 fathoms.
Now in forms confined to the deep sea, or to exceed-
ingly high latitudes, or subjected to widely varying tem-
peratures or salinities, or occurring in highly saline,
alkaline or acid water, or under unnatural conditions
generally, the geological age of the maximum virility of
the genera or families may be guessed by the amount of
difference between the chemical and physical surround-
ings among which they now live, and the conditions ob-
taining slightly below low-tide mark on a tropical coast
bathed by ocean water free from any admixture of fresh,
and containing the normal proportion, in amount and in
kind, of salts. Such forms as Artemia, occurring in salt
pans, Xiphosurus, Tachypleus and Carcinoscorpius
(‘‘Limulus’’) occurring in more or less foul and muddy
situations, and the Elpidiide, characteristic of great
depths, we therefore suspect of being relics of the earli-
est geologic times, representing what were once the domi-
nant types in their respective groups, possessed of such
vigor and adaptability that, forced by internal specific
‘pressure, due to increase in the number of the individu-
als, they were able to accommodate themselves to these
‘conditions. When these types began to wane new and
vigorous forms arose in the tropical littoral which extir-
-pated them from all the more desirable locations, allow-
ing them to persist only in such unnatural situations as
-those into which they had intruded when in the prime
of their vigor.
There is not the slightest reason for supposing that
any markedly new animal type ever originated in the
: deep sea, or under conditions differing much from those
found just below the low-water mark.
If we are ever to discover any recent representatives
of such groups as the trilobites, the eurypterids, the blas-
toids or the cystids we shall find them not in the tropical
or temperate littoral, but living under some highly ab-
No. 560] CAMBRIAN HOLOTHURIANS -503
normal conditions, in the deep sea, in highly saline, alka-
line or acid water, in the regions of excessive cold or ex-
cessive heat (such as hot lakes), in stagnant pools in the
ocean bed, in brackish underground lakes or streams, or
in comparable situations; but apparently none of these
groups were highly adaptable; though very abundant,
they flourished through comparatively small extremes
in their physical and chemical environment, from which
subsequent vigorous types with the same or a greater
economic radius promptly ousted them.
The disappearance of a group in a given horizon, it
should be pointed out, does not at all mean that the group
really vanished at that time; it means merely that at
that time it disappeared from the littoral. Most groups
undoubtedly persisted long after they ceased to occupy
a habitat which is now a geological stratum, under locally
unfavorable conditions, finally dying out at a time long
subsequent to the last record in the rocks.
Not only does the deep-water habitat of the Elpidiidæ
betoken a very ancient origin, but the group to-day is evi-
dently senescent. The extraordinary shapes assumed by
most of the species can only be interpreted as a result
of an explosion of the characters induced by extreme
age.
Thus, reasoning backward from a study of the recent
fauna alone, we should expect to find the Elpidiidæ and
Artemia, or very closely allied forms, in the early paleo-
zoic rocks, representing the littoral in’ the age when
they were at the height of their ascendancy, and we
should be greatly surprised should they appear in any
post-paleozoic formation.
Lorenzinia—Lorenzinia, mentioned by Dr. Clark, is
undoubtedly the cast of part of a medusa, as any one
acquainted with the literature on the fossil meduse can
see.
Mackenzia.—The two specimens assigned to the genus
Mackenzia appear to me to be undoubtedly mud-living
actinians of the family Edwardsiide, closely related to
504 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
the Edwardsia, for the following reasons. In a semi-
desiccated synaptid the longitudinal lines marking the
longitudinal muscles become gradually obsolete, and the
digestive tube, more or less distended with inorganic
matter, becomes more and more prominent, so that finally
we see an elongated worm-like object with a prominent
digestive tube which bears a collar about the anterior
end; longitudinal markings become obliterated and lost
in the irregular foldings which take place, while these
also obscure the other more flaccid internal organs; a
soft mud-living actinian, on the other hand, is reinforced
internally by numerous mesenteries; on desiccation
these tend to lie flat, and to raise the body wall at the
lines of attachment slightly, giving a fluted or pleated
appearance, just as is shown in Mackenzia.. No trace of
a tubular digestive tube is visible in Mackenzia, nor is
there any other internal differentiation, but there are
prominent, regular and numerous parallel pleats; these
pleats are four in number in the upper part of the body,
but apparently five in the lower part, so that there are
probably eight mesenteries represented; there appear to
have been sixteen tentacles, two in each intermesenterial
space; the contracted lower portion of the body suggests
the physa of Edwardsia; it is probable, therefore, that
Mackenzia is an actinian, and that it should be placed in
the family Edwardsiide near the genus Edwardsia.
Some of the preserved specimens of Edwardsia farinacea
in the National Museum collection are almost identical
with the specimen of Mackenzia costalis figured by Dr.
Walcott, the similarity of the contracted anterior portion
of the body being especially striking.
Systematic Position of the Genera Discussed.—When
a biologist, especially a zoogeographer, undertakes to
deal with fossils, he becomes of necessity somewhat of
an iconoclast. The faunas of the several horizons
represent to him not so many distinct and separate suc-
cessive faunas each derived directly from that preceding,
but so many distinct faunal regions, each equidistant
No. 560] CAMBRIAN HOLOTHURIANS 505
from the center, the center representing the phylogenetic
starting point of organic life. In certain limited genera
or in certain small groups an extraordinary progressive
development is undoubtedly traceable through a greater
or lesser extent of geologic time; but in general there is
a balance between the organisms in each horizon which
is strikingly similar to the balance between the organ-
isms in every other horizon and between the organisms
in each of the present faunal regions, so that, taking into
consideration the circumstances under which the animals
in each horizon lived, we are not able to say with any
degree of accuracy that, phylogenetically speaking, any
one fauna, zoogeographie or paleontologic, is in toto
more primitive than any other.
Keeping this in mind and speaking solely as a biolo-
gist, I would suggest the following disposition of the
genera described by Dr. Walcott:
Holothuroidea
Family Elpidiide
Genus Laggania
Genus Louisellat
Family Eldoniide (near the Elpidiide)
Genus Eldonia
Zoantharia
Family Edwardsiide
Genus Mackenzia
Summary.—Eldonia is a free-swimming holothurian,
and is most closely related to the species of the family
Elpidiide.
In body form alone does Eldonia resemble a medusa;
this general resemblance may therefore safely be dis-
regarded as a parallelism resulting from a similar pela-
gic habit.
In the general shape of the body as well as in the
course of the digestive tube Eldonia approaches Trocho-
sphera (and trochophore larve); but the enormous dis-
* Both of these genera can probably be referred, with a reasonable degree
of probability, to subfamilies in this family; but it seems best to leave
them, for the present at least, unassigned.
506 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLVII
crepancy in size, the broad fringe about the body, the
large tentacles on either side of the mouth, the absence
of muscles of the group type characteristic of the rotifers,
and the submarginal anus, seem to negative the idea that
the two can be in any way related.
The medusoid body form, the absence of a protrusible
proboscis and the presence of a large branched tentacle
on either side of the mouth appear to offer conclusive
evidence that Eldonia can not be a ‘‘worm.”’
The digestive tube of Eldonia resembles that of the
heteroradiate echinoderms, and especially that of certain
‘holothurians; the tentacles on either side of the mouth
suggest an affinity with the holothurians; the radial
canals, leading to a central ring, are comparable to the
radial canals and the central ring of the holothurians;
the broad circular muscle about the body suggests a
modified longitudinal holothurian muscle, and is of the
group type characteristic of the echinoderms; the broad
brim about the body is strikingly similar to the brim
developed in certain elpidiid holothurians, such as
Euphronides tanneri and Scytoplanes typicus. A pelagic
holothurian is known as an inhabitant of the recent seas;
though very different in origin and in affinities from
Eldonia, it demonstrates that a pelagic habit is not im-
possible in the group. The species of the family Elpidii-
dæ are preeminently inhabitants of the deep sea; this
suggests that the fossil representatives of the family
should be found in very early geological formations.
Therefore Eldonia is a pelagic holothurian, related to
the species of the family Elpidiide.
No marine animals are known outside of the holothu-
rian family Elpidiide which have a body form like that
of Louisella pedunculata in all its details; but this spe-
cies agrees in every particular with one or other of the
species in that family. We can not, therefore, escape the
conclusion that Louisella pedunculata should find a place
in the family Elpidiide along with all the recent animals
which in any way resemble it.
No. 560] CAMBRIAN HOLOTHURIANS 507
By exactly the same reasoning Laggania cambria is
assigned to a position in the same group.
The type specimen of Mackenzia costalis shows a
pleated structure which can only be interpreted as due
to longitudinal mesenteries, probably eight in number;
there appear to have been sixteen processes around the
mouth which probably indicate tentacles retracted before
preservation; the distal portion of the body resembles
closely the distal portion of the body in the genus
_Edwardsia. Thus, as Mackenzia costalis presents char-
acters not found outside of the Zoantharia, and in that
group peculiar to the family Edwardsiide, it seems
necessary to assign it to a position in the family Ed-
wardsiide, near the genus Edwardsia.
SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION
VIABILITY AND COUPLING IN DROSOPHILA
In the course of work done in the college year, 1911-12, under
the direction of Dr. Castle, at the Harvard Zoological Laboratory,
Cambridge, Mass., an experiment was performed to test the rela-
tive viability of the red-eyed and the white-eyed stock of Droso-
phila ampelophila Loew. The white-eyed race was obtained from
Professor Morgan, while the red-eyed material was reared from
banana exposed near the laboratory.
A large glass jar well supplied with fermenting banana and
tightly covered with a double layer of closely woven cheese-cloth
was used for the experiment. Five pairs of flies from the red-
eyed stock and five pairs from the white-eyed stock were intro-
duced on November 29, 1911. After a few weeks the jar was
well supplied with flies of both eye-colors, but the red-eyes con-
siderably surpassed the whites in number. Fresh food was in-
troduced once and on February 12 a number of the flies were
drawn off and counted,
Let us consider here what the expectation of the ratio between
reds and whites would be, after the culture had been running
indefinitely. Assuming equal viability of the two races, we should
expect equality of reds and whites among the males, and three
reds to one white among the females. This appears from the
following combinations based upon Morgan’s formule. The mu-
tation producing white eyes, being recessive to the wild type, has
been denoted by a small letter as suggested by Castle.?
Red female gives gametes x and z.
White female gives gametes wg and wz.
Red male gives gametes æ and —.
White male gives gametes wx and —.
The combinations will then be as follows:
2wr—=2 white males, la «x
2x —= 2? red males, 2 wr «
1 we we =1 white female.
***Simplification of Mendelian Formule,’? AMERICAN NATURALIST,
XLVII, 555, March, 1913.
\= 8 red females,
508
No.560] SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION 509
It is evident upon inspection of these formule that although the
red females have gained over the whites, this is due solely to the
formation of two heterozygotes where at first we had a pure red
and a pure white. Since the ratio of the three types of gametes
does not change, we may expect the above recorded ratios of red
and white flies to persist indefinitely.
Let us now observe the results of counts and compare these
with the theoretical ratio. The count of February 12 gave 129
red males, 202 red females, 21 white males and 3 white females.
Instead of equality in the males, we have 6 reds to 1 white, and
instead of 3 to 1 in the females, we have 67 reds to 1 white.
On March 13 flies were again drawn off from the jar and
counted, giving 303 red males, 514 red females, 36 white males
and 2 white females. The males are now 8.42 reds to 1 white and
the females 257 reds to 1 white.
On April 12 a count showed 1,341 red males, 1,363 red fe-
males, 95 white males and 24 white females, or 14.1 reds to 1
white among the males, and 56.8 reds to 1 white among the fe-
males.
In general these results show that the reds are outrunning the
whites. Disregarding sex we expect a ratio of 5 reds to 3 whites
to persist in the population. On February 12 we get 14 to 1; on
March 13, 21.5 to 1 and on April 12, 22.7 to 1. On April 12 there
are more white females than would be expected, an irregularity
which can apparently be explained only by chance. The great
excess of females in the first two counts probably denotes that the
lethal factor clearly demonstrated by Morgan? was present in the
stock and the equality of the sexes in the last count denotes that
the lethal factor has been bred out.
Among the flies examined in the last count were a few reds in
which the eyes were reduced to about one fourth the normal diam-
eter, and also a spotted-eyed fly which was not counted in the
numbers recorded. The latter had the right eye red with a white
patch four ommatidia in diameter near the vertex, and the left
eye white with a red spot eight to twelve ommatidia in diameter
with a few smaller red spots below it near the posterior margin.
Later examinations of the culture were made in the hope of ob-
taining a spotted-eye fly alive, but these were without success.
***The Explanation of a New Sex Ratio in Drosophila,’’ Science, N. £.,
XXXVI, 934, November, 1912.
510 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
Small-eyed flies were obtained from the same stock and further
work is now being done with these.
The association of the differential factor between colored and
white eyes, w, with the differential factor between long and minia-
ture wings, m, was tested. Matings were made between white-
shorts and red-longs, and between white-longs and red-shorts and
in both cases the long-red female offspring were paired to short-
white males. In this way the F, progeny gave directly a meas-
ure of the classes of gametes produced by the long-red F, fe-
males, except as they may have been affected by differences of
viability. When white-shorts were mated with red-longs, the fe-
male offspring were of composition, wmz—a, giving excess of
white-shorts and red-longs over the other two possible combina-
tions; and when white-longs were mated with red-shorts, the fe-
male offspring were of composition, wr—mz, giving excess of
white-longs and red-shorts.
Daughters of white-shorts by red-longs gave 3,371 red-longs,
1,136 red-shorts, 1,571 white-longs and 2,064 white-shorts.
Positive association of w and m is given by the equation
red-longs + white-shorts __ 5,435
red-shorts + white-longs 2,707
Greater viability of the longs is shown by the equation
aa 2
longs 4,942 _
shorts 60000
Greater viability of the reds is shown by the equation
reds 4,50
whites 23,6355 17
Daughters of white-longs by red-shorts gave 1,047 red-longs,
1,116 red-shorts, 1,651 white-longs, 671 white-shorts.
Negative association of w and m is given by the equation
red-longs + white-shorts __ AS goes 0.62
red-shorts + white-longs 2,767 © 97
According to previous work on these factors this equation
should have given .0.50, and we may suppose that larger num-
bers would have corrected this discrepancy.
Greater viability of the longs is shown by the equation
longs __ 2,698
ane a e
No. 560] SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION 511°
In this case the whites appear in excess of the reds.
reds _. 2,163
whites 2,322
Dividing the sum of all the reds bred by the sum of all the whites
bred we get an excess of reds—6,670 : 5,957 — 1.12.
These counts add nothing new to the theory of association, but
are in agreement with Morgan’s ratios.
== 0.931.
P. W. WHITING
BUSSEY INSTITUTION
A DISCUSSION OF THE RESULTS OBTAINED BY
CROSSING ZEA MAIS L. (MAIS DJAGOENG)
(—REANA LUXURIANS DUR.—TEOSINTE)
AND EUCHLÆNA MEXICANA SCHRAD*
THE author prefaces his discussion of the hybrids of maize and
teosinte with a minute study of the male and female spikelets of
both plants, showing the similarity between them.
After reviewing the work of Harshberger with the cross maize
8 X teosinte 2, he takes up the result of his own reciprocal cross,
maize 2 X teosinte g. He shows that the first generation hy-
brids by the latter cross were uniform and agree closely with
those from the reciprocal cross made by Harshberger.
The plants of the second hybrid generation of the cross, maize
2 X teosinte J form a diverse series, of which the different indi-
viduals differ widely in stooling and branching ability, as well as
in the structure of the ear. A complete reversion, however, to
either one of the parent types never occurs. The series tends
more towards the maize than the teosinte type, and it is shown
that associated with the stronger development of the maize type,
is a reduction in the number of branches, a reduction in the
number of ears per plant, a less horny texture of the axis and of
the calyx-glumes, and a reduction in the depth of the pits of the
axis. The nature of the diversity in the second hybrid genera-
tion argues against the absolute purity of the sex cells.
“CA Discussion of the Results Obtained by Crossing Zea mais L, (Mais
Djagoeng) (-Reana luxurians Dur. -teosinte) and Euchlena mexicana
Schrad,’’ by J. E. van der Stok, in Teysmannia, Vol. 21, 1910, p. 47-59.
The translation upon which this abstract is based was made by Karle Lotsy,
Bureau of Plant Industry, U. S. Dept. of Agriculture, Washington, D. C.
512 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
Another cross was made with two varieties of Java maize,
Madoera and Menado, using pollen from the first hybrid of the
maize X teosinte cross. The resulting plants varied widely re-
garding the stooling ability and structure of the ears. This is
not surprising in view of the inequality of the sex cells of the
hybrid.
Seed from the second generation hybrids were sown and that
again from the resulting plants, thus securing fourth generation
hybrids. These hybrids (fourth generation) while differing
widely from each other, remained within the limits of the
most different types which appeared in the second generation
hybrids. The practical result of these crosses, maize X teosinte,
are not very satisfying. The resulting hybrids are far inferior
to teosinte for fodder, and although the seed can be more easily
harvested from the hybrids than from teosinte, it is not nearly
so valuable as that from good varieties of maize.
The author closes by calling attention to the fact that teosinte
is immune from the chlorosis disease of maize which is very prev-
alent in Java, but the hybrids of maize and teosinte showed no
decrease in sensitiveness to the disease.
Mary G. Lacy
BUREAU OF PLANT INDUSTRY,
U. S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE,
WASHINGTON, D. C
The
American
Naturalist
intended for pasioen and books, etc., intended for review should be
MSS
sent to the pnt of THE AM
hort articles saa
ERICAN NATURALIST, Garrison-on- Peer hide: York.
summaries of researc
work bear on th
problems of organic evolution are especially welcome, and will be given priteni
in publication.
ndrea reprints of spess are supplied to authors free of charge.
ne hu
Further reprints will be supplied a
tions and tate atma should be sent to the pa
ents
The
oreign postage is and
The ch mae for siege prt is
THE 2 SCIENCE PRESS
Lancaster, Pa.
Garrison, N. Y.
NEW YORK: Sub-Station 84
Entered as second-class matter, agen 2, 1908, at the
Post Office at Lancaster, Pa., under the Act of
ngress of March 8, 1879.
FOR SALE
ARCTIC, ICELAND and GREENLAND
BIRDS’ SKINS,
Well peor Low Prices
rticulars of
e G. DINESEN. be Collecto
usavik, North foalann: Via colons epaarie
BUTTERFLY-HUNTING IN
MANY LANDS
Notes of a Fieid Naturatist
By George B. Longstaff, M.A., M.D. (Oxon.),
synch President Entomological Society, London. To
chare added Translations of Papers by Fritz Müller
on he Scent-Organs of Butterflies and Moths; w
a Note by E. B. Poulton, D. Sc, F.R.S pi, th 16
Plates (7 ee a= 8vo, pp. XXT 28. $7.
(Postage 22 cents.)
‘Interesting descriptions of the general features. of
the countries visited, their history, geography, flora
a inhabitants ill appeal as much to
nterested in travel as to the naturalist, as itis
PR tg reading. . It is the kind of book
elps make E and we can’t- have too
— of them. The Appendix consists of
Translations of valuable papers by Fritz Muller, and
is very useful and indispensable for those not under-
Standing the original lan nguage, There is much to
— and nothing to condemn in the work, and it is
si Valuable addition to the popular works on natural
istory and travel.’?’—Eniom ological Nev
Longmans, Green, & Co.
443 Fourth Ave. New
TENTH EDITION.
THE MICROSCOPE,
an introduction to Mic troi ste and to His tology:
M
by Simon HEN AGE, of Cornell University. Ove
350 large octavo pages and ince 250 oan ures in this Ain
and fully revised editi Price $2.00, postpaid.
COMSTOCK PUBLISHING CO., ithaca, N. Y.
FINE LAND SHELLS
I have in stock and for sale eur ten thousard species
of land ja also a very good sto a l] are
led.
curately labe Iam pre Sp
lustrating every y pone o of the broot Tma) ro ri all
countries and islands. A fine illustr ated klet on the
beautiful shells of the went dp and other cire
hy — free. ctly scientifi ca
ction during the S
mer umer on giin same basis as as
a Literatgre, Sere
The American Naturalist
A Monthly Journal, established in 1867, sonar to the Advancement of the ese 28 Sciences
with Special Reference to the
tors of Organic Evolution and Her
CONTENTS OF THE FEBRUARY NUMBER
Adaptations in Animal Reactions. Professor G. H.
Adaptation from the Point of View = the Physi-
ologist. cee ronment Mathew:
soft
CONTENTS OF THE MARCH NUMBER
i ae ae and Species-forming of Ecto-para-
ofessor Vernon Lyman Kellogg.
Il. Castration a T R to the Secondary Sexual
Sharac of Bro Legh D.
Go
IL simplifeation ve Epe Formulæ. Profes-
IV. Pipa and Titer rare: Some Recent Advances
rate Paleontology. Professor Roy
CONTENTS OF THE APRIL NUMBER
Alpheus Hyatt and his ee of Research. Dr.
Robert Tracy Jack
ee of Teratological Derdian in Nicotiana
n Theories of Heredity. Orland E. White.
Shorter titan and Discussion: Heredity ina Par-
thenogenetic Ees, James P. Kelly. The
Himalayan Rab bit Case, with Some Consider-
Saran aar A: d Interspecific
Hyb Dr. Q Cc cian (?}
Fish Remains in Colorado. ‘Professor T. D. A
Notes and Literature: Some Recent Advances in
Vertebrate Paleontology. Dr. Roy L. Moodie,
CONTENTS OF THE MAY NUMBER
Inheritance of Mamme in Duroc Jersey Swine. Pro-
fessor Edward N. Wentworth.
Natural and Artificial ae se naga the Genus
Nicotiana, Richard Wellington.
moore Miekan Lan Discussion: Simplified Mendel-
Professor R. A. Emdeson, The
rove
Notes and Literature: The Depth of ‘the Ocean. Dr.
Alfred G. Mayer. The Gr owth a Grong in the
Animal Kingdom. Professo nnings.
CONTENTS OF THE JUNE NUMBER
E PAT ot Tricolor in aang nt = H. D:
d Professor T. H. Mo
II Ati aS Determiners in Radica stay Experi-
mental Analysis. Professor H. S. Jennings.
HI. Clonal Variation in Pectinatella. Annie P,
e po
IV. Shorter Articles and Discussion: 8implieity
Versus Adequacy in Mendelian Formula,
Professor T. H. Morgan. The Possible Origin
of Mutations in Somatic Cells. Professor R.
V. Notes and Literature : Valuation of the Sea,
Professor Chas. C. Adams.
CONTENTS OF THE JUNE NUMBER
Doctrines held as Vitalism. Professor H. 5. Jennings:
The oma of the Barred Plumage Pattern in the
White Leghorn Breed of Fowls. Dr. Philip B.
aatey.
Protozoa at Yale. Professor A. R. Middleton.
shot on ee hyology. President David Starr
Jord
mart eras 35 Cents
TURALIS
T wi anll La ent to x
Yearly Subscription, $4.00
for four months for One Dollar
_THE SCIENCE PRESS
‘Garrison, N. Y
84: NEW YORK Lancaster, Pae
en
The American Journal of Science
Established by Benjamin Silliman in 1818
The Leading Scientific Journal in the United States
Devoted to the Physical and N atural Sciences, with special reference to
__ Physics, and Chemistry on the one hand, and to Geology and Miron
WM. M. DAVIS
of New
; its second
a@ Ten- Volume Indexes, V X XI-XX, fourth series, price one dollar. Address
The Aiea Journal of Science
New Haven, Conn.
University Control
By J. MoKrEN CATTELL, Professor of Psychology i in Columbia University
holding Academic Positions and Articles by Joszrm Jasrrow, Gzorcs T. Lapp, Jonn J. Sravenson, J. s
CautcutTon, J. McKeen CATTELL, Gmoram M. STRATTON, Srzwart Parton, Jonn Jay CHAPMAN, JAMES
Munros and Jacos GOULD SCHURMAN.
A great variety of questions concerning general university ađministration are dealt with in an original and
—Ni
ig gen her re and examples are taken from Professor Cattell’s informed and thorough discussion ahr
subject of university control, a mjek upon which he has had much to say of late, finding occasion for ca
eriticism of oe American conditions, and standing as the champion of an academic dem and a teach
SeS which a man may enter without forfeiting his self-respect.—The a ace
and paragraphs that beto! expert, mind, the ——
Fae prey tell us that a new day i is about seg tase in een eee writing.—The Boston E vening Transcript.
SCIENCE AND EDUCATION |
A series of volumes for the promotion of scientific research and educational aiies
VOLUME I. The Foundations of Science. By H. Porncar#. Containing the authorized teanelsir®
by Georges Beocom Haxsrap of Science and Hypothesis,” “‘The Value of Seica and “Science
and Method.” - In Press. J n
VOLUME II. Medical Sheu aai Reecstion. By Riemarp M. Psarcm, Wri1am H. Weron, W. —
Howsun, Frawxum P. Maru, Leweuiys F. Banger, Canis S. Minor, W. B. Cannon, W. T
COUNCILMAN, THEOBALD Sura, G. N. Srewarr, C. M, Jackson, E. P. Lron, James B. HERRICK, Jons
M. Dovson, C. R. Barben, W. Oputis, 8. J. P s W. W. Keen, Hennar H.
| SON, CHRISTIAN k
VOLUME III. University Control, Now Ready. ec ie: rine ee
GARRISON, N. Y. JHE SCIENCE PRESS | LANCASTER, PA.
z ; eee eo NEW YORK .
THE
AMERICAN NATURALIST
Vout. XLVII September, 1913 No. 561
THE NATURAL HISTORY OF THE NINE-
BANDED ARMADILLO OF TEXAS
PROFESSOR H. H. NEWMAN
THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO
For some years past the writer has been engaged in a
study of various phases of the biology of the Texas
armadillo and has published a number of papers, some
of them in collaboration with J. T. Patterson and some of
them alone, dealing with matters of development, cytol-
ogy, sex and heredity. There now appears to be a
demand for a brief, non-technical summary, giving the
gist of the findings discussed in detail in these papers.
The present account will furnish such a summary and
will in addition deal with certain matters not yet
published.
NoMENCLATURE AND AFFINITIES
In the publications thus far issued the armadillo of
Texas has been referred to under various generic titles
(Dasypus, Tatusia and Tatu) and it would be well to
come to a final decision as to nomenclature. The system-
atists seem to have finally settled upon the name Dasypus
novemcinctus texanus. They recognize two other sub-
Species of this form in North America, viz., D. novem-
cinctus fenestratus, the common Mexican ETAR and
D. novemcinctus hoplites, a type described by Allen from
the hills of Grenada. These three subspecies are prob-
ably no more than local varieties of which many others
could no doubt be discovered were one inclined to make
513
514 - THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou.XLVII
a careful survey of the range of the species. There is
searcely a doubt that the North American armadillos are
all derivatives of the Peba armadillo (Dasypus novem-
cinctus) of South America, a species of wide range,
occurring from Panama to Paraguay. The mulita of the
Argentine and Kappler’s armadillo of Surinam were
formerly classified as species of Dasypus, but the former
is now Cryptophractus hybridus and the latter Tatusia
kappleri. Nothing is known about the development of
the latter, but the preliminary paper of Fernandez shows
that the mulita is strikingly like our species in the details
of polyembryonic development. Such a fundamental re-
semblance would seem to indicate that the two species
are very closely related and should be classed in the same
genus. About a dozen other species of armadillo,
assigned to several other genera, are native to South
America. About their natural history little is known.
RANGE, DISTRIBUTION AND FUTURE OF THE
ARMADILLO IN TEXAS
In his ‘‘Biological Survey of Texas’’ Bailey (1905)
states that
The armadillos are strietly Lower Sonoran, but in the rough country
between Rock Springs and Kerrville they range fairly into the edge of
the Upper Sonoran Zone. As a rule they do not extend east of the
semiarid or mesquite region, nor to any extent into the extremely arid
region west of the Pecos, but oceupy approximately the semiarid Lower
Sonoran region of Texas north to near latitude 33°.
Bailey lists many localities from which armadillos
have been taken or authentically reported. To this list
I should like to add the following localities, which I have
visited and from which I have obtained considerable
numbers of specimens: Boerne (over 100), Comfort
(nearly 200), Fredericksberg (about 40), Kerrville
(about 25), Ingram (90), Helotes (3). Many of those
reported from Boerne, Comfort and Ingram were
brought from distances of twenty miles or more. At the
towns of Boerne and Comfort we find a flourishing
No. 561] THE NINE-BANDED ARMADILLO 515
industry in which the armadillo furnishes the raw mate-
rial. Many thousands of the adult animals are slaugh-
tered annually for their armor, which is shaped into
baskets and sold all over the world as curios. Arma-
dillo hunting has come to be a recreation and a source of
additional income for large numbers of young American
and Mexican farmers. When they come to town to sell
produce and purchase supplies they bring also many
armadillo baskets which they have learned to make in an
expert fashion and for which there is a ready market.
One dealer with whom I am well acquainted claims to
have shipped no less than 40,000 baskets during the last
Six years. At least two other firms have been almost
equally active. In spite of this extensive slaughter the
animals seem to be increasing in numbers, for I had no
difficulty in obtaining in about two weeks nearly two
hundred pregnant females. Those used in my work
would have been slaughtered for their armor alone, so I
felt no compunction about destroying so many unborn
young. Hunters and dealers generally have the idea
that the range of the armadillo is extending rapidly
Fig. 1 eis of a living armadillo showing the complete armor and t
usual resting attitude. The head is usually withdrawn between the two flaps a
the shoulder ee when the pret is feeding in the thickets
516 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou.XLVII
northward and eastward. There seems to be no reason
to doubt that the species is multiplying and spreading,
for I have it on good authority that in the regions where
it is now most plentiful it was almost unknown 20 years
ago. Its range is, however, strictly circumscribed by
definite ecological conditions as I shall proceed to show.
Ecotocy anp HABITS
The armadillo spends its life on the defensive and its
defensive equipment consists of structural and func-
tional adjustments to a very special environment. Of
the structural adaptations the armor (Fig. 1) is the most
obvious, but its use is not what it is commonly supposed
to be. While the carapace doubtless serves partially to
protect the animal when it is attacked by large car-
nivors, the fact that dogs often bite through the bony
plates and seriously damage the shell shows that for this
type of enemy the protection is very inadequate. In
fact it is the experience of hunters that, when closely
pressed by dogs, the harassed animal turns on the back
and strikes most effectively with the powerful claws.
The armor has a much more important significance in
that it enables the animal to invade the dense, thorny
thickets of cactus and chapperal, etc., that characterize
its normal habitat. When pursued it is possible for the
armadillo to plunge headlong into a mass of thorny
vegetation that would be totally inaccessible for an un-
armed enemy. Then too they can penetrate all sorts of
underbrush in search of insect food without danger from
thorns or spines. In some regions of the country the
animals take advantage of the rough and rocky char-
acter of the hillsides and river banks, seeking shelter
from enemies by retreating into holes and crevices among
the rocks that are just large enough to admit them but
too small for their enemies. Armadillos living in these
regions have the armor much worn from rubbing and
scraping against the angles and sharp edges encountered
in the rocky passages of their retreats. If one is able to
No. 561] THE NINE-BANDED ARMADILLO 517
reach the tail of an armadillo concealed in a rock pile the
animal braces the armored back against the roof or sides
of the hole and holds so hard that the tail will come off
before the body can be moved. Thus in divers ways the
armor serves a protective function other than the pri-
mary one connoted by the name. Still further, there can
be no doubt but that the carapace serves as a reducer of
surface evaporation, an important factor in making life
possible in the semiarid regions, for there are many
periods of extreme drought during which it must be of
vital importance to conserve moisture. It is possible,
indeed probable, that the armor is phylogenetically older
than the particular conditions comprising the present
environment of the armadillo, hence we can scarcely
claim that the armor is in any strict sense an adapta-
tion. It seems far more likely that in the exercise of its
prerogative of choice of habitat the species has selected
an environment affording an unpreempted food area
and an adequate shelter from enemies. ~
The armadillo is preeminently insectivorous, although
in captivity it appears practically omnivorous. Stomach
examinations of freshly caught wild animals show the re-
mains of insects, chiefly ants, together with much earth
and more or less vegetation. In captivity they eat meat
of all kinds, even exhibiting canibalistic propensities
under certain conditions, for when shipped in crates or
boxes the stronger ones kill and disembowel the weaker,
and mothers devour their own new-born offspring.
Hunters and basket dealers justify the extensive slaugh-
ter of the armadillo by giving to the animal a bad name.
It is said, on how good authority I am unable to state,
that the ‘‘’dillo’’ is a robber of newly made graves and a
destroyer of vast numbers of the eggs of such ground
birds as wild turkeys and quails. They are also said
Seriously to damage the grazing value of certain terri-
tories by rooting up quantities of grass. I am of the
opinion that much of the destruction of bird eggs and
of grass might more justly be blamed upon the Texas
518 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
peccary, which has a range quite similar to that of
Dasypus.
Armadillos are essentially nocturnal in habit, although
one may encounter them at dusk. On warm nights they
spend their time rooting about in the dry leaves and
ground vegetation after the manner of hogs. Their
grunting, snuffing noises are heard at some distances on
quiet evenings. The strong burrowing claws are used
to a considerable extent in digging for food, but their
primary function is that of burrowing. Burrows may
be for temporary or permanent shelter. A permanent
burrow may be dug six or seven feet deep with a chamber
at the bottom about two feet in diameter, which is
filled loosely with dried leaves and grass. This is the
winter retreat of the armadillo, where he undergoes
partial hibernation during the periodic cold spells.
Buried in the grass and leaves, the animal defies its worst
enemy, cold. In this connection it may be said that there
is probably no mammal so sensitive to cold as the arma-
dillo. In captivity they shiver at temperatures when
other mammals are warm, and often die during the night
if insufficiently bedded down with straw. Their further
spread northward will no doubt be blocked by tempera-
ture barriers. Temporary burrows are made as a retreat
from enemies when other shelter is unavailable. Hunters
claim that an armadillo will dig a hole in ordinary soil
in a minute or two, disappearing even after having been
sighted.
They seem to have their regular haunts and do not
ordinarily go far from their burrows or caves. From the
smoothly worn mouths of these retreats beaten paths lead
to thickets, pools and streams. Bailey has seen evidences
that they, after the manner of pigs, enjoy a mud bath.
The trail of the tail along the paths is a ready means of
distinguishing the haunts of the ‘‘’dillo,’’ for it leaves a
mark like that of a dragging rope.
In captivity the animals display the utmost gentle-
ness and tractability so long as one does not attempt to
No. 561] THE NINE-BANDED ARMADILLO 519
lay hands upon them. If one attempts to hold one of
them by the shell he will realize how strong and active
is its resistance, for it bucks vigorously like a broncho
and throws off all holds. The tail is the weak point in its
defence, as it offers a perfect handhold, but, even when
grasped by the tail, it furnishes an interesting struggle
by violently rotating the body and often succeeds in
twisting free from the enemy’s grasp. Then one is sur-
prised at the speed of which the animal is capable, its
galloping gait being apparently unhindered by its
armored cuirass.
Of the senses, that of smell is the only one upon which
the animals seem to rely. When feeding they frequently
raise the snout on high and sniff the air in all directions.
The eyes are rudimentary and practically useless. If
disturbed an armadillo will charge off in a straight line
and is as apt to run into a tree trunk as to avoid it. That
the hearing is not at all keen is evidenced by the fact
that one may approach them on the leeward side even
if the approach is somewhat noisy.
BREEDING HABITS
Information as to mating and care of young has come
indirectly through hunters, among whom there is a con-
siderable degree of consensus of statement. It is claimed
that armadillos pair for life or at least for the season.
It is very common to capture a male and a female to-
gether or to dig a pair out of a burrow. The period of
cestus comes early in the autumn, extending over a vari-
able period of time. A large proportion of the females
taken in October show the early stages of pregnancy, but
early stages have been found as late as December. It
seems probable that the young ‘‘does’’ of the previous
Season’s crop reach maturity late in the autumn, for the
largest females are almost invariably pregnant in
October while many of the smaller females are non-
pregnant at that time. The young are for the most part
born in March, although births during April are not rare.
520 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
From these observationts it may be estimated that the
period of gestation averages from the middle of October
to the middle of March, a period of five months or 150
days, an extended gestation period for so small a mam-
mal. The young are fully formed at birth, with eyes open
and with a complete though not very hard armor. They
are able to walk in a more or less uncertain fashion within
a few hours after birth.
Copulation occurs with the female turned on the back,
this position being necessary on account of the armor
and the ventral location of the genitalia.
PoLYEMBRYONIC DEVELOPMENT
Our earliest observations dealing with the development
of the Texas armadillo revealed the facts that the four
embryos are enclosed in a common chorion and that these
monochorial quadruplets are always unisexual. These
early observations stimulated an investigation of the
embryological and cytological conditions that underlie
polyembryony and sex-determination. The published
accounts carry the history of development through the
period of ovogenesis up to the time of fertilization and
from the primitive streak stage to birth. The hiatus
between fertilization and the formation of the primitive
streak is almost completely filled by two sets of obser-
vations, one by Patterson, who has secured late cleavage
stages and all of the history up to the primitive streak,
and the other by the writer, who has described the early
cleavage of parthenogenetically developing ova. The
observations of Patterson were reported at a meeting of
the central branch of the American Society of Zoologists
at Urbana in 1912; the paper on parthenogenetic cleavage
is now in press and will no doubt appear before the pres-
ent contribution. By piecing together the subject matter
of these separate investigations the writer is able to offer
the following account of the development.
No. 561] THE NINE-BANDED ARMADILLO 521
OVOGENESIS AND FERTILIZATION
The early phases of ovogenesis are in no way peculiar
and in themselves offer no clue as to the physiology of
polyembryonic development. A detailed study of the
growth period of the ovocytes and of folliculogenesis
shows that in normal ovaries there is only one ovocyte
to the follicle and that in ovulation only one egg is given
off at a time. The details of maturation are like those of
other mammals, especially like those of the marsupial
Dasyurus as presented by Hill (710). The growth period
involves an accumulation of deutoplasmic material,
which in the full-grown ovocyte lies in the form of a
coarsely vacuolated central sphere containing deeply
staining granules. Surrounding the deutoplasmic sphere
is a fairly thick peripheral zone of homogeneous proto-
plasm, called the formative zone (Fig. 2), which is some-
what thicker at the animal pole where the germinal
vesicle is flattened against the zona pellucida. During
the maturation process a remarkable reorganization of
the cytoplasmic regions of the ovocyte occurs. The fluid
deutoplasmic sphere forces its way to the surface and
comes to lie in contact with the periphery of nearly the
whole animal hemisphere of the cell. This forces the
formative protoplasm to the vegetative pole where it
assumes the form of a cap thick at the pole and thin at
the equator, having a crescentic outline in meridional
section (Fig. 3). The maturation spindle, forced from its
normal position at the animal pole, lies as near the latter
as possible without leaving the formative protoplasm,
and assumes a position tangential to the nearest periph-
ery of the cell, but nearly parallel'to the primary axis of
the latter.
The two maturation divisions occur without disturbing
this new arrangement and no other radical change seems
to take place until after fertilization, at least so one must
conclude from the fact that a tube egg in a late phase
of fertilization still shows the formative and deuto-
plasmic zones arranged as in Fig. 2. This one fertiliza-
522 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
tion stage (Fig. 4) shows two polar bodies and the male
and female pronuclei lying close together in the
thickest part of the formative zone. There is nothing
in maturation nor in fertilization to suggest or account
for polyembryony. Their chief evidential value lies in
the fact that they demonstrate the fact of poly-
embryony and show that the latter is not due to any
FI A section through a full-grown ovocyte before the changes incident to
maturation have taken place. Note the peripheral formative zone (fz), in which
i en
i `
lies . the foge The zona pelucida (zp) is a dense shell-like membrane.
. 3. An ocyte during the ee maturation division, showing the reor-
sintess o ae ke zones. The ar spindle (ps) is situated far from the
animal pole. The Page pce (dg) are conspicuous at this period.
Other lettering as in Fig. 2.
No. 561] THE NINE-BANDED ARMADILLO 523
morphological peculiarity of the germ cells. In brief the
egg is a simple egg with one nucleus and is fertilized by a
single spermatozoon. Hence the embryo starts out as a
single and not as a multiple individual.
Fic A fertilized = found in the fallopian tube, showing the male and
fe male pronuclei in contact and occupying the thickest part of the formative
protopl asm. oo are n polar bodies. The deutoplasmic zone does not appear
in this secti
The claim of Rosner (’01), based on an examination
of one pair of ovaries inadequately preserved, that the
four embryos are the result of the fusion of several
follicles and the subsequent fusion of the several eggs
or vesicles given off by the rupture of a compound
follicle, is completely refuted by the present studies. It
may be of interest to show how Rosner came to fall into
SO serious an error. The writer after the examination
of a large number of normal ovaries chanced upon one
pair showing substantially the conditions described by
Rosner. These ovaries were from a very large, old
female and when examined cytologically showed many
multiple follicles, containing from two to eight or more
ovocytes in various stages of development. Everything
about these ovaries, however, is atypical and there can be
no doubt as to their pathological character. That Rosner
should by chance have stumbled upon such an ovary and
that he drew a general conclusion as to the normal con-
524 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
dition from so slender an evidential basis constitutes
a biological comedy of errors scarcely equaled in our
literature.
CLEAVAGE
Nothing is at present known of the early cleavage
stages of the fertilized egg and I shall offer here as a
tentative substitute facts dealing with the parthenogenetic
cleavage of eggs in atretic follicles. The first step in
the development of such eggs is the elimination of the
deutoplasmic material, which probably is thrown out of
the protoplasm by a rupture of the plasma membrane of
the egg. The formative protoplasm of the egg in this
way unburdens itself of a considerable volume of inert
and probably deleterious material, which, although out-
side of the egg-cell proper, remains within the zona pellu-
cida and more or less completely surrounds the egg in
the form of pseudo-epithelium of cell-like masses, which
I have called cytoids. The egg now consists of a homo-
geneous, clarified protoplasm and there is every reason
to suppose that the elimination of byproducts of metab-
olism has served to rejuvenate the cell so that its normal
processes of growth and reproduction may be resumed.
The nucleus, which, previous to and during maturation,
had ceased to carry on metabolic exchanges with the
cytoplasm, now evinces renewed activity in that astral
rays, entirely absent during maturation divisions, now
penetrate the entire cytoplasm and a typical cleavage
spindle appears. Two-, four- and eight-cell stages occur
in fairly regular fashion, but even at the eight-cell stage
unmistakable signs of degenerative changes manifest
themselves, which bring about a rapid dissolution of
embryonic integrity and inhibit further progressive
changes. There is no evidence in this material that
parthenogenetic development proceeds to the formation
of teratoma or tissue formation; in fact, the total lack of
cleavage stages later than about the eight-cell stage
argues strongly against the possibility of the develop-
ment of any such structures. This study serves two pur-
No. 561] THE NINE-BANDED ARMADILLO 525
poses, that of affording a critical demonstration of
parthenogenetic development of mammalian ova, and
that of furnishing a clue as to what we may expect to find
when we come to know the facts about the early cleavage
of normally developing eggs. In the latter connection it
is of interest to note that in Dasyurus, whose develop-
mental peculiarities up to the time of cleavage parallel
those of the armadillo, there is, as a preliminary to
cleavage, an elimination of the deutoplasmic material
almost precisely like that shown in our parthenogenetic
material. This fact lends support to the conjecture that,
in essential features, parthenogenetic cleavage parallels
that of normal development and may be used as a sub-
stitute for the latter, at least up to the eight-cell stage.
For the sake of rendering the present account as
nearly complete as possible I shall make a statement
regarding the late cleavage and early embryology, based
partly on Patterson’s observations. The earliest stage
shown by the latter at the Urbana meeting was an inner-
cell-mass stage, like that of any ordinary mammal. Such
a vesicle becomes attached by its animal pole to the very
apex of the fundus of the uterus, where it lies in a posi-
tion predetermined for it at a point where two grooves in
the uterine mucosa cross each other, the one running
laterally between the openings of the fallopian tubes and
the other at right angles from mid-dorsal to mid-ventral
aspects of the uterus. This position at the crossing of
these grooves enables the investigator to locate with cer-
tainty even the excessively minute earliest stages of the
developing vesicle. As it expands the vesicle becomes
depressed in the groove and elongates laterally into an
ovoid form with the long axis running from the right to the
left sides of the uterus. As soon as it gains attachment
to the uterine mucosa the vesicle undergoes germ-layer in-
version like that seen in the rodents, the result being that
two secondary vesicles are produced, an inner complete
ectodermal vesicle and an outer endodermic vesicle, in-
complete at the area of attachment where the primitive
526 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vor. XLVI
placenta or Träger arises. Up to this time there is no
sign of polyembryony. The first step in the direction of
a division of the single embryonic vesicle into four em-
bryonic rudiments is seen in connection with mesoderm
formation. The mesoderm arises at two points, to wit
the extreme right and left sides of the laterally elongated
vesicle, and soon assumes the form of two hollow pouches
that subsequently expand and fuse together in the median
lines into a common extraembryonic body cavity. This
mode of origin of the mesoderm shows that the embryo
is no longer developing as a unit, but that there has
arisen a bilateral duality of function, due probably to the
partial physiological isolation of the right and left sides
of the mesoderm. The possible cause of this isolation
will be discussed presently. The first recognizable rudi-
ments of the embryos appear as two blunt processes or
rf
AERA Ay
ee H, f
SW Aka! B k
Trw
AS
efa BETY ‘giclee Rae sss alas an
Rated sonar ts!
amniotic connecting canals (I-IV). The fou r embryos are attached to a common
discoid primitive placenta, the Trager (tr), by belly-stalk bands.
No. 561] THE NINE-BANDED ARMADILLO 527
thickenings of the ectodermal vesicle. These two pri-
mary embryonic buds arise in connection with the dual
centers of origin of the mesoderm, each appearing
directly beneath a primary mesodermal pouch. These
two primary buds elongate and soon divide at the tip into
paired outgrowths, which constitute the primordia of the
two pairs of embryos. The embryos develop on the
inside of the inner vesicle and are consequently in a com-
mon ectoderm-lined, fluid-filled cavity, which is a sort of
commonamnion. Subsequently the separate embryos sink
into the floor of the common amnion and retain their con-
nection with the latter only by slender amniotic connect-
ing canals, which gradually shrivel up and disappear.
An early somite stage with the common amnion and the
connecting canals still intact is shown in Fig. 5, which
also illustrates the attachment of the four feetuses to the
Trager by means of the allantois and the belly-stalk
bands which constitute the primitive umbilicus. The
saucer-shaped Trager or primitive placenta develops
from the part of the trophoblast which originally formed
the point of attachment for the vesicle. This area has not
been invaded by the entodermal vesicle, but is rein-
forced directly by mesoderm, which invades the maternal
mucosa and produces primitive villi, that are at first in
the form of blunt ridges, but later take on the form of
flat scales (see Fig. 5), and subsequently assume the
typical arborescent form of definitive placental villi. The
subsequent development of the embryos is of little inter-
est except to the specialist and need not be referred to
here. The history of the placenta, however, is of un-
usual interest in that it illustrates the futility of attempt-
ing to use the special types of placentation as criteria of
animal affinities. The early placenta as shown in Fig. 5
is a single discoid structure. Subsequently the points of
attachment of the four umbilical cords become areas of
rapid placental development and the parts of the Träger
in between them almost lose their villi. At this stage the
placenta consists of a set of four separate dises. As
528 “THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
these villous regions expand they come into contact at
their margins and apparently fuse into a lobate zone,
which had been called a compound zonary placenta.
Finally the zone separates along the dorsal and ventral
lines to form two lateral notched discoid placente, to
which we need scarcely apply a name. It is obvious that
there is nothing to be gained by attempting to classify
such a placental complex or by comparing it with those of
other groups of mammals, for the peculiar conditions
seen here are obviously merely very special adjustment
to the peculiar conditions arising from polyembryonic
development within a single chorion. The foetuses after
they have once been separately outlined are distinct, com-
plete units and are associated scarcely more closely than
are the embryos of other forms of mammals where sev-
eral individuals develop simultaneously in a single uterus,
for they have their own separate amnia and separate
placentation, and there is absolutely no admixture of
foetal blood.
Without further burdening the reader with an elabora-
tion of embryonic details and relations we may briefly sum-
marize the situation in-so-far as the question of specific
polyembryony is involved. The ovogenesis is normal;
a single egg is fertilized by a single spermatozoon; the
cleavage is apparently normal and gives rise to a blasto-
dermic vesicle similar to that of other mammals, espe-
cially the rodents; germ-layer-inversion affords an easy
mechanism for producing several embryos in a single
chorion, for the quadruplets arise by means of dichot-
omous budding of the inner ectodermic vesicle without
affecting the enveloping membranes of the vesicle, which
form the common chorion; the subsequent embryonic
development of the several embryos is as independent as
it can be under monochorial conditions, since each indi-
vidual has its own separate amnion, allantois, umbilicus
and placenta. This in brief is the polyembryonic situa-
tion, a consideration of which offers for solution several
problems peculiar to the material. What are the physio-
No. 561] THE NINE-BANDED ARMADILLO 529
logical causes of polyembryony? What factors deter-
mine the definite bilateral orientation of the embryos in
the vesicle, or what factors are responsible for pairing of
embryos? What light does the situation throw on the
problem of sex determination? Does the condition give
us any fulerum on the problem of predetermination and
epigenesis? What are the modes of inheritance peculiar
to polyembryony? Does the polyembryonic situation
offer any new facts bearing on the general problems of
genetics? These problems will be discussed in the order
given.
THe Causes oF PoLYEMBRYONY
In a previous paper (Newman, 712) were listed a series
of seven possible explanations of polyembryony, nearly
all of which assumed some abnormality in ovogenesis,
maturation or fertilization. The discovery that all of
these processes are normal in the armadillo served to
eliminate all but the last suggestion, which was to the
effect ‘‘ that the cause of specific polyembryony may lie
in factors strictly external to the ovum, among which one
of the most probable is in some way associated with the
bilaterality of the uterus.” At that time no discussion
of that possibility was attempted. The discovery of a
specific parasite within the armadillo egg, together with
a consideration of certain unpublished data presented
orally by Patterson, leads me to hazard the following
hypothesis.
A careful examination of many ovaries and many
thousands of ovocytes has revealed the universal pres-
ence of what I consider to be a protozoan parasite in the
egg cytoplasm. This parasite is a large body as com-
pared with the size of the host cell and must have a
deleterious effect on the egg, probably weakening it or
lowering its vitality. Such a depressed egg, in which the
parasite has grown and multiplied, develops into a vesicle
of some size before the effects of a lowered vitality be-
come apparent. When, however, under the pressure
exercised by the transverse groove in the uterine mucosa,
530 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
the vesicle becomes elongated laterally so that its right
and left sides come to be separated a maximum distance
from each other. In such a depressed and weakened
vesicle unity of functioning ceases to exist and two new
centers of growth arise at points where the pressure is
less severe, viz., the opposite ends of the elongated vesicle.
We have seen that mesoderm forms at two lateral points
and that the embryonic buds of the ectodermal vesicle
follow suit. The rebudding of the primary buds must
be due in like manner to the establishment of two grow-
ing points in each primary bud. Such an explanation of
polyembryony involves the whole problem of the physiol-
ogy of budding, about which there is great diversity of
opinion. According to Professor Child’s theories of
development and reproduction, any part of a system
which, through a lowering of the rate of metabolism of
FI Photograph, about one half natural size, of an embryonic vesicle just
hile eh showing the two lateral placental areas, attached to the right and
left sides of the maternal uterus, separated from each other by an area prac-
tically free of villi. The outlines of the four feetuses may be seen through the
transparent, non-villous areas of the common chorionic vesicle
No. 561] THE NINE-BANDED ARMADILLO 531
the controlling part of the system, say the animal pole
of the blastodermic vesicle, is liable to physiological iso-
lation of parts at certain distances from the dominant
region. When such isolation of parts occurs new centers
of control arise, which produce buds capable of estab-
lishing whole new systems like the original. Thus in the
particular case under discussion the rate of metabolism
of the whole vesicle is lowered by parasitism to such an
extent that the dominant growth center of the system no
longer is able to hold the various subsidiary growth
regions under control, and new centers of control arise at
points determined by secondary pressures exercised by
the uterine grooves, as explained above. Further com-
plexities in development are of the nature of adjust-
ments of four separate fetuses compelled to carry on
growth and differentiation within a common chorion
which had already been established before physiological
isolation of the four embryonic rudiments had taken
place. According to current theories, reproduction is a
result of senescence and, on this basis, it may be assumed
that the young blastodermic vesicle, weakened by the
ravages of parasites, is precociously old, and therefore
tends to reproduce by a process of dichotomous budding.
Later, when the parasite completes its active period and
goes into eneystment, and when the embryos begin to
gain new vigor through the absorption of the maternal
nutrient fluids, general rejuvenation occurs, the rate of
metabolism increases, so that no further isolation of
parts occurs. In this connection it is of interest to note
that in the mulita armadillo of the Argentine budding
goes one or two steps further than in our species and
from eight to twelve fetuses result. The writer recog-
nizes the extremely hypothetical character of the explana-
tion of polyembryony here offered and would welcome
any suggestion that would lead to a more satisfactory
theory. It would be of interest, however, to know whether
there is an egg parasite in the mulita, and the writer
intends to test this possibility in the near future. If
532 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
this should prove to be the case the hypothesis here
offered would receive a striking support. A detailed
description of the life history of the parasite here dis-
cussed is in preparation and will no doubt soon appear
in print.
THE PROBLEM OF THE ORIENTATION OF THE COMPOUND
VESICLE IN THE UTERUS AND THE ORIGIN oF PATRS
One of the most striking facts that came to light in
the early stages of the present studies is that the vesicle
is distinctly a bilateral object and that this bilaterality is
strictly in accord with the bilaterality of the uterus. It
was noted that one pair of fetuses was attached to the
right and the other to the left placental disc. It was
furthermore discovered that this pairing is not merely
a mechanical adjustment of the fetuses to the shape of
the uterus, but involves resemblances in stage of develop-
ment, size and the minutie of inherited peculiarities. To
explain this condition we offered the conjecture that each
Fic. 7. Photograph of a vesicle a little younger than that shown in Fig. 6,
Pedy open m: the mid-yentral line, showing the umbilical attachments of the
quadruplets
No. 561] THE NINE-BANDED ARMADILLO 533
pair is derived from one of the first two cleavage blasto-
meres, an idea borrowed from the literature on human
duplicate twins. Such a theory, however, involves the
difficulty of explaining how the cell descendants of one
blastomere would come to occupy a position with refer-
ence to one or the other lateral halves of the uterus. The
axial orientation of the vesicle is determined by the fact
that it always becomes attached by an area of trophoblast
at the animal pole, but there is no mechanism for pre-
serving a bilateral orientation. There is on the other
hand good evidence, as brought out in the last section of
this paper, that the definitive bilaterality of the compound
embryonic vesicle is imposed upon it by certain definite
bilateral conditions within the uterus, which result in the
vesicle being pressed dorso-ventrally and elongated later-
ally so as to acquire a bilaterality in conformity with that
of the uterus. Thus bilaterality and pairing of fetuses
are strictly secondary results and bear no relation to any
axes of the egg or planes of cleavage. The closer resem-
blances between the individuals of pairs and their closer
placental association are due to their common origin from
one primary bud, which means that they are genetically
more closely related than are the members of opposite
pairs. Mirrored-image effects are also made more
intelligible by our knowledge of the mode of origin of a
pair from a single primary bud, in that when an inherited
peculiarity on the right margin of one individual of a pair
is found on the left margin of its partner, it means that
some median primordium of the primary bud has been
split by the secondary budding, so that the resultant char-
acter is found repeated on the adjacent sides of the two
fetuses. Dichotomies of primordia of this sort also serve
to explain the distribution of many peculiarities inherited
by the quadruplets from the parents.
Sex Ratios AND Sex DETERMINATION
In a collection of 182 sets of fetuses sufficiently ad-
vanced to determine with certainty the sex there has
appeared no exception to the rule that all fetuses in a
534 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
set or litter, whether the number of individuals in a set
be 2, 3, 4 or 5, are of the same sex. Of these 182 sets 88
were female and 94 male, which would seem to indicate
that the two sexes are about equal in numbers. A total
of 210 sets have come under the writer’s observation, and
of these four showed 5 fetuses, four showed 3 normal and
1 degenerate individuals, and in one case twins were
born, due probably to the degeneration of a pair of
fetuses. There are no authentic cases of less than four
embryos being produced, but there are four cases, or less
than 3 per cent. of the total number, in which there is
exhibited a tendency toward an increase in the normal or
typical quadruplet condition. This may be a progressive
tendency and might conceivably result in numbers of
fetuses resembling those produced by the mulita. The
fact that the individuals of a polyembryonic litter are
invariably of the same sex supports certain current views
regarding the problem of sex determination. In partic-
ular it shows clearly that sex must be determined prior to
the separation of the embryonic materials from which
the four fetuses arise. Since, from the standpoint of
cell lineage, this separation must take place at least as
early as the cleavage stages, it would appear practically
certain that sex is predetermined in the undivided
oosperm. It has been claimed that the data with refer-
ence to sex in the armadillo might as readily be used as
evidence of the control of sex by environment; for it is
claimed that the environment of the four fetuses in a
common chorion is as nearly identical as it could be made
under controlled conditions. I claim, however, that there
is no greater environmental uniformity here than exists
in cases where several fetuses develop simultaneously in
a single uterus. In both cases the individual fetuses have
separ ia, separate pl t d unmixed fetal blood.
The enclosure within a common chorion is a matter of sec-
ondary importance since each fetus is isolated completely
in the really important ways just mentioned. Moreover it
is certain that pronounced differences in nutrition and
No. 561] THE NINE-BANDED ARMADILLO 535
rate of development frequently occur, as is evidenced by
the facts that one pair of fetuses is often strikingly
larger than the other. If sex is capable of being altered
by nutritive factors one would expect to note some differ-
ences of sex within a set in which some fetuses have
evidently had a much less favorable developmental envi-
ronment than others. There are in my collection several
sets of quadruplets in which one pair of fetuses is very
decidedly larger and more advanced than the other. A
condition of this sort is probably to be traced back to a
very early period, as early as that shown in Fig. 5, where
it is readily seen that one pair is distinctly in advance of
the other. Patterson has also stated that it is not un-
common to find one of the primary bud primordia divid-
ing in advance of the other. If sex is capable of being
influenced by metabolic inequalities of any sort, there
should be opportunity here for the operation of such
influence. Yet there is not a single instance in which
there is any diversity of sex within a set of fetuses
derived from a single germ cell.
Cytological studies of the germ cells are in strict accord
with current chromosomal hypotheses of sex determina-
tion. The female diploid number of chromosomes is 32
and the haploid 16; the male diploid 31, producing two
kinds of spermatozoa, one with 15 and the other with 16
chromosomes. There occurs in the reduction division an
odd chromosome like that described for other vertebrates,
notably the birds and man as shown by Guyer. The pre-
sumption is that this odd chromosome plays the same
role in the determination of sex as it is assumed to play
in an extensive array of animals. The character of the
evidence is the same in all cases. On this basis it may be
claimed that in the armadillo an egg fertilized by the 15
chromosome type of spermatozoon produces a male and
one fertilized by a 16 chromosome type, a female. Envi-
ronmental factors are powerless to alter the sex thus
determined.
536 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
ANALYSIS OF PREDETERMINATIVE VERSUS EPIGENETIC
Factors IN DEVELOPMENT
According to the proponents of the pure line hypoth-
eses the genotypic constitution of an individual is fixed
at the time of fertilization of the ovum. On this assump-
tion the fertilized egg of the armadillo has a fixed and
definite hereditary potentiality and, unless inequalities of
some sort are introduced during development, i. e., epi-
genetically, the four fetuses should be identical. The
degree of difference then that actually exists among the
individuals of a given set of quadruplets should be a
measure of the potency of the epigenetic factors of all
kinds, while the degree of correlation among the indi-
viduals of a set should serve as a criterion of the relative
strength of the predetermining factors. It has been cus-
tomary to employ the data derived from comparisons of
human duplicate or identical twins as a measure of the
extent of predetermination, but such data are unreliable
for two reasons. It is impossible, on the one hand, to be
sure whether or not such twins are the product of one
egg, and in practically all cases the measurements and
comparisons are made comparatively late, so that the two
individuals may have had a divergent environmental
experience. In both of these respects the armadillo quad-
ruplets offer superior advantages and should in the
future take the place of human twins as material illus-
trating the potency of predeterminative factors in devel-
opment, for not only do we know for certain that each set
of quadruplets is the product of a single egg, but the
amount of material is thoroughly adequate for statistical
treatment, and the individuals are compared before birth,
so that their pairing and placental relations are known.
Coefficients of polyembryonic correlation have been deter-
mined for a very large number of characters, such as the
numbers of plates or scutes in the various regions of the
armor, and these have ranged from 0.92 to 0.98. These
coefficients are strictly of the order of those determined
for antimerically paired structures of the same indi-
No. 561] THE NINE-BANDED ARMADILLO 537
vidual. In other words, these quadruplets resemble one
another as closely as do the right and left sides of single
individuals. One might readily make the claim that the
quadruplets are simply four parts of one individual,
since they have been derived by a process of asexual
budding from a single embryonic vesicle. The closest of
ordinary blood relations have coefficients of correlation
of a decidedly lower order, that of brothers being about
0.5; hence the polyembryonic relation is much closer
than a mere fraternal one. We may conclude then that
the predetermining mechanism works accurately up to
from 91 to 98 per cent. and that epigenetic disturbances
or inequalities effect alterations in the end result ranging
from 2 to 8 per cent. One of the most fundamental
postulates of the sciences of taxonomy and phylogeny is
to the effect that degrees of resemblance are criteria of
blood relationship. This postulate is strongly supported
by the facts just given, since the closest resemblances
ever found to exist between individuals are here the
result of the closest possible blood relationship; for no
closer genetic relationship could well be conceived than
that involved in the known origin of these armadillo
quadruplets.
A subsidiary question arises as to what kind of epi-
genetic factors operate in inducing dissimilarity among
the polyembryonic offspring of a set. Studies of the
heredity of certain characters and of the distribution of
certain units among the quadruplets lead to the conclu-
sion that the most important differences are due to im-
perfections in the mechanism for distributing germinal
materials, a mechanism which has visible expression in
the mitotic complex of cleavage. It seems probable that
certain materials which condition the development of
certain characters are not distributed with exact equality
to the first two blastomeres. This would make one half
of the embryonic vesicle different in potentiality from the
other. A similar inequality might exist in the second
cleavage and in subsequent cleavages. Mere differences
538 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [VoL. SLV
in nutriment, position, etc., are impotent to influence any
but dimensional characters, such as length, weight and
relative position of units. Inherited characters are
affected only by changes in the germinal materials, and
such changes might readily be due, as indicated, to
inequalities in the distribution of material particles
during cleavage.
MODES or INHERITANCE IN PoLYEMBRYONIC OFFSPRING
The material for the study of inheritance consists of
nearly two hundred sets of quadruplets and the armor of
the mothers. Without breeding in confinement, which is
not at present practicable, no data concerning paternal
inheritance are available. Since, however, there is no sex
dimorphism with regard to the characters studied, and
since males and females inherit alike from the mothers,
one can discover all the essential laws of inheritance
governing the polyembryonic relationship from a com-
parison of individuals in sets and of quadruplets with
their mothers. After an exhaustive study of this large
mass of material the chief general laws discovered are
to the effect that single meristic variates, such as partic-
ular scutes, and also aggregates of these elements, as
for example the total numbers of these units in a given
region of the armor, are inherited in the alternative
fashion and show only a minor degree of blending. This
is an unexpected result in view of the fact that it has been
the general impression that meristic variations usually
exhibit blended inheritance and substantive variations
obey the laws of Mendelian inheritance. In this material
it has been found that single scutes, recognizable through
some marked peculiarity, such as a tendency to split or
to fuse with a neighboring element, is inherited as a
Mendelian dominant character. If the mother has the
character unilaterally or in one band of the armor, one
or more of the offspring invariably exhibit the character
either unilaterally or bilaterally, either in one band or
reduplicated in two or more bands. Again a single scute
No. 561] THE NINE-BANDED ARMADILLO 539
peculiarity in the mother may be inherited by one, two or
all of the offspring, as a row of peculiar scutes starting
at the place where the one peculiar element occurs in the
mother. Such fluctuations in the expression of a type
peculiarity may conceivably be due to epigenetic factors,
and suggest duplication of factors of the neo-mendelian
sort.
One of the problems of this material is to determine
why one individual or one pair inherits a dominant
peculiarity from the mother, while the others do not.
They all have the same germinal constitution at the
beginning and that some should inherit the character and
others not seems to imply that there must have occurred
a segregation of maternal and paternal inheritance
factors during cleavage. The distribution of the char-
acters so as to produce mirrored image effects, together
with this segregation of parental characters, seems to
imply a sort of dichotomous distribution of some mate-
rial basis that conditions the development of the char-
acters so segregated and distributed. Such determiners
need not be conceived of as Weismannian elements, but
that they have corporeal existence appears to the writer
as an unavoidable conclusion.
The data upon which these conclusions are based are of
highly complex character and have not yet been published
in extenso. The demonstration of the tenability of the
conclusions can be made only by the use of much more
illustrative material than can be presented in a paper
of this sort. In conclusion it may be said that, although
the inheritance phenomena have occupied more time
and attention than any other phases of the armadillo
work, the conclusions reached are less precise and less
satisfactory than those in other fields. Yet it is impera-
tive that we should find out just what new light this
unique material and unparalleled genetic situation may
be able to throw upon the general problems of inher-
itance. The detailed data and conclusions regarding
these intricate problems are being elaborated for pub-
lication in the near future.
DARWINISM IN FORESTRY
RAPHAEL ZON
U. S. Forest SERVICE
THE centennial anniversary of the birth of Charles
Darwin was the occasion for many interesting reviews of
what Darwinism has done for the biological sciences. In
all these reviews, however, scarcely any reference is made
to forestry. Yet historically and inherently there is a
most remarkable and unique connection between Darwin-
ism and forestry.
On April.10, 1860, soon after the appearance of the first
edition of the ‘‘Origin of Species,” Darwin wrote to his
friend C. Lyell:
Now for a curious thing about my book, and then I have done. In
last Saturday’s Gardeners’ Chronicle, a Mr. Patrick Matthew a
a long extract from his work on “ Naval Timber and Arboriculture,”
published in 1831, in which he briefly but completely anticipates the
theory of Natural Selection. I have ordered the book, as some few
passages are rather obscure, but it is certainly, I think, a complete but
not developed anticipation! One may be excused in not having dis-
covered the fact in a work on Naval Timber.
And three days later, on April 13, 1860, he wrote to J.
D. Hooker.’
My dear Hooker—Questions of priority so often lead to odious
quarrels, that I should esteem it a great favor if you would read the
enclosed. If you think it proper that I should send it (and of this
there can hardly be any question), and if you think it full and ample
enough, please alter the date to the day on which you post it, and let
that be soon. The ease in the Gardeners’ Chronicle seems a little
stronger than in Mr, Matthew’s book, for the passages are therein
scattered in three places; but it would be mere hair-splitting to notice
that. If you object to my letter, please return it; but I do not expect
that you will, but I thought that you would not object to run your eyé
over it.
14‘ The Life and i. of Charles Darwin,’’ by F. Darwin, 1898, New
York, Appleton & Co.,
2 Thi + pp. 95 and si
540
No. 561] DARWINISM IN FORESTRY 541
The statement to which Darwin referred in his letter
to Hooker appeared in the Gardeners’ Chronicle on April
21, 1860 (page 362), and is this:
I have been much interested by Mr. Patrick Matthew’s communica-
tion in the number of your paper dated April 7th. I freely acknowl-
edge that Mr. Matthew has anticipated by many years the explanation
which I have offered of the origin of species, under the name of natural
selection. I think that no one will feel surprised that neither I, nor
apparently any other naturalist, had heard of Mr. Matthew’s views,
considering how briefly they are given, and that they appeared in the
appendix to a work on Naval Timber and Arboriculture. I can do no
more than offer my apologies to Mr. Matthew for my entire ignorance
of this publication. If another edition of ny work is called for, I will
insert to the foregoing effect.?
In the Historical Sketch* which he added to the later
editions of his book Darwin gives Matthew credit for the
Nature’s law of selection in the following words:
In 1831 Mr. Patrick Matthew published his work on “ Naval Timber
and Arboriculture,” in which he gives precisely the same view on the
origin of species as that (presently to be alluded to) propounded by
Mr. Wallace and myself in the Linnean Journal, and as that enlarged
in the present volume. Unfortunately, ee view was given by Mr.
Matthew very briefly in scattered passages in an Appendix to a work
on a different subject, so that it remained fae ta until Mr. Matthew
himself drew attention to it in the Gardeners’ Chronicle, on April 7th,
1860. The differences of Mr. Matthew’s view from mine are not of
much importance: he seems to consider that the world was nearly
depopulated at successive periods, and then re-stocked; and he gives as
an alternative, that new forms may be generated “ without the presence
of any mould or germ of former aggregates.” I am not sure that I
understand some passages; but it seems that he attributes much ın-
fluence to the direct action of the conditions of life. He clearly saw,
however, the full force of the principle of natural selection.”
In a letter written by Darwin to J. L. A. de Quatrefages
on April 25, 1861, he referred to Patrick Matthew’s ex-
planation in a postscript as follows:
I have lately read M. Naudin’s paper, but it does not seem to me to
anticipate me, as he does not show how selection could be applied under
* Ibid,
*“*The Origin of Species,’’? 1878, p. xvi—Historical Sketch.
® Ibid.
542 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST (Vou. XLVII
nature; but an obscure writer on forest trees, in 1830, in Scotland, most
expressly and clearly anticipated my views—though he put the case so
briefly that no single person ever noticed the scattered passages in his
book.
Grant Allen in his biography of Darwin (1888) calls
Patrick Matthew the unconscious author of the principle
of natural selection which he applied in his book on naval
timber to the entire Nature.
Here then is a most interesting fact which seems to me
of deep significance to foresters. The first Darwinian,
who twenty-nine years before Darwin formulated the law
of natural selection, was a forester. I shall not attempt
here to compare Darwin’s and Matthew’s views on nat-
ural selection. Matthew’s book, the full title of which is
‘‘Naval Timber and Arboriculture, With Critical Notes
on Authors Who Have Recently Treated the Subject of
Planting,’’ is accessible in the Congressional Library.
The chapter on Nature’s Law of Selection I hope can be
reprinted in the next issue of the Proceedings of the So-
ciety of American Foresters, so that every one will be
able to draw the comparison for himself.
In bringing together this evidence I am very far indeed
from any desire to detract in the least from the great
service which Darwin rendered to science. It was Dar-
win who first gave flesh and blood to the idea of natural
selection. It was his wonderful interpretation of all bio-
logical facts in the light of natural selection that made the
latter the universal law applicable to the entire organic
world. Before this accomplishment the claims of all
others must sink into obscurity.
My purpose in assembling these records is twofold:
First, to restore the memory of one who ploughed the
same fields as we do now, the name of a forester whose
idea, although it did not perish, slumbered almost un-
known for nearly thirty years until another and bigger
man brought it to life and general recognition; and sec-
ond, to offer an explanation of the reason why a forester
above all others should be the one to observe and formu-
No. 561] DARWINISM IN FORESTRY 543
late the law of the struggle for existence as the basis for
natural selection and the origin of new species.
My first purpose, I hope, has been accomplished by
quoting extracts from Darwin’s correspondence. The
second still remains.
There is nothing accidental, in my opinion, in the fact
that a forester should be the first to observe the struggle
for existence and its bearing upon the development of the
new varieties, because there is no other plant society in
the world which presents a more striking example of the
struggle for existence and of natural selection than the
forest. Nowhere else, also, can the law of this process be
more fully studied.
The regular decrease in the number of trees on a given
area with increase in age forms one of the earliest obser-
vations of the foresters, who, at a time antedating Dar-
win, properly gave this process the name of the struggle
for existence, the struggle for the necessary growing
space. The foresters have discovered the laws governing
this process, a process in which almost 95 per cent. of all
trees that start life in the stand perish, and in the form
of yield tables have expressed it quantitatively, have
measured and weighed it. They have shown how this
struggle for existence varies with the species, climate,
drainage and soil conditions, and age of the stand; that it
is more intense, and consequently the differentiation into
dominant and suppressed classes occurs earlier with
light-needing species than with shade-enduring ones. In
a climate most suitable to the species and on favorable
situations this struggle again results in more rapid dif-
ferentiation into dominant and suppressed trees than
when the species grow outside of their optimum range
and on poor soils. These are elementary and fundamen-
tal facts known to foresters for many years.
The foresters have not only observed these facts, but
they have also furnished an explanation for them. The
more favorable the conditions of growth, the greater is
the development of the individual trees; the earlier,
544 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
therefore, begins the struggle for space and the differen-
tiation into dominant and suppressed, with the subse-
quent dying out of the latter. They have followed this
process throughout the entire life of the stand, have es-
tablished its various degrees of severity, and have dis-
covered its culmination during the period of the most
rapid growth in height. This struggle for space and
light is the basis of the forester’s operations, as only by
utilizing and controlling it is he capable of producing
wood of high technical qualities, tall cylindrical boles,
free of branches, and wood with uniform annual rings
possessing great elasticity. Without this struggle there
is no forest, there is no production of valuable timber,
save firewood.
The struggle for existence in a forest stand is not con-
fined to individual members of the same age or the same
story, but the forest, as a whole, battles for its existence
against the adjoining meadow, swamp or shrub vegeta-
tion; the old trees against the young growth that comes
up under them; groups of trees of different species or of
different ages against each other. In this struggle the
forest accomplishes what no other vegetation does;
namely, it actually changes the climate over the area oc-
cupied by it, and makes it inhospitable for its enemies.
The forest creates its own interior environment to which
its own members are completely adapted, but in which
other species find either too much or too little light, the
humus too scant or too deep, or too acid, the temperature
too high or too low. Whatever it may be, the forest’s
competitors are eliminated through the changed environ-
ment. To change this environment, however, there must
be a close stand, there must be present the struggle for
existence among the individual members of the stand.
Through interior struggle among its own members the
stand secures resistance against invasion by other vege-
tation. How manifoldly broad and deep, then, is the
struggle for existence in the forest.
When we come now to natural selection nowhere else is
No. 561] DARWINISM IN FORESTRY 545
it expressed in such fullness and so strikingly as in the
forest. The forest is a natural breeding place in which
constantly only the trees best adapted to the climate and
the situation are allowed to remain. In the forest only
the conquerors in the struggle for existence are the ones
which produce seed in abundance. During a seed year
the dominant and co-dominant trees produce seed in large
quantities; the intermediate trees, which may properly
be called the candidates for suppression, participate but
little, and then only in exceptionally good seed years,
while the oppressed and suppressed do not bear seed at
all. With what rigidity, then, must the natural selection
go on in a forest, if we consider first what a small per-
centage of trees in a stand of the same generation come to
be conquerors in the struggle for existence; second, the
great age reached by trees; third, the numerous genera-
tions of trees that have succeeded each other in the same
forest; and fourth, the relatively limited capacity of tree
seeds for dissemination. With each generation the for-
est trees must become more and more delicately adjusted
and adapted to the given conditions of growth. The new
generation inevitably arises from seed sown by the best
developed trees, from those which have withstood the long
and intense battle not only against Nature alone, but
against Nature in the presence of competitors. Of this
possibly only 1 per cent. or less will reach maturity and
be able to continue the species. No wonder, therefore,
that in spite of search for new species all over the world
so few forest trees have been successfully introduced into
new countries and so little progress has been made with
the artificial improvement of them. So perfect is the nat-
ural selection in the forest, so fine is the adjustment be-
tween the environment and the forest trees, that it is al-
most impossible for man to approach it. I do not mean
the introduction of trees for park purposes or breeding
new varieties for some other purpose than timber; I have
in mind only the establishment of natural forests and the
production of timber.
546 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vow. XLVII
The natural selection forms also the basis of the for-
ester’s operation in selecting trees for seeding purposes,
in making regeneration cuttings, in collecting seed for re-
forestation and so on.
These few facts are enough to show with what fullness
and force the principles advanced by Darwin are ex-
pressed in the forest. If agriculture furnished Darwin
with many examples of artificial selection upon which he
built by analogy his principle of natural selection, the
forest, of all plant formations, furnishes the most strik-
ing examples and proof of the latter. As a matter of fact,
forestry as an art is nothing else but the controlling and
regulating of the struggle for existence for the practical
ends of man; forestry as a science is nothing else but the
study of the laws which govern the struggle for existence.
Is there anything strange, therefore, that it was a for-
ester who first formulated the principles of natural se-
lection? Is there anything strange, also, in the fact that
it was also foresters who have laid the foundation for
what has come to be known as ecology, which is the log-
ical development of Darwinism? Because of the fact
that the forest is the highest expression of plant life, the
foresters occupy the strategic position from which they
command vistas accessible only with difficulty to other
naturalists. In this lies the strength of forestry, its pe-
culiar beauty, and the debt which science owes to it.
GENETICAL STUDIES ON ÆNOTHERA. IV
II
DR. BRADLEY MOORE DAVIS
UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA
3. Hysrins or grandiflora B X biennis D 1x THE F,
ENERATION
In my last paper (Davis, ’12a, pp. 392-406) there was
described an especially interesting F, generation, culture
11.35, of the cross grandiflora B X biennis D. The
biennis male parent of this cross (Davis, 12a, pp. 385-
389, Figs. 1-3) was of a race with the stem coloration
characteristic of Lamarckiana, i. e., the papille or glands
at the base of long hairs were colored red on green por-
tions of the stem. The grandiflora female parent bears
the same type of papillæ, but they follow the color of the
stem and therefore lack the red over green portions of
the stem. The biennis parent then presented a character,
the red coloration of the papillae, that might be expected
to be present or absent in the F,, and to present an alter-
native inheritance in the F, generation.
It will be remembered that in the F, generation of this
cross, grandiflora B X biennis D, consisting of 180 plants,
two sharply contrasted classes appeared (Davis, *12a, p.
395). Class I was represented by 12 plants which had
the stem coloration of the biennis parent (red papille on
green portions of the stem). Class II was represented
by 168 plants with the stem coloration of the grandiflora
parent (stems above clear green). Other peculiarities of
these classes are described in the paper cited above, but
we are concerned at this time chiefly with the behavior of
this color character. The mixed conditions in this F,
generation naturally suggested the probability that the
male biennis parent was heterozygous with respect to the
red coloration of the papillate glands and that it formed
547
548 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLVII
two classes of gametes with and without the factor re-
sponsible for this character.
Although it is true that the form biennis D in later
generations has been uniform as to the stem coloration
described above it by no means follows that the original
plant of 1910, which furnished the gametes of the cross,
was homozygous for this character. I have already noted
the fact (Davis, ’12a, p. 386) that types occur wild similar
to biennis D except for their clear green stems. Con-
sequently the original plant may have been heterozygous
with respect to factors for red papillae and in my later
generations I may have isolated a homozygous line.
Last summer I grew the reciprocal of the cross de-
scribed above, i. e., a cross biennis D X grandiflora B
which involved the same parent plants as in the first.
The F, generation of 103 plants, culture 12.11, was
brought to maturity and consisted of the same two clearly
defined classes. Class I, consisting of 87 plants, presented
the stem coloration of the biennis parent (red papillæ on
green portions of the stem). Class II, consisting of 16
plants, presented the stem coloration of the grandiflora
parent (stem above clear green). There was a dispro-
portion of the numbers as in the previous case, but in the
reciprocal cross the plants with red papillæ were in a
large majority, 87:16, instead of being in a small mi-
nority, 12:168, present in the first cross. Other peculiari-
ties of these classes were the same as in the first cross.
Again the mixed conditions in the F, reciprocal cross sug-
gested the probability that the biennis parent, in this case
female, was heterozygous with respect to the red colora-
tion of the papillate glands and that it also formed two
classes of gametes with and without the factor respon-
sible for this character.
The two classes of hybrids in the F, generation de-
scribed above appear to present a phenomenon similar to
the ‘‘twin hybrids’’ of De Vries (’07) which result when
Œ. biennis or Œ. muricata are pollinated by Lamarckiana
or by one of its derivatives (e. g., rubrinervis, brevistylis
No.561] GENETICAL STUDIES ON ÆNOTHERA 549
or nanella). Crities have pointed out that this behavior
indicates that Lamarckiana is heterozygous or hybrid in
character since it must form at least two different types
of male gametes. De Vries apparently believes that the
‘‘twin hybrids’’ in my crosses show that the grandiflora
parent is in a condition similar to that of Lamarckiana
and that the ‘‘twin hybrids’’ are due to the mutations of
grandiflora. My interpretation of the behavior is quite
the opposite, for, as will be shown, the evidence indicates
that the biennis parent, with respect to the characters con-
cerned, is heterozygous and that the race of grandiflora
is stable. If this is true the evidence does not indicate
that the race grandiflora B exhibits with respect to these
characters the habit of mutation as claimed by De Vries
Ci, p 30y:
Among some 300 plants of grandiflora grown from
wild seed and 200 more grown in isolated lines none have
presented red-colored papillæ over green portions of the
stem. All green-stemmed forms of biennis have proved
perfectly true to this character. One of the best known
types of green-stemmed biennis is the Dutch plant exten-
sively grown by De Vries and Stomps, and this, as far as
I know, is constant. Furthermore, all green-stemmed F,
hybrids have in later generations proved constant to this
form of coloration. There is thus much evidence that
the absence of red in papillæ over green portions of the
stem constitutes a homozygous condition. The type
biennis D, as stated before, can not be distinguished in
other respects from wild plants which lack the red colora-
tion in their papillæ, and it seems probable that this as-
semblage is a mixed population in which some plants are
heterozygous with respect to the character of their stem
coloration.
Although I can not as yet present experimental proof
that the red coloration of papillæ is a character dominant
to its absence, we should expect this to be the case because
anthocyan coloration is obviously a character in addition
to that of the green and because its inheritance appears
550 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLVII
to be alternative. It is on this hypothesis that I shall
treat the red coloration of papille as a dominant char-
acter when for convenience employing a Mendelian nota-
tion in the accounts that follow.
It became a matter of interest to determine how repre-
sentatives of Class I and Class II would behave in the F,
when selfed and how they would behave when crossed
reciprocally. Therefore I selected a plant, 11.35m
(Davis, ’12a, Figs. 6 and 7), as representative of Class I,
and a plant, 11.35a (Davis, ’12a, Figs. 5, 8 and 9), as
representative of Class II, and according to my plan
(Davis, ’12a, p. 399) carried these in pure lines into an F,
and also grew the crosses 11.35 m X a and 11.35 a X m.
Furthermore, a large F, generation was grown from an
especially interesting plant 11.35La (Davis, ’12a, Figs.
10, 11, 12 and 13), also repr tative of Class II, which
resembled @nothera Lamarckiana closely in certain par-
ticulars. These cultures will now be briefly described.
1. The F, Generation from 11.35m.—F rom this plant,
with red papilla on green portions of the stem as in the
parent biennis, the contents of one capsule, 413 seeds,
were sown. The culture, 12.43, produced 180 seedlings,
of which 166 plants were brought to maturity. Among
these, 86 plants presented the stem coloration of 11.35m
and the biennis parent of the cross, and 80 plants pre-
sented the stem coloration of the grandiflora parent.
Let us assume the formula for the biennis parent to be
Rr (R standing for the presence of the factor responsible
for the red color of the glands and r for its absence) ; i. ens
the biennis parent is held to be heterozygous for this
character and to form two classes of gametes, viz., R and
r. Let us assume that the formula for the grandiflora
parent with respect to this character is rr. The F,
hybrid plant 11.35m would then be expected to have the
formula Rr and to produce gametes R and r. These
gametes in chance combinations should give F, hybrids in
the proportions 1RR :2Rr:1rr, which would be a 3:1 ratio
with respect to the appearance of the character R (red
No.561] GENETICAL STUDIES ON ÆNOTHERA 551
papillæ). I lay no stress on the fact that in my small
cultures the numbers were 86R : 80r, but merely wish to
note the point that in this F, generation two classes ap-
peared sharply distinguished by the presence or absence
of the character under discussion.
I was unable to differentiate in this F, other characters
on the plants 11.35m and 11.35a associated with the pres-
ence or absence of the red papillæ (see Davis, ’12a, p.
395). There was a wide variation in habit, leaf, form,
inflorescence, flower proportions and flower size (petals
2.2-3.9 cm. long), a variation that seemed unrelated to the
presence or absence of red papillæ. In this culture also
appeared a group of 15 dwarfs, recognizable when young
rosettes, which at maturity were from 5-6 dm. high,
sparsely branched, and with a foliage of narrow leaves;
6 of these dwarfs had the stem coloration of the biennis
parent (red papillæ) and 9 that of grandiflora.
Among the plants with red papillæ on the stems I
selected an individual, 12.43g, which among my hybrids
with the stem coloration of Lamarckiana most resembled
that form. I shall make this plant the starting point of
a pure line with the hope that in later generations I may
‘find variants still closer to the Lamarckiana type which `
may be isolated by selection. Whether the plant is homo-
zygous with respect to the red coloration of the papillate
glands is a point to be determined by the next generation.
2. The F, Generation from 11.35a.—From this plant
with the stem coloration of the grandiflora parent (pa-
pillæ green over green portions of the stem), the contents
of one capsule, 432 seeds, were sown. The culture, 12.42,
produced 165 seedlings of which 147 plants were brought
to maturity. These presented uniformly the stem colora-
ion of the F, hybrid plant 11.35a and of the grandiflora
parent. It seems then safe to conclude that such a plant
as 11.35a is homozygous as to its stem coloration with
possibly the formula of a recessive (rr) lacking the factor
that produces the red color in the papillate glands. This
position is supported by the evidence from the much
552 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
larger F, generation grown from the sister plant of the
same Class IT, 11.35La, where 532 plants agreed in having
this same type of stem coloration characteristic of
grandiflora.
The culture was remarkable for the length and breadth
of its leaves, which far surpassed that of the parents of
the cross and for its general vigor. In these respects
there was marked progressive evolution. The flower
size, however, was below the grandiflora type, the petals
ranging from 1.5 to 2.8 em. long (those of grandiflora
being about 3.3 em. long). Since none of these plants -
appeared to present the possibility of developing the stem
coloration of Lamarckiana, I have not considered it worth
while to follow the family further.
3. The Cross 11.35 mX a and its Reciprocal 11.35
a X m.—These crosses were made to determine whether
or not the peculiarity of the red glands with the other
correlated characters was in any sense or degree sex-
limited. Thus if these characters were carried by the
male gametes from the plant 11.35m, the progeny of the
cross 11.35 a X m should have the peculiarities of Class I,
while the progeny of the cross 11.35 m X a should have
the peculiarities of Class II. A behavior of this general
nature has been described by De Vries (’11) in his paper
on double reciprocal crosses.
From the cross 11.35 m X a the contents of one capsule,
276 seeds, were sown. The culture, 12.45, gave 143 plants
which were brought to maturity. Of these, 50 plants pre-
sented the red-colored papille characteristic of 11.35m
and of the biennis parent, and 83 had the coloration of
11.35a and of the grandiflora parent. On the hypothesis
developed through the cultures previously described the
plant 11.35m should have the constitution Rr and the
plant 11.35a should have the constitution rr. The female
gametes of 11.35m should then have been of two sorts
(R and r), the male gametes from 11.35a should have been
all similar (r), and the plants of the culture distinguished
as 50Rr and 83rr. The expected ratio of the two classes
No.561] GENETICAL STUDIES ON ZENOTHERA 553
would be 1:1, provided that the female gametes R and r
were formed in equal numbers and mated in equal pro-
portions with the male gametes (r). It is at least clear
from this culture that the factor for red glands (R) is in
this case carried by a certain proportion of the female
gametes and that the female gametophytes for the plant
11.85m must be of two sorts (R and r).
The plants of this culture, 12.45 (11.35 m x a), failed
to exhibit consistently the other differences associated
with the presence or absence of red glands as illustrated
by the two F, types 11.35m and 11.35a. There was a
marked progressive advance over the parent species,
biennis and grandiflora, in leaf size and general vigor,
but not in flower size, the petals ranging from 1.5 to 3.2
em. in length.
From the cross 11.35 a X m the contents of one capsule,
223 seeds, were sown. The culture, 12.44, gave 142 plants
which were brought to maturity. Of these 23 plants pre-
sented the red-colored papille characteristic of 11.35m
and of the biennis parent, and 119 had the coloration of
11.35a and the grandiflora parent. The proportions of
these two types (23:119) is far from the expected ratio
1:1 on the hypothesis considered above, but it should be
noted that the total number of plants in the culture (142)
is small. The main consideration is, however, clear, viz.,
that the factor for the red papille is in this case carried
by a certain proportion of the male gametes and that the
male gametophytes from the plant 11.35m must be of
two sorts (R and r). Thus in both crosses (11.35 m X a
and 11.35 a X m) the character of the red papille is repre-
sented in certain of the gametes both male and female and
the character is not sex-limited.
The plants of the culture 12.44 (11.35 a X m) also failed
to show consistently the other differences associated with
the presence or absence in the F, of red papille. There
was a similar progressive advance over the parent species
in leaf size and vigor, and likewise no advance in flower
size, the petals ranging from 1.3-3 em. in length.
554 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLVII
4. The F, Generation from 11.35La—This plant,
11.35La (Davis, ’12a, pp. 401-406, Figs. 10, 11, 12 and 13),
was one of the most interesting of my hybrids because of
its strong resemblance to Lamarckiana in buds and foli-
age. The coloration of the stem was, however, that of
Class II, i. e., it was grandiflora-like in the absence of red
in the papille on green portions of the stem. I had no
means of knowing, when this plant was selected as the
parent of a second generation, that its type of stem colora-
tion was probably recessive to that of the red papille as
found on the biennis parent, and that I should be disap-
pointed in my hope of obtaining in an F, some plants with
the stem characters of biennis D and Lamarckiana. I
now believe that such a form is unable to produce in later
generations plants with red papille, and, since this is an
important character of Lamarckiana, my efforts with this
particular line of hybrids will be discontinued. The F;
generation from`this plant, however, from the genetical
standpoint proved to be one of the most interesting that
I have grown and well merits a brief description.
The contents of 14 capsules, containing 2,217 seeds,
were sown, and after eight weeks gave a culture, 12.41, of
623 seedlings. An unusual mortality, apparently in a
class of dwarfs, reduced the culture finally to 532 plants.
The rosettes before they were half grown presented an ex-
traordinary range of variation and it became possible to
group them although this preliminary classification re-
quired considerable revision later. A large group of
more than 100 rosettes presented broad closely clustered
and crinkled leaves of the Lamarckiana type. Many of
these rosettes when half grown were indeed indistinguish-
able from those of Lamarckiana at the same age. A
smaller group of about 20 consisted of rosettes with
narrow leaves; most of these developed into dwarf forms.
Finally, the remainder, constituting what might be called
the mass of the culture, contained rosettes ranging on the
one hand from a number somewhat grandiflora-like to a
few rosettes somewhat close to the biennis type, and be-
No.561] GENETICAL STUDIES ON ÆNOTHERA 555
tween these extremes was an assemblage of intermedi-
ates impossible of classification. In short, this portion of
the culture presented an excellent illustration of a relative
segregation of characters, with the extremes, however,
quite far from the pure parent types. As the culture
grew to maturity a reclassification of the types became
necessary and finally five groups were separated as de-
scribed below.
Group A consisted of 132 plants which had the La-
marckiana-like foliage and short internodes (Fig. 16)
of the parent F, hybrid 11.35Za, together with the 4-
angled buds and flower form of this plant. These plants
developed from the group of rosettes with broad crin-
kled leaves of the Lamarckiana type. The size at matur-
ity ranged from plants 1.3 m. high to dwarfs 4 dm. in
height; the habit and leaf size exhibited great variation.
The extreme types of dwarfs (13 in number) had very
much the habit of nanella. The flowers varied greatly
in size, petals 3.5-1 em. long, with the stigma both above
and below the level of the anthers. There was, there-
fore, in this group a decided segregation of flower size.
A peculiar feature of these flowers was the very com-
mon cutting of the petals at the edge into narrow seg-
ments as in laciniate varieties of flowers. This is, as far
as I know, a new character in the genus @nothera. The
greatest development of leaf size and extent of crinkling
observed in this group is illustrated in Fig. 17, which
shows two rosette leaves of one of the hybrids, 12.41Lp,
compared with the rosette leaves of the parent types of
biennis and grandiflora.
Group B contained 5 dwarfs, 3-4 dm. high, sparsely
branched or not at all, and with narrow leaves. The
buds and flowers were grandiflora-like in form, but the
petals were only about 1.8 cm. long. These dwarfs were
very delicate and presented the characters of nothera
reduced in size to about the simplest terms. They re-
called the class of dwarfs in the F, from the plant
556 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLVII
Fic. 16. A type, 12.41Li, in the F from the K plant 11.35La, ipes of
grandiflora B x biennis D, representative of Gro A: A form milar to
Lamarckiana in foliage, four-angled buds and iiy E flowers (pik 3 cm.
long), but the stem coloration was the type of grandiflora, and the internodes
were short as in gigas
10.30Lb (Fig. 5), but were present in very much smaller
proportions.
Group C comprised 7 plants having the habit of grandi-
flora with long branches from the base, but with narrow
lanceolate leaves. The flowers were grandiflora-like
(petals 3 cm. long), but the plants were not so high
(about 8 dm.). The plants were distinguished with diff-
culty from certain forms in group F.
Group D consisted of 3 plants, short and very much
No.561] GENETICAL STUDIES ON ÆNOTHERA 55°
branched and with revolute leaves, very narrow above.
The plants failed to flower.
Group E included 23 plants with a stiff upright habit
and much-crinkled leaves. They resembled most closely
the larger forms in group A, but were without the short
internodes characteristic of those plants.
Group F contained the mass of the culture, 362 plants,
after the separation of the groups described above. As
a group it presented the best illustration of the relative
segregation of characters that I have so far met in an
F, generation. There was a very wide range of varia-
tion in flower size, habit and leaf form. A few types re-
sembling grandiflora could be picked out at one end of
the series, while at the other end were plants much closer
to the biennis parent than have usually been found.
: yen )
Rosette leaves of a type, 12.41Lp in the Fə from the F, plant
Th
leaves of the hybrid (1.65 g.) was more than twice that of the two leaves of
biennis and more than nine times that of the two leaves of grandiflora.
558 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
Curiously the tendency in this group appeared not to be
progressive as to the size of flowers and other plant or-
gans, but, instead, retrogressive. There were no plants
with flowers larger than those of grandiflora, but in con-
trast a large number had flowers (petals 1-1.5 em. long)
much smaller than those of the biennis parent type
(petals about 2 cm. long). The general tendency through-
out this group, as well as that of group A, was distinctly
downward as regards the size of the plant’s organs.
This is the first time that I have met with such a phe-
nomenon in my observations on second generation hy-
brids of Œnothera.
Considering the culture, as a whole, it presented the
same sort of extreme variation that has appeared in
other F, generations. Many types were present which
were taxonomically distinct from either parent of the
cross and from the F, hybrid plant 11.35La. The
groups of dwarfs included few individuals, but these were
quite as puzzling in their extreme reduction in size as
were the dwarf types described from the F, plants
10.30La and 10.30Lb.
4. A DISCUSSION OF THE BEHAVIOR OF THE HYBRIDS IN THE
SECOND AND THIRD GENERATIONS WITH REFERENCE
TO THE STABILITY OF MENDELIAN FACTORS
I wish briefly to point out what seem to me difficulties
in interpreting the F, generations described in this paper
in accordance with a strict Mendelian conception of the
stability of factors. These difficulties are not presented
as a criticism of Mendelism, for the data are not suffi-
cient to justify conclusions, but it is well to note the
problems.
As I understand the tenets of strict Mendelism it is
assumed that the factors believed to be responsible for
characters are stable. New characters are believed to
appear either by the loss of factors or by their recombi-
nation in the gametes, with possibly the occasional intro-
duction of new factors or modification of the old to give
No.561] GENETICAL STUDIES ON AENOTHERA 559
‘‘mutations.’’ The process of segregation, of course,
adds or subtracts nothing from the sum total of the fac-
tors but merely distributes them variously to the gametes
that are formed. The increase or loss of factors in the
offspring of a hybrid results from the mating of gametes
which carry a greater or less number of factors.
Mendelism in its extreme expression may then be said
to rest in large part on a law of the conservation of fac-
tors. This means that factors could never disappear
from a genetic line of development if all of the gametes
were mated and if all of the zygotes matured. It fol-
lows that the factors contained in an F, hybrid must all
come out in an F, generation if that generation is suffi-
ciently numerous.
The most striking specific problems brought forward
by the data presented in this paper are:
1. The explanation of the large groups of dwarfs
thrown off in the F, generations and repeated by certain
plants in the F,.
2. The explanation of the well-defined progressive evo-
lution, excluding the dwarfs, exhibited by these same cul-
ures.
With respect to the dwarfs the ratio of their produc-
tion in the most striking of the F, generations is as
follows:
The F, hybrid 10.30Za gave 141 dwarfs in a culture of
1,451 plants (ratio about 1:9).
The F, hybrid 10.30Zb gave 147 dwarfs in a culture of
992 plants (ratio about 1:5.7).
These are large ratios, considerably above the 1:15
which might be expected if the range of size depended
upon so simple a matter as the presence or absence of
two factors. It must be remembered that the dwarfs
were very much smaller than either parent, as best shown
in the dwarfs from the plant 10.30Lb (Fig. 5), where
the proportion, about 1:5.7, was the largest. These
small plants (Fig. 5), 3-4 dm. high, came from parents,
biennis and grandiflora, about 10-15 dm. and 15-20 dm.
560 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLVII
high, respectively. It is difficult to imagine fertile hybrids
of such parentage much more reduced in their vegetative
expression than are these dwarfs. Furthermore, the
reduction was apparently a complete loss in the power of
a greater growth, as was indicated by the dwarfs breed-
ing true in the F, generation.
If the dwarfs were to be interpreted in so simple a
manner as recessives from a cross where two factors for
size were allelomorphic to their absence the ratio of the
dwarfs to the mass of the culture should have been as
1:15. Why then in the mass of the culture, dwarfs ex-
cluded, was there no evidence of other classes? The two
factors assumed must be of large value if their absence
is to make the difference between the size of the dwarfs,
3-4 dm., and the size of the parents, an average of about
15 dm. There might be expected a class of giants to bal-
ance the class of dwarfs and in the ratio of 1:15.
There should have been several other classes ranging
between these giants and the dwarfs. With only two
factors for size concerned, and these of such large value,
it seems impossible that the fluctuating variations could
conceal the presence of such classes. Yet the mass of
the culture failed to exhibit them, and only the dwarfs
could be separated as a class sufficiently distinct to war-
rant its designation. The mass of the culture ranged in
size approximately between the limits of the parents;
the gap between them and the dwarfs was not bridged
by intermediates.
I am aware that the dwarfs might be explained as re-
sulting from the presence of an inhibiting factor intro-
duced into the cross, but again there should have been
evidence of other size classes together with the dwarfs
according as the inhibitor was present in a full or in a
lessened amount or was entirely absent. These difficul-
ties are in themselves of sufficient weight, let alone the
general improbability of such a situation.
The explanation of the progressive evolution of an
F, generation in which the culture with respect to cer-
No.561] GENETICAL STUDIES ON ÆNOTHERA 561
tain characters appears to advance as a whole presents
the second problem to be considered. This phenomenon
was also best exhibited by the F, generations from the
hybrids 10.30La and 10.30Lb. A large number of plants
in these cultures bore flowers with petals 1 cm. longer
than those of the grandiflora parent (petals about 3.3 em.
long), and the smallest flowers were, for the most part,
two or more times larger than those of the biennis pa-
rent (petals about 1.3 cm. long); between these ex-
tremes was a very perfect range of intermediates. An
explanation for the advance in flower size over that of
grandiflora may, of course, be offered as a recombina-
tion of factors for large size on the hypothesis of mul-
tiple factors for the size of petals, but why was there not
a balancing group of plants with flowers as small as or
smaller than those of biennis? Even the dwarfs of these
cultures had flowers larger than those of the biennis pa-
rent. The only plant having smaller petals was the ex-
traordinary form 11.42; (Fig. 15). What had become
in these cultures of the factors responsible for small
size?
A similar situation was presented by the character of
the foliage most markedly exhibited by the F, genera-
tions from 10.30Za and 11.35a. The leaves throughout
the mass of these cultures were much larger than those
of the parents of the cross and much more crinkled.
There was thus a marked progressive advance in leaf
size with the absence of small-leaved classes of plants
unless such were represented in the F, from 10.30La by
the dwarfs. Admitting that possibility, the same prob-
lem must be faced as was discussed for the explanation of
the dwarfs themselves which were present in a ratio of
about 1:9, suggesting the 1:15 ratio with the presence of
two factors for leaf size. Thus two factors for leaf size
should give through the culture other classes besides
those of the recessives, and these were not evident. Ap-
plying the hypothesis of multiple factors for leaf size
one is compelled to enquire what has become of the fac-
562 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST — [Vou. XLVII
tors or combination of factors that should give classes of
small-leaved plants to balance the mass of the culture
with its progressive advance in leaf size and degree of
erinkling.
I present these problems not altogether as a criticism
of the hypothesis of multiple factors which has been so
ably applied in the recent @nothera study of Heribert-
Nilsson (713), and by East, Hays and other investiga-
tors in various groups. This hypothesis has amply
justified the confidence of its advocates, but it does not
seem to me to be established as wholly satisfactory.
There has been abundant evidence in my cultures of a
segregation of size in the F,, but my question is whether
this segregation may not be accompanied by a modifica-
tion of factors whereby new sets wholly, or in part, take
the place of the old. I do not think that East (’12) quite
met the problem in his recent discussion of my data.
It has been suggested to me that the marked progressive
advance in the size of organs in an F, generation may
result from the continuance of the stimulus of heterozy-
gosis (Hast and Hays, 12) apparent in the F,. Is it not,
‘however, possible to view the phenomenon in the F, as
the direct modification of the factors for size as a result
of the cross? One of the most extreme illustrations that
I have observed of such an advance is illustrated in Fig.
17, which shows rosette leaves of a certain F, hybrid
plant (12.412) in comparison with those of its parents.
This plant failed to mature flowers and its study could
not be continued. There was certainly indicated very
profound changes in its vegetative organization.
Advocates of the hypothesis of multiple factors for
size allelomorphic to their absence may claim the possi-
bility of selective fertilization in the formation of Zy-
gotes preceding an F, or later generations. This possi-
bility can not be disregarded, but we have no data for the
cenotheras. There has been, however, in my experience
usually a high degree of sterility in the seeds of Gino-
No. 561] GENETICAL STUDIES ON AZNOTHERA 563
thera hybrids following the F, for which no adequate ex-
planation is known. ;
In one F, generation I have noted a distinct retrogres-
sion in the size of the flowers. This was the F, from the
plant 11.35Za briefly described in this paper. It con-
tained no plants with flowers larger than those of grandi-
flora and a large proportion of the culture bore flowers
as small as or smaller than the flowers of the biennis pa-
rent. The biennis parent in this cross was a rather large-
flowered type (biennis D, petals about 2 em. long) which
made the retrogression appear the more marked.
A striking feature of the F, generations here consid-
ered has been the diverse progeny from F, sister plants
of the same culture. Thus the F, hybrids 10.30Za and
10.30Lb were sisters of the cross grandiflora B X biennis
A and the F, hybrids 11.35m, 11.35a and 11.35La were
sister plants of the cross grandiflora B X biennis D.
Each plant gave its own peculiar set of types in the F,
with peculiarities so pronounced that the blood rela-
tionship was much obscured. This is difficult to under-
stand except on the theory that the parent stock was
heterozygous; yet there has appeared no evidence of this
in the cultures of the pure species. It is, however, clear
that I have been working with complex material and it
is not certain that the species of @nothera employed in
my crosses have been homozygous to the degree de-
manded for experimentation on the behavior of unit fac-
tors. For this reason I have endeavored to discuss the
problems with full caution and I hold my point of view
tentatively.
Do. Tur Hasr or ‘Mutation’? 1x @nothera Lamarck-
iana De Vries CONSIDERED WITH~ REFERENCE TO THE
BEHAVIOR OF THE HYBRIDS BETWEEN
biennis anv grandiflora
Perhaps the most important observations on these hy-
brids of grandiflora and biennis in the second and third
generations have been those showing a close parallelism
564 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST — [Vou XLVII
of their behavior to that of Gnothera Lamarckiana.
Thus the hybrids have thrown off marked variants of
new specific rank as does Lamarckiana. Certain of these
new forms have held true and others have continued to
throw variants as do some of Lamarckiana’s ‘‘mutants.”’
One form’ (12.56x) appeared with a marked increase
over the normal chromosome number (14) and appar-
ently corresponds closely to the triploid ‘‘mutants’’
from Lamarckiana or its derivatives (Lutz, ’12; Stomps,
12a). A most striking feature has been the production
in successive generations of classes of dwarfs, plants
which contrast sharply with the mass of the culture and
which are stable.
This behavior of the hybrids appears to me to be of
quite the same character as the ‘‘mutations’’ of La-
marckiana, but the results, here concerned with crosses
between distinct species, are clearly of the sort that were
to be expected from their hybrid association. It is not
fundamental to my position that the various forms of the
variants in the F, and F, generations should match the
‘‘mutants’’? from Lamarckiana. Since the F, hybrids
were not themselves the counterpart of Lamarckiana,
they should not be expected to give the same progeny as
this latter plant. It is sufficient for my purpose to point
out the essential parallelism between this hybrid be-
havior and that of Lamarckiana when it gives rise to its
‘‘mutations.’’
De Vries (712, p. 30) has questioned the stability of
my grandiflora stock, apparently believing that my hy-
brids exhibit, at least in part, a mutating habit inherited
from the grandiflora parent. This view is based on the
appearance of two classes of hybrids (twin hybrids) in
the F, from the cross grandiflora B X biennis D. The
evidence, however, indicates that this peculiarity is con-
nected with the biennis parent, which may not have been
homozygous for the character of stem coloration at the
time the cross was made, although in later generations
the form has held true.
No. 561] GENETICAL STUDIES ON A4NOTHERA 565
I am perfectly willing to admit the complexity of my
stock material of grandiflora and biennis, and also the
possibility that the forms may not have been strictly
homozygous at the time the crosses were made. It was
in no wise necessary for the purposes of my experi-
ments that they should be strictly homozygous. My only
concern was that the material should be American types
of @nothera without the possibility of contamination
through crosses with Lamarckiana. That my forms of
biennis and grandiflora had these qualifications there
can, I think, be no doubt. They have, as a matter of fact,
bred true in the small cultures which have been carried
through two generations for biennis A and biennis D
and four generations for grandiflora B.
An abstract of my argument is as follows: (1) Since
hybrids of biennis and grandiflora show points of strong
resemblance to Lamarckiana and, (2) since the behavior
of these hybrids in the F, and F, parallel closely the be-
havior of Lamarckiana when it gives rise to ‘‘mutants,”’
(3) therefore, there are strong reasons for believing that
the ‘‘mutations’’ of Lamarckiana are due to instability
of its germinal constitution resulting from a hybrid
origin. The fact that (nothera Lamarckiana is not
known as a component of any native @nothera flora and
the fact that its known history has been entirely as a
cultivated plant or as a garden escape naturally greatly
strengthen the force of the above argument.
It does not seem to me that these arguments are
answered by a supposition that the behavior of my hy-
brids involves a habit of mutation inherited from the
parental types. On the contrary, are we not justified in
asking of the mutationists evidence from material the
status of which, as representative of a wild species, is
beyond question? Stomps (’12b) has apparently en-
deavored to meet the situation by a study of a cross be-
tween the biennis and cruciata of the sand dunes of Hol-
land. From the cross he obtained in the second genera-
tion a biennis nanella and a biennis semi-gigas. Both of
566 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLVII
these new forms are regarded by Stomps as ‘‘mutants’’
in the De Vriesian sense in the belief that biennis and
cruciata have an identical germinal constitution, except
for factors that determine floral structure and, therefore,
with respect to other characters may be crossed as
though they were homozygous. Applying these con-
clusions to the problem of the status of Œ. Lamarckiana,
Stomps reasons that since biennis mutates and since
biennis is an older species than Lamarckiana, it follows
that mutations among the cenotheras are older than La-
marckiana and consequently the mutations of this spe-
cies can not be the result of hybridization.
In a recent discussion (Davis, 713) of the conclusions
of Stomps I have taken exception to the assumption that
his biennis and cruciata have exactly the same germinal
constitution except for floral characters. This I can not
believe probable, for the reason that, whatever may be
the relation between the two species, they have certainly
had a long period of independence. Cruciata has never
appeared in the extensive cultures of the Dutch biennis
that have been grown by De Vries and Stomps, and there
is no experimental evidence that it has been recently de-
rived from the latter form. From my point of view
Stomps really made a cross between two species and ob-
tained two marked variants due to some germinal modi-
fication as a result of the cross.
It seems to me fair to ask: Why did Stomps find it
necessary to cross biennis and cruciata to obtain these
‘‘mutants’’ biennis nanella and biennis semi-gigas? If
they have the same germinal constitution except for floral
characters, Why should not biennis alone or cruciata
alone give the ‘‘mutants’’?. There is no form of biennis
better known to the workers in the experimental gardens
than this Dutch plant. It is believed to have been on the
sand dunes of Holland since pre-Linnean times and
Bartlett (713) has recently presented strong reasons for
believing the plant to be the form known to Linneus as
(Enothera biennis and consequently to be regarded as
No. 561] GENETICAL STUDIES ON ÆNOTHERA 567
the type-form of the species. No species of Ginothera
is perhaps so free from suspicion as to its gametic purity.
It Stomps can obtain mutations from tested material of
the Dutch biennis grown in pure lines he will have the
basis of a strong argument, but this seems to me lacking
in the conclusions drawn from his cross of biennis with
cruciata.
I do not believe it at all probable that the Dutch biennis
will be found to ‘‘mutate’’ under normal conditions to a
degree worthy of serious consideration for the mutation
theory of De Vries. The plant has already been made
the subject of extensive cultures and its characters are
known to a number of workers with cnotheras. Yet I
am far from taking the stand that environmental condi-
tions may never induce a modification of germinal con-
stitution and still leave the organism vigorous. The
possibility of direct modification of germ plasm, inde-
pendent of sexual mixing, presents one of the most in-
viting fields of genetical research. However, if such re-
search gives affirmative conclusions we should be most
cautious in applying them to the conditions that normally
surround a species and to the process of organic evolu-
tion.
6. Tue PROBLEM or THE OricIn or (nothera
Lamarckiana De VRIES
As stated in the introduction to this paper, we are no
longer in our problem of the origin of @nothera La-
marckiana De Vries concerned with Lamarck’s plant
(Œ. Lamarckiana Seringe, 1828) of about 1796. This
plant (Davis, ’712b) was with little doubt a form of Œ.
grandiflora Solander, 1789, introduced at Kew in 1778.
It had no relation to the cultures of Carter and Company,
of about 1860, which were the starting point for the dis-
tribution among seedsmen of the plants known in cultiva-
tion as Lamarckiana (an incorrect determination of
Lindley) from some of which De Vries’s material was
derived.
568 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou XLVII
The historical side of the problem then largely centers
on the history and composition of these cultures of Carter
and Company. We have the statement of this firm that
their seeds were received unnamed from Texas. This
suggests that Lamarckiana De Vries may have in it the
blood of some of the large-flowered cenotheras with an
upright habit that are known to be present in the south-
western United States. There are a large number of
such forms which frequently pass under the name of
(nothera Hookeri and have not as yet been properly
segregated in the experimental garden. I am working
with several of these types to determine whether any of
them may prove to be more favorable than grandiflora as
forms to cross with biennis in my attempts to synthesize
Lamarckiana as a hybrid. (See note at end of paper.)
It must, however, be borne in mind that we have at
present no confirmatory evidence that such plants as
Carter and Company describe or the Lamarckiana of
De Vries’s cultures grow in Texas. It is possible that
Carter and Company obtained their plants from some
part of England, as from the sand hills of Lancashire,
where large-flowered cenotheras were reported at dates
earlier than 1860 and where at the present day @. La-
marckiana is successfully established. We must look to
British botanists for investigations which will make clear
the history of such @nothera floras as that of Laneashire,
and it is to be hoped that collections will be thoroughly
searched for evidence on their probable development.
With respect to the composition of the cultures of
Carter and Company we have some strong evidence from
the specimens grown by Asa Gray in 1862 that their
plants differed in some important respects from the La-
marckiana of De Vries. These specimens have been
figured and described (Davis, ’12a, pp. 417-422) and it
seems probable that the plants were not more than one or
two generations removed from the original cultures of
Carter and Company. The specimens have characters
in part those of De Vries’s Lamarckiana and in part those
No.561] GENETICAL STUDIES ON ÆNOTHERA 569
found in grandiflora, and undoubtedly present in some of
the large-flowered cenotheras of the west and southwest.
If the plant of Dr. Gray was representative of the cul-
tures of Carter and Company the evidence indicates that
their forms became greatly modified during the quarter
century before the time when De Vries began his studies,
at about 1886, and isolated the type which we know to-day
as Ginothera Lamarckiana De Vries.
On the experimental side of the problem of the origin
of De Vries’s Lamarckiana we have evidence of its hybrid
nature from various sources. The recent analytical
studies of Heribert-Nilsson (712), previously mentioned,
show that certain characters of Lamarckiana behave in a
manner suggesting their association in a complex hybrid
that is still throwing off segregates. His conclusions that
Lamarckiana is a polymorphic species is supported by
my own experience in isolating certain biotypes from ma-
terial of De Vries. The ‘‘twin hybrids’’ produced when
Lamarckiana or certain of its derivatives furnish the
pollen of a cross with biennis or muricata indicate, as
suggested by several critics, that different types of
gametes are formed by Lamarckiana.
y own studies on hybrids between forms of biennis
and ee ra have reached an interesting point. I
have not been able to synthesize by direct crosses, from
wild stock so far obtained, any hybrid with all of the
characters of Lamarckiana in the same plant, although I
believe that all of the important taxonomic characters of
Lamarckiana have been represented in some of my
hybrids. It is, however, probable that more favorable
parental types will in time come to hand. For example,
a form, with the habit and foliage of the Dutch biennis
and with the stem coloration of Lamarckiana, which the
Dutch biennis apparently has not, would furnish very
favorable material. In the meantime I have the possi-
bility of crossing my hybrids back with certain wild
species and of crossing the hybrids with one another. In
this way it may be possible to bring into one plant all of
570 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
the characters of Lamarckiana. It is of course in no way
essential to the hypothesis of the hybrid origin of La-
marckiana that the plant should have arisen as the
product of a simple cross. With Lamarck’s plant elimi-
nated from the problem of the origin of De Vries’s ma-
terial, the importance of grandiflora, on historical
grounds, is materially lessened and we may consider
other large-flowered types of more recent introduction
into Europe as possible parents in a cross.
The resemblance of my various hybrids to Lamarckiana
and the parallelism of their behavior in the F, and F, to
that of Lamarckiana give in themselves sufficient reasons,
in my opinion, to justify the belief in its hybrid character
and to point to the probability that this plant arose as a
cross between distinct forms of @nothera. Lamarckiana
thus would not be representative of a wild species of
essentially stable germinal constitution and its ‘‘muta-
tions’’ are most simply interpreted as the behavior of a
hybrid.
UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA,
April, 1913
LITERATURE CITED
Bartlett, H. H., pene The Delimitation of Gnothera biennis L. Rhodora,
Vol. XV, p. 48, 1913.
eons ` M., 1910. Notes on the Behavior of Certain Hybrids of Œnothera
d Fit Generation. AMER. NAT., Vol. XLIV, p. 108, 1910.
nera ” M., 1911. Some Hybrids of Brothera biennis and 0. grandiflora
that aadi O. Lamarckiana. AMER. NAT., Vol. XLV, p. 193, 1911.
Davis, B. M., 1912a. Further Hybrids of Œnothera biennis and O. grandi-
flora that resemble O. Lamarckiana. AMER. Nat., Vol. XLVI, p. 377,
1912
Davis, B. M., 1912b. Was Lamarck’s Evening Primrose (Œnothera La-
marckiana Seringe) a form of @nothera grandiflora Solander? Bull.
Tor. Bot. Club, Vol. XXXIX, p. 519, 1912.
Davis, B. M., 1913. Mutations in Œnothera biennis L.? AmER. Nat., Vol.
XLVII, p. 116, 1913.
De Vries, Hugo, 1901. Die a ee oe 1901-03.
East, E. M., 1912. The Mendelian Notatio a Description of Physiolog-
ical Pas . AMER. NatT., Vol. XLVI, p n ae, 1912.
No.561] GENETICAL STUDIES ON ÆNOTHERA 571
East, E. M., and Hays, H. K., 1912. Heterozygosis in Evolution = Plant
Breeding. Bull. No. 243, Bu. Pl. Ind., U. S. Dept. of Agri. i
Gates, R. R., 1913. A Contribution to a Knowledge T he acelin
Enotheras, Trans. Linn. Soc. Botany, Vol. VIII, p. 13.
Heribert-Nilsson, N., 1912. Die Vatiabi lität der pa Ste Lamarckiana
und das Problem der De iis Zeitsch. f. ind. Abstam. u. Vererbungs-
lehre, Vol. VIII, p. 89,
Lamarck, 71798. Pilea bie Méthodique Botanique, Vol. IV, p. 554,
2179
Lutz, Anne M., 1912, Triploid Mutants in G@nothera. Biol. Centralbl.,
Vol. XXXII, p. 385, 1912
Seringe, N. C., 1828. De Candolle, Prodromus, Vol. III, : 47, 1828.
Solander, D., 1789. Aiton, Hortus Kewensis, Vol. II, p. 2, 178
Stomps, T. J., 1912a. Die Entstehung von Œnothera gigas De Vra Ber.
deut. bot. Gesell., Vol. XXX, p. 406, 1912.
Stomps, T. J., 1912b. Mutation bei Œnothera biennis L. Biol. Centralbl.,
Vol. XXXII, p. 521, 1912.
NOTE ADDED AUGUST 10, 1913
It is a satisfaction to announce that this summer (1913) I have obtained
an F, hybrid generation with „1 believe, all of the essential taxonomic char-
acters of the small-flowered aruia of Œ. Lamarckiana De Vries. T cross
was a large-flowered, PRET? species of Ginothera from California pol-
linated by the Dutch biennis (Œ. biennis Linnæus). The hybr si carn
from the small-flowered Londre only in relatively small plus or m
expressions of certain of its distinctive characters. It is not aie
to expect that generations from these hybrids in the F, will give material for
future selection towards the large-flowered Lamarckiana of De Vries.
SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION
NOTES ON A DIFFERENTIAL MORTALITY OBSERVED
BETWEEN TENEBRIO OBSCURIS AND T. MOLITOR
I RECENTLY had occasion to subject some meal worms for short
periods of time to a temperature considerably higher than that of
the laboratory. Although the experiment was begun with a dif-
ferent purpose in view, there has been one feature noted which
seems worth recording at this time.
The meal worms used consisted of the larve of Tenebrio molitor
Linn. and 7. obscuris Fabr. These larve are very readily dis-
tinguished from each other by the fact that the pigment in the
integuments of T. molitor is yellow to orange-brown, while that of
T. obscuris is almost black. In other features the larve resemble
each other to a remarkable extent.
EXPERIMENTS WITH ELEVATED TEMPERATURE
The worms were placed in large Stender dishes containing a
little meal and the dishes were then placed in a large, constant
temperature incubator, being insulated from the bottom of the
incubator by a cork ring and care being taken that the glass sides
of the dishes did not come in contact with the copper sides of the
incubator. The temperature was frequently noted through the
glass door of the incubator and was also recorded on a maximum
and minimum thermometer placed inside of the incubator and
likewise insulated from contact with the copper sides or floor.’
Three major experiments were made after a probable differen-
tial mortality had been observed. These experiments are sum-
marized below.
*A much higher temperature is obtained if contact with the walls or floor
is allowed. When an experimental dish was not insulated from the floor all
of the larve which it contained were dead when larve in an insulated dish
were still active.
572
No.561] SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION 573
Experiment 1.—104 larve (53 T. molitor and 51 T. obscuris). Kept at a
temperature of 43°C. for 3 hours. These were the survivors of a pre-
vious heating at 41°-42° for 4 hours in which no record was kept of the
number dying. Count made 24 hours after last heating.
T. molitor T. obscurus
Normal or nearly POTON: EA ESR E 2
ee 2 SAPNA Gn N E a WCE 13 6
R GINO ree hoa eee ol eee 13 1
i eee aS Ree ne ee Pe een 25 none
Por Sent, dosd os ss a a ee 47.17 —
Experiment 2.—50 larve (25 T. molitor and 25 T. obscuris). Heated 3
hours at 43°C. Not previously heated. Count made 24 hours later
T . molitor T. obscurus
Normal OF noar DOIMI Irec er: sier roay none none
DIN a a E a A ce de OES none none
Boras Mye ee ee is aan 6 none 12
eae Ma NT RCL E S sie Cee weet scenes 25 13
wer Gent dd See Fi ev ines 100 52
nig rth 3.—441 larve beng T. obscuris and 237 T. molitor). Heated
t 41.5°—42° for 3.5 h
a in 24 Hrs, Count in 48 Hrs. {Count in 96 Hrs.
| T. mol. | T. obs. | T. mol. | T. obs. | T. mol. | T. obs.
san or nearly normal | none | 176 | none | 164 | none | 164
Slug | none none 7 21 | 6
Barely ative 1195 | 15 | 160; 21 | 128 | 10
Dea ORR at ee | 4s 12 oe 24
Per cent. dead 17.72 : = | 32.50 | 5.88 11.77
Per pry barely alive 82.28 67.50 | 10.29 5401 | 490
Inasmuch as these experiments show a remarkable differential
mortality, two other series of experiments were undertaken, in
one of which the external influence used was exposure to cold for
a long period of time and in the other set, exposure to an atmos-
phere of pure carbon dioxide.
EXPERIMENTS WITH COLD
Two experiments were made on the influence of cold as affect-
ing the death rate. Two large Stender dishes, each of which con-
tained 50 T. molitor and 50 T. obscuris, were placed ai ofa
battery jar, together with a maximum and minimum thermom-
eter, the top of the jar was closed with a sheet of aralar cloth
574 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST (Vor. XLVII
to keep out moisture, and the whole was then fastened outside a
laboratory window, in such a manner that the bottom rested upon
a concrete slab, but the remainder of the jar was not in contact
with the laboratory walls. The experiment ran from December
28, 1912, to March 9, 1913.
Unfortunately for this experiment, the winter at Cold Spring
Harbor was unusually mild and the minimum temperature re-
corded in the jar was only — 10° C. with a maximum of + 11°.
The jar was then taken into the laboratory and after standing
at room temperature for 24 hours a count was made. A second
count was made six days later with the results given below.
First Count | Second ount
| Experiment 1 Experiment 2 | ixps, 1 and 2 Combined
| robs. | mot. | Tods. | mot. | obs. | T. mob
Alive | - 40 47 a ion l u | 91
Dead es 3 17 | | 50 |
Percent. dead...; 20 | 6 34 12 50.223 9
EXPERIMENTS WITH CARBON DIOXIDE
In the third set of experiments, the influence of carbon dioxide
on the differential mortality, approximately 75 larve of each
species were placed in each of three gas wash bottles (E. & A.
No. 3,658). The wash bottles were connected together with, rub-
ber tubing and earbon dioxide from a Kipp generator (lime-
stone and hydrochlorie acid) was slowly passed through the
apparatus during the entire course of the experiment. The car-
bon dioxide was first washed through a saturated solution of
sodium bicarbonate and then through distilled water before pass-
ing to the bottles containing the larve.?
The stream of carbon dioxide was started at 12 m., December
19. At 12:05 p.m. the jar nearest the generator (Jar No. 1)
showed no movement of T. molitor but the T. obscuris were still
very active; at 12:07 p.m. only a few T. obscuris were moving in
jar No. 1 and nearly all of the 7. molitor in jar No. 2 were dor-
mant; at 12:09 all of the T. molitor in each of the three jars were
in a state of ‘‘suspended animation’’ but a few T. obscuris were
2I have already shown (J. Biol. Chem., 10, p. 90, and Amer. NAT., 45,
pp. 749-750) that it is possible to keep insects in pure carbon dioxide for
hours without causing death, although to all appearances they are dead
within a very few minutes after being subjected to the action of the gas.
No.561] SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION 575
still moving in jar No. 1; 12:11 p.m. ‘‘some movement in each jar
but only of T. obscuris’’; 12:20 p.m. ‘There are still a few T.
obscuris moving in each jar, these have bubbles at their mouth’”’;
12:25 ‘‘Still a slight movement of a few but the ‘suspended
animation’ is practically complete’’; 12:30 p.m. ‘‘No movement
in any.’’
An analysis of the gas passing through the apparatus was
made at 3 P.m., December 19, and it was found to consist of
98.92 per cent. by volume of carbon dioxide (absorbed by KOH)
and 0.27 per cent. of oxygen (absorbed from the residual gas by
alkaline pyrogallol). Another analysis was made at 11 A.M.,
December 20, showing 99.15 per cent. of carbon dioxide and 0.04
per cent. of oxygen.
At the end of each experiment the last wash bottle of the chain
was detached from its mate, a rapid current of air was drawn
through it for several minutes, and then the larve were shaken
out into a large open dish and allowed to remain fully exposed
to the air. Counts were made at intervals. The results of the ex-
periment are shown in the table below.
THE EFFECT OF CARBON DIOXIDE ON DIFFERENTIAL MORTALITY
Jar No. 3 Jar No, 2 Jar No. 1
Hrs. in CO2 23.5 46.5 51.5
Date Removed Dec. 20, 11:80 | Dee. 21, 10:80 | Dee. 21, 3:30
T. mol. | T. obs. | T. mol. | T. obs. | T. mol. Thoss
Count made Dec. 21, 9 A.M.:
Siyo ia aaa cas 66 51
Dead . 10 24
Count made Dec. 24, 10 A.M.:
Alive 643 3 83
Possibly alive ..... 5 15 21 35
Certainly dead (discolored).......... 5 31 6 35
Count Dec. 28: |
Alive | 60 | 38 66 26 | 59 10
Dead (discolored )......sssecece0seeees | 16 | ae 9 16 | 68
Per cent. dead `... | 21.05 | 49.33 | 11.99 | 65.80 | 21.33 | 87.18
SUMMARY
The exposure of larvæ of Tenebrio molitor and Tenebrio ob-
scuris to elevated temperature for a few hours causes a much
greater mortality among the larvæ of T. molitor than among those
* None able to crawl as yet. The feet only are moving.
576 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
of T. obscuris; 37.14 per cent. of T. molitor are dead after 3.5
hours at 42° as contrasted with 11.77 per cent. deaths of T.
obscuris.
Exposure to cold for a long period of time causes a differential
mortality in the opposite direction, nearly all of T. molitor (91
per cent.) remaining alive while 50 per cent. of T. obscuris died.
Subjecting a mixture of the larve to an atmosphere of pure
earbon dioxide for 24 to 51 hours causes a differential mortality
in favor of T. molitor, only 21.33 per cent. dying after 51.5
hours in the carbon dioxide as contrasted with 87.18 per cent. of
T. obscuris.
It has been my experience, and I understand that owners of
bird stores have noted the same fact, that there is a relatively
high death rate among the larvæ of T. obscuris under natural
conditions, while almost none of the larvæ of T. molitor die before
pupating.
Ross AIKEN GORTNER
THE CARNEGIE INSTITUTION OF WASHINGTON
The American
Naturalist
intended for teii and books, etc., intended for cy should be
MSS
sent to the Editor of THE A
Short
articles containing summaries
ERICAN NATURALIST, veal doongd -on-Hudson, New York.
of research work bea ah on the
problems of oo evolution are especially a hag and wil! be given preference
in publication
0
Further resvints wil be supplie
ubscr
a reprints of br gin langue are supplied to authors free of charge.
ee
fifty cents and
THE SCIENCE PRESS
NEW fe se _Sub-Station 84
Lancaster, Pa.
Entered as second-class matter, April
Garrison, N. Y.
Pact OM rs
, Pa., under the Act of
pieracet of March 3, 1879.
FOR SALE
ARCTIC, ICELAND and GREENLAND
BIRDS’ SKINS,
Well Aipa BE Prices
rticular
G. DI ESEN. Bird ae
Husavik, North Iceland, Via Leidle, England
TENTH EDITION.
THE MICROSCOPE,
an introduction to Microscopic Methods and to Ons
bY prieg 5 oe GAGE, of Cornell ade > Over
350 lar: 4 ‘cull above wb gures in in this new
and fally pore n. Price $2.00,
COMSTOCK PUBLISHING CO., nises, N. Y.
BUTTERFLY-HUNTING IN
MANY LANDS
Notes of a Field Naturalist
By George B, Longsta, M.A., M.D, (Oxon,),
late Vice-President Entomological Socie
ghee: Translations of Papers
è nt-Organs of Butterflies and | Moths: Hea
a Note b y E. B. Poulton, D. 8c., F.R.S.
Plates Geo sag 8vo, pp. xx+-728, 97.00
(Postage 22 cents.)
‘“ Interesting descriptions of the general features of
the countries visited, their history, geography, flora
and inhabitants . will appeal as much to
those interested in Sive as to the naturalist, as itis
delightful reading. . It is the kind of book
that helps make naturalists and we can’t have too
many of them ; The Appendix consists of
translations of ‘valuable papers by Fritz Muller, and
is very useful and indispensable for those not under-
Standing the original language. There is much to
Praise and nothing to condemn in the work, and it is
a valuable addition to the popular m on natural
history and travel.””—ÆEntomologi
Tam Longmans, Green, & Co.
= New York
FINE LAND SHELLS
fan “ee fine ith pens booklet on the
beautiful shells of the her
led free. Strictly se ipntific collections te penne pa e
rres
gee cy it
DONE quarters of the
academic year.
ate se pied the nga sa
s courses in
t n
epen paro iA Science,
The American Naturalist
A Monthly — established in 1867, a to the Advancement of the Biological Sciences
Fac
Special Reference to the
of Organic Evolution and Here
CONTENTS OF THE MARCH NUMBER
I. Distribution and Species-forming of Ecto-para-
Te Vernon Lyman Kellogg.
y Se
pites.
Il. Castration
Characins of Brown Leghorns. H. D.
II. fhinpitáentian a ERE Formulæ. Profes-
sor W., E.
IV. Notes and aA: Some Recent Advances
in Vertebrate Paleontology. Professor Roy
L. Moodie,
CONTENTS OF THE APRIL NUMBER
Alpheus Hyatt and his oe o
Robert Tracy Jac
Bearing of Teratological genet? in Nicotiana
on Theories of Heredity. Orland E. White.
Shorter Articles and Discussion: Heredit a Par-
enogenetic Insect, James P. Kelly. The
imalayan Rabbit Case, with Some i
ations on Multiple Allelomorphs.
Sturtevant. or nd Interspecific
Hybrids. tia oO. Cook. Ordovician (%)
= Remainsin ‘Nunes. "Professor T. D. å.
erell.
Notes and Literature: Some Recent Advances in
Vertebrate Paleontology. Dr, Roy L. Moodie,
CONTENTS OF THE MAY NUMBER
Inheritance of Mammz in Duroc Jersey Swine. Pro-
fessor Edward N. Wentworth.
Natural and Artificial cg Sry aga in the Genus
Nicotiana. Richard Well
Shorter Articles and sind setae simplifed M egg A
ian Formule. Professor R. A. Emdeso
Influence of ne ew anoa = Agriculture 4
Wyoming o
Notes and iapa pei caer o =F ee esc
Alfred G. Mayer. The Growth of Groups in the
Animal Kingdom. Professor H. 8, Jenn
CONTENTS OF THE JUNE NUMBER
Re y! x Guines-pigs. Dr. H. D.
I. Heredity of Tricolor > on A all
= oo es and. Det is. Professor H. 8. TRENA
i pm in og ogg romeo Annie
In. cional hinien ation n o E Dee
IV. Sw A, and Discussion : simp i
in andelian Form
Adeir aL Morga i ce Fotie Onis
of Mutations in So: Somatic
. Emerson.
V. Notes and Literature: Valuation of the Bes.
Professor Chas, C. Adams.
CONTENTS OF THE JULY NUMBER
Doctrines held as Vitalism. Professor H. S, Jennings.
The Presence of the Barred Pi Pattern in the
White Leghorn Breed of Fowls. Dr. Philip B.
ey.
Shorter Articles and eee The Geologic eee
of Termites in the Bel Donald §
terature : Work ae Genetic PEZO
Protozoa at Yale. Professor A. R, Middleton.
Notes on Ichthyology. President David Starr
Jordan,
CONTENTS OF THE AUGUST NUMBER
~~ Studies on Oenothera. . Dr. Brad
Moore Davis,
oe amenos of Protracted and ao OST, Fasting
rowth. Dr. Sergius Morgu
SE Ge uk Austin H. pte
Shorter Articles and Discussion: Mog ee Coup”
i The Results
ling in Drosophila, P. z pie
Obtained by crossing ze mais L. 8n
Lacy.
ley
A —e
Single Number 40 Cents
Yearly Subscription, $4.00
One Dollar
The NATURALIST will be sent t
THE SCIENCE PRESS 5
_Sub-Station 84: NEW YORK
Pioa N. k
VOL. XLVII, NO. 562 OCTOBER, 1913
THE
AMERICAN
NATURALIST
A MONTHLY JOURNAL
Devoted to the Advancement of the Biological Sciences with
Special Reference to the Factors of Evolution
CONTENTS
Page
I. A Contribution towards an Fromage of the ieres of TEE Dr.
- - 577
II. The Inheritance of Coat Color in Horses. Professor W. S. ANDERSON - - 615
Ill. The Variations in the Number of Vertebre and Ventral Scutes in Two
Snakes of the Genus agp eee Professor ALEXANDER G. RUTHVEN and
CRYSTAL THOMPSON - os nes dl a ae NS ee a ee
IV. Shorter Articles and Reports:
The Simultaneous Modification of Distinct Mendelian Factors: Professor R.
. Emerson. The TA TE SET Conference te mene
M. SURFACE - ~ 633
THE SCIENCE PRESS
LANCASTER, PA. GARRISON, N. Y.
NEW YORK: SUB-STATION 64
The American Journal of Science
Established by Benjamin Silliman in 1818
The Leading Scientific Journal in the United States
Devoted to the Physical and Natural Sciences, with special reference to
Physics, and Chemistry on the one hand, and to Geology and Mineralogy
on the other.
tor: EDWARD S. DANA.
Associate Editors: Professor GEORGE L. GOODALE, JOHN TROWBRIDGE, W. G. FARLOW and WM. M. DAVIS
ambridge; Professors A. E. VERRILL, HENRY S. WILLIAMS and L. V. PIRSSON, of New
Haven; Professor JOSEPH S. AIMES, of Baltimore ; MR. J. S. DILLER, of Washingto
Two volumes annually, in monthly numbers of about 80 pages each.
This Journal ended its first series of 50 volumes as a quarterly in 1845; its second
series of 50 volumes as a two-monthly in 1870; its third series as a monthly ‘ended Dec-
ember, 1895. A Fourth Series commenced in 1896.
Subscription price, $6 per year or 50 cents a number, postage prepaid in the United States
$6.25 to Canada; $6,40 to Countries in the Postal Union. Back numbers at reduced prices.
sa>-Ten- Volume Indexes, Vols. I-X XI-XX, fourth series, price one dollar. Address
The American Journal of Science
New Haven, Conn.
University Control
By J. MoKzen Carrext, Professor of Psychology in Columbia University
Together with a series of Two Hundred and Ninety-nine Unsigned Letters by Leading Men of Science
holding Academie Positions and Articles by Josepa Jastrow, Gmoram T. Lapp, Joun J. STEVENSON, ES
CeRIGHTON, J. McKean CATTELL, Georgam M. STRATTON, Stewart Paton, JoHN Jay CHAPMAN, Jamra P.
MUNROE and Jacos GOULD SCHURMAN. å
A great variety of questions concerning general university administration are dealt with in an original an
OR ven way.—Nature. ; on of the
These quotations and examples are taken from Professor Cattell’s informed and thorough discussion ite
ae of university control, a subject upon which he = — eass to say of late, finding occasion for ae
cism of existing American conditions, ee democracy and
san arae as upon which a man may enter VERN pirra his self- a
Sentences and paragraphs that betoken the expert, highly-trained mind, che suggestions that come to Te-
fresh a A ik us thal E oer deir ia Reak te dues Go Aas adie = —The Boston Evening Transcript-
SCIENCE AND EDUCATION a
A series of volumes for the promotion of scientific research and educational progre
VOLUME I. The Foundations of Science. By H. Porvaan#. Containing the authorized serene
by Gmoram Brocom Hatsrep of “Science and! Hypothesis,” “The Value of Science,” and
and Method.” In Press.
VOLUME II. Medical Research and Education. By Riczanp M. Psaancs, WILLIAM
H FRANKLIN MALG,
SON, CHRISTIAN A. HERTER,
VOLUME III. University Control. Now Ready. Pages r+434. Price, $3.00 net.
GARRISON, N. Y. THE SCIENCE PRESS LANCASTER, PA-
SUB-STATION 84, NEW YORK CITY
THE
AMERICAN NATURALIST
Vor. XLVII October, 1913 No. 562
A CONTRIBUTION TOWARDS AN ANALYSIS OF
THE PROBLEM OF INBREEDING!
DR. RAYMOND PEARL
Tue effect of inbreeding on the progeny is a much-
discussed problem of theoretical biology and of practical
breeding. It has been alternately maintained, on the one
hand that inbreeding is the most pernicious and destruc-
tive procedure which could be followed by the breeder,
and on the other hand, that without its powerful aid most
of what the breeder has accomplished in the past could
not have been gained and that it offers the chief hope for
further advancement in the future. While there is now,
among animal breeders at least, a more widespread ten-
dency than was formerly the case towards the opinion
that inbreeding per se is not a surely harmful thing,
nevertheless this opinion is by no means universally held
and in any case does not rest upon a definite and well-
organized body of evidence. Aside from a relatively
small amount of definite experimental data one’s judg-
ment in the matter (so far as it is not wholly speculative)
is finally formed on the basis of his interpretation of the
vast accumulation of material camprised in the recorded
experience of the breeders of registered (pedigreed)
livestock.
This material recorded in the books of registration far
exceeds in amount and in diversity any which could pos-
sibly be obtained experimentally on the same forms of
life. It must be said, however, that the discussion of it
*Papers from the Biological Laboratory of the Maine Agricultural
Experiment Station, No. 47.
577
578 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
with a view to an analysis of the effects of inbreeding,
though undertaken at greater or less length by a number
of men including Lehndorff, von Oettingen, Bruce Low,
Hoesch, Chapeaurouge, Bunsow, Stranz and others, has
not led to results characterized by the precision or the
definiteness or the quality of getting at fundamentals de-
manded in the present state of the science of genetics.
The lack of precision and fundamental character in the
studies alluded to is not primarily to be attributed to any
inherent defect in the material. In the breeding of all of
the domestic animals inbreeding has been practised; in
many instances to a very marked degree. Further the
manner in which the inbreeding has been done (the types
of relationship-matings) exhibits a most intricate diver-
sity, from which different types may be picked out for
analysis in any reasonable quantity. The records are
accurate within their limitations, to a high degree.
Probably no experimentalist’s records of descent are
more accurate, considering the relative numbers involved
in the two cases.
The real need, I venture to think, has been for an ap-
propriate and valid method of pedigree analysis, which
possessed generality, and could on that account be de-
pended on to give comparable results when applied to
two (or more) different pedigrees. Specifically, there
seems not to have been worked out any adequate general
method of measuring quantitatively the degree of in-
breeding which is exhibited in a particular pedigree.
Without such a measure it is clearly impossible to pro-
ceed far in the analysis of the kinship aspect of in-
breeding.
It is the purpose of this paper to present a method for
measuring and expressing numerically, in the form of a
coefficient, the degree of inbreeding which exists in any
particular case, and to show by illustrations the manner
in which these coefficients may be computed. I shall en-
deavor to show that the method is (a) unique, in the sense
that the values obtained in any particular instance can
only be affected by the degree or amount of inbreeding
No. 562] THE PROBLEM OF INBREEDING 579
which has been practised in the line of descent under con-
sideration and (b) general, in the sense that it is equally
applicable to all pedigrees and to all degrees and types of
inbreeding. |
PRELIMINARY DEFINITIONS
In attempting any general analysis of the problem of
inbreeding from the theoretical standpoint one is con-
fronted with the necessity for a definition of inbreeding,
which shall be at once precise and general, that is, such as
to include all of the many diverse ways in which this sort
of breeding may be practised. A great number of defini-
tions of the concept ‘‘inbreeding’’ have been proposed in
the literature of genetics. I shall not attempt to review
these definitions here, since to do so would serve no use-
ful purpose in the present connection. A careful con-
sideration of them is bound, I think, to lead one to the
conclusion that they have been, in general, based on
grounds of practical expediency, rather than critical
biological analysis.
Clearness and simplicity of thinking will be gained by
approaching the problem de novo. Leaving aside for the:
moment all consideration of details as to how a particular
piece of inbreeding is done it is clear that underlying all
definitions of inbreeding is to be found the concept of a
narrowing of the network of descent as a result of mating
together individuals genetically related to one another in
some degree. Let us take this as our basic concept of in-
breeding. It means that the number of potentially dif er-
ent germ-to-germ lines, or ‘‘blood-lines ’’ concentrated in
a given individual animal is fewer if the individual is
inbred than if it is not. In other words, the inbred indi-
vidual possesses fewer different ancestors in some par-
ticular generation or generations than the maximum pos-
sible number for that generation or generations. This
appears to be the most general form in which the concept
of inbreeding may be expressed.? In whatever way the
* This, of course, looks at the matter primarily from the standpoint of
kinship. This is all that is intended here. The discussion of the justifica-
tion for this method of treating the subject, and of gametie relationships
580 : THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
mating of relatives is accomplished, or whatever the de-
gree of relationship of the individuals mated together,
the case in last analysis comes back to the above state-
ment, namely that there are actually in the pedigree of
the inbred individual fewer different ancestors in some
particular generation or generations than the maximum
possible number.*®
The idea suggested in the foregoing paragraph may be
expressed symbolically as follows. If there is absolutely
no collateral relationship between any of the individuals
in a pedigree, the number of different individuals in suc-
ceeding ancestral generations will be given by the series
ze (1)2 <> (2) 4. (3)8 <> (4) 16 (5)32 <---> (m)2", (i)
where the numbers in parenthesis denote the numbers of
the ancestral generations (1— parents, 2— grandparents,
3=— great-grandparents and so on), and the free figures
denote the maximum possible number of different ances-
tors in the indicated generation. If in any generation in
the series relatives are bred together the same individual
will appear more than once in the ancestral series, and
the number of different individual ancestors in the higher
terms will be accordingly diminished below the maximum
number as given in (i). The series will then become
ze (1)2< (2)4— y, (3)8—y, (ii)
<> (4)16—y, < (5)32 -= irta
where Y1, Ys, Yz, `>- may, in the nth generation have any
value not greater than 2” — 2, in the case of organisms 1m
which two individuals must cooperate in the process of
reproduction. The final limiting case is, of course, self-
in inbreeding (heterozygosis in the sense of East and Hayes, ete.), will be
undertaken in a later section of the paper (p. 605).
* This generalized concept of inbreeding seems to me to be in essential
(though not entirely in verbal) agreement with that of O. F. Cook, srs
ing,’’ U. S. Dept. Agr., Bur, Plant Ind. Bul. 146, 1909). I use ‘‘inbreed-
ing’? as a generic term, while Cook regards it as a species of ‘‘line breed-
ing.’? This seems to me to be a purely terminological difference, and not
of great consequence.
No. 562] THE PROBLEM OF INBREEDING 581
fertilization, where the number of ancestors reduces to 1
in each generation.
THE MEASUREMENT OF THE DEGREE OF INBREEDING
This brings us to a consideration of a practical and
general measure of the degree of inbreeding exhibited in
a particular pedigree. This problem has been attacked
by a number of other investigators, but so far as I have
been able to learn all previous measures have been modi-
fications in one form or another of the scheme of Lehn-
dorff. This plan‘ took account, as a measure of inbreed-
ing, only of the number of generations intervening be-
tween that generation in which relatives were bred to-
gether, and that generation in which their first common
ancestor was found. Thus Lehndorff says :*
I am of opinion, that a horse should only be termed in-bred, when in
common ancestor; in other words, when the children or grandchildren
of a stallion or a mare are mated, I call their produce in-bred; but this
term does not apply to the produce of great-grandchildren of the
common ancestor. We must not forget that in the pedigrees of horses
the word brother or sister often means half-brother or half-sister, and
that here the definition borrowed from the human family connection is
not applicable.
As breeding within moderate relationship I reckon the mating of
stallion and mare that are removed from their common ancestor four,
five or six degrees. It is indifferent whether they are on both sides
equidistant from, or one of them nearer to the male or female pro-
genitor than the other.
Von Oettingen used a measure exactly the same in
principle as this of Lehndorff’s. The system of Bruce
Low, though somewhat differently stated, comes to essen-
tially the same thing, so far as I am able to determine `
from abstracts, this author’s original writings not having
been accessible to me.
All systems based on the number of ‘‘free generations’?
alone do not furnish a precise or reliable measure of the
real intensity of inbreeding. The essential reason for
this failure, stated baldly, is that they do not take account
*Cf. remor, G., ‘‘Horse-breeding Recollections,’ Philadelphia, 1887.
5 Loe. cit., p.
582 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
of the composition of the generation to which the ‘‘com-
mon ancestors’’ of an inbred pair belong. This can be
most clearly shown by comparison of two hypothetical
pedigrees. In these pedigrees letters will be used to
designate animals.
PEDIGREE TABLE I. (Hypothetical)
g
c
h
RB o
t
u
be ; v
a
Cl
Alpha 4 y
k 1
è 2
l
2
\ b Oo
m
q
epa ae
M 8
Ancestral Generation 1 2 3 4
PEDIGREE TABLE II. (Hypothetical)
01
` n
ĉi o
hı s
a 01
pı
dı | > 01
ji
Omega 4 er
f kı pı
1 o1
lı pı
bi 01
m1
pı
fi 01
pı
_ Ancestral Generation 1 2 4
Now it is plain that in both of these seigt the num-
ber of ‘‘free generations” between the mating of the
parents of Alpha and Omega respectively (generation
number 1) and this common ancestor—o in one case, an
o, and p, in the other case—is the same, namely 2. Yet
every one would agree that the inbreeding involved in the
breeding of Omega is much more intense than that in-
No. 562] THE PROBLEM OF INBREEDING 583
volved in the breeding of Alpha. In the second pedigree
it is assumed that there were only two different indi-
viduals in the fourth ancestral generation. In other
words, all the individuals in generation 3 of this pedigree
II are brothers and sisters, though different animals (i. e.,
produced, by hypothesis, at successive matings of 0, and
pı). A condition in considerable degree approaching this
is very frequently found in livestock pedigrees. On the
other hand in pedigree I all of the individuals of the
fourth generation are different and are assumed to be
absolutely unrelated, with the single exception of indi-
vidual o, which appears twice in this generation. The
point I think is clear: according to the Lehndorff measure
both of these pedigrees show the same degree of inbreed-
ing (free generations —2), whereas actually there is a
wide difference between the two.
In developing a general measure of the intensity of in-
breeding we may well start from the conception set forth
in the preceding section, namely that the inbred individual
possesses fewer different ancestors than the maximum
possible number. Besides this factor account must be
taken of the generation or generations in which the re-
duced number of different ancestors is found, and the
extent to which these generations are removed (in the
sense of Lehndorff discussed above) from the individual
or generation under consideration. In other words the
two factors which must be included in a general measure
of the intensity of inbreeding are (a) the amount of
ancestral reduction in successively earlier generations,
and (b) the rate of this reduction over any specified num-
ber of generations.
Both of these demands are met, I think, by taking as a
measure of the intensity of inbreeding in any generation
the proportionate degree to which the actually existent
number of different ancestral individuals fails to reach
the maximum possible number, and by specifying the
location in the series of the generation under discussion.
This statement is amplified and made more precise in
the following propositions.
584 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
1. The production of the individual must be the point
of departure in any analytical consideration of inbreed-
ing, leading towards its measurement. That is, the ques-
tion to which one wants an answer is: What degree of in-
breeding was involved in the production of this particular
animal?
2. It is therefore necessary practically to start with the
individual and work backwards into the ancestry in meas-
uring inbreeding, rather than to start back in the ancestry
and work down towards the individual. _
3. In the genetic passage from the n + 1th generation
to the nth, or in other words the contribution of the
matings of the n + 1th generation to the total amount of
inbreeding involved in the production of an individual,
the degree of inbreeding involved will be measured by the
expression
| ae 100(pr41 — qn+1) : (iii)
Pn+1
where Ph, denotes the maximum possible number of dif-
ferent individuals involved in the matings of the n+ 1
generation, pn,, the actual number of different individuals
involved in these matings. Zn may be called a coefficient
of inbreeding. If the value of Z for successive genera-
tions in the ancestral series be plotted to the generation
numbers as a base, the points so obtained will form a
curve which may be designated as the curve of inbreeding.
It will be noted that the coefficient of inbreeding Z is
the percentage of the difference between the maximum
possible number of ancestors in a given generation, and
the actual number realized, in the former. The coefficient
may have any value between 0 and 100. When there is no
breeding of relatives whatever (that is, in the entire
absence of inbreeding) its value for each generation is 0.
As the intensity of the inbreeding increases the value of
the coefficient rises.
4. The above measure of inbreeding has to do primarily
with the relationship aspect of the problem. The theo-
retical bearings of this fact will be discussed in a later
section.
No. 562] THE PROBLEM OF INBREEDING 585
5. Since the only possible infallible criterion of rela-
tionship between individuals is common ancestry in some
earlier generation, we are led to the practical rule, in
measuring the degree of inbreeding in a pedigree, to re-
gard all different individuals as entirely unrelated until
the contrary is proved by the finding of a common ances-
tor. This no doubt appears at this stage of the discus-
sion as an exceedingly obvious truism. The reader is
urged to accept it as such, and hold fast to it, because it
will help him over some apparent paradoxes later.
The method of calculating coefficients of inbreeding,
and their real significance will be made much clearer by |
the consideration of illustrative examples of their appli-
cation. To these we may therefore turn. -
THE CALCULATION oF COEFFICIENTS OF INBREEDING
We may first consider some simple hypothetical pedi-
grees, before attacking the more complicated ones actu-
ally realized in stock-breeding.
Illustration I. Continued Brother X Sister Breeding
Let us begin with the most extreme type of inbreeding
possible, namely the mating of brother with sister for a
series of generations. Pedigree Table III gives the pedi-
gree of an individual so bred.
PEDIGREE TABLE III. (Hypothetical)
To Illustrate the Breeding of Brother X Sister, out of Brother X Sister,
Continued for a Series of Generations
|
| g
| e
ioe c í ;
J h
a i g
d h
f f
x 4 “s
g
; | a h
g
f h
(b g
b h
d g
\f h
Ancestral Generation 1 2 3 4
586 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
Let us now proceed to the calculation of the coefficients
of inbreeding Z,, Z,, Za and Z,. For Z, we have
r 2,
E 2,
whence
In the same way
87.5.
Zs
_ 100(16 — 2) _
s T
These results may be expressed verbally in the follow-
ing way: In the last two ancestral generations æ is 50 per
cent. inbred ; in the last three generations it is 75 per cent.
inbred; and in the last four generations it is 87.5 per cent.
inbred.
This pedigree table and the constants will repay
further consideration, since the case is a limiting one.
With the table at hand it is possible to grasp a little more
clearly the precise meaning of the coefficients of inbreed-
ing. Thus it is seen that what the value of 7,—50 really
signifies is that because the individuals a and b were
brother and sister the number of different ancestors
which x can possibly have in any ancestral generation can
not be more than 50 per cent. of the total number theo-
retically possible for the generation. That is, %’s sire
and dam having been brother and sister means that # can
not have had more than 2,048 different great-great-great-
great-great-great-great-great-great-grandparents, instead
of the possible 4,096. He may have had fewer than 2,048,
but Z,—50 tells us that he could not have had more.
Similarly Z,—75 indicates that since c and d, the grand-
sire and grand-dam of 2 were brother and sister, 7 can
not have in any ancestral generation more than 25 per
cent. of the theoretically possible number of ancestors for
that generation. And so on for the other values of Z.
No. 562] THE PROBLEM OF INBREEDING 587
In the limiting case of the closest inbreeding possible
the successive Z’s will have the values given in the fol-
lowing table.
TABLE I
VALUES OF THE SUCCESSIVE COEFFICIENTS OF INBREEDING (Zo TO Z,;) IN THE
CASE OF THE Most INTENSE INBREEDING POSSIBLE (BROTHER X
SISTER OUT OF BROTHER X SISTER CONTINUED)
Coefficient of In- Ancestral Generations Numerical Value of Coeffi-
breeding Included cient
Zo 1 0
Zı 2 50
Ze 3 75
Z3 4 87.5
Zs 5 93.75
Zs 6 96.8758
Zs ej 98.4375
Zi 8 99.21875
Zs 9 99.609375
Zo 10 99.8046875
Zio 11 99.90234375
Zu 12 99.951171875
Ziz 13 99.9755859375
Zı3 | 14 99.98779296875
Zu 15 99.993896484375
Zis 16 99.9969482421875
From this table it is apparent that while the narrowing
or exclusion of the possible different source lines of
descent proceeds very rapidly in the first few generations
of brother X sister breeding, only relatively little change
is made by further generations of this sort of breeding.
Thus in seven generations of brother X sister breeding
all but about 1.5 per cent. of the potentially different an-
cestral ‘‘blood-lines’’ will have been eliminated. After
16 generations of this sort of breeding (a number easily
attainable in ordinary breeding experiments) an indi-
vidual so bred can by no chance possess more than 3/ 1000
of one per cent. of the different lines of ancestral descent
which are theoretically possible. This table strongly sug-
gests that if, in an experiment to test the influence of in-
breeding, no particular effect is observed during ten gene-
successive differences are halved.
588 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
rations of brother X sister breeding, it is extremely im-
probable that any effect will be produced by a further
continuation of the same method of breeding. If an
apparent effect should suddenly appear some time later
than the tenth generation the case would need the most
critical scrutiny, to determine whether the observed effect
had really been due to the inbreeding, rather than to some
other unsuspected cause.
O00
I
y
x
NX
N
è
a
betes
j
`g
à
COEFFICIENTS
2 5 is
bite
/ ,
2 /4
s é 8 40
GENERATIONS
Curves of inbreeding, showing (a) the limiting case of continued
brother x sister breeding, wherein the successive coefficients of inbreeding have
the maximum values; (b) continued parent x offspring mating; and (c) continued
first-cousin x first-cousin mating.
The values of the Z’s in Table I are maxima: No par-
ticular coefficient of inbreeding can have a higher value
than that given in the table. It is not possible, for ex-
ample, so to breed any animal (having an obligate
bisexual type of reproduction) that its pedigree on analy-
sis will give Z, > 87.5. If, therefore, the coefficients of
Table I are plotted the result will be the maximum limit-
ing curve of inbreeding. This curve is shown in Fig. 1.
In all actually realized pedigrees except those in which
there has been continued brother X sister breeding the
curve of inbreeding found will lie wholly or in part below
the maximum curve shown in Fig. 1.
No. 562] THE PROBLEM OF INBREEDING 589
Illustration II. Parent X Offspring Breeding
The next illustration of the application of coefficients
of inbreeding will be the general case of back-crossing,
that is, the mating of parent X offspring. Such a case is
illustrated in the hypothetical pedigree Table IV..
PEDIGREE TABLE IV. (Hypothetical)
To Illustrate the Breeding of Parent X Offspring
fee
d | |
A
oe
||
scsi |
"AASA BY Ji
1]
|
|
|
Generation Number 1
Here it will be seen that b, the dam of y, is a daughter
of a, who is also the sire of y and that in each preceding
generation every daughter is bred back to her sire. Pro-
ceeding as before to calculate the coefficients of inbreed-
ing we have, first,
nä ee 2) e
In forming the expression for Z, we are met by the fact
in determining gn., for generation 2 that the individual a
has already appeared once and been counted as a ‘‘differ-
ent’’ ancestor in generation 1. Therefore it will not be
counted a second time in generation 2, and we have
0.
il eran = 25,
and by the same process,
—4
Zn = Ine 0
100(16 — 5) _
a ee
590 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST (VoL. XLVII
Ža = oe ag 81.25;
and so forth.
The values of the successive coefficients for parent X
offspring breeding for 16 ancestral generations are given
in Table II.
TABLE II
VALUES OF THE SUCCESSIVE COEFFICIENTS OF INBREEDING IN THE CASE OF
CONTINUED PARENT X OFFSPRING MATING
Coefficient of Inbreeding ee e re E | IA of Coef-
Zo 1 0
Zi 2 25
Z2 3 50
Zs 4 68.75
Za 5 81.25
4 6 89.06
Ze T 93.75
Zi 8 96.48
Zs 9 98.05
Zs 10 98.93
Zi0 11 99.41
Zu 12 99.68
Zr 13 99.83
Zi3 14 99.91
Zi 15 99.95
Zis 16 99.97
By comparison of this table with Table I it is evident
that while the increase in intensity of inbreeding is not
so rapid in the first few ancestral generations by this
parent X offspring type of breeding as with the brother
X sister type, by the time the tenth ancestral generation
is reached the values are for practical purposes the same.
The curve of inbreeding for continued parent X off-
spring breeding is shown in Fig. 1.
Illustration III. First-Cousin X First-Cousin Breeding
As a third illustration may be taken the case of con-
tinued cousin mating. Such breeding represents the next
step in decreasing intensity of inbreeding beyond the
parent X offspring type.
In this pedigree it will be seen that in each mating the
sires of the individuals bred together are brothers. In
other words, each individual is mated with its first-
cousin.
No. 562] THE PROBLEM OF INBREEDING 591
PEDIGREE TABLE V. (Hypothetical)
To Illustrate the Continued Breeding of First-Cousin X First-Cousin
| | 17
| “4 2
| g 3
| | n 4
sf 1
0
h | :
P 6
a 4 1
i | "R 2
. 7
|
Le 1
: | q 2
J 9
>
A z
oY 2
g á 11
12
| a
| s 2
| h | ; 13
| 14
eax? = 1
| 2
7 | 15
| 16
aa
| | 2
| o | ee
| | po 18
| | |
___Generation Number | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 l 5
The values of the successive coefficients of inbreeding
for this case are given in Table III. The calculation of
these is carried out in accordance with the same principles
as have been illustrated in the previous cases. We have
2—2
neeo,
and
100(4 — 4
a
since in generations 1 and 2 there are two and four difer-
ent ancestors respectively.
100(8 — 6)
n= = 95,
8
"Owing to the limitation of the alphabet resort is had to numbers to
designate individuals in this generation.
592 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLVII
since in generation 3 the two individuals g and h each ap-
pear twice, and by our rule any ancestor is only counted
once,
ee aoe 10) = 375,
since in generation 4 the individuals m and n appear four
times and are only counted as different ancestors once
each.
TABLE III
VALUES OF THE SUCCESSIVE COEFFICIENTS OF INBREEDING IN THE CASE OF
ONTINUED FIRST-COUSIN X FIRST-COUSIN MATING
Costiieient of Theresding ypu og Numerical eons of Coeffi
Zo 1 0
Zı 2 0.
Z2 3 25
Z3 4 37.5
Zi 5 43.75
Zs 6 46.88
Zs 7 48.44
Zi 8 49,22
Zs 9 49.61
Zs 10 49.80
Zio 11 49.90
Zu 12 49.95
Z12 13 49.98
Zu 14 49.988
Zu 15 49.
Zis 16 49.9969
It will be seen from this table that the upper limit of
intensity of inbreeding approached by continued cousin
matings is 50 per cent. In general, cousin mating is one
half as intense a form of inbreeding as brother X sister
mating, with a lag of one generation behind. That is Zs
for cousin matings is one half as large as Z, (not Z,) for
brother X sister matings.
The curve of inbreeding for cousin matings is given in
Fig. 1.
Illustration IV. The Pedigree of the Thoroughbred
Horse, Postumus
Leaving now the hypothetical cases we may consider
some actually realized pedigrees, and measure the degree
of inbreeding exhibited. I have chosen as a first case of
No. 562] THE PROBLEM OF INBREEDING 593
this sort a very simple one in which there is little inbreed-
ing. This is the pedigree for five ancestral generations
of the thoroughbred horse, Postumus. This pedigree is
given by Bunsow,$ and is here reproduced without change
of arrangement, although the plan used of placing the
dam above the sire instead of below is contrary to the
general American and continental usage.
PEDIGREE TABLE VI
Showing the Breeding of Postumus
Euxine Mb aba
: ing Tom
g Maid of Wye | Sidala Mrs. Ridgway
= akepa
g Isola Bella Stockwell
= Pa Fernandez Whi
5 Sterling ad
E es
3 Sunshine esis
oa Š Napoli eroen
2 Macaroni | Sweetmeat
fo) Rouge Rose | aha on
n Bend Or | Marigol
E Doncaster | Stockwell
3 Little Fairie {avert
£ Adeline Margaret
& Ton | “ese
<
j Pocahontas pean
nı | | King Tom | pr
= | | f Fanny Dawson filly
S | Harkaway | | Economist
Ja ea o i tan
Ü | a | Flying Duchess : | f Barbelle
E | Flying Dutchman | Boy Middleton
E | Mrs. Ridgway | Aartee
| | Vedette k | Î Martha Lynn
| \ Voltigeur | X Voltaire
Gen. No. | 1 | 2 | 3 4 | z
In this pedigree every animal that has already ap-
peared in a lower ancestral generation is marked with an
“X,” indicating that it is to be ‘‘counted out,” that is,
can not be regarded again as a different ancestor.
_ We then have for the successive coefficients of inbreed-
ing the following values:
Bunsow, R., ‘‘Inheritance in Race Horses,’’ Mendel Journal, Vol. I,
pp. 74-93, 1911.
594 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
Zo ais 0,
si OE 8).
A= 4 =
E 008-8) i
aa i = 0,
OMENS = 38) e oe
ane 16 m 6.25,
2—2
Z, = cn DR = 15.625.
From these results it is possible to make a precise
statement as to how much Postumus was inbred. In the
five ancestral generations, to which the pedigree extends,
he was inbred to an extent (15.6 per cent.) which repre-
sents approximately three fifths of the intensity of in-
breeding involved in once mating first cousins. In other
words, if in the first ancestral generation, a mating of
first cousins had occurred, and there had been no other —
mating of relatives whatever, Postumus would in that
event have been nearly twice as much inbred as he actu-
ally was.
In the first three ancestral generations Postumus was
not at all inbred, and in the first four only 6.25 per cent.,
an intensity equal to about one fourth of that involved in
once mating parent X offspring.
These figures are definite pedigree constants for the
horse Postumus, which are directly comparable with
similar constants for other animals.
Illustration V. The Pedigree of the Brown Swiss
Bull, Saxton (2668)
We may next consider a more complex case, in which
the intensity of inbreeding is greater, and in which the
calculation of the coefficients is not so simple a matter be-
cause of the length of the pedigree. On this account the
method of computation will be illustrated in detail. As
before the “X” with an animal’s name indicates that it
has appeared at least once before in the lower ancestral
generations and can not therefore be counted again. The
pedigree of Saxton, a bull of the Brown-Swiss breed of
cattle, is given as Pedigree Tables VII-XVI.
THE PROBLEM OF INBREEDING 595
No. 562]
9
¥ g Z | T oN ‘uag
‘(peqsoduiy) weyoyery
‘(payzoduiy) ƏL WM TORRI
‘TAX 9G8,L 9013tped 0} 0) ‘neaj3unpf 4 Sunog
“AX 91Q8,L 2451pƏd 0} OF "TPL ALJO IPI Cad ar ad
(peyzodury) ruoyog ; : oe | =
REE ysroping hes
(poy1odury) oyredeuog : 8
(peyzodury) 1314 | | 7 ;
əyouvjg xX 37ed .
oyredeuog X MaD MLL ©
(pejtodury) ssepszem poy a IITA 98N
‘AIX QLL 23pəd 0) 0 TMOL BIN ;
(pojsodury) əyouejg | əyedreuog Appa #
‘(poqyaodmy) əyedeuog @ PANO ae =
*(peqtoduy) vAasuer) :
‘(poqzodury) TPL aoa | ee foie: Pi 8
ae Cau) 19G Yorrepey
IUOJLS
EEN ppe \ pug Boreng X
EYONWX PeH @
x maf TTeysre yl x °
‘TITX 19%, 00131pod 03 04 *194S9H in
‘ITX 91981, 29131pəd 0} ONTO, osvoroUy TRU
‘IX 9148], 915rpəd 0} 09 ‘PIPIN N
‘X 9148], 9o13Iped 0} OY) ‘MƏ,L 19489'T TAL JOULE
; yvuuey @ uopmg
oui @ J yeuueg i
ors ; oorureyg
XI 248], 29131þpƏd 0} 04 “AAT an
‘IIIA ®19%,.L 2913rpəd 0} OF ‘omyyof
uogæng fo Bbupaasg ay, Gumoyy
TIA @IAV I, AauDIaaq
[Vou. XLVII
THE AMERICAN NATURALIST
596
£ | Z | I VON uD
EREA E ER Ty
XxX X
(peytoduly) votoeng
ByIONIT e
|
|
(wep ut pəziod
(urep ut
peywodwy) pug wərnəng
-“W]) TPMeP eys
(paqsoduiy) a)
(pezrodury) vuyjeg |
qoywe yy |
(peqzodury) vyjQ0npy
(urep
ur poyodwy) ysnq ppop
eqeus
owr
(uo}xeg Jo wed) pz 8qəqS
moyxeg
panujuog—ITA TIV ATADA
No. 562] THE PROBLEM OF INBREEDING 597
PEDIGREE TABLE VIII—Continuation of VII
x — s SUE;
® Gold Dust l z E
XBrunnen
Jethro r
X Frederick Schiller e
© Hannah ie Albert Tell (Imp.)
TARO XGeneva (Imp.)
Gen
No. 7 8 9
PEDIGREE TABLE IX—Continuation of VII
pa A aa OS ee
@ Marshall Jewell x Se
X Muotta
Ivy è Albert Tell (Imp.)
David G. Tell T E
. oe (Imp.)
Lola
@ Minnie ey
th etl fan
Gen.
No T 8 9
= PEDIGREE TABLE X—Continuation of VII
= XAlbert Tell ea a
= | | @ Increase Tell x EE
z | X Brinlie (Imported) x
Fa - xWm. “Tell (Imp.)
2 S i © Wm. Tell, Jr. | \ XZurich (Imp.)
K oO ome M | m. Tell (Imp.)
a | yra | | @ Geneva (Imp.)
oOo t
$ | @ Wm. Tell | z
S | | Forest Tell Sie
a | Lissa (Imported)
©
= xX Wm. Tell (Imp.
b n (J Robert Tell X Brinlie (Imp.)
owslip Éi @ Wm. Tell (Imp.)
| stelle @ Lissa (Imp.)
Gen. |
No. | 7 | 8 9 10
In dealing with this pedigree it will be assumed, in the
absence of information on the point and the impossibility
of acquiring any, that any imported animal was not in-
bred to any degree whatsoever.
This is probably not
often strictly true, but, on the other hand, some assump-
tion must be made, and this puts all individuals on an
equal footing. It is in accord with the principle laid down
earlier (p. 585) that in pedigree analysis all individuals
598 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ VoL. XLVII
PEDIGREE TABLE XI—Continuation of VII
x anaiai
x — C o
@ Albert Tell ee x
George a acon
Tell XWm. Tell .
ge] e Ethel x
È X Lucerne (Imp.)
Z e Ren
= xWm. Tell :
@® Wm. Tell, Jr. x
x<Zurich (Imp.) x
Metta
© Robert Tell Win, Tell (Imp. 9
Daffodil k ad XWm. Tell (Imp.)
er X Lissa (Imp.)
Gen.
No. fg 8 9 oe 10 eee
PEDIGREE TABLE XII—Continuation of VII
Increase @ Albert Tell (Imp.) |
Tell Brinlie (Imp.) |
Gen. No. | 7 | 8 | 9 eure
PEDIGREE TABLE XIII—Continuation of VII
© Wm. Tell s
Henry Clark Tell Verona
(Imported in dam) | | @ Bri
Ba er Imp
® Wm. Tell x SRS Aa,
| Minnie x seer
@ Gretchen x i
Gen. No. ri 8 9
must be considered to be unrelated until the contrary is
proven by the evidence of their ancestry. After all, the
only thing we can possibly measure is the inbreeding
shown in the recorded pedigree. All that has happened
prior to the beginning of the record must be a matter of
assumption. The same assumption should, however, be
made for all cases. What this assumption really means
practically is that, in all cases of analysis of actual pedi-
grees, which are bound after a time to come to an end, the
values of the coefficients of inbreeding obtained are lower
limiting values. They signify that the intensity of in-
breeding in a particular case could not have been less
THE PROBLEM OF INBREEDING 599
No. 562]
ZI IL or 6 8 2 | ‘ON wp
es t aaisa x =
eth ee x
AEN s = x
mM 8 a —
A X es x
POSES LS: x 15
x = Í ry 7
SENS ESS x
one 5 J X
s x mI
She x x z
CRIES bs x Sear hue x
— s — Fil 4g
x usp X € =-
— x SEA x &
Ai x uE @
RE x TOL 'UM X
x er: x
fe dary) 6 euloony X | TAL Ory
Cawr) PL "MX PPa- A
(Cdwu) yonng X E N | neysune X
Cawr) LM X TTA AT )
(dur) ueyojornn X | IPL dd @
(aw) oL UM X oruuryy Xx |
Cawr) oyuug X i HOL Omeqo X
x
CAUT) MOL UM
TEL 14°90
IIA fo uonpnunyuop—AIX Wav,
TAADIMAA
[Von. XLVII
THE AMERICAN NATURALIST
ELLELE EERTE
(‘dury) un
Caur) POL UM
KK KK KK KK KK KKK KK KK KK KOK XX XXX XX XX X X
—w
PYA
“Af TOL UM
ouu
IL Heqo"y
A a a w l lee eee iia lie”
a eM Re RR E a RS eee ee ee
uyog
IPE “UM
neaysune
TAL LYO
upmMeVy X
IPL Hyd X
IPL UFI @
600
POINUYUOQ—AIX TIV,
(TƏLIIN JO We IL Bsmo(
TPL 3IN
No. 562] THE PROBLEM OF INBREEDIN G 601
PEDIGREE TABLE X VI—Continuation of VII
| EE
© Wm. Tell | { è
Wm. Tell, Jr. |
Jung- Zurich (Imp.) |
a, © Wm. Tell | { s
Ethel |
Lucerne (Imp.) |
|
Gen. |
No. 7 k nD | 9
PEDIGREE TABLE XV—Continuation of VII
A © Wm. Tell e SE
g Robert Tell S
z ® Brinlie x
E xWm. Tell S
O ® Minnie x
Gretchen x
Gen
_No. | 7 8 9
than that indicated; it may have been more. Whether it
= Was or not is not a question open to scientific determina-
tion but only to speculation. Furthermore, of course,
experimental breeding with ‘‘wild’’ animals is on exactly
the same footing as herd-book work in regard to this
point. Every experiment must begin somewhere with
unknown stock.
In the twelfth ancestral generation the theoretically
possible number of different ancestors is 4,096. Ina rela-
tively long pedigree like that of Saxton it would obviously
be an extremely tedious business to determine the value of
q by direct counting, as has been done in the preceding
simpler illustrations. The calculation of the coefficients
of inbreeding may be greatly simplified in the case of long
pedigrees by a system of counting which makes the line
of descent the unit rather than the individual. This sys-
tem is used in the above pedigree. While each individual
animal which is eliminated because of previous appear-
ances in a lower ancestral generation is marked with an
X, those at the apex of a line of descent are marked
with a solid circle. These latter are all that need to be
counted directly. Their elimination automatically elimi-
602 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST — [Vou. XLVII
nates their own ancestors. Thus the bull Hamlet first
appears in the third ancestral generation as the sire of
Sheba. He next appears (here marked with a solid circle)
in the fourth generation as the sire of Salome. He will,
by the general rule for coefficients of inbreeding, not be
counted as a ‘‘different’’ ancestor in the fourth genera-
tion. But this automatically eliminates his two parents in
the fifth ancestral generation, his four grandparents in
TABLE IV
WORKING TABLE USED IN CALCULATING THE COEFFICIENTS OF INBREEDING
FOR PEDIGREE TABLE VII
Ancestral Generation
Animal er
| 4 5 6 4 8 9 10 11 12
Leb: oc eta ae 1 2 4 8 | 16 32 64 128 256
The Grove wer spana 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128
Muttienet ince oo 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128
Pai a ee EN RN 1 2 4 8 16 32
LETETT fc Gee an Sas 1 2 4 8 16 32 64
Bonaparte ciie n E 1 vee ee * 8 16 32 64
Gold Dust iis 2945 So 1 2 4 8 16 32
Hantiah nurs 1 2 4 8 16 32
Marshall Jewell.......... 1 2 4 8 16 32
Albert T. ee 1 2 4 8 16 32
BG ry N E NA 1 3 4 8 16 32
Mine. ESE 1 2 4 8 16
Increase Tl: ouin t 2 4 8 16
Albert Ta... ac: 1 2 4 8 16
Bee es 1 2 4 8 16
Wri. Tol, Jee a 1 2 4 8 16
T E 1 2 4 8 16
Wri Te pi or eos 1 2 4 8 16
Crotha o ea 1 2 4 8 16
e Cee ee 1 2 fe B 16
Eat TE es ae. 1 2 4 8 16
PHONE G6, is ek eee 1 z 4 8 16
Woe TOR oh a ees 1 2 4 8 16
Wile S A 1 2 4 8 16
Wo Taaa 1 2 4 8 16
ie Pc E a 1 2 4 8 16
Albans TE. oe. | 1 2 4 8
Goa aA. . 1 2 4 8
Wa Teh I. a 1 2 4 8
T a 1 2 4 8
Robat Tal. es: 1 2 4 8
Ropert Telli oo 1 z 4 8
Meta oo ge 1 2 4 8
ee RE 1 i 4 $
Pian DTe a 1 2 4 8
Pao aa. 1 - 4 A
T eo ae rG 1 -< Å
E a V a 1 2 :
ate o o i a
ena earn Ena A 2) a Mo. R Oe A ee 1 2 ?
Towle Gs 1 | 4 | 11 |27 |69 | 148 | 300 | 600 | 1200
No. 562] THE PROBLEM OF INBREEDING 603
the sixth generation, and so on until in the twelfth genera-
tion 256 ancestors of Hamlet will be so eliminated. The
same consideration applies in every other like case.
Practically then the method of dealing with a pedigree
of this sort is first to go through and indicate in a distine-
tive way every primary® reappearance of individuals.
Then form a table on the plan of Table IV, the character
of which is so obvious as not to need detailed explanation.
This table is to be read in the following way: Because
of the reappearance of Hamlet in the fourth ancestral
generation Saxton has 1 fewer ancestors in that genera-
tion than he would have had in the entire absence of in-
breeding; 2 fewer in the fifth generation and so on. The
totals of the columns of this table are the values, for
each generation, of
Prva E IAR dn+ı
in (iii). These totals, multiplied by 100, have then merely
to be divided by pr, in order to obtain the successive Z’s.
The whole operation may be very quickly carried out. It
is not in fact necessary to fill out the whole of the later
columns of the table, the entries may be cumulated.
For the present pedigree we have
Z., = 9, as always,"
— 1,100/64— 17.19,
s = 2,700 /128 — 21.09,
* By ‘‘primary’’ reappearance in the pedigree is meant a reappearance
as the sire or dam of an individual which has not itself appeared before in
the lower ancestral generations. Thus Wm. Tell makes a primary reappear-
ance in the tenth ancestral generation as the sire of Myra, a cow which is
not found in any generation below the ninth
* The apparent paradox implied in the fact that Z, must always be zero,
or, in other words, that in the first ancestral generation, considered alone,
these is no inbreeding will be cleared up, if it strikes the reader as para-
doxieal, by a reconsideration of the general principle numbered 5 on p. 585.
e point, of course, is that it is impossible to say whether the parents are
or are not related Pm one another until something is known of their parentage,
or, in other words, until a second ancestral generation is considered.
n
“Ly sed
Zo =0,
Z = 6.25 per cent.,
Z, = 400/32 = 12.50,
Z
Z
604 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
Z, —6,900/256— 26.95,
Z, =14,800/512 — 28.91,
Z, —30,000/1,024— 29.30,
Zn 00.80,
Z 329,30.
From these values it is seen that, so far as the ancestry
is known the bull Saxton is 29.3 per cent. inbred. The
curve of inbreeding, Fig. 2, shows that this intensity was
gradually and steadily attained, by slight additional in-
breeding in each generation. In the end (always within
the limitation of the known ancestry) Saxton is some 4
per cent. more closely inbred than he would have been
had his dam been his sire’s daughter, without other in-
breeding in the ancestry. In the first five ancestral gen-
erations Saxton is less intensely inbred than Postumus.
A
CORT ONE 7S
Y
oe
al
y
4 70 “2
é
Fig. 2. Curve of inbreeding of the bull Saxton.
COEFFICIENTS OF INBREEDING AND THE GAMETIC CONSTITU-
TION OF THE INDIVIDUAL
Up to this point the whole discussion has looked at the
problem of inbreeding solely from the standpoint of the
kinship of mated individuals. Nothing whatever has
been said about the germinal make-up of the individuals.
This method of treatment was not accidental, or due to
any oversight of so important a phase of the problem, but
was deliberately planned to bring out clearly that the
development of the coefficient of inbreeding was quite
independent of any theory of the mechanism of the hered-
itary process. These coefficients measure a real and
definite attribute of a pedigree.
No. 562] THE PROBLEM OF INBREEDING 605
But is the thing measured worth measuring? Does any
significance attach to knowing how much an animal is
inbred in the kinship sense? I think there is no doubt
that every breeder of the larger domestic animals would
answer this question in the affirmative. The question,
however, demands careful consideration, because of the
suggestion recently advanced that the effect of inbreed-
ing, if there be any, depends entirely upon the nature of
the combinations of hereditary units (genes) formed.
Thus, for example, we have the suggestion of Bruce" to
the effect that the vigor of the individual increases as the
number of dominant elements in its hereditary make-up
increases, while an increase of recessive elements con-
notes a decrease in physiological vigor. A thorough and
far-reaching discussion of the problem of the relation
between the gametic constitution of the individual and its
physiological characteristics is to be found in the very
valuable paper by East and Hayes’? on heterozygosis.
The most significant conclusions of that paper in the
present connection are these :'*
Stimulus to development is greater when certain, or possibly all,
characters are in the heterozygous condition than when they are in a
homozygous condition.
This stimulus to development is cumulative up to a limiting point and
varies directly with the number of heterozygous factors in the organism,
although it is recognized that some of the factors may have a more
powerful action than others.
These conclusions appear to be supported beyond any
chance of doubt or question, for certain characters of
plants subjected to self-fertilization, by the experimental
evidence set forth in the paper. Inbreeding tends, accord-
ing to these authors, to isolate homozygous strains
“‘which lack the physiological vigor due to heterozygosity.
Decrease in vigor due to inbreeding lessens with decrease
of heterozygosity and vanishes with the isolation of a
completely homozygous strain. Moreover, these homo-
“ Science, N. S., Vol. 32, pp. 627-628, 1910.
™ East, E. M., and Hayes, H. K., ‘‘Heterozygosis in Evolution and in
Plant Breeding,’’ U. S. Dept. Agr., Bur. Plant Ind. Bulletin No. 243,
pp. 1-58, 1912.
* Loe. oit, p. 8.
606 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [VoL. XLVII
_zygous strains can be quite different from each other in
actual inherent vigor. . . . Thus we see the true explana-
tion of the apparent degeneration that so many observers
have attributed to inbreeding per se” (p. 37).
As has been said the experimental data of East and
Hayes are derived solely from the results of self-ferti-
lizing plants. Self-fertilization is in one sense the closest
of all possible forms of inbreeding (since qanı = 1), but it
involves at least one difference in principle from the
closest inbreeding which it is possible to accomplish in
obligate bisexual forms. This difference is in the fact
that while, on the one hand, if a population is subjected to
self-fertilization generation after generation the propor-
tionate number of pure homozygotes in the population
automatically increases,’ there is, on the other hand,
absolutely no such automatic increase in the proportion
of homozygotes necessarily following any other sort of
inbreeding except self-fertilization.
The proportion of homozygotes can only be increased
during continued inbreeding other than by self-fertiliza-
tion, if there is at the same time a continued selection
(assortative mating) of gametically like individuals.
While this point seems to have been quite generally
overlooked the proof of these above statements is very
simple, and anyone can work it out for himself. It follows,
indeed, directly from Pearson’s'® demonstration that the
individuals of the segregating generation, if they breed
at random inter se, will ‘‘continue to reproduce them-
selves in the same proportion as a stable population.’’?°
Pearson, at the conclusion of his analytical proof, says:
‘Tt is thus clear that the apparent want of stability in a
Mendelian population, the continued segregation and
ultimate disappearance of the heterozygotes, is solely a
34 As has been shown incidentally by East and Hayes (loc. cit.), and in a
very clear and detailed manner by Jennings (AMER. Nart., Vol. XLVI, pP.
487-491, 1912).
* Pearson, K., Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc. (A), Vol. 203, pp. 59 and 60, og
G, H. Hardy (Science, N. S., Vol. XXVIII, pp. 49-50, 1908) has given
a proof of this same point. Cf. also Spillman (ibid., Vol. XXVIII, pP-
252-254, 1908).
No. 562] THE PROBLEM OF INBREEDING 607
result of self-fertilization;'? with random cross-fertiliza-
tion there is no disappearance of any class whatever in
the offspring of the hybrids, but each class continues to be
reproduced in the same proportion.’’ This is exactly the
point of distinction made above between self-fertilization
and all other forms of inbreeding.
The objection will at once be raised that inbreeding is
not ‘‘random cross-fertilization.’’ But gametically it is,
unless prevented from so being by some sort of associa-
tive mating on a gametic basis. As I have shown in an
earlier section the most general form of the concept of
inbreeding possible is that of the diminished number of
different actual ancestors in proportion to the maximum
number possible. But surely the existence of relatively
few ancestors in itself can involve no necessary implica-
tion as to the gametic constitution of those ancestors, so
far as concerns homozygosis or heterozygosis.
Analytically the proof is as follows: Let us start with
the condition of complete heterozygosis, and consider
what will be the result of the closest possible inbreeding
(aside from self-fertilization), namely the continued
breeding of brother X sister, in a population all the indi-
viduals of which are heterozygous with reference to one
alternative character pair A and a, these characters
being, by hypothesis, not sex-linked. All the individuals
will then have the constitution Aa. This will be true of
all males and all females whether they stand in the rela-
tion to each other of brother and sister or not. Let all
matings be of the brother X sister type. The offspring
of the next generation will be in no wise affected by this
fact, of course, but only by the constitution of the indi-
viduals mated. We shall then have the population of
male progeny constituted as follows:
AA
Aa
Aa x Aa= ad males.
aa
The population of female progeny will evidently exhibit
exactly the same distribution, namely
“My italics, R. P.
608 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
AA
Aa
AaxX Aa= ay females.
aa
Now since the above expressions give not only the
probable distributions of the characters in the whole
progeny population, but also the probable distribution of
these characters within any single family, it necessarily
implies that the constitution of the sister of any male is
equally likely to be any one of the four possible combina-
tions. Or, in other words,
The constitution of any particular sister of any partic-
ular AA J is equally likely to be either AA, or Aa, or
aA, or aa.
The constitution of any particular sister of any partic-
ular Aa (or aA) ¢ is equally likely to be either AA,
or Aa, or aA, or aa.
The constitution of any particular sister of any partic-
ular aa ĝ is equally likely to be either AA, or Aa, or
aA, or aa.
This clearly means that the progeny of the next gen-
eration produced, by hypothesis, from the mating of
brothers X sisters of this generation will be gametically
such a progeny as it produced by mating at random a
male population of the constitution
AA+2Aa+ aa
with a female population of the same constitution, namely
AA + 2Aa-+ aa.
But, as Pearson's first showed, this results in a progeny
1644 + 324a + 16aa.
There is no increase in the proportion of homozygotes,
which was the point to be proved. Of course the same
reasoning obtains in regard to the next and any number
of other generations. In other words the proof is general
and complete that no increase of the proportion of homo-
zygotes in the population follows inbreeding save under
one or the other of two special conditions, viz.
2 Loc. cit,
No. 562] THE PROBLEM OF INBREEDING 609
(a) Continued self-fertilization.
(b) Some form of gametic assortative mating which
increases the natural probability of like gametes uniting
to form zygotes.
- Really, of course, (a) is only one special form of (b).
Not only is self-fertilization the closest sort of inbreeding
possible when conceived in the sense of the idea of in-
breeding defined and developed in this paper, but also it
is necessarily the most extreme form of homogamy pos-
sible. No other kind of inbreeding is necessarily homo-
gamic. It of course may be, and in actual practise very
often is homogamic, but to make it so selection of some
sort is necessary.
The above proofs deal with but one character pair, A, a.
By induction the proof could be extended to any number
of such pairs. There is a point which needs to be kept in
mind here, however. This is that the whole reasoning
applies only to such genetic differences as are left in the
strain after the operation of inbreeding. As will be
shown presently the number of original genetic differ-
ences in a stock is reduced by inbreeding in a manner
which is precisely measured by the coefficients here
proposed.!® But there is no tendency for continued in-
breeding to increase, the proportion of homozygotes,
with respect to those characters in regard to which
there are genetic differences left after any partic-
ular inbreeding operation. Further it should be under-
stood that the elimination of genetic differences from a
strain is not through homozygosis, but by the dropping
out entirely from the network of descent of individuals
which potentially may bear such differences.
The above discussion makes it evident that there is a
fundamental distinction between inbreeding in general
and the special case of self-fertilization. Before leaving
this phase of the matter it seems desirable to discuss In
a little more detail certain terminological usages of
workers in the field of plant breeding together with their
*Seé p. 612 infra.
610 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
implications.” The custom has grown up (notably in the
work of Shull and East) of using the term ‘‘inbreeding’’
when self-fertilization is really meant. I think it would
be difficult, in view of the considerations already set forth
in detail, to justify this usage on general grounds. In
any event it is clear that when the term inbreeding is
used in the sense of self-fertilization it is not used in its
ordinary sense. The plant-breeder rarely carries out a
mating which is strictly comparable with the matings
which the animal breeder makes when he inbreeds. The
closest inbreeding possible with animals is the continued
mating of brother and sister. How often does the plant-
breeder make a mating which is objectively exactly this?
It is assumed, specifically and implicitly, by the plant-
breeder that his method of inbreeding by self-fertilization
is equivalent to methods of inbreeding practised in
animals. On the basis of that assumption he compares
the results in the two cases. Can such a comparison be
regarded as a strictly just one, until it has in fact been
proven to be so by concrete evidence? I think it can not,
because it rests on an assumption which is not only un-
proven, but which, as I have endeavored to show, is con-
trary to fact.
On just this ground, it seems to me, the section of the
paper of East and Hayes devoted to an ‘‘ Extension of
the Conclusions to the Animal Kingdom’? is weakened.
From this section I have been unable to understand
precisely what the concept in the minds of these authors
as to inbreeding in animals really is. They nowhere
sharply define their concept of inbreeding. Throughout
the portion of the paper dealing with plants it appears
In taking the paper of East and Hayes as the text for the following
discussion there is not the slightest implication of a desire to criticize that
most excellent piece of work in general. In the writer’s opinion it must be
one
particular phase of the problem of inbreeding which has yet appeared.
pon the experimental work and so much of the conclusions as directly
relate to the actual experiments I have no criticism whatever to make.
The only point in regard to which the paper seems to me possibly open W
criticism is the treatment of the problem of inbreeding in animals. lr
here it is possible that I have not correctly understood the authors’ position,
No. 562] THE PROBLEM OF INBREEDING 611
clearly enough that practically they make inbreeding syn-
onymous with self-fertilization. But here it is not so
clear. The discussion in the first two paragraphs on p. 41
of the paper seem to me to indicate that in animals East
and Hayes would make homozygosity the criterion of
inbreeding. Thus they say:
But let us confine the discussion to the lower animals. If this is
done there are two things to consider, the closeness of matings and their
result. The statement is often made that self-fertilization in plants is a
much closer sexual relationship than can obtain in bisexual animals.
With a germ-to-germ transmission conception of heredity it is doubtful
if this is true. Thus it is perfectly clear that it is not kinship of the
organisms furnishing the sex cells that determines the closeness of the
mating, but the similarity of the constitution of the cells themselves.
On this account the statement must be made very emphatie that in-
vestigations such as studies of cousin marriages in the human race
amount to nothing, A cousin marriage may be a wide cross, it may be
very narrow.
But surely to make homozygosity, either of mated indi-
viduals or of progeny, a criterion of inbreeding is an un-
tenable position. It is the easiest of matters to do either
of the following things:
(a) To produce homozygous offspring from the mating
of heterozygous parents (one half of all the offspring of
such parents will be homozygous).
(b) To produce heterozygous offspring from the con-
tinued mating of brother sister.
(c) To produce homozygous offspring in any numbers,
indeed to found and perpetuate a strain purely homo-
zygous with reference to any desired character or char-
acters, without ever mating together even distantly
related individuals, not to mention brother and sister.
If all of these things are possible, as they certainly are,
what becomes of any attempt to make homozygosity a
criterion of inbreeding? All effects hitherto attributed
to inbreeding may conceivably be due to homozygosity.
Tam sure, however, that even East and Hayes themselves
would not contend that this had been proven experi-
mentally for animals. But even granting this to be so it
but if so no harm will be done by a further clarifying discussion of so
‘Amportant a problem.
612 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
would not mean that the mating of brother and sister was
not inbreeding, or that it was the equivalent of self-
fertilization.
The position of East and Hayes, as indicated in the
quotations given, seems to me to amount to a proposition
to throw away entirely as meaningless all kinship ele-
ments in genetic descent. Is this not a bit premature?
It is true that ‘‘a cousin marriage may be a wide cross,
it may be very narrow.’’ But does this fact justify from
the standpoint of experimental science, and in the present
state of knowledge, the generalization of the preceding
sentence: ‘‘the statement must be made very emphatic
that investigations such as studies of cousin marriages
in the human race amount to nothing?’’ Is not the real
task of science here to investigate and compare cousin
marriages which are wide crosses and cousin mar-
riages which are narrow ones? In other words, there
would appear to be two variables here, not one. I can
not regard the results of East and Hayes, important as
they are, as justifying the closure of a field of experi-
mental science in which as yet very little has been done.
Returning now to the main problem it may be inquired:
What, if any, is the relation of the coefficients of inbreed-
ing to zygotic constitution? Do the coefficients tell us
anything regarding this matter? A little consideration
shows that they do. The successive coefficients of in- |
breeding indicate the rate and degree to which the pos:
sible number of different heredity unit factors present in
the ancestry is subsequently reduced as a result of in-
breeding. They give no indication, as has already ap-
peared, of the condition in which the remaining factors
are present (i. e., whether in homozygous or heterozygous
condition). The meaning here will be clear if a concrete
example is considered. When one brother and sister
mating is made 50 per cent. of the maximum possible
number of different ancestors is eliminated. It is at least
readily conceivable, if indeed it can not be said to be
highly probable, that no two individuals among higher
animals and plants are exactly alike in zygotic constitu-
No. 562] THE PROBLEM OF INBREEDING 613
tion when all hereditary characters are taken into account.
This means, in last analysis, that each individual must
differ from every other by at least one unit factor, pos-
sibly more. Once mating of brother and sister will dimin-
ish the number of such differences by 50 per cent. from
what it would have been had no such mating occurred.
The number of homozygous individuals with respect to
the hereditary differences remaining, however, will not
increase. This is practically equivalent to saying that
while self-fertilization increases the proportion of indi-
viduals homozygous with reference to all characters, the
closest inbreeding other than self-fertilization, if con-
tinued, increases the proportion of characters with
respect to which all individuals are homozygous. Then
while both processes tend towards uniformity in the
progeny, it is a different kind of uniformity obtained in
a different way, in the one case from what it is in the
other.
While in the above discussion only brother X sister
mating is mentioned it is clear that the same reasoning
applies regarding the meaning of the coefficients of in-
breeding in all other types of mating.
There are other theoretical relations of inbreeding
coefficients which are of interest, but to discuss them in
detail here would take us altogether too far afield in the
analytical side of determinantal inheritance theories.
CoNcLUDING REMARKS
In this paper has been presented a general method of
measuring the intensity or degree of the inbreeding prac-
tised in any particular case. The method proposed is
shown to be perfectly general. It is based on no assump-
tion whatever as to the nature of the hereditary process.
On the contrary, it is founded on the most completely
logical and comprehensive definition of the concept of
inbreeding that it seems possible to formulate. This is,
in simplest form, that the fundamental objective cerite-
rion which distinguishes an inbred individual from one
not inbred is that the former has fewer different ancestors
614 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
than the latter. It is believed that the proposed coeffi-
cients of inbreeding may be made extremely useful in
studies of the problem of the effect of inbreeding, whether
in relation to its purely theoretical aspects, or in the prac-
tical fields of stock-breeding and eugenics. In discussing
the relation of the proposed coefficients of inbreeding to
the zygotic constitution of individuals it is shown that the
common assumption, that (a) self-fertilization, and (b)
the closest inbreeding possible with obligate bisexual
organisms (brother X sister breeding), are equivalent
processes, is not well founded in fact. The automatic
increase of the proportion of homozygotes which neces-
sarily follows continued self-fertilization does not neces-
sarily follow inbreeding of any other sort. Inbreeding
of any other type than self-fertilization, unless accom-
panied by selection, does not change the proportion of
homozygotes and heterozygotes (with reference to any
possible genetic differences) in the progeny populations.
Inbreeding reduces the number of different hereditary
factors in the stock.
THE INHERITANCE OF COAT COLOR IN HORSES
PROFESSOR W. S. ANDERSON
KENTUCKY WESLEYAN COLLEGE, WINCHESTER, Ky.
In May, 1912, I published a paper on ‘‘ The Inheritance
of Coat Color in Horses.’’ It was based on a study of the
American saddle horse. I knew at the time of my investi-
gation that A. H. Sturtevant, of Columbia University,
N. Y., had in the hands of the printer a manuscript which
gave a summary of all papers published to date on the
subject. It was my agreement with him, made at Cold
Spring Harbor, N. Y., in 1911, that when his paper was
published I was to draw on its material for another sum-
mary of the problem involved. Sturtevant’s paper, ‘‘A
Critical Examination of Recent Studies on Colour In-
heritance in Horses,’’ was published in the Journal of
Genetics, Vol. II, No. 1, Cambridge, England.
Sturtevant had published, August, 1910, in the Bio-
logical Bulletin, his study of the ‘‘Inheritance of Color
in the American Harness Horse.’’ Hurst, of England,
had based his conclusions on a study of the English
thoroughbreds. Wilson had tabulated the color of the
Shire, Clydesdale and thoroughbreds; while Harper had
given his attention to the French percherons. To these
five breeds I am now able to add the records of the saddle
horse. It is my purpose to combine the figures and draw
some conclusions from them.
My apology, if one be necessary, for devoting so much
time to the color of the horse is, that this is only a part
of a larger study, the determination of the unit charac-
ters of the horse. I hold that we can make poor progress
in this larger work until we have solved the most obvious
ones of these characters. If there is a law governing the
transmission of color, may we not infer that a law of
somewhat like nature will govern the transmission of the
more essential qualities of the horse? If it can be proved
615
616 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST (VoL. XLVII
that colors are unit characters and their inheritance
obeys the Mendelian Law of dominants and recessives, I
believe one very important step will have been taken to
solve the whole problem of breeding horses.
This problem of breeding horses is a very large one.
No other animal is quite so valuable as the horse. Im-
mense sums of money are invested in farms and studs
for his production. The value of the horses themselves
mount up to over a thousand million of dollars. In num-
ber the horses in this country are over twenty million.
The large farmers may have automobiles, engines and
other mechanical devices, but they have horses and use
them in large quantities. The small farmer’s most valu-
able possession is the faithful family horse. Yet, how
little is known about the scientific breeding of this valu-
able animal. Hogs and cattle we are producing to order,
but the production of the horse is still a haphazard busi-
ness. I believe that any effort that will aid the breeder
in producing better horses will be an effort well spent.
In going through the American Saddle-Horse Register
I secured the color in 3,913 matings, which involved the
color of 11,739 horses. To these numbers I am now able
to add from Sturtevant’s tables 8,464 matings, giving a
total of 12,377 matings or the color of 37,131 horses.
This number is sufficiently large, it seems to me, to enable
proper deductions to be drawn, unless it is in the case of
the rare colors.
The tabulated matings and the resulting foals are:
Chestnut X Chestnut
Breed Chestnut Black | Brown | Bay | Authority
| |
Thoroughbred. ..... 1095 9 (bay or brown) Hurst
E OE AR A 44 I o 1 roA Wilson
PORE bts eek ok 69 Oo a 0 0 Sturtevant
PORE, eS 224 Qi] 0 | Anderson
FOGR e rete 1432 16 not chestnut |
99% 1% l
Chestnut XBlack
77 52 13
32% | 22% | 6% | 40%
617
No. 562] COAT COLOR IN HORSES
Chestnut X Brown
mst os 44 24 23 102 Anderson
24%, 12% 12% 52%
Chestnut X Bay
Ra Re ae 318 | 36 | 27 536 Anderson
34% 4% 3% 59%
Black X Black
Percheron Pia per 0 49 2 not black Harper
BAO Ce 2 39 0 3 Wilson
Clydesdale........ 0 36 2 0 ilson
RIOR SG oc 2 34 4 2 Sturtevant
eS 5 114 | 4 0 Anderson
Taa oo. 9 272 | 12 5
3% 91% 4% 2%
Black x Brown
Thoroughbred eos 0 8 20 12 Wilson
Mies ee 4 39 36 19 Wilson
Clydesdale. ....... 1 61 106 34 ilson
FOE o ses, 1 11 5 Sturtevant
Badde u o o o 6 69 38 40 de
TO aa 12 188 209 10
2% 35% 42% 21%
Black X Bay
Thoroughbred oye 14 1 27 33 Wilson
Sa peg ee O 19 39 43 125 Wilson
Clydesdale......... 7 40 67 104 Wilson
(2. eee eo 7 16 31 48 Sturtevant
a R E oe 54 141 77 261 Anderson
WAR uo ees. 101 237 245 571
9% 22% | 21% 48%
Brown X Brown
Breed Chestnut Black Brown Bay Authority
Thoroughbred. ..... 11 6 114 78 Wilson
See es. 2 7 27 20 Wilson
Clydesdale........ 0 32 165 34 ilson
WOE os oe 0 5 7 7 Sturtevant
eee eee 0 12 19 14 derso
Tete oo 13 6 33 153
2% 11% 59% 28%
Bay X Brown
Thoroughbred. .... 123 10 365 744 Wilson
SSA E rear: 5 56 133 Wilson
Clydesdale........ 5 25 254 206 Wilson
SRO raps E 8 9 31 81 Sturtevant
Pete.. o 25 47 85 223 Anderson
Toa o nS, | 166 114 791 1387
7% 5% 32% 56%
618 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [ Vou. XLVII
Bay X Bay
Thoroughbred...... 270 1 125 1295 Wilson
bt g E EEE tee SRE eae ei 28 13 1 287 Wilson
Clydesdale........ 5 6 59 243 Wilson
Tee es ie 9 1 3 46 Sturtevant
Beadle ee oe oe. 122 58 dee 660 Anderson
Potala ek 434 79 263 2531
13% 2% 8% 77%
Gray X Not Gray
Gray Not Gray
Thoroughbred...... 73 56 Wilson
DMG See pee: oak 146 186 Wilson
Clydesdale: .:.... 9 15 Wilson
Th 141 142 Sturtevant
Badge. n 49 89 Anderson
TO erent 418 488
46% 54% ee
Gray X Gray
‘All breeds. 25.25. 47 18
72% 28%
Chestnut | Black | Brown Bay | Gray | Roan
9 | 2 go 4 go: 5) 1 eer
Roan X Black
1 | 11 | 3 | 1 | 0 | 15
Roan X Brown
1 | Bol ae ee 1 oe
Roan X Bay
9 | 5 | 12 | 38 | 1 | 50
Roan XGray
0 | O i s o o | 5 E:
Roan X Roan
0 | 0 0 | 3 | 2 | 9
It will be seen from the foregoing that out of 1,438
matings of chestnut with chestnut all the foals are
chestnut except 16. Sturtevant gives from 69 such
matings all chestnut foals. In like manner I report 224
chestnut matings producing chestnut foals.
This makes
a total of 293 foals from chestnut matings among the two
No. 562] COAT COLOR IN HORSES 619
breeds, trotter and saddle horse, without an exception.
It is true that I found in the records two bay colts re-
ported from chestnut sire and dam. The breeder of them
is still living and informs me that it is a typographical
mistake in the record. I have made diligent effort in the
last few months to find a living colt from chestnut parents
that is not chestnut itself. My efforts have been in vain,
although I have asked in the breeding journals for the in-
formation so as to give it the widest publicity.
I have no doubt that either mistakes in the record or in
the reports for registration are numerous enough to ac-
count for the 16 exceptions given in the above tabulation.
There are those chestnut horses whose color is so close to
that of a light bay that it would be marvelous if mistakes
were not made in reporting the color for registration.
Then, too, it is not always easy to determine the color the
horse is to be by examining the young foal. As a rule
the colt that has the dark mane and tail and dark legs will
shed out to be a bay, while that one which has the light
mane, tail and legs will shed to be a chestnut.
There is a tendency to blend in bay and chestnut.
While the blend is not complete by any means, its tend-
ency is apparent and at times gives trouble to foretell
the color of the mature horse. I have examined a bay
Stallion that had on his ankle a small space covered ex-
clusively with chestnut hairs. It is these animals on the
border line that are so liable to be registered bay when in
fact they are chestnut. I find numerous errors in all the
registration records which I have been able to examine.
The color of the horse has always been a minor considera-
tion in registration, the pedigree being considered the im-
portant thing. Often the pedigree is mutilated by typo-
graphical mistakes. Why should we not expect the color
to be changed in the same way?
The other writers on this subject have not given any
figures showing the behavior of chestnut when mated to
bay, brown and black. I find that black to chestnut gives:
32 per cent. chestnut, 22 per cent. black, 6 per cent. brown,
and 40 per cent. bay. Brown to chestnut gives: 24 per
620 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
cent. chestnut, 12 per cent. black, 12 per cent. brown, and
52 per cent. bay. Bay to chestnut results in: 34 per cent.
chestnut, 4 per cent. black, 3 per cent. brown, and 59 per
cent. bay. The behavior of bay with chestnut is just
what is to be expected if chestnut is recessive, as it seems
to be. But it is in the matings of chestnut with black
and brown that the real difficulty is encountered. Why
should chestnut and black matings give 40 per cent. bay,
and with brown it gives 52 per cent. bay. I must confess
that up to this time I have not found an explanation to
this. With these exceptions chestnut certainly behaves
as a recessive to all other coat colors in horses.
Another strong evidence of the hypostatic position of
chestnut is found in the matings in which it is not in-
volved in the color of either the sire or the dam. Black
X black matings give 3 per cent. chestnut foals. Black
X brown gives 2 per cent. chestnut. Black X bay gives
9 per cent. chestnut. Brown X bay gives 7 per cent.
chestnut. Brown X brown 2 per cent. chestnut. Bay X
bay gives 13 per cent. chestnut. Here are six classes of
matings with no external evidence of chestnut in the
animals mated, yet regularly there come from them chest-
nut foals. This certainly is the way a unit-character
should behave, and to behave this way it must be reces-
sive. A striking example of the recessive nature of chest-
nut is to be found in The Theorist, a chestnut trotting
bred stallion. I gave his color pedigree in The Horse-
man of December 17, 1912. The three generations im-
mediately before him are of solid colors other than chest-
nut. The fourth generation has one chestnut individual,
and the next generation two. If this is not the behavior
of a unit-character I am unable to state how a recessive
character should behave. :
There are some stallions that are homozygous for their
own colors and are unable to produce even from chestnut
mares any chestnut foals. The two trotting stallions are
Bingen and Alcyo, who, I have found, do not produce any
chestnuts, although each one has had numerous mares
who to other stallions do produce chestnut foals.
Black is dominant to chestnut and hypostatic to brown,
No. 562] COAT COLOR IN HORSES 621
bay, gray and roan. The percentages are from a total of
298 black X black matings: 91 per cent. black, 3 per cent.
chestnut, 4 per cent. brown, 2 per cent. bay. The brown
and bay from black matings are very small, not enough
to vitiate the conclusion that black is hypostatic to these
two colors as well as to gray and roan. Under the
present methods of registration there can be no sharp line
of demarcation between black and brown. I am confident
that as the records are now made up enough errors have
crept in, by registering browns black, to account for the
exceptions above mentioned. From true black horses
mated to true black only black and chestnut will be ob-
tained, in my opinion. The percentages of black colts
from the cross of black and brown and black and bay are
35 per cent. and 22 per cent., respectively; just about the
figures that the Mendelian law would justify.
In regard to brown and bay no little difficulty is en-
countered. Wilson says:
The relative positions of bay and brown remain to be settled; and
although there is evidence in favor of brown being dominant to bay, this
conclusion is not clearly established. It must be remembered these are
the colours breeders have the greatest difficulty in discriminating; and
errors effect sires and dams and foals. In regard to sires it has been
possible to correct the registered colors in several cases; and while
every correction has increased the evidence in favor of brown being
dominant, it is still possible there may be other explanations, as, for
instance, that bay is a diluted brown.
Wilson’s conclusion is that brown is dominant to bay,
although he expresses a doubt as to the correctness of
his own conclusions.
In his interpretation of the figures, Sturtevant goes the
line of least resistance. He says:
I am unable to agree with Wilson that bay and brown can satis-
factorily be separated I base this upon my own observation, upon
the frequent changes from bay to brown and vice versa which he
(Wilson) mentions finding in the Clydesdale records, and the similar
changes which I have observed among Harness Horse records, and
upon the frequent recording of English Thoroughbreds as “bay or
brown.” My conclusions, then, are that brown and bay are not distinct,
brown being merely a dark bay.
622 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
I do not believe that either Wilson or Sturtevant is cor-
rect. I reached the conclusion in my first paper, based
on the records of the saddle horse alone, that brown is
dominant to chestnut and black and hypostatie to bay.
With all the figures before me now, I am still of the
opinion that brown is recessive to bay. When bay is
mated with brown the product is: 56 per cent. bay, 32 per
cent. brown, 5 per cent. black and 7 per cent. chestnut.
The total number of horses produced by this mating is
2,460, a number large enough to show that the percentages
can be relied upon. Bay X bay produces: 77 per cent.
bay, 8 per cent. brown, 2 per cent. black and 13 per cent.
chestnut.
Brown X brown gives: 2 per cent. chestnut, 11 per cent.
black, 59 per cent. brown and 28 per cent. bay. It is this
28 per cent. bay that is the greatest obstacle in the way
of the interpretation which I have given to the results.
If brown is a recessive to bay there should be no bay foals
from brown sire and brown dam. Yet such matings yield
‘a large per cent. of bay. I spent much time during the
summer of 1912 studying the color of horses in the field.
I believe that I have found an explanation for the above
difficulty.
There is a brown horse that is called by horsemen the
seal brown. The seal-brown horses appear to be almost
black, and can easily be mistaken for black. The top line
is all black, as is the mane and tail. The legs, except for
possible white markings, are black up to the body. The
body is very dark brown, in some cases showing a lighter
shade near the flanks, and back of the nostrils a little of
the lighter shade of brown is found. This is the true
brown horse and only such should be recorded as brown.
There is a class of so-called brown horses known as the
mahogany browns.. These horses have black mane and
tail, black legs, the top line of the body and sometimes
the under line are black. The sides of the body have
many bay hairs mingled with the black hair. Some
blotches, usually near the flanks, seem to be exclusively
bay. It seems to me that this horse is on the border line
No. 562] COAT COLOR IN HORSES 623
between bay and black, or is an example of the incomplete
dominance of the bay over the black.
If this theory be true, such mahogany brown horses are
not, from the standpoint of reproduction, brown at all.
No true brown foals should come from them unless the
factor for brown be latent in their germ cells. They are
examples of the simplex bay and when mated should give
bay and black foals.
When it is remembered that the records have all these
so-called mahogany browns recorded as browns, and no
possible way to separate them, it becomes a very difficult
matter to properly interpret results. I should be inclined
to agree with Sturtevant that no separation of brown and
bay can be made, were it not that I have found these two
classes recorded as brown, while one class is a brown and
the other class is a bay. Brown X brown matings, when
a per cent. of genetically bay individuals enter into such
matings, would have to give some bay foals. Twenty-
eight per cent. of bay foals is none too large to expect
from the number of simplex bays recorded as browns.
Another solution of this matter of black, bay and brown
was suggested by A. B. Cox in a letter to me under date
of May 14, 1912.
Might it not be possible that bays, browns and blacks should be con-
sidered as a unit and that their appearance could be controlled by an
independent factor; something on the same principle of the dilute
factor in rabbits’ color as set forth by Professor Castle? We have
different shades of chestnut and also of gray roans, might not these
different shades also be controlled by this dilute factor? Should we
not divide the colors in three classes: (1) Gray roans; (2) bay, brown
and black; (3) chestnut of different shades? Each class to be con-
trolled by one factor, and then the different shades of these units to be
controlled by an independent factor.
It is no little temptation to adopt this short series as it
relieves at one stroke so many difficulties. Black, (seal)
brown and bay are just as distinct colors as are chestnut
and gray. This being so, I believe that each must have a
separate factor, even though it may make the factors for
color very numerous in the germ cells. For example,
from gray X bay matings there are produced gray, bay,
624 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST (VoL. XLVI |
brown, black and chestnut, five colors; showing that in
the germ cells of a gray horse there must be the factors
for five colors. In view of all the evidence which I have I
adhere to my first interpretation, adopt the long series
and place brown recessive to bay. Bay I place between
brown and the two colors which are dominant to it, gray
and roan.
That gray and roan are dominant to bay there can be
no doubt. Nine hundred and six foals from matings
gray X not gray produce 46 per cent. gray and 54 per
cent. not gray. It is known that homozygous gray when
mated with any of the four popular colors will always
producea gray. Itis only from a heterozygous gray that
other than a gray can be produced. Roan behaves
exactly the same way. I have no records that would indi-
cate the comparative strength of roan and gray. For
the present I place them at the top of the series as of
coordinate strength. It is just possible that there is a
white that is dominant to both the gray and roan, but this
has not come under my observation. Nor do I have any
data to enable me to place dun in a series.
The cause of the different shades of roan, bay and
chestnut must be left to another paper, as well as the in-
teresting behavior of the white markings to be found on
most horses, and also the dappled condition of certain
grays, bays and chestnuts.
Sturtevant has suggested that C represent the factor
for chestnut; H for black; B for bay (or brown); G for
gray; R for roan, and W for white. I now suggest this
change: Add the factors for brown, Br, and dun, D, and
change black to Bl. The series then becomes: C, hypo-
static to all others. Bl epistatie to C but hypostatic to
Br, which in turn is hypostatic to B. G and R are both
epistatic to B, and perhaps are hypostatic to W. This
leaves D (dun) unplaced except that it is known to be
near the top of the series with G and R.
THE VARIATIONS IN THE NUMBER OF VER-
TEBRA AND VENTRAL SCUTES IN TWO
SNAKES OF THE GENUS REGINA
ALEXANDER G. RUTHVEN AND CRYSTAL THOMPSON
Museum or Zoo.tocy, UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN
It has been asserted that the number of large scales on
the ventral surface in snakes is the same or nearly the
same as the number of vertebre. Gadow (1901, p. 582)
asserts that the ‘‘skeleton segments correspond in num-
ber to the ventral and transverse scales of the skin,’’ but
Jourdran (1903, pp. 25-26) has failed to find an exact
correspondence between the total numbers of scutes and
vertebre in many specimens. According to the counts
published by the latter writer (1903, pp. 25-26), the dis-
crepancy may vary from 25 less to 53 more scutes than
vertebre, and he concludes,
On peut done conclure qu’il n’y a qu’une concordance tres relative
entre le squelette interne et la metamerisation externe des teguments.
Unfortunately a study of Jourdran’s paper seems to
show that his counts of the vertebre can not be relied upon.
Some of the skiagraphs are so poor that it is doubtful if
careful counts could be made from them, many of the
numbers given are estimates, the tail in some of the speci-
mens is broken, the disposition of the vertebre is not
indicated, except when the number of ribs is given, and
the number of ribs given is in some cases much greater
than shown in the skiagraphs, apparently indicating that
the long transverse processes of the proximal tail ver-
tebre have been counted as ribs. We believe that Jour-
dran’s work shows only that some discrepancy between
the number of vertebre and the number of scutes may
occur. Grosser (1905, pp. 57-61) has pointed out that
there is a metameric arrangement of the ventral scales
except in the neck, anal and tail regions, so that dis-
crepancies must be confined to these regions.
: (25
626 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
On the assumption that the belly scales and body
vertebre are the same, Bateson (1894, p. 123) has pointed
out that there must be considerable variation in the num-
ber of vertebre in this region, and Ruthven (1908) has
shown that if the number is the same in both series in the
genus Thamnophis closely related species when differing
in relative size also differ in the number of body and tail
vertebre, since they do so vary in the number of scutes.
In view of the fact that there may be a discrepancy in
the number of vertebre and ventral scutes, general con-
clusions based on the correlation between the two series
are of little value until the method, amount and place of
variation has been determined. As is well known a pro-
nounced sexual variation in the scutes occurs in at least
some species, the males having on the average fewer
belly seutes and more subcaudal scutes than the females.
It might very well be that while the total numbers of
scutes and vertebre are not the same, the number in each
whole series is about the same in the two sexes, the varia-
tion simply affecting the relative number on the body and
tail, or there may be more or less scutes than vertebra on
the body and less or more scutes than vertebre on the tail,
so that the total number in the two series is close together,
or the number of scutes may vary independently of the
vertebre sufficiently to bring about the observed sexual
differences, the number of vertebre remaining the same,
and the relation between the number of members in each
series may be different in different forms.
It has been the purpose of this study to determine the
correlation that exists between the number of belly scales
and body vertebre and between the number of subcaudal
scales and caudal vertebre in two species of snake, and
from this to discover if the sexual and individual differ-
ences in scales are associated with differences in the total
number of vertebre or are merely in the relative number
on the body and tail.
The results embodied in this paper were in part ob-
tained by Mr. Charles Obee, in 1910, under the direction
of the senior writer, and were submitted by him in the
No. 562] VARIATIONS IN NUMBER OF VERTEBRZ 627
form of a thesis to the faculty of the department of litera-
ture, science and the arts, University of Michigan, in
partial fulfillment of the requirements for the degree of
Master of Arts. The work was completed by the junior
writer in 1912. The skiagraphs were made by Dr. E. T.
Loeffler, of the department of dentistry, University of
Michigan, and we gratefully acknowledge his untiring
efforts to provide us with satisfactory plates of the rather
difficult material, without which the work could not have
been completed.
The methods used in this study are Sate Two
closely related species belonging to the North American
genus Regina (Natrix in part or Tropidonotus in part of
some writers), R. leberis (L.) and R. grahami (B. & G.)
were used. Most of the work was done on R. leberis. In
a series of specimens the sex and the number of ventral
Fia. 1. Skiagraph of anal region of a specimen of Regina leberis (L.) to show
position of last three vertebre. The pin lies in the anal opening.
(belly and subeaudal) scales was determined, and skia-
graphs were made of each specimen from which the
vertebræ were counted. Before making the skiagraphs a
pin was thrust through the body at the anus so that the
position of the last few body vertebre would be revealed,
and it was determined by dissection which pair of the
short anterior ribs is the first to reach a ventral scute and
the number of this scute.
General Relations of Vertebre and Scutes.—It is first
to be stated that in the few specimens dissected it is the
628 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
third or fourth pair of anterior ribs, on the fifth and
sixth vertebra, that first extends to the belly scutes, and
the scute reached is the eighth. This makes three or two
scutes more than vertebre in the neck region, and there is
probably a slightly greater difference than this in some
specimens, as there is a difference in the extent to which
153 the gular scales encroach
di \. upon the region occupied
V. by the first scutes. On
AA TS, ~ the other hand, it is to be
ysl noted, as shown by the
Ata’ skiagraph (Fig. 1), that
. it is the ribs of the
Tea fourth from the last ver-
/|\\:| tebra that connect with
the last scute in front of
the enlarged anal plate,
the antepenultimate pair
terminating distally op-
posite the anal plate
(which has thus been
considered a part of the
belly series), and the
two last pairs of ribs ex-
tending into the base of
the tail. Counting the
Fic. 2. Variation in the number cf anal plate, then there
body vertebrw and belly scales in Regina would be, barring the
leberis (L.). — — — —, variation in g .
vertebræ, females; —+—-+—+, varia. discrepancy anteriorly,
tion in beg nee ore, sey variation two more body vertebra
tion in scutes, males; M.V., mean num- than scutes, but as there
MLS, mean number of ecute (146877, are about two or three
146.75 9). scutes in excess of ver-
tebre anteriorly the two extra ribs reduce the discrep-
ancy to one or nothing in the specimens dissected. That
this is about the normal condition is shown by the
variations in the series studied, and it may be concluded
that when the differences are more or less than this
number the discrepancy is due to the addition or loss of a
belly seute or two under the chin.
J
; a ne 7
ule sta doe te Ee Kk Boo
A
Ni
pa
}
me?
4
i
p!
140
ah. B ODDE
pi 7 E C uNg
i
b
f
[
F
t
4
Aok
AZ
al
f
t
F
í
f
£
c
£
P
5
a G ił
G p
pa
No. 562] VARIATIONS IN NUMBER OF VERTEBRZ 629
Variation in R. leberis.—In the diagrams (Figs. 2, 3, 4)
the variations in sixteen specimens of R. leberis are shown
x
% PEAT mms
x
X
83 230 j
X x
= /
a 229 i ‘
X
\ > + F ’
81 228 i fi \
` al x i s Fils
go pi 227 = +
E a 3 i PEL
wi) Hes eed R |226 | + N T a BE 7 +
eee h / 2$
|+ é mis Saha ler FY Pe Eis.
18 t a r y iN
\ I N |
\ a t i . E 294 is + Ji ai
å agii
TTY TT T 7 i e AIr .
\ i+ i) j ne: Ss
gáv .
76. iy j il | i A
CARLAN 222 “4 Yad aa |.
on EMER MAT aac? Vcd ald EA
ode \ \ J I \ w Å \ I q`’ È
uE t ad $ 4 221 N tp l i om
z AEA wes yr iy yee A \ / a hae ah |
e 8 Wade Ts 220 UANI + ji: A
e: TA Ween St < > . ° é a
. W ele ! Cee | / "s . . | A I I ! . .
a . \ W ro = . . 219 ; $ t s: 7 Í . £
bed T . . ° "i a
a 42 an Bere EIE Big Rae Nea a : SIP:
7 pugs A} iad n 319 as .> . I .
T IRIRE er . W
70 eae EW E PEN CARA ie 7" oy We
ATE i : :
69 Ald T 216 s 7
SMI : .
68 vt 215 t `
67 pa 214 4 a
gA D 0 p E F O R ddp 9 (0; D A F oe 2
er F KLET OF PT XR n o p
Fie. 3. Fie
- 8. Variation in the number of caudal yertebre and subenudal scales in
R. "ee ris (L. =, variation e vertebræ, females; —-+—+—+4,
variation in ve rtebew, Mmalesy s,s 3 , variation in scutes, females ;
variation in scutes, m ales; M.V., mean number of vertebre (79.75 ra 73.5 50 Q); s
>» mean number of scutes (77.12 ĝ, 71.50 9).
IG. 4. Paradis in the total oan: of vertebra St ventral lesas .
R. lebe (L. — — — —, variation in vertebre, gek
variation in v rte bre, males; ...., variation in paint gre
variation in scutes, males; M.V., mean number of yertebre aae. f “220. 0.37 Q); ;
-S., mean number of scutes (223.50 g» 218.25 9).
graphically and in,such a way as to illustrate their nature
and the correlation that exists between the different series.
The results appear to be as follows. There is a variation
630 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
in the number of body vertebrae (8 in the males and 13 in
the females), and the males have on the average .62 less
than the females; and there is a similar variation in the
belly scales, the males having .38 less than the females.
In the females the number of belly scales varies from one
less to one more than the body vertebre, the average
being .12 less, and in the males the variation is from one
less to two more scales than vertebrae, the average being
12 more. The number of caudal vertebre is variable (11
in the males and 10 in the females), and the males have.
on the average 6.25 more vertebre than the females; and
there is a similar variation in the number of subcaudal
scutes,! the males having 5.62 more than the females. In
the females the number of subcaudal scales varies from 1
to 3 less than the tail vertebre, averaging about 2 less,
and in the males the scutes vary from 1 to 4 less, average
2.63 less.
It is evident from this summary that the average excess
of tail vertebra over subcaudal scutes (2.63 in the males,
2 in the females) is only slightly affected (.12 in either
direction) by the discrepancy between the belly scutes
and body vertebre when the whole series are considered,
so that the normal relation in the entire series in both
sexes is about two less scutes than vertebre. Further-
more the total number of vertebra and scutes in the males
is respectively 5.63 and 5.25 greater than the average
number possessed by the females, the decrease (.62 and
.38) in the body series in the males not being sufficient to
lower the total number to the average number in the
females. Still further, a pronounced variation in the
total number of vertebre and scutes in each sex is re-
vealed. This variation amounts to 15 vertebre and 12
scutes in the males and 9 vertebre and 9 scutes in the
females, and is of course due to the fact that deviation
from the mean in one member is not compensated by a
corresponding deviation from the mean in the opposite
direction in the other member. Thus in the 16 specimens
the variation on the body and tail is in the same direction
1Tt should be stated here that the subcaudal scutes are paired, and that
references to the number always refer to the pairs.
No. 562] VARIATIONS IN NUMBER OF VERTEBRZ 631
in 6 specimens, and while in different directions in the
remaining 10, in only 5 do the deviations in the two mem-
bers approach equality and in four of these the deviation
from the average is very small in both series.
Variation in R. grahami.—F rom the above results one
may conclude that if the same correspondence in the
number of ventral scutes and vertebre prevails in nearly
related forms the form with the most scales will have the
most vertebra. To test this point in the genus studied a
small series of males (all that were available) of R.
grahami were examined. The results are shown in the
following table:
THE NUMBER OF VERTEBR2 AND VENTRAL SCUTES IN THREE SPECIMENS OF
Regina grahami (B. & G.)
Body Vertebræ Body Scales Tail Vertebre | Tail Scutes |Total Vertebree|Total Scutes
177 178 62 245 240
167 170 63 231 233
177 178 64 244 242
nasas 173.66 175.33 | 66.3 63 | 240 | 238.3
Body scutes > body vertebræ = 1.67. Tail scutes < tail vertebræ = 3.3.
Total vertebræ > total scutes = 1.66.
It will be noted that the same close correspondence in
scutes and scales is indicated in R. grahami as has been
demonstrated for R. leberis, and that notwithstanding
the fewer vertebræ in the tail the former species has a
decidedly larger number of vertebræ and scutes. There
is no reason to believe that the females of R. grahami will
not show a similarly higher number of scales and the same
relation between scutes and vertebræ.
SUMMARY AND CONCLUSION
The variation in porii of R. leberis may be summar-
ized as follows:
1. The number of belly scutes is practically the same
as the number of body vertebræ, and the number of sub-
caudal scutes is between two and three less than the
number of caudal vertebræ.
2. The sexual differences consist of an average of less
632 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
than one body vertebra and belly scale more and between
five and seven caudal vertebre and subcaudal scales less
in the females than in the males.
3. There is considerable variation in the total num-
ber of vertebra and scales in the two sexes, variations in
the series of one member rarely equaling opposite varia-
tions in the series of the other.
It goes without saying that the extent of variation in
the two series is probably not indicated in the small
amount of material used, but the relations of the num-
bers in the different series are so little variable that
there can be but little doubt that the above summary ex-
presses the general conditions.
It is not known at present just how widespread this
close correspondence in the number of vertebre and ven-
tral scutes is among snakes, but it is conservative to say
that there is probably a correlation between the two
series in most, if not all, forms, and that in some groups
this correlation approaches close correspondence in the
number of parts. It follows from this that, as in R.
leberis and R. grahami, the species with most numerous
ventral scales have more vertebre than others in which
the same correspondence prevails, and the opposite, and,
as the senior writer has shown that variations in size in
groups of related species in the genus Thamnophis are
associated with differences in the number of scutes, the
larger forms having more scales than the smaller, it may
be assumed, tentatively at least, that difference in rela-
tive size in such a group of closely related species is a
deep-seated modification that affects the number as well
as the size of the metameres.
LITERATURE
Bateson, William. 1894, Materials for the Study of Variations. London.
Gadow, Hans. 1901. The Cambridge Natural History, Amphibia and Rep-
tiles.
Grosser, Otto. 1905. Metamere Bildungen der Haut der Wirbelthiere.
Zeitsch. f. Wissensch. Zool., LXXX, pp. 56-79.
Jourdran, E. 1903. Les Ophidiens de Madagascar. Paris. ( Thesis.)
Ruthven, Alexander G. 1908. Variations and Genetic Relations of the
Garter-snakes. Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus., 61.
SHORTER ARTICLES AND REPORTS
THE SIMULTANEOUS MODIFICATION OF DISTINCT
MENDELIAN FACTORS
In another paper on the inheritance of a recurring somatic
variation in variegated ears of maize, it was shown that the
amount of red color developed in the pericarp of variegated
seeds bears a definite relation to the development of color in the
progeny of such seeds. The relation is such that the more color
there is in the pericarp of the seeds planted the more likely are
they to produce plants with wholly self-red ears and correspond-
ingly the less likely to produce plants with variegated ears.
Self-red ears thus produced behave just as if they were hybrids
between self-red and variegated races or self-red and white races,
the behavior in any given case depending upon whether the
parent variegated ears were homozygous or heterozygous for
variegated pericarp and whether they were self-pollinated or
crossed with white.
To interpret these facts I have suggested that perhaps (1) a
Mendelian factor for variegation, V, is changed to a self-color
factor, S, in a somatic cell, (2) that all pericarp cells directly
descended from this modified cell develop red color, and (3)
that of the gametes arising from modified cells one half carry
the S factor and one half the V factor.? Whether it ever hap-
pens that more than one half of such gametes carry S is un-
known, but it is certain that a considerable part of them carry V.
This is shown by the fact that self-red seeds from a variegated
ear that has been cross-pollinated by white-eared maize produce
a considerable percentage of variegated-eared plants. Evidently
in such cases the duplex condition of the factors is changed to
the simplex condition by the change of one V factor to an 8
factor, so that the zygotic formula VV becomes VS.
Now it often happens that a considerable patch of self-red
grains occurs on an otherwise variegated ear. The cob imme-
diately beneath such a patch is sometimes variegated, just like
* Not yet in print.
*This hypothesis was noted in my discussion of the possible origin of
mutations in somatic cells. AMERICAN NATURALIST, 47: 375-377, 1913.
` 633
634 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
that beneath the variegated grains of the same ear, and some-
times self-red, the red cob spot corresponding exactly with the
patch of red grains. Yet the wholly red ears arising from such
self-red seeds invariably have wholly red cobs without respect
to whether the parent seeds were from a red or variegated cob
spot. It seems possible that in some cases the change from V
to S occurs earlier in the life of the plant than in other cases.
In some plants the change may, it seems possible, occur soon
after the cob is laid down, in which case all the cells of the
glumes as well as of the pericarp over a considerable area will
be red. In other plants it appears that the change from V to S
occurs independently in the rudiments of several grains, but not
until after the glumes associated with them have been laid down.
But in either case, it must be remembered, the red ears produced
from such red seeds always have wholly red cobs as well as
wholly red grains and cob and pericarp colors are coupled in all
later generations. Evidently, whatever is responsible for the
change from variegation to self-color always affects both cob
and pericarp colors.
This would oceasion no surprise if it were known that red cob
color and red pericarp color are due to identical factors. But
I have presented, in another place,* evidence that cob and peri-
carp colors are dependent upon distinct genetic factors which
are either coupled or allelomorphic in inheritance. Even if it
should be shown that the red color of the cob is due to identically
the same pigment as the red color of the pericarp, it must never-
theless be assumed that there are distinct genetic factors that
influence the distribution of this pigment. The factor Se that
has to do with the determination of self-pattern of cob color can
hardly be the same as the factor Sp that has to do with the same
pattern in the pericarp, for, if it were the same, a cross of a
strain having variegated cob and variegated pericarp with a
strain having self-red cob and colorless pericarp should produce
progeny self-red in both cob and pericarp, whereas such a cross
actually produces ears with self-red cobs and variegated peri-
earp. We are practically driven, therefore, to the conclusion
that there must be distinct factors for self-color of the cob and
self-color of the pericarp, Se and Sp, respectively. It seems
reasonable then to suppose that the same is true of the variega-
tion pattern and that there are both Ve and Vp for variegated
cob and variegated pericarp, respectively.
*Ann. Rpt. Nebr. Agr. Expt. Sta., 24: 59-90, 1911.
No. 562] SHORTER ARTICLES AND REPORTS 635
If this is true, we are confronted with the problem of explain-
ing the apparently universal occurrence of self-red cobs in con-
nection with self-red ears arising in F, from variegated-eared
parents. Why, in short, should Ve and Vp, if they are really
distinct, always change together to Se and Sp, whenever either
one changes? This seems the more unaccountable when consid-
ered in connection with the fact that the change often, or per-
haps always, affects only one of the two like (duplex) factors
of a homozygous somatic cell, so that VceVp- VcVp becomes
S Sp - VeVp.
In my former paper (loc. cit.) I accounted for perfect
coupling of cob and pericarp factors in certain crosses by the
assumption that the two factors were located in the same chro-
mosome, and explained perfect allelomorphism of the same fac-
tors in other crosses by the assumption that the two factors were
located in homologous chromosomes. This was on the further
assumption that homologous chromosomes separate at the reduc-
tion division exactly at the plane of their union in synapsis.
If in place of this last assumption, however, we accept Morgan’s*
Suggestion, based upon cytological evidence presented by Jans-
sens, that homologous chromosomes may become spirally twisted
together in synapsis and that the plane of separation may not
always coincide exactly with the plane of union, we must also
accept his further suggestion that the linear position of factors
within a chromosome has much to do with the degree of coupling
and allelomorphism, ‘‘linkage.’’ To me Morgan’s hypothesis
seems the most reasonable interpretation of the facts of partial
coupling and ‘‘repulsion,’’ and it also affords a satisfactory ex-
planation of perfect coupling and allelomorphism.
n accordance with Morgan’s hypothesis, we must suppose,
not only that the factors Ve and Vp are located in the same chro-
mosome as I had done before, but in addition that they are situ-
ated very close together in this chromosome, since their linkage
seems to be perfect. Similarly we must suppose, not only that
Vp and 8, are in homologous chromosomes, as I had previously
done, but that they are in almost exactly homologous positions
in these chromosomes, since their allelomorphism appears to be
perfect. This second supposition follows of course as a corol-
lary of the first one if S is produced through a modification of V.
Now we might suppose further that the two factors, Vp and
* Science, N. S., 34: 384, 1911.
636 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
Ve are located side by side in the same chromosomes not only at
the time of the reduction division but also in all nuclear divi-
sions and even perhaps that they remain in fairly close prox-
imity in the more diffused chromatin of the resting nucleus.
Then if homologous chromosomes or their chromatin masses are
not closely associated in somatic cells, it would seem possible that
whatever causes the change of a Vp, factor into an S, factor
might at the same time affect the V, factor of the same chromo-
some changing it into an S, factor, while the Vp and Ve factors
of the homologous chromosome remain unchanged.
It is of course recognized that a rather formidable number of
hypotheses, with subsidiary assumptions, have been marshalled
here to account for what may be very simple phenomena, but,
if they do not do too great violence to the known facts of cytol-
ogy, we are justifiable in accepting them tentatively as an
attempt at a consistent interpretation of what otherwise seem
inconsistent genetic facts.
R. A. EMERSON
UNIVERSITY OF NEBRASKA
THE FOURTH INTERNATIONAL GENETICS
CONFERENCE?
In a subject developing so rapidly as that of genetics, the
delay of one and one half years in the publication of the results
of an investigation is a serious matter. It is therefore to be
regretted that the publication of the proceedings of the Fourth
International Conference on Genetics has followed the common
fault of international congresses in this respect. In many cases
results which were new at the time of the conference have been
anticipated by other work. In other cases the results of later
experiments have no doubt served to modify opinions expressed
at the conference. A portion of this delay is inherent in the
nature of an international meeting. However, it is hoped that
for the coming conference, steps will be taken to insure the more
rapid publication of the proceedings.
The present volume of 570 pages consists of two parts. Part
I (pages 1 to 79) contains the matter of historical interest relat-
1‘*Comptes Rendus et Rapports de IV° Conférence Internationale de
Génétique.’’ LEdités par Ph. de Vilmorin. x +571 pp. Masson et Cie,
Paris. 1913.
No. 562] SHORTER ARTICLES AND REPORTS 637
ing to the conference. It includes the general organization;
the list of members and adherents; an account of the various
scientific and executive meetings and finally an account of the
numerous receptions and excursions arranged for the entertain-
ment of the members.
The membership of the conference totaled approximately 250,
representing twenty different countries. Of these about 150
attended the conference. There were five sessions for the reading
of papers and the transaction of business.
As the members registered each received an addressed enve-
lope containing the program of the conference and printed slips
giving in French a brief summary of each paper to be pre-
sented. In addition there were the invitations to the various
receptions, excursions and entertainments, and finally an elegant
bronze medal commemorative of the conference and bearing upon
its reverse the name of the member. This medal, which was de-
signed by R. Benard, bears on its face the likeness of Mendel.
On the reverse in addition to the member’s name is the artistic
representation of pea flowers and pods and the inscription
““Rerum cognoscere causas.” This elegant souvenir was pro-
vided through the generosity of M. Ph. de Vilmorin.
Of the many enjoyable excursions arranged for the conference,
especial mention should be made of the day spent at Verriéres-
le-Buisson in visiting the experimental gardens of Vilmorin,
Andrieux et Cie. An account of the more interesting cultures
seen on this excursion is given on pages 44 to 56. At 1’Institute
Pasteur de Garches, in addition to the work of serum production,
the members were shown the extensive plant for the breeding of
guinea-pigs. In a visit to the Pasteur Institute at Paris the
members were welcomed by Professor Metchnikoff and were
enabled to see much of his work. During this trip Professor
Blaringhem exhibited specimens and spoke of his work on trau-
matism with maize. The conference closed with a complimentary
‘Banquet de Clôture” at L’H6tel Continental.
Any account of this conference would be incomplete without
an appreciation of the royal entertainment given to the visiting
members. For this the conference was chiefly indebted to the
able secretary, M. Ph. de Vilmorin, to whose untiring efforts were *
due both the success and pleasure of the meeting.
Part II contains the fifty-eight scientifie papers presented at
the conference. These are printed either in French or English
638 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
and in each ease there is a brief summary in the alternate lan-
guage. This is a great convenience to the French and English
reading public but it is not clear why German should have been
so rigidly excluded. A number of the papers were presented in
German but in each case these have been translated into French
with an English summary.
Of the papers which attracted most attention at the conference
probably that of Miss Saunders on ‘‘The Breeding of Double
Flowers’’ held first place. Miss Saunders’s results have since been
published elsewhere but their interest is sufficient to be noted
very briefly here. In the genus Matthiola there are two kinds
of single flowers—(1) the double-throwing and (2) the non-
double-throwing. The doubles are always sterile, so that doubles
must always come from single parents. Miss Saunders showed
that singleness is due to two factors, X and Y, and that in the
non-double throwing type these two factors are linked together.
Doubleness is due to the absence of either or both of these factors.
Now it further appears that in the double-throwing strains all
four possible combinations of these factors occur in the ovules
but ‘‘the pollen appears unable to carry X and Y either alone
or together.” Thus we have in addition to the coupling or
reduplication a case of sex-linked inheritance which so far as the
writer is aware was the first case to be reported among plants.
In a brief paper Professors Bateson and Punnett pointed out
that what they had formerly termed ‘‘coupling’’ and ‘‘repul-
sion” are in reality phases of the same phenomenon. In each
case the results are produced by a ‘‘reduplication’’ of those
gametes which represent the parental combinations. This is
another case of results which were new at the time of the con-
ference but which have become familiar to students of genetics
through other publications.
A number of papers deal with the heredity and breeding of
cereals. Of these there may be mentioned one by Dr. Jesenko
upon a fertile hybrid between wheat and rye. This cross has
been made a large number of times but in every instance the F,
plants were sterile. Dr. Jesenko succeeded in finding one plant
partially fertile and from this, F, and F, generations have been
- grown. The interest in this work lies in the fact that the F, and
F, plants were fairly fertile. In this connection should be noted
the paper by Mr. Sutton, of England, on hybrids between the wild
pea of Palestine and the common commercial pea. In this species-
No. 562] SHORTER ARTICLES AND REPORTS 639
cross the F, plants were also nearly all sterile, but from a large
number of crosses a few seeds were obtained and the F, and suc-
ceeding generations were quite fertile. A very similar result
was reported by M. Bellair in the case of certain tobacco hybrids.
It is possible that these investigations may point the way to a
better understanding of sterility in species crosses.
The communication of M. Boeuf on the stability and variation
of characters in pure strains of cereals points again to the con-
clusion that selection within a ‘‘pure line’’ is without effect. The
author cites a large number of experiments to support his thesis.
The observations of Dr. Trabut upon the origin of cultivated
oats will be of interest to students in this field.
Two papers deal strictly with the inheritance of quantitative
characters, a subject of so much interest at the present time. Pro-
fessor Bruce, of London, concludes that ‘‘It can not be affirmed
with certainty that Mendelian laws apply to such characters.’’
Professor Balls, of Egypt, presents a large amount of interesting
data regarding quantitative characters in cotton hybrids. How-
ever, he believes the fluctuating variations are so large and due
to so many causes that it is not possible to show that such char-
acters are controlled by segregating factors. The rapid advance
in this field of genetics within the past year would hardly sup-
port these conclusions.
An important paper by Nilsson-Ehle on Mendelism and acclima-
tization gives us a somewhat different view of acclimatization than
that usually held. This author holds that increased resistance to
cold, for example, is not obtained by the simple isolation of a
more resistant type already present in a variety. Further such
types do not arise by mutations in the ordinary sense of the
word. He says in his summary (p. 156) :
On the contrary, all my researches tend to show that the numerous
types which can be distinguished, both in the characters of resistance to
cold, precocity, and other quantitative characters, are produced by vari-
ous combinations of certain Mendelian factors.
To those biologists who are still skeptical as to the validity of
the factorial concept as a means of interpreting the facts of
heredity we would recommend the paper by Professor von
Tschermak. In experiments on the recrossing of hybrid peas
which have extended over eight years and in which ‘‘some thou-
sands of individuals have been recorded’’ he is able to ‘‘con-
640 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
firm the factorial theory in the most complete and satisfactory
manner.’’ In more recent papers he has given the details of
these extensive experiments of which only a summary is pre-
sented in the above paper.
While the majority of the papers deal with plants there are
several upon the animal side. Of these, there may be mentioned
one by Walther on the coat color of horses. He considers that
there are two principal colors in horses’ coats, viz., yellow and
red. These he says are allelomorphic to each other with yellow
dominant. These colors may be modified by supplementary mark-
ings such as black marks, white hairs, etc. . Thus such colors as
brown, bay and dun would depend upon multiple factors.
Papers by Chappellier on duck hybrids, by Noorduyn on can-
aries and by Houwink on fowls contain points of interest.
Papers by Crouzon and by Drinkwater deal with phases of
human inheritance.
Several papers by de Vilmorin and by Mrs. Haig-Thomas as
well as those by Blaringhem, von Ruemker, Collins and Kempton,
Johannsen, Hurst, Salaman, Swingle, and others contain many
interesting points which it is not possible to mention in this brief
account. :
The volume is well printed on good paper and the numerous
illustrations are well executed. A welcome feature of the volume
is the reproduction of photographs of the participating members
of the conference so far as these could be secured.
In general the editorial work is good. However, in spite of
the fact that two proofs were submitted to the authors a con-
siderable number of typographical and grammatical errors are
to be found. This is particularly true in some of the English
summaries (cf. for example p. 130). The services of an Eng-
lish editor would have made these much more readable.
The volume contains a wealth of observation which well re-
pay reading. It will form a welcome addition to the library of
students of heredity.
Frank M. SURFACE
MAINE AGRICULTURAL EXPERIMENT STATION,
ORONO, MAINE
7
The American
Naturalist
intended for Serena and books, etc., intended for review should be
MSS
sent to ne Editor of THE A
articles pees ing su
ERICAN lasso i Garrison-on- -Hudson,
f research r
k bea ring 0 on the
problems of siapa evolution are sapecliite ad bag and will be given preference
in gag oe ae
Further i mioerar wili be supplied a
ns and adv
wenty-fi
ve cent
rea reprints of rapine are supplied to authors free of charge.
erti panels should be sent ine =, publishers. The
a year. Foreign pos
s additional.
cents. The reiverticibe rates are Four Dollars for
e is fifty cents and
The charge for single copies is
a page.
THE SCIENCE PRESS
NEW YORK: Sub-Station 84
Entered as second-class matter, April 2, 1908, at the Post Office at Lancaster, Pa., under the Act of
Congress of March 3, 1879.
Lancaster, Pa.
Garrison, N. Y.
FOR SALE
ARCTIC, ICELAND and GREENLAND
BIRDS’ SKINS,
Well Prepared Low Prices
wes rticulars of
a G. ESEN, Bird Collecto
Husavik, North lesland, Via Leidle, mngtevid
BUTTERFLY-HUNTING IN
MANY LANDS
Notes of a Field Naturalist
ad oorge B, tengin, M. io M. pa rate J;
Plates @ Se oan pp. x14728. $7. 00 net
ostage 22 cents.)
‘Interesting descriptions of the general features of
the countries visited, their Pe geography, flora
and inhabitants appeal as much to
those interested in travel as se the naturalist, as itis
delightful reading. It is the kind of book
that helps make naturalists e we can’t have too
many of them. Appendix consists of
translations of valaable seas by Fritz Muller, and
is very useful and indispensable for those not under-
standing ya original language. There is much to
i nothing to condemn in the work, and it is
$ valuable addition to the popular m on natural
‘story and travel. ”— Entomological New:
443
Longmans, Green, & Co.
Fourth Ave. New York
TENTH EDITION.
TES MICROSCOPE,
ea og: tion. Price $2.00, pos
COMSTOCK PUBLISHING CO., Ithaca, N. Y.
FINE LAND SHELLS
ein stock and forsale nearly ten thousand species
very good stock ca orgia All are —-
act aot Bean cielo!
subject an and rom — o all
countries e illustrated nays
beautiful paiay of the philippines, and otber
be ed esse tric
Only the tues ms
2a bt ister Road, Rochester, N. Y.,
The University of Chicago
during the
ei
oe A Literature, Science,
r pban and ‘Administra:
The American Naturalist
A Monthly Journal, established in 1867, Devoted to t e Advance
with Special Reference to the Facto
ment of the — Sciences
rs of =a Evolution and Here
CONTENTS OF THE APRIL NUMBER
A Hyatt and his ngar of Research. Dr.
Robert Be Jac
SRS m hind a Forera in Nicotiana
i of Heredity, Orland E. aia
Shorter ariel Discussion: Heredity ina Par-
ase, wit
ations on Multiple Allelomorphs.
delism and Interspecific
Hybrids. Dr. O. F. Cook. edin ar tts
riara re eE in Colorado. Professor T
Notes and araea Some Recent Advances in
Vertebrate Paleontology. Dr. Roy L. Moodie.
CONTENTS OF THE MAY NUMBER
Inheritance of Mamme in Duroc Jersey Swine. Pro-
fessor Edward N. Wen tworth,
Natural and Artificial Parthenogenanis in the Genus
Nicotiana, Richard Wellington
Shorter Articles and Discussion: Bi mplified Mendel-
ian Formul Professor R. A. Emdeson. The
we sarn of the ave ee of gg Poe in
ming on the Bird Fau B.H. G
lg: and Literature: The Depth ot the pate Dr.
d G. Mayer. The Growth of pine od in the
al Kingdom. Professor H. 8. Je
CONTENTS OF THE JUNE NUMBER
I. Heredity of Tricolor in stray! e = H. D.
Goodale and Professor T. H. Mor
Il, Causes st Determiners in Radic ae Experi-
mental Analysis. Professor H. 8. Jennings.
HI. Clonal Variation in og ag messi Annie P.
Henchman and Dr. C. B. Davenport.
IV. Shorter Articles and Discussion : Rimplieity
Versus Adequacy in Mendelian Formulz.
Professor T. H. Morgan. The Possible O mre
of 2c ering in Somatic Cells. Professor
Vv. Notes and Literature: Valuation of the Bea.
Professor Chas. C. Adams,
CONTENTS OF THE JULY NUMBER
Doctrines held as Vitalism. Professor H.S NEGE
The Presence of the Barred Plumage Pat n the
ite TE Breed of Fowls. Dr. pria B,
Shorter Articles and Discussion: The Geologic Work
of Termites in the Belgian Congo. Dona ald Steel.
Notes — agence Work in Genetic Problem mein
Pro at Yale. Professor A. R. Middleton.
sera on Ichthyology. President David Start
Jordan.
CONTENTS OF THE AUGUST NUMBER
Genetical Studies on Oenothera. IV. Dr. Bradley
Moore Davis.
h.
The Influence of Protracted and Intermittent Fasting
n Gro rei is
upon
Cambrian Holothurians. Austin H. Clar.
and Discussion: Viability a Coup”
EEEE een
ling in Drosophila, P. W. n iting. The Results Notes on à a Mortality observed betw 7
Obtained by crossing zea mais L, and Paen ro obscuris and T. molitor. Dr. Ross Aik
mexicans Schrad, Mary 6 Lacy.
E
CONTENTS OF THE SEPTEMBER NUMBE
Nine-banded pie t
of Texas. Professor H. Newman.
Genetical Studies on Oenothera. Iv. Dr. Bradley
M. Davis.
Darwinism in Forestry. Dr. Raphael Zon.
Single Number 40 Cents
The NATURALIST will be sent to new subscribers for four months for One
THE SCIENCE PRESS
Sub-Station 84: NEW YORK
ERSS N. Y.
Yearly Subscription, $4.00
Dollar
Lancaster, Pa:
VOL. XLVII, NO. 563 A NOVEMBER, 1913
THE
AMERICAN
NATURALIST
A MONTHLY JOURNAL
Devoted to the Advancement of the Biological Sciences with
Special Reference to the Factors of Evolution
CONTENTS
Page
I. The Effect on the Offspring of Intoxicating the Male Parent and the Trans-
mission of the Defects to Subsequent Generations. Dr. CHARLES R.
$ “i it = > = á à - - ~ 641
I. Supplementary Studies on the Differential Mortality with respect to Seed
Weight in the Germination of Garden Beans. Dr. J. ARTHUR HARRIS ~ 683
Ill. Shorter Articles and Discussions: :
Reciprocal Crosses between Reeve’s Pheasant and the Common Ringneck
Pheasant producing Unlike Hybrids. JOHN C. Puss - ~ -mol
THE SCIENCE PRESS
LANCASTER, PA. GARRISON, N. Y.
NEW YORK: SUB-STATION 84
The American Journal of Science
Established by Benjamin Silliman in 1818
The Leading Scientific Journal in the United States
= Devoted to the Physical and Natural Sciences, with special reference to
Physics, and Ponore on the one hand, and to Geology and Mineralogy
on the other.
Editor: EDWARD S. DANA.
Associate Béstors Professor GEORGE L. GOODALE, JOHN TROWBRIDGE, W. G. FARLOW and WM. M. DAVIS
: of Cambridge; Professors A. E. VERRILL, HENRY S. WILLIAMS and L. V. PIRSSON, of New
eet = Haven; Professor JOSEPH S. AIMES, of Baltimore ; MR. J. S. DILLER, of Washington
= Two volumes annually, in monthly numbers of about 80 pages each.
~ This Journal ended its first series of 50 volumes as a quarterly in 1845; its second
-series of 50 volumes as a two-monthly in 1870; its third series as æ monthly ‘ended Dec-
p ember, 1895. A Fourth Series commenced in 1896.
= Subscription price, $6 per year or 50 cents a number, postage prepaid in the United States
$6.25 to Canada ; $6,40 to Countries in the Postal Union. Back numbers at reduced prices.
_ ser Ten-Volame Indexes, Vols. I-X XI-XX, fourth series, price one dollar. ae
The American Journal of Science
Haven, Conn.
` “Univ jerry Canter
N iiio — of Peng Cli Cnty a
a Articl by Jos | S ats by Tanie Mon o et
LI, ‘Gronor | M. Srmarrow, Srawant Parton, Joms Jay CHAPMAN, Jaun P
tion a are dealt with in an xo!
THE
AMERICAN NATURALIST
Vou. XLVII November, 1913 No. 563
THE EFFECT ON THE OFFSPRING OF INTOXI-
CATING THE MALE PARENT AND THE
TRANSMISSION OF THE DEFECTS
TO SUBSEQUENT GENERATIONS
Dr. CHARLES R. STOCKARD
ANATOMICAL LABORATORY, CORNELL MEDICAL COLLEGE,
New York City
Iv is a thoroughly demonstrated fact that the fertilized
egg may be so treated or modified during development as
to cause it to give rise to abnormal embryos of definite
types. Experiments on the unfertilized egg or female
germ cell are not nearly so numerous, are more difficult
to perform, and the results are not so decided. The treat-
ment of the male germ cell, or spermatozoon, so as to
modify it and to cause a modified development of the egg
which it subsequently fertilizes, is an experiment which
has rarely been performed with success. In the present
communication we wish to consider rather briefly the
various methods of treating or modifying the sperma-
tozoon or male germ cell and the result of this modifica-
tion on the embryo which arises when such a spermato-
zoon fertilizes an egg. In order to fully appreciate the
results obtained by experiments on the sperm it becomes
necessary to refer from time to time to the effects derived
when the egg is similarly treated.
Since the positive literature bearing on the artificial
modification of the sperm is not extensive, I shall first
consider it in a general way, and devote the latter part of
the paper to the results obtained in a set of experiments
641
642 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vov. XLVII
which have been conducted on guinea-pigs for the last
few years.
The spermatozoon is more difficult to treat experi-
mentally than is the ovum, on account of the fact that the
treatment so often renders it inactive or cripples it in
such a way that it is unable to penetrate and to fertilize
an egg. The spermatozoon, although apparently deli-
cate, is more or less resistant, so that a mild treatment
gives no effect. The difference between the upper non-
effective dose of treatment and the fatal or ‘‘paralyzing”’
dose is slight, yet it is the precise treatment between
these two points which yields results.
Little has been done in treating chemically the sperma-
tozoa of ‘invertebrates, though some of the hybridization
experiments furnish indirect evidence as to what might
occur. Herbst’s experiment of starting the development
of an egg by parthenogenesis and then fertilizing one
blastomere with a foreign spermatozoon offers splendid
opportunity for investigating the influence of strange
substances introduced by the sperm. The spermatozoa
of the sea urchin have been subjected to the action of
radium emanations by Giinther Hertwig, who found that
after intensive treatment for several hours such sperma-
tozoa subsequently disturb the processes of division in
the eggs which they have fertilized. Paula Hertwig found
that fertilized ascaris eggs treated several hours with
radium preparations gave pathological division figures;
the chromatin bodies showed a tendency to break down
and disintegrate; division was slow and the karyokineti¢e
figures were finally completely deranged.
Investigations on vertebrates have been more exten-
sive. The most beautiful results have been obtained on
fish and amphibians through the radium experiments of
Oscar Hertwig, his son Giinther and his daughter Paula.
The outcome of these experiments is so striking and is of
such serious importance that I shall dwell somewhat upon
their significance. About three years ago O. Hertwig
published the results of his first radium experiments in
No. 563] EFFECT OF INTOXICATING MALE PARENT 648
the Proceedings of the Prussian Academy of Sciences.
At that time he showed that when the unfertilized eggs
of a frog are treated for a certain time with radium rays,
these eggs, after being fertilized by normal spermatozoa,
develop abnormally. Hertwig also found that when the
milt or semen of the frog was exposed to the action of
radium for a certain time the spermatozoa swimming in
it were injured. When eggs were fertilized by these
sperm they always developed abnormally. The general
type of the abnormalities was the same whether the eggs
alone had been treated before fertilization or whether the
Sperm was treated. When both eggs and sperm were
treated the developmental modifications were still more
pronounced, though Hertwig claims that the deformities
were of a similar type to those which occurred after
treating only one of the cells.
Since that time Oscar Hertwig with his son and daugh-
ter have extended and analyzed these experiments in a
comprehensive fashion. When the sperm of a number of
amphibians, frog, toad and salamander, are exposed for
five minutes to 5.3 mg. of radium bromide, normal eggs
fertilized by such sperm give defective embryos, the |
defects being generally shown by the central nervous
System. They are really of the nature of developmental
arrests or degeneration.
If the spermatozoa are exposed for fifteen minutes the
effects on development are still more marked. When,
however, the sperm in salt solutions are treated inten-
Sively for 2 and 3 hours between two mesothorium cap-
sules, the results are most surprising. In one experiment
almost all the eggs fertilized by such sperm went nor-
mally, and in other experiments they went almost normal
but slow, yet they were extraordinarily better than eggs
that were fertilized by sperm that had been treated for
only five minutes. After three weeks the radium larve
were still behind the control. Hertwig concluded that the
spermatozoon had been so injured by the intensive treat-
ment that it could no longer take part in development,
644 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
although it could penetrate the egg and cause it to
develop parthenogenetically.
A number of important experiments were tried to test
the correctness of this conclusion. The most striking of
these were those performed by Giinther Hertwig in cross-
ing different species.
It is well known that the sperm of the frog will fertilize
the egg of the toad or of another species of frog, but the
resulting development proceeds for only a short time and
the egg usually dies in the blastule stage. Günther
Hertwig decided that if the influence of the sperm in
development was really destroyed by the intensive radium
treatments then such a spermatozoon would merely serve
as a parthenogenetic agent and the egg should develop in
a normal manner, yet be parthenogenetic. He used the
eggs of Bufo vulgaris (the common toad) and of Rana
veridis (the green water frog), and the sperm of Rana
fusca. He ran two sets of each kind of eggs; one set was
fertilized by normal R. fusca sperm; the other by sperm
which had been treated for two or three hours between
two capsules of mesothorium. The eggs fertilized by nor-
mal sperm did not develop beyond the blastular stage as
was expected, while those fertilized with the radiumized
sperm developed about normally and hatched from the
jelly and gave rise to swimming tadpoles. O. Hertwig
repeated this experiment by crossing the eggs of Triton
vulgaris with the sperm of Salamandra maculata. The
sperm were treated for 21 hours between two strong
mesothorium preparations. Poll had found that this
cross proceeded only as far as the blastular stage and
Hertwig confirmed this.
When, however, the semen was treated for 2} hours a
different result was obtained. Many eggs failed to be-
come fertilized, some showed polyspermy, and only six
went normally. The chromatin of the sperm was thought
to be destroyed and the eggs went by parthenogenesis.
Loeb has found in the remarkably wide crosses he has
made on invertebrates and vertebrates that the products
No. 563] EFFECT OF INTOXICATING MALE PARENT 645
of part of the foreign sperm finally act as a poison and
cause the eggs to develop abnormally. The types of mon-
sters in these crosses are similar to those produced by
treating the eggs with chemical poisons. In many cases
these sperm take no part in development but initiate the
process by serving as a parthenogenetic agent. Hertwig
takes the same position, and further finds, that when the
foreign sperm is treated with radium the injurious sub-
stance contained in it is killed or destroyed so that the
Spermatozoon initiates development by parthenogenesis
without later causing the development to be abnormal.
Bataillon’s method of sticking eggs with fine platinum
needles to give artificial parthenogenesis is similar, Hert-
wig thinks, to the use of sperm intensively treated with
radium. The treated spermatozoon plays the rôle of the
platinum needle in Bataillon’s experiment. The male
chromatin can no longer combine with the female chro-
matin, there is no amphimixis. Bataillon, by his sticking
method, obtained from 10,000 R. fusca eggs only 120
hatched tadpoles, and but three metamorphosed, while in
some of Hertwig’s radium experiments almost all hatched
from the jelly.
The radium experiments of Hertwig give us the first
method of artificial parthenogenesis which offers promise
for use with mammals. Hertwig suggests that since arti-
ficial fertilization is possible in many mammals, one might
fertilize with semen which had been intensively treated
with radium so that the chromatin was destroyed, and
with such sperm artificial parthenogenesis in mammals
could be accomplished. Two years before Hertwig made
this suggestion Dr. Congdon was trying the effects of
radium on the spermatozoa of mice and rats in the ana-
tomical laboratory at Cornell and is now continuing these
experiments in the anatomical laboratory at Stanford
University; up to now he has not succeeded in obtaining
fertilization with the modified spermatozoa, though of
course much experimentation is necessary in order to
establish the proper intensity of the treatment.
646 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
These experiments of Hertwig also afford interesting
data as to the nature and importance of the part played
by the chromatin in development. The cells of the em-
bryos which resulted from eggs fertilized by intensively
treated sperm were found by O. Hertwig, P. Hertwig, and
Poll, to contain the reduced number of chromosomes
showing that the paternal chromatin had been destroyed
by the treatment. Günther Hertwig found the nucleus
volume in radium larve to be one half the size of the
nucleus in the control; he measured the mass of nuclei
of nerve cells, liver cells, blood corpuscles, embryonic
muscle cells, ete. The entire larva was smaller. P. Hert-
wig found the male pronucleus derived from intensively
treated sperm to be modified in the first and second divi-
sions of the frog’s egg and Opperman found the same in
the trout. O. Hertwig found in Triton eggs that the in-
tensively radiumized male chromatin took no part in the
developmental process and the soma cells contained one
half the chromosome number. The male chromosome set
falls out of the development and the soma nuclei contain
only the female set.
Finally, Hertwig obtained another most striking result
which may be mentioned, although it is not entirely in
line with the present subject. When eggs instead of the
spermatozoa were subjected to intensive treatments of
2 to 5 hours with radium, the chromatin of the female
pronucleus was found to be broken down and destroyed.
If eggs, after such intensive treatment, were fertilized by
normal sperm, it was found that they developed almost
normally, although when eggs were treated from 15
minutes to 4 hour they always developed abnormally
though fertilized with normal spermatozoa. Hertwig,
therefore, concludes that the intensively treated eggs
fertilized by normal sperm develop by the process of
merogony ; that is, the egg nucleus being destroyed by the
treatment, the sperm nucleus enters the egg and causes
development to proceed in the same way that the female
pronucleus acts in parthenogenesis. Only one set of chro-
No. 563] EFFECT OF INTOXICATING MALE PARENT 647
mosomes, either the paternal or maternal, is necessary
for development of the egg.
During the summer of 1912 I treated the spermatozoa
of fish with various salts and organic substances with
negative results. When the treatment was sufficiently
strong to affect the spermatozoa it rendered them incapa-
ble of fertilizing the eggs. A method could no doubt be
devised for modifying fish spermatozoa with various
chemicals and of course radium does modify the fish
sperm as Opperman found.
Only a few experiments have been performed in at-
tempting to modify the offspring of birds by injuring the
male. Todde found that the offspring from alcoholized
roosters were not quite normal and that the roosters did
not succeed as well as usual in fertilizing eggs. Lustig’s
experiments showed that by inoculating fowls with abrin
the offspring were rendered less resistant to inoculations
of abrin than were control animals of the same age. This
result followed the inoculations of either parent, the
male as well as the female.
A more extensive literature bears upon the actions of
poisons on the male germ cells of mammals, though most
of the cases are uncontrolled observations. The treatment
of the germ cells of mammals is a more complex proposi-
tion than the experiments on those lower forms in which
the fertilization is external and where, for this reason,
the eggs and spermatozoa may be treated directly. In
mammals the stimulus must be applied through the ani-
mal body and the case is thus complicated since it is often
impossible to differentiate between the direct action of
the substance applied and the secondary effects due to the
responses of the parental body to the treatment. With
certain treatments, however, the case is not so complex
as would appear at first sight, since the substances may
pass into the blood stream and the lymph and act directly
on the germ cells just as they do on other tissues and
cells of the body.
In experiments to modify the germ cells of mammals
648 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
the first proposition becomes then, to determine whether
the substances used reach the germ cells directly. One
of the best substances for such experiments is alcohol,
since its action and distribution in the body has been
largely studied and since it acts so decidedly to modify
the developmental processes, as many workers have
found on invertebrates, and as I have shown by treating
fish eggs with this substance.
It is a well known and generally accepted fact that
alcohol does cause changes and degeneration in many of
the tissues of animals and man. The question arises,
how, then, can the reproductive tissues, the ova and sper-
matozoa escape? Nicloux and Renault have found that
alcohol has a decided affinity for the reproductive glands.
In the testicular tissues and the seminal fluid an amount
of alcohol is soon present which almost equals that in the
blood of an individual having recently taken alcohol.
The proportion of alcohol in the testis as compared with
that in the blood was as 2 to 3, and in the ovary of female
mammals as 3 to 5. From these observations it must
follow that aleohol may act directly on the ripe sperma-
tozoon shortly before it fertilizes the egg, and if this sub-
stance injuriously affects the germ cells, then one should
expect to find an indication of the injury in the resulting
development as Hertwig has found from his radium
treated spermatozoa.
There are a number of observations on human beings
bearing on this point, though they probably all need con-
firmation by experimentation on lower mammals. Lip-
pich claims to have observed 97 children resulting from
conception during intoxication. Only 14 of these were
without noticeable defects. Twenty-eight were scrofu-
lous, three had ‘‘weak lungs,’’ three showed different
atrophic conditions, one watery brain, four feeble-
minded, ete. Sullivan reported seven fairly authentic
cases of drunkenness during conception; six of the off-
spring died in convulsions after a few months, and the
seventh was stillborn.
No. 563] EFFECT OF INTOXICATING MALE PARENT 649
Rosch was the first, in 1837, to study the reproductive
glands of alcoholics and found degeneration of the testi-
cles. Lancereaux described a parenchymatous degenera-
tion of the seminal canals. Simmonds (1898) found
azoospermie (spermatozoa without tails) in 60 per cent.
of cases of chronic alcoholism; 5 per cent. of these men
were sterile. Kyrle reported three cases of total atrophy
of the testicular parenchyma in which death had resulted
from cirrhosis of the liver due to aleohol. He attributed
the atrophy of the testicle to the cirrhosis of the liver
and not to chronic alcoholism. |
Bertholet (1909) has made an extensive examination
of the influence of alcohol on the histological structure of
the germ glands, particularly on the testicles of chronic
alcoholics. He found testicular atrophy in alcoholics with
no cirrhosis of the liver. Bertholet observed partial
atrophy of the testicles in the majority of 75 chronic
alcoholics. The men died between the ages of 24 and
57 years, the greatest mortality being between 30 and 50
years. In 37 cases, excluding syphilitics, a microscopical
examination showed a more or less diffuse atrophy of
the testicular parenchyma and a sclerosis of the inter-
stitial connective tissue. The canals were reduced in
Size and their lumina obliterated. Spermatogonia were
atrophic. It was generally impossible to differentiate
spermatocytes or spermatids. There were no dividing
cells and no spermatozoa. These conditions with slight
variations were found in 24 cases. Such atrophic struc-
tures were present in one drinker only 29 years old. In
4 cases of cirrhosis of the liver the testicular atrophy
had not progressed very far and spermatozoa were still
present.
The extreme conditions of atrophy of the testicles were
only found in alcoholics. Observing the testicles of non-
alcoholics that had died of various chronic illnesses, such
as tuberculosis, no atrophy of the testicles or thickening
of the membrana propria was found. Two old men of
70 and 91 years still possessed spermatozoa in the canals.
650 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
Bertholet concluded that the atrophy he observed was
not due to old age, cirrhosis of the liver, or other systemic
conditions, but to the effects of chronic alcoholism on the
reproductive glands. Weichselbaum has confirmed the
observations of Bertholet.
It is certain, however, that the chronic alcoholic is not
so often rendered sterile as Bertholet’s study would lead
one to believe. It is not rare to find alcoholics with large
families. My experiments on mammals may not be of
sufficient duration at the present time, yet I have male
guinea-pigs that have been almost intoxicated on alcohol
once per day for six days a week for a period of 32
months, which are still good breeders. Thirty-two
months of a guinea-pig’s existence is proportionately
equal to a good fraction of a human life. A number of
these animals have been killed and their testicles exam-
ined microscopically and found to be normal. In some
cases where the male had failed to succeed in impreg-
nating the female for several times, one of his testicles
was removed and studied microscopically; the testicle
was found to be normal and the male later gave offspring
by other females. Ovaries have been similarly examined
and in no case has the alcoholic treatment caused a
visible structural change in the reproductive glands.
The actual physiological proof of the efficiency of the
organs is shown by the ability of the animals to repro-
duce. Although there is no visible structural change in
the germ cells, nevertheless, they have been modified by
the treatment to an extent sufficient to cause them in most
cases to give rise to defective embryos or weakened indi-
viduals which die soon after birth.
Nicloux has carefully demonstrated on dogs and
guinea-pigs the passage of alcohol from the blood of the
mother into the tissues of the embryo. After a short
time the amount of alcohol in the blood of the fetus 1s
about equal to that in the blood of the mother, while
there is really slightly more alcohol in a given weight of
the tissues of the fetus than is to be found in an equal
No. 563] EFFECT OF INTOXICATING MALE PARENT 651
weight of liver tissue from the mother. The reality of
the passage of alcohol from the mother to the fetus
demonstrates the possibility of the intoxication of the
etus.
There is an abundance of data bearing on the effects
of parental poisoning on the human offspring, yet almost
all of it is complicated. The question arises whether the
defects of the offspring are actually due directly to the
parental poisoning or to the often degenerate condition
of the parent. With lower mammals this question may
be controlled, since vigorous individuals with no physical
weaknesses may be selected for study. One of the most
interesting human cases is that Forel cites as recorded
by Schweighofer. A normal woman married a normal
man and had three sound children. The husband died
and the woman married a drunkard and gave birth to
three other children; one of these became a drunkard;
one had infantilism, while the third was a social degen-
erate and drunkard. The first two of these children con-
tracted tuberculosis, which had never before been in the
family. The woman married a third time and by this
sober husband again produced sound children. This is
a logical experiment, the female was first tested with a
normal male and gave normal children; when mated with
an alcoholic male the progeny were defective. She was
later tested again with a normal male and found to be
capable of producing sound offspring. A number of such
cases are on record but all are open to the question
whether the defective offspring are actually due to the
effects of the poison on the parent, or to the fact that the
parent may have been weak and degenerate from the
beginning.
Other substances than alcohol seem to act directly on
the germ cells of man and mammals, and these actions
are more important since there is no reason to believe,
for some of them at any rate, that they accompany a
degenerate condition. Constantine Paul long ago pointed
out that the children of lead workers were often defective.
652 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vow. XLVII
He made the interesting observation that when the father
alone was employed in such work his children were
affected. In 32 conceptions with such fathers 12 resulted
in premature labor and stillbirths, 20 living births
occurred but only 3 children survived. Eight died the
first year, 4 the second, and 5 the third year.
Mairet and Cambemale in 1888 were the first to experi-
ment on the influence of alcohol on the mammalian off-
spring. They treated a dog for 8 months with absinthe
(11 gr. per day per kilo of animal weight) and paired
this aleoholized dog with a normal bitch. Twelve young
resulted; 2 were born dead, 3 died within 14 days, and
the others died between 32 and 67 days of intestinal
catarrh, tuberculosis, ete. In a second experiment, both
parents were mated while normal, then the female was
treated for 23 days (2.75 to 5 gr. of absinthe of 72 per
cent. per day per kilo). Of 6 young 3 were stillborn, 2
had normal bodies though of weak intelligence, while one
was very sluggish. The evident criticism against this
experiment is that an insufficient number of animals was
used and there was no control. It is very difficult to rear
pups in a laboratory; when apparently perfectly normal,
they often die shortly after birth. :
Hodge, in 1897, obtained similar results. From one
pair of alcoholic dogs he observed 23 pups, 8 were de-
formed, 9 were born dead, while only 4 lived. In a con-
trol set, 41 individuals lived, 4 were deformed, but there
were no stillbirths. :
Nice has recently published results of treating mice
with alcohol. He finds little, if any, effect of the treat-
ment on the offspring. Considering his method of admin-
istering the alcohol and the results obtained, the doses
used were probably insufficient to produce effects. It
may also be possible that mice are more resistant to
alcohol than are other mammals. I have discussed these
experiments in a previous communication.
No. 563] EFFECT OF INTOXICATING MALE PARENT 653
EXPERIMENTS
Three years ago a series of experiments were begun
on guinea-pigs with the hope of modifying the type of
embryo in mammals so as to produce definite monstros-
ities as one is able to do with lower vertebrates. This
primary object has not been fully accomplished, yet the
experiments have demonstrated several significant points
and have shown that an alcoholized male guinea-pig
almost invariably begets a defective offspring even when
bred to a vigorous normal female.
Normal, healthy animals are selected for the experi-
ment, and in all cases they are first tested by a normal
mating in order to establish their ability to produce
vigorous offspring. After such a test the treatments are
begun. During the experiments the treated males and
females are mated from time to time with normal animals,
and in addition, control matings of normal individuals
are made. Some of the specimens are treated with
aleohol and ether. These substances were used since
they readily act upon animal cells and since I had studied
their effects on the development of fish embryos and
found them to cause rather definite and easily recog-
nizable defects in the central nervous system and organs
of special sense.
METHOD AND TECHNIQUE
In the beginning of the experiments alcohol was given
along with the food, but the animals ate less and the
food did not apparently agree with them. It was then
administered in dilute form by a stomach tube; this
method disturbed digestion and seemed to upset the anı-
mals considerably. It is certain that alcohol given to
animals through the stomach deranges their digestion
and appetite to such an extent that the experimenter 1s
unable to determine whether the resulting effects are
due to the alcohol, as such, or to the general deranged
condition of the animal. When given in the drinking
water they take little or none of the water and the treat-
654 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST. [Vow. XLVII
ment is insufficient. For these reasons an inhalation
method of treatment has been resorted to which, as far as
experience goes, has no serious disadvantages and does
not complicate the conditions of the experiment.
A fume tank of copper is made of sufficient size to
supply breathing space for 4 or 5 guinea-pigs at one time.
The tank is arranged with four outlets, so that definite
amounts of the fumes may be passed through in a given
time and the ventilation controlled. In this way each
animal could be given about the same amount of the sub-
stances. The individuals, however, differ so in their
resistance to the treatment that it has been found better
to treat all to about the same degree of intoxication. This
physiological index is more reliable as each animal is
thus affected in a similar fashion each day. For this
purpose they are placed in the fume tank on a wire
screen, and absorbent cotton soaked with alcohol is placed
beneath the screen, and the animals inhale the fumes.
The tank was described and illustrated in a previous
article.
Ether is given in a similar manner, except that the
animals are much more readily overcome and must be
carefully watched while inhaling even the most dilute
doses.
In order to avoid handling the females during late
pregnancy, a special treating cage is devised. An ordi-
nary box-run with a covered nest in which the animal
lives is connected by a drop-door with a metal-lined tank,
having a similar screen arrangement to that of the gen-
eral treatment tank. The pregnant animal may be
driven daily into the tank and thus treated with alcohol
fumes throughout her pregnancy without being handled
in any way that might disturb the developing fetus.
Direct EFFECTS OF THE TREATMENT ON THE ANIMALS
Many of the animals have now been treated almost to
the point of intoxication for six days per week for nearly
three years. They are affected by the alcohol fumes in
No. 563] EFFECT OF INTOXICATING MALE PARENT 655
different ways; certain ones become drowsy and stupid,
while others become excited and sometimes vicious during
the treatment, constantly fighting and biting at others
in the tank. One male always had to be treated alone on
this account. The fumes are inhaled into the lungs and
pass directly into the circulation, so that the animals show
signs of intoxication very soon after being put into the
tank, yet the intake of alcohol is so gradual that they
may remain for one hour or more without becoming
totally anesthetized. The mucosa of the respiratory tract
is considerably irritated during the first few days or
weeks of the treatment, but later becomes hardened and
little effect can be noticed. The cornea of the eye is
greatly irritated and often becomes milky white and
opaque during the first few months; but later this clears
up in most of the specimens and the animal is able to see
perfectly, though one male that has been treated for 32
months is now entirely blind. The general condition of
the animals under the treatment is very good; they all
continue to grow if treated before reaching their full
size, and become fat and vigorous, taking plenty of food
and behaving in a normal manner in every particular.
Certain of the animals have been killed at different
times during the experiment and their organs and tissues
studied microscopically ; all have seemed entirely normal.
The tissues of one female were examined after she had
been treated for over a year, and the heart, stomach,
lungs, liver, kidney, etc., were all normal. She was gen-
erally fat but there was no fatty accumulation in the
parenchyma of any of the organs except possibly a slight
excess in the adrenal glands.
As mentioned above several of the animals, both males
and females, have been partially castrated during the
experiments and the ovaries and testis have been found
to be in healthy condition.
The treated animals are, therefore, little changed or
injured so far as their behavior and structure goes.
Nevertheless, the effects of the treatment are most
656 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
decidedly indicated by the type of offspring to which they
give rise, whether they are mated together or with nor-
mal individuals.
EFFECTS ON THE OFFSPRING
The animals have been mated in various combinations.
First, treated males have been paired with normal
females, the paternal test; this is the crucial test of the
influence of the treatment on the germ cells. In this case
the chemically modified or weakened spermatozoon can
alone be responsible for the defective offspring, since the
egg is normal and develops in a normal environment in
the healthy mother.
Second, treated females are paired with normal males,
the maternal test. This combination offers two chances
for injuring the offspring. Hither the ovum may be
defective as the result of the treatment which the mother
has undergone, and may thus give rise to a defective
individual; or secondly, the developing embryo may be
affected directly by the alcohol in the system of the
mother, since Nicloux has shown that this substance may
pass from the blood of the mother into the tissues of the
fetus. Thus the intoxication of the embryo may modify
its forming structures in the same way that a fish embryo
develops deformed organs and parts when in sea-water
to which alcohol has been added.
The third combination is the mating of two alcoholic
individuals. This is the most severe test and offers the
greatest chance for defective offspring.
Before the experiment or treatment begins the guinea-
pigs are all tested by normal matings and are found to
give normal vigorous offspring. They continue to give
normal offspring until the treatment has lasted for some
time. The effect accumulates slowly and is not noticed
at once. A number of experiments in which the treat-
ment of a female was commenced at the beginning of
pregnancy have so far given rather indefinite results,
although a slight effect may be indicated.
No. 563] EFFECT OF INTOXICATING MALE PARENT 657
In all 124 matings of treated individuals have been
made. One hundred and three of these have reached
full-term and are recorded. Twenty-one matings are not
yet due. From the 103 full-term matings only 52 young
have survived and most of these are somewhat under
size and show their affected condition in the type of off-
spring to which they give rise. Yet their parents were
all unusually large and originally strong animals.
From 35 control matings 56 healthy offspring have
been derived which continue to produce normal animals
in the following generations, in a few cases now to the
fourth generation.
A tabulated summary of the results may be arranged
as indicated in Table 1. The conditions of the animals in
the mating pairs are shown in the first column of the
table and the total results of the matings are indicated
in the following columns.
The first horizontal line gives the record when alcoholic
males are paired with normal females. Fifty-nine such
matings have reached term, 25 of these gave negative
results or early abortions. Some embryos were aborted
during very early stages and were generally in such poor
condition when found in the cages that little could be
learned from them. They were partially or completely
eaten by the mother in most cases. The males were
always kept with the females during favorable periods
for a number of days, usually about three weeks, and
conception should have occurred in all cases, as it did
with the control matings.
Thirty-four of the 59 matings resulted in conceptions
which ran the full term. Eight, or about 24 per cent. of
these, were stillborn litters, consisting in all of 15 indi-
viduals. Most of these were somewhat premature; in a
few cases their eyelids were still closed and the hair was
sparse on their bodies. (A normal guinea-pig at birth is
well covered with a hairy coat, its eyelids are open and it
very quickly begins to run about.)
Twenty-six, or only 44 per cent., of the matings pro-
658 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
duced litters of living young. These litters contained
in all 54 individuals. Twenty-one, or almost 40 per cent.,
of these young guinea-pigs died within a few days or less
than four weeks after birth, while 33 of them survived.
Thus, out of 69 full term young, of which 54 were born
alive, only 33 have survived, and many of these are small
and excitable animals, and although not treated them-
selves have since given rise to defective offspring in sev-
eral cases where they have been mated with one another.
On the other hand, 35 control matings have produced 32
living litters consisting of 60 individuals, only 4 of which
have died and 56 are perfectly normal animals.
It is of interest that the young animals before dying
show various nervous disturbances, having epileptic-like
seizures, and in most cases die in a state of convulsion.
The important fact in the above case is that the father
only was alcoholic, the mother being a normally vigorous
animal. This experiment clearly demonstrates that the
paternal germ cells may be modified by chemical treat-
ment to such a degree that the treated male will beget
abnormal offspring even though he be mated with a
vigorous female. A reconsideration of the figures in the
first line of the table shows really how decidedly the
injured spermatozoon expresses itself in the fate of the
egg with which it combines.
For comparison the second line of the table shows the
results of matings between alcoholized females and nor-
mal males. These matings might be expected to give
more marked results than the previous ones, since in the
treated female not only the germ cells may be affected,
but the developing embryo itself may be injured by the
presence of alcohol in the blood of the mother.
There are 15 matings between alcoholized females and
normal males. Three of these, or 20 per cent., gave nega-
tive results, or were possibly aborted very e Three
stillborn litters were produced consisting of nine indi-
viduals, while 60 per cent. of the matings gave living
litters. This result is better by 16 per cent. than that
No. 563] EFFECT OF INTOXICATING MALE PARENT 6659
obtained when alcoholized males were paired with normal
females. The proportion of surviving individuals is,
however, less from the treated females than from the
treated males. The 9 living litters contained 19 young,
9 of which died soon after birth and 10 survived. Thus
out of 28 full term young only 10, or about 36 per cent.,
survived, while 64 per cent. of the offspring were lost;
in the above cases where the male alone was alcoholic
almost 48 per cent. of the full term young survived.
TABLE I
CONDITION OF THE OFFSPRING FROM GUINEA-PIGS TREATED WITH ALCOHOL
amheol cum. | Mame] | Yom
| i Surviv-
Condition of the Animals ber of | sult or sea | still- u Soon | im
tat- | Early | Litters | | Bn iters | After | Young
ings | Abor- dok Birt
ion
|
Alcoholic g by normal 2....| 59 | 25 S| ge ees hor we
Normal coholic ¢ . 15 3 3 9 0i 9 10
Alcoholic g A aloakilic Q. 29 15 3 6 bie SOP ey f 9
a PA EE ea a 103 43 14 30 46 | 37 52
Normal g by normal ` A 35 2 1 4 ga o 4 56
2d generation by normal..... 3 0 0 0 3 | 0 4
2d generation by Se pes 3 0 2 ob i | 0 2
1 def. |
2d generation by 2d generation) 19 7 0 ee hg Bae p | 13
| 1 def.
read treated during preg- |
viv wns Saeed butt 40 0 S344 7
The third horizontal line indicates the results of pair-
ing aleoholized males with aleoholized females. The
effects of the treatment in this case are slightly more
marked than in either of the above lines. Twenty-nine
such matings gave in 15, or more than 50 per cent., of the
cases negative results or early abortions. Three stillborn
litters occurred, each consisting of two individuals. Only
11 living litters were produced. These contained 16
young, 9 of which survived while 7 died soon after birth.
A comparison of this combination with the control
matings given in the fifth line shows in a decisive manner
the really detrimental effects of the treatment. In the
one case only 9 surviving young were obtained from 29
660 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vow. XLVII
matings, while in the other the control animals gave 56
surviving young from 35 matings.
The fourth line summarizes the results of the matings
made with treated individuals. <A total of 103 matings
have run the full term; 43, or almost 42 per cent. of these,
have given negative results or early abortions; while 35
control matings failed in only two cases to yield a full
term litter. Fourteen, or 133 per cent., of the matings
gave stillborn litters consisting of 30 individuals. Only one
stillborn litter occurred in the 35 control matings; this was
a large litter of 4 young and the mother seemed almost
unable to carry them. The 103 matings of treated ani-
mals gave only 46 living litters, about 45 per cent., while
32 living litters, or 914 per cent., were produced by the
35 control matings. The 46 living litters from the alco-
holic individuals contained 89 young, 37 of which died
shortly after birth and 52 survived. The 32 living litters
from the normal animals consisted of 60 individuals, only
4 of which died while 56, or 93 per cent., of these survived.
Of 119 full term young, 30 of which were stillborn, pro-
duced by the alcoholic animals, only 52, or less than 44
per cent., survived as against the 56, or 874 per cent.,
survivors among the 64 full-term control offspring.
The bottom line of the table shows that 4 normally
mated females treated with alcohol during the period of
gestation gave 4 living litters, consisting each of 2 young.
One out of the 8 young died soon after birth. These
few cases would seem to indicate that the treatment,
when started at the beginning of gestation, was not par-
ticularly injurious to the embryos developing im utero.
ÅRE THE EFFECTS oN THE OFFSPRING TRANSMITTED?
The offspring derived from the alcoholic individuals
are termed second generation animals, and were not
treated with alcohol. The sixth, seventh and eighth lines
of the table represent the data obtained from the few
full time matings that have been made with these guinea-
pigs.
No. 563] EFFECT OF INTOXICATING MALE PARENT 661
In three cases second generation animals have been
mated with normal individuals and have produced per-
fect results, though the litters have been small. Three
litters are recorded containing a total of 4 young, all of
which survived. It might seem as though the normal
mate counteracted any defect which may have been pres-
ent in the second generation animals.
The mating of second generation individuals with alco-
holized guinea-pigs gave decidedly different results. The
seventh line shows that 2 out of 3 such matings produced
stillborn young. In one of these cases the female was of
the second generation and the male alcoholic, and in the
other case the reverse condition existed; yet both com-
binations gave dead offspring, one litter of two and one
of three individuals. One of these specimens from the
second generation female by the alcoholic male was
grossly deformed. The third mating gave two surviving
young. At present there are too few matings of this
combination from which to draw conclusions, yet the
results obtained are the most disastrous of all.
Nineteen matings between second generation animals:
have been made. The outcome in these cases compares.
very unfavorably with that from the control matings,
while the data are much of the same type as those ob-
tained from the aleoholic combinations. Seven, or almost
37 per cent., of the matings gave negative results.
Twelve living litters were born consisting of 19 individ-
uals, 6, or about 32 per cent., of which died very soon
after birth and showed various nervous disorders. One
was entirely eyeless and decidedly deformed.
From the number of records available one might con-
clude that the effects of the alcoholic treatment were as
pronounced upon the offspring of the second generation
animals, although they had not been directly treated, as
they were upon the offspring of alcoholized individuals.
The poison acts upon the cells and tissues of the body,
the germ cells as well as other cells, and an offspring
derived from the weakened or affected germ cell has all
662 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vowu. XLVII
EXPLANATION OF PLATE
Ventral surfaces of two guinea-pig brains. A, the brain of an animal
which was entirely eyeless, no optic nerves or tracts are present. B, the
brain from another member of the same litter. This animal was defective
po
shows and the optie nerves are clearly seen passing medially to form the
chiasma and from there the optic tracts are shown along the anterior mar-
gins of the tuber cineria. All of these optic structures are missing in the
brain above.
No. 563] EFFECT OF INTOXICATING MALE PARENT 663
the cells of its body, both soma and germ, defective since
each of the cells is a descendant of the injured germ cell
combination.
These are the initial experiments with mammals to
show that an injury of the germ cells may express its
effects on the offspring and be passed through subsequent
generations. :
The actual outcome of the experiments may be more
fully recognized by a consideration of one of the most
striking cases. A large normal female, weighing about
700 grams, had given two normal young by a control
mating and had since given non-viable young by a mating
with an alcoholic male. She was then mated with another
large strong alcoholic male which weighed 740 grams and
which had given before this mating apparently healthy
offspring by normal females. The mating resulted in the
production of 4 young, all small and rather excitable in
their behavior. These individuals from the normal
mother and the alcoholized father grew slowly, although
they ate freely and appeared to be well. They remained
small and below the average in weight. Three were
males and one was a female.
One of the males was mated with a normal female and
two normal young resulted. He was then mated with a
female from an alcoholic father and she gave birth to
two small young; one of these offspring was only half
size and very excitable. He was then mated with a
female from an alcoholic mother and one small young
was produced.
A second one of the three males was mated with a
normal female which produced one large apparently
normal offspring. He was then mated with a female
from an alcoholic father and two small young resulted,
one of which died within five days and the other is weak
and nervous. He was again mated with a normal female
and one normal young was produced.
The third male was mated with his sister and she gave
birth to 3 young. One of the young died when one day
664 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
old, having been in a constant tremor since its birth;
another lived for nine days but whenever it attempted to
walk it was seized with spasmodic contractions; the third
specimen exhibited the same nervous manifestations and
was completely eyeless. This animal died eight days
after birth and an examination of the brain showed an
entire absence of optic tracts, as may be seen in Plate 14.
In the development of this animal it is probable that
the optic vesicles were suppressed and never arose from
the brain. Thus, no eyes, optic nerves, or optic tracts
could have formed. This particular eyeless condition in
these experiments is of interest since one is readily able
to suppress the origin of the optic vesicles in fish and
chick embryos by similarly weakening the embryo with
treatments of alcohol, ether, ete.
The mother of these offspring was remated with her
brother, but she died six weeks later, not becoming preg-
nant. She was in an emaciated condition but had always
been less than half normal weight.
The three extremely weak and defective offspring were
doubtless due to the fact that both of their parents had
similarly weakened or injured constitutions, having re-
sulted from a single mating of a normal female with an
alcoholized male. The eyeless offspring and the other
two nervous non-viable individuals should not be inter-
preted as due merely to the fact that their parents were
brother and sister. Several normal matings of brother
and sister have been made during the experiment and
perfectly healthy offspring have been produced. In the
studies of heredity conducted on guinea-pigs brother and
sister are crossed with impunity, in no way weakening
their offspring. The significant point in the present con-
sideration is that the two animals coming from the same
mother and treated father may have had similar weak-
nesses or defects and the combination of two such indi-
viduals resulted in offspring which exhibited these defects
to a more decided extent. The three animals were far
more defective than their parents and owed their defects
No.563] EFFECT OF INTOXICATING MALE PARENT 665
to the modified condition of the germ cells of the grand-
father from which they descended.
CONSIDERATION OF INDIVIDUAL Matincs AND RESPONSES
Studying the data of individual animals, another point
of some importance presents itself. This is the fact that
the same male often yields very different results when
bred to different females, although the females are simi-
lar so far as the experiment goes, being either all normal
or aleoholic. This may be due to the varying degrees of
resistance or hardiness possessed by the germ cells of
different individuals. A part of this difference may be
due to the fact that as the treatment advances the germ
cells are more affected and the results do actually become
more pronounced.
Male No. 5 that has been treated with alcohol for two
and one half years, has been mated 25 times. Eleven of
these matings have yielded negative results; 4 were with
alcoholic females and 7 were with normal. Three of the
matings gave stillbirths, 2 with normal females and one
by an alcoholic female. Only 11 of the 25 matings gave
living litters, 4 of these were non-viable and 7 litters
survived. Five of the 7 surviving litters were from nor-
mal females and 2 from alcoholic mothers. This alcoholic
male has, therefore, begotten only 7 surviving litters out
of the 14 full term litters born and out of a total of 25
matings.
Alcoholic male No. 6 shows a still worse record. Out
of a total of 21 matings, 10 have given negative results,
5 by normal and 5 by alcoholic females. Two matings
gave stillborn litters, one from a normal female and one
from a second generation female. Nine living litters
resulted from the 21 matings, 3 from alcoholic females
and 6 from normal. Five of the nine litters born alive
were non-viable, the young dying soon after birth. Only
4 litters survived out of the 11 reaching term and out of
the total of 21 matings. Three of these surviving litters
were from normal females and one was from an alcoholic
mother.
666 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
Alcoholic male No. 43 has been mated 10 times. Three
of the matings gave negative results, two by alcoholic
females and one by a normal. One stillborn litter re-
sulted from a mating with an alcoholic female. Six living
litters came from the 10 matings. The young in 3 of
these litters died soon after birth and 3 litters survived.
Alcoholic male No. 45 has now been treated about one -
and one half years and has been mated 9 times. One
mating with a normal female gave a negative result.. One
mating with a normal female gave a stillborn litter.
Seven living litters were produced, 5 of which survived,
2 from alcoholic females and 3 from normal females.
The data in this case appear slightly better than in the
foregoing but this is due to the fact that only a few
matings have been made and most of these during the
early stages of the treatment, when the effects are not so
pronounced.
All of the other aleoholized males in the experiments
show comparable records.
A reference to Table I shows that with three excep-
tions 35 matings of normal males with normal females
gave living litters containing in all 60 individuals, only 4
of which failed to survive. This record stands in striking
contrast to the data recorded above from the 4 alcoholic
males, and it shows convincingly that the alcoholic treat-
ment has affected the germ cells of these males so that
they are no longer capable of producing entirely normal
offspring even though they be mated with normal females.
The outcome of the successive matings of fifteen differ-
ent females is tabulated in Table II. The varying ways
in which the same individual has responded in different
matings is noticeable. Number 15, a normal female,
shows an instructive record. Mated with alcoholic male
No. 6 she gave two stillborn young; mated with alcoholic
male No. 5 a negative result; remated with No. 5, two
young were born and both died of convulsions during the
fourth week; then mated with a normal male a normal
vigorous offspring was produced; mated again with alco-
No.563] EFFECT OF INTOXICATING MALE PARENT 667
holic male No. 5 an apparently normal guinea-pig was
born; mated with No. 43, an alcoholic male, she gave 2
young which only lived for two days; then mated again
with a normal male she produced 2 vigorous offspring and
fmally mated with No. 69, an etherized male, 2 young
were born, one of which died at birth. Thus, out of the 8
matings, 2 with normal males gave perfectly normal off-
spring, while 5 out of the 6 matings with treated males
gave disastrous results and only one of these matings
resulted in the production of an apparently normal young.
Number 56, a normal female, mated to a normal male,
No. 48, gave 2 normal young; with alcoholic male No. 45
gave 3 premature stillborn fetuses; again to a normal
male No. 80 gave 3 normal offspring; and finally again to
alcoholic male No. 45 she gave one very small young.
Normal female No. 63 gave two normal individuals by
a normal mating and then three successive matings with
an alcoholic male failed to produce a viable offspring;
one mating resulted negatively, one gave three young
dying shortly after birth, and in the third case two late
fetuses were aborted. She was then mated again to a
normal male and produced two vigorous offspring.
Normal female No. 50 was mated alternately with
normal and alcoholic males for 4 matings, with alter-
nately good and bad results.
Animals 19, 30, 54 and 58, all normal females, show
records closely similar to the ones just mentioned. (In
a former table of successive matings the first mating of
No. 19 has been recorded incorrectly; it should read by a
normal male giving two normal offspring as in the pres-
ent Table II, instead of by alcoholic male No. 4 with a
negative result.)
Alcoholic female No. 64 gave two normal young by a
normal male before her treatment was commenced.
Mated to alcoholic male No. 6 she gave two young; one
died at birth and one survived; with alcoholic male No. 5
she gave an apparently normal young; finally, by alco-
[Von. XLVII
THE AMERICAN NATURALIST
668
perp
sunoAs Sunod *10u qoq ‘Sunog Junod *10u
ee | ore ee ee eee io CP 2's. 0s 6 6 ae I ‘ep Be ‘9y z zI Re “ION, gZ ‘9 2) “OV A ‘pp ne) “ION *10U PG ‘ON
pop
sunod ‘1ou yjoq = ‘sunod unos *10u
eer e ee eee eer sense ese seseseleersee ee eseevesileoeeeeeseesee 0 ‘OF fo) ‘OLIV rA ‘69 Lp "ION g ‘ep Be "y g ‘OF ne "ION ‘10u 0g ‘ON
Sunog payioqe
‘10u səƏsN}30} perp pre ‘Sunog Juno *100
eer r eee eee eetleseeneereeeeesi eee eeseeeveosn A ‘e6 yp “ION Əl Zz tg Re "y g ‘g 2 KAA 0 ‘g T. AA z ‘pp Be] "ION "100 £9 ‘ON
perp perp Bunos
Z ‘Junos ‘unos əzıs %4 ‘jeus uroq Juno
£‘9 © Y| 0°92 oy $ ‘Sp O Vir SG e DIV 0 ‘9 2 TV | -INS T ‘9 2 ‘ory | ou g ‘O “AON | ‘Iou G] “ON
ABP PZ SUOISTNA
perp T Zuno perp yoq [euLiou -u09 Ul perp
‘Bunos g *10U ‘Sunog Apuorwdde 3unoÁ y4oq ‘Bunog uroq
69 © PUVA | Z ‘02 © ION |Z ‘EF 2 N |T ‘9 © ‘oy |ou T*P YON |Z ‘g 2 ‘Wy 0 ‘S © ‘TY | -ms 3'9 O “TV | ‘sou GT ON
194}0W
poe ‘oan ur
perp ‘səsngəoyz 3uno4 sunod ‘10u Junod ‘rou
AMERRE RRE 8 ee ANENE te 6 EACE EER NEAC ERE A e ee Zz ‘g L "21y "IOU I *¢ Re) “OLV A ‘OP LP "y z ‘oz rel “ION *"I0uU og "ON
19yjou
Pora
In us
pop “IA g porp q ‘Sunog suno’
ee ee i ee de ee ‘69 ye "ION 0 ‘op ne) ‘OIV 0 ‘oP Ae) ‘y g ‘PP ne) “ION “10u g ‘pP “ION ‘oye 6S "ON
194400
pOT ‘oton ug
pərp ‘səsngəoyz Juno perp Į ‘Bunos Zuno :
& Eo & 66 8 DOO L 6 BiRe 0.6 Dd CB 0.6.4.6 6 6.0.0 6 0352941 9S * £0 8.439 9 8.04 Z ‘op 2 “y ‘10u I ‘Q p KAA Z ‘9g ne) ‘OIV "Iou g ‘P “ION ‘oye +9 ‘ON
Supew wg | SUNEN yy Savy q9 Zu qe BUEN yp IUEN pe Sane pz BUNBEN ist pupuy
“SHIVNG,| NAIL JO SƏNILYJIŲ TAISSHOONS AHE JO SLIASTY
Il WIavVi
No.563] EFFECT OF INTOXICATING MALE PARENT 669
Juno
qeus | pəyroqe
: Z ‘SOT sosnqoy ¢ sunod ʻou Sunofs
Coc ertee eee eee ee es eee ek ee ee See yp "mod pz | ‘ZOIL Pa 0 to 2 EAA g “PP yp “ION “Iou I ‘p “ION “e 99 ‘ON
| -Zo1d Supp
paean & “
‘parp g ‘sano’ Suno¥ jeus #uno< jews sunod
Treraererenerotis Pee eg oe es ee ee ee ee ee ee a eee se ee ai Z ‘eg Be “ION gZ '9 2) ‘OV A ‘g ne] ‘OTV "Iou 2 ‘p “ION "Iou 69 ‘ON
ABP PZ ABP PZ
perp ‘sunoé perp ‘sunod unos preus Junod ‘10u
Se oe ee ee ee ee eS Bt ie ee ge EA A a Oe ek! Z ‘cp pP “OV A ‘9 p ‘OLIV z ‘OF p "ION PA ‘Lp p "ION ‘oe z9 “ON
ma0q] [4s Junod rou perp pe ‘Bunos
E + 0 6 8 S90 080d 8 ee fe a Oe oe E ANTARA Cee SS oe Se ee EF 2 "y y ‘Op 2 EASA g ‘pp Pe "ION € ‘OP yp “ION “Oye 09 ‘ON
qyq 78
poip ‘sunoé Juno Sunod *10u
Pore E ar ee ee eee oe ee a ee ee ee ee e A a e 0 ‘9 p “Y I ‘ep 2 “2Y "Iou d ‘9 © "y Zz ‘OF p "ION ‘10u ge ‘ON
jews wW1Oq TIS
ArwoA ‘Zuno Sunod *100 ‘ainyeuteid Zuno ‘100
ae a ee ae ee ete ee kl Py ee ee ee ee i es a ee I ‘CP Be] AA e ‘08 2 "ION, € ‘CF P ‘OLIV A ‘SP YP "ION ‘rou 9¢ ‘ON
porp
Zuno yqy}oq ‘Sunog Juno
Poa ee EEA ee ee ee ee ee eee aT EREEREER, d ‘9 2 “OTV A ‘1p a “ION 0 ‘9 p ‘OV ‘Tou Zz ae "10N ‘qe ec ‘ON
bas iti 18 cde WW TIN 419 Suey V BWN WF BUEN pe BUEN pZ ZAPA 4S1 ppujuy
.
670 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
holic male No. 43 she produced two fetuses which died
in utero and killed her.
Female No. 59, alcoholic, has a similar record and was
also finally killed by 3 fetuses dying in utero and poison-
_ ing her.
Alcoholic females 55, 60, 62 and 66 all show very poor
records in the production of viable offspring.
During the course of the experiments four females have
been killed by the death of fetuses in utero. In three of
the cases this occurred after the females had been treated
with alcohol for a number of months and were becoming
more and more affected by the treatment. No. 61 died
after she had been given alcohol for four months with
three fetuses in utero which had apparently been dead
for several days. No. 64 had been treated with alcohol
for over one year and finally, while in a late stage of
pregnancy by alcoholic male No. 43, she became stupid
and refused to eat. On examination the fetuses showed
no signs of life and were quite hard; they were removed
by operation and had been dead several days. The
mother had become so intoxicated by this condition that
she was unable to recover after the removal of the
fetuses.
Female No. 59 had been treated with alcohol for thir-
teen months when, after being mated with a normal male,
she was operated upon in order to remove three dead
fetuses. She failed to recover.
The fourth case of young dying in utero was that of a
normal female, No. 30, that had been mated with an
alcoholic male. The almost full term fetuses died and
produced the same symptoms in the mother as those in
the cases above; she was also operated upon and failed
to recover.
It is a perfectly easy operation to remove the ovaries
or uterus from a normal guinea-pig. I have not tried to
remove living fetuses. There is little doubt, however,
that it is the accumulated toxins owing to the presence of
No.563] EFFECT OF INTOXICATING MALE PARENT 671
the dead fetuses which prevented the females from re-
covering after the operation in these three cases.
The death of the late fetuses in utero is to be expected
merely as a step in the series. A number of early abor-
tions of embryos have occurred, and the table shows the
enormous fatality among the young shortly after birth,
as well as the frequent occurrence of stillborn litters.
When the young happen to die shortly before birth in-
stead of after birth, the female in some cases is unable
to expel them from the uterus.
A consideration of a few of the notes made from the
individual matings will further serve to illustrate the
actual response of the animals to the treatment as shown
by the outcome of the matings. For this purpose we may
take two random groups.
First a group of eleven matings made on October 30
and 31, 1912, resulted as shown in the following notes:
Oct. 30, Nor. 2 No. 30 « Ale. £$ 5—Jan. 9, 1913—One
normal young, No. 123 9.
Oct. 30, Nor. 2 No. 29x Ale. 3 45=— Jan. 20, 1913—
Three very small young, Nos. 134 ¢, 135 9, and 136 9.
Oct. 30, Nor. 2 No. 58 X Ale. ¢ 6— Jan. 15, 1913—T wo
normal young, Nos. 129 3, 130 9.
Oct. 30, Ale. 2 No. 62 X Nor. ¢ 46— Jan. 9, 1913—Two
small but normal young, Nos. 121 9, 122 9.
Oct. 30, Ale. 2 No. 59 X Ale. ¢ 43—0.—Only one of the
eleven matings that did not take.
Oct. 30, Ale. 2 No. 60 X Nor. ¢ 44—Jan. 17, 1913—
Two apparently normal young, Nos. 131 3, 132 g.
Oct. 31, Nor. 9 No. 68 x.Nor. ¢ 69=Jan. 21, 1913—
Three normal young, Nos. 137 ¢, 138 g, 139 g.
Oct. 31, Nor. 9 No. 71X Nor. d$ T2— Jan. 10, 1913—
Two small normal young, Nos. 126 J, 127 g.
Oct. 31, Nor. 2 No. 73 x Nor. 3 70=Jan. 19, 1913—
One large young, No. 133 9.
Oct. 31, Nor. 2? No. 74 Nor. d 79=Jan. 11, 1913—
One large young, No. 128 9.
Oct. 31, Ale. 2 No. 55 X Nor. ¢ 47= Jan. 9, 1913—Two
672 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vor. XLVII
small and weak young, Nos. 124 9, 125 g, both died when
one month old.
In the group of 11 matings, 4 were between normal
males and normal females, control matings, three were
between alcoholic males and normal females, and three
between normal males and alcoholic females. All of
these produced offspring as noted, while the single mating
between an alcoholic male and an alcoholic female gave a
negative result although the animals were kept together
as long as the individuals of any of the other pairs,
17 days.
One of the alcoholic females gave two young which
died within a month.
A second group of 18 matings made during November,
1912, are recorded as follows:
Nov. 4, 2d Gen. 2 100 xX 2d Gen. g 92—0.—Together
very long, though failed to take.
Nov. 4, 2d Gen. 2 101 X 2d Gen. ¢ 99=—0.—Together
very long, though failed to take.
Nov. 15, 2d Gen. ? 91 X 2d Gen. ¢ 92— Feb. 18, 1913—
One large young, apparently normal, No. 170 g.
Nov. 15, 2d Gen. 2 98 X 2d Gen. 4 99=—0.—Failed to
take, though together six weeks.
Nov. 16, 2d Gen. 9 76 X 2d Gen. 4 TT = Jan. 28, 1913—
Three defective young, one eyeless, all died within 10
days.
Nov. 16, Nor. ? 88 x 2d Gen. ¢ 78=—Feb. 20, 1913—
One large young apparently normal, No. 171 ¢ (long
gestation).
Nov. 16, Ale. 2? 66 x Ale. g 5=—0.
Nov. 16, Nor. 9 87 x 2d Gen. £ 75—Jan. 27, 1913—
Two normal young, Nos. 140 9, 141 g.
Nov. 16, Nor. 9 19x Ale. ¢ 6=— Jan. 30, 1913—Three
small weak young, two died shortly after birth, one No.
146 ¢ survived.
Nov. 16, Nor. 9 34x Ale. ¢ 43=-Feb. 4, 1913—Two
normal young, Nos. 156 9, 157 g.
No. 563] EFFECT OF INTOXICATING MALE PARENT 673
Nov. 16, Nor. 2? 49 x Ale. ¢ 45— Jan. 31, 1913—Three
normal young, Nos. 147 g, 148 9, 149 9.
Nov. 16, Nor. 2 33 x Nor. ¢ 46— Jan. 30, 1913—T wo
fine young, Nos. 144 g, 145 9.
Nov. 23, Nor. 2 50 X Nor. & 69— Feb. 5, 1913—Two
large young, Nos. 160 g, 161 9.
Nov. 23, Nor. 2 15 X Nor. 4 70—Feb. 4, 1913—T wo
large young, Nos. 158 9, 159 g.
Nov. 23, Nor. 2 54 Nor. 3 72—Feb. 3, 1913—Two
large young, Nos. 150 g, 151 g.
Nov. 23, Nor. 2? 56 X Nor. g 80—Feb. 3, 1913—Three
normal young, Nos. 152 3, 153 3, 154 9.
Nov. 23, Nor. 2? 52 x Nor. 6 81—Feb. 12, 1913—One
large young, 167 9.
Nov. 23, Nor. 2 53 xX Nor. 3 48— Feb. 3, 1913—One
large young, 155 g.
To summarize these 18 pairings: 7 were normal con-
trol matings all giving vigorous young. Three were
alcoholic males by normal females, all gave young. Two
litters consisted of small animals, while the third litter
was very weak, two of its members died just after birth.
Five of the matings were made between untreated
animals which came from alcoholic parents, second gener-
ation animals. One litter of 3 individuals was born, all
were weak and defective, one being eyeless and the 3
died within ten days. One other litter consisted of only
one individual which was born after an unusually long
period of gestation. Three of the matings gave negative
results. Thus 3 out of 5 second generation matings failed
to take, one gave non-viable young, and only one litter of
viable young was produced from the 5 matings, as against
7 viable litters from the 7 control matings.
There were two matings of second generation males by
normal females. Both of these gave viable young, though
one of the females had an unusually long gestation
period. The normal mates seemed to have counteracted
the weakened condition of the second generation males.
674 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vov. XLVII
The one mating between two alcoholic individuals again
gave negative results.
Thus 4 of the 18 matings failed to take, 3 of these were
between second generation animals and the fourth was
the double alcoholic mating.
Fourteen matings were successful, in five cases one
member of the pair was normal and in seven cases both
were normal. In the remaining two cases both animals
were of the ‘‘second generation,’’ though themselves un-
treated, one litter was non-viable and but a single litter
of one young survived.
These sample notes from 29 pairs out of the total of
167 full term matings contained in Table I, gives a fairly
clear idea of the manner in which the individual animals
respond.
CONCLUSIONS
Finally, in conclusion, we may consider the type or
nature of the injury produced by the treatments and the
manner of transmission or inheritance involved. The
treated animals themselves show no effects of nervous or
systemic injuries in their general health or behavior. It
is only when such individuals are bred that they prove to
be inferior to the untreated animals. This inferiority is
shown both by a slowness or failure in many cases to con-
ceive, although they copulate normally, and by the poor
quality of the offspring to which the successful concep-
tions give rise. That this poor quality of offspring is
due to an injury inflicted by the treatment on the germ
cells of the alcoholic animals is shown by the fact that
when the male alone is treated the offspring he begets
are decidedly inferior. The germinal taint is still further
demonstrated by the fact that the offspring from treated
parents although themselves not treated produce equally
or more defective young than do the treated animals.
The defects shown by the offspring of alcoholic parent-
age are general in type, not definite or specific. The
central nervous system and special sense organs are
»
No.563] EFFECT OF INTOXICATING MALE PARENT 675
apparently most affected, and this is true also in embryos
developing in unfavorable environments. I have found
that fish embryos when developed in a large number of
unusual. environments, including alcohol and ether,
always show marked abnormalities of the nervous sys-
tem and special sense organs, particularly of the eyes
and ears. When chick embryos are subjected to similar
environmental conditions, it has been found in experi-
ments performed during the last two winters, that they
respond in a manner similar to the fish. Many chick
embryos show different degrees of cyclopia and the
degeneration or absence of one eye of the normal pair is
a common defect in the chick as it is in the fish where
many grades of monophthalmicum asy tricum were
described in my communications on the subject. In this
connection the eyeless guinea-pig derived from untreated
animals that had an alcoholic father becomes of special
interest, and the general nervous symptoms, spasms,
epileptic-like seizures, etc., shown by animals of two
generations gain importance.
All defects of the nature of those mentioned may be
considered as due to weakened development or develop-
mental arrest. Any environment which weakens or re-
tards the early stages of development will cause such
conditions. How, then, are they transmitted by the alco-
holic male, or by the untreated offspring of alcoholic
parentage?
When the animal is treated with alcohol, lead or almost
any poison for a long period of time, the poison acts to
weaken or injure all of the body tissues with which it
comes in contact through the circulation, the liver and
other glandular organs usually show the effects in par-
ticular. The reproductive glands are injured as well as
others and all the cells and tissues of such an organ are
below normal. When such a male animal is paired with
a normal female, the resulting offspring contains in every
cell of its body elements derived from the weak or injured
male pronucleus. Unless the vigor of the normal parent
676 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Von XLVII
is sufficient to overcome the injured condition, the off-
spring is defective.
The important thing in considering this defective off-
spring is the recognition of the fact that not only its
soma cells but its germ cells as well are defective, since
all were derived from the modified spermatozoon of the
injured father. When this offspring with injured germ
cells is paired with a similar individual, as has been fre-
quently done in the experiments described, the resulting
animal body is constituted of cells, all of which are the
result of proliferation or division from the primary in-
jured egg and sperm cell; thus all of the cells are of a
similar inferior nature. Therefore, the young derived
from the second generation should be, leaving out of con-
sideration the power of a cell to recover from such
poisoning, equally as defective as those derived from the
treated parents.
This might be construed to show the transmission of
acquired ch ters, but it can not be properly inter-
preted in such a sense. There is in this case no transmis-
sion of new or strange characters strictly speaking,
merely a weakened or injured cell gives rise to other
weak cells. The term ‘‘weak’’ is employed for the lack
of a better one, meaning that the cells are below normal
in reaction, respond slowly or in a deranged manner and
often die or wear out early in their career.
It may be that in nature such defects as hare-lip and
cleft palate are transmitted in a fashion similar to the
method just suggested. These defects run in families and
are said to be inherited. Their character, however, is
clearly that of a developmental arrest. Such defects are
very probably not truly inherited at all, that is, they are
not definite characters or qualities as hair and eye color
are, but are due to the fact that the germ cells from which
the deformed individual arose, or the uterine environ-
ment in which it developed, were not fully normal in
vigor. A more careful study of the inheritance of such
defects will doubtless reveal the fact that other deform-
No. 563] EFFECT OF INTOXICATING MALE PARENT 61717
ities and developmental arrests are also common in the
same families. In other words, weak germ cells or the
poor developmental environment runs in the family, and
hare-lip and cleft palate are merely the external expres-
sions of these conditions.
The interpretation may be concretely expressed as
follows: Mammals treated with injurious substances,
such as alcohol, ether, lead, etc., suffer from the treat-
ments by having the tissues of their bodies injured.
When the reproductive glands and germ cells become
injured in this way they give rise to offspring showing
weak and degenerate conditions of a general nature, and
every cell of these offspring having been derived from the
injured egg or sperm cell are necessarily similarly in-
jured and can only give rise to other injured cells and
thus the next generation of offspring are equally weak
and injured, and so on. The only hope for such a line of
individuals is that it can be crossed by normal stock, in —
which case the vigor of the normal germ cell in the com-
bination may counteract, or at any rate reduce, the extent
of injury in the body cells of the resulting animal. By
continually introducing normal mates into such a line `
the defects might be entirely eliminated, but the continued
interbreeding of animals with defects or systemic injuries
will doubtless result in the death of the race.
The offspring from a diseased father derives all of its
cells from the poor sperm, thus each cell is poor in part
and is so passed from generation to generation.
The present experiments are being continued and a
large number of matings between second and third gener-
ation animals are now made. Various combinations of
second generation animals are being tried in order to
compare the effects resulting from paternal and maternal
treatments, as well as the doubled effects. Two animals,
both derived from alcoholic fathers, are mated, others
from alcoholic mothers, and the various crosses between
these classes are tried. In other cases second generation
sisters are mated one with a normal and the other with
678 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
an alcoholic male, and subsequently these matings will be
reversed in order to study the power of the normal mate
to counteract the injured condition, as well as the tend-
ency of new alcoholic cells to augment the condition.
SuMMARY
Three years ago a series of experiments were begun
with guinea-pigs in order to test the possibility of modi-
fying the type of development in mammals, so as to pro-
duce definite monstrosities, as had been accomplished with
lower vertebrates. This primary object has not been
fully attained at the present time, yet the experiments
have demonstrated several points concerning injury of
the germ cells, and have shown that an alcoholized male
guinea-pig almost invariably begets defective offspring
even when mated with a vigorous normal female.
A method has been devised for administering the
alcohol by inhalation. The animals inhale the fumes of
95 per cent. aleohol which are readily taken into the pul-
monary circulation, and very soon cause a state of intoxi-
cation. By this method the stomach is not injured and
the general metabolism of the animal is maintained in a
healthy condition. Few changes are produced in the
tissues of the animals, even after a treatment given six
times per week has extended over almost three years.
Yet the actual effects upon the reproductive glands are
indicated by the inferior quality of the offspring to which
the alcoholized individuals give rise.
The animals have been mated in various combinations.
First, aleoholized males are paired with normal females,
the paternal test, and also the crucial test of the influence
of the treatment on the germ cells. Fifty-nine such ma-
tings have reached term. Twenty-five of these gave nega-
tive results or early abortions. Thirty-four of the fifty-
nine matings resulted in conception which ran the full
term. Hight, or about 24 per cent., of these were stillborn
litters containing in all 15 dead individuals. Many of
them were somewhat premature. Twenty six, or only 44
_No.563] EFFECT OF INTOXICATING MALE PARENT 679
per cent., of the matings produced litters of living young,
containing a total of 54. Twenty-one, or almost 40 per
cent., of these young animals died within a few days or
less than four weeks after birth and only 33 of them sur-
vived. Many of the 33 survivors are small excitable
animals and though not treated themselves have usually
given rise to defective offspring in the several cases
where they have been mated with one another.
The second combination is between alcoholized females
and normal males, the results of which are interesting in
comparison with the above. In this combination there
are two chances to injure the offspring; in the first place
it may arise from a defective egg cell, or secondly, it may
be injured by an abnormal developmental environment
within the body of the alcoholized female. Fifteen such
matings have been made. Three of these, or 20 per cent.,
gave negative results, or were possibly aborted very
early. Three stillborn litters of nine individuals were
produced. Sixty per cent. of the matings gave living
litters, as against 44 per cent. in the first combination
between treated males and normal females. The propor-
tion of surviving young is, however, less from the treated
females than from the treated males. Of 19 living young,
9 died soon after birth and 10 survived.
The third combination was between alcoholized males
and females. Twenty-nine such matings gave in 15, or
more than 50 per cent., of the cases negative results or
early abortions. Three stillborn litters occurred, each
consisting of two individuals. Only 11 living litters were
produced containing 16 young, 9 of which survived while
7 died soon after birth.
All of the matings of the treated animals may be com-
bined and compared with control matings as follows: In
a total of 103 full term matings, 43, or almost 42 per cent.,
have given negative results or early abortions, while 35
control matings failed in only two cases, or about 6 per
cent., to yield a full term litter. Fourteen, or 134 per
cent., of the matings gave stillborn litters consisting of
680 ‘THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
30 dead individuals. Only one stillborn litter occurred in
the 35 control matings; this was a large litter of 4 indi-
viduals and the mother seemed almost unable to carry
them. The 103 matings gave only 46 living litters, about
45 per cent., while 32 living litters, or 914 per cent., were
produced by the 35 control matings.
The 46 living litters from the alcoholic matings con-
tained 89 young, 37 of which died shortly after birth and
52 survived. The 32 living litters from the normal ani-
mals consisted of 60 individuals only 4 of which died
while 56, or 93 per cent., of them survived.
Of 119 full term young, living and stillborn litters, pro-
duced by the alcoholic animals only 52, or less than 44
per cent., survived as against the 56, or 874 per cent.,
survivors among the 64 full term control offspring.
The offspring derived from the alcoholic individuals
are termed second generation animals and were not them-
selves treated with alcohol. In three cases second gener-
ation individuals have been mated with normal and have
given perfect results, although the litters have been small.
It might seem as though the normal mate possessed a
strong tendency to counteract any defect which may have
been present in the second generation animal.
Mating second generation individuals with alcoholized
guinea-pigs gave very different results. Two out of three
such matings produced stillborn young, one of which was
grossly deformed. The third mating gave two surviving
young.
Nineteen matings have been made between second
generation animals, the outcome of which compares very
unfavorably with that from the control matings, while
the data are closely similar to those obtained from the
alcoholic matings. Seven, or almost 37 per cent., of the
matings gave negative results. Twelve living litters were
born consisting of 19 individuals, 6, or about 32 per cent.,
of which died very soon after birth and showed various
nervous disorders; one was entirely eyeless and decidedly
deformed.
No.563] EFFECT OF INTOXICATING MALE PARENT 681
From the number of records available one might con-
clude that the effects of the alcoholic treatment were as
pronounced upon the offspring of the second generation
animals, although they had not been directly treated, as
upon the offspring of aleoholized individuals. The poison
injures the cells and tissues of the body, the germ cells as
well as other cells, and the offspring derived from the
weakened or affected germ cells have all of the cells of
their bodies defective, both soma and germ, since each
of the cells is a descendant of the injured germ cell
combination. In this manner the defects or degenerate
conditions are transmitted or passed w subsequent
generations.
LITERATURE
Bataillon, E. 1910. Le problème de la fécondation circonserit par 1’im-
prégnation sans amphimixie et la parthénogénése traumatique. Arch.
Zool. Exp., Tm, 6, Nr. 2.
Bertholet, E. 1909. Ueber Atrophie des Hoden bei chronischem Alkohol-
ismus. Centrlb. f. allg. Path., XX.
Forel, A. 1911. Alkohol und Edain (blastophthorische Entartung).
Münchener med. Wochnschr., LVIII.
Herbst, C. 1909. Vortman is. VI. Arch. f. Entw’mech., Bd. 27.
Hertwig, G. 1912. Das Schicksal des mit Radium bestrahlten Spermachro-
matins im Seeigeléi. Arch. f. Mikr. Anat., Bd. 79, Abt. II.
1913. Parthenogenesis bei Wirbeltieren, hécvorgeraten durch art-
fremden radiumbestrahlten Samen. Arch. j Mikr. Anat., Bd. 81,
Ab
Hertwig, Ọ. 1913. Versuche an Tritoneiern über die Einwirkung be-
strahlter Samenfäden auf die tierische Entwicklung. Arch. f. Mikr.
nat., Bd. 82, Abt. II. ~
Hertwig, P. 1911. Durch Radiumbestrahlung hervorgerufene Veränder-
ungen in den Kernteilungsfiguren der Eier von Ascaris megalocephala.
Arch. f. Mikr. Anat., Bd. 77, -Abt. IT.
- 1913. Das ‘Verbalten des mit Radium bestrahlten Spermachro-
matins im Froschei. Ein cytologischer Beweis fiir die parthenogene-
tische Entwicklung der Radiumlarven. Arch. f. Mikr. Anat., Bd. 81,
A
ee
Kyrle. 1909. Bericht über Verhandlungen der XIII Tagung der Deut-
aeg Fapa anal in Leipzig. Centralb. f. Path. u.
nat., Bd. XX, 77.
Lae, “ poe Ueber die ‘Neti der Bastardlarve Zwischen dem Echino-
w?’ Bt
Lustig, A. 1904. Ist die fiir Gifte erwordene Immunität Ghertraybar von
Eltern auf die Nachkommenschaft? Centralb. f. Path, Bd. XV.
682 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
Mairet et Combemale. 1888. Influence dégéneration de 1’alcool sur la
descendance. Compt. rend. Acad. Sce., CVI.
Nice, L. B. 1912. Comparative. Studies on the Effects of Alcohol, Nicotin,
To bacco Smoke, and Caffeine on White Mice, I. Effects on Reproduc-
tion and Growth. Journ. Es: Zool., VII.
Nicloux. 1900. Passage de 1’Alcool ingtes de la mére au fetus, ete.
L’Obstetrique, Tm. XCIX.
Paul, C. 1860. Etude sur l’intoxication lente par les préparations de
plomb, de son influence sur le produit de la conception. Arch. gén. de
m.
Si mamas, H. 1898. Ueber die Ursache der Azoospermie. Berl. Klin.
ochschr., Nr. 36.
Stockard, C. R. 1910. The Influence of Alcohol and other Anestheties on
Embryonic — ent. m. Journ. Anat., X.
2 n Experimental Study of Racial Degeneration in Mam-
mals Treated with Alcohol. Arch. Internal Med., X.
Stockard, C. R. and Craig, D. M. 1912. An Experimental Study of the
felie ence of aitoi on the Germ Cells and the Developing Embryos
of Mammals. Arch. f. Entw’mech., Bd. XXXV.
Sullivan, W. C. 1899. A Note on the Yafoenet of Maternal Inebriety on
the Offspring. Journ. Ment. Sci
Todde, C. 1910. Ea dell cool sullo ‘urine e sulla funzione dei
testiooli. Riv. sper. di Freniatria, Vol. XXXVI, Nr
SUPPLEMENTARY STUDIES ON THE DIFFER-
ENTIAL MORTALITY WITH RESPECT TO
SEED WEIGHT IN THE GERMINATION
OF GARDEN BEANS
Dr. J. ARTHUR HARRIS
CARNEGIE INSTITUTION OF WASHINGTON
I. INTRODUCTORY REMARKS
Ix an earlier paper! I have shown that in field cultures
the mortality of seeds of Phaseolus vulgaris is not
random, but selective with respect to seed weight.
From the available data it appeared that both the
upper and lower weight classes are more heavily drawn
upon in the mortality than is the modal region of the seed
weight distribution. So delicately balanced is this mor-
tality of the two extremes in the particular series of
experiments that the mean weight of the survivors in the
long run differs not at all from that of the population
from which they are drawn, while their variability, either
absolute as measured by the standard deviation or rela-
tive as expressed by the coefficient of variation, is dis-
tinctly less than that of the original population.
Now while these results are deduced from such large
and repr tative series of data, that their general
validity for the specified conditions seems beyond much
question, their substantiation has appeared to me for
two reasons most desirable:
(a) The demonstration of selective elimination was
somewhat indirect. Comparisons could not be made
between the physical constants of the seeds which devel-
oped and those of all exposed to risk, or between the con-
stants of those which actually failed and those which
actually developed, but were necessarily drawn between
the constants of the general population from which the
seeds were taken for planting and those of the seeds
1 Harris, J. Arthur, ‘‘On j Differential Mortality with Respect to Seed
Weight Occurring in Field Cultures of Phaseolus vulgaris,’’ AMER. NAT.,
46: 512-525, 1912.
683
684 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vow. XLVII
which developed to maturity. The method is perfectly
legitimate, providing the samples planted be drawn in a
purely random manner (as they were in these experi-
ments), but the probable error of random sampling is a
two-fold one, and this increases the difficulty of deter-
mining the statistical significance of a given constant.
(b) The result seemed, a priori, improbable. Other
studies? had demonstrated a moderately low but consist-
ently positive correlation between the weight of the seed
planted and the number of pods on the plant produced.
It seemed reasonable to assume that since the larger seed
produce the heaviest plants they are in general more
vigorous, and hence should be more viable.’ If the seeds
increase in vigor and viability from the smallest to the
largest, one would anticipate an increase in the mean of
the survivors and a decrease in their variability result-
ing from the mortality in the lower part of the range of
variation instead of a reduction in variability without a
change in type (mean). These were the biological hy-
potheses which led me to question the generality of the
statistical findings. Further work was therefore under-
taken along various lines. Additional field cultures in
which it will be possible to compare the constants of the
seeds developing with those of the seeds failing, were
made. Such cultures can only substantiate, refute or
modify the conclusions drawn from the experiments
already carried out, but will not advance our knowledge
of the proximate causes of the differential mortality. To
this end, physiological (including chemical and physical)
studies must be instituted.
The purpose of this paper is to discuss the results of
2 Harris, J. Arthur, ‘‘On the Relationship between the Weight of the
Seed Planted and the Characters of the Plant Produced,’’ Biometrika, 9,
pt. 1, 1913; also ‘‘The Size of the Seed Planted and the Fertility of the
Plant Produced,’’ Amer. Breed. Mag., 3: 293-295, 1912.
3 Providing of course that the correlation between size of seed planted
and size of plant produced is not merely the result of extra reserve food in
the larger seeds.
4The results of these and of other data from experiments made long
since, but as yet in a raw condition, should be ready in a few months.
No.563] STUDIES ON DIFFERENTIAL MORTALITY 685
one of these physiological experiments, in as far as they
bear upon the questions of the existence of a differential
mortality and of its consequences in the population. The
evidence which they afford concerning the causes under-
lying the differential death rate is a question too com-
plicated both biologically and statistically to be discussed
in the limits of this paper.
For a fair understanding of the portions of the data
which are placed before the reader, it will be necessary,
however, to state briefly the general purposes which led
to the adoption of the particular methods employed. |
On the assumptions that the vigor of the seeds in-
creases from the lower to the higher weight classes,” one
might expect a mortality of seeds in the lower portion of
the range of variation due to innate incapacity for devel-
opment. One must then seek some other factor to ac-
count for the mortality of the heavier seeds.
One of the simplest a priori assumptions is that the
larger seeds require longer to germinate and that they
are in consequence longer exposed to the vicissitudes of
germination—to death by excessive moisture or by exces-
sive draught before or shortly after expanding their
leaves.
Now nothing whatever is here stated or implied in
favor of any of these suggestions. For the present, they
stand purely and simply as the first of a series of hypoth-
eses to be tested in the quest of the true interpretation of
an observed phenomenon. They are mentioned here solely
to explain why a particular series of experiments was set
up in the way in which it was.
II. METHODS
The first thing needful in testing these hypotheses is to
determine the relationship between the size of the seed
and the time required for its germination. To do this,
while at the same time securing data for a further test of
5 The chief evidence in support of this view is that afforded by the results
already mentioned for the correlation between the weight of the seed
planted and the characters of the plant produced. But of course this cor-
relation may be due solely to stored food materials.
686 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vov. XLVII
the existence of a selective mortality, one must work
with as large numbers of seeds as possible in order to
obtain a reliable measure of selective mortality as well
as decisive constants for the relationship between seed
weight and time required for germination, if it be of the
low or moderate order that one might expect. It is
desirable that the germination tests be made under con-
ditions as uniform as possible. The technique adopted
must also be practical—that is, in the case of the present
study, the work: was necessarily done at a season of the
year when it would not interfere with other experiments ;
the seeds had to be germinated so that each of the many
hundreds or thousands of pots could be examined without
too great back or eye strain every three hours through-
out the twenty-four during the whole period of germina-
tion; finally, the expense of setting up and maintaining
the experiment had to be kept within reasonable limits.
These requirements seemed, after careful considera-
tion, best met by planting the seeds separately in three-
inch pots of moderately fine sand. To facilitate hand-
ling, the pots were filled with slightly moist sand which
was generally allowed to dry before the seeds were
planted. The whole experiment was then watered at the
same time. In a few instances, it was impossible to have
the sand of all the pots perfectly dry when the seeds
were planted, but I believe this introduces only a small
source of error, for in these cases the planting was rushed
through as rapidly as possible, and the individually
labeled seeds were always thoroughly shuffled before
planting to counteract, in as far as might be, the hetero-
geneity of environmental conditions afforded by different
parts of the greenhouse. The space on the benches was
filled to the level of the top of the pots with sand to
prevent too great evaporation.’ The labels were com-
e In a few earlier experiments, fine bench gravel was used, in the later
ones, sand of the same kind as that in the pots. The gravel was employed
at first, since I thought it might be feasible to water indirectly by flooding
the gravel and allowing the sand to absorb it through the sides of the pots
This proved entirely impracticable. Not only was the method of watering
unsuccessful, but the gravel permitted an enormous amount of evaporation.
No. 563] STUDIES ON DIFFERENTIAL MORTALITY 687
pletely sunk in the sand so that the series number and
the weight of the seed were quite unknown at the time of
recording the results. Thus personal equation as far as
it implies any bias with regard to the material was
absolutely excluded.
At the outset, I must emphasize the fact that this tech-
nique (which I still believe is the best possible under
all the requirements) falls far short of what one would
desire. The germination of bean seeds under glass on a
large scale is a rather difficult process. If a sufficient
supply of moisture can be held in the soil from the begin-
ning to the end of the experiment and the temperature
be kept fairly high, the problem of good germinations in
the greenhouse is solved. But when one is doing the work
during the period of hot days and cool nights coming
in the early fall, the question of maintaining proper soil
moisture and temperature is a very serious one. It is
remarkable how heterogeneous the environment of a
single section of a greenhouse system is! This is espe-
cially noticeable in the drying out of the pots in sand cul-
tures. Just here lies one of the greatest difficulties. The
germinating bean seedling is very sensitive to watering,
especially in connection with low temperature. I imagine
this is particularly true of old seeds which have nearly
lost their viability. Probably the considerable irregu-
larity in our percentages of germination is very largely
due to the impossibility of controlling closely enough the
soil moisture."
In classifying, three groups were recognized: (A)
seeds germinating normally, (B) seeds germinating but
producing seedlings more or less abnormal, (C) seeds
failing to germinate.
On general grounds, the recognition of the three classes
seemed desirable; for purposes other than those of this
paper, it was essential. They can, of course, be combined
7 The effect of this inability to control moisture sufficiently was, when
present, always in the direction of a reduction of the percentage of germi-
nation through the rotting of some of the seeds, for in all cases the amount
of water was finally sufficient to bring about germination.
688 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
at pleasure for comparisons. The distinction between
A and C or B and C allows of practically no difference of
opinion. Personal equation probably plays considerable
part in distributing the seedlings between those which
germinated normally and those which were somewhat
abnormal, for there is no clear line of distinction between
the two. Practically all the cases were decided by myself.
The abnormalities were in small part teratological and in
part physiological or pathological—i. e., curved hypo-
cotyls failing to bring the plumule promptly to the sur-
face, cotyledons failing to free themselves from the
seed coat, blighted primordial leaves, etc. The results
of this study seem to indicate the need of more precise
consideration of aberrant seedling in future experiments.
III. MATERIALS
This research and the one which preceded it are in-
between seed weight and seed mortality in Phaseolus
vulgaris as a whole,’ and at the same time lay up data
which when sufficiently supplemented by others of various
kinds shall enable one to determine whether (and if so,
why) the relationship between seed weight and seed
mortality differs from variety to variety, or whether it
is dependent upon the conditions under which the seeds
planted were grown or those under which they were
germinated, or upon the age of the seeds.
Five characteristics were, therefore, deemed desirable
in the seeds used. (a) They should be known from
breeding tests to belong to strains as uniform as possible.
(b) They should represent several distinct varieties. (c)
Different lots should have been grown under as diverse
environmental conditions as possible. (d) Different ages
of as nearly as possible comparable seed should be inves-
tigated. (e) Comparison with the results of field experi-
ments should be easily carried out.
8 The materials are, however, for technical reasons limited to the dwarf
varieties,
No. 563] STUDIES ON DIFFERENTIAL MORTALITY 689
These conditions were most satisfactorily met in the
seeds held over from various pedigree experiments made
during the last several years. Coupled with the favor-
able points of these are some obvious disadvantages,”
which practically are of relatively small weight in view
of the fact that it would require several years work to
secure a better series.
It is unnecessary to devote space to the description of
these materials, since the key letters used are those
employed in previous papers, in which a large amount
of quantitative information concerning them may be
obtained.
Altogether thirteen ‘‘experiments’’ were made. That
is, a greenhouse or a section of a greenhouse was filled
thirteen times. These experiments are numbered A to
M, and the letters separated from the pedigree formule
by dashes in the tables refer to them. As a glance at the
tables will show, several different series of seeds often
went into a single experiment—the capacity of the small
greenhouse being about 3,000 and that of the large green-
house about 8,000 pots. The specific details of these
experiments seem at present irrelevant.
9 Chief among these is the age of some of the seeds—resulting in very
low percentages of germination. This is possibly a very important factor.
The field cultures were grown in 1908, 1909 and 1910. The sand cultures,
made in large part from samples of the same lots of seeds as used in the
various field experiments, were carried out in the summer of 1912. Any
one who takes the ratio of the seeds germinating to yee actually planted
for the individual samples will be impressed by the very low percentages
of germination in these experiments. This is largely Atei to differ-
ences in age of seed, but in addition it will be noted that the seeds were
grown under different environmental conditions and that they were germi-
nated under conditions which could not be maintained the same from ex-
periment to experiment. Inability to control eE and substratum
moisture may account for considerable differe
Now it is clear that in these ee, A as ot been possible to
differentiate between the deaths which occurred in the seed envelopes and
those which have taken place under ee vicissitudes of field or sand culture
conditions. This problem can not be tably discussed until experiments
under varying and carefully inti paysan can be made with seed
identical except for age. For such experiments one should start with large
quantities of pedigreed seed and follow it through its period of viability.
Material was bred for this purpose in the summer of 1912.
690 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vowu. XLVII
IV. Awatysis or Data
The distributions of seed weight are shown in the
conventional units of .025 gram range.!° Tables I-II
give those for the seeds germinating normally, Tables
III-IV for those which germinated but produced more or
less abnormal seedlings,"' Tables V-VI those for seeds
which failed to germinate.
From these the three more essential physical constants
(mean, standard deviation and coefficient of variation)
have been deduced and are presented with their probable
errors in Tables VII, VIII and IX.!?
TABLE I
WEIGHT OF SEEDS GERMINATING NORMALLY
Series 4/5 6 7| 8 | 9 | 10/11 | 12 | 13 | 14] 15 | 16/17] Totals
Wie oS —|2| 4} 8} 14] 18] 12) 9! 3| 6|/—|1 we 77
NED- M 6k 3. —} 2] 3} 14} 23] 58| 37| 25) 5; 2| 1!—|—|— 170
NHBAS a. 1.j—| —| 7} 29) 38 71| 27/16/13} 6|—|—| 1 209
NHH-M...:. Bee Poe 88/158:186|120| 50 |19 |11 | 6 | 3 |— 676
NHHH-J..... — | 7| 33 120 214 252|122| 45| 16| 5|—|—|} 1] 1 817
NHHH-M 2 |12 | 47176/389/456 218 251 5| 1| —|—|—]| 1,419
NHDD-J.: :. . since '140|233/225|142/ 51 | 17 | 8|—|—|— 867
NHDD-M 1 | 5| 20| 59/202|344|318|175| 58| 16| 5| 6 |— |— | 1,209
DH-D.... 33 —|— 48) 56| 43 2|—|—|—|—|— 176
NDH-E... =; —| 1} 1| 31| 65| 87| 54| 16| 3|— | —|—|—|— 58
NNDDD —| 3| 2| 10| 21| 19) 16| 13| 3| 1|—|—|—|— 88
DP-E. ..... —|— 16| 17| 12) 3| — | —|— — | —|— 57
NDDD-D..... —| 1] 8| 62/108|122| 60} 22) 4 | —|— |—|—|— 387
NNDDD R... — |— | 6| 67/106] 98| 53| 35| 7|—]| 2| 1|—|— 375
NDHH-D 1 | 7| 17| 66/144/153| 98| 25) 2| 1 |— —|— | — 514
NDHH-E..... hA | 50 154 81| 24| 6 —|— |— | —}|— 451
PRSI. as 5 |56 |202/268/121| 34| 14 — | —}|— | — | -— | 700
FSS L . 625: 2 | 63 |328/467/252| 59| 9 —|—/—|—j—);—| 1,180
FPSH-C....... e 8 ol | ea 11) 3 =i a
BIC; 7| 43104 19) 7 —|—|—|— —|—]|— 232
FSHH-C..... 4 | 34 |178|317/223| 89| 20} 2|—|—|—|}—|—/— 867
FSDD~C a 1 27 107 259 175 89 20) 2;— | —|— | — | — | — 680
10 Class 1 = 0.000—0.025 gram, class 2 = 0.025-0.050 gram, ete. Thus to
pass from the constants (means or a deviations) in units to those in
grams subtract .5 and multiply by .0
i1 In some of these series, N is a but it has seemed best to
lay the whole data before the reader. The degree of trustworthiness of
the constants is indicated by their probable errors. In some cases, t00,
lots of material are combined.
12 Tables of constants for (A + B) and (B+ C) are not given, although
they enter into some of the comparisons. They can be derived from the
original tables of data or calculated from the constants for A, B and C by
appropriate formule.
691
No. 563] STUDIES ON DIFFERENTIAL MORTALITY
GLE | 1 it r Obl tt OL eet celeste ee fe n T TEOD
6F9 TIZI! ||% |€ j9 |TT|01|€T|61t|gg|78|99] T0 09/09149 Ize lee log jst 2 ie t |—|—|—|—i—|:::* Y-M
EFS AL L e e e e a e a ee ee Se ee O ie 10 tt ee
4062 | —| —|—|—|—|—|—,—|—|—|—|& | | et] 96] oF] 19] ze eetizoziees 08/662 /Z22|20G|S9T| 94| FE} OL| € | 1 |’ H-STI
00z an a os a ee ee eee a ees Oe eee
998 | ||| 7|—| || I-11 IT ITT 1 oe | erise ep ize [ge ide ite lee loz | et) t11 —|—) "* p-gaer
9B ea cl el | cl ees il — a og Se jie i—-i—|—|—|—1 eae
69 IIS SIT FSS lS See ee et ote a ig iii Tn
6ZE | PTL a oo ee eee Once ee ce on oe ee ee Te TS
SET ZZZ Lae e |s j2 J6 | ties zz iez jor fo i ft |—|1 |—|—!—|—| »-aapp
sa oil ell et E a lee ae E i
eee 1 1 TTT ol | oo ee e © | Or or) oroe se eo ee ot 6 ce a tel i
OI IOI TET ITI SETI IS ot T1918 Pet et Beier is 2 8 i 1. |—|—|—|—|—|— |__| 5 pas
gog a a a a a IL a A L Aaa
er maea a o 18 | 18] 92) 99) a a la Ive a e eie e a
COE | il ol a li rl lie dl aes) SZ | €&|19 JEF |89 jez (cz |TT jf T | —|—|—|—|—|"' Bana
FOR Te ee, e ee ee ee a a ee
LES “TPT T TPT eo ao ee ee erie te ec ie ee ee ts Ot CY ii ee
Wel |e oll alll lp ee ee ee i ie ie se oe ie ee
Zo —|—)—-|-|-|-|-|-|-j-|t lt |—|—le |o |6 | erloz lee lt» ise lee zta $ lt |—|—|—|—|---aape
TPS I] TI] ZZE T |# 19 | St] 6 | HS] HF) OG] Te log [zz izt jo 12 2 |—|— —|—|—|—|—| -H99
sz | —|—}|—}—|—|— —|—|—|1 e |2 |2 61 | 9T | €z | Th| 8€ |T} loz jot > iz js je |—i—i—|—!—|—i:97HÐ9
sep. I—|—|—|—|—|— —|—I—|7 |9 |8 ‘01/97|9|99|89] zz loz lez jez is jt le ft i (—i~=]—|—| =b 480p
sep | —,;—/|—|—|—|— —|T{|T I |P | OL FT| 62) ¥9| 19] 09] O9/Z9 |t} loz et 19 If |—lt |—|—|—|—|—1-: y-a
wr | —|—|—| —| — t |—|—|ī |—le |z |» | et| 2t| ez] eel zelee jor lor e | —|—|—|—|— —|—|—|—|--‘p-Hpp
reg. | —| —| —| —| —} — —|—|ī |g |a {st 22) 6e) 29) 82] 98| v6 )t8 its Jez zr [9 Je |—|—|—|—|—| 1 |— d-HDD
860'T | —} —}| —| —| —| — —| I |—-|—|—|— eE E | OL] 2e] $8 Z0n tstioocizotlisti0g ite jor i¢ iz | —|—|—|-- ‘ween
C80'T =| a le —|—|T |T | € & jp |6 | 1Z| ST] 2h /8zZ jostisetigztizotizetigoties | eri i Tiri- Fan
sreyod | ce | ve | se | ce | re | og | ez | sz | z | oz Go PG ez | zz 1S1 06 | GT | ST | ZL} OF | ST | FI et | at | 1 Or!) 6 8 a 9 g SILIS
ATIVNYON ÐNILVNINYIY SAAG dO LHDIT A
It 4T4yL
692 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
TABLE III
WEIGHT OF SEEDS MORE OR LESS ABNORMAL IN GERMINATION
Series fats | 6|7|8 {9 |10|11|12|13/14|15| Totals
WBS eee, I—|1| 4 | 9|14|12 —| 3 |—|— 53
NH S E E S l&r i1824 2611] 3} 1.;—|— 89
NBH Jo ooa |} i — EEE u a 58
NURM oe pe e e AEE 6} 1/|2 148
NHB JI -o |1 |—]| 2| 7| 7/15) 6| 2| 1|—|—|— 41
NHHH-M........... baa 20127) 8) ee ee ae 53
NEDBA. o.a I—| 1] 2] 6|14| 9 5| 5|—|—|— 54
NEDD-M. oe jn | aie foe! 41 12 124) 10 2| 2};—/|— 57
NDR D- a a |—|—|— |10 |32|28|30|11|—|—| 1 |—| 112
NDER o ies |—|— | 1|17|27|40|26|10| 4| 1 |—|—| 126
NOD -c a L2] 12| 4| 9/19 6|— |—|—|— 51
NORE 2 a |[—|—| 1] 3|10| 9|10| 2| 3;—|—|— 38
NDDO-D kia ss |—|—] 1|11|15|15|11| 3| 1 =| 57
NDDD-E.. ke. 0258 |—|—| 2| 8) 4 t—llij ie 30
NXDHH D... |1|—| aj 622 14I 4 Limam 62
NORA... L. liir e] 6/14/12} 1} Le] 41
ME EE ee iT (gees ees | 67
FSSBe ee: |—| 8 [80 3324/11 —i—|— | — —| 110
FSH-C..............|—|—|—]12 | 39 | 39 | 24/10) 2}—|—| 126
fe a te ale 16a 142 || — |— | | — | ee 8
FSHH-C............|,—| 5 | 8|21|12| 6;—|—|—|—|—|— 52
PED. |1| 2| 7/20 13) 3 1)/—|—|—|-—|— 47
Any conclusion concerning selective mortality must
rest upon a comparison of these constants.
The method of making these tests demands a word of
explanation. In the previous study, the comparison was
necessarily drawn between the constants of the seeds
which actually produced fertile plants and those of the
general population from which they were drawn; the
constant for the general population was subtracted from
that of the sub-sample. The positive or the negative sign
of the difference showed whether mortality had tended to
raise or to lower mean or variability.
In these greenhouse experiments, on the other hand, we
have the constants for samples (4) normally germi-
nating, (B) germinating abnormally and (C) failing to
germinate. (B) may possibly be regarded as interme-
diate between (A) and (C).
If we take the difference between the constants
Survivors less failed
we shall have plus differences of the mean if selection has
tended to raise the general average by eliminating the
693
No. 563] STUDIES ON DIFFERENTIAL MORTALITY
136 |; —| T{—| @1 S| S| OT) LT] HE) Of | BE ler lez jiz Jort 1% |e mir |—j—|—i|—,—,, T-SDD
09 E)—| S|; El[—1t) 210 |? (8 19 6 ie T je (O18 ie it ip jj) — | | +s tee ey -M
W 11 IE St 8 © A gr er oa ooro oa (6 en M-STT
988 | || ||] T | 9 | & | Bt] 08) Fe) OF| GF |TOTIGOT/6IT| 08| 44| 84| 4i pl FEletieriz | Ziel H-STT
gg ITE oo ole oe 18 8 e ee ee fit oe a-STT
tet || iil F 2 |S erer er et te | etl Orie S is erei V-STT
Eg Eai ee oa ea a oi eee ee OE ee ee ee See eer ae essenee dq-TT
6¢ SE le om ope OTS te ie a et eee V-II
ZI TTP ren ep Ee e e e e a a ee y-ddapp
8 TO ee oe e a ae ee D-ddpp
It mame Rem ed Vane Socal mad Maat one! a a pe a ee a-ddapp
6 wom Denominator ee Se ae eg a Y-HHDD
ZI TET eee tm ft e ‘D-HHDD
61 SPST pre] epee tt Pe R e | a a te d-HHDD
0% ee ee ea a er SA i ae es ee a a a a oe 9.0 6 66 0:8 88 & 3¥*dpp
8% TP ee oo tls tT e e SO ae e e a ee e a es D749
8% TTP eo oe ee ooo ee ee re ee | a dapp
837 TSP ee a a pe oo | oo a ee 3-499
OOTY ed ee! a e e eer tie ee) is D-dpp
COL ll lol ol | ee ee es oe soe a 08 or et 6 te) je a I-dpp
9 | ed ee | | el ee eee ett) y—HDD
¥ SISTIS SAST [it 18 ee e e E a i a Ə7HÐƏ
Sz BHH ih fee ee fe e o A7HƏÐ
68 —|—|—|]—|—|—] 1] 2 18 |? | OL 71/9 9r fet 6 JS je jt it 1s | —j|—|— | — | | ee M-HDD
£9 |=} ||] tL ope 1/9 18 J9 e MLE eE a TA e a D-HDD
Sel ||| —|—| 1] | S48 [8 | 81] erore ee ee ete ee te te et d-HDD
¥6 Tp | me em ee ee ee Ole ee y-ssn
eg ama aaa [ml oi ee a a i a I-SSA
8180, | ze | te | o8 | ez sz | z3 | 9% | $3 g| sgi Bs} 12] of] 6 | St] Zt) 9t | et in a edel io) sapieg
NOILVNINUAH NI IVWUONATY SSAI YO TAUON SAMAY AO LHDIT A
AI ATaViL
694 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vow XLVII
TABLE V
WEIGHT OF SEEDS FAILING TO GERMINATE
Series 4/6)/6|7/[8 olini 13 | 14 15 16 | 17 | 18 | Totals
NADI S 15, 75|180/370 338|205| 90| 22| 6| 1| 1 |—|—|—| 1,303
NHD-M..... — | 10) 82/213/397 442/277| 92| 33 ae — js EA EE
NAH... —|—, 7| 26/157 329|359|222| 97|31 | 11 | 4 |—|—| 1 | 1,244
HH-M..... —| 3) 6| 36/157 384/463/289|108| 33 |12| 5 | 3 — | 1,500
NHHH-J....| 2| 7| 23| 82/164 201| 95| 31 P a a aal a
NHHH-M...| 1| 6 16 50' 62 1 i E T red EEE
NHDD-J....|—| 2j 10| 33| 92116112) 69| 24| 7| 2|—|—|—|—]| 467
NHDD-M....|— 9| 21| 55! 65| 32| 17 i aroei a
NDAD ¢.. 1| 1) 17| 67\141|145\102| 1) 19) 2|—|—|—|—|—| 490
NDH-E...... 3 16 96 214 123 hoes teow ony pony eee 0
ADOD 2| 6 24| 95|162|137| 75| 20 res Es S E EL 531
NDD-E: 8 32) 841471387] 7567 5|—|—|—|—|—|—| 511
NDDD-D ef 2 8| 43 4) 65 51 | E 244
NDDD-E 0 35 60191; 1G eer 1 | «1 | —j|— i |-— 2a
NDHH-D me | 4 18) Boos etl Bo) Be a -— aa
NDHH-E —} 1} 10| 23| 73| 74| 39} 21) —|—|—|—|—|#*#|—| 241
PERS 164 254 92| 21 ok RAR ande a a SS
PISE oe, 13 10420812431444] S0 A 1| —|\—|—|—|—|—|—| 9863
PIEC o —| 1 1391144| 52| ial. 4| illada 417
PIDO eos. 4| 44 164|197| 91| 27| 3| — eea aa 531
FSHH-C..... 1| 12} 62/114! 93] 31] 10|. 3| —'—|—|— =] 896
FSDD-0O 2: — | 24! 921113" 72| 20 ET E el ge cee E
smaller seeds; we shall have negative differences for
standard deviations and coefficients of variation if there
is a mortality of both the larger and smaller seeds—thus
increasing the variability in the eliminated sample and
decreasing variability in the surviving population.
Hence, regarding the abnormal germinations (tenta-
tively) as intermediate between normal development and
failure, we take our differences:
(A)-(C), or normally germinating less failed,
(B)-(C), or abnormal less failed,
(4)-(B), or normally germinating less abnormal.
Since the number of individual experiments is fairly
large, the comparisons may be made by merely noting
the sign of the differences—i. e., by taking the gross re-
sults of the individual experiments. Or one may treat
the data from a more numerical view-point, taking aver-
ages of the actual differences. Both methods will of
course be used.
In considering the differences between the constants of
the three classes of seeds dealt with for the whole experi-
695
T | & | & | 6 | 61| St} $z/ es] 99| 98] 26] 98] #9] TH| 82/g |9 J9 | T |t |—|—l—|—J Jf T-SDD
—|% |—|% |—|% |8 | |8 |6 |2 | Ft] s j9 |e 16 19 Je fe ft jr |== pm y-M
—|--|—|—|—|t [|b 1848 16 |e [2 )@ 18 16 18 ie te te ie it te ii): M-STT
—|—|& |—|% |9 | St] €t] 12) se] HF] 19 | 99 | 6F| SF] F| OF] FE] PE] 91|3|81 91] g |=|] e H-STT
|=] Tl] E [1% | % [OL] It] ot] 2] 92 | ve] €2| 28/9 | 98) reisg otio [6 |e |—|—| tt d-STT
me bua Gans Fa E eee Re de tA el Pe ee ee V-STT
—l=| 1] TIS] IE [8 T [—]6 | On] ar] 2¢/ 98) 98) 80) 99) 1h) oT) 2 | —|—|—|— | aT
=| TLS lope P S 81t OR ee ao Oo) o oe Fg ae E a YTI
=i =| Poo TO [T lor ig 19 16 19 18 106 19 te i T aemm M See ee ee ee eo soe M-ddpp
au bai a oe EE PS Pe eS ee E a a ae ee Pe ee a eee D-ddpp
SS ep ee eee 1 ae On Se te 2s te es n St. 0, 2 4 0s 64-040 oe d-ddpp
—|~—|—|—jI |T JT Ue UT th iF |Z 1013 |9 ig mel mel a a ct re M-HHDD
—i~~|—I—I—I1T 18 |Z 18 13 I2 19 |19 18 18 19 mee RK Ke] | SES, ide ih Ae A ge kee ne | D-HHDD
“SPT ETT) eo ege T ep) 8 St] 8 16 TOE IET ad T a a ae ee d-HHDD
“TPE ee ypc po ey 88 19 | 8 Ln Pee Oe ee ee ae ee 4ddp
samga | | ee? [1 16: | St a ee eae eee tie i app
Se baun ee ee ea Oe Te a eo es ue eo Se ee oe ae ee ae Se ae ce dg pp
=i] il ll ao | oe ea errr 2 te a a -A99
SPS ae Pepa ee E LAA A te St) Oo A ee D-dpo
TS ee eB pe mn a ee ee ie e a ee “d-dpo
—|T{/—|—|—|T |t |Z| |8 |8 |er|orjz |g |[—iz [>it | mf me ee ie Y-HDD
—{|—|—|—|—]|% |—|@ |9 jotizīi|īz etie |6 |} |—|—Ils It jmp ee le le D-HDD
ee eee ness aor Lis |t19 18.19 | 84 Ioia ge ee eer ee eee
—| ET bat {b |4 9S {0i 98/98 TE 08 OE eth e ey ee ee ee ee -HƏƏ
Fe m PJE 18 j4 |6 | 86) BG) Sh OF) PE SE BIIO E ge rs ee em D-HDD
L hori] Tmi S | 68108) 68! TEPE IS are OLF ie et tel ell le a d-HDD
ee So at a IT jT JE |9 |6 | 0@| OF] 09) ZF| OF| OG) 22;6 |£ i£ |z ee ae a A
ae eo I {E |P |6 | ST] 9T| To] $8] So) 69/84) of az 8r o |e | Z|—|—] en
| og | oz | sz | 2¢ | 96 | sz | ve | e | zz | 1z | oz GTA STIATE Ob ots PE OL CL 1 1 OR $ s/t 9 | 9 SƏS
No. 563] STUDIES ON DIFFERENTIAL MORTALITY
ALVNINUIY OL ƏNIV A SdaTg AO LHJAM
IA aVL
696 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
TABLE VII
PHYSICAL CONSTANTS FOR SEEDS GERMINATING NORMALLY
Seri Mean and Probable Standard Deviation (Coefficient of Variation
erles Error and Probable Error and Probable Error
NEPJ oe eo es 9.247 = .154 2.006 + .109 21.696 = 1.233
NUD- M. on eek. 9.276 += .074 1.435 = .053 15.464 + .579
Noa. 10.029 + .078 1.678 = .055 16.731 = 907
NHE-M...... .889 = .041 1.595 = .029 16.132 = .303
NBER HEJ 6 ees 8.649 = .033 1.388 = .023 16.049 = .275
NHHH-M....... 8.686 = .023 1.300 + .017 14.792 = .194
NHDDAT oe er. 9.597 + .032 1.416 + .023 14.753 = .244
NADP M es 9.465 + .028 1.437 = .020 15.187 =. «213
AG Og Sey 2 oi. 9.040 = .057 1.123 = .040 12.426 = .454
NDA os | 8.849 = .048 1.134 + .034 12.812 = .387
NDD, 8.955 = .116 1.618 + .082 18.073 = .948°
P-E an 8.649 = .109 1.216 = .077 14.055 = .905
NDDD-D.. ccv: 8.628 = .041 1.184 = .029 13.719 = .339
NDOD-£. occ. 8.739 + .048 1.379 = .034 15.781 = .398
NDHR D..:.... 8.607 = .037 1.254 = .026 14.565 = .313
NDHA-E. oe. e. 8.732 = .038 1.189 = .027 13.610 = -S11
r E Sees 14.215 = 056 2.730 = .040 19.208 = .288
URS- haw. 14.911 = .045 2.226 + .032 14.930 = .220
FSS I.o apa ei 6.860 = .027 1.057 = .019 15.407 = .284
PSSeD ces: 6.947 = .019 :950 = -013 13.678 + .193
FERC ve: 8.521 = .030 959 = .021 11.259 = .250
Mio oe an 7.232 + .044 996 + .031 13.769 = .439
Penl-C.. i... T243 + 025 1.083 = .018 14.955 = .248
PODIE. a. 7.378 = 028 1.094 = .020 14.822 = 277.
Gof ec 18.841 + .073 2.629 = .052 13.953 = .278
GGH-G.... a... 18.796 = .119 2.446 = .084 13.016 = .457
GOR-R 2 Fie 18.7 + .085 2.622 = .060 13.956 = .325
GGASF oe es SS 18.635 = .078 2.396 = .055 2.855 = .302
GHG er es 18.440 = .117 2.720 = .082 14.749 + .456
GOUR.. aan 19.170 = .096 2.633 = .068 13.734 = .361
BPP es ss ak 15.140 = .108 2.011 = O76 15.699 = .515
GGD-G. 5. eS 14.942 + .160 2.601 = .113 17.406 + .864
GBR 14.776 = .106 2.493 = 075 16.398 += .521
GODE. ek 16.354 = .079 2.347 = .056 14.349 + .349
GGDr-G......... 16.275 = 087 2.253 + .062 3.844 = .387
GGDeR ....... 16.847 .086 2.593 = .061 15.391 = .370
GGHH-F........ 18.459 .097 2.511 = .069 13.602 + .380
GGHH-G........ 18.319 = .149 2.381 + .105 12.997 = .585
GGHH-K........ 18.298 .096 2.439 = .068 13.328 = .379
GEDD-F i; 16.379 = .087 2.311 = 061 4.106 + .382
GGDD-G........ 16.681 = .150 2.588 = .106 15.513 = .652
GGDD-E ooo .k. 16.1 083 2.243 + .059 13.929 = .373
Bir Ae cs. 13.522 = .193 “380 = .137 17.604 = 1.042
EB... ann 13.115 = .247 1.866 = .175 14.224 + 1.357
LLB eae oe ike 13.759 + .109 3.097 = .077 .511 = .590
LUS-B...2..:... 13.280 = .140 2.943 = .099 22.157 = ./83
LESH ck. 13.772 = .042 2.902 = .030 21.068 -223
BEBE. 0s 228 2.671 = .082 19.587 + .622
Wek... ur 19.329 = .108 3.753 = .076 19.417 + .410
Wd. o. 19.972 = .141 2.799 = .100 | 14.013 = .509 _
No. 563] STUDIES ON DIFFERENTIAL MORTALITY
TABLE VIII
PHYSICAL CONSTANTS FOR SEEDS MORE oR LESS ABNORMAL IN GERMINATION
697
Mean and Probable
Standard Deviation
Coefficient of Variation
Series Error, and Probable Error and Probable Error
SBE SS Stearate 8.906 = .159 1.714 = .112 19.251 = 1.307
IVETE oe ek 9.325 = .933 1.305 = .660 13.993 = .901
NUR F eoo 9.603 = .109 1.229 = .077 12.794 .814
NER M n. 10.047 = .080 1.445 = .057 14.387 = .576
MRA cies 8.5387 = .155 1.469 = .109 17.209 = 1.319
NHHH-M....... 8.679 + .141 1.526 = .200 17.578 = 1.187
NEDSS. ing 9.019 = .150 1.633 = .106 18.107 = 1.213
NHDD-M....... 9.175 = .115 1.284 = .811 13.933 = .901
INDE HD os ca 9.045 = .076 1.198 = .054 13.244 = .607
NDOH-E. cn enn 8.984 = .078 1.296 = .055 14.429 = .626
ND-D oa 8.667 = .151 1.601 = .107 18.477 = 1.275
NEB. o. 9.105 = .151 1.382 = .107 15.180 = 1.202
NDDD-D 8.649 + .111 1.245 = .079 14.395 .928
DY EMT as oo i 8.333 + .186 1.509 + .131 18.111 = 1.628
NDHH-D....... 8.444 = .148 1.740 = .105 0.609 = 1.290
NOHH-Z.....:. 8.902 = .128 1.215 = .091 13.647 = 1.035
Jee. go 14.019 = .302 3.257 = .216 23.236 = 1.602
OBR Ree. cs 14.766 = .167 2.403 + .118 16.275 = .821
| See eee 6.507 = .071 .860 + .050 13.219 = .784
oS ee 7.110 + .076 1.184 = .054 16.647 = .778
Pere ts 8.896 = .068 1.123 = .048 12.628 = .545
PERDO 6.892 = .077 .859 = .055 12.468 = .807
rSRRC.... 7.115 = .100 1.068 = .071 15.004 = 1.014
FIDO C. 7.170 = .104 1.125 = .074 14.792 = 1.051
GORF o o 19.279 = .130 2.310 = .092 11.980 .485
i koe ee nn 19.238 = .227 2.674 + .161 13.899 = .851
I ic 19.382 = .197 2.759 = .140 14.237 = .734
GGHeP 20.400 = .317 2.349 =+ .224 11.514 = 1.113
GO G 19.833 = .375 2.721 = .265 13.718 + 1.3
GOGHK... 18.333 = .933 3.389 = .660 18.485 + 3.720
COGD-F...... .,:. 14.295 = .123 .007 = .087 14.041 .618
GODO... o.. 14.950 = .150 2.228 = .106 14.903 = .727
GRDR o a 14.491 = .085 1.896 +. 13.083 + .420
GGD-F.. i. 15.321 = .295 2.316 = .209 15.114 = 1.393
ODE oo oe 16.464 + .422 3.311 = .298 20.109 = 1.884
bb eee 16.750 = .344 2.281 = .243 13.619 = 1.479
GGHH-F........ 18.947 + .420 2.711 = .297 14.308 = 1.597
cunga 19.417 + .544 2.795 + .385 14.396 = 2.023
WGHH-K.... |. 18.556 = .872 3.878 = .617 20.897 + 3.464
GGDD-F........ 16.363 + .541 : = 383 16.259 + 2.399
GGDD-G........ 16.875 + .339 1.423 = .240 8.435 = 1.132
«aD k 5.667 = .669 3.434 = .473 21.921 = 3.160
EAA ck 14.932 = .183 .080 = .129 13.927 + .881
BB E 14.152 = .223 1.899 = .158 3.420 = 1.134
DERA PRES OE PSG 17.153 + .209 .550 += .148 20.693 = .898
a OR PEEL 16.473 + .303 3.327 = .214 20.194 = 1.351
MME 16.652 = . 538 = .057 21.244 355
Mem 16.244 = .185 3.327 = .131 20.482 = .839
OE a 0.683 = .384 4.410 = .272 21.321 = 1.371
Ob. oc, 3 19.900 = .110 2.594 + .078 13.038 + .401
698 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
TABLE IX
PHYSICAL CONSTANTS FOR SEEDS FAILING TO GERMINATE
Mean and Probable Standard Deviation Coefficient of Variation
Series Error and Probable Error and Probable Error
NARS is eons 8.594 = .026 1.413 = .019 16.443 = .223
NH 8.659 = .023 1.357 = .016 15.675 = .194
NAS o o 9.864 = .027 1.397 = .019 14.166 = .195
UAM ces. 9.905 = .024 1.379 + .017 13.917 + .175
NHHH-J 8.654 = .037 1.363 = .026 15.752 = .308
NHHH-M....... 8.491 = .069 1.505 = .049 17.723 = .590
NHDD J... i.. 9.351 = .046 1.476 = .033 15.781 + .357
NĦHDD-M....... 8.821 = .066 1.401 = .046 15.878 = .540
rips ee + rape 8.624 + .038 1.239 + .027 14.367 = .316
NORD. oe. 8.804 + .032 1.237 = .022 14.050 = .259
NPP?) ao 8.411 + .038 1.314 + .027 15.617 = .331
RDDR- >.. 8.444 = .039 1.307 = .028 15.484 + .334
NDDD-D 8.746 + .058 1.336 + .041 15.275 + .477
NDIDE... 8.531 = .059 1.322 = .042 15.499 + .501
NDHH-D....... 8.564 = .045 1.237 = .032 14.444 + .383
NDP E o 8.701 = .053 1.211 = .384 13.917 + .450
eE A es 14.435 = .085 2.664 = .060 18.451 + .430
UE oo 15.092 = .101 2.453 = .071 16.251 + .483
| pt SS o Saleen 6.422 = .025 1.066 = .018 16.606 + .285
PISE ed ener 6.693 + .026 1.147 = .019 17.134 + .286
PIRE E 8.565 = .035 1.073 = .025 12.521 + .297
PPE es 6.779 = .034 1.168 + .024 17.235 + .367
PRB oo 4 7.331 + .042 1.123 = .030 15.317 + .414
FIDDA 7.018 + .042 1.143 + .030 16.284 + .438
CGH. tS 19.584 + .129 2.979 + .091 15.210 = .476
GGH-G n] 19.194 = .119 2.934 + .084 15.285 = .447
GHAR a.. 19.330 + .131 2.729 + .093 14.116 + .489
GGHe-F. 2S 18.597 = .235 2.745 + .116 14.761 = .913
OOH a. 18.718 = .184 2.583 + .134 13.798 = .727
GOGHK... .....; 19.328 = .238 2.688 + .168 13.906 = .887
GED? a. 14.286 = .172 2.334 = .121 16.335 + .872
GDG.. Fess 4. + 128 2.598 + .090 17.920 + .643
GOR es. 14.690 = .106 2.141 + .075 14.578 + .519
OOD P... 15. + .216 2.262 + .153 14.688 + 1.012
OaD G. 15.827 = .218 3.483 = .154 22.005 = 1.020
GGDEK....... 16.302 = .223 2.628 = .158 16.122 = .994
GOHA F. .... 18.321 = .221 2.451 = .156 13.378 = -
GGHH-G........ 18.978 = .270 2.687 + .191 14.157 + 1.027
GGHH-K........ 19.341 + .294 2.787 + .208 14.412 = 1.095
CEDR-F oo. 15.103 + .325 2.591 + .229 17.154 + 1.563
Die 16.019 + .225 2.406 = .159 15.020 + 1.016
GGDD-K...... 15.822 = .293 2.918 = .208 18.442 = 1.355
IP e ee a 14.356 + .070 2.704 + .050 832 + .467
Bee. eS 14.154 = .070 2.280 = .049 6.106 + .357
EBSA. n. 14.571 = .266 4.036 = .188 27.698 = 1.384
DESB... 15.036 = .142 3.794 = .100 25.233 + .706
LUSAR, a, 16.480 = .117 4.169 = .082 5.295 + .531
LES“ 16.362 + .376 4.240 = .266 25.914 = 1.728
WR =o 19. : 4.140 + .199 21.683 = 1.093
GOGH. 20.350 = .078 2.867 + .055 14.088 + .278
No. 563] STUDIES ON DIFFERENTIAL MORTALITY 699
ment, it is necessary to note that, except for the coeffi-
cients of variation, these constants are in absolute values.
Clearly enough a difference of .254 unit in mean or of
.197 in S.D. for White Flageolet beans with an average
weight of 6.755 units and a S.D. of 1.071 units is not com-
parable with a difference of the same absolute amount in
Golden Wax or Burpee’s Stringless with a mean weight
of, say, 18.401 and a scatter in weight of 2.544 units.
TABLE X13
PHYSICAL CONSTANTS FOR GENERAL POPULATION
Series N | Mean and Probable Standard Deviation Coefficient of ee
r and Probable Error and Probable
TT |
DEED oe. 6,630 | 8.529 + .012 1.458 = .009 | 17.099 = .103
aE ati 7,334 9.774 = 011 1.421 = .008 14.537 = .082
NHHH 5,601 8.609 = .012 1.338 = .009 15.543 = .101
NHDD 5,029 9.417 + .014 1.4 .099 5.763 = .109
Becs 3,227 8.852 = .015 1.555 = .011 14.089 = .121
e 2,362 8.487 = .019 1.377 = .014 16.218 = .163
NDDD 1,946 8.649 + .020 1.315 = .014 15.210 = .168
NDHH 2,433 8.604 = .017 1.252 = .012 14.549 + .144
ARE E 3,271 14.640 = .030 2.519 = .021 17.205 = .148
AAT SRR ae 3,740 6.755 = 012 1.071 = 15.854 = .126
go) 2 S 2,122 8.516 = .016 1.092 = .011 12.826 + .135
32 ERE 1,989 6.956 = .016 1.034 = .011 14.858 = .161
FSHH. 1,788 0.226 + [017 As + .012 14.953 = .172
FSDD. 1,643 7.213 = 019 1.127 = .013 15.623 = .188
Mais: 2,828 18.919 = .03 2.674 = .024 14.131 © .177
GGH2..... 1,284 18.799 =. 2.608 = .034 13.873 = .188
pate Sree 2,140 14.972 = .036 2.498 = .026 16.681 += .193
GOD: 1,419 16.379 = .046 2.577 = .033 15.732 + .204
GGHH 1,329 18.401 = .047 -033 13.824 + .184
GGDD 1,093 8 = .048 2.395 = .044 14.700 + .216
wis Sa 1,070 14.206 = .050 2.443 = .036 17.197 = .260
LES. On, 5,305 14.826 = .033 3.570 + .023 24.077 + .167
We ee 707 19.412 = .099 3.888 = .070 20.032 + .374
GGS......1 1,039 | 20.176 = .059 2.800 + .041 13.876 = .209
18 These constants are, except for the LL, LLS and GGS series, calcu-
lated directly from the data tabled for the general populations. In t
case of the LL series the seeds were already a selected class—the heavier
and lighter having been drawn for the planting giving rise to LLS plants.
Hence in this case the constants were based on the summed seriations for
the seeds failing, producing abnormal seedlings and producing normal seed-
lings in the two lots. They will differ somewhat from those of the whole
Population of seeds weighed. In the LLS and GGS series the tables for the
general population were not yet prepared, hence the seriations of the seeds
of classes (4)—(C) were summed for the various experiments and served
as the basis for the general population constant.
700 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vow. XLVI
Hence these absolute differences must, for the sake of
convenience and of strict comparability, be reduced to
relative terms. The best way of doing this is to express
them in percentages of the general population values for
the same constant, where ‘‘general population’’ means
the whole mass of the particular strain and series of
seeds from which the seeds for the individual experi-
ments were drawn.
In the discussion of the whole series of experiments
both absolute and relative values will be taken into account.
In the preparation of the diagrams for differences in
mean and S.D. the relative (percentage) values only will
be used.
Table X gives the physical constants for the general
populations, and the numbers of seeds upon which they
are based.
I now turn to the various comparisons. It would be
desirable to place before the reader the individual differ-
ences and their probable errors, but since these number
750 their publication is precluded by lack of space, and
the small summary tables must suffice. All these differ-
ences may, of course, be derived by the reader caring to
check the arithmetic from the tables of fundamental
constants.
(To be concluded)
RECIPROCAL CROSSES BETWEEN REEVES’S PHEAS-
ANT AND THE COMMON RING-NECK PHEASANT
PRODUCING UNLIKE HYBRIDS
Many sex-linked characters have been described in birds
(fowls, pigeons, canaries and doves). The pheasant hybrids to
be described, however, show merely a different appearance of
male sexual plumage characters in the F, hybrids of a reciprocal
cross between Reeves’s pheasant and the common ring-neck
pheasant (P. torquatus). These hybrids are sterile, and there-
fore the experiment ends with the first cross, although Cronau*
stated that the offspring from a Reeves’s cock and common
pheasant hen were occasionally fertile. Poll, however, who
studied the spermatogenesis of numerous pheasant crosses, found
the hybrids between Reeves’s and the common pheasants and
between Reeves’s and Sommerings’s pheasants always sterile.
The Reeves’s pheasant was originally given generic recogni-
tion by Wagler under the name Syrmaticus reevesi. This dis-
tinction it certainly deserves, although later writers have often
placed it under Phasianus. The ring-neck pheasant, so called,
refers to the common stock pheasant which is now practically
pure torquatus.
In the fall of 1911 two hens were mated as follows: Pen D
contained a ¢ Reeves’s with two ring-neck hens; pen H a ĝ
ring-neck with two Reeves’s hens. These were all birds of the
season. The Reeves’s were from the same clutch of eggs from
a single pair, and the ring-necks from a strain of which large
numbers have been bred on the farm. The Reeves’s never, to
my knowledge, shows any variation of plumage in captivity.
The strain of ring-necks is practically constant, though the white
neck ring sometimes differs in its width.
It is therefore fair to suppose that the somatie difference of
the hybrids to be described is a constant feature, although from
pen D only two males were reared to maturity, and from pen H
only four. The six birds, however, immediately fall into two
classes. They have all the appearance of two well-marked spe-
cies. Hens were reared only from pen H.
*Cronau, C., Zool. Garten., 1899, p. 99.
? Poll, H. Casdachafi Natur. Freunde, 1908, p. 127.
701
702 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
A large number of eggs from these two pens was set, but from
pen D only five chicks were hatched; from pen H, ten. These
two lots of chicks were noted as differing both in down and in
first plumage in the following way: those with the Reeves’s
father and ring-neck mother, pen D, were lighter-colored than
the birds of the reciprocal cross. No detailed observations were
made. On maturity this same difference was found to hold.
On comparing the adult specimens dorsal side up, there is at
once seen to be.a constant difference involving all the feather
regions. In general, it may be said that in cross D the Reeves’s
father transmitted to his hybrid offspring more of his own char-
acters than the female Reeves’s transmitted to her offspring in
cross H. This is especially shown in the almost pure Reeves’s
head pattern of cross D, and in the general lighter tone of the
whole upper parts and flanks.
On the other hand, the stronger tail barring of Reeves’s pheas-
ant, as contrasted with the ring-neck, has been transmitted to
cross H by the Reeves’s hen, and has not been carried to the
same extent by the male Reeves’s in the other cross.
The plate shows the difference, and needs no explanation. The
other differences are briefly as follows:
Cross D, feathers of mantle with reduced and irregular black
band.
H, feathers of mantle with broad black band.
D, feathers of mantle tending to sub-terminal bar of buck-
thorn brown (Ridgway, 1912).
H, brown bar absent.
D, general color of mantle more tawny and less dark than
in H. Back and rump much lighter than in H, with also an
entirely different feather pattern. Upper tail coverts lighter in
D than in H. Barring of tail reduced in D to basal third and
not heavy. In H, heavy barring of whole tail, becoming blotchy
and obscured towards terminal third.
Scapulars, greater and lesser wing coverts, and even primary
quills different in the two crosses; and tending to more rich
browns and larger light areas in D than in H. First primary
with larger and more distinct light bars on inner web in D than
in H.
Flanks lighter and with tawny sub-terminal bars in D, which
are not present in H.
No. 563] SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSIONS 703
IG. 1. Male hybrid from a mating of a male Reeves’s with a female ring-
neck pheasant.
Fic. 2. Male Reeves’s pheasant.
Fic. 3. Male ring-neck pheasant. i
Fic. 4. Male hybrid from a mating of a male ring-neck with a female Reeves's
pheasant. '
704 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
Breast and lower throat slightly darker in H than in D, but
very similar. Rest of lower parts about the same in both crosses.
Three hen birds were reared from pen H. They all showed
strong tail barring and other well-marked Reeves’s characters.
The females of the two species involved are quite different,
and it is therefore to be regretted that there are no specimens
from both crosses for comparison.
SUMMARY
That this somatic difference between reciprocal crosses in other
pheasants is not always present, is shown by the uniform F,
generation in the two crosses, Amherst X Gold, of the genus
Chrysolophus, bred by myself. In the work of Professor Alle-
sandro Ghigi and Mrs. Haig-Thomas on pheasants no reciprocal
crosses have apparently been made.
The significance of the present case is not clear, and it is
desired simply to put it on record. Further work is necessary
to prove that reciprocal crosses between Reeves and the true
pheasants always give different results.
It is interesting to note that the differences which have been
described are rather subtle ones and quantitative rather than
qualitative. ;
JoHN C, PHILLIPS
The American
Naturalist
intended for publication and books, etc., intended for review should be
MSS
sent ns Editor of THE AMERICAN NATURALIST,
or
Garrison-on-Hudson, New York.
t articles containing summaries of research work bear
problems = Airas evolution are especially welcome, and will be given preference
in deg
o kaedrod reprints of cape bio ap are supplied to authors free of charge.
Farther i reprints will be supplied at c
and Tivarit ee her sent to the Lage gpa The
dollars a year. reign postigo s fifty cents and
e twenty-five cents salton. The charge for single ‘anion is
The advertising rates are Four Dollars for a page.
THE SCIENCE PRESS
NEW YORK: Sub-Station 84
Lancaster, Pa.
Entered as second-class matter, April 2, 1908, at the
Garrison, N. Y.
Post Office at Lancaster, Pa., under the Aet of
Congress of March 3, 1879.
FOR
ARCTIC, ICELAND and GREENLAND
BIRDS’ SKINS,
Well ee Low Prices
articulars of
= G. DINESEN. Bird Collec
usavik, North Iceland, Via st a ‘England
TENTH EDITION.
THE MICROSCOPE,
logy,
sA ee apimi GAGE, of Cornell University. Over
350 large octavo es and above 250 figures in lites new
and fully itor 2d ge edition. Price $2.00, postpaid,
COMSTOCK PUBLISHING CO., Ithaca, N. Y.
TO OOLOGISTS
and ENTOMOLOGISTS
W. F. H. ROSENBERG
Importer of Exotic Zoological Specimens
57, Haverstock Hill, London, N. W., Englaad
to announce the publication of two new
Begs
Price Lists: No. 18, Exotic Lepidoptera “ 8000
Species), No. 19, Birds? Eggs (over 1100 species).
ese will be mailed free on application, as well
48 any of the following lists:
Birdskins (over 5000 ies); Mammals (over
spec
300 Species); Reptiles, Batrachians and Fishes (over
400 species es),
Largest stock in the world of specimens in all
branches of Zoology.
ALL MUSEUMS SHOULD
WRITE FOR THESE LISTS
All specimens sent on approval.
Please state ma lists are required and give
name of this periodical.
FINE LAND SHELLS
I have in stock and for sale wepi ten thousand species
of land ohelin also a very good stock of marine, All are ac-
curately labeled. Iam pre
countries and Nalanda.
— — of the Philipp
mailed free. Strictly pre hairs ohaetion:
booty Corre ‘remporinace solicited gr peior eeen and ex gop
Only the finest eee han ag WA = F. ž
202 Westm tminister Road, Rochester, N. Y., U.S.
2
The aa of Chicag
instruction during pip e oe
sional sch
; meh Literature, Science,
Commerce and Administra-
ven b members of
University — apem isaugmented
ors from
The American Naturalist
A Monthly gone: established in 1867, Devoted to t
e Advancement of the Biological Sciences
th Special Reference to the Factors of iia Evolution and Heredity
CONTENTS OF THE MAY NUMBER
ee of Mamm@ in Duroc Jersey Swine. Pro-
or Edward N We ntwo rth.
Nator al and Artificial Ag Nin cinta in the Genus
otiana. Richard Wellin
PREE Articles and Trgni " simpiied 1 a
n Formule, essor R. A. Th
Raan of the j Development ae Agriculture in
Wyoming on the Bird F. B. H. Gro
Notes oa as ature: The Danti © the Duka Dr.
Alfre Mayer. The Growth of Groups | in the
griat Kin gdom. Professor H. S, Jennings.
X
zg
CONTENTS OF THE JUNE NUMBER
I. Heredity of Tricolor ka begins mo Dr. H. D.
Goodale and Profes T. H. Morgan.
II. Causes and Determiners in Radically Experi:
mental Analysis. Professor H. S. Jennings.
IIT. Clonal Variation in Pectinatella. Annie P.
Henchman and Dr. C. B. Dayenport.
IV. peg oe Articles and cued Simplicity
Adequacy in Mendelian Formule.
Secrecy: H. Morgan. The Possible Origin
of open in Somatic Cells. Professor R.
A. Emerson.
Vv. Notes aaa Literature : —— of the Sea.
Professor Chas. C. Adam
CONTENTS OF THE JULY NUMBER
Doctrines held as Vitalism. Professor H. 5. Jennings.
The Presence of the Barred Plumage Pattern in the
White Leghorn Breed of Fowls. Dr. Philip B
Hadley.
Shorter Articles and irinae The Geologic Work
of Termites in th lgian Congo. Donald Steel,
Notes and iterate ek in Genetic Problemsin
Protozoa at Yale. Professor A. R. Middleton.
Notes on ‘eine logy. President David Starr
Jordan.
CONTENTS OF THE AUGUST NUMBER
——— nar on Oenothera. IV. Dr. Bradley
Moo
ae ee a jpe and Intermittent Fasting
n Growth. rgius Morgulis
re Holothurians. eats H. ciie
Shorter Articles and p para and Co
ling in Drosophila, iting. The R aa
Obtained by hoe a eá mais E and Eue Sion
mexicana Schrad, Mary G. Lacy.
CONTENTS OF THE SEPTEMBER NUMBER
The Natural History of =y Nine-ban ao Armadillo
of Texas. Professo H. Newm
Genetical Studies on Oenothera. IV. Dr. Bradley
M. Davis
Darwinism in Forestry. Dr. Raphael Zon.
Notes ee a SGR Mortality observed between
Tene obscuris and T. molitor, Dr. Ross Aiken
Go a
CONTENTS OF THE OCTOBER NUMBER
A Contribution towards an Analysis of the Problem
of Inbreeding. Dr. Raymond Pear
The eae of Coat Color in Horses. Professor.
W.s erso
The Ve in the Number of Vertebræ and Ven-
tral Scutes in Two Snakes of the Genus Regina.
fessor Alexander G. Ruthven and Crysta tal
pson.
Shorter Articles and Reports: The Simultaneous
pies tion ot Distinct Mendelian Fac Ors:
fess he Fourt me ee
rface.
pacer canines: Dr. Frank M.
Single Number 40 Cents
Yearly Subscription, $4.00
D
The NATURALIST will be sent to new subscribers for four months for One
THE SCIENCE PRESS
Sub-Station 84: NEW YORK
Garrison, N. Y.
Lancaster, Pa
VOL. XLVII, NO. 564 © DECEMBER, 1913
Ae
THE
AMERICAN
NATURALIST
A MONTHLY JOURNAL
Devoted to the Advancement of the Biological Sciences with
Special Reference to the Factors of Evolution
CONTENTS
Page
The Fixation of Character in Organisms. Dr. EDMUND W. SINNOTT ~- - 705
- = -730
Inheritance of Left-handedness. Professor FRANCIS RAMALEY
` ey enact Studies on the Differential Mortality with Respect to
Seed
ht in the Germination of Garden Beans, II. Dr. J. ARTHUR HARRIS 739
- Shorter Articles and Discus
A Cross involving Pear pws of —" e in — = C,
LITTLE, J. C. PHILLIPS - 760
~ - - - 763
- - ~
Index to Volume XLVI - - > -
THE SCIENCE PRESS
GLANOASTER, PA. GARRISON, N. ¥.
NEW YORK: SUB-STATION 84
The American
Naturalist
intended for Ape and books, etc., intended for review should be
MSS
sent to the Editor of THE A
Short articles iroi summ
RICAN aaiae era Garrison-on- agg amin ba New
aries of research work
York.
on the
problems of Teksi evolution are especially welcome, and will be given preference
in sey em
ndrea reprints of bere are supplied to authors free of charge.
e hu
F urs ‘reprints will be supplied a
tions and advertisement should be sent to the Lag tery
rs a year.
e twenty-five cents additional.
subscription price is four d
anadian postage
The
Foreign postage y cents and
The charge for single copies is
forty cents. The advertising rates are Four Dollars for a page.
THE SCIENCE PRESS
NEW YORK: Sub-Station 84
Entered as second-class matter, April 2, 1908, at the Post Office at Lancaster, Pa., under the Aet of
Congress of March 3, 1879.
Lancaster, Pa.
Garrison, N. Y.
F ALE
ARCTIC, ICELAND and GREENLAND
BIRDS’ SKINS,
Well Prepared Low Prices
articulars of
DINESEN, Bird Collector
Husavik, North Iceland, Via Leidle, England
TO OOLOGISTS
and ENTOMOLOGISTS
W. F. H. ROSENBERG
Importer of Exotic Zoological Specimens
57, Haverstock Hill, London, N. W., Englaad
Begs to announce the publication of two new
Price Lists : No. 18, Exotic Lepidoptera (over 8000
species), No. 19, Birda’ Eggs (over 1100 species).
These will be mailed free on application, as well
as any of the following lists:
Birdskins (over 5000 species); Mammals (over
300 species) ; ; Reptiles, Batrachians and Fishes (over
400 species).
Largest stock in the world of specimens in all
branches of Zoology.
ALL MUSEUMS SHOULD
WRITE FOR THESE LISTS
All specimens sent on approval.
Please state which lists are required and give
name of this periodical.
TENTH EDITION.
THE MICROSCOPE,
an introduction to Microscopic Methods and to Histology,
= SIMON HENRY GAGE, of Cornell University. | Over
350 la ni
and
COMSTOCK PUBLISHING CO., Ithaca, N. Y.
ee a aau aaa
FINE LAND SHELLS
I have in stock and for sale nearly gsc hs usand —
of land shells, also a very g stock of m Alla zya
curately labeled. Iam prepared gs fe a An p collections an
lustrating every and from nearly s
cash. Corre spondence dan 9 with _— sens Fahd lorers
Only the finest materia died. © WEBB,
202 Wes tminister Road, m N.Y
Natural History
Preparations, Collections
and Models
of acknowledged first-rate style at very low
prices for Museums and Colleges
Outfit and Completion of Natural History
Cabinets. Own Preparation works
Catalogues free of charge
Dr. Schliter’s Natural Science
Establishment
G
Halle on S ERMANY
THE
AMERICAN NATURALIST
Vou. XLVII December, 1913 No. 564
THE FIXATION OF CHARACTER IN ORGANISMS!
DR. EDMUND W. SINNOTT
HARVARD UNIVERSITY
THE segregation of animals and plants into those
groups which we call species, genera and families and the
arrangement of such groups in a natural system of classi-
fication are made possible by the fact that during the evo-
lution of any group there are always characters which
have varied comparatively little and, from their constaney
throughout large numbers of otherwise different individ-
uals, are therefore of great value in determining rela-
tionships. Should all the characters of an individual be
equally subject to change in the passage from one genera-
tion to another such chaos would result that anything but
the most arbitrary classification would be quite impos-
sible. It is of great importance to the taxonomist, the
experimental morphologist and the student of evolution
in general to ascertain, if possible, what are the causes for
these differences in degree of variability and to attempt
a formulation of the laws under which they appear.
The first attempt at a scientific explanation of this
problem was put forward by the theory of Natural Selec-
tion. In its extreme form this theory assumes that all
conservative characters, known to be very ancient because
of their occurrence throughout large groups of organ-
isms, are characters of supreme importance in the
2 Graduate Bowdoin Prize Thesis in Biology, Harvard University, 1913.
706 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vow. XLVII
struggle for „existence, which have consequently been
firmly standařdized and kept rigidly true to type by the
action of natural selection in continually eliminating those
individuals which showed a tendency to depart from the
normal condition. The invariable presence of segments
in the Articulata, of trachex in insects, of the backbone
in vertebrates, of gills in fishes, of feathers in birds, of
roots in the vascular plants, of seeds in the spermato-
phytes and of vessels in the wood of the angiosperms, all
of which are characters of universal occurrence in the
groups which they distinguish, is explained as due to
their supreme importance for survival. The frequent
variability of rudimentary or obviously useless struc-
tures is laid to their unimportance in the struggle
for existence and their consequent removal from the
standardizing influence of natural selection. This belief
in the dependence of structural conservatism on func-
tional: utility is widely held to-day and has been stated
by Montgomery as follows: ‘‘A character which per-
sists through a very long racial period must do so by
virtue of being of particular value for the economy of the
organization or for the perpetuation of the race. Struc-
tures of less value are more readily modified, substituted
or even lost.’’?
A strict application of the selection hypothesis, how-
ever, evidently fails to explain many facts which a study
of phylogeny brings forward. Can we imagine, for ex-
ample, that either the number five, on which echinoderms
are built, or the number three, which is characteristic of all
hexapod insects, are or ever have been of critical value in
the struggle for existence? Is it logical to suppose that
the position of the protoxylem with reference to the later-
formed elements of the vascular axis, a position which is
extremely constant throughout the main groups of vas-
cular plants, has been definitely determined by natural
selection, or that the precise number of floral parts or the
2 Montgomery, T. H., ‘‘On Phylogenetic Classification,’’ Proc. Philadel-
phia Acad. Sci., Vol. 54, 1902, p. 214.
¥
No. 564] THE FIXATION OF CHARACTER 707
particular degree of coalescence or adnation exhibited
between them, is of great functional importance? Many
structures, insignificant and in all probability quite use-
less, are extremely constant throughout large groups of
animals and plants. Must we believe that all these con-
servative characters and structures are of immense
importance in the struggle for existence, but that such
features as size, shape, color and texture, which are com-
paratively inconstant, are of much less survival value?
It is true that certain discoveries of modern physiology
have lent some support to the oft-repeated defence of the
selection theory that structures of apparently little impor-
tance may be in reality of much significance to the organ-
ism. Our knowledge of vital processes is as yet so slight
that it is quite impossible to pronounce any particular
feature as certainly of great or of little value for survival,
but the mass of such information as we have acquired
from a study of anatomy, physiology and ecology points
decidedly to the conclusion that it is precisely those char-
acters of little importance to the organism which are
usually most conservative.
It is also very doubtful if the constancy of such appar-
ently more essential characters as the vertebral column of
vertebrates, the feathery covering of birds, or the floral
reproduction of seed plants is due to the supreme impor-
tance of these characters in the struggle for existence, as
the selection theory postulates; for it is evidently not the
mere presence of a backbone or of feathers or of flowers
per se which is of great significance to the individual, but
the presence of these structures in very specific size,
shape, texture, color and other respects. The vertebral
columns of a shark and of an elephant could not be ex-
changed without disaster, nor could the feathers of a
duck and an ostrich or the flowers of a pine and an orchid.
The ‘‘eonservative’’ character is useful only as it is asso-
ciated in each individual with many other ‘‘variable’’
ones. The most fundamental and unalterable distinction
between a fern and a flowering plant resides in their
708 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
respective methods of reproduction; but in a competition
between the two it is not primarily this difference which
decides the outcome. Differences in vegetative char-
acters, as well, and in the general vigor and adaptability
of the two plants determine which shall survive. One
of the most conservative and deeply-seated distinctions
between a mammal and a bird is the possession of hair
by one and of feathers by the other, but in the struggle
for existence between a bat and a night-hawk this differ-
ence is of very slight importance. The victor in such
competitions is that individual all of whose bodily parts
in their size, shape and general structure are so well
coordinated as to produce an organism with the greatest
degree of hardiness and adaptability.
The conservative characters in each family or larger
group—its most important distinguishing features—pro-
vide a general plan of structure, a theme, on which are
produced the modifications of genera and species. It is
these modifications, involving the plastic and least con-
servative characters, which are of most importance in
adaptation and therefore in survival. The general plan
is of comparatively little significance in a contest—about
as much as is the particular make of modern rifle used
by an army or the special type of construction of a racing
ear. A satisfactory interrelation and coordination of
parts is the important thing, and the degree of perfection
with which this is attained, on almost any plan, deter-
mines success or failure. It is true that after very long
periods of time in organic evolution slight differences
in value between two general plans of structure will some-
times make themselves felt and the best will finally be-
come dominant. Seed plants have little by little over-
come vascular eryptogams and mammals have superseded
reptiles. A highly adaptable organism, however, con-
structed on an ‘‘inferior’’ plan will often supplant one
which belongs to a generally superior type but is lacking
in versatility and vigor. The common bracken fern, for
example, a cryptogamous plant, is of almost universal
No. 564] THE FIXATION OF CHARACTER 709
distribution and is much more successful than most seed `
plants. The great majority of fundamental distinctions
and conservative characters seem to be of as little sur-
vival value as is pentamery to the echinoderms or the
presence or absence of stipules to any family of the
dicotyledons.
The theory of natural selection, at least in its extreme
form, can not therefore well be regarded as a satisfactory
explanation for structural conservatism. Darwin himself
frequently called attention to the faet that ‘‘the physio-
logical importance of an organ does not determine its
classificatory value’’? and cited many examples of organs
or characters obviously insignificant or useless which are
nevertheless very constant and of great value in deter-
mining relationships. Darwin voices the general defence
of selectionists on this point, however, when he states
that ‘‘the importance, for classification, of trifling char-
acters mainly depends on their being correlated with
other characters of more or less importance.’”
If the conservatism of a useless character depends on
its correlation with one of great functional value which is
continually preserved through the action of natural selec-
tion, it ought to be possible to discover this essential
character and to use it in classification. A search for
such universal and vitally important distinctions, how-
ever, is strangely fruitless, for in most families the only
characters which we can definitely point out as common
to all the individuals are precisely those which seem
utterly insignificant for survival. This fact becomes in-
creasingly obvious as we consider still broader groups
where the number of common characters becomes smaller
and smaller until there are but one or two features of
absolute diagnostic value. The two great divisions of the
amniotes, for example, the Sauropsida on the one hand
and the Mammalia on the other, can be rigidly distin-
guished from one another only by the presence, respect-
3 ‘í Origin of Species,’’ 6th ed., p. 431.
4 Loc. cit., p. 433.
710 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vouw. XLVII
ively, of one or of two occipital condyles or joints
between skull and backbone. The two largest families
of living conifers, the Abietinew and the Araucarinex,
are roughly separable on several characters, but the only
distinction to which no exception has been found is the
presence or absence of ‘‘bars of Sanio,’’ minute bands of
pectose on the walls of the wood elements. Similarly, the
monocotyledons and dicotyledons, the two great divisions
of the higher seed plants, are ultimately separable, as
their names imply,-by the number of the cotyledons in
the embryo. It can not well be claimed that any of
these characters or many others which are common to
wide -groups of animals and plants are in themselves
physiologically important but it is equally impossible to
distinguish others, of great value for survival, with which
these are correlated.
Darwin frequently calls attention to the fact, now so
generally admitted, that a classification based on one or
a few distinctions is of much less value than one which
takes into account a large number of correlated characters.
Such a group of characters, however, corresponds to what
we have mentioned as the general plan or type of struc-
ture and consists, at least in the broader groups of organ-
isms, of features which are mainly unimportant for
survival.
It is possible to maintain that the success or failure of
an organism depends more on some deeply seated prop-
erty of its protoplasmic make-up, such as its powers of
resistance or adaptability, than on any external and vis-
ible structures. But if there is a correlation of such
fundamental abilities with features of structure, is it not
more reasonable to suppose that it would occur with
characters of great functional importance rather than
with those which are of no physiological significance?
The fact that so often in the same family, all of whose
members possess the typical conservative features of the
group, there are some individuals which are dominant and
successful and others which are unsuccessful and are
No. 564] THE FIXATION OF CHARACTER 711
being exterminated seems to prove that there is no corre-
lation between the vigor and adaptability of the organism
and its conservative structural characters.
Darwin maintains that the constancy of useless fea-
tures ‘‘chiefly depends on any slight deviation not having
been preserved and accumulated by natural selection
which acts only on serviceable characters’’;> but if all the
characters and structures of any particular group were
originally variable in the same degree, a supposition which
the theory of natural selection is usually regarded as mak-
ing, it is surely impossible to suppose that variations will
not be most strikingly manifest in just those features
which are not subject to the eliminating action of natural
selection. ‘
Simple and plausible as the selection theory is, we must
admit that it offers by no means a complete solution of
the problem of fixity since, in general, the conservatism of
a structure or character seems to be inversely rather than
directly proportional to its survival value. To reach a
better understanding than such a theory gives as to why
variation does not occur with equal frequency and extent
throughout all parts of an organism, we must first of all
endeavor to formulate, from the great mass of facts at
hand, such general laws of variability and conservatism
as we may be able to discover empirically and must then
try to explain them as well as we may. A survey of the
fields of taxonomy and comparative anatomy shows the
possibility of discovering in the evolutionary develop-
ment of organisms the presence of numerous uniformities
and the operation of many general principles of phy-
logeny, some of which are of universal occurrence, or
nearly so; others valid throughout large groups of ani-
mals and plants, and still others applicable only to
particular orders or families. The formulation of such
principles and a thorough application of them is the great
task before the taxonomist and the phylogenist, if they
are to establish their sciences on a sound and rational
x
5 Loc. mt. p. 431
412 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
basis as something more than mere collections of facts.
The purpose of the present paper is to set forth a few of
the more important of these evolutionary principles, with
their significance in the general process of evolution, and
to suggest a possible explanation for the fixation of char-
acter which shall be more satisfactory than that proposed
by the selection theory.
In our search for such principles of conservatism, it is
primarily apparent that in the main those features which
are slow to change in one family are slow to change in
others also, and that consequently there are certain rather
definite categories of characters which throughout all
animals and plants show an inherent tendency to be con-
servative and slow to change, and others which are funda-
mentally plastic and variable. The conservative cate-
gories are, in general, those of number, relative position
and general plan, characters usually of little functional
significance; whereas the commonly variable features are
those of more importance for survival and include such
distinctions as size, shape, color and texture. The essen-
tial difference between these groups of categories is not
at all in their absolute degree of conservatism or plas-
ticity, but rather in their general tendency to become
fixed or to remain plastic. Number, position and plan
are not always constant, by any means, but they tend to
become so during the course of evolution, whereas size,
shape, color and other commonly variable characters are
almost always changeable and rarely become stereotyped.
The conservatism of number is everywhere apparent.
The two great groups of radially symmetrical animals,
the celenterates and the echinoderms, are constructed
(with a few exceptions) on the plans of six and of five,
respectively. Insects, on the other hand, display almost
invariably a scheme of three or its multiples in the number
of body regions, segments, appendages and many other
structures. Among fishes the number of gills, of visceral
arches, of fins and of fin rays varies little throughout
large families; and in the higher vertebrates, the number
No. 564] THE FIXATION OF CHARACTER 713
of teeth, of vertebre, of digits, of aortic arches, of brain
lobes, of cranial nerves and of countless other structures
is very conservative and is characteristic of large groups
of animals. In the plant kingdom the fixity of number
is even more noticeable. Throughout gymnospermous
plants the number of sporangia to a sporophyll, in both
the male and the female cones, varies but slightly. The
two great groups of angiosperms, the dicotyledons and the
monocotyledons, can be separated on but one constant
character, the number of cotyledons in the embryo. The
numerical plan of the flower in both series is also very
constant, being almost invariably four or five in the dicoty-
ledons and three in the monocotyledons. Most angiosperm
families, or genera, at least, have a characteristic number
of sepals, petals, stamens and carpels, which is of great
importance in classification. Similar instances could of
course be multiplied almost indefinitely.
Conditions of relative position and of insertion of parts
are also notably conservative and of value in determining
relationships. In the higher invertebrates, for example,
the nerve cord is always ventral to the digestive tube and
chief blood vessels, whereas in the vertebrates it is in-
variably dorsal. The mass of the liver may be disposed
almost anywhere, but its attachment is always on the ven-
tral side of the digestive tube. The source of the nerve
supply to many organs is exceedingly slow to change and
is of much importance in determining the primitive posi-
tion of structures which have been moved from their
original situation. Among plants, the relation of bud to
leaf is very constant, and the particular relative positions
of sporangium and sporophyll, of protoxylem and later-
formed wood elements, and of parenchyma cells and ves-
sels are very characteristic for each of the main groups
of vascular plants. The degree of coalescence between
the members of the same floral circle and the method of
insertion of each of the floral circles upon the axis or upon
one another are admitted to be of the greatest diagnostic
value.
714 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou XLVII
The character of general plan, or type, which really in-
cludes those of number and position, is of the utmost
importance for the discovery of relationships. In every
natural group of organisms, no matter how dissimilar its
members may appear, there is always a specific plan or
theme which is common to all and upon which the struc-
ture of each individual is built. The two-layered or three-
layered body plan, the presence or absence of segmenta-
tion, the definite type of arthropod or vertebrate append-
age which is so constant throughout its endless modifica-
tions, the plan of the central nervous system in the verte-
brates, and the precise and unvarying character of the
epidermal structures in the different classes of that
phylum, are a few of the innumerable examples of the con-
servatism of type in the animal kingdom. In the case of
plants the same fact is no less evident. The general topog-
raphy of the vascular system, the presence or absence of
_ leaf-gaps, the degree of differentiation in the structure of
the wood and the open or closed character of the leaf vena-
tion are all extremely constant. The notable conservatism
of type in the reproductive organs of all plants is well
known and is universally used in classification. The
almost complete uniformity throughout animals and plants
of many cytological characters, such as those concerned
with mitosis, might also be cited as striking examples of
the conservatism of plan or type.
Plastic and variable characters, no less than conserva-
tive ones, are separable into categories, the most im-
portant of which are size, shape, color and texture, of
which the inconstaney is so notorious that any broad
classification based upon them is very rarely a natural one.
But even if we admit that certain characters are essen-
tially more slow to change than others, it is very evident
that this difference is not an absolute one, but that ‘*con-
servative’’ features may display a greater or a less de-
gree of constancy in certain parts of the organism than
in others. These differences in local variability, however.
like those between general categories of characters, are
No. 564] THE FIXATION OF CHARACTER 715
not random and entirely unpredictable ones, for we are
able to distinguish certain definite parts of the plant and
animal body which throughout larger or smaller groups
of organisms are characteristic seats of conservatism,
and others which are everywhere subject to continual
change. The urinogenital, nervous and skeletal systems
of vertebrates, and to a certain extent of invertebrates
as well, are typically conservative and subject to com-
paratively slight alteration during evolutionary develop-
ment. Certain definite regions of the body, such as the
skeleton of the mammalian neck, are more definitely
stereotyped than others as to the number and arrange-
ment of parts. The extreme conservatism of the repro-
ductive organs of all plants has of course long been recog-
nized and has been proven by a study of internal as well
as of external structure. More recently it has been demon-
strated, that the woody axis, as well, is the seat of firmly
fixed and therefore ancient characters. Each main divi-
sion of the vascular plants has a fundamental stelar plan,
and every subordinate group has its peculiar and specific
type of wood structure which is exceedingly constant in
individuals otherwise very different and, as a diagnostic
character for families and sometimes smaller groups, is
therefore of much value. The axis of the root is especially
conservative and has remained practically unchanged in
its general plan throughout the entire evolution of woody
plants. The vascular system of the leaf, especially at.
the node where the leaf and stem unite, has many times
been found to display primitive features wholly lost
elsewhere. In such conservative systems and regions it
is not all the characters which have become constant, but
only those which we have called typically conservative,
such as number, position and plan. Variable characters
are variable anywhere.
Not only are certain regions of the body characteristic-
ally more conservative than others, but it is also true that
particular stages, notably the earlier ones, in the life
history of the individual are much less subject than the
716 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
rest to variation and change. The law of recapitulation,
which declares that ontogeny repeats phylogeny, is now
accepted in a more or less modified form by almost all
zoologists, and despite differences in the interpretation
of embryology as a guide to a knowledge of ancient ani-
mals, it is generally agreed that early developmental
stages are much more conservative than are later ones.
Not as many striking examples of recapitulation are
known among plants as among animals, but Darwin long
ago noticed resemblances between the leaves of certain
seedlings and of their supposed ancestors, and others have
cited many similar instances. Attention has more recently
been called, particularly by Jeffrey, to the fact that the
internal structure of the young plant or of a first annual
ring of the mature plant, even more clearly than their
external form, is slow to change and therefore frequently
displays primitive characters. The woody axis of one
of the higher ferns begins in the sporeling as a solid rod,
which, after forming a medullated cylinder, gives rise to
the complicated vascular system of the adult, the various
steps of its development representing stages through
which its ancestors doubtless passed and which now char-
acterize the more primitive living families of ferns. In
the first annual ring of certain conifers occur resin canals,
“bars of Sanio,’’ parenchyma cells and other structures
present throughout the wood of more primitive and pre-
sumably ancestral types. The first few annual rings
of many angiosperms, as well, show in the structure of
their rays and vessels characters which are undoubtedly
ancient. On an abundance of such evidence as this it
must be admitted that the validity of the law of recapitu-
lation has been demonstrated for plants almost as thor-
oughly as for animals.
We have seen that conservative cl ters vary consider-
ably in their constancy according to the part of the body
or the stage of development with which they are associ-
ated. Still more notable cases of differences in fixity are
evident in similar characters occurring in different fami-
No. 564] THE FIXATION OF CHARACTER Vit
lies. A feature which is conservative and of diagnostic
value in one group may be variable and worthless in an-
other. The number of teeth and vertebre, for example,
is much less constant among fishes than among mammals.
The general floral plan is far from uniform throughout
the Rosacex, but in such families as the Crucifere it is
exceedingly constant. This introduces still another prin-
ciple of conservatism which is really the crux of the whole
problem of fixation of character and seems to be a funda-
mental law of evolution—the principle that the progress-
ive evolution of any character or structure, whether in-
volving reduction or increased complexity, is attended by
a continual decrease in its tendency to change. Differenti-
ation and specialization are followed by increasing fixity.
It is a well-known biological fact that the more primitive
families of animals and plants, those which still maintain
an ancient type of organization, are much more variable
in their characters than are those which have progressed
far from such a primitive condition. The lower Arthro-
poda, for example, display great variety in the number of
body segments and appendages and in many anatomical
features, but the highly specialized hexapod insects, de-
spite their enormous numbers, wide distribution and
extreme variation in size, shape and color, have become
rigidly stereotyped with regard to almost all characters of
number and general plan. In the ascending vertebrate
series from cyclostomes to mammals there are also many
instances of the increasing fixation of what we have called
conservative features, for it is well known that the char-
acters which make up the mammalian type are much more
definite and sharply circumscribed than those pertaining
to the lower groups of vertebrates where there is much
latitude in the distinguishing features. Likewise, the most
advanced and highly specialized families of plants, such
as the Composite and the Orchidacex, are characterized
by a stereotyped floral plan which is invariable throughout
all the members of these dominant groups, whereas in
plant orders admittedly lower in the scale, such as the
718 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST — [Vou XLVII
Rosaceæ, Caryophyllacee, Cyperacee and Graminee, the
floral type is very much more various both in number and
in relative position of parts. The evolution of the game-
tophyte from its gymnospermous to its angiospermous
condition is a continual progress from simple and vari-
able structures to those which are fixed and highly special-
ized. The same principle is evident as well among vege-
tative structures, for the lower and more ‘‘generalized”’
families, both among conifers and dicotyledons, show a
greater diversity in their wood structure than do the
higher groups.
This progressive evolution from a primitive variable
condition to one which is fixed and specialized is always
attended by a reduction in the number of similar parts.
Multiple structures are characteristic only of the lower
types of organization. Other characters tend to show a
similar phylogenetic change from the complex to the more
simple, with the result that a structure in its highly de-
veloped state is very often less complex than is its more
primitive homologue. Evolution more often involves
reduction than amplification.
These four general principles of conservatism—that
there are definite categories of fundamentally conserva-
tive and fundamentally variable characters; that certain
organs or regions of the body are more conservative than
others; that early stages in ontogeny are more constant
than later ones, and that advance in evolutionary de-
velopment involves an increase in fixity, are established-
on a large and continually increasing mass of observed
facts and may well demand recognition from all biologists.
Many other principles, such as those concerned with re-
version and orthogenesis, are gradually being formulated
and it is only a matter of time and more extended observa-
tion before the science of phylogeny will be placed on a
much more uniform and exact footing.
To establish these laws on a sound basis of observed
facts is a matter of some labor, but it is a much less diffi-
eult undertaking than to provide a reasonably complete
No. 564] THE FIXATION OF CHARACTER 719
explanation for their existence. This task must ultimately
be left to the sciences of physiology and genetics, and in
the meantime it is possible only to make suggestions and
conjectures as to what are the causes which underlie the
facts of conservatism.
The very difficulties in the way of the explanation of
fixity proposed by the theory of natural selection suggest
a possible solution of one of the most conspicuous prob-
lems—why it is that just those characters of least physio-
logical importance and survival value are most con-
servative. May it not be true that the tendency toward
progressively increasing fixity, which seems to be almost
universal in organic evolution, has succeeded in render-
ing comparatively invariable those features which are of
little significance for survival, but that in the case of
vitally important characters this tendency has been over-
come by the opposing action of natural selection in elimi-
nating individuals which are not sufficiently plastic and
adaptable, and in thus maintaining or increasing the
variability of all characters important in the struggle for
existence?
If this conception of the matter is a true one, the func-
tion of natural selection is almost precisely the reverse of
what it is ordinarily supposed to be, for instead of operat-
ing to fix characters and preserve types intact its action
results in their elimination, in so far as they interfere
with success, and in the placing of a premium on versa-
tility. Selection, in other words, is made for general
adaptability under varying conditions rather than for the
possession of any particular characters or structures.
The great variability of dominant organisms, long ago.
noticed by Darwin, should be regarded on such a hy-
pothesis as a cause rather than a result of their domi-
nance. Fixity is tolerated by natural selection only so
long as it affects characters of little or of no functional
importance. Such characters thus become very conserva-
tive and furnish the taxonomic ‘‘type.’’ This conception
of organic evolution as the result of the continual inter-
720 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST (Vou. XLVII
action of these two great factors—progressive fixation,
which is ever tending to make characters constant and
to decrease variability; and natural selection, which
operates in eliminating individuals which have become
too rigid in their vitally essential features, and thus in
encouraging those which display superior adaptability—
is at least helpful in presenting a clear picture of the
process of evolution.
The marked conservatism which we have noticed in
particular structures or organs may perhaps be explained
in a similar way as due to their comparative unimportance
in the economy of the individual. The fact that the repro-
ductive organs in all plants and in many animals are
especially conservative may possibly be taken to indicate
that the particular method of reproduction is of less vital
concern to the race than are its other activities. The
conservatism of other structures, such as the root, is evi-
dently due to the comparative constancy of their sur-
roundings. Internal structures in general are apt to be
more conservative than external ones because of their
exposure to a less varied environment.
Various attempts have been made to explain those phe-
nomena of conservatism which have been grouped under
the head of recapitulation. De Vries has maintained that
the seedling characters of plants are just as dependent on
the action of natural selection as are those of the adult
and that ancient features persist in youth only when they
happen to be of survival value for the early stages of the
plant. The same position has sometimes been maintained
on the zoological side. To attribute functional importance
‘to all embryological characters, however, and to explain
the numberless cases where there is close correspondence
between ontogeny and ancestry as due simply to the opera-
tion of natural selection, is to burden that hypothesis
beyond all necessity.
The theory of formative stimuli, which explains the
persistence of structures in the embryo of animals on the
assumption that their presence is absolutely necessary as
No. 564] THE FIXATION OF CHARACTER 721
a ‘‘stimulus’’ for later development, meets with difficulties
in the case of plants. Here development is not due to
interstitial growth, as in animals, and does not involve
progressive differentiation of almost all the cells of the
body, but is brought about by the activity, at a growing
point, of a small group of undifferentiated, continually
dividing cells, from the innermost of which are laid down
tissues which almost immediately become fixed and un-
alterable in size and shape. The influence, upon such a
distant growing point, of structures previously laid down
must be slight as compared with the effect of already
formed structures, in animals, upon growth in which they
themselves are taking an active part.
The facts of recapitulation can perhaps be understood
better on the principle, which we have already discussed,
that certain categories of characters are inherently more
conservative than others. It may be said that, theoret-
ically, every individual tends to inherit all the peculiari-
ties of its ancestors; but since life is short and history is
long, most of the chapters have to be omitted. It is only
reasonable to suppose that those features will disappear
first during evolutionary advance which are least con-
servative and least firmly fixed in the constitution of the
race; and such we find to be the fact, for it is not char-
acters of size, shape, color and texture which are usually
preserved in ontogeny, but the less plastic ones of number
and plan. The presence of gills and their associated
skeletal and circulatory structures became rigidly im-
planted in the primitive vertebrate stock and the general
outline of these structures still persists in the embryos of
modern terrestrial forms. It is not a functional gill which
is repeated, however, nor one of definite shape or special
construction, but simply a gill cleft, with the vestiges of
its ancient skeleton and vascular supply. It is as though
what the geneticist would call the factor for the gill open-
ings had persisted unchanged, but that the factors for the
shape, size and structure of the gills had been widely
altered or disappeared altogether. The developing axis
722 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
of a woody plant repeats little of the histological features
of its predecessors, but it does recapitulate the general
vascular topography of successive ancestral forms. The
developing organism has concentrated within it an essence,
so to speak, of the most conservative and therefore the
most salient characters which distinguished the ancient
members of its line. The fact that all plastic and highly
variable features have been swept away enables these his-
torical landmarks to stand out distinctly, and gives to the
structure of the animal embryo and of the young plant
a very important significance in the science of phylogeny.
The principle that fixity of character increases with
differentiation, which we have regarded as of so much im-
portance in evolution, is easier to establish than to explain.
It is possible to regard the matter from the viewpoint of
genetics and to imagine that a ‘‘variable’’ species is a
‘‘mixed population,’’ the members of which are continu-
ally intererossing, and that the appearance, in certain indi-
viduals, of definite discontinuous variations isolates such
individuals from the rest of the species and causes the
partial or complete establishment of each as a distinct
‘‘pure line” with more closely defined characters. The
more numerous such discontinuous variations were, the
more complete the isolation of a given line would become
and the more purely, therefore, would it reproduce itself
until finally its characters became very sharply fixed. In
other words, fixity may be due to germinal segregation
and may depend directly on the proportion of factors
which are in a homozygous condition in the germ plasm of
the two parents. Complete homozygosity in both would
ensure complete fixity of parental characters in the
offspring.
A comparison also suggests itself between the effects
of differentiation in ontogeny and in phylogeny. Experi-
mental work has shown that in the more primitive ani-
mals, where the power of regulation is best developed, any
part of a tissue or elementary organ, so long as it remains
No. 564] THE FIXATION OF CHARACTER 723
undifferentiated, is able, upon necessity, to give rise to all
structures that the whole tissue would normally have
produced. A sufficiently large group of cells from any
portion of the blastula of an echinoderm, for example, will
produce a normal larva; but the moment the process of
gastrulation begins, this power of producing the whole
animal is definitely lost by those very: cells which pos-
sessed it but a few hours previously; for, now that differ-
entiation has begun to take place, a piece which shall give
rise to a normal larva must include a little of both the
primitive ectoderm and entoderm and ean not be taken at
random from anywhere in the embryo. Any portion of
the primitive gut, which later develops, is able to produce
the cælomic pouch, should the normal region of origin of
that structure be removed, but this ‘‘equipotency’’ lasts
only so long as there is no differentiation, for if the pouch
once begins to develop and then is removed it can never
be produced again even by the cells which a short time
previously had the power to form it. This process of
ontogenetic segregation results in the continual loss of
potentialities, in the progressive narrowing down of
the possibilities at the command of every living cell.
The situation in phylogeny is very similar, for the possi-
bilities before a simple, plastic and comparatively undif-
ferentiated organism—the lines of evolution along which
its descendants may go—are much greater than those
before one which is highly developed and sharply special-
ized. Increased differentiation is followed so regularly
by decreased plasticity, both in phylogeny and ontogeny,
as to suggest the possibility of a common cause.
There is also a similarity between structural fixation
and certain psychological phenomena. The performance
of an action is always uncertain and variable at first, but
constantly tends to become stereotyped and habitual. The
simpler types of animal activity are directed by instincts
which are comparatively changeable and plastic, but where
behavior has become highly specialized and complex, in-
724 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
stinct has attained a high degree of precision and invari-
ability. In the same way, a person whose activities are of
wide range and comparative simplicity is much more
adaptable than one who has become habit-bound through
a life of intense specialization. As an organism’s ‘‘ex-
perience mass’’ becomes continually greater and more com-
plex the formation occurs of that system of habits which
in man we call a mental character, and this process, like
that of ontogenetic and phylogenetic development, in-
volves the continual elimination of potentialities and con-
sists in the progressive fixation, with advancing age, of
characters which during youth were variable and incon-
stant. It so much resembles the establishment of an
organic structural type by the elimination of variability
through advance in specialization as to suggest that per-
haps both phenomena are manifestations of the same
cause.
Such attempted explanations of the differences in fixity
which occur between organic characters are of course in-
complete and highly unsatisfactory. The very fact, how-
ever, that it is possible at all to formulate principles of
conservatism and variability, unexplained though they
may be, which shall be of application throughout the
animal and plant kingdoms or which shall at least be
operative in certain definite groups of organisms, is of
great significance and value to the biologist, for it enables
him to place all branches of his science on a somewhat
more exact and uniform basis. It must of course be borne
in mind that such principles as these are not invariably
operative, for exceptions to all-of them are frequently
found. Biological laws undoubtedly exist, but they seem
to belong to quite a different category from the invariable
ones of the physical sciences.
The science of taxonomy will perhaps receive the great-
est benefit from a general recognition of the fact that
there are such things as laws of phylogeny, for a united
effort by all biologists to define these laws more clearly
and to apply them more widely will result, through the
No. 564] THE FIXATION OF CHARACTER 725
establishment of much more precise taxonomic criteria, in
a clearing up of many difficulties and disputes as to rela-
tionships and in the construction of a truly natural classi-
fication on a more logical and consistent basis.
A knowledge of phylogenetic principles is also of value
to the general student of evolution, for through it a better
conception of the development of organic structures may
be obtained than is set forth by the selection theory. A
recognition of the facts that fixity increases with differ-
entiation and that there are inherent differences in vari-
ability between functionally important characters and
those which are useless for survival makes possible a
much clearer understanding of the evolutionary history
of any particular group.
The evolution of the hexapod insects is a case in point.
The primitive insects seem to have been air-breathing
arthropods with an indeterminate number of body seg-
ments and appendages, The ancestors of our modern
hexapods achieved their first success through some ad-
vance in specialization over this more primitive type,
but the improvements which gave them ascendancy and
which enabled them to found a distinct and dominant
group were certain unknown changes, doubtless in plastic
and functionally important characters which were of great
value for survival at the time, but which, having isolated
the family and put it on its feet, so to speak, continued
to change and may be possessed by few or no living de-
scendants. The progressive increase in specialization,
however, which caused the success of the primitive hexa-
pods resulted in the gradual fixation of certain function-
less characters, such as the number of segments and ap-
pendages, which finally became rigidly stereotyped as we
see them to-day, so that they now distinguish all hexapods,
whether successful and dominant species or those which
are being beaten and exterminated. The conservative
features have progressed steadily but slowly to their
present condition, but the plastic characters, during the
same time, have doubtless passed through wide and unre-
726 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
corded ranges of variation and in so doing they have, as it
were, caught and fixed into the advancing and increas-
ingly specialized hexapod type the particular conservative
and functionless characters which happened to distinguish
those fortunate individuals which founded the present
family. As a result our modern hexapods, as a whole,
like all other natural orders, have as constant characters
certain peculiarities of number and plan, whereas the sub-
ordinate groups of the order are still distinguished, in
many cases, by the functionally important features to
which they owe their successful establishment, but. which
in future evolution are doubtless destined to vary much.
Similarly, in that ascending group of animals which
were to give rise to the higher vertebrates, the primitive
archipterygium became stereotyped into the pentadactyl
appendage, with its definite skeletal plan; but the par-
ticular improvements which caused the primitive penta-
dactylous stock to succeed at the start and to become
segregated as a new and distinct order were doubtless
concerned with such plastic but functionally important
characters as size and shape and with the general vitality
and adaptability of the race, and had little or nothing to
do with the particular number of digits or arrangement
of bones in the appendages. These characters, originally
variable, simply happened to belong to a successful and
progressive group of organisms and became fixed and
stereotyped as specialization took place.
The ancestors of the grasses doubtless varied much as
to nodal structure, but the particular group which through
its success became the dominant and distinct modern
family happened to be characterized by the possession of
leaves whose bases formed an open sheath around the
stem and were provided with a small membranous struc-
ture, the ligule. These characters, which are doubtless not
the ones to which the family owes its success, since they
are present alike in dominant and in unsuccessful species,
became so firmly fixed during the progressive evolution
of the Graminex that at now distinguish all members
of the ser
No. 564] THE FIXATION OF CHARACTER 127
All conservative and stable characters which are com-
mon to large groups of organisms have thus reached their
present condition through slow but steady progress dur-
ing the same time that plastic and functionally important
features were changing and moulding themselves in adap-
tation to every new demand of the environment.
Organic evolution in general, including that of human
civilization, seems to have resulted from the opposing
actions of the two great factors which we have so often
mentioned: on the one hand, the tendency toward fixation,
which results in the stereotyping of structures and of
habits and social customs, and which gives rise to mental
as well as physical conservatism; and, on the other, the
action of natural selection in weeding out such physical
characters as tend to make the organism unadaptable and
such customs, institutions and even societies as have
become too firmly stereotyped through habit and prece-
dent or too bound by tradition to maintain themselves in
the advance of civilization. Natural selection does not
interfere with useless or harmless characters which there-
fore become firmly fixed and are of great value in deter-
mining relationships between organisms and between civi-
lizations and in deciphering the path of evolutionary
advance.
This biological principle that trivial but conservative
characters which happen to distinguish the beginnings of
a suecessful evolutionary line become closely associated
with all its subsequent development has therefore many
suggestive parallels in human history. Any great move-
ment is always colored by the circumstances surrounding
its inception. The fact that our first popular translation
of the Bible happened to be written in the seventeenth-
century English does not account for the enormous sub-
sequent spread of the Scriptures, but nevertheless the
now archaic phraseology of the King James Version, a
‘‘eonservative character’’ like all religious phraseology,
and ‘‘unimportant for survival,’’ has persisted almost un-
altered throughout the history of the Protestant churches,
728 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST (Vou. XLVII
and, surviving numberless changes of ritual, creed and
theology, has stamped itself indelibly upon cheatin ex-
pression everywhere.
The whole subject of organic conservatism is so vast
and so little understood as to be far beyond satisfac-
tory treatment within the limits of such a paper as the
present one. An extensive correlation of the mass of
facts already in our possession and the discovery of a
multitude of new ones will be necessary in order to for-
mulate laws of phylogeny with any degree of accuracy.
The essential point in the whole matter is the indica-
tion that evolution of animals and plants is not a ran-
dom and fortuitous process, dependent on the caprice of
external, inorganic nature, but that it is subject every-
where to certain definite and discoverable laws. Such a
point of view, of course, is essentially an orthogenetic one
and emphasizes the importance of the evolving organism
rather than the creative power of the environment. By
establishing the essential uniformity of vital processes
everywhere it also tends to elevate biology from a mere
subsidiary of the physical sciences to an independent
position of its own.
SuMMARY
1. The construction of a natural classification of organ-
isms is made possible only by the fact that certain char-
acters of every individual are more conservative and less
subject to variation than others during evolutionary
development.
2. The explanation of conservatism propounded by the
theory of natural selection is unsatisfactory since, so far
as we are able to determine, characters which are most
firmly fixed are in general those of least importance for
survival.
3. From a study of phylogeny it is possible to formu-
late certain general principles of conservatism which
are valid throughout more or less extensive groups of
organisms.
No. 564] THE FIXATION OF CHARACTER 729
4. The principal categories of conservative characters
are those of number, position and plan.
5. Particular organs or regions of the body, throughout
large groups of animals and plants, are less subject to
change than others and hence are seats of primitive
characters.
6. The early ontogenetic stages of animals and plants
repeat those characters which were most conservative and
firmly fixed in their ancestry.
7. Evolutionary advance and increase in differentia-
tion tend to result in the decrease of variability. This
is analogous to the loss of potentialities during ontogeny
and is also comparable to the formation of habit.
8. Organic evolution is dependent on the action of two
opposing factors: that of progressive fixation. which tends
universally toward greater rigidity and conservatism in
all characters during evolutionary advance; and that of
natural selection, which tends to maintain or increase the
variability of those characters important for survival by
eliminating individuals where such characters have be-
come so fixed that the organism fails to possess a neces-
sary degree of adaptability. Natural selection is not con-
cerned with harmless and trivial characters which conse-
quently tend to become very conservative and are of much
value in classification.
9. Such general principles of phylogeny as these, if
thoroughly established and defined, will make possible
the construction of a truly natural classification of organ-
isms on a logical and uniform basis. They also present
a clearer conception of the general method of evolution
than is set forth by the theory of natural selection alone.
The writer is much indebted to Professor Herbert W.
Rand, of Harvard University, for suggestions and infor-
mation. :
INHERITANCE OF LEFT-HANDEDNESS'!
PROFESSOR FRANCIS RAMALEY
UNIVERSITY OF COLORADO
Introduction.—The fact that left-handedness ‘‘runs in
families” has probably attracted the attention of many
observers, yet the method of inheritance has not been
fully studied. Many people imagine the condition to
depend entirely upon training or imitation. There is
thus much of guesswork concerning the true nature of
the condition.
Literature-——A considerable bibliography of left-
handedness has recently been cited by Professor H. E.
Jordan.2 Most of his references are, however, to articles
of little value, especially since nearly all of them were
written previous to the modern period of genetic study.
Professor Jordan puts forth the tentative opinion that
left-handedness is a recessive character. Unfortu-
nately the data which he presents consist chiefly of a few
selected pedigrees from which the reader can obtain very
little information. He suggests more than once that some
of his cases are examples of the spontaneous appearance
of left-handedness in a family. If such spontaneous
development were so frequent the whole population
would, in a few generations, be left-handed. The appear-
ance of a left-handed child in a family without left-
handed ancestors for three or four generations is not to
be considered remarkable, for this is the way in which
recessive characters frequently behave.
Method of Obtaining Data—At the beginning of a
course of lectures on heredity in the University of Col-
orado in 1911 I distributed papers calling for informa-
1 An earlier paper, entitled ‘‘Mendelian Proportions and the Increase of
Recessives,’’ which grew out of my studies on inheritance of left-handedness
was published in the AMERICAN NATURALIST, Vol. XLVI, pp. 344-351, June,
1912.
2 Breeders’ Magazine, Vol. II, pp. 19-29 and 113-124, 1911.
730...
No.564] INHERITANCE OF LEFT-HANDEDNESS 731
tion from the students in regard to right- and left-
handedness in their own families or in other families
with which they might be quite familiar. Each student
noted down the parents and every child in the family.
Since the students who reported are from nineteen to
twenty-five years of age, the probability is that their
families are now complete as to the number of children.
Similar data were collected from another set of students
in 1912. In addition to these collections of statisties, I
have also studied the affection in a family of four genera-
tions, including about thirty people. Since this material
offers nothing especially different from that gathered
from the students, I have not included it in the present
study.
à TABLE I
STATISTICS OF PARENTS AND CHILDREN
|
CER
Per Cent. |
| TE Observed | see baton rr onset,
LOAL DATON 50... Pe |
Right handed parents. . 561 | 91.94 89.99 | 84.00
Left-handed — a] 49 | 8.06? 11.11 | 16.00
Total children......... 1380. | |
Right-han ory children . 953 84.34 | 9.99 | 84.00
Left-handed children. . 177 | 1860 unun | 3 1600
Value of Different Data.—Since the young people from
whom the information was obtained would be much more
likely to know of .left-handedness among their brothers
and sisters than in their parents, the reports for children
are probably more accurate than those for parents. It is
easy to see how a child would report a parent as right-
handed unless the person were very definitely left-handed.
A child would not know about the early history of his
father or mother. On comparison of the number of left-
handed individuals among parents and children left-
handedness seems to be about twice as common among the
children. This is, of course, a manifest absurdity and is
3 Since the proportion of left-handed children is nearly twice that of the
left-handed parents it is evident that left-handedness among the parents is
greatly under-reported.
732 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST (Vor. XLVII
TABLE II
STATISTICS OF FAMILIES
Number | per Cent a er oent Expected
H r
Observe 4ARR:ARr: ap
Total famia oi cea eh es oe 305
Hoes a both parents reported as
Pint HANG iki ys i ae 258 84.59 79.014 70.568
Families reported as having one parent
right-handed, ae other left-handed 45 14.75 19.744 26.885
Families reported as having both
parents left-handed... 25n 2 0.66 1.244 2.565
Families reported as having all children
TICHU-HAMOOG. saci R A 174 57.05 69.134 59.045
Families with some or all children left-
MANGO. cee Ga al ee 131 42.95 30.875 40.967
E EA of children per family
the opulatio on (families 305,
child feo else eda EP S ra 3.7
— number of children among
amilies showing left-handed
erred i a 131, children 548) 4.1
4 The expected number of matings of any SPRS sort, or the woiu
resulting in particular types of offspring, in a population ‘of 4RR :4Rr :rr
may be calculated from the following table:
1. 4RR X 4RR =16
2. 4RR X 4Rr = 16
3. 4EB X tr == 4
4. 4Rr X 4ER = 16
5. 4REr X 4Rr = 16
G 4hr X 7 = 4
ti OF OG SEES 4
8; or: Man ae 4
9 oar X or esi
81
Matings 1, 2, 4 and 5 have both parents right-handed; adding 16 + 16 +
16 + 16 = 64 + Pa 79.01 per cent. Matings 3, 6, 7 and 8 are each of a
right-handed and a left-handed parent. Mating 9 is of two left-handed
parents; this type may be expected once in 81 times, or 1 + 81 = 1.24 per
eent. Only right-handed children will appear in matings 1, 2, 3, 4 and 7;
left-handed children are to be expected in 5, 6, 8 and 9, These last make
16 + 4 + 4 + 1 = 25 + 81 = 30.87 per cent.
5 The expected number of matings of a particular sort, or the matings
resulting in particular types of offspring, in a population of 9RR : 12Rr : 4&rr
may be calculated as suggested in the previous footnote. Here it is neces-
sary to use the following table:
1. ORE X 9RR = 81
2. ORE X 12Rkr = 108
3. ORR X 4rr = 36
4. 128r X 9RR 108
No. 564] INHERITANCE OF LEFT-HANDEDNESS 733
to be accounted for as just stated. Probably the most
valuable parts of the statistics are the figures showing
families with left-handed children and also the total
number of left-handed children in the population.
Natural and Acquired Left-handedness—Most right-
handed people can be taught to use the left hand for many
purposes, and conversely left-handed people may learn
to write and perform various acts of skill with the right
hand. But aside from these rather unusual cases there
are many individuals who are naturally right-handed and
do most of their work with the right hand. Others are
left-handed by nature. Left-handedness seems to be con-
nected with a more highly developed condition of the
right cerebral hemisphere. Evidence in support of this
view is found in a number of cases of aphasia connected
with left hemiplegia. The left motor area of the cortex,
as is well known, is associated with speech in most indi-
viduals. Hence a lesion of this area results in aphasia
and paralysis of the right side of the body. When similar
5. 12Rr X 12Rr = 144
6. 12Rr X 4rr = 48
7. 4rr X 9RR= 36
8. 4rr X12Rr = 48
9. 4rr X 4rr = 16
625
6 Only in the following matings could left-handed children appear:
4R 4Rr = 12 right-handed, 4 left-handed
4Rr X rr = 2 right-handed, 2 left-handed
rr X 4Rr = 2 right-handed, 2 left-handed
rr X rr = 0 right-handed, 1 left-handed
16 9
16
The children in these families would then be expected in the ratios of
16:9, or 64 per cent. right-handed, 36 per cent. left-handed.
7 Only in the following matings could left-handed children appear:
2Rr X 12Rr—108 right-handed, 36 left-handed
12Rr X 4rr = 24 right-handed, 24 left-handed
4rr X 12Rr = 24 right-handed, 24 left-handed
4rr X 4rr = 0 right-handed, 16 left-handed
156 100
The children in these families would then be expected in the proportion of
156 right-handed to 100 left-handed, or 61 per cent. right-handed and 39
per cent. left-handed.
734 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
TABLE III
STATISTICS OF FAMILIES REPORTED AS HAviNnG BotH PARENTS RIGHT- "HANDED
te TE Per C Cent. Ene er TE
| Per Cent. | eee. | Expected 8
| Number | Ghaneraa pee oad 9RR :12Rr
247
Total families in the group.......... 258 | |
Families within this group having all | |
children right-handed............. 165 | 63.959 | 75.00!° | 67.35"
Families within this group having some | |
children left-handed.............. 93 | 36.059 | 25.0010 32.6411
otal children in the group.......... | 953 |
Right-handed children opor i in the |
Fala OSI T a Py ge a 837 | 86.74 93.752 91.8413
Left. sacle children reported in the |
POU eS Se en Sea eri oi eae A | 116 13.26 6.258 | 8.1613
Children in those families in which all
children are right-handed.......... | 655 58.249 75.0019 67.35
— in those eios in |
children are reported as hr |
ha vet Pepe Maks A ewe ee: |- 398 41.769 25.0010 32.651
Right-handed children in those families |
in which part of the children are left- |
handed.: sorka ce 282 70.859 75.00 75.00
Tr children in those families
which part of the children are |
afc hands ee H6 L 29.15" | 2600 | 25,00 __
8 See footnotes 4 and 5 to Table IL
® The figures show that some of the alleged right-handed parents are
really left-handed.
10 The population considered in this table is made up of matings 1, 2, 4
and 5 given in footnote 4 to Table IT, thus:
1. 4RR X 4RR=—16
2. 4R 6
4. 4Rr X 4RR=—16
5. 4Rr X 4Rr = 16
64
Obviously, only mating 5 will show a handed children. This constitutes
16 = 64 = 25 per cent. of the familie
11 The entire population E in ae table is made up of matings 1,
2, 4 and 5 in footnote 5 to Table II, thus:
2
4. 12Rr X 9RR=108
5. 12Rr X 12Rr = 144
441
The families showing left-handed children would be only those in mating
This constitutes 144 = 441 = 32.65 p t.
12 The only left-handed children will be in mating 5, viz.: 4Rr X 4Er.
They will constitute one fourth of ~ children in this mating, or one s1x-
teenth of all the children = 6.25 per cent.
13 The only left-handed children will be in mating 5, viz.: 12Rr X 12Rr.
They will constitute one fourth of the children in = mating. Hence:
ł X 144 + 441 = 8,16 per cent.
No.564] INHERITANCE OF LEFT-HANDEDNESS 735
lesions of the right cerebral cortex result in paralysis of
the left side and also in aphasia, it is sometimes found
that the persons thus affected were naturally left-handed.
I am informed by my colleague, Dr. O. M. Gilbert of the
department of medicine of this university, that this con-
nection of left-handedness with a speech center on the
right side of the cortex is well attested.
A certain number of persons consider themselves to be
‘‘ambidextrous’’ and claim that they are not naturally
either right-handed or left-handed. It is, however, diffi-
cult for one to know his own original condition with
regard to the use of the hands, since in most homes the
child is taught early the use of the right hand in taking
up a spoon or cup. I suspect that the ‘‘ambidextrous”’
persons are really left-handed by nature.
Mendelian Explanation of Heredity of Left-handed-
ness.—A study of the accompanying tables will suggest
that left-handedness is a Mendelian recessive. It belongs
to that group of characters which may show themselves
in families where neither parent is affected, and some-
times in families with no affected ancestors for a number
of generations. In the 305 families there are only two
reported as having both parents left-handed. If the con-
dition is a Mendelian recessive the children in these
families should all be left-handed. According to the
report, however, one child is right-handed. Of course it
is possible that one of the parents was by nature right-
handed. Possibly some heterozygous (simplex) persons
may easily learn to use the left hand.
Presentation of Material—The material collected has
been classified in such manner that it can be made use of
by others who may be studying the subject. In some of
the tables I have indicated the expected percentages if
the population were to consist of the three Mendelian
types of individuals in the following proportions, viz. :
(a) 4RR: 4Rr: rr,
` (b) 9RR:12Rr:4rr.
736
THE AMERICAN NATURALIST
TABLE IV
BOTH PARENTS REPORTED AS RIGHT-HANDED, BUT WITH SOME OF THE
CHILDREN LEFT-HANDED (FAMILIES 93, RIGHT-HANDED CHILDREN
[Vou. XLVII
138, LEFT-HANDED CATR 116).14
Nameof Person! Right-handed | Left-handed Name of Person Right-handed Left- handed
Reporting | hildren Children Report | Children | Children
RRC ces | 2 1 ae 1 1
Be. | 0 1 Mer (a)..... | 1 | 1
B aa 3 1 Mer (6). .... | 2 | 1
Bae eo Ves 3 1 Ba es | 1 | 1
Ben. E | 3 1 MuE Leies: | 3 | 1
DE Fon. | $ 1 Mill. W 6 | 2
PA oc, | 3 1 Mar oan 4 | 1
E Noen, 2 3 i T os 8 | 1
Do eaa 3 1 O22) a 4 | 1
Por <.c35 2 1 Ow ase. 1 | 1
i PE cuss oe. 3 1 TEN pha aean 9 | 3
O aoas 1 1 POs. dap aie 2 | 1
Cou cies 1 lo Sa 3 oo RL ie ie T | 1
$ aR ora 0 1 ATARE E 1 | 1
DOn: iese 4 1 Rid (a): 2 | 2
DIONE Os 5 1 meld O) ve ce. 0 | 1
DA a 4 1 iG 60) G3 2 | 2
E o 3 1 PEI E E 4 | 1
BFC} esc. 5 1 Roberts..... 6 | 2
Ske oes 1 2 Rbtn (a) 4 | 1
P ke 1 1 Rbtn (b) 2 | 1
ee E EEA 4 1 Roan: ice 2 | 1
OGL. o ea 3 2 Ea E 6 | 3
Goo (a)..... 1 1 ne ee 4 | 2
Gon e i a 2 2 Se (MI ai 3 | 1
Os Nate: 1 3 BOE os 1 | 1
Hapy a, 5 2 BOD: cassi 6 | 2
Mat E O 2 1 ROG. cscs. 3 2
ett ee 2 1 POO. So see 1 1
f1 olen ae 2 1 te ee cs 0 4
Ba... a: 2 1 Pmi GB), ces 4 1
aA E 3 1 Bmoth, <.. 3 1
jT E 8 1 Brass 2 1
FIM Se 3 1 Stream... 62.0. 1 1
EB ec ra 6 2 Bits. (cist, | 3 1
SOUL bien ee 3 2 ie a a | 3 1
JONG. 1 2 tl (Riisi | ri 1
BBs waves 3 ee i | 2 1
E saad 3 1 Tew Poraa i | 3 1
Baoa 5 1 bm ees. | 2 1
Bene fe ek 3 1 Web (H) | 4 1
| Rae as Bae 4 1 Weim,...... 1 1
1 Fe eae T 2 Wa (D)... 2 1
M cL... 5 1 Wh (H) | 2 1
McNab..... 4 1 Wo ox | 4 1
MOPR: sc. 4 1 PWP oere | 4 1
Ma ii 3 1 |
14 The percentage of left-handed children is 45.67.
lian rules the expectation is 25 per cent. As noted before it is apparent that
many of the parents reported as right-handed are really left-handed. Hence
the large excess of left-handed children.
E
a
According to Mende-
No. 564] INHERITANCE OF LEFT-HANDEDNESS 737
In the above ratios RR is pure right-handed, Rr is
heterozygous right-handed and rr is left-handed. I have
taken these particular proportions because they are stable
and they approximate to a degree the actual condition in
the population studied. As is noted in the table, the num-
ber of left-handed persons is probably greater than the
reports indicate. Some families reported as having both
parents right-handed evidently belong with the group of
one left-handed and one right-handed. Some reported in
this latter group belong, no doubt, with those having
both parents left-handed.
TABLE V
ONE PARENT RIGHT-HANDED, THE OTHER LEFT-HANDED
A. Right-handed Parent Evidently Heterozygous (Families 36, Right-handed
Children 88, Cerik handed REIN 55).
| i]
Left-
meof Person | Enara | Left-handed be toe crore Right-handed | | ete
ete ing Children Children orting Children | Children
Ba ALE 1 1 ET ee | 1 1
DE aoo 2 1 R SES: 2 1
Bre ak. 2 1 RE 65 3 3 1
BIR ae 2 1 VEO Aa us 3 | 1
MOR oe be 3 4 T Ga ae "Te 1
MOMs ols 2 2 PAS a 2 1
OW so, 4 2 Wiha 3 2
WAC 0 1 (Ols (Wier: 1 1
DW A 2 1 EUS 9 iaiaied ae. 1 2
a A E 4 1 LO. Ape eran 0 | 1
1 E 1 1 Mei ge sa 3 ! 1
Han. 4 3 aA A 2 | E:
a i RPE OR 4 1 See pos. 2 | 1
Ga ed 2 3 Wa (a)... 6%, 2 1
Mo aaa esl 2 2 PWR) 25 feo) 1 1
TG oS 5 2 Wea. seess] 2 1
y E a 5 3 Whe ey 5 3
SEEC e 2 2 Wi. a. — Oe Tee
88 55
f
Fecundity of Left-handed Families.—It is well known
that in certain species of animals races showing partic-
ular recessive traits have less vitality and perhaps less
reproductive ability than the ordinary members of the
species. From the studies herein recorded, especially in
Table II, it is seen that the left-handed families are quite
as fertile as the normal ones.
738 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vor. XLVII
Summary.—The foregoing pages are given to a study
of left-handedness among 610 parents and 1,130 children,
the data being collected from students at the University
of Colorado. It is concluded that left-handedness is a
Mendelian recessive. The condition probably exists in
about one sixth of the population. A suggestion is made
that the three Mendelian types of individuals may exist
in some such proportion as 9 homozygous right-handed:
12 heterozygous right-handed:4 left-handed.
B. Right-handed Parent Probably Homozygous (Families 9, Right-handed
Children 27, Left-handed Children 0).
Name nl rete Right-handed | Left-handed |Nameof Person] entara C Left- emg
Reporting Children Children eporting |
BR eona 5 0 Ky acy, +: | 2 | 0
PIO poe ce 4 0 Wb Sao es i. | 3 | 0
152 REEE 1 0 POE aa. | 2 0
Dü: oeiras 4 0 D ee aaa 3 0
: [anteater
Mis eae cs 3 0 | oF | ð
TABLE VI
BotH PARENTS REPORTED AS LEFT-HANDED
Number of Right- Number of Left-
Name of Person Reporting handed Children handed Children
MBN i aera ccee ees dees we 1 2
Bon Uc vuv< Coaeee ens ae aon 0 4
115 6
15 Mendelian expectation requires that all the children of these families be
left-handed. It is possible that one of the parents in the MeN family was
aturally right-handed and that the left-handedness was only acquired. If
this is not the case then there seems no explanation to offer for the appear-
ance of the right-handed child.
SUPPLEMENTARY STUDIES ON THE DIFFER-
ENTIAL MORTALITY WITH RESPECT TO
SEED WEIGHT IN THE GERMINATION
OF GARDEN BEANS—II
J. ARTHUR HARRIS
CARNEGIE INSTITUTION OF WASHINGTON
COMPARISON oF MEANS
Take first the most stringent comparison—that between
the constants of the seeds germinating normally and
those of the seeds failing to germinate, A-C. The fre-
quencies and mean magnitudes are:
f | Ateoa Value Relative Values
he egra arag POI NES NA 29 | +.396 +3.50
s differences.......... w —.702 —4.62
ree aani eS yee so —.065 +0.09
Or considering only differences which are at least 2.5
times their probable error:
| J | Absolute Values | Relative Values
Plus differences. i505 000. 15 +-0.541 ih 42
Minus differences.......... 9 — 1.355 8.84
All diferans, eann 24 —0.170 +0. 07
For the 18 cases in which the differences are at least 4
times their probable errors the results are:
| 7 | Absolute Values | Relative Values
Pim differenves............ | 12 | +0.536 | + 5.73
Minus differences. ......... i 6 — 1.634 — 10.93
All diforéhcos:.. id. | 18 | —0.187 + 0.17
These facts in a somewhat different form are made
clear to the eye in Diagrams 1 and 2.!*
14 Two types of graphs seem most suited to bring out clearly these results,
In both, the signs and magnitudes of the differences between the normally
developing and the eliminated series are shown by the direction and lengths
of a series of lines. The solid lines falling below the zero bar show on the
scale to the left the magnitude of the negative differences—i. e., of those
739
740 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
The first of these graphs shows the values reduced to
percentages of the constants for the general population
of seeds from which the samples used in these experi-
ments were drawn, t. e., the constants given in Table X.
The second shows the ratio of the differences to their
probable errors.
The impression given by both of these charts is that
the mean weight of the surviving seeds has been increased
by the mortality, although there are one or two conspicu-
ously large negative values in each case. This impres-
sion is borne out by the numerical result, if we confine
our attention to the signs, merely. Of the 50 experi-
ments, 29 show an increase and 21 a decrease in seed
weight, whereas if there were no relationship between
mean seed weight and viability, the deviations would be
expected to be equally divided between positive and nega-
tive, except for the error of random sampling which would
be given by .6745 V50 X .56 x .5. Thus in the present case
for the whole fifty experiments, the deviation from the
equality which we should expect if there were no relation-
ship between mean seed weight and mortality is 4 + 2.38
series. Surely this can not be regarded as a trustworthy
difference, but we note that the difference has the same
sign and is relatively larger as we reduce our number of
cases by disregarding those comparisons which are less
in which the seeds failing were heavier or more variable than those which
developed, in ich selection decreased mean weight or variability. The
broken lines stenting above the zero bar ioe the number and the magni-
tude of the differences indicating an pelea in mean or in variability as
the result of selective elimination. The length = these bars may be
determined in three different ways. They may simply represent the absolute
differences (in units of .025 gram). They may represent percentage differ-
ence, on the basis of the constant for the whole population, as explained
ve. They may be in terms of the ratio of the difference to its probable
error. %
The first is the method used in the diagrams of the earlier paper. It 1s
of no advantage here where the number of entries is too numerous to enable
e values for individual series to be conveniently read from them.
The second has the merit of presenting to the eye all the values in com-
parable terms. The third shows at a glance the statistical significance to
be attached to the differences represented. The two latter are used.
No. 564] STUDIES ON DIFFERENTIAL MORTALITY 741
probably statistically significant with respect to their
probable errors. Thus if we throw out the 26 cases which
are less than 2.5 times their probable error, we find that
15 are positive and 9 negative, a deviation of 3+ 1.65.
' 'eo00
ee ens Ney a Set Se
$ '
Pa e a E A i a ae LES,
|
|
MEAN oF MINUS DIFFERENCES l
DIAGRAM 1.
If we consider only differences which are four times their
probable error, we find 12 positive and 6 negative, a
deviation from equality of 3 + 1.43.
When, however, we turn to the averages—both abso-
lute and relative—we see very little support for the view
that there is a tendency for the weight of surviving seeds
742 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
to be heavier than those which fail. Sometimes, the gen-
eral average is positive and sometimes it is negative in
sign; it is always insignificant in magnitude. Nor, to
Pe g
+10 '
lo
pi
RE parey
a tee eee
l est
WE SoG
ae Gare MEAN oF PLUS DIFFERENCES
+4} Fe Lite.
i t ! '
i 1 el
A ' alee ye
+2 i i ' iris ttee
i iy hes EEREN
I ES |
ae eee UG a a ZERO BAR
ap ih ES Nese TP VAA ee ie Se WA el i e AES PA SE ee ST SO ee FE Se S TTT
pa i oe
MEAN of MINUS DIFFERENCES
-BF
at ~ |
—1OF
—12Ļ
-rt
-l6 t
-iš
-2 0f
.
-22$
DIAGRAM 2.
return to the question of the more qualitative classifica-
tion of the experiments, can any great weight be attached
to such inequalities in the number of positive and nega-
tive differences as we have secured.
The mean values of the ratios of the differences, A-C,
to their probable errors have also been struck. The 21
No. 564] STUDIES ON DIFFERENTIAL MORTALITY 743
negative cases give a mean ratio of 3.70 while the 29 posi-
tive values give 3.75. These substantial averages taken
in connection with the number of rather high individual
ratios certainly suggest that there are real biological
differences between the samples of seeds. One expression
of these differences is seen in the fact that in some cases
the seeds which survive average heavier and in other
cases lighter than in the population from which they
were drawn.
Consider now the weight relations of seeds giving
abnormal germinations and those failing to germinate,
BC:
F. Absolute Values | Relative Values
Plus differences............ 32 +.581 +4.34
Minus differences.......... 18 —.287 —2.08
All Gifferences PE 530. 5's 50 +.268 +2.03
Thus there is a deviation from equality of 7 + 2.38
cases, and this is probably significant.
For the abnormal germinations N is small; there are
only 12 cases in which the difference is over 2.5 times its
probable error. These are:
| J Absolute Values Relative Values
|
Plus differences............ eD +1.026 w$ 39
Minus aradeg Re OTE | 1 — 0.450 2.23
Alf differences. 0.6 66. VN ks 12 0.903 46. 58
In seven series, diff. Fair: >4. All these are positive;
they give a mean of 1.093 absolute and 8.47 relative.
Thus, apparently, the seeds which germinate abnor-
mally are distinctly heavier than those which fail to
germinate.
If now we combine 4 and B and compare all seeds
which germinated with all those which failed, we have:
7 Absolute Values Relative Values
Plus differences............ 31 -+0.360 +3.25
Minus differences. ......... 19 —0.513 —3.26
AN Giflereneee -s -eisoes 50 0.028 +0.77
For the cases which are 2.5 or more times their prob-
able error:
744 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
f | Absolute Values | Relative Values
Plus differences........... 17 40.510 | +4.92
Minus differences. .........] 7 — 1.035 — 6.44
All differences. Erao e sae şi ee a aa CELO +1.60
Thus by combining normal and abnormal germinations
there is stronger evidence for an increase in mean seed
weight by a selective death rate than when the normal
germinations alone are considered. This point will be
taken up again.
Just here it is necessary to point out that in this series
merely the capacity for germination of the seeds in sand
is taken into account, whereas in the former study only
those were considered viable which had produced fertile
plants. In combining normal and abnormal seedlings
and contrasting them with those which failed to germi-
nate at all, we are undoubtedly considerably overesti-
wee the capacity for survival in nature.’
5 From personal experience in the handling of the plants I have no doubt
viii that had SOE taken place in a substratum less easily dis-
placed than sand (e. g., in a stiff clay soil) a number of the seeds classified
as abnormal in PERENA Would not have succeeded in unfolding their
primordial leaves to the light. Again, I believe there is not the slightest
question that of those which did reach the surface a higher proportion
would fail to develop into mature plants than of the seedlings classified
normal. In fine, there is probably a post-germination as well as pre-
germination mortality, and this mortality is probably selective. Indeed for
morphological variations it has been shown to be so. (Harris, J. Arthur,
‘*A Simple Demonstration of the Action of Natural Selection,’’ Science,
N. S., 36: 713-75. 1912). My general impression from working with the
seedlings of both sorts is that there is likely to be a larger difference in mor-
ality between the normal and abnormal seedlings of this paper than be-
tween the normal and abnormal seedlings of the study of. the death rate of
normal and morphologically aberrant seedlings.
It is possible, therefore, that. such differences in mean weight as are
found between the results of the two investigations may be in part due to a
somewhat different elimination during germination and in part due to a
selective mortality occurring beyond the point at which the census for the
later series of experiments was necessarily closed. Thus it appears that
when the abnormal germinations are grouped se the normal to give the
comparison (A + B) —C the evidence for an increase in mean seed weight
through repre . pr of the lighter SSR is strengthened. A com-
parison of the two classes of seedlings also suggests that the seeds giving
rise to those sie are abnormal may be heavier than those germinating
No. 564] STUDIES ON DIFFERENTIAL MORTALITY 745
Ideally, to obtain results valid for individuals attain-
ing reproductive maturity one should take a small pro-
portion of the seeds germinating normally and a much
higher proportion of those giving rise to abnormal seed-
lings and combine them with the seeds failing to germi-
nate. There is.no possible way of estimating the pro-
portion of A and B which should be classed with C. If
one wishes to make the comparison which shall be at the
opposite extreme of that in which all seeds germinating
at all are compared with those failing to germinate, he
may combine the seeds germinating abnormally with
those which do not germinate. Thus (A +8B)—C and
A— (B +C) will give us the upper and lower possible
measures of the influence of mortality of abnormal seed-
lings on seed weight.
Turning to the comparison of means for A — AEP, + C ae
| f | Absolute Values | Relative RTE
Plus differences. ........... L 40.571 | +3.46
Minus konpre yc ee oe | 23 — 0.745
a Boe —0.142 — $ a T035 ee
All differences.............
Restricting comparisons to differences at least 2.5
times their probable error:
f ` Absolute Values | Relative Values
Plus poet ug ea eu 14 +0.524 | +5.28
Minus differences. ......... 13 | —1.192 | —7.73
All difen +. R 27 —0.302 | —0.99
Or DETE still further to onè which are at least 4E:
y | Absolute Values | Relative Values
differences............ R o] niy 515 | + 5.46
Minus differences. ......... | Bo 1.599 | — 10.64
AI diforencos o- oaea e RO —0.331 l — 0.98
Certainly, there is in these figures no trustworthy indi-
cation of an increase of mean weight as a result of
selective mortality.
normally. If this is true, and if the abnormal seedlings have a higher
post- germination mortality, it is clear that some of the increase in mean
observed i ese experiments would have disappeared if the plants had
been required to develop to maturity under field conditions.
746 | THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
Somewhere between this minimum value and the one
given above by (4 + B) - -C probably lies the true meas-
ure of the change in mean weight as it would occur if the
plants were required (as they would be in nature) to
grow to reproductive maturity.
I now turn to the individual varieties. This demands,
for results which shall be at all trustworthy, the com-
bination of both sets of experiments.?®
The accompanying table gives the results for the rela-
tive differences in mean weight (differences expressed
as ss hima of the cape populates Ponni,
Varieties | f | Relative Valen:
Navy |
Plus Gifterences PE 5 A | 18 +2.461
Minus differences............ | 6 | —1.134
AU CON a | 24 | +1.562
Ne PLus ULT |
Pins Osferences. sas seie | 5 +1.122
Minus re Dias cen ee | 3 | —1.962
AN ONO earn a | 8 | —0.022
WHITE Pao | |
Plus diferencos. -coeca | 9 +1.787
Minus erteni WIS ily: O A T A | 3 | —0.247
All differendes. © a o.i.. | 12 | +1.276
BURPEE’s Seatac GLESS: | |
Plos differences.: roo ss., uan | 10 | +1.244
Minus differences............| 16 — 1.048
ATE GEen.. a Aa 26 —0.167
GOLDEN WAX
bmi Gierenees 866s a Ce 0
ë differ oncess sci eee 7 — 2.087
TANGO 6 O eg 7 —2.087
FLAGEOLET Wax: | |
Plus cifrerenees . oo ee ous 1 z +0.263
16 The method of rendering the result of these sand cultures most nearly
comparable with the field experiments is to draw the comparison between
the germinated seed and the general population from which they were
rawn
planted (A + B + C) viik s piad to develop, but this would not give
differences comparable with those from field culture work where (A +B +
C+... oa not soa ié is known.
nyone who cares to do so may make this comparison numerically for
the miea material n uke the physical constants for (4 + B) and sub-
tracting from them the general population constants given in Table X. It
has already been made graphically in a paper on ‘‘Current Progress in the
Study of Natural Selection,’’ in Pop. Sci. a n press
I believe that the purely statistical differences between the two sets of
No.564] INHERITANCE OF LEFT-HANDEDNESS 747
This anaylsis of means by varieties is most suggestive.
Leaving out of account Flageolet Wax for which there is
only a single experiment, it appears that in Navy. and
White Flageolet there is a distinct increase in mean
weight of survivors, that in Ne Plus Ultra and Burpee’s
Stringless there is no marked change in mean weight,
while in Golden Wax there is a pronounced tendency for
the survivors to be lighter than the general population."
It is clear that such a condition as this would give,
with a proper combination of strains, precisely the gen-
eral result that we have found for the means: that is, an
average of no change by selective elimination but signifi-
cantly positive differences in some experiments and sig-
nificantly negative differences in others. Here is a
problem requiring further analysis—which, however, can
be profitably undertaken only when larger bodies of
experimental evidence are at hand.
CoMPARISON OF ABSOLUTE VARIABILITIES
For the standard deviations for seeds germinating
normally and seeds failing to germinate, A-—C, in the
whole material the results are:
experiments are not sufficient to be of material PAE: Much greater
types of substrata, and (b) the fact that in the field cultures viability was
measured in terms of capacity to produce mature fertile plants, while in the
sand cultures it was (necessarily) measured in terms of the capacity for
(normal or abnormal) germination only.
17 Possibly these results are due merely to the unavoidable errors of
experiment and of sampling. Only far wider series of data can settle this
point; until then no stress whatever is to be laid upon it. But a priori
there is nothing unreasonable or improbable in such results. These varieties
differ widely in the characteristics of their seeds and there is nothing sur-
prising in the indication that in one variety the death rate is more concen-
trated toward the lower end of the range of variation, in another it is more
restricted to the upper limit, while in a third both extremes are decimated.
This seems especially probable in view of the fact that in this as in other
cultivated species the varieties have been developed to suit the fancy of
man and not to meet the requirements of the race in competitive life in
nature.
748 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
| T | Absolute Values | Relative Values
Plus differences............| 17 | +.145 | + 8.67
Minus differences. ......... 33 —.351 | —13.77
All differences. PPn a FEU Le —.183 | — 6.14
These relationships are made clear by Diagrams 3 and
4. The first of these shows the differences in standard
deviations expressed as percentages of the population
S.D. The second shows the ratio of the differences to
their probable errors.
The distribution of the differences which are at least
2.5 times their probable errors may be summarized :
P A | Absolute Values | Relative Values
Plus differences............ | | +.335 | +21.81
Minus differences. ......... 5 | —.569 | 1.64
All differences. .....,...... į —.343 | S “10. sec
Thus of the 17 positive differences, 12 or about 71 per
cent. are statistically untrustworthy (i. e., < 2.5£) while
+807
fissa ZERO BAR
aoe Te
|
o me as ees HL I
MEAN oF MINUS DIFFERENCES
DIAGRAM 3.
No. 564] INHERITANCE OF LEFT-HANDEDNESS 749
of the 33 negative differences, only 18 or roughly 55 per
cent. are not statistically significant. The deviations
from equality are 8 + 2.38 for the whole material and
5 = 1.51 for the 20 series which are more probably statis-
tically significant.
+6 :
1g
rro
gay}
+1 pon
TS
pag
+2 i1! | MEAN oF PLUS DIFFERENCES
itty tie
as Se eens ZERO BAR
a S CE RAN eed et Se WG Ee ee e
; TH
-2
: MEAN of MINUS DIFFERENCES °°) |
-6
A |
DIAGRAM 4.
Only 12 individual differences are over four times
their probable error:
| + | Absolute Values | Relative Values
Plus differences............ ee eee | 425.22
Minus differences.......... | 9 | —.769 | —27.31
All derno, ............ 12 —.486 | —14.18
These results can leave no doubt as to the reduction in
the absolute variability when the seeds which produce
normal seedlings are selected out from those which fail
750 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
to develop. The number of negative differences is sig-
nificantly higher than the number of positive differences.
The mean of the negative differences is larger numer-
ically than that of the positive differences. The propor-
tion of negative differences is higher among the constants.
which are more probably trustworthy, being only 1.5:1
among those < 2.5H but 3:1 among those > 2.5E. The
average ratio of the difference to its probable error is
only 1.65 for the positive differences, but reaches 3.04
for those which are negative in sign.
Thus these results are in excellent agreement with
those of the field experiments.
Turn now to the same question with regard to the
seeds giving abnormal germinations, B-C:
Plus differences............ 23 | +.235 | +12.14
Minus differences.......... | 27 | —.331 —15.32
All differences. 22655550 | 50 i —.071 | 2.69
For those differences at least 2.5 times their probable
error, the results are:
T | Absolute Values | Relative Values
Plus differences............ | 3 +.466 | +28.14
inus differences.......... | 11 —.50 | —21.75
Perhaps the evidence for a reduction in variability is _
not so strong when seeds germinating abnormally are
compared with those not germinating at all. This is
precisely what one would expect if such seeds may be
regarded as in some degree intermediate between those
which produce perfect seedlings and those which produce
no seedlings at all.
I now turn to the question of a possible reduction in
variability as one passes from seeds germinating ab-
normally to those germinating normally. The answer
is given by the comparison A-B:
No. 564] STUDIES ON DIFFERENTIAL MORTALITY 751
F | Absolute Values Relative Values
Plus differences. ........... 19 +.273 +13.78
Minus differences.......... 31 —.366 —15.95
All diiinom EE NEEN E S 50 123 — 4.66
For differences 2.5 or more times their probable errors:
F Absolute Values | Relative Values
Plus differences............ 6 +.505 +24.41
Minus differences.......... 9 —.560 —25.08
All chffertneta sie. Seek. 15 —.134 — 5.29
It is clear that in passing from the seeds producing
abnormal seedlings to those germinating normally there
is in general a reduction in absolute variability of weight.
This point will be discussed in greater detail when rela-
tive variabilities are taken up.
If now the comparisons be drawn between all seeds
which germinate (whether normally or abnormally) and
those which do not germinate at all, i. e., (A +B)—C,
we have:
J Absolute Values | Relative Values
Plus differences: 4.3 3.65233 15 +.136 | + 8.37
Minus differences. ......... 35 —.266 | —11.18
All differences anaa 50 —.146 | — 5.32
Or restricting the comparison as usual to those which
are more probably statistically trustworthy (> 2.5E) :
U | Absolute Values | Relative Values
paris differences..........-- | 4 +.297 | +420.85
Minus differences..........) 13 —.475 | —19.12
All pp aarp A eae. 17 —.294 | — 9.72
The comparison involving the other extreme in the
treatment of the abnormal seedlings is A— (B +C). For
all the series this gives:
I J Absolute Values Relative Values
Bened ai a o y +.160 + 9.18
Minus differences. ......... 33 —.331 —13.45
Ci erOneee ii ri css | 50 —.164 — 5
752 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST — [Vou. XLVII
For cases at least 2.5H, the results are:
F Abenkabe i ae” | Relative Values
Pilos differences... n 5 +: = +22.21
Minus differences.......... | 16 521 | — 20.26
All differences. -oi «nsei i 21 — 312 | —10.15
Thus the treatment of the abnormal germinations does
not materially affect the general results for reduction in
variability.
It seems unnecessary to consider both absolute and
relative variabilities for the individual varieties. The
results will be summarized for the coefficients of variation.
COMPARISON OF RELATIVE VARIABILITIES
As demonstrated in the preceding sections, mortality is
so related to seed weight that absolute variability is
reduced in passing from seeds which fail to germinate to
those which produce seedlings. Possibly, too, there is a
change in type. Such changes in mean, even if due only
to the errors of sampling, may somewhat affect absolute
variabilities. It is desirable, therefore, to reduce all
these to relative terms—to express them as ratios of the
absolute variabilities (X 100) to the means.
The coefficients of variation, being already in relative
terms, give only one set of means to consider.
For A-C, all series, the results are:
Ff Averages
Ara Heos s aa 12 +1.45
E a P E cc 38 —1.95
All ‘limos Ca ee i ie 50 peice —1La3 a
Thus we have a deviation from the 25:25 ratio of
13 + 2.38 which must certainly be regarded as significant.
For cases at least 2.5 times their O error:
+3.45
—3.26
ae 7 i wr w A
|
an | i
a aa E T E | Woo aa et
No. 564] STUDIES ON DIFFERENTIAL MORTALITY 753
Only 8 are 4 or more times their probable error. Of
these, 3 are positive, averaging + 3.34, while 5 are nega-
tive, averaging — 4.45
+5
+4
+r
18
tl 19
+2 eA oe oe
||| '@ MEAN oF PLUS DIFFERENCES
a
L k : BAS
+I i ? ;
Ceca ZERO BAR
do RELI
os MEAN oF ALL DIFFERENCES
mere]
zdi MEAN of MINUS DIFFERENCES 14 | | |
is |
-It | |
ot |
|
DIAGRAM 5.
The differences for A-C, all material, are shown in
Diagram 5. Note by comparison with Diagrams 3 and 4
that the evidence for selective mortality becomes stronger
when variabilities corrected for size of the means are
substituted for absolute values.
754 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
Comparison of the relative variability in weight of
seeds giving abnormal germinations with that of those
failing to germinate at all, B-C, gives:
Ei | Averages
Plas Cisrerenees . 5 es a | 18 | +2.24
Minus s- Gileranoes. iye e ce cine sks] 32 —2.35
All differences: 603 iis meets. E Ta DG aA —0.7 70 ie.
Reba comparisons to ditlbrences at least 2.5E:
| Ff | Aveiigi
Plos dierent 2. eee | 2 | +5.47
Minis diflerenten. a oe 10 .—4.74
All difterenices: a enoaan a i 12 —3.04
Differences at least 4E are:
Í Averages
Plas diloronoaa 38, 2 1 +6.17
Minus differences.............. pe 6 —4.56
All diflerenéea. ooo oe 7 —3.03
The reduction in variability in passing from C to B is
clearly significant.
Consider now the difference between seeds germinating
abnormally and those An HOT A-B:
r vege.
Pits differences. 6. oo | 21 +2.11
Minus eo SS OPA Rai core ae | 29 | —2.27
All Gulerenee.: r a 50 —0.43
Or taking the usual minimum standard of statistical
significance :
: f. . n Argi
Plus differences, o ee: | 7 +3.42
Mintis-diffetencms.;. 6. thes cc | 5 —5.32
All dierences oosa | 12 —0.23
There is no certainty of any reduction in relative vari-
ability here. But turning back to the standard deviations
we find that there were fair indications of a lowering of
variability.
No. 564] STUDIES ON DIFFERENTIAL MORTALITY 755
This apparently contradictory result finds an explana-
tion when the means are taken more epi into account.
Consider these, A-B:
| T Absolute Vaines | Relative Values
Phaissdifterenéés ii.. G | 23 +.331 | +2.96
inus differences. ......:.. 27 —.899 | —5.96
All differences............. | 50 —.833 ~1.86
Relative Values
tf E Abbataia Vals =
Plus differences. .......... eee | 40.596 | + 5.43
inus differences.......... | 12 | —1.703 —11.02
All differences. 756008 18 —0,937 | — 5.54
The mean weights are higher in series B than in series
A. The relative variabilities for B are, therefore, re-
duced by the higher values of the means. Thus when we
take the comparison A—B for relative variabilities, the
reduction which we noted in dealing with the absolute
values does not appear.
Consider now the result of combining all seeds which
germinated at all (whether normally or abnormally) and
comparing their coefficients of variation with those of the
seeds which failed to germinate, (A + B) —C
| f | RA
Pius diferpooa. euL nna | 12 -+1.29
Minas diterences. 266. oi ane | 38 —1.71
Aa 00. i i | 50 —0.99
Or restricting to differences at least 2.52:
f | Averages
Pius PR e ee. ain o nera] 4 | —
DAs GiurereNnces a | 13 |
AM Oa irk a | 17 | i a
Thus we have for all the material a deviation of
13 + 2.38 cases from the equality to be expected if there
were no selective mortality tending to reduce variability.
In 38 cases out of 50 the variability of the seeds which
germinated is lower than that of those which failed.
756 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST
In this comparison, all seeds which germinate at all
have been considered viable—although it is practically
certain that many of the abnormal ones would not have
been able to reach maturity. If one wishes to take the
other extreme, he may throw all the seeds producing ab-
normal seedlings with those which failed to germinate at
all and compare with those germinating in a perfectly
normal manner, 4 — (B+
Areia
Pius MMerentok. sa ee 12 | +1.52
Minus ditterencei.. eso sunka saa 38 — 1.69
All diao a a Eee ee 50 —0.92
Or : for differences = 2. 5E:
x : ae a ee a Averages
ah pop haere ieee np ee ss gee caer | 4 +3.13
s diforonoos: ©... SS Ae, | 16 —2.65
a 20 —1.49
Thus the disposition of the abnormal seedlings makes
relatively little difference in the end result.
peah
Ae |
=
Mean Difference
"Plus diferencen. inresa ees 9 T rae
Minus differences............ 15
All differences ok oerein 24 a Hs
Ne PLus ULT
Plus differences.............- 4 + 878
Minus differences............ 4 1.833
AU nosan 8 0. 478
WHITE FLAG z
Pius differences. 20 Ss 2 +0.031
Minus Aifuenros Gi ee ee a 10 —0.683
ul COCR ee 12 — 0.563
BURPEE’S STRINGLESS
Plus differences.............. 3 +0.637
inus differences............ 23 —0.669
All differences. osese oes 26 —0.518
GoLpEN Wax: |
lus difforences. >. creere ese 1 ! +0.175
Minus crores cca CUS 6. 6 | 1.356
All donon, «26 6a le es 7 1.137
FLAGEOLET Wax. | |
Min i aan se ieee AE 1 | — 0.283
I now combine the differences (A+B)—(4+B+
C+- - -) for the 50 experiments of the present paper
(Vou. XLVII
No. 564] STUDIES ON DIFFERENTIAL MORTALITY 757
with the 28 given by the field test, as already done for the
relative means. The little table gives the results.
For every variety except Ne Plus Ultra the differences
are exclusively or preponderantly negative. For each
of the six varieties the general average is negative in
sign, although sometimes very low. Such results give
additional force to the conclusion that there is a reduction
in variability due to a differential mortality.
V. RECAPITULATION AND Discussion
1. This paper embodies a portion of the data of a
second study of the relationship between seed weight
and seed viability in Phaseolus vulgaris. The constants
are based on greenhouse plantings in sand of some 46,000
individually weighed seeds, chiefly of the pedigrees em-
ployed in the field experiments.
Bearing in mind the various sources of error suffi-
ciently emphasized in the body of the paper, the follow-
ing may be said of the findings.
2. In general the results of the first study are fully
confirmed. In certain particulars, however, the narrower
analysis made possible by the wider materials now avail-
able suggests some modification and considerable exten-
sion of conclusions.
3. The statement concerning means was:
This selective death rate is of such a nature that the mean of the
available seeds remains practically the same as that of the original
populations, while the variability is reduced. In short, both large and
small seeds are less capable of developing into fertile plants than are
those which do not deviate so widely above or below the type.
This was all that could then be said, for while many
thousands of individually weighed seeds were involved,
the number of series was too low to justify analysis into
the individual varieties or into groups by age of seed or
conditions of growth. Examined in the same manner,
these data show in the long run some indication of an
increase in the mean weight of the survivors, but no un-
758 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST ~~ [Vou. XLVII
controvertible evidence of a change in mean weight as a
result of selective mortality. But individually considered,
more differences in mean weight are from two to four or
more times their probable errors than can possibly be
attributed to experimental or sampling errors. Some of
these differences are positive, others are negative. There
seems in view of these facts, no escape from the conclu-
sion that there is a real biological relationship between
weight and viability of such a nature that in some experi-
ments the heavier and in other experiments the lighter
seeds are most heavily drawn upon in the mortality.
This seems clear from the greenhouse experiments in
whatever way the differences are taken. There are in-
dications of the same condition in field cultures, although
here the criterion of statistical trustworthiness is, because
of the dual errors of sampling, less dependable.
There is strong evidence for varietal differences with
respect to mortality. In some strains the heavier, in
others the lighter, seeds seem less capable of develop-
ment. The reason for these differences may be sought
in the inherent characters of the stocks used or in the
environments to which they have been subjected. This
question is, however, so complicated that larger and more
diverse series of data must be gotten together for its
final solution.
4. Consider now the variabilities. There can be no
question whatever concerning the reality of the reduction
in variability, either absolute or relative, as a result of
differential mortality. The following conditions seem to
prevail for the individual comparisons which may be
made.
There is probably a reduction in absolute variability,
and there is certainly a reduction in relative variability,
in passing from seeds which fail to germinate to those
which produce abnormal seedlings.
There is probably also a reduction in standard devia-
tion in weight in passing from seeds which give abnormal
seedlings to those which germinate normally. This re-
No.564] STUDIES ON DIFFERENTIAL MORTALITY 759
duction is not so evident in the coefficients of variation,
probably because of changes occurring in mean weight.
There is clearly a lowering of both absolute and rela-
tive variabilities between seeds which fail to germinate
and those which germinate normally, or those which
germinate at all, either abnormally or normally. The dis-
position which is made of the seeds which give rise to
abnormal seedlings does not affect the conclusion concern-
ing a reduction in variability due to a differential death
rate.
To what extent this reduction is incidental to a change
in mean through elimination preponderantly from one
end of the range, as compared with elimination from both
the extremes without change of type, must be determined
on wider series of data, and probably by the use of
statistical methods not yet applied to the problem.
5. The constants of this paper, taken in connection with
data made directly available from other published studies
by the key letters, can be used towards the solution of a
number of problems not touched upon here. These have
been purposely left out of account because they were
aside from the present main purpose and because I hope
to have much more extensive materials for their solution
later.
6. Concerning the causes of the differences in viability
no conclusions can be drawn. I have shown'* that in
general the larger seeds require longer for germination,
but the precise relation, if any, of this phenomenon to
selective mortality, as well as its explanation in more
general physical and chemical terms, are still to be
worked out.
TumaAmoc HILL, Tucson, ARIZ.,
April 3, 1913
18 Harris, J. Arthur, ‘‘A First Study of the Relationship between the
Weight of the Bean Seed, Phaseolus vulgaris, and the Time Required for its
Germination.’’ In press.
SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION
A CROSS INVOLVING FOUR PAIRS OF MENDELIAN
CHARACTERS IN MICE
THE present experiment was planned as a control upon more
detailed work being carried on at the Bussey Institution. It
has, however, a distinct value, as demonstrating from a single
cross the existence of four independent pairs of Mendelian char-
acters in the color inheritance of mice.
That the yellow and agouti factors are not inherited inde-
pendently of each other has been demonstrated by Sturtevant.!
The four pairs of characters under consideration here were
recorded by Castle and Little? and are briefly as follows:
A=agouti, a==non-agouti.
B=black, b=—no black (brown).
D = density, d= diluteness.
P= dark eye, p= pink eye.
In each case the character represented by the small letter is
recessive in combination with its allelomorph, designated by a
large letter.
To obtain all possible combinations of these four pairs of char-
acters, a single pure wild gray mouse was mated with several
pink-eyed dilute brown females from a homozygous stock bred
at the Bussey Institution and shortly to be reported upon by one
of the writers.
Wild gray mice possess the dominant members of all four
paired characters mentioned above, and consequently have the
gametic formula ABDP. The pink-eyed dilute brown mouse, on
the other hand, exhibits the recessive conditions of the same fac-
tors and is of the formula abdp. It is in appearance a very
pale lilac color and in Miss Durham’s classification is described
as ‘‘Silver Champagne.’’
The F, individuals resulting from this cross (wild ¢ X pink-
eyed dilute brown 9) were all, as expected, similar to the wild
1 Am. NAT., 1912, p. 368.
2 Science, 1909, . 312
3 Journal of Gencting: 1911, p. 159.
760
No.564] SHORTER ARTICLES AND DISCUSSION 761
parent in color. They were mated inter se and disposed so as
to raise as large a number of F,’s as possible.
In this F, generation we should expect to find sixteen visibly
different types of color, in the proportions indicated in Table I.
Table I also shows the results actually obtained in the experiment.
TABLE I
i Observed | Expected Theoretical Observed
Color Formula | Numbers | Numbers | Proportion Proportion
Pt ABOU eS ABDP 436 373.4 81 94.5
Ses ae aBDP Ar INES 1 N 27.5
rasa AQOUU Core ce. AbDP 103 | 124.5 | 27 22.3
Dilute Black Agouti....... ABdP 130 | -1245 | 27 28.2
a ei oe Black roar ABDp 103 124.5 | 27 22.3
a MSs a a a abDP 40 415°] 9 8.7
Dilute Brown Agouti...... AbdP 31 41.5 | 9 6.7
Dilete Bladk igo aBd Be ALS | 9 8.0
Pink Eyed Black.......... aBDp 35 41.5 | 9 7.6
Pink Eyed Brown Agouti. . | AbDp 38 41.5 | 9 8.2
ink Eyed Dilute Black| |
ROUT iA ABdp | 38 41.5 9 8.2
ute WRA oe aar abdP F a E E See 3 2.4
Pink Eyed Brown....:.... abDp ar Se 4 3 2.6
ink Eyed Dilute Brown | |
ROU: cook Chee eae Abdp | 15 13.8 3 3.3
Pink Eyed Dilute Black . aBdp 17 12.855 3 3.7
Pink Eyed Dilute Brown...) abdp 7 4.6 | ae ee
co eee ne | 1,180 |
If we consider each allelomorphie pair of characters sepa-
rately, the following results are observed (Table II):
TABLE II
eee: Ta i ie ; - | the i PARE re boored Pies. Pro-
Characters Observed Num Expected Num- | gepre as E peted
Š | 894 | 885 | 3 | 3.12
a 286 | 295 | 1 | 1
B | 923 | 885 | 3 3.59
b 257 | 295 | 1 1
D | 894 | 885 | 3 3.13
d | 286 | 295 1 1
P | 915 | 885 | 3 | 3.45
p | 265 | 295 1 1
It will be seen that there is in each case a slight excess of
animals possessing the dominant character. Further, in Table I
there was an excess of black agouti (gray) animals, which possess
all four dominant characters.
762 THE AMERICAN NATURALIST [Vou. XLVII
This last excess, however, is not sufficient, in the opinion of
the writers, to support any theory of coupling, especially in the
absence of significant differences in the other classes.
The excess of grays may better be explained on the basis of
selective elimination of the various recessive animals, for the F,
young could not be graded satisfactorily until nearly four weeks
old, and no account was kept before this time.
A minor error may have occurred in recording the pink-eyed
dilute brown young, as they resemble closely the intense pink-
eyed brown and no breeding test was undertaken.
To summarize the results of this mating, it is obvious that we
are dealing with four clear-cut pairs of Mendelian characters as
deseribed by Castle and Little in 1909, among which no coupling
or association can be detected.
C. C. LITTLE
J. ©. PHILLIPS
INDEX
NAMES OF CONTRIBUTORS ARE PRINTED IN SMALL CAPITALS
Abel, O., Vertebrate Paleontology,
Mooptg, 254
ewe OU CHas. C., Valuation of y
Sea, C. G. J. Petersen and P.
Jens 378
Adaptation, tet Natural Selec-
ker eae eg MAYNAR
M. Mae 65; in the Living
and Non Erat, Burton EDWAR:
D
aeii Te S in Animal Reac-
ER, 83; and the
Phyclologist, gee P. MATHEWS,
nn, Influence Develop-
aeg n Bird Tam n Wyom-
ig, B GROVE, 3
ea ae Multi G and The
cage! an Rabbit, A. H. STURTE-
334
Ae Experimental, Causes and
Determiners in . JENNINGS,
of the Problem in Inbreed-
ing, ee PEARL, 5
ANDERSON, 5., The Inheritance
of Coat pun in Horses, 61
Andrews, C. W., Ver rtebrate Paleon-
tology, Roy E, 187
m Reactions, Mapiation in,
G, 83
(Aphis) 2 t Parthenogonetic Insect,
Hered JAMES P. KELLY,
29
Armadillo, Nine-banded, of Texas,
Keni History, H. H. NEWMAN,
Partheno-
RICHARD
Artificial, and Natural,
genesis in Nicotiana,
ELLINGTON, 279
Barred Plumage Pattern in the
White Leghorn ae of Fowls,
Puiuip B. HADLEY, 418
ct of “Fertilizers on
Beans, Effe
Variation, J. K. SHa 57;
Garden, ’ Differential Mortality
with respect to Seed ves ae 5
the Germination of,
Harris, 683,
Biological Significance of Properties
of Matter, LAWRENCE J. HENDER-
N, 105
Bird Fauna, in Wyoming, Influ-
ence of aon Gere of Agricul-
ture on, B. H. Grove, 311
Cambrian Holothurians, Austin H.
CLARK, 488
Case, E. nE L. Hussakof and E
Sellards, Vertebrate Paleontology,
190; Cotylosauria of North Amer-
ica, Ro OODIE, 191
ASTLE, W. E. and Q. I. SIMPSON,
A Family of Spotted Negroes,
50; Simplification of Mendelian
Formulæ 70
Castration and Secondary Sexual
acters i Brown Leghorns,
H. D. Goo 159
Cells, Somatic, The Possible Origin
oe Mut in, R. A. EMERSON,
oaii of San Diego Region,
Distribution to Isolation n VAR
cidence, ELLIS L. MICHAE
a agi bs W Gata Holo-
s, 488
Clo at Talai in Pectinatella,
ANNIE P. HENCHMAN and C. B.
DAVENPORT, 361
COCKERELL, T. D. A., Ordovician (?)
Fish Rem mains in Colorado, 246
Color, Coat, in Horses, e Inher-
prok Zon Law o
bid STOC 123
CooK, O. r. “Mendelism and Inter-
peli Hybrids, 239
or = The Effect ‘of Fertilizers on
riati on in, J. K. SHAW,
Crosses, Reciprocal, betwee
Pheasant and the Dake Ring-
eck Pheasant, producing Un-
like Hybrids, JOHN ©, PHILLIPS
701
Cross involving Four Pairs of Men-
eli haracters in Mice,
Lirrte, J. C. PHILLIPS, 760
763
764
Crossing Zea mais L. and Euchlena
mexicana Schrad, J. E. van der
Stok, Mary G. LAcy, 511
Darwinism in Forestry, RAPHAEL
Zon, 540
DAVENPORT, C. and ANNIE P.
HMAN, Clonal Variation in
Pectinatella, 361
AVIS, BRADLEY Masi E, Mutations
in other: s cog a G ae DP:
pete Studie on (Enothera,
, 547
Dekori ionis, and Causes in se.
Ex _— shay Analysis, H. 8S.
JEN , 849
Diferential ’ Mortality, beanie be-
Tenebri and T.
s obse
ger cae
572; with respect to Seed ge i
in the Germination o r
an J. ARTHUR Harris, 683,
739
Distribution and Species-forming of
Eeto-parasites, VERNON LYMAN
129
ELLOGG,
Drosophila. Viability and Coupling
, P. W. Wuirtne, 508
Eecto-parasites, it gg oer of,
LYM
Effect on the Offspring of Tatoxient-
ing the Male Parent, and the
Transmission of Defects to
Subsequent Generations, CHARLES
x oe
Emerson, R. A., Simplified Mendel-
ian Formule, "307; ; The Sooner
Origin of Mutations in Somatic
Cells, 375; The Ail
Modification of Distinct Mendel-
an Factor
Pavio eE, ’ Fitness of, and Bio-
logical Si ignificance of sone Rl!
erties of Matter, LAWRE g:
HENDERSON, 105
Experimental’ pag tia Causes and
Determiners in, H. S. JENNINGS,
Fact and Unit Characters in
Mendelian Heredity, T. H. Mor-
Gav eta and Inter-
Pasting,
mi nfluence upon Growth,
A. COCKERELL, 246
THE AMERICAN NATURALIST
[Vor. XLVII
Fixation of Character in Organisms,
EpwarD SINNOTT, 705
Darwinism in, RAPHAEL
540
White Leghorn, Beros
age Pattern, PHILIP B.
HADLEY, 418
Problems in Protozoa wi
MIDDLETON, 434;
Yonik International na ARREN
FRANK M. SURFACE, 636
Genetical i on (Enothera,
Bra Moore Davis, 449, 547
Seog Work of Termites in the
elgian Congo, DONALD STEEL,
Seneto,
Ya
Germinal Continuity, Law of, W. W.
TOCKBERGER,
GoopaLE, H. D., Castration in Rela-
i Secondary Sexual
159; and T. H. MORGAN,
of Tricolor in Guinea-pigs, 321
GORTNER, Ross AIKEN, Notes on a
Differential Mortality observed
between Tenebris obscuris and T.
range 572
B. H., The Influence of the
Secsinmnent of Agriculture in
Wyoming upon the Bird Fauna,
311
Growth, The Influence of Protracted
and Intermittent of upon,
Réaction MORGULIS p
— i Neredicy’ o ricolor
A D. Goopate and T. H.
MARDAN. on
HADLEY, PHILIP B., The Presence
of the Barred Pluma age Pattern
White Leghorn Breed of
Fowls, 418
HAR R, Supplementary
Studies ‘on he "iffe rential Mor-
ang with respect to Seed Weight
the Germination of Garden
Bente,
HENCHMAN, ANNIE P. and C. B.
DAVENPORT, Clonal Variation in
Pectinatella, 361 :
HENDERSON, LAWRENCE J., The Fit-
ness ei = Environment, n-
105
Heredity, Mendelian, T. H, More
5; and Teratological Develop
ment in Nie otia ig me ie
O-
Pa
poker inet (Aphis), JAMES P.
No. 564]
KELLY, 229; of Tricolor in
Guinea-pigs, H. D. GOODALE and
T. H. MorGAN, 321
Himalayan Rabbit Case and Mul-
tiple Allelomorphs, A. H. STURTE-
VANT, 234
Holothurians, Cambrian, Austin H.
CLARK, 488
oom ‘The Inheritance of Coat
Color in, W. ts ANDERSON, 615
Hussakof, see . C. Case and E.
Sellards, Wecsiwease Paleontology,
190
Hyatt, Alpheus, and his Principles
ro Research, ROBERT Tracy JACK-
1
SON, 195
pebei Interspecific, and Mendel-
O. F. CooK, 239; Unlike
: ween
n e
mon Ring-neck Pheasant, Ree
PHILLIPS, 701
Ichthyology, Notes on, Davin STARR
ORDAN,
ae heen Analysis of, RAYMOND
EARL,
Influence st Protracted and Inter-
mittent Fasting upon Growth.
Epw. N. ENT-
of Coat Color in
The, S. ANDERSON,
615; “OF Left- “handedness, FRANCIS
AMALEY, 30
Intoxicating the Male Parent, The
the Offspring, and the
Transmission of the Defects to
Subsequent Generations, CHARLES
R. STocKarp,
Isolation, vs Seear and
Distributi of a rs of
San iego aa a s L.
MICHAEL, 17
JA eren RoserT Tracy, Alpheus
Hyatt and his Principles of Re-
95
JENNINGS, H. 8., rae Growth of
i nimal pe ae
i d, $19; Causes and De-
terminers in Radicall sie Tarl
mental Analysis, eT Doctrines
held as Pra
Jensen, P. B. a ac. a. J.
Valuation of ‘the Sea,
ADAMS, 378
ORDAN, DAVID Srarr,
Ichthyology, 441
Petersen,
Cas. C.
Notes on
INDEX
765
een VERNON LyMAN, Distribu-
and Species- forming of Ecto-
aalr 129
KELLY, JAMES P., Heredity in a
Parthenogenetic Insect, 22
Lacy, Mary G., A agen of the
Results obtained by crossing Zea
d Euchlena ge gag
Schrad, J. pic van der Sto
Left- handedness, aegis eee of,
FRANCIS RAM
T ie hear age
Pattern, PHILIP B. HAD 418
LITTLE, C. C. and J. C. pasate: A
Cross involving Four Pairs of
Mendelian Characters in Mice,
0
BurtoX EDWARD,
76
LIVINGSTON,
in the Living and
, 72
Adaptation
n-livin
Lloyd, R. E., ' The Growth of aE
in the Animal Kingdom S.
JENNINGS, 31
Mallophaga (Biting Bird uae)
NON LYMAN Bo err OGG,
MATHEWS, ALBERT P., Adaptation
from the Point of View of the
Physiologist, 90
yr Y = ED G., The Depths of
” Sir John Murray, 314
?
e Ocea
Mendelian,
“Heredi ty, Factors and
nit harac i GAN,
5; Formulæ, Simplification of, W.
E. Cas 70 Simpli-
fied, E 307;
Formulæ, Simplicity vs de-
quacy, ORGAN, 372;
Factors, Distinct, The Simul
taneous Modification of, R. A.
EMERSON, 633
Mendelism, and Interspecific Hy-
brids, O. F. CooK, 239
METCALF, MayNarD M., Adapta-
tion through Natural Selection
and Orthogenesis, 65
Mice, A Cross involving Four Pairs
of Mendelian Characters, :
LITTLE and J. C. PHILLIPS, 760
MICHAEL, ELLIS L., Vertical Dis-
Chætognatha o of
the San Diego Region, in preian
to the Question of Isola v8.
Coincidence, 17
Microscope Cases, ALBERT M.
REESE, 121
IDDLETON, A. R., Work in Genetic
Problems i in Protozoa at Yale, 434
766
Modification, Simultaneous, of Dis-
tinct "a delian Factors, H A.
EMERS
MoonDIE, Rov L., Some Recent Ad-
vances aa Vertebrate Paleontol-
ogy, 183, 248
MORGAN, H., Factors and Unit
C aracters in Mendelian Hered-
¥, 0; éna H. D., GO0DADE,
Heredi ity of Tricolor in Guinea-
pigs, 321; Simplicity versus eg
quacy in Mendelian Formul
MorGULIsS, Sereius, The Influence
Fasting upon Gro
Mort
tween Tenebris obscuris and
molitor, Ross NE
572; Differential, Pokey: respect k
Seed Weight in the Germination
T pr is
Bis The Depths x
cean, ALFRED G. May
31
ge «esol, in ee BRADLEY
Moo Davis, 116; in Somatic
Cells ‘The Possible ‘Origin of, R.
. EMERSON, 375
Natural, Selection and jes: siti
Adaptation through, MAYNARD M.
65; History Py the
Nine-banded Armadillo of Texas,
Negroes, Spotted, Q. I. SIMPSON
and W. E. CASTLE,
aA, HE B, The Natural His-
tory of a Nine- banded Arma-
illo of Texas, 513
Nicotiana, Teratological Develop-
ment and Heredity, ND E.
H i LA
WHITE, 206; enesis i and Arti-
banded n adi of temas,
Natural History of, H. H. New
MAN, 513
Non- living, and Living, Adapta
eon in, BURTON EDWARD Livine-
ON,
Notes and PERE 183, 248, 314,
8,
Œnothera, Mutations in, 116; Genet-
ical omea br BRAD; DLEY. Moore
Davis, 449,
Dedevicike (ny Fish Remains in
Colorado, T. D. A. COCKERELL,
246
THE AMERICAN NATURALIST
[Vou. XLVII
i rg The Fixation of Char-
in, EDWARD SINNOTT, 705
Pecans s and Natural Selection,
DAES through, MAYNARD M.
METCALF, 65
E N Vertebrate, Roy L.
Moop , 248
PARKE Adaptation in
a nar
Animal Reactions, 83
aoe te Natural and Arti-
ficial, in the Genus Nicotiana,
RICHARD WELLINGTON,
Insect
Parthenogenetic
eredity in, JAM È.
(Aphis),
KELLY,
ARL, RAYMOND, A Contribution
towards an Analysis of the Prob-
le Inbreeding, 577
Pectinatella, Clonal Variation in,
NNIE NCHMAN and C. B.
DAVENPORT, 3
Petersen, C. G. J. and P. B. Jensen,
Valuation of the Sea, CuHas. C.
AMS, 378
PHILLIPS, Joun C., Reciprocal
Crosses between Reeves’s Pheas-
and th ommo
z 76
Physiologist, and Adaptation, AL-
BERT P. MATHEWS,
Plumage Pattern, Barred, in the
White Leghorn, PHILIP "B. Hap-
LEY,
Protozoa, Genetic ‘Pyoblems in, at
Yale, A. R. MIDDLETON, 434
RaMALEY, Francis, Inheritance of
Left-handedness, 730
Reactions, Animal, Adaptation in,
G. H.
PARKER, 83
E, ALB M., = Convenient
Microscope Case, 1
HVEN, ick n
CRYSTAL THOMPSON, The Varia-
y
tions in the Number of Vertebræ
and Ventral Scutes in Two Snakes
of the Genus Regina, 625
San Diego Region, Chætognatha of,
Distribution to Isolation vs. Coin-
a
tality in Respect to, J. AR
Harsis, 683, 739
No. 564]
Sellards, E. H., E. ©. Case and L.
Hussakof, Vertebrate Paleontol-
DIE, 190
ogy,
Sexual Characters, See ondary,
Brown Leghorns,
, The Effect of Fertil-
ra Bhs: Variation in Corn and
Bea
oar feet and Discussion, 116,
229, 307, 372, 429, 508, 572, 63 8,
76
Simplification of Mendelian Form-
ulæ e ee we
SIMPSON, Á; Cas
A Family of Spotted Neg, 56
Birer EDWARD, The Fixation of
Chara ter in Organis
05
egina, Variations
n Number of Vertebre and Ven-
see ioe ge laeg NDER
L THOMPSON, 625
Soniatis Calla, The Possible Origin
of Mutations in, R. A. RSON,
37
Species-forming of Ecto-parasites,
VERNON LYMAN KELLOGG, 129
, The Geologic Wor
of Termites in the Belgian a.
429
STOCKARD, CHARLES R., The Effect
on the 'Offsp pring of 'Intoxicating
the Male Parent and the Trans-
mission of the Defects to Subse-
uent Generations, 64
STOCKBERGER, . A Literary
ote on the ‘Law of Germinal
Continuity, 123
Stok, „J. E. van der, Crossing Zea
Eu china mexicana
e Con
on Multiple. py earme
ACE, FRANK M., The Fourth
eia eae asio Conference,
636
Swine, oe agg Be Inheritance of
N.
WORTH, 257”
Tenebris obscuris and T. molitor,
Differential Mortality oiai.
etween, Ross AIKEN GorTNER,
572
INDEX
of
and pen pa
9
767
Teratological Development in Nico-
Aran and Maaria el Heredity,
LAND E. WH
Tetek reing Work r Belgian
Congo, DONALD STEEL, 429
Texas, Nine-ba aa.
Natural Hiaory OL, L
MAN, 513
THOMPSON, CRYSTAL,
, Armadillo,
H.
and ALEX-
OODALE and
Monin, 321
Unit Character and Factors in
Mendelian Heredity, T. H. Mor-
GAN, 5
Variation, T g Color, Q. I
see tee . E. CASTLE, 50;
in Cor s, J. K. 8
57; Clonal, in Pectinatella, ANNIE
nd C. B. Da
61
PIE a in the Number of Ver-
tebræ and Ventral Scutes in Two
Snakes of the nus Regina,
ALEXANDER G, ‘RUTHVEN and
CrYSTAL THOMPSON, 625
Vertebrate Paleoatslogy, Roy L.
OODIE 248
Viability and. Coupling in Droso-
phila, P. W. Wuirrne, 508
Vitalism, Doctrines held as, H. 8.
JENNINGS, 38
WELLINGTON, RICHARD, Studies of
Natural and Artificial Partheno-
pom in the Genus Nicotiana,
Wexrwonta, Trait N., Inheritance
of Mam in
Duroe Jerse
Swine, O57
HITE, ORLAND e Bearin ng of
Teratological jp ieee in
Nicotiana on Theories of Hered-
ity, "i
WHITIN W., ae Ee and
Gueplisg i in Drosophila, 5
ZON, RAPHAEL, Darwinism in For-
ry, 540
The American Journal of Science
Established by Benjamin Silliman in 1818
The Leading Scientific Journal in the United States
Devoted to the Physical and Natural Sciences, with special reference to
Physics, and Chemistry on the one hand, and to Geology and Mineralogy
on the other.
Editor: EDWARD S. DANA
ORS me: Professor GEORGE L, GOODALE, JOHN TROWBRIDGE, W. G. FARLOW and WM. M. DAVIS
f Cambridge; Professors A. E. VERRILL, HENRY S. WILLIAMS and L. V. PIRSSON, of iya
Haven; Professor JOSEPH S. AIMES, of Baltimore ; MR. J. S. DILLER, of Washin
Two volumes annually, in monthly numbers of about 80 pages each.
This Journal ended its first series of 50 volumes as a quarterly in 1845; its second
series of 50 volumes as a two-monthly in 1870; its third series as a monthly ended Dec-
ember, 1895. A Fourth Series commenced in 1896.
Subscription price, $6 per year or 50 cents a number, postage prepaid in the United States
$6.25 to Canada ; $6,40 to Countries in the Postal Union. Back numbers at reduced prices.
seap-Ten-Volume Indexes, Vols. I-X XI-XX, fourth series, price one dollar. Address
The American Journal of Science
New Haven, Conn.
University Control
By J. MoKxen Carrey, Professor of Psychology in Columbia University
Together with a series of Two Hundred and Ninety-nine Unsigned Letters by Leading Men of Science
holding Academic Positions and Articles by Josera Jastzow, Gmorem T. Lapp, Jonn J. Srsvewson, J. E.
Crzicuron, J. MoKzen CATTELL, Gmoram M. STRATTON, Srewart Paros, Jon Jay CHAPMAN, Jamns P.
Munrom and Jacos Goutp SCHURMAN.
Š Poe se variety of questions concerning general university administration are dealt with in an original and
elpful way.— Nature
These quo otations and examples are taken from Professor Cattell’s informed and thorough discussion of
subject of university control, a subject upon which he has had much to say of late, — occasion for caustie
ticism of existing Ameri ap RATAR and standing as the mon ar of an academic democracy and a teach-
ing profession upon which a m enter without forfeiting his self encore —The Dial.
Sentences and paragraphs aut betoken the expert, highly-trained mind, the suggestions that come to re-
fresh a. d tell us that a new day is about to dawn in educational oe Boston Evening Transcript.
SCIENCE AND EDUCATION
A series of volumes for the promotion of scientific research and educational progress
VOLUME I. The Foundations of EER By H. Pornoaré. Containing the au English translation
by Guorcs Bruce Hatsrep “Science and. Hypothesis,” “The Value of Science,” and “Science
and Method.” $ Price, $3.00 net
VOLUME II. Medical Research and Education. By Riceanp M. Pmarom, Wroutam H. Weron, W.H.
Howzun, Franxuın P. Maru, Lewsutys F. Baexer, CmarLes 8, MrNor, W. B. Cannon, W. T.
CoUNcILMAN, TuroBaLD Smirre, G. N. Srmwaerr, C. M. Jacrson, E. P. Lron, Jauss B. Harnor, JONN
ws Dopson, C. R. Barpusn, W. Orta, S. J. Muurzer, Jamas Ewrxo, W. W. Kenn, Hewsr H. Donan-
N, Cunistian A. Herrer, and Haner P. Bowprros. Price, $3.00 net.
iais III. University Control. Wow Ready. Pages +484. Price, $3.00 net.
GARRISON, N, Y. THE SCIENCE PRESS LANCASTER, PA.
SUB-STATION 84, NEW YORK CITY
The American Naturalist
A Monthly a established in 1867, Devoted >- the Advancement of the oe Sciences
actors o
Special Reference to the F.
f Organic Evolution and Her
CONTENTS OF THE JUNE NUMBER
I. — of Tricolor in Guinea-pigs. n H. D,
e and Professor T. H. Di
TX, Anse and Determiners in Radically Experi-
mental Analysis. Professor H. S. Jennings.
OL g e Variation in Pectinatella. Annie P.
Henchman and Dr., C. B. Davenport
I¥. Shorter Articles and Discussion : Simplieity
Versus mies gd in Mendelian Formuls,
Professor T. H. Morgan. The ene
of p iann in Somatic Cells. Professor
V, Notes are Literature : Valuation of the Bea.
Professor Chas. C. Adams.
CONTENTS OF THE JULY NUMBER
Doctrines held as Vitalism. Professor H. S, Jennings.
The Presence of the Barred Plumage Pattern in the
White Leghorn Breed of Fowls. Dr. Philip B.
Hadley.
Shorter Articles and pees The Geologic Wor
of Termites in the Belgian Congo. Donald has
Notes and E Work in E Problems in
Protozoa at Yale. Professo . R. Middleton.
ise on pers yology. Pai David Starr
Jerd
CONTENTS OF THE AUGUST NUMBER
Genetical Studies on Oenothera. IV. Dr. Bradley
oore
.
2 Des a at + Weeti
upon Growth. Dr. Sergius Morgulis,
Cambrian Holothurians. Austin H., Clark.
Shorter Articles and Discussion: Viability and sear §
D
rossing zes EA L. and E eet
mexicana Schrad, Mary
CONTENTS OF THE SEPTEMBER NUMBER
The Natural History of the Nine-banded Armadillo
of Texas. Professor H. H. Newman.
Genetical Studies on Oenothera. IV. Dr. Bradley
Da =
Darwinism in Forestry. Dr. Raphael Zon.
Notes on a Differential Mortality observed between
Tenebro obscuris and T. molitor. Dr. Ross Aiken
Gortner.
CONTENTS OF THE OCTOBER NUMBER
Contribution towards an Analysis of ee Problem
of Inbreeding. Dr. Raymond Pear
eae Sa AN of Coat Colorin Horses. Professor
saute "Variations in the Numberof Vertebræ and Ven-
tes in Two Snakes of the Genus Regina.
bea USEN exander G. Ruthven and Crystal
Shorter nee and Reports: The Simultaneous
Modification of Distinct Mendelian Factors: Pro-
fessor R. A. Emerson. . The Fourth 3h Internationa]
Genetic Conference : “Dr. Frank M. Surf
CONTENTS OF THE NOVEMBER NUMBER
The Effect on the ee of Intoxieating the Male
Parent and the Transmission of the Defects to
Subseque SERCO Dr. Charles R. Stockard.
Supplementary Studies on the eee ace —
with respect to Seed We he Germinatio
of Garden Beans, Dr. J. pict a
Shorter Articles and Discussion: Reeip rocal Cross
between es Pheasant and th
Ringneck Pheasant producing Unlike Hybrids.
John C. Phillips.
Single Number 40 Cents
The NATURALIST will be sent to new subscribers for four months for One
THE SCIENCE PRESS
Sub-Station 84: NEW YORK Lancaster,
Garrison, N. Y.
Yearly Subscription, $4.00
Dollar